P4K Maintenance And Administration Manual Perception 4000 Mainteinance & R2.0 PERCEPTION4000 R2

User Manual: Perception 4000 Mainteinance & Administration Manual R2.0 www.TelecomUserGuides.com Access User Guides, Manuals and Brochures

Open the PDF directly: View PDF PDF.
Page Count: 582

DownloadP4K Maintenance And Administration Manual Perception 4000 Mainteinance & R2.0 PERCEPTION4000 R2
Open PDF In BrowserView PDF
PERCEPTION 4000

PERCEPTION 4000
MAINTENANCE & ADMINISTRATION MANUAL
Release 2.0

© COPYRIGHT 1993 TOSHIBA AMERICA INFORMATION SYSTEMS, INC.
All rights reserved. No part of this manual may be reproduced in any form or by any means — graphic,
electronic, or mechanical, including recording, taping, photocopying, or the use of information retrieval
systems — without express written permission of the publisher of this material.

P4K R2 M&A ____________
Serial Number

Issue 2, December 1993
SECTION 4000-014-000
Item Number: P 4 K - M A - M T / A D M R 2
4047004

PERCEPTION 4000

TRADEMARKS
The following trademarks are used in this document:
■ PERCEPTION®: registered trademark of Toshiba America Information Systems, Inc.
■ ExpressWriter, P351, and PS321: trademarks of Toshiba America Information Systems, Inc.
■ IBM and Proprinter: registered trademarks of International Business Machines Corporation

In accordance with U.S. Copyright Law, a license may be required from the American Society of Composers,
Authors and Publishers, or other similar organization, if radio or television broadcasts are used for the Music-onHold feature of this telecommunications system. Toshiba America Information Systems, Inc. disclaims any liability
arising out of the failure to obtain such a license.
Certain state and federal laws regulate the monitoring of calls without the knowledge of parties involved. Prior to
performing any method of call monitoring, any such regulations should be identified and complied with. Toshiba
America Information Systems, Inc. disclaims any liability arising out of the failure to comply with such regulations.
Toshiba America Information Systems, Inc. reserves the right to change any of this information including, but not
limited to, product characteristics and operating specifications without prior notice.

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000

Table of Contents
PERCEPTION 4000

TABLE OF CONTENTS
SUBJECT

INTRODUCTION
General Description ..........................................................................................................
Purpose ............................................................................................................................
Organization .....................................................................................................................
How to Use This Manual...................................................................................................
Conventions Used in the Manual..................................................................................

PAGE
vii
vii
vii
vii
viii

CHAPTER 1
OPERATION .........................................................................................................................
Security Levels .................................................................................................................
Initiating an M&A Session.................................................................................................
Login.............................................................................................................................
Change Log..................................................................................................................
On-line Help......................................................................................................................
Command Category .....................................................................................................
MMI Tutorial..................................................................................................................
System Messages ........................................................................................................
Control Keys .................................................................................................................
Command Invocation ........................................................................................................
Predefined Keys................................................................................................................
Formatting Keys ...........................................................................................................
Control Keys .................................................................................................................
Field Parameter Input .......................................................................................................
Keyword........................................................................................................................
Decimal ........................................................................................................................
Decimal with Fixed Length ...........................................................................................
Hexadecimal.................................................................................................................
Text ...............................................................................................................................
Dialing Digits ................................................................................................................
Dialing Digits Plus * and # ............................................................................................
DN Type........................................................................................................................
EQ Type........................................................................................................................
Range Indicator ............................................................................................................
Increment Indicator.......................................................................................................
Scope Indicator ............................................................................................................
Field Indicator...............................................................................................................
Undefined Data Indicator..............................................................................................
Command Prompt ........................................................................................................
Moving Between Command Levels ..................................................................................
Row/Field Operation Format.............................................................................................
Data Entry Mode...............................................................................................................
Setup Mode ......................................................................................................................
Ranges .........................................................................................................................
Fixed Values .................................................................................................................
Interactive Mode ...........................................................................................................
Add Operation...................................................................................................................
Delete Operation...............................................................................................................
Modify Operation ..............................................................................................................
Display Operation .............................................................................................................
Help Operation..................................................................................................................

1-1
1-1
1-1
1-1
1-2
1-2
1-2
1-2
1-3
1-3
1-3
1-4
1-4
1-8
1-9
1-9
1-10
1-10
1-10
1-10
1-10
1-10
1-10
1-11
1-11
1-11
1-12
1-13
1-13
1-13
1-14
1-14
1-16
1-17
1-17
1-18
1-19
1-20
1-21
1-22
1-24
1-24

i

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000

PERCEPTION 4000

TABLE OF CONTENTS
SUBJECT

PAGE

CHAPTER 1
OPERATION (continued)
Help Hierarchy Structure ..............................................................................................
Terminating an M&A Session ...........................................................................................

1-25
1-28

EXAMPLES...........................................................................................................................
Station Assignment (CMD 330) ........................................................................................
Operations....................................................................................................................
Parameters ...................................................................................................................
Examples of ADD Operations ......................................................................................
Examples of DELETE Operations ................................................................................
Examples of MODIFY Operations ................................................................................
Examples of DISPLAY Operations ...............................................................................
How to Use the  Key .........................................................................................
How to Use the  Command ................................................................
HELP Examples ...........................................................................................................
COMMAND Selection Level .....................................................................................
OPERATION Selection Level ...................................................................................
PARAMETER Selection Level ..................................................................................

2-1
2-1
2-2
2-3
2-7
2-10
2-13
2-15
2-19
2-22
2-22
2-22
2-25
2-30

COMMANDS.........................................................................................................................
Command Format.............................................................................................................
Command Name (Numeric ID)....................................................................................
Prerequisite Commands...............................................................................................
Operations....................................................................................................................
Parameters ...................................................................................................................
System Error Messages ...............................................................................................
Comments ....................................................................................................................
Related Commands......................................................................................................
Command Notations .........................................................................................................
Maintenance & Administration Commands.......................................................................
Account Code Assignment
(CMD 348)..................................
ACD Agent Assignment
(CMD 356)..................................
ACD Group Assignment
(CMD 355)..................................
ACD Group Parameter Assignment
(CMD 357)..................................
ACD Status Display and Remote Logout
(CMD 358)..................................
Alarm/Fault Display and Reset
(CMD 160)..................................
Announcement Pattern Assignment
(CMD 353)..................................
Area Code Restriction Tables
(CMD 341)..................................
Area/Office Code Restriction Tables
(CMD 339)..................................
Attendant Feature Key Assignment
(CMD 371)..................................
Attendant Group Assignment
(CMD 372)..................................
Attendant Incoming Call Priority Assignment
(CMD 373)..................................
Attendant Password Assignment
(CMD 375)..................................
Attendant Position Assignment
(CMD 370)..................................
Authorization Code Assignment
(CMD 349)..................................
Autodial Number Display
(CMD 324)..................................
Call Forwarding Destination Display
(CMD 325)..................................

3-1
3-1
3-1
3-1
3-1
3-1
3-1
3-2
3-2
3-2
3-2
3-5
3-7
3-11
3-17
3-21
3-25
3-32
3-38
3-41
3-44
3-48
3-55
3-58
3-61
3-68
3-72
3-76

CHAPTER 2

CHAPTER 3

ii

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000

PERCEPTION 4000

TABLE OF CONTENTS
SUBJECT

PAGE

CHAPTER 3
COMMANDS (continued)
Call Pickup Group Assignment
Canned Text/Advisory Message Creation
Class of Service Assignment
Clock Provider Assignment
Clock Reset
Common Carrier Assignment
Coordinated Numbering Plan Assignment
Country Code Assignment
Country Code Restriction Tables
Crash Dump Display
Data Hunting Assignment
Data Interface Parameter Assignment
Data Station Assignment
Data Station Parameter Assignment
Data Structure Display
Data Structure Display 2
Destination Restriction Level Assignment
Device Service Status
Dialing Definition
Dictation Group/Machine Assignment
DID/CCSA/DNIS ACD Parameter Assignment
DID/CCSA/DNIS DISA LDN Assignment
DID/CCSA/DNIS LDN Assignment
DID/CCSA/DNIS Trunk Group Assignment
Digital Carrier Channel Assignment
Disk File Manipulation
DTMF Receiver Assignment
Emergency Call Destination Assignment
Exception Restriction Tables
Facility Restriction Level Profile Assignment
File Consolidation
File Dump
Forced Account Code Toll-free Tables
Group Speed Calling List Assignment
Group Speed Calling Membership Assignment
High Usage Data Destination Assignment
I/O Port Assignment
I/O Port Configuration Assignment
Initiate Switchover
Interchangeable Office Code Table
Intercom Group Member Display
Internal Call Alternate Routing Assignment
ISDN Channel Group Assignment
ISDN Channel Group Hunting Assignment
ISDN IPRC and IPRI Card Assignment
ISDN Service Min/Max Assignment
ISDN Trunk Group Parameter Assignment
LCR Area Code Routing Assignment

(CMD 346)..................................
(CMD 328)..................................
(CMD 334)..................................
(CMD 417)..................................
(CMD 121)..................................
(CMD 344)..................................
(CMD 303)..................................
(CMD 335)..................................
(CMD 338)..................................
(CMD 164)..................................
(CMD 366)..................................
(CMD 361)..................................
(CMD 360)..................................
(CMD 362)..................................
(CMD 167)..................................
(CMD 169)..................................
(CMD 337)..................................
(CMD 208)..................................
(CMD 317)..................................
(CMD 401)..................................
(CMD 359)..................................
(CMD 315)..................................
(CMD 316)..................................
(CMD 314)..................................
(CMD 413)..................................
(CMD 152)..................................
(CMD 416)..................................
(CMD 345)..................................
(CMD 340)..................................
(CMD 387)..................................
(CMD 153)..................................
(CMD 151)..................................
(CMD 352)..................................
(CMD 351)..................................
(CMD 350)..................................
(CMD 368)..................................
(CMD 415)..................................
(CMD 414)..................................
(CMD 102)..................................
(CMD 318)..................................
(CMD 333)..................................
(CMD 374)..................................
(CMD 423)..................................
(CMD 424)..................................
(CMD 422)..................................
(CMD 425)..................................
(CMD 421)..................................
(CMD 381)..................................

3-79
3-82
3-85
3-89
3-91
3-95
3-97
3-99
3-101
3-104
3-106
3-109
3-115
3-122
3-127
3-130
3-132
3-135
3-140
3-144
3-147
3-150
3-153
3-158
3-163
3-169
3-176
3-178
3-181
3-184
3-186
3-188
3-190
3-193
3-195
3-198
3-200
3-203
3-207
3-209
3-212
3-214
3-217
3-221
3-224
3-229
3-234
3-237

iii

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000

PERCEPTION 4000

TABLE OF CONTENTS
SUBJECT

PAGE

CHAPTER 3
COMMANDS (continued)
LCR Area/Office Code Routing Assignment
LCR Country Code Routing Assignment
LCR Digit Translation Profile Assignment
LCR Routing Table Assignment
LCR Special Routing Assignment
LCR/Authorization TZ Change Assignment
Label Print
Logical Line Call Forward Assignment
M&A Security Level and Access Assignment
Memory Test
Miscellaneous Device Assignment
Modem Pool Assignment
Name Dialing Assignment
Night Bell Assignment
Numbering Plan Assignment
Private/Hotline Assignments
Redundancy Selection Assignment
SMDR Configuration Assignment
Secondary Line Appearances Display
Station Assignment
Station Feature Key Assignment
Station Feature Key Pattern Assignment
Station Hunting Assignment
Station-Level Parameter Assignment
System DISA Security Code Assignment
System Holiday Assignment
System Inventory
System Number Summary
System Option Flag Assignment
System Speed Calling Assignment
System Timer Assignment
T-1 Clock Provider Selection Assignment
Terminal Maintenance
Time Activated Command Programming
Time Zone Assignment
Timeout Routing Destination Assignment
Trace Setup
Traffic Measurement Object Assignment
Traffic Measurement Setup Assignment
Traffic Measurement Time Zone Assignment
Trunk Assignment
Trunk Group Assignment
Trunk Group Parameter Assignment
Trunk Group Routing Assignment
Trunk Group Toll-free Tables
Trunk Hunting Assignment
Trunk PP Parameter Change
Trunk Routing Assignment
Trunk-to-Trunk Connection Assignment

iv

(CMD 382)..................................
(CMD 380)..................................
(CMD 386)..................................
(CMD 383)..................................
(CMD 384)..................................
(CMD 343)..................................
(CMD 312)..................................
(CMD 322)..................................
(CMD 403)..................................
(CMD 144)..................................
(CMD 400)..................................
(CMD 347)..................................
(CMD 367)..................................
(CMD 405)..................................
(CMD 300)..................................
(CMD 332)..................................
(CMD 410)..................................
(CMD 409)..................................
(CMD 327)..................................
(CMD 330)..................................
(CMD 331)..................................
(CMD 320)..................................
(CMD 342)..................................
(CMD 329)..................................
(CMD 321)..................................
(CMD 404)..................................
(CMD 210)..................................
(CMD 326)..................................
(CMD 408)..................................
(CMD 402)..................................
(CMD 407)..................................
(CMD 412)..................................
(CMD 206)..................................
(CMD 110)..................................
(CMD 336)..................................
(CMD 323)..................................
(CMD 168)..................................
(CMD 902)..................................
(CMD 900)..................................
(CMD 901)..................................
(CMD 313)..................................
(CMD 310)..................................
(CMD 420)..................................
(CMD 307)..................................
(CMD 311)..................................
(CMD 309)..................................
(CMD 364)..................................
(CMD 308)..................................
(CMD 305)..................................

3-239
3-242
3-245
3-249
3-254
3-257
3-260
3-262
3-264
3-267
3-269
3-272
3-277
3-280
3-283
3-289
3-293
3-295
3-298
3-301
3-312
3-322
3-328
3-333
3-338
3-341
3-344
3-350
3-354
3-359
3-362
3-367
3-369
3-377
3-381
3-385
3-387
3-391
3-394
3-397
3-400
3-406
3-414
3-418
3-422
3-425
3-428
3-431
3-434

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000

PERCEPTION 4000

TABLE OF CONTENTS
SUBJECT

PAGE

CHAPTER 3
COMMANDS (continued)
UCD Group Assignment
UNP Routing Assignment
Uniform Numbering Plan Assignment
Voice Paging/Code Call Assignment

(CMD 354)..................................
(CMD 302)..................................
(CMD 301)..................................
(CMD 319)..................................

3-438
3-442
3-445
3-448

CHAPTER 4
ERROR AND INFORMATION MESSAGES..........................................................................
Message Format...............................................................................................................
Common Error Messages.................................................................................................
Individual Command Error Messages...............................................................................

4-1
4-1
4-1
4-4

APPENDIX A
FIELD PARAMETER INPUT CHARACTERS ..........................................................

Appendix A-1

APPENDIX B
MAINTENANCE & ADMINISTRATION COMMANDS..............................................

Appendix B-1

APPENDIX C
MAINTENANCE & ADMINISTRATION FEATURES ................................................

Appendix C-1

APPENDIX D
LINE PREFERENCE FIELD (PREF) (CMD 331).....................................................

Appendix D-1

GLOSSARY...................................................................................................................................

Glossary-1

INDEX............................................................................................................................................

Index-1

FIGURES
FIGURE
1-1
1-2
1-3
1-4
1-5
1-6
1-7
1-8
1-9
1-10
1-11
1-12
1-13
1-14
1-15
1-16
1-17

TITLE
Command Header.................................................................................................................
Hierarchy Levels....................................................................................................................
ESCAPE Key Loop Operation...............................................................................................
Range Indicator.....................................................................................................................
Increment Indicator ...............................................................................................................
Scope Indicator .....................................................................................................................
Undefined Data Indicator ......................................................................................................
Command Prompt ................................................................................................................
Key Parameters.....................................................................................................................
Example of Data Entry/Setup Mode......................................................................................
Example of  Display ....................................................................................
Example of Data Entry Mode ................................................................................................
Use of Ranges ......................................................................................................................
Fixed Values - ADD Operation ..............................................................................................
Fixed Values - DISPLAY Operation.......................................................................................
Interactive Mode (1) ..............................................................................................................
Interactive Mode (2) ..............................................................................................................

PAGE
1-4
1-5
1-6
1-11
1-12
1-12
1-13
1-13
1-14
1-15
1-16
1-16
1-18
1-18
1-19
1-19
1-20

v

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000

PERCEPTION 4000
FIGURE
1-18
1-19
1-20
1-21
1-22
1-23
1-24
1-25
1-26
1-27
1-28
2-1
2-2
2-3
2-4
2-5
2-6
2-7
2-8
2-9
2-10
2-11
2-12
2-13
2-14
2-15
2-16
2-17
2-18
2-19
2-20
2-21
2-22
2-23
2-24
2-25
2-26
2-27
2-28
2-29
2-30
2-31
2-32
2-33
2-34
2-35
3-1
3-1a
3-2

vi

TABLE OF CONTENTS
TITLE

ADD Operation......................................................................................................................
ADD Confirmation .................................................................................................................
DELETE Operation - Busy Options.......................................................................................
DELETE Confirmation...........................................................................................................
MODIFY Operation - Busy Options.......................................................................................
MODIFY Operation - Wait Options........................................................................................
DISPLAY Operation ..............................................................................................................
Release, Version, Date .........................................................................................................
HELP Menu, Command Level...............................................................................................
HELP Menu, Operation Level ...............................................................................................
HELP Screen, Row/Field Level .............................................................................................
ADD Operation - Data Entry Mode .......................................................................................
ADD Operation - Setup Mode with Confirmation ..................................................................
ADD Operation - Setup Mode without Confirmation .............................................................
ADD Operation - Setup Mode - Individual Entries ................................................................
DELETE Operation - Data Entry Mode .................................................................................
DELETE Operation - Setup Mode.........................................................................................
DELETE Operation - Setup Mode - Forced Idle....................................................................
MODIFY Operation - Data Entry Mode .................................................................................
MODIFY Operation - Setup Mode (1) ...................................................................................
MODIFY Operation - Setup Mode (2) ...................................................................................
DISPLAY Operation - Complete Database List.....................................................................
DISPLAY Operation - Specific Attributes Selected ...............................................................
DISPLAY Operation - Ranges/Fixed Values (1) ...................................................................
DISPLAY Operation - Ranges/Fixed Values (2) ....................................................................
DISPLAY Operation - Subset of Text Entry ..........................................................................
 Key - Data Entry Mode .............................................................................................
 Key - MODIFY Operation, Setup Mode ....................................................................
 Key - DELETE Operation, Setup Mode ....................................................................
 Operation - Data Entry Mode.....................................................................
 Operation - Setup Mode ............................................................................
Entry into HELP Operation - Command Level ......................................................................
HELP Menu - Command Level .............................................................................................
Command Categories ...........................................................................................................
List of Specific Commands ...................................................................................................
Specific Command Main Menu .............................................................................................
General Command Information.............................................................................................
Exit from HELP Operation.....................................................................................................
Entry into HELP Operation - Operation Level .......................................................................
Command Operations Menu .................................................................................................
MODIFY Operation Information ............................................................................................
Field Parameter Menus.........................................................................................................
MODIFY Operation - Field Parameter Menu.........................................................................
Field Parameter Description..................................................................................................
Stepping Up the Hierarchy Levels.........................................................................................
Parameter Level HELP Screen .............................................................................................
Previous/Current Buffers.......................................................................................................
Key Positions.........................................................................................................................
Key Positions - PERCEPTION 4000 Digital Telephones.......................................................

PAGE
1-20
1-21
1-21
1-22
1-23
1-23
1-24
1-25
1-26
1-27
1-27
2-8
2-8
2-9
2-10
2-11
2-12
2-12
2-13
2-14
2-15
2-16
2-17
2-17
2-18
2-18
2-19
2-20
2-21
2-22
2-22
2-23
2-23
2-23
2-24
2-24
2-25
2-25
2-25
2-26
2-26
2-27
2-28
2-28
2-29
2-30
3-31
3-74
3-315

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000

PERCEPTION 4000
FIGURE
3-3
3-4

TABLE OF CONTENTS
TITLE

Key Positions - Electronic and DKT Digital Telephones ........................................................
Key Positions - AD1, AD2 Devices........................................................................................

PAGE
3-316
3-317

vii

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000

PERCEPTION 4000

This page left blank intentionally

viii

Introduction
PERCEPTION 4000

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000

INTRODUCTION

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
The PERCEPTION 4000 system provides various Maintenance and Administration (M&A) commands. These
commands print out notification on potential or actual component failures, system usage reports, database
reports, and diagnostic reports. The commands also allow you access to database attributes and system control
parameters for modification purposes. A local or remote maintenance port is used to input the commands.
The Man-Machine Interface (MMI) referred to in this document is the means by which the user interacts with the
M&A console. Through this interaction, you may define facility access, feature access, and terminal attributes for
voice stations, data stations, attendant consoles, and trunks. In addition, you may monitor system features,
reports, and alarm conditions.
This manual assumes that the M&A command user has a good working knowledge of telecommunications terms,
technology, and the needs of end users. We recommend that you attend and successfully complete one of the
courses on the PERCEPTION 4000 product line, at the technical level, prior to performing maintenance or
administrative operations.

PURPOSE
This manual is meant to help maintenance and administrative personnel gain an understanding of the
PERCEPTION 4000 M&A commands used for defining system features and hardware.
For more information regarding your system hardware or interfacing with the PERCEPTION 4000 PBX system,
refer to the PERCEPTION 4000 Database Programming Manual, Installation and Troubleshooting Manual,
Installation Provisioning Manual, and Installation Site Guide.

ORGANIZATION
This manual is divided into four main sections. The first section provides an overview of the Man-Machine
Interface operation. Step-by-step instructions are provided, detailing how to initiate an M&A session, use the online help feature, and invoke M&A commands. Section two shows several examples of M&A operations to assist
you in understanding MMI operation. The third section lists and describes the M&A commands. Section four lists
all system error and information messages.
Appendices provide additional information such as listings of valid field parameters, and listings of commands,
both by their ASCII character abbreviations, and their their M&A feature numbers.

HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
To understand the operation of the M&A console, we recommend that you read through Chapter 1. In this section,
procedures show you how to:
■
■
■
■
■

Initiate an M&A session
Login to the system
Invoke commands
Use formatting and control keys
Move between command levels

ix

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000

PERCEPTION 4000
■
■
■
■

INTRODUCTION

Access on-line help menus
Enter data in the Data Entry, Setup, and Interactive modes
Perform ADD, DELETE, MODIFY, and DISPLAY operations
Terminate an M&A session

Once you are familiar with MMI and the console operation, Chapter 2 reinforces what you have learned. After
reviewing the sample operations, you will be ready to proceed with actual command interaction.

CONVENTIONS USED IN THE MANUAL
In the chapters that follow, several types of notation have been used to differentiate between operations, fields,
data entry, and keys.
■

Maintenance and administration operations appear in all capital letters:
ADD, DELETE, MODIFY, DISPLAY

■

Fields, which appear in Data Entry and Setup modes, are printed with quotation marks around them in
descriptive text:
The "EQUIP #" field....
or
"AUTH CODE" is a required field.

■

Field parameters, or data input, are shown bolded and capitalized:
When set to YES, an audible alarm goes off...
or
When ASY is entered .....

■

Bolded, capitalized words enclosed in the less than (<) and greater than (>) signs signify keys on the M&A
console keyboard:




x

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000

Chapter 1
PERCEPTION 4000

OPERATION

SECURITY LEVELS
PERCEPTION 4000 Maintenance and Administration (M&A) has four
different levels of security:
■
■
■
■

Manufacturer (Toshiba)
Vendor/distributor
End-user
Tenant levels

Access to each operational level is determined by an M&A user's security
password. A separate security password can be assigned to each level.
Each command in the M&A system is assigned to a particular category of
information on one of the four security levels.
An M&A user can access any M&A commands that are assigned to his/her
level of security, as well as those commands that are available to any
lower security levels. Access to specific operations within commands can
also be defined. For example, one M&A user may be allowed to modify
command data, while another M&A user may only be allowed to display
existing information.
The privilege hierarchy follows the order above: Toshiba personnel have
the most capabilities, while tenants have the least. Higher privilege levels
may modify/display the security codes of any level below them.

1. Press .

INITIATING AN M&A SESSION
The  key acts as an "enter information" control and is pressed
to initiate an M&A session. This key is also pressed after each command
or user response to a prompt to indicate the end of data input. All keys
other than the  key are ignored while the M&A system is idle.
LOGIN

1. After pressing the 
key, the message, "SECURITY
CODE=", displays.
2. Enter your security code and
press . The prompt
"COMMAND=" displays.

Before accessing M&A commands, you must login to the system with an
assigned security code, or "password". After pressing the  key
to initiate an M&A session, the screen displays the message, "SECURITY
CODE=". Type in your password. Note that the cursor does not move, nor
is the password displayed on the screen.
If an invalid password is entered, an error message displays. After a third
unsuccessful attempt to login, the M&A system ignores input from the
requesting device for a period of three minutes. This measure is taken to
prevent an unauthorized user from breaking the security codes to gain
access to the system.

1-1

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000

PERCEPTION 4000

OPERATION
CHANGE LOG
The Change Log file records all modifications made to the system at the
maintenance console, and all feature registrations such as Call Forwarding
destinations, Do Not Disturb, etc. These modifications are collected into a
temporary buffer. Contents of the buffer are saved into a Change Log file
when the buffer becomes full, when the day changes (i.e., midnight of
each day), or when a logout from an M&A session occurs, either from a
logout command or when the M&A terminal times out due to inactivity.
When the Change Log file reaches 80 to 85 percent capacity, a warning
message appears on the maintenance console alerting the system
administrator of the condition. If 90 percent capacity is reached, a warning
message is printed for every "buffer-to-file" movement. These messages
allow the administrator to make plans to perform a file consolidation, which
permanently records all of the changes and modifications.
Upon performing a file consolidation, the Change Log file is written to the
system disk for permanent storage, and then cleared. At the next system
start-up, the modified database on the system disk is loaded into memory
and the Change Log file is ready to record any new changes.

ON-LINE HELP
1. Press .

If assistance is required while in an M&A session, press the “?” (SHIFT-/)
key. The present level of operation determines what appears on the
display screen. The first level of operation, the Command Level, provides
four different categories of assistance:
■
■
■
■

Command Category
MMI Tutorial
System Messages
Control Keys

COMMAND CATEGORY
To find information on a specific command, select the Command Category
option. A list of available categories based on your security level displays
on the screen. This display is in the form of a menu. Select a category and
the system produces a “Command List.” After choosing a command, a
menu displays offering general information or specific operational
information. The menu hierarchy continues with the Operation Level and
finally to specific fields within each operation.
MMI TUTORIAL
This category gives a brief explanation of M&A commands.
SYSTEM MESSAGES

1-2

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000

PERCEPTION 4000

OPERATION

The system provides error and information messages during an M&A
session. The System Messages category explains the format used for
these messages.
CONTROL KEYS
The M&A program provides control key operation to perform various
functions, such as  to delete a field. The Control Keys
Help option lists the control sequences and their functions.
Refer to the "HELP Operation" section later in this chapter for more
detailed information on the many levels of assistance available to you.

COMMAND INVOCATION
1. "COMMAND=" XXXXXX...
2. Press .

To invoke a command, respond to the "COMMAND=" prompt with the
appropriate command identifier, then press the  key. The
command identifier is a multi-key input that consists of a three-digit
identifier or a command keyword. As an example, the I/O Port Assignment
command is identified as either 415 or as I/O_PORT_ASSIGN.
Using a Numeric ID
COMMAND=415 
COMMAND NAME: I/O_PORT_ASSIGN
OPERATION=
Using a Command Keyword
COMMAND=I/O_PORT_ASSIGN 
COMMAND NUMBER: 415
OPERATION=
If a command keyword is used, only the characters that make the keyword
unique are required. Since the keyword for command 414 (I/O Port
Configuration Assignment) is I/O_PORT_CONFIG, when entering this
command, I/O_PORT_C must be entered to differentiate it from
I/O_PORT_A(SSIGN).
The identifier cannot be used as part of any other input and must be
terminated with the  key. A command identifier is available at
the "COMMAND=" prompt level only.
The system verifies the level of access for the requested command and, if
permitted, accesses the command and prompts you for the operation type:
"OPERATION=". After entering the operation to be performed, the system
again checks the access level. If you are permitted READ_ONLY access,
then DISPLAY and ? (HELP) will be the only operations available.
Standard operations include:

1-3

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000

PERCEPTION 4000

OPERATION

ADD
DELETE
MODIFY
DISPLAY
? (HELP)
Additional operations exist for special diagnostic and maintenance
commands:
ALARMS
BACKUP
RESTORE
BUSY
IDLE
COMPARE
COPY
COUNTS

CREATE
ENABLE
DISABLE
FORMAT
FREE
INIT (Initialize)
INS (In Service)
OOS (Out-of-Service)

INSTALL
REMOVE
PASSWORD
RESET
SETUP
SWAP
SWITCH

Once you have entered an operation keyword, the system displays a
command header, which is comprised of a set of fields that are separated
by a “|” symbol. These fields form columns in which the data is to be
entered. Figure 1-1 shows the command header for the Area Code
Restriction command.
Figure 1-1

TRGN

DRL

TYPE

AC

AC

AC

AC

AC

...

Command Header
The command header also acts as a guide and prompts you as to what
information is expected in each field.

PREDEFINED KEYS
Predefined keys are provided to give you added power. These keys
include Formatting Keys and Control Keys.
FORMATTING KEYS
Formatting keys consist of either a single key, (i.e., ) or a
combination of keystrokes, (i.e.,). These keys are used to:
■ Move between command input fields.
■ Correct the input line.
■ Abort long printouts/displays.
■ Move between operations.
■ Terminate a data input line.
The following paragraphs describe the formatting keys used in the

1-4

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000

PERCEPTION 4000

OPERATION
implementation of PERCEPTION 4000 M&A commands.
Carriage Return
, , or  is a single key entry used to indicate
the end of data input and to automatically execute a command. It is
available at all levels of the command hierarchy.
Escape
 is a multi-key entry which consists of the keys  on a
standard keyboard.  is used to abort from the current hierarchy
level to the next level up, or to cancel (correct) the current line of input. For
example, during a DISPLAY operation,  is used to abort the display
of a large set of data (i.e., halt the printout of a list of items).
NOTE: An  key on standard keyboards does not equate to an
escape operation.
The system's hierarchy levels are illustrated in the following figure.

COMMAND LEVEL

OPERATION LEVEL

DATA ENTRY MODE

SETUP MODE

Figure 1-2
Hierarchy Levels
An exception to this hierarchical order is the DISPLAY command, which
moves directly from the Operation level to Setup mode, thereby bypassing
Data Entry mode. Discussion of Data Entry and Setup modes can be
found later in this chapter.
The  key is available at all levels of the command hierarchy except
at the Command Level.
Pressing the  key while the cursor is at the beginning of a 'clear
line' moves you back to the previous level of operation. A 'clear line' occurs
after each hierarchical prompt or when the cursor is at the far left field in
Data Entry and Setup modes. If  is entered in Data Entry or Setup
mode, an informational message displays indicating that the current input
line was aborted.
Note that the system displays a message indicating what the current

1-5

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000

PERCEPTION 4000

OPERATION
hierarchical level is:
COMMAND=
OPERATION=
DATA ENTRY MODE:
SETUP MODE:
Certain rules apply to use of the  key. Rules 1 and 2 apply to
escapes within loop fields; Rule 3 applies at all times; and Rule 4 applies
only when the resource is unavailable for modification/removal.
Rule 1

Pressing  while in the interactive mode in a loop
operation provides two options:
■ To continue the current loop operation, skipping this entry.
or
■ To abort the current loop operation.
If the current loop operation is not the prime loop, after
 is pressed, the system asks whether to continue with
prime loop entries, or to abort the prime loop. Figure 1-3
illustrates use of the  key in a multi-loop operation.
Figure 1-3

PRIME
LOOP

COMMAND = 401
COMMAND NAME: DICTATION_ASSIGN
OPERATION = ADD
CONFIRM EACH MODIFICATION (YES/NO) = NO
GRP# DEV EQUIP# NAME

SETUP MODE:
SECOND LOOP
2:
1:
7
8 
PRIME ENTITIES TO BE ADDED: 6
ENDING VALUE: 7
CONTINUE (C/R), ABORT () = 
INTERACTIVE MODE:
GRP# DEV EQUIP # NAME
2
1
60401 
2
2


ESCAPE Key Loop Operation
The system asks whether the current loop (DEV) should
be aborted or should continue:
CONTINUE (C/R) OR ABORT THE SECOND LOOP () = 

Pressing  continues the operation, skipping this
entry. Pressing  aborts the loop and displays the
following message:

1-6

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000

PERCEPTION 4000

OPERATION
CONTINUE (C/R) OR ABORT THE PRIME LOOP () = 
DATA ENTRY MODE:

The operation is aborted and the system returns to Data
Entry mode.
Rule 2

Pressing  on a 'clear line' moves the hierarchical
level up one level, such as from Setup mode to Data Entry
mode, from Data Entry mode to the OPERATION level, or
from the OPERATION level to the COMMAND level.

Rule 3

Whenever you abort from data input or halt the system
from carrying out a task, such as displaying a report, an
abort message displays confirming that the request has
been carried out.

Rule 4

If an entity is unavailable at the time of a modification/
removal request, the system asks whether a "FORCE TO
IDLE" or a "WAIT WHEN IDLE" state should be posted. If
"FORCE TO IDLE" is selected, the entity is made idle and
the modification/removal request is carried out. If "WAIT
WHEN IDLE" is selected, the system waits for the entity to
become idle, and then carries out the modification/
removal request. An  may be performed to abort
the waiting process and display a message giving the
options to force or abort the operation. Pressing 
again aborts the request and places the console in Data
Entry mode.

Operation of the  key within Data Entry and Setup modes is
described below.
■

Data Entry Mode
1. On a 'clear line' - takes you back to the OPERATION level.
2. Within an input line - lets you re-enter the current input line.

■

Setup Mode
1. On a 'clear line' - takes you back to Data Entry mode.
2. Within an input line - lets you re-enter the current input line (if a
loop is not started or from a loop field).
3. Within a loop field on an input line - aborts the current loop and
goes to the next higher loop or to Data Entry mode.

Refer to the example, "How to Use the  Key" in Chapter 2 for
further information on using  in the various levels of commands.

1-7

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000

PERCEPTION 4000

OPERATION
Tab
 is a single key entry used to terminate input in the current field and
to move to the first column of the next field. This key is the same as
pressing . A  may also be entered to skip fields
when entering data in Data Entry or Setup modes.
Immediate Help (?)
 is implemented the moment it is pressed. Its function is to store the
input entered so far, display an information menu based on both the
command hierarchy and/or field that the question mark was entered in,
process the help request, redisplay the data entered prior to the help
request, and continue to accept input. The operation is available at all
levels of the command hierarchy. Chapter 2 illustrates several HELP
operations.
CONTROL KEYS
Special control keys have been defined to expand the power of the ManMachine Interface (MMI). When entering a control sequence, hold the
 key down while pressing the second key. Control keys and
their functions are described below.
Control-D
 deletes the original contents of a field in a MODIFY
operation. However, not every field in the MODIFY operation has the
delete option. Each command specifies which fields accept  input.
Control-P
 is used to enter Setup mode from Data Entry mode.
Within Setup mode you may establish a set of conditions/instructions that
the system will use to perform the current operation, such as adding a
group of stations with identical parameters.
Control-S
 stops the display on the output device. The command
does not abort the process; it provides a method to halt the output,
examine it, and then resume it (with a ) without affecting
the system. This command is available in all levels of the command
hierarchy, but is most often used during a DISPLAY operation.
Control-Q
 resumes output that was halted when the  keys were pressed. This command is available at all levels of the
command hierarchy, but is most often used during a DISPLAY operation.

1-8

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000

PERCEPTION 4000

OPERATION
Control-F
 is used in Data Entry or Setup mode to duplicate the
value used in the same field on the previous input line. After entering
 the system automatically displays the value and tabs over
to the next available field in the operation. In Setup mode, this control
sequence is used on the second line of data input.
Control-R
 is used in Data Entry or Setup mode to duplicate the
values from the previous input line for the remaining fields on the current
input line. The system automatically displays the values under each of the
remaining fields. In Setup mode, this control sequence is used on the
second line of data input.
Control-W
 redisplays the most recent system prompt and/or
command header and the current line of input. The command is
implemented immediately but does not affect the current line of input. If
the cursor is on a 'clear line' then only the system prompt or command
header is displayed. If  is entered within an operation, the
command header displays along with the current input line. This command
is available at all levels of the command hierarchy. Several  operations are illustrated in Chapter 2 under "How to Use the
 Command".

FIELD PARAMETER INPUT
M&A commands accept various forms of data input. These data types are
listed as: Keyword, Decimal, Decimal with fixed length, Hexadecimal, Text,
Dialing Digits, Dialing Digits plus * and #, DN Type, or EQ Type. The
following paragraphs describe these data types along with the various field
parameters used in the M&A commands.
Note that HELP messages for individual operations display what specific
data type is expected for each field.
Appendix A provides a complete listing of valid field parameter input
characters.
KEYWORD
A keyword field parameter is composed of a letter or digit followed by up to
19 additional letters, digits, or the "_" character. A keyword must contain at
least the minimum number of characters that will uniquely distinguish it
from the other keywords defined for the selected field. For example, if the
keywords for a field are: AAA, AAB, ABB, and BBB, the minimum

1-9

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000

PERCEPTION 4000

OPERATION
characters that could be entered to select each keyword are: AAA, AAB,
AB, and B respectively.
DECIMAL
The decimal field parameter is composed of a set of digits (0 to 9). The
maximum number of digits permitted is unique to the command and the
operation.
DECIMAL WITH FIXED LENGTH
This field parameter indicates that a fixed amount of digits must be input.
For example, in the System Speed Calling Assignment command (CMD
402), the "INDX" field requires a three-digit code, with valid input of 001 to
999. All three digits must be entered to be valid.
HEXADECIMAL
The hexadecimal field parameter is composed of a set of digits (0-9)
and/or the letters: A, B, C, D, E, or F.
TEXT
A text field parameter is composed of a set of ASCII characters (digits,
letters, and/or symbols), with the exception of the comma (,), hyphen (-),
and colon (:). As an example, in the ACD Agent Assignment command
(CMD 356), the format for the "NAME" field is zero to nine ASCII
characters in length including spaces and punctuation.
DIALING DIGITS
Dialing digits include the numbers 0 to 9, and specify a destination
number. The maximum number of digits permitted is unique to the
command and the operation.
DIALING DIGITS PLUS * AND #
In addition to the numbers 0 to 9, the characters * and # are used when
programming telephone functions, such as dial tone detection and timed
pauses.
DN TYPE
The Directory Number (DN Type) field parameter is the same as the
dialing digits field parameter.

1-10

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000

PERCEPTION 4000

OPERATION
EQ TYPE
Each line or trunk is assigned to a circuit on a line card. The Equipment
Number field parameter (EQ Type) defines the hardware location of the
connection, and is five or six digits in length. The first one or two digits (1
to 10) represent the shelf number; the next two digits represent the card
slot number; and the last two digits represent the circuit number.
RANGE INDICATOR
The range indicator (:) terminates input in a field and indicates that the
next line of input will contain the upper/lower range value of the field. This
parameter is used in numeric data fields and only in Setup mode. After
entering the range indicator, the cursor positions itself in the next field and
waits for data input.

SETUP MODE:
10503:
10510

2010

RANGE INDICATOR
NO NO
RNG YES . . . .

PRIME ENTITIES TO BE MODIFIED: 8
ENDING VALUE: 10510
CONTINUE (C/R), ABORT () =

Figure 1-4
Range Indicator
If the range value on the second line is less than the range value on the
first input line, the system re-arranges the low and high values internally
and displays them incrementally.
The default increment for a field is determined by the system. To change
the increment value, enter a comma after the range value in the second
input line, and enter the increment value on the third line (see the following
section entitled "Increment Indicator").
In addition, range indicators may define the bounds of loop fields versus
displaying a 'range' of values. DELETE and DISPLAY operations may use
ranges, whereas other operations may use looping.
INCREMENT INDICATOR
The increment indicator (,), used in Setup mode, terminates input in a field
and indicates that the next line of input will contain the value to use to
increment the field. This parameter is only used in fields with range
indicators and must be entered after the range value in the second input
line. The default value is 1. Figure 1-5 illustrates an increment operation.

1-11

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000

PERCEPTION 4000

OPERATION

SETUP MODE:

INCREMENT INDICATOR
2010 NO NO
RNG

10503:
10510,
2

YES . . . .

PRIME ENTITIES TO BE MODIFIED: 4
ENDING VALUE: 10509
CONTINUE (C/R), ABORT () =

Figure 1-5
Increment Indicator
If the increment value being used does not match the last value when the
range cycle completes, the system displays how many operations will take
place and what the last value will actually be. The option of aborting the
requested sequence or continuing the operation is given. In a DISPLAY
operation, however, after entering the increment indicator, the system
automatically displays the requested information without any notification of
number of entities to be displayed or ending value.
The (,) acts like a  key in that it automatically moves the cursor to
the beginning of the next field if another loop field is in the command
header.
SCOPE INDICATOR
The scope indicator (-) terminates input in a field and indicates that the
input value in the next field will contain the upper/lower value of the field.
This parameter is used in ADD and DELETE operations.
As an example, the Area/Office Code Restriction Tables (CMD 339) may
use the scope indicator as shown in Figure 1-6.
TRGN
2

DRL
12

TYPE AC OC OC
DNY 312 500 - 600

OC

OC

OC

OC

OC

SCOPE INDICATOR

Figure 1-6
Scope Indicator
The scope indicator includes all office codes from 500 to 600 in area code
312.
Differences between the scope and range fields are:
■
■

1-12

Increment of the scope field is always 1.
The scope parameter is used in both the Data Entry and Setup
modes. However, the range field can only be used in Setup mode.

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000

PERCEPTION 4000

OPERATION
■

Scope input is not allowed in a DISPLAY operation, though output may
appear in scope-type format.

FIELD INDICATOR
The field indicator (|) is displayed by the system and is used as a field
separation indicator to aid in lining up the cursor under the proper field. All
input lines within an operation terminate with the field indicator displayed.
UNDEFINED DATA INDICATOR
The undefined data indicator (.) is used by the system during report
displays to indicate fields for which no data has been defined. The
character occurs in non-text, optional input or locked fields and displays
across the entire field, as shown in the "EXT" field in the Station
Assignment command (CMD 330) in Figure 1-7.

EQUIP #

PRM DN

TYPE

PAT

10401
10402

5001
5002

2010
2010

1
1

A1

A2

EXT

RNG

NO NO ........ RNG
NO NO ........ RNG

COS

...

3
3

...
...

UNDEFINED
DATA INDICATORS

Figure 1-7
Undefined Data Indicator

COMMAND PROMPT
The command prompt (=), which is displayed by the system, acts as a
ready indicator notifying you that the system is ready to receive input. This
indicator is not a field parameter. The prompt is used at the COMMAND
and the OPERATION hierarchical levels, as illustrated in the following
figure.
COMMAND PROMPT

COMMAND = 330
COMMAND NAME: STA_ASSIGN
OPERATION = ADD

COMMAND PROMPT

Figure 1-8
Command Prompt

1-13

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000

PERCEPTION 4000

OPERATION

MOVING BETWEEN COMMAND LEVELS
Various methods are available for moving between the levels of commands
in an M&A session.
■
■
■
■
■
■

To go from the COMMAND level to the OPERATION level, enter the
three-digit command identifier or the command keyword and press
.
To go from the OPERATION level into Data Entry mode, enter the
operation desired, such as ADD, DELETE, or MODIFY, and press
.
To go into Setup mode, press  on a 'clear line' while in
Data Entry mode.
On a 'clear line' in Setup mode, press  to return to Data Entry
mode in ADD, DELETE, and MODIFY operations.
On a 'clear line' in Data Entry mode, press  to return to the
"OPERATION=" prompt.
To go to the "COMMAND=" prompt level, press  at the
"OPERATION=" prompt.

Access to each command and operation is restricted based on your
security code. If access to a command is denied, the system displays an
error message and returns to the "COMMAND=" prompt. If access to an
operation is denied, the system displays an error message and returns to
the "OPERATION=" prompt.

ROW/FIELD OPERATION FORMAT
The following is a general explanation of the row/field operation format.
Certain operations may vary from this explanation in one or more
particulars, and exceptions are mentioned in the appropriate command/
operation description.
Operations in row/field format use one or more entities, called key
parameters. Examples of key parameters include directory numbers,
equipment numbers, and group numbers. Figure 1-9 shows the key
parameters (EQUIP # and TGN) in the row/field format for the "Trunk
Assignment" command (CMD 313).

EQUIP #

TGN

ORG

KEY PARAMETERS

Figure 1-9
Key Parameters

1-14

TERM

SIG

CO SUP TYP

ST

DT

...

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000

PERCEPTION 4000

OPERATION
After selecting a specific command and operation, the system may ask a
series of questions based on the operation. Once these are answered, a
command header is displayed. The command header, as shown in Figure
1-9, serves as both a prompt and a guide. The column headings denote
categories of attributes relevant to the selected command and operation.
At this point, you are in Data Entry mode (Setup mode for the DISPLAY
operation). From Data Entry mode you may request HELP, enter the
desired data one entity at a time, or go to Setup mode by using the
 command.
The response to the command header is a command line which consists
of entries in the fields designated by the command header. The command
line may be up to 80 characters long and consist of a single row of
information in Data Entry mode and up to three rows in Setup mode (as
illustrated in Figure 1-10).
DATA ENTRY MODE:
10405

2020




SETUP MODE:
10506:
10516,
2

NO

15

...

Figure 1-10
Example of Data Entry/Setup Mode
The exact length of input depends on the length and number of fields in
the command header.
To move from one field to the next, press the  key or use one of the
two automatic duplicate data commands ( or ). When any of these keys are used to move to the next field, a vertical
bar (|) displays between the two fields and the cursor moves to the first
column of the next field; or, the remaining fields are duplicated and the
carriage return is automatically implemented, depending on the control
sequence entered.
When the command line is complete, press  to enter the
information into the system. In Setup mode, the line is examined to
determine if additional information is to be entered. For example, one of
the entries in a field might end with a ":" which indicates that the
upper/lower range value will be entered on the next command line. The
system waits for the next command line input and then examines it. If still
more input is expected, the system will again wait for input. This continues
until all input has been entered or there is an error in the command line.

1-15

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000

PERCEPTION 4000

OPERATION
The system evaluates the command line for correctness only after the
entire line has been entered, and, if incorrect, indicates the specific field
entries that are invalid.
You can request the system to redisplay the command header by entering
a  without additional input under the first field. Figure 1-11
illustrates operation of a  entry.
DATA ENTRY MODE:
10404
10405

5016
2020



EQUIP # PRM DN TYPE PAT A1
10405
2020

A2

EXT RNG COS . . .

Figure 1-11
Example of  Display
In a DISPLAY operation, by entering a  and a  on the
'clear line' under the command header, all information for the command is
displayed. See the first example in Chapter 2 under "Examples of
DISPLAY Operations" for an illustration of  key operation.
Help is available for an operation by pressing  after the
"OPERATION=" prompt. For detailed information about the data expected
for a field, select the summary option from the HELP menu.
In general, the following operations are available for each command: ADD,
DELETE, MODIFY, and DISPLAY.

DATA ENTRY MODE
1. At the "COMMAND=" prompt ,
enter the command keyword or
numeric ID.
The "OPERATION=" prompt
appears.
2. Enter the operation type.
Data Entry mode is activated.
NOTE: If a DISPLAY operation is
entered, the system automatically
goes into Setup mode, bypassing
Data Entry mode.

1-16

In this mode, data is entered on a single entity basis. A command header
is displayed upon entering Data Entry mode from the "OPERATION="
prompt. Ranges and increments are not allowed, but scope-type input is
allowed. A single line of input is used to indicate the modifications to be
made to the entity. The modification takes place immediately after the
 key is pressed (if the input line passes the validation checks).
All fields that are required to have input in them for this command must be
entered on this single input line, as illustrated in Figure 1-12.
DATA ENTRY MODE:
TRGN
2

DRL
12

TYPE
DNY

AC OC OC OC OC
312 500 - 600 

Figure 1-12
Example of Data Entry Mode

OC

OC

OC

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000

PERCEPTION 4000

OPERATION
You may correct a line of input or abort by using the  key. If 
is entered on a 'clear line', the system exits the current operation and goes
to the "OPERATION=" prompt level. Refer to Chapter 2 for examples of
Data Entry mode operation.

SETUP MODE
1. On a 'clear line' in Data Entry
mode, press .
Setup mode is activated.

In Setup mode, you may enter ranges, increments, and/or fixed values.
The system uses these entries to automatically assign values to some or
all of the fields. Up to three lines of data may be entered in Setup mode.
Valid input is listed with each command description in Chapter 3. If an
incorrect range or value is entered, an error message appears.
Upon completion of all instruction lines necessary to perform the
operation, the system validates any ranges entered, displays how many
repetitions of the first loop will take place, indicates what the final value for
the first loop's range will be, and prompts whether these conditions match
the request. Figure 1-5 (under "Increment Indicator") illustrates a Setup
mode operation.
If you do not abort from Setup mode at this time, the system may prompt
you for additional conditions based on the operation, such as whether to
confirm the modification prior to performing it. The system then
automatically performs the operation.
The following are rules for Setup mode:
RANGES
Rule 1

Ranges must remain within the scope of the controlling loop
in ADD, DELETE, MODIFY, and DISPLAY operations.

Rule 2

In a DISPLAY operation, ranges are used as a limiting factor
in fixed form numeric field(s).

In the following figure, entries in the "EQUIP #" field apply to Rule 1, while
entries in the "PRM DN" field apply to Rule 2.

1-17

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000

PERCEPTION 4000

OPERATION

SETUP MODE:
EQUIP # PRM DN TYPE PAT A1

10101:
10502

5005:
5035



10404
10405
10501
10502

5015
5016
5025
5035

2010
2020
2010
2010

1
2
1
1

NO
NO
NO
NO

A2

EXT RNG COS . . .

NO
NO
NO
NO

...
...
...
...

RNG
RNG
RNG
RNG

3
2
3
2

...
...
...
...

Figure 1-13
Use of Ranges
Only "EQUIP #"s 10101 through 10502 with a "PRM DN" between 5005
and 5035 display.
FIXED VALUES
In ADD and MODIFY operations, fixed values cannot be changed
interactively. For example, Figure 1-14 illustrates an ADD operation where
Add-on modules 1 and 2 (A1 and A2) and Data Security (SEC) are set to
NO for equipment numbers being added to the system. In addition, the
"RNG" field is set to RNG for all devices. When the command is executed,
these fields cannot be modified. To make any changes, you must re-enter
the device "EQUIP #" to be changed and enter the appropriate data.

SETUP MODE:
EQUIP # PRM DN TYPE PAT A1
10505:
10510 

10505
10506
10507
10508
10509
10510

5065
5076
5085
5095
5105
5115

A2

EXT RNG COS

NO NO

2020
2020
2020
2010
2020
2010

2
2
2
1
2
1

NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO

NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO

...

RNG 

...
...
...
...
...
...

RNG
RNG
RNG
RNG
RNG
RNG

2
2
2
3
2
3

...
...
...
...
...
...

Figure 1-14
Fixed Values - ADD Operation
In a DISPLAY operation, fixed values are used as limiting factors in any
attribute or loop field. Figure 1-15 illustrates a fixed value entry in a
DISPLAY operation.

1-18

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000

PERCEPTION 4000

OPERATION

SETUP MODE:
EQUIP # PRM DN TYPE PAT

A1

A2

EXT RNG COS

10501:
10510 

10505
10506
10507
10508
10509
10510

5065
5076
5085
5095
5105
5115

...



2020
2020
2020
2010
2020
2010

2
2
2
1
2
1

NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO

NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO

...
...
...
...
...
...

RNG
RNG
RNG
RNG
RNG
RNG

2
2
2
3
2
3

...
...
...
...
...
...

Figure 1-15
Fixed Values - DISPLAY Operation
Only "EQUIP #"s between 10501 and 10510 are displayed.
If an  is entered in the middle of an input line in Setup mode, the
current input line is ignored, an abort message is displayed, and the cursor
moves to the far left column on the next line.
INTERACTIVE MODE
Setup mode is interactive in an ADD operation. When adding a number of
stations/equipment with the same parameters, this mode assists in
speeding up the process. The first line of input includes the parameters to
be set for all of the stations/equipment being added. Figures 1-16 and
1-17 illustrate interactive mode operation.

SETUP MODE:
EQUIP # PRM DN TYPE PAT A1
10507:
10509

2010

1

A2

EXT RNG COS

NO NO

3

...
...



PRIME ENTITIES TO BE ADDED: 3
ENDING VALUE: 10509
CONTINUE (C/R), ABORT () = 
CONFIRM EACH ADD (YES/NO) = NO 
10507

*

* The cursor stops here and waits for input.
Figure 1-16
Interactive Mode (1)

1-19

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000

PERCEPTION 4000

OPERATION
Enter the "PRM DN" and press . The cursor moves to the next valid
empty field (RNG) and waits for input. After each empty field is filled in or
tabbed over (->), the system fills in the balance of the input line with
predefined values and moves the cursor to the end of the line. Press
 and the cursor automatically positions itself in the first column
under the "PRM DN" field for the next "EQUIP #".

10507
10508
10509

5065 ->
5069 ->
5085 ->

2010 NO NO . . .
2010 NO NO . . .
2010 NO NO . . .

-> YES
-> YES
-> YES

3 . . . 
3 . . . 
3 . . . 

DATA ENTRY MODE:

Figure 1-17
Interactive Mode (2)
Looping within the operation is carried out by the MMI. You are not
permitted to alter a loop sequence while in the Interactive mode.
The  key may be used to correct a line of input or abort from a loop.
Refer to the "Formatting Keys" section earlier in this chapter for more
complete details on use of the  key.
If Interactive mode completes naturally, or aborts because of an error
condition or use of the  key, the system automatically goes to Data
Entry mode.
NOTE: A message displays every time a transition from one mode to
another occurs, or when the  key is pressed.
Refer to Chapter 2 for examples of Setup mode operations.

ADD OPERATION
1. At the "OPERATION=" prompt,
enter ADD.
2. Press .

Upon entering ADD at the "OPERATION=" prompt, the system goes into
Data Entry mode and displays the command header. In this mode, single
entity/attribute adds may be performed. Figure 1-18 is an example of an
ADD operation for the Miscellaneous Device Assignment command (CMD
400).

DEV
AM02

EQUIP # USAGE
011207
ACD



Figure 1-18
ADD Operation
The option of going into Setup mode in an ADD operation is available for
most M&A commands by pressing  from a 'clear line' state.
In this mode you may define a sequence of installations that are to be

1-20

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000

PERCEPTION 4000

OPERATION
performed automatically by the system. The data entered at this level
determines if any interactive entry will take place.
Once all input of command lines have been made, the system
automatically performs the operation. If ranges were entered in any of the
loop fields, the system first displays a message as to how many entities
will be added and then asks whether a confirmation prompt should appear
after every loop is incremented.
If you select the confirmation option, each command line is displayed,
followed by a prompt asking whether or not you wish to perform the install
as listed. An example of this, using the Station Assignment command,
(CMD 330) is illustrated in Figure 1-19.

10507
5065 -> 2010 NO NO
(YES/NO) =

->

-> YES 3 . . . 

Figure 1-19
ADD Confirmation
Upon completion, the system automatically returns to Data Entry mode.
Note that any error condition encountered aborts the system to Data Entry
mode. Refer to Chapter 2 for examples of the ADD operation.

DELETE OPERATION
1. At the "OPERATION=" prompt,
enter DELETE.
2. Press .

Upon entering the DELETE operation from the "OPERATION=" prompt,
the system goes into Data Entry mode and displays the appropriate
command header. Single entity/attribute deletions may be performed in
this mode. If the entity is unavailable for removal, the system displays the
message shown in Figure 1-20.

EQUIPMENT IN USE:
1.
FORCE TO IDLE
2.
WAIT FOR IDLE
 CANCEL REMAINING REMOVAL REQUESTS
ACTION =_

Figure 1-20
DELETE Operation - Busy Options
The option of going into Setup mode in a DELETE operation is available
for most M&A commands by pressing  from a 'clear line'
state. In this mode you may define a sequence of deletions that are to be
performed automatically by the system. Upon completing input of all
command lines, the system automatically executes the commands. If
ranges were entered in any of the loop fields, the system displays how

1-21

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000

PERCEPTION 4000

OPERATION
many entities will be deleted, displays the ending value, and prompts to
continue or abort, as illustrated in Figure 1-21.


SETUP MODE:
10503:
10505
PRIME ENTITIES TO BE DELETED: 3
ENDING VALUE: 10505
CONTINUE (C/R), ABORT () = 
EQUIP #
10503

PRM DN

(YES/NO) = Y 

Figure 1-21
DELETE Confirmation
Enter YES if this station is to be deleted, or NO if this station is to be
saved, then press . Once all command lines have been
executed, the system automatically goes to Data Entry mode.
If an entity is in use or busy, the system displays the options to 'Force to
Idle', 'Wait for Idle', or 'Cancel Remaining Removal Requests'. If "WAIT
FOR IDLE" is selected, the system waits for the entity to become idle, and
then carries out the removal request. An  may be performed to
abort the waiting process and display a message giving the options to
force or abort the DELETE operation. Pressing  again aborts the
request and places the console in Data Entry mode.
An error condition also aborts the operation and returns the session to
Data Entry mode, as determined by each command/operation.
Refer to Chapter 2 for examples of the DELETE operation.

MODIFY OPERATION
1. At the "OPERATION=" prompt,
enter MODIFY.
2. Press .
"CONFIRM EACH
MODIFICATION (YES/NO) ="
"DISPLAY ORIGINAL VALUES
(YES/NO)="

1-22

When first entering the MODIFY operation from the "OPERATION="
prompt, the system asks whether to confirm each modification and
whether the Original/New values for the entity (primary field) should be
displayed. After entering a YES or NO in response to these inquiries,
press . The command header displays and the system enters
Data Entry mode.
Individual field modifications may be performed in this mode. Both the
entity and at least one other field must be entered. When input is
completed, press  to automatically execute the modifications.

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000

PERCEPTION 4000
"DISPLAY NEW VALUES
(YES/NO)="

OPERATION
If the entity is unavailable for the modification, the system responds with
the options shown in Figure 1-22.

1.
FORCE TO IDLE
2.
WAIT FOR IDLE
 CANCEL REMAINING MODIFICATION REQUESTS
ACTION =_

Figure 1-22
MODIFY Operation - Busy Options
The option of going into Setup mode in a MODIFY operation is available
for most M&A commands by pressing  from a 'clear line'
state. In Setup mode, you may define a sequence of modifications that are
to be performed automatically by the system. Note that interactive data
entry is not permitted in a MODIFY operation.
Upon completing input of all command lines in Setup mode, the system
automatically executes the commands, displaying each command line as it
is executed, if specified. If an entity is in use or busy, the program halts
and displays the options to wait, skip, or force the modification. If "WAIT
FOR IDLE" is selected, the system waits for the entity to become idle, and
then carries out the modification. An  may be performed to abort
the waiting process and display a message giving the options to force or
abort the MODIFY operation, as illustrated in Figure 1-23. Pressing
 again aborts the request and places the console in Data Entry
mode.
1.
FORCE TO IDLE
 ABORT THE MODIFICATION
ACTION =_

Figure 1-23
MODIFY Operation - Wait Options
If the  key is entered prior to modification of the waiting entities, the
system cancels the modification request for those entities. Once all
command lines have been executed, the system automatically goes to
Data Entry mode.
If an error condition occurs, the system asks whether to continue with the
next modification or to abort the operation and return the session to Data
Entry mode.
Refer to Chapter 2 for examples of the MODIFY operation.

1-23

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000

PERCEPTION 4000

OPERATION

DISPLAY OPERATION
1. At the "OPERATION=" prompt,
enter DISPLAY.
2. Press .

Upon entering the DISPLAY operation from the "OPERATION=" prompt,
the appropriate command header displays and the system goes into Setup
mode, bypassing Data Entry mode. In Setup mode, you may define a
sequence of entities that are to be displayed on the output device. After
completing input of the command lines and pressing , the
system automatically executes the commands. If ranges are entered in
any of the fields, the system uses these values to limit the scope of the
search algorithm. Figure 1-24 illustrates a DISPLAY operation.

SETUP MODE:
EQUIP # PRM DN TYPE PAT A1 A2 EXT RNG COS . . .
2020
1:

9


10405
10504
10513
10514

5015
5055
5166
5170

2020
2020
2020
2020

2
2
2
2

NO
NO
NO
NO

NO
NO
NO
NO

. . . . . RNG
. . . . . RNG
. . . . . RNG
. . . . . RNG

3
2
2
3

...
...
...
...

Figure 1-24
DISPLAY Operation
In this example, all 2020-type devices with a Class of Service between 1
and 9 are displayed.
Any values entered in Setup mode must exactly match the configuration
for the entity in order for the entity to be displayed. Only entities in which
every condition matches are displayed.
The system automatically returns to Setup mode after listing the requested
data.  may be pressed at any time to cancel the display and return
to Setup mode.
Pressing the  and  keys on a 'clear line' causes all
information in the database for the command to display.
Refer to Chapter 2 for more examples of the DISPLAY operation.

HELP OPERATION
1. Press .

1-24

The HELP operation is a menu driven hierarchical system of text
information. Each level of the hierarchy contains more detailed information
than the preceding level. Access to the HELP feature is via the  control
key. When this key is entered, the system interrupts the current input and

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000

PERCEPTION 4000

OPERATION
goes into a HELP menu. Upon exiting the HELP operation, the system
redisplays the last input line up to the interruption ( entry) and allows
you to resume input at that point.
HELP HIERARCHY STRUCTURE
The hierarchy of the HELP operation follows the same hierarchy as the
Maintenance Console Operation in that there are three distinct levels of
access and capability:
■
■
■

Command Selection
Operation Selection
Parameter Selection

After each selection is made from a menu, a new menu displays with a set
of options. These options note specific details about the selected menu
item, or additional information regarding a specific operation, entity, or
attribute display. To access an adjacent hierarchical level, you must move
back up the hierarchy to the point from which the path to the new item may
be accessed. Access to commands is based on the security code entered
at login time.
Release Number, Version Number, and Date
This information indicates the current release number, version number,
date, and time that the system program module was created, and displays
along with each HELP menu, as illustrated in the following figure.
Release X.X
Version X.X.X Day Month Date and Time

Figure 1-25
Release, Version, Date

Command Selection Level
The Command Selection level, accessed by pressing the  key after the
"COMMAND=" prompt, provides access to a list of command categories,
plus other pertinent information. See Figure 1-26.

1-25

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000

PERCEPTION 4000

OPERATION

COMMAND = ?
HELP MENU
Release X.X
Version X.X.X Day Month Date and Time
Select one item:
1. Command Category
2. MMI Tutorial
3. System Messages
4. Control Keys
Q. Quit Help Operation
ITEM NUMBER =

Figure 1-26
HELP Menu, Command Level
The Command Category provides a list of the available categories, such
as administrative commands, station commands, trunk commands, or
maintenance commands. The system only displays help for those
commands which you are authorized to access, as based on your entered
security code. The lists of command categories, commands, and
operations in the menus are adjusted accordingly. Once a specific
command is selected, the system loads the overlay file for the command
from the disk.
Operation Selection Level
This help level, as illustrated in Figure 1-27, provides information about
operations and field parameters available for the selected command.
The system only displays help for those operations which you are
authorized to access, based on your entered security code. The lists of
operations and fields in the submenus are adjusted accordingly.
Information about other commands is not available from this level.

1-26

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000

PERCEPTION 4000

OPERATION

OPERATION = ?
HELP MENU
Release X.X
Version X.X.X Day Month Date and Time
Select one item:
Command ID: (cmd366)
1. ADD
2. DELETE
3. MODIFY
4. DISPLAY
5. Field Parameters
Q. Quit Help Operation
ITEM NUMBER =

Figure 1-27
HELP Menu, Operation Level

Parameter Selection Level
This help level provides specific information about the selected field.
Figure 1-28 shows a parameter-level help screen.

EQUIP # PRM DN TYPE PAT A1 A2 EXT RNG COS
11101
4220
2010
1
?

...

Add-On Module Number 1 (A1)
Keyword
Type:
Not allowed
Value:
N/A
Format:
Keyword: NO - No Add-On
M1 - Add-On module 20 keys type
M2 - Add-On module 60 keys type
Required: ADD operation only for PERCEPTION 40xx telephone types
Range:
Not allowed
Loop Field: Not allowed

Figure 1-28
HELP Screen, Row/Field Level
Information about other operations or commands is not available from this
level of the help hierarchy.
Refer to Chapter 2 for more examples of the HELP operation.

1-27

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000

PERCEPTION 4000

OPERATION

TERMINATING AN M&A SESSION
1. At the "COMMAND=" prompt,
enter LOGOUT or 0.
2. Press .

1-28

To terminate a session and return the M&A system to the idle state, enter
LOGOUT or 0 (zero) in response to the "COMMAND=" prompt and then
press the  key. The system responds with a logout message. If
you leave the terminal without logging out, the system terminates the
session after approximately one to thirty minutes (depending on the
system parameter) and automatically displays an information message.

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000

Chapter 2
PERCEPTION 4000

EXAMPLES

Examples of how to use the Maintenance and Administration (M&A) Man-Machine Interface (MMI) are presented
in this chapter. The Station Assignment command is used to illustrate the various operations.

STATION ASSIGNMENT (CMD 330)
The Station Assignment command is the primary command in assigning stations to the system. This command
defines the station's prime directory number, establishes linkage to a hardware circuit, instructs the system on
what type of station this is (digital, electronic, analog single-line) and defines terminal-level and prime-line
attributes. The Station-Level Parameter Assignment command (CMD 329) is also required to complete
fundamental station information. Multi-line devices also require the Station Feature Key Assignment command
(CMD 331) for further definition.
Attributes defined/modified with this command include:
Equipment Number
Prime Directory Number
Station Type
Add-on Module #1 (20/60 key)
Add-on Module #2 (20/60 key)
Analog Extension
Ring Option
Data Security
Class of Service
Destination Restriction Level
Facility Restriction Level Profile
LCR Queue Priority Level
Answer Position
Station Group Number
Station Owner's Name
Department Name

EQUIP #
PRM DN
TYPE
A1
A2
EXT
RNG
SEC
COS
DRL
FRL
QPL
ANSPOS
GRP
NAME
DEPT

NOTES:
1. If the station's "TYPE" field is an ID10 or ID20 (digital telephone with DIU), the station must be assigned to a
DSTI card configured for 2B operation, thereby allowing for simultaneous voice and data communications.
2. If the station's "TYPE" field is a 2010 or 2020 (digital telephone without DIU), the station may be assigned to
a DSTI card configured for 1B or 2B operation. When installed on a DSTI card configured for 2B operation, a
'2B' device (ID10 or ID20) must already be assigned to the card.
3. If a 10-key or 20-key digital telephone is selected in the "TYPE" field (2010 or 2020) and installed on a DSTI
card configured for 2B operation, the circuit's data channel is ignored by the system.
4. In a MODIFY operation, a '2B' device may not be changed to a '1B' device.

2-1

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000

PERCEPTION 4000

EXAMPLES

OPERATIONS
Available operations:

ADD
DELETE
MODIFY
DISPLAY
? (HELP)

The following sections describe the function and required data fields for each operation. Abbreviations used
include:
req
opt
locked

- Data is required in this field.
- Data is optional in this field.
- This field is not available for modification.

ADD

EQUIP # | PRM DN | TYPE | PAT | A1 | A2 | EXT | RNG | COS | DRL | FRL | QPL | ANSPOS | SRG | NAME | DEPT

req

opt

locked

opt

req

opt

locked

opt

The ADD operation assigns a station port to a spare equipment port location. You are required to enter the
minimum amount of data that defines the station port. The directory number (PRM DN) selected must meet the
constraints established for prime directory numbers. Loops are permitted so that you may set up large numbers of
station ports with one operation.

DELETE

EQUIP # | PRM DN |

req

opt

This operation changes a station port to a spare equipment port. The equipment number is required. Looping is
allowed in the “EQUIP #” field to expedite the deletion of large numbers of ports. If the station has secondary
directory numbers assigned to its line(s) or key(s), all of the secondary directory numbers must be removed
through the Station Feature Key Assignment command (CMD 331) prior to performing this operation. The station
must also be removed from group associations such as hunting, speed calling, ACD, etc. If the station's "TYPE" is
an ID10 or ID20 (digital telephone with integrated DIU), the data station must be deleted first.

2-2

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000

PERCEPTION 4000

EXAMPLES

MODIFY

EQUIP # | PRM DN | TYPE | PAT | A1 | A2 | EXT | RNG | COS | DRL | FRL | QPL | ANSPOS | SRG | NAME | DEPT

req

locked

opt

locked

opt

Station attributes are modified with this operation. The "EQUIP #" field is the only required field. The “PRM DN”
field, though optional, cannot be modified; this field may be skipped over during a MODIFY operation, or the
existing prime DN may be entered. Before changing attributes of a station, review the NOTES at the beginning of
this command.
DISPLAY

EQUIP # | PRM DN | TYPE | PAT | A1 | A2 | EXT | RNG | COS | DRL | FRL | QPL | ANSPOS | SRG | NAME | DEPT

opt

locked

opt

opt

locked

locked

opt

All station equipment ports that meet the conditions established for each field may be displayed. Ranges are
permitted in any field that accepts numeric input, (i.e., COS, DRL, FRL, etc.). The “EQUIP #” field is the only loop
field for this operation.
PARAMETERS
Each field parameter is described in this section. Any variations for a particular operation are noted separately.
Equipment Location (EQUIP #)
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:
KEYWORD:
REQUIRED:
RANGE:
LOOP FIELD:

EQ Type
5 or 6 digits
(0)10101 - 101416 *
Not allowed
ADD, DELETE, and MODIFY operations
Allowed in a DISPLAY operation only
ADD, DELETE, and DISPLAY operations
* Use the following chart to determine valid ranges for various types of equipment.
For BSTI and DSTI equipment cards, the following ranges apply:
Digits

Range

Hardware

First digit(s)
Second two digits
Last two digits

(0)1~10
01~11, 13
01~16

Shelf no.
Card slot no.
Circuit no.

NOTE: Slot 13 is unavailable if the card is a 2B type.

2-3

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000

PERCEPTION 4000

EXAMPLES
For an EKTI or XSTI card, the following are valid ranges:
Digits

Range

Hardware

First digit(s)
Second two digits
Last two digits

(0)1~10
01~14
01~08

Shelf no.
Card slot no.
Circuit no.

Prime Directory Number (PRM DN)
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:
KEYWORD:
REQUIRED:
RANGE:
LOOP FIELD:

DN Type
1 to 5 digits
0 to 99999
Not allowed
ADD operation only
Allowed in a DISPLAY operation only
Not allowed

Station Type (TYPE)
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:
KEYWORDS:

Keyword
Predefined ASCII characters
Not allowed
2010
- 10-key digital telephone
2020
- 20-key digital telephone
ID10
- 10-key digital telephone with Digital Interface Unit
ID20
- 20-key digital telephone with Digital Interface Unit
ANLG - Analog telephone
ANMW - Analog telephone with Message Waiting
AVMS - Analog VMS port
EK01 - Electronic telephone with 1 line key and 3 fixed keys
EK10 - Electronic telephone with 10 flexible keys and 4 fixed keys
EK20 - Electronic telephone with 20 flexible keys and 4 fixed keys
EK2D - Electronic telephone with 20 flexible keys, 4 fixed keys, and display
DK10 - DKT digital telephone with 10 flexible keys
DK1D - DKT digital telephone with 10 flexible keys and display
DK20 - DKT digital telephone with 20 flexible keys
DK2D - DKT digital telephone with 20 flexible keys and display
REQUIRED: ADD operation only
RANGE:
Not allowed
LOOP FIELD: Not allowed
Pattern Number of Template for Position of Feature Keys (PAT)
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:
RANGE:
LOOP FIELD:

2-4

Decimal
1 digit
1 to 4
Not allowed
Not allowed

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000

PERCEPTION 4000

EXAMPLES

First Add-on Module Type (A1)
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:
KEYWORDS:

Keyword
Predefined ASCII characters
Not allowed
M1 - 20-key Add-on Module
M2 - 60-key Add-on Module (three 20-key modules)
NO - No Add-on Module
REQUIRED: ADD operation for digital telephones only
RANGE:
Not allowed
LOOP FIELD: Not allowed
Second Add-on Module Type (A2)
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:
KEYWORDS:

Keyword
Predefined ASCII characters
Not allowed
M1 - 20-key Add-on Module
M2 - 60-key Add-on Module (Reserved for future use)
NO - No Add-on Module
REQUIRED: ADD operation for digital telephones only
RANGE:
Not allowed
LOOP FIELD: Not allowed
Analog Extension (EXT) (Reserved for future use)
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:
KEYWORDS:

Keyword
Predefined ASCII characters
Not allowed
EXT - Digital Telephone Extension
NON - Non-extension
REQUIRED: ADD operation (for analog telephones only)
RANGE:
Not allowed
LOOP FIELD: Not allowed
Ringing Option (RNG)
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:
KEYWORDS:

Keyword
Predefined ASCII characters
Not allowed
RNG - Ring (All devices default to RNG when added to the system.)
NRG - No Ring
REQUIRED: ADD operation (For analog telephones with an extension)
RANGE:
Not allowed
LOOP FIELD: Not allowed

2-5

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000

PERCEPTION 4000
Class of Service (COS)
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:
KEYWORDS:
REQUIRED:
RANGE:
LOOP FIELD:

Decimal
1 or 2 digits
1 to 64
Not allowed
ADD operation only
Allowed in a DISPLAY operation only
Not allowed

Destination Restriction Level (DRL)
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:
KEYWORDS:
REQUIRED:
RANGE:
LOOP FIELD:

Decimal
1 or 2 digits
1 to 16
Not allowed
ADD operation only
Allowed in a DISPLAY operation only
Not allowed

Facility Restriction Level Profile (FRL)
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:
KEYWORDS:
REQUIRED:
RANGE:
LOOP FIELD:

Decimal
1 or 2 digits
1 to 32
Not allowed
ADD operation only
Allowed in a DISPLAY operation only
Not allowed

Queue Priority Level (QPL)
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:
KEYWORDS:
REQUIRED:
RANGE:
LOOP FIELD:

Decimal
1 digit
1 to 8
Not allowed
ADD operation only
Allowed in a DISPLAY operation only
Not allowed

Answer Position (ANSPOS)
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:
KEYWORDS:
REQUIRED:
RANGE:
LOOP FIELD:

2-6

DN Type / Keyword
1 to 5 digits / Predefined ASCII characters
0 to 99999 / NON
NON - No answer position is selected
N/A
Allowed in a DISPLAY operation only
Not allowed

EXAMPLES

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000

PERCEPTION 4000

EXAMPLES

Station Group Number (GRP) (Reserved for future use)
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:
KEYWORDS:
REQUIRED:
RANGE:
LOOP FIELD:

Decimal
1 or 2 digits
1 to 16
Not allowed
ADD operation only
Allowed in a DISPLAY operation only
Not allowed

Station Name (NAME)
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:
KEYWORDS:
REQUIRED:
RANGE:
LOOP FIELD:

Text
0 to 9 ASCII characters (excluding a colon [:], comma [,], or dash [-])
Text
Not allowed
N/A
Not allowed
Not allowed

Department Name (DEPT)
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:
KEYWORDS:
REQUIRED:
RANGE:
LOOP FIELD:

Text
0 to 4 ASCII characters (excluding a colon [:], comma [,], or dash [-])
Text
Not allowed
N/A
Not allowed
Not allowed

EXAMPLES OF ADD OPERATIONS
When first entering an ADD operation the system is in Data Entry mode. In this mode installations of individual
stations are performed. A complete command line, without ranges or automatic increments, must be entered.
Note that "EXT" and "GRP" are locked fields and are therefore skipped over by the system. In the first example,
the ADD operation is selected and the system immediately goes into Data Entry mode. The example continues
with some basic installations.
NOTES:
1. Each input line is terminated with a Carriage Return (), not shown.
2. User entered data is shown in Boldface type.
3. An arrow (->) indicates a .

2-7

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000

PERCEPTION 4000

EXAMPLES

OPERATION = ADD 
(Data Entry Mode)
EQUIP # PRM DN TYPE PAT A1 A2 EXT RNG COS DRL FRL QPL ANSPOS GRP
NAME
DEPT
5055
2010 1
NO NO
5
4
3
1000
EXAMPLE 1 ACCT
10503
RNG 3
ENTER NEW LINE
10505
5052

2020

1

NO NO

->

2

2

1

2

1000

EXAMPLE 2 ACCT

Figure 2-1
ADD Operation - Data Entry Mode
To go from Data Entry to Setup mode, enter a  on a 'clear line'. If ranges are used, the option is
available to confirm each add while the system executes the commands. If any of the required fields are left
empty, the cursor goes to the first column in the empty field and waits for data input. Upon execution of all
commands, the system automatically returns to Data Entry mode.

SETUP MODE:
10507:
10509

2010 NO NO

->

YES 3

5

4

3

1000

PRCH

PRIME ENTITIES TO BE ADDED: 3
ENDING VALUE: 10509
CONTINUE (C/R), ABORT () = 
CONFIRM EACH ADD (YES/NO) = YES 
EQUIP # PRM DN TYPE PAT A1 A2 EXT RNG COS DRL FRL QPL ANSPOS GRP
NAME
DEPT
10507
5065
2010 1
NO NO
3
5
4
3
1000
EXAMPLE A PRCH
->
10507

5065

2010

1

NO NO

RNG 3

5

4

3

1000

EXAMPLE A PRCH

(YES/NO) = Y 
10508

5069

2010

1

NO NO

->

3

5

4

3

1000

EXAMPLE B PRCH

10508

5069

2010

1

NO NO

RNG 3

5

4

3

1000

EXAMPLE B PRCH

(YES/NO) = Y 
10509

5085

2010

1

NO NO

->

3

5

4

3

1000

EXAMPLE C PRCH

10509

5085

2010

1

NO NO

RNG 3

5

4

3

1000

EXAMPLE C PRCH

(YES/NO) = Y 
DATA ENTRY MODE:
ENTER NEW LINE

Figure 2-2
ADD Operation - Setup Mode with Confirmation

2-8

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000

PERCEPTION 4000

EXAMPLES

In the following example, four stations are added to the system, all having the same attributes. "PRM DN" is the
only field requiring individual data entry. This operation does not request confirmation after each addition.

SETUP MODE:
 (Optional)
EQUIP # PRM DN TYPE PAT A1 A2 EXT RNG COS DRL FRL QPL ANSPOS GRP
10511:
10514

2010

1

NO NO

->

3

6

5

2

NAME

DEPT

NAME

DEPT

1002

PRIME ENTITIES TO BE ADDED: 4
ENDING VALUE: 10514
CONTINUE (C/R), ABORT () = 
CONFIRM EACH ADDITION (YES/NO) = NO 
EQUIP # PRM DN TYPE PAT A1 A2 EXT RNG COS DRL FRL QPL ANSPOS GRP
RNG 3
10511
5170
2010 1
NO NO
6
5
2
1002
10512

5169

2010

1

NO NO

RNG

3

6

5

2

1002

10513

5168

2010

1

NO NO

RNG

3

6

5

2

1002

10514

5167

2010

1

NO NO

RNG

3

6

5

2

1002

DATA ENTRY MODE:

Figure 2-3
ADD Operation - Setup Mode without Confirmation
In the following example, four stations with varying attributes are added to the system. The cursor automatically
goes to the first column in each field requiring data input. After entering data, press the  key to go to the
next field. This operation does not request confirmation after each addition.

2-9

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000

PERCEPTION 4000

EXAMPLES


SETUP MODE:
 (Optional)
EQUIP # PRM DN TYPE PAT A1 A2 EXT RNG COS DRL FRL QPL ANSPOS GRP
10601:
10604

NAME

DEPT

NO NO

PRIME ENTITIES TO BE ADDED: 4
ENDING VALUE: 10604
CONTINUE (C/R), ABORT () = 
CONFIRM EACH ADDITION (YES/NO) = NO 
EQUIP # PRM DN TYPE PAT A1 A2 EXT RNG COS DRL FRL QPL ANSPOS GRP
NAME
10601
5601
2010 1
NO NO
->
15
8
5
2
1002
STA 5601

DEPT
ACCT

10602

5602

2010

1

NO NO

->

3

6

4

2

1002

STA 5602

ACCT

10603

5603

2020

2

NO NO

->

3

6

4

1

1004

STA 5603

ADMN

10604

5604

2020

2

NO NO

->

1

2

1

1

1004

STA 5604

ADMN

DATA ENTRY MODE:
ENTER NEW LINE

OPERATION =

Figure 2-4
ADD Operation - Setup Mode - Individual Entries

EXAMPLES OF DELETE OPERATIONS
Minimum information essential to the DELETE operation is the equipment number. When first entering a DELETE
operation the system is in Data Entry mode. In this mode removal of individual stations is performed. The
equipment number, without ranges or automatic increments, must be entered.
NOTES:
1. Each input line is terminated with a Carriage Return (), not shown.
2. User entered data is shown in Boldface type.

2-10

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000

PERCEPTION 4000

EXAMPLES

OPERATION = DELETE 
CONFIRM EACH MODIFICATION (YES/NO) = Y 
EQUIP # PRM DN
10503
10503
(YES/NO) = YES 
ENTER NEW LINE
10504
10504
(YES/NO) = YES 
ENTER NEW LINE
10507
EQUIPMENT IN USE:
FORCE TO IDLE
1.
REMOVE WHEN IDLE
2.
 CANCEL REMAINING REMOVAL REQUESTS
ACTION = 2 
ENTER NEW LINE

Figure 2-5
DELETE Operation - Data Entry Mode
To go from Data Entry to Setup mode, enter a  on a 'clear line'. If ranges are used, the option is
available to confirm each DELETE operation while the system executes the commands. Upon completion of all
removals, the system automatically returns to Data Entry mode. Note that an error condition or an 'abort'
operation causes the system to return to Data Entry mode also.

2-11

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000

PERCEPTION 4000

EXAMPLES


SETUP MODE:
10503:
10505
PRIME ENTITIES TO BE DELETED: 3
ENDING VALUE: 10505
CONTINUE (C/R), ABORT () = 
EQUIP # PRM DN
10503
(YES/NO) = Y 
10504
EQUIPMENT IN USE:
1.
FORCE TO IDLE
2.
REMOVE WHEN IDLE
 CANCEL REMAINING REMOVAL REQUESTS
ACTION = 2 
10505
(YES/NO) = Y 

Figure 2-6
DELETE Operation - Setup Mode
The system waits for EQUIP # 10504 to become idle. If the entity continues to be busy, press the  key.
After a period of time, the following message appears:

EQUIPMENT BUSY:
1
FORCE
 ABORT
ACTION = 1 
ENTER NEW LINE

OPERATION =

Figure 2-7
DELETE Operation - Setup Mode - Forced Idle
Equipment number 10504 is forced to the idle state and deleted.

2-12

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000

PERCEPTION 4000

EXAMPLES

EXAMPLES OF MODIFY OPERATIONS
Minimum data essential for the modification of a station device is the equipment number and data for at least one
other field. Modifications are made only in those fields where data is entered. All other fields remain unchanged.
In the following examples minimum data has been included. In the examples, the "EXT" and "GRP" fields are
locked fields and therefore left blank.
When first entering a MODIFY operation the system is in Data Entry mode. In this mode modifications to
individual stations are performed. The system asks whether confirmation is required for each modification, and
whether the original and/or new values should be displayed. In Data Entry mode a complete command line,
without ranges or automatic increments, must be entered.
NOTES:
1. Each input line is terminated with a Carriage Return (), not shown.
2. User entered data is shown in Boldface type.
3. An arrow (->) indicates a .
OPERATION = MODIFY 
CONFIRM EACH MODIFICATION (YES/NO) = NO 
DISPLAY ORIGINAL VALUES = NO 
DISPLAY NEW VALUES = NO 
EQUIP # PRM DN TYPE PAT A1 A2 EXT RNG COS DRL FRL QPL ANSPOS GRP
NAME
10401
NO NO
5
2
M EXMPLE
ENTER NEW LINE
10402
ENTER NEW LINE
10405

3

DEPT
DOC

1

2020

ENTER NEW LINE


Figure 2-8
MODIFY Operation - Data Entry Mode
To go from Data Entry to Setup mode, enter a  on a 'clear line'. Upon completion of all
modifications, the system automatically returns to Data Entry mode.

2-13

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000

PERCEPTION 4000

EXAMPLES

OPERATION = MODIFY 
CONFIRM EACH MODIFICATION (YES/NO) = YES 
DISPLAY ORIGINAL VALUES = YES 
DISPLAY NEW VALUES = YES 
EQUIP # PRM DN TYPE PAT A1 A2 EXT RNG COS DRL FRL QPL ANSPOS GRP

SETUP MODE:
 (Optional)
EQUIP # PRM DN TYPE PAT A1 A2 EXT RNG COS DRL FRL QPL ANSPOS GRP
10507:
15
1003
->
10510
PRIME ENTITIES TO BE MODIFIED: 4
ENDING VALUE: 10510
CONTINUE (C/R), ABORT () = 

NAME

DEPT

NAME

DEPT

NAME

DEPT

EQUIP # PRM DN TYPE PAT A1 A2 EXT RNG COS DRL FRL QPL ANSPOS GRP
OLD:
10507
5085
2020 2
NO NO . . . RNG 2
2
1
2
1000
...
NEW:
10507
5085
2020 2
NO NO . . . RNG 2
15
1
2
1003
...

STA 10507

(YES/NO) = YES 
OLD:
10508
5095
2010
NEW:
10508
5095
2010

1

NO NO . . .

RNG

3

5

4

6

1000

...

STA 10508

1

NO NO . . .

RNG

3

15

4

6

1003

...

STA 10508

(YES/NO) = YES 
OLD:
10509
5105
2010
NEW:
10509
5105
2010

1

NO NO . . .

RNG

3

5

4

6

1000

...

STA 10509

1

NO NO . . .

RNG

3

15

4

6

1003

...

STA 10509

(YES/NO) = YES 
OLD:
10510
5115
2010
NEW:
10510
5115
2010

1

NO NO . . .

RNG

3

5

4

6

1000

...

STA 10510

1

NO NO . . .

RNG

3

15

4

6

1003

...

STA 10510

STA 10507

(YES/NO) = YES 
DATA ENTRY MODE:
ENTER NEW LINE


Figure 2-9
MODIFY Operation - Setup Mode (1)
In Figure 2-9, modifications were made to equipment numbers 10507 through 10510. The "DRL" and "ANSPOS"
fields were changed to 15 and 1003 respectively. Original and new values were displayed, and a confirmation was
requested after each modification was made.

2-14

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000

PERCEPTION 4000

EXAMPLES

In the final MODIFY operation example, three entities are modified with confirmation for each modification and
display of original values. Display of new values is not requested.

OPERATION = MODIFY 
CONFIRM EACH MODIFICATION (YES/NO) = YES 
DISPLAY ORIGINAL VALUES = YES 
DISPLAY NEW VALUES = NO 
EQUIP # PRM DN TYPE PAT A1 A2 EXT RNG COS DRL FRL QPL ANSPOS GRP

SETUP MODE:
 (Optional)
EQUIP # PRM DN TYPE PAT A1 A2 EXT RNG COS DRL FRL QPL ANSPOS GRP
10512:
1003
10514
PRIME ENTITIES TO BE MODIFIED: 2
ENDING VALUE: 10514
CONTINUE (C/R), ABORT () = 
EQUIP # PRM DN TYPE PAT A1 A2 EXT RNG COS DRL FRL QPL ANSPOS GRP
OLD:
10512
5165
2010 1
NO NO . . . RNG 3
6
5
2
1002
...
(YES/NO) = YES 
OLD:
10513
5166
2020

2

NO NO . . .

RNG

2

5

1

4

1002

...

(YES/NO) = YES 
OLD:
10514
5170
2020

2

NO NO . . .

RNG

2

5

1

4

1002

...

NAME

DEPT

NAME

DEPT

NAME

DEPT

(YES/NO) = YES 
DATA ENTRY MODE:
ENTER NEW LINE

OPERATION =

Figure 2-10
MODIFY Operation - Setup Mode (2)

EXAMPLES OF DISPLAY OPERATIONS
All fields in a DISPLAY operation are optional. Data that is output in a DISPLAY report is controlled by setting
conditions in any of the optional fields. All of the conditions specified must be met before the 'equipment' displays
on the output device.
Ranges may be entered in each of the numeric fields to set lower and upper limits to the values that are to be
displayed. If no data is entered, the minimum and maximum values for the field are set automatically. A single
number may be entered in a numeric field, thereby limiting output to equipment that matches the number for that
field. For fields that expect 'keywords' such as the "TYPE" field, if no data is entered the system displays all types.
If data is entered in this field, then only equipment matching the 'keyword' displays.

2-15

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000

PERCEPTION 4000

EXAMPLES

For 'text' fields, like the 'keyword' fields, if no data is entered, the match is always successful. If data is entered,
the characters entered must exactly match a subset of the characters stored for the equipment. For example, by
entering AD in the "DEPT" field in the following examples, all stations with the department name of ADMN display.
If the character sequence entered exactly matches the same sequence of characters within the text string stored
for the equipment, the entire text string is considered as having been matched and the equipment is displayed (if
all other conditions have been successfully matched). Leading and trailing spaces are ignored.
To display a complete listing of the data base, enter a  and press . The following figures
illustrate various DISPLAY operations.
NOTES:
1. Each input line is terminated with a Carriage Return (), not shown.
2. User entered data is shown in Boldface type.

OPERATION = DISPLAY 
SETUP MODE:
EQUIP # PRM DN TYPE PAT A1 A2 EXT RNG COS DRL FRL QPL ANSPOS GRP


10401
10402
10403
10404
10405
10501
10502
10503
10504
10505
10506
10507
10508
10509
10510
10511
10512
10513
10514
10515
10516

5001
5002
5003
5016
5015
5025
5035
5045
5055
5065
5075
5085
5095
5105
5115
5125
5165
5166
5170
5185
5186

2010
2010
2010
2010
2020
2010
2010
2010
2020
2020
2020
2020
2010
2010
2010
2010
2010
2020
2020
2010
2020

1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
1
2

NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO

NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO

...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...

RNG
RNG
RNG
RNG
RNG
RNG
RNG
RNG
RNG
RNG
RNG
RNG
RNG
RNG
RNG
RNG
RNG
RNG
RNG
RNG
RNG

3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
2
2
2
2
3
3
3
3
3
2
2
3
2

5
1
5
5
5
5
5
5
2
2
2
15
15
15
15
5
6
5
5
6
5

2
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
1
1
1
1
4
4
4
4
5
1
1
5
1

3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
2
2
2
2
6
6
6
3
2
4
4
2
4

1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
1003
1003
1003
1003
1000
1003
1003
1003
1003
1003

...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...

NAME

MOD EXMPL
STA 10402
STA 10403
STA 10404
STA 10405
STA 10501
STA 10502
STA 10503
STA 10504
STA 10505
STA 10506
STA 10507
STA 10508
STA 10509
STA 10510
STA 10511
STA 10512
STA 10513
STA 10514
STA 10515
STA 10516

DEPT

DOC
DOC
DOC
ADMN
ADMN
ADMN
ADMN
ACCT
ADMN
ACCT
ACCT
PRCH
PRCH
PRCH
MFG
MFG
ENG
ENG
ENG
ACCT
ACCT

SETUP MODE:
EQUIP # PRM DN TYPE PAT A1 A2 EXT RNG COS DRL FRL QPL ANSPOS GRP

Figure 2-11
DISPLAY Operation - Complete Database List

2-16

NAME

DEPT

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000

PERCEPTION 4000

EXAMPLES

In the following example, all entities with NO "SEC", a "DRL" of 15, and "ANSPOS" 1003 display.
SETUP MODE:
EQUIP # PRM DN TYPE PAT A1 A2 EXT RNG COS DRL FRL QPL ANSPOS GRP
15
1003
10507
10508
10509
10510

5085
5095
5105
5115

2020
2010
2010
2010

2
1
1
1

NO
NO
NO
NO

NO
NO
NO
NO

...
...
...
...

RNG
RNG
RNG
RNG

2
3
3
3

15
15
15
15

1
4
4
4

2
6
6
6

1003
1003
1003
1003

...
...
...
...

NAME

DEPT

STA 10507
STA 10508
STA 10509
STA 10510

PRCH
PRCH
PRCH
MFG

NAME

DEPT

SETUP MODE:
EQUIP # PRM DN TYPE A1 A2 EXT RNG SEC COS DRL FRL QPL ANSPOS GRP

Figure 2-12
DISPLAY Operation - Specific Attributes Selected
Figure 2-13 illustrates use of ranges in DISPLAY operations. In the first example, "PRM DNs" in the range 5005 to
5055 display. In the second example, equipment numbers between 10401 and 10505 having an "FRL" of 1 and
an "ANSPOS" of 1000 display.

SETUP MODE:
EQUIP # PRM DN TYPE PAT A1 A2 EXT RNG COS DRL FRL QPL ANSPOS GRP
5005:
5055
10404
10405
10501
10502
10503
10504

5016
5015
5025
5035
5045
5055

2010
2020
2010
2010
2010
2020

1
2
1
1
1
2

NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO

NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO

...
...
...
...
...
...

RNG
RNG
RNG
RNG
RNG
RNG

3
3
3
3
3
2

5
5
5
5
5
2

4
4
4
4
4
1

3
3
3
3
3
2

1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
1000

...
...
...
...
...
...

NAME

DEPT

STA 10404
STA 10405
STA 10501
STA 10502
STA 10503
STA 10504

ADMN
ADMN
ADMN
ADMN
ACCT
ADMN

NAME

DEPT

STA 10504

ADMN

SETUP MODE:
EQUIP # PRM DN TYPE PAT A1 A2 EXT RNG COS DRL FRL QPL ANSPOS GRP
1
1000
10401:
10505
10504

5055

2020

2

NO NO . . .

RNG

2

2

1

2

1000

...

Figure 2-13
DISPLAY Operation - Ranges/Fixed Values (1)
Note that only one entity between 10401 and 10505 has an "FRL" of 1 and an "ANSPOS" of 1000.

2-17

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000

PERCEPTION 4000

EXAMPLES

The following example displays all 2020-type stations with data security and a COS between 1 and 9.

SETUP MODE:
EQUIP # PRM DN TYPE PAT A1 A2 EXT RNG COS DRL FRL QPL ANSPOS GRP
2020
1:
9
10405
10504
10513
10514
10516

5015
5055
5166
5170
5186

2020
2020
2020
2020
2020

2
2
2
2
2

NO
NO
NO
NO
NO

NO
NO
NO
NO
NO

...
...
...
...
...

RNG
RNG
RNG
RNG
RNG

3
2
2
2
2

5
2
5
5
5

4
1
1
1
1

3
2
4
4
4

1000
1000
1003
1003
1003

...
...
...
...
...

NAME

DEPT

STA 10405
STA 10504
STA 10513
STA 10514
STA 10516

ADMN
ADMN
ENG
ENG
ACCT

Figure 2-14
DISPLAY Operation - Ranges/Fixed Values (2)
In the final example, a subset of the current text entries is entered in the "NAME" field to display all entities with a
name beginning with STA 105.
SETUP MODE:
EQUIP # PRM DN TYPE PAT A1 A2 EXT RNG COS DRL FRL QPL ANSPOS GRP

10501
10502
10503
10504
10505
10506
10507
10508
10509
10510
10511
10512
10513
10514
10515
10516

5025
5035
5045
5055
5065
5075
5085
5095
5105
5115
5125
5165
5166
5170
5185
5186

2010
2010
2010
2020
2020
2020
2020
2010
2010
2010
2010
2010
2020
2020
2010
2020

1
1
1
2
2
2
2
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
1
2

NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO

NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO

...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...

RNG
RNG
RNG
RNG
RNG
RNG
RNG
RNG
RNG
RNG
RNG
RNG
RNG
RNG
RNG
RNG

3
3
3
2
2
2
2
3
3
3
3
3
2
2
3
2

5
5
5
2
2
2
15
15
15
15
5
6
5
5
6
5

4
4
4
1
1
1
1
4
4
4
4
5
1
1
5
1

3
3
3
2
2
2
2
6
6
6
3
2
4
4
2
4

1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
1003
1003
1003
1003
1000
1003
1003
1003
1003
1003

...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...

NAME
STA 105

DEPT

STA 10501
STA 10502
STA 10503
STA 10504
STA 10505
STA 10506
STA 10507
STA 10508
STA 10509
STA 10510
STA 10511
STA 10512
STA 10513
STA 10514
STA 10515
STA 10516

ADMN
ADMN
ACCT
ADMN
ACCT
ACCT
PRCH
PRCH
PRCH
MFG
MFG
ENG
ENG
ENG
ACCT
ACCT

NAME

DEPT

SETUP MODE:
EQUIP # PRM DN TYPE PAT A1 A2 EXT RNG COS DRL FRL QPL ANSPOS GRP

OPERATION =

Figure 2-15
DISPLAY Operation - Subset of Text Entry

2-18

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000

PERCEPTION 4000

EXAMPLES

HOW TO USE THE  KEY
An  key on the M&A terminal is a multikey entry which consists of the keys .
In these examples, MODIFY and DELETE operations are used to demonstrate various methods for aborting from
any of the operation modes. In a DISPLAY operation, the  key is used to halt output of a report.
NOTE: A  is not needed after an  is entered.
The system immediately acts upon receiving the  key; the current input line aborts, an abort message
appears on the output device, and the cursor goes to the far left column on the next input line. The system
remains in the current operation unless the key is pressed on a 'clear line'. The following figures show examples
of  key operation.
OPERATION = MODIFY 
CONFIRM EACH MODIFICATION (YES/NO) = NO 
DISPLAY ORIGINAL VALUE = YES 
DISPLAY NEW VALUE = NO 
EQUIP # PRM DN TYPE PAT A1 A2 EXT RNG COS DRL FRL QPL ANSPOS GRP
NAME
DEPT
5016
1003
10404
OLD:
2010
1
10404
5016
NO NO . . . RNG 3
5
4
3
1000
. . . STA 10404 ADMN
ENTER NEW LINE
2020
10405
I00201 - Input Line Aborted

2

2010

1

2020

2

10405
OLD:
10405

5015



NO NO . . .

RNG

3

5

4

3

1000

...

STA 10405 ADMN

ENTER NEW LINE

OPERATION = DELETE 
CONFIRM EACH MODIFICATION (YES/NO) = YES 
EQUIP # PRM DN
10514
10514
(YES/NO) = 
ENTER NEW LINE

Figure 2-16
 Key - Data Entry Mode
In the previous example, when the  key is pressed the first time the input line is aborted and then reentered. The second instance shows that when the  key is pressed on a 'clear line' the current MODIFY
operation is aborted and the system goes up one hierarchy level to the Operation level. Next, a DELETE
operation is entered, however, it is then aborted. "EQUIP #" 10514 is not deleted. The system prompts "ENTER
NEW LINE" while remaining in the DELETE operation mode.

2-19

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000

PERCEPTION 4000

EXAMPLES

The following example shows escape operations while in Setup mode. In the first instance,  aborts the
current MODIFY request and returns the system to Data Entry mode. The second  operation aborts the
current line of data input and returns the cursor to a 'clear line' while remaining in Setup mode.
OPERATION = MODIFY 
CONFIRM EACH MODIFICATION (YES/NO) = NO 
DISPLAY ORIGINAL VALUE = YES 
DISPLAY NEW VALUE = NO 
EQUIP # PRM DN TYPE PAT A1 A2 EXT RNG COS DRL FRL QPL ANSPOS GRP

SETUP MODE:
15
1003
10507:
10510
PRIME ENTITIES TO BE MODIFIED: 4
ENDING VALUE: 10510
CONTINUE (C/R), ABORT () = 
G00401 - Operation Aborted

NAME

DEPT

NAME


DEPT

DATA ENTRY MODE:
ENTER NEW LINE

SETUP MODE:
 (Optional)
EQUIP # PRM DN TYPE PAT A1 A2 EXT RNG COS DRL FRL QPL ANSPOS GRP
10512:
1003
Input Line Aborted
10514:
10516
PRIME ENTITIES TO BE MODIFIED: 3
ENDING VALUE: 10516
CONTINUE (C/R), ABORT () =

Figure 2-17
 Key - MODIFY Operation, Setup Mode
In a DELETE operation, when the system encounters an "Equipment In Use" situation, you have the option of
forcing the equipment to the idle state, waiting until the equipment becomes idle, or canceling the remaining
removal requests by pressing .
If "WAIT FOR IDLE" is selected, the system waits for the entity to become idle, and then carries out the removal
request. An  may be performed to abort the waiting process. After pressing the  key, a timeout
occurs and a message displays giving the options to force or abort the DELETE operation. Pressing 
again aborts the request and places the console in Data Entry mode. Figure 2-18 illustrates  key usage in
DELETE operations.

2-20

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000

PERCEPTION 4000

EXAMPLES

OPERATION = DELETE 
CONFIRM EACH MODIFICATION (YES/NO) = NO 
EQUIP # PRM DN

SETUP MODE:
10503:
10505
PRIME ENTITIES TO BE DELETED: 3
ENDING VALUE: 10505
CONTINUE (C/R), ABORT () = 
DATA ENTRY MODE:
ENTER NEW LINE

SETUP MODE:
10503:
10505
PRIME ENTITIES TO BE DELETED: 3
ENDING VALUE: 10505
CONTINUE (C/R), ABORT () = 
EQUIP #

PRM DN

10504
EQUIPMENT IN USE:
1.
FORCE TO IDLE
2.
REMOVE WHEN IDLE
 CANCEL REMAINING REMOVAL REQUESTS
ACTION = 
DATA ENTRY MODE:
ENTER NEW LINE

SETUP MODE:
10509:
10516
PRIME ENTITIES TO BE DELETED: 8
ENDING VALUE: 10516
CONTINUE (C/R), ABORT () = 
EQUIP #

PRM DN

10513
EQUIPMENT BUSY:
1.
FORCE TO IDLE
2.
REMOVE WHEN IDLE
 CANCEL REMAINING REMOVAL REQUESTS
ACTION = 2  . . . . 
10513
EQUIPMENT BUSY:
1.
FORCE TO IDLE
 ABORT OPERATION
ACTION = 
DATA ENTRY MODE:
ENTER NEW LINE

OPERATION =

Figure 2-18
 Key - DELETE Operation, Setup Mode

2-21

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000

PERCEPTION 4000

EXAMPLES

HOW TO USE THE  COMMAND
In this example, the MODIFY operation is used to demonstrate how to use the "Refresh Last Prompt" command
(). If entered on a 'clear line', the command redisplays the command header. If the command is
entered within an input line, both the command header and the current input line are redisplayed. The mode in
which the command is entered is not altered.  is useful in displaying the command header prior
to producing a report or to reaffirm the location of a particular field. The following figures illustrate  operation.

OPERATION = MODIFY 
CONFIRM EACH MODIFICATION (YES/NO) = YES
DISPLAY ORIGINAL VALUES = NO
DISPLAY NEW VALUES = NO
EQUIP # PRM DN TYPE PAT A1 A2 EXT RNG COS DRL FRL QPL ANSPOS GRP
10404
5016
1003

NAME

DEPT

NAME

DEPT

NAME

DEPT

(YES/NO) = Y 
ENTER NEW LINE
10405
2020 
EQUIP # PRM DN TYPE PAT A1 A2 EXT RNG COS DRL FRL QPL ANSPOS GRP
2020 2
10405
*

* The cursor would be relocated here after redisplaying the header and current input line.
Figure 2-19
 Operation - Data Entry Mode

ENTER NEW LINE

SETUP MODE:

EQUIP # PRM DN TYPE PAT A1 A2 EXT RNG COS DRL FRL QPL ANSPOS GRP

Figure 2-20
 Operation - Setup Mode

HELP EXAMPLES
Following are several examples to illustrate the various HELP levels.

COMMAND SELECTION LEVEL
The first set of figures illustrate a typical HELP session with the entry point from the COMMAND selection level.

2-22

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000

PERCEPTION 4000

EXAMPLES

COMMAND = ?

Figure 2-21
Entry into HELP Operation - Command Level
The system immediately goes into HELP operation mode.
HELP MENU
Release X.X
Version X.X.X Day Month Date and Time
Select one item:
1. Command Category
2. MMI Tutorial
3. System Messages
4. Control Keys
Q. Quit Help Operation
ITEM NUMBER = 1 

Figure 2-22
HELP Menu - Command Level

HELP MENU
Release X.X
Version X.X.X Day Month Date and Time
Select one item:
1. ADMINISTRATION
3. LCR
5. DATA
7. DIALING
9. LOGOUT
11. NETWORK
13. STATION
15. TRUNK
Q. Quit Help Operation
U. Go Up One Hierarchy Level

2. APPLICATION PROCESSOR
4. ATTENDANT
6. DIAGNOSTIC
8. FAULT
10. MAINTENANCE
12. RESTRICT
14. SYSTEM
16. UTILITY

ITEM NUMBER = 5 

Figure 2-23
Command Categories

2-23

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000

PERCEPTION 4000

EXAMPLES

Item 5 (DATA) produces a list of the names and identifiers for every command available for the selected category.
HELP MENU
Release X.X
Version X.X.X Day Month Date and Time
Select one item:
1. DATA_ASSIGN
2. DATA_HUNTING
3. DATA_INT_PARAMETERS
4. DATA_STA_PARAMETERS
5. HIGH_USAGE_DATA
6. MODEM_POOL_ASSIGN
7. NAME_DIALING
Q. Quit Help Operation
U. Go Up One Hierarchy Level

(360)
(366)
(361)
(362)
(368)
(347)
(367)

ITEM NUMBER = 2 

Figure 2-24
List of Specific Commands

At this point the command overlay may need to be loaded from the disk into the system. Therefore, there may be
a slight delay, unless the selected command has already been loaded.

HELP MENU
Release X.X
Version X.X.X Day Month Date and Time
Select one item:
Command ID: (cmd366)
1. General Information
2. Operations
Q. Quit Help Operation
U. Go Up One Hierarchy Level

ITEM NUMBER = 1 

Figure 2-25
Specific Command Main Menu

2-24

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000

PERCEPTION 4000

EXAMPLES

Data Hunting Assignment Command (cmd366)
- to ADD, DELETE, MODIFY, and DISPLAY Data Hunt groups
Coverage:
Data Hunt Group Number, Group Name, Pilot Directory Number
Member Number, and Member Directory Number
Dependency:
1) Prerequisite commands:
- Data Station Assignment (cmd360)
2) This command may be needed by:
- Name Dialing Assignment (cmd367)

Figure 2-26
General Command Information

HELP MENU
Release X.X
Version X.X.X Day Month Date and Time
Select one item:
Command ID: (cmd366)
1. General Information
2. Operations
Q. Quit Help Operation
U. Go Up One Hierarchy Level

ITEM NUMBER = Q 
COMMAND =

Figure 2-27
Exit from HELP Operation
OPERATION SELECTION LEVEL
The following examples show a typical HELP session with the entry point from the OPERATION selection level. If
the command overlay needs to be loaded from the disk into the system, there may be some delay, unless the
selected command has already been loaded.

COMMAND = DATA_HUNTING 
COMMAND NUMBER: 366
OPERATION = ?

Figure 2-28
Entry into HELP Operation - Operation Level

2-25

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000

PERCEPTION 4000

EXAMPLES

The system immediately goes into the HELP operation mode.

HELP MENU
Release X.X
Version X.X.X Day Month Date and Time
Select one item:
Command ID: (cmd366)
1. ADD
2. DELETE
3. MODIFY
4. DISPLAY
5. Field Parameters
Q. Quit Help Operation

ITEM NUMBER = 3 

Figure 2-29
Command Operations Menu

MODIFY:
— To modify a data hunt group or attributes for group
Form:
GRP #

req

NAME

PILOT DN

MEM #

opt

opt

MEM DN

opt

Figure 2-30
MODIFY Operation Information
The notation under the "MEM #" and "MEM DN" fields (OPT ---> OPT) indicates that a relationship exists between
the two fields. If data is entered in the "MEM #" field, data must be entered in the "MEM DN" field. If the "MEM #"
field is left empty, data must not be entered in the "MEM DN" field.

2-26

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000

PERCEPTION 4000

EXAMPLES

HELP MENU
Release X.X
Version X.X.X Day Month Date and Time
Select one item:
Command ID: (cmd366)
1. ADD
2. DELETE
3. MODIFY
4. DISPLAY
5. Field Parameters
Q. Quit Help Operation

ITEM NUMBER = 5 
HELP MENU
Release X.X
Version X.X.X Day Month Date and Time
Select one item:
Command ID: (cmd366)
1. ADD
Field Parameters
2. DELETE Field Parameters
3. MODIFY Field Parameters
4. DISPLAY Field Parameters
Q. Quit Help Operation
U. Go Up One Hierarchy Level

ITEM NUMBER = 3 

Figure 2-31
Field Parameter Menus

2-27

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000

PERCEPTION 4000

EXAMPLES

HELP MENU
Release X.X
Version X.X.X Day Month Date and Time
Select one item:
Command ID: (cmd366)
1. GRP #
2. NAME
3. PILOT DN
4. MEM#
5. MEM DN
Q. Quit Help Operation
U. Go Up One Hierarchy Level
ITEM NUMBER = 2 

Figure 2-32
MODIFY Operation - Field Parameter Menu

Data Hunt Group Name (NAME)
ASCII
Type:
Text
Value:
0 to 9 ASCII characters
Format:
Keyword: Not allowed
Required: N/A
Not allowed
Range:
Loop Field: Not allowed
- Delete token (^D) is allowed in a MODIFY operation
- The Data Hunt Group Name does not need to be specified for a Data Hunt Group

Figure 2-33
Field Parameter Description

2-28

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000

PERCEPTION 4000

EXAMPLES

HELP MENU
Release X.X
Version X.X.X Day Month Date and Time
Select one item:
Command ID: (cmd366)
1. GRP #
2. NAME
3. PILOT DN
4. MEM #
5. MEM DN
Q. Quit Help Operation
U. Go Up One Hierarchy Level

ITEM NUMBER = U 
HELP MENU
Release X.X
Version X.X.X Day Month Date and Time
Select one item:
Command ID: (cmd366)
1. ADD
Field Parameters
2. DELETE Field Parameters
3. MODIFY Field Parameters
4. DISPLAY Field Parameters
Q. Quit Help Operation
U. Go Up One Hierarchy Level

ITEM NUMBER = U 
HELP MENU
Release X.X
Version X.X.X Day Month Date and Time
Select one item:
Command ID: (cmd366)
1. ADD
2. DELETE
3. MODIFY
4. DISPLAY
5. Field Parameters
Q. Quit Help Operation

Figure 2-34
Stepping Up the Hierarchy Levels

2-29

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000

PERCEPTION 4000

EXAMPLES

PARAMETER SELECTION LEVEL
This example shows a typical HELP session with the entry point from the parameter selection level; MODIFY
operation. Upon entry of the "?", the system immediately goes into HELP operation mode and automatically
displays information for that field. You may tab over to any field that is not locked for HELP information.

COMMAND = 330 
COMMAND NAME: STA_ASSIGN
OPERATION = MODIFY 
CONFIRM EACH MODIFICATION (YES/NO) = NO
DISPLAY ORIGINAL VALUES = YES
DISPLAY NEW VALUES = YES
EQUIP # PRM DN TYPE PAT A1 A2 EXT RNG COS DRL FRL QPL ANSPOS GRP
11101
4220
?

NAME

DEPT

NAME

DEPT

Station Type (TYPE)
Type:
Keyword
Value:
Not allowed
Format:
N/A
Keyword: 2010
- 10-key digital telephone
2020
- 20-key digital telephone
ID10
- 10-key digital telephone with DIU
ID20
- 20-key digital telephone with DIU
ANLG - Analog telephone
ANMW - Analog telephone with Message Waiting
AVMS - Analog telephone with VMS port
EK01 - Electronic telephone with 1 line key and 3 fixed keys
EK10 - Electronic telephone with 10 flexible keys and 4 fixed keys
EK20 - Electronic telephone with 20 flexible keys and 4 fixed keys
EK2D - Electronic telephone with 20 flexible keys, 4 fixed keys, and display
DK10 - DKT digital telepholne with 10 flexible keys
DK1D - DKT digital telephone with 10 flexible keys and display
DK20 - DKT digital telephone with 20 flexible keys
DK2D - DKT digital telephone with 20 flexible keys and display
Required: ADD operation only
Range:
Not allowed
Loop Field: Not allowed
EQUIP # PRM DN TYPE PAT A1 A2 EXT RNG COS DRL FRL QPL ANSPOS GRP
11101
4220
*

Figure 2-35
Parameter Level HELP Screen

You may now complete the MODIFY operation for the STATION_ASSIGN command, or abort and return to the
"OPERATION=" command level.

2-30

Chapter 3

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000

PERCEPTION 4000

COMMANDS

The PERCEPTION 4000 Maintenance & Administration (M&A) commands are detailed in this chapter.

COMMAND FORMAT
Commands are presented in the following format:

COMMAND NAME (NUMERIC ID)
The numeric ID following the command name is a three-digit identifier used to call up the command on the M&A
console. A brief description follows the command name line. The command keyword and category name are then
listed. Note that commands may be addressed by either their keyword or their numeric ID.
Command Keyword:

An alternative input used to call up the command on the M&A console

Category Name:

Specifies the command category, such as a Station, Trunk, or Attendant Console
command

PREREQUISITE COMMANDS
Any commands that must be executed prior to the current command are listed in this section. For example, before
programming the ACD Group Parameter Assignment command (CMD 357), the ACD group number must be
assigned with the ACD Group Assignment command (CMD 355). Therefore, CMD 355 is listed as a prerequisite
for CMD 357.

OPERATIONS
Each applicable operation is explained, and the row/field-level command header for the operation is illustrated.
Parameters for the command are designated as required (req), optional (opt), locked, or output only.

PARAMETERS
Each field parameter is defined in this section. The field's type of input is listed, such as decimal input, text,
keywords, etc. Additional information includes input format, values, whether the field is a loop field, and whether
ranges are permitted in this field. All commands having a MODIFY operation and no ADD operation contain
default values. However, not all commands with ADD operations have defaults.

SYSTEM ERROR MESSAGES
Error and information messages pertaining to the command are listed in this section. These messages include
indications of incorrect input, informational matter, and system messages. A complete listing of all system error
messages appears in Chapter 4.

3-1

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000

PERCEPTION 4000

COMMANDS

COMMENTS (Optional)
This optional section provides additional information pertinent to the command.

RELATED COMMANDS (Optional)
Commands which may be required to achieve full realization for a given application are listed. For example, in the
Announcement Pattern Assignment command (CMD 353), announcement pattern numbers are assigned and
defined for up to 50 patterns. Since these pattern numbers may be used in the ACD Group Parameter
Assignment command (CMD 357), CMD 357 is listed under related commands for CMD 353.

COMMAND NOTATIONS
The following abbreviations, symbols, or notations are used in the commands:
req
opt
output only
locked
--->

=
=
=
=
=

Data is required in this field.
Data is optional in this field.
Data is displayed in this field. Input is not accepted.
This field is reserved for future use.
Indicates that a relationship exists between a secondary key and one or more
attributes. A secondary key must be entered if the related attribute is being
selected.

MAINTENANCE & ADMINISTRATION COMMANDS
Following is a list of the M&A commands for Man-Machine Interface (MMI) operation. Appendix B lists the
commands by their Numeric IDs.

Command Name

Account Code Assignment
ACD Agent Assignment
ACD Group Assignment
ACD Group Parameter Assignment
ACD Status Display and Remote Logout
Alarm/Fault Display and Reset
Announcement Pattern Assignment
Area Code Restriction Tables
Area/Office Code Restriction Tables
Attendant Feature Key Assignment
Attendant Group Assignment
Attendant Incoming Call Priority Assignment
Attendant Password Assignment
Attendant Position Assignment
Authorization Code Assignment
Autodial Number Display

3-2

Numeric
ID
348
356
355
357
358
160
353
341
339
371
372
373
375
370
349
324

Command Keyword

ACCOUNT_CODE_ASSIGN
ACD_AGENT_ASSIGN
ACD_GROUP_ASSIGN
ACD_PARAMETERS
ACD_DISP_LOGOUT
ALM/FAULT_DISP/RESET
ANNOUNCEMENT_PAT
AC_RESTRICT
AC/OC_RESTRICT_TBL
ATT_KEY_ASSIGN
ATT_GROUP_ASSIGN
CALL_PRIORITY_ASSIGN
ATT_PASSWORDS
ATT_POSITION_ASSIGN
AUTHORIZATION_CODES
AUTO_DIAL_DISP

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000

PERCEPTION 4000
Call Forwarding Destination Display
Call Pickup Group Assignment
Canned Text/Advisory Message Creation
Class of Service Assignment
Clock Provider Assignment
Clock Reset
Common Carrier Assignment
Coordinated Numbering Plan Assignment
Country Code Assignment
Country Code Restriction Tables
Crash Dump Display
Data Hunting Assignment
Data Interface Parameter Assignment
Data Station Assignment
Data Station Parameter Assignment
Data Structure Display
Data Structure Display 2
Destination Restriction Level Assignment
Device Service Status
Dialing Definition
Dictation Group/Machine Assignment
DID/CCSA/DNIS ACD Parameter Assignment
DID/CCSA/DNIS DISA LDN Assignment
DID/CCSA/DNIS LDN Assignment
DID/CCSA/DNIS Trunk Group Assignment
Digital Carrier Channel Assignment
Disk File Manipulation
DTMF Receiver Assignment
Emergency Call Destination Assignment
Exception Restriction Tables
Facility Restriction Level Profile Assignment
File Consolidation
File Dump
Forced Account Code Toll-free Tables
Group Speed Calling List Assignment
Group Speed Calling Member Assignment
High Usage Data Destination Assignment
I/O Port Assignment
I/O Port Configuration Assignment
Initiate Switchover
Interchangeable Office Code Table
Intercom Group Member Display
Internal Call Alternate Routing Assignment
ISDN Channel Group Assignment
ISDN Channel Group Hunting
ISDN IPRC and IPRI Card Assignment
ISDN Service Min/Max Assignment
ISDN Trunk Group Parameter Assignment
LCR Area Code Routing Assignment
LCR Area/Office Code Routing Assignment
LCR Country Code Routing Assignment

COMMANDS
325
346
328
334
417
121
344
303
335
338
164
366
361
360
362
167
169
337
208
317
401
359
315
316
314
413
152
416
345
340
387
153
151
352
351
350
368
415
414
102
318
333
374
423
424
422
425
421
381
382
380

CALL_FORWARD_DISP
CALL_PICKUP
MESSAGE_ASSIGN
CLASS_OF_SERVICE
CLOCK_PROVIDER
CLOCK_RESET
COMMON_CARRIERS
CNP_ASSIGN
CC_ASSIGN
CC_RESTRICT
CRASH_DUMP_DISP
DATA_HUNTING
DATA_INT_PARAMETERS
DATA_ASSIGN
DATA_STA_PARAMETERS
DATA_STRUCTURE_DISP
DATA_STRUCTURE_DISP2
DRL_ASSIGN
DEVICE_STATUS
DIALING_DEFINITION
DICTATION_ASSIGN
DID/CCSA/DNIS_ACD
DID/CCSA_DISA
DID/CCSA_LDN
DID/CCSA_TG_ASSIGN
DIGITAL_CARRIER
FILE_MANIPULATION
DTMF_RECEIVER_ASSIGN
EMERGENCY_CALL
EXCEPT_RESTRICT
FRLP_ASSIGN
FILE_CONSOLIDATION
FILE_DUMP
FAC_TF_TABLE
GROUP_SC_LIST
GROUP_SC_MEMBERS
HIGH_USAGE_DATA
I/O_PORT_ASSIGN
I/O_PORT_CONFIG
SWITCHOVER
IOC_TABLE
INTERCOM_DISPLAY
INT_CALL_ALT_ROUTING
CGN_ASSIGN
CGN_HUNTING
IPRC_IPRI_ASSIGN
SERVICE_MIN/MAX
ISDN_TRK_GRP_PARA
AC_ROUTING
AC/OC_ROUTING
CC_ROUTING

3-3

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000

PERCEPTION 4000
LCR Digit Translation Profile Assignment
LCR Routing Table Assignment
LCR Special Routing Assignment
LCR/Authorization TZ Change Assignment
Label Print
Logical Line Call Forward Assignment
M&A Security Level and Access Assignment
Memory Test
Miscellaneous Device Assignment
Modem Pool Assignment
Name Dialing Assignment
Night Bell Assignment
Numbering Plan Assignment
Patch Report
Private/Hotline Assignment
Redundancy Selection Assignment
SMDR Configuration Assignment
Secondary Line Appearances Display
Station Assignment
Station Feature Key Assignment
Station Feature Key Pattern Assignment
Station Hunting Assignment
Station-Level Parameter Assignment
System DISA Security Code Assignment
System Holiday Assignment
System Inventory
System Number Summary
System Option Flag Assignment
System Speed Calling Assignment
System Timer Assignment
T-1 Clock Provider Selection Assignment
Terminal Maintenance
Time Activated Command Programming
Time Zone Assignment
Timeout Routing Destination Assignment
Trace Setup
Traffic Measurement Object Assignment
Traffic Measurement Setup Assignment
Traffic Measurement Time Zone Assignment
Trunk Assignment
Trunk Group Assignment
Trunk Group Parameter Assignment
Trunk Group Routing Assignment
Trunk Group Toll-free Tables
Trunk Hunting Assignment
Trunk PP Parameter Change
Trunk Routing Assignment
Trunk-to-Trunk Connection Assignment
UCD Group Assignment
UNP Routing Assignment
Uniform Numbering Plan Assignment
Voice Paging/Code-Call Assignment

3-4

COMMANDS
386
383
384
343
312
322
403
144
400
347
367
405
300
143
332
410
409
327
330
331
320
342
329
321
404
210
326
408
402
407
412
206
110
336
323
168
902
900
901
313
310
420
307
311
309
364
308
305
354
302
301
319

LCR_DIGIT_PROFILES
LCR_ROUTE_ASSIGN
LCR_SPECIAL_ROUTING
LCR/AUTH_TZ
LABEL_PRINT
LLINE_CALL_FORWARD
M/A_SECURITY_ASSIGN
MEMORY_TEST
MISC_DEVICE_ASSIGN
MODEM_POOL_ASSIGN
NAME_DIALING
NIGHT_BELL_ASSIGN
NUMBERING_PLAN
PATCH_REPORT
PVT/HOT_ASSIGN
REDUNDANCY_ASSIGN
SMDR_ASSIGN
SECONDARY_LINE_DISP
STA_ASSIGNMENT
STA_KEY_ASSIGN
STA_KEY_PATTERN
STA_HUNTING
STA_PARAMETERS
DISA_CODES
HOLIDAY_ASSIGN
SYS_INVENTORY
SYS_NUM_PLAN
SYS_OPTION_ASSIGN
SYS_SC_ASSIGN
SYS_TIMER_ASSIGN
T1_CLOCK_ASSIGN
TERMINAL_MAINT
TIME_ACT_COM
TZ_ASSIGN
TIMEOUT_ROUTING
TRACE_SETUP
TRAFFIC_OBJECT
TRAFFIC_SETUP
TRAFFIC_TIME_ZONE
TK_ASSIGN
TG_ASSIGN
TG_PARAMETER
TG_ROUTING
TG_TF_TABLES
TRUNK_HUNTING
TRUNK_PARAMETER_CHANGE
TRUNK_ROUTING
TRUNK_CONNECTIONS
UCD_GROUP_ASSIGN
UNP_ROUTING
UNP_ASSIGN
VP/CC_ASSIGN

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
ACCOUNT CODE ASSIGNMENT (CMD 348)
PERCEPTION 4000

COMMANDS

ACCOUNT CODE ASSIGNMENT
The Account Code Assignment command is used to display, add, or delete assigned system account codes.
Command Keyword:

ACCOUNT_CODE_ASSIGN

Category Name:

Station

PREREQUISITE COMMANDS
Numbering Plan Assignment CMD 300

OPERATIONS
Available operations:

ADD
DELETE
DISPLAY

The function and required data fields for each operation are described as follows:
ADD

ACCOUNT CODE

ACCOUNT CODE

req

ACCOUNT CODE

ACCOUNT CODE

opt

This operation is used to add account codes to the system's database table.

DELETE

ACCOUNT CODE

req

ACCOUNT CODE

ACCOUNT CODE

ACCOUNT CODE

opt

ThIs operation is used to delete account codes from the system's database table. If ALL is entered in the first
field, then all account codes will be removed. Confirmation must be given prior to the removal of the account
codes.

3-5

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
ACCOUNT CODE ASSIGNMENT (CMD 348)
PERCEPTION 4000

COMMANDS

DISPLAY
ACCOUNT CODE

ACCOUNT CODE

ACCOUNT CODE

ACCOUNT CODE

opt

ThIs operation is used to display account codes in the database table. If  is entered in the first field, then
all account codes in the database will be displayed.

PARAMETERS
This section defines input permitted for each field. Any variations for a particular operation are noted separately.
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:
RANGE:

ACCOUNT CODE
Decimal
All account codes must have the same length (length is defined in CMD 300)
Up to a maximum of 15 digits
Not allowed
Keyword:

ALL

- All account codes will be deleted (for DELETE operation only)

This field is used to add, delete, or display the system's account codes. In ADD operation, the entry of new
account codes will add them to the system database. Each entered account code must be the length assigned in
CMD 300. In DELETE operation, either specific account codes can be entered for deletion, or the keyword ALL
can be entered to delete all account codes at once. If ALL is entered, then the system will ask for a confirmation
prior to actually deleting the codes. In DISPLAY operation, a  can be entered to display all assigned
account codes, or a prefix can be entered to display a specific group of account codes. For example, to display all
account codes that begin with the numbers "20," simply enter 20 in the first "ACCOUNT CODE" field.

SYSTEM MESSAGES
The following error messages are unique to this command.
C34800
C34801
C34802
C34803
C34804
C34805
I34806

3-6

-

No match
Account code already defined
Account code not found
No space
Account code's length does not agree with preassigned length (CMD 300)
Invalid account code
Accessing and sorting

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
ACD AGENT ASSIGNMENT (CMD 356)
PERCEPTION 4000

COMMANDS

ACD AGENT ASSIGNMENT (CMD 356)
The ACD Agent Assignment command assigns agent ID codes and names to an Automatic Call Distribution
(ACD) group. In addition, the command defines whether the agent may perform an intra-ACD group call pickup,
and whether a given agent may be picked up by another agent in the same group.
Command Keyword:

ACD_AGENT_ASSIGN

Category Name:

Station

PREREQUISITE COMMAND
ACD Group Assignment (CMD 355)

OPERATIONS
Available operations:

ADD
DELETE
MODIFY
DISPLAY

The function and required data fields for each operation are described in this section.

ADD

GRP#

AGT

PU1 FLAG

PU2 FLAG

COS

DRL

FRLP

QPL

NAME

req

The ADD operation adds an Agent ID code, call Pick-up flag, call Picked-up flag, and Agent’s name to the
specified ACD Group Number. The COS, DRL, FRLP, and QPL fields are assigned to determine an agent’s
outgoing call placement capabilities.

DELETE

GRP#

AGT

req

This operation deletes an Agent ID code (call Pick-up flag, call Picked-up flag, and the Agent’s name) from the
specified ACD Group Number.

3-7

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
ACD AGENT ASSIGNMENT (CMD 356)
PERCEPTION 4000

COMMANDS

MODIFY

GRP#

AGT

PU1 FLAG

PU2 FLAG

req

COS

DRL

FRLP

QPL

NAME

opt

This operation modifies the call Pick-up flag, call Picked-up flag, and/or the Agent’s name of the specified Agent
ID and ACD Group Number.

DISPLAY

GRP#

INDEX

opt

locked

AGT

PU1 FLAG

PU2 FLAG

COS

DRL

FRLP

QPL

NAME

opt

The DISPLAY operation shows the status of the Call Pick-up Flag, Call Picked-up Flag, Agent’s Name, and the
Agent ID of the ACD Group Number. The "INDEX" field is an output only field and does not accept data input.

PARAMETERS
Each field parameter is described in this section. Any variations for a particular operation are noted separately.
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:
LOOP:
RANGE:

GRP# (ACD Group Number)
Decimal
1 or 2 digits
1 to 32 (or up to maximum system configuration)
Allowed (Primary loop for ADD and DISPLAY operations)
Not allowed
The "GRP #", assigned by the ACD Group Assignment command (CMD 355), is required for
ADD, DELETE, and MODIFY operations. This is a loop field in DISPLAY and ADD operations. If
a  is entered in this field in a DISPLAY operation, all agents in all ACD groups are
displayed.

FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:
LOOP:
RANGE:

AGT (Agent Identification Code)
Decimal with fixed length / Keyword
3 digits / Predefined ASCII characters
000 to 999
Allowed (Secondary loop for a DISPLAY operation)
Not allowed
Keyword: ALL
This field represents the ID codes which are used for referencing each agent. The "AGT" field is

3-8

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
ACD AGENT ASSIGNMENT (CMD 356)
PERCEPTION 4000

COMMANDS

required for ADD, DELETE, and MODIFY operations. This is a loop field in a DISPLAY operation.
If a  is entered, any existing table of Group Numbers and Agents displays. In a DELETE
operation, if ALL is entered, all agent IDs in the specified group are removed.
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:

PU1 FLAG (Call Pick-up Flag One)
Keyword
Predefined ASCII characters
Keywords:

ALW - Pick-up is allowed
DNY - Pick-up is denied

Agents are allowed or denied access to the Intra-group Call Pickup feature with this field. "PU1
FLAG" is required in an ADD operation, and optional in MODIFY and DISPLAY operations.
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:

PU2 FLAG (Call Pick-up Flag Two)
Keyword
Predefined ASCII characters
Keywords:

ALW - Pick-up is allowed
DNY - Pick-up is denied

This field defines whether an agent's call may be picked up by another agent in the same group,
and is required for an ADD operation and optional for MODIFY and DISPLAY operations.
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:
RANGE:
LOOP:

COS (Agent Class of Service)
Decimal
2 digits
1 to 64
Allowed for DISPLAY operation only
Not allowed
This field should be defined when a new agent is added, by using the ADD operation. If no value
is entered in this field, then the default value of 64 will be assigned.

FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:
RANGE:
LOOP:

DRL (Agent Destination Restriction Level)
Decimal
2 digits
1 to 16 (or up to maximum system configuration)
Allowed for DISPLAY operation only
Not allowed
This field should be defined when a new agent is added, by using the ADD operation. If no value
is entered in this field, then the default value of 16 will be assigned.

FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:
RANGE:
LOOP:

FRLP (Agent Facility Restriction Level Profile)
Decimal
2 digits
1 to 32 (or up to maximum system configuration)
Allowed for DISPLAY operation only
Not allowed

3-9

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
ACD AGENT ASSIGNMENT (CMD 356)
PERCEPTION 4000

COMMANDS

This field should be defined when a new agent is added, by using the ADD operation. If no value
is entered in this field, then the default value of 32 will be assigned.
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:
RANGE:
LOOP:

QPL (Agent Queue Priority Level)
Decimal
1 digit
1 to 8
Allowed for DISPLAY operation only
Not allowed
This field should be defined when a new agent is added, by using the ADD operation. If no value
is entered in this field, then the default value of 8 will be assigned.

FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:

NAME (Agent Name)
Text
0 to 9 ASCII characters (including spaces and punctuation)
Each agent ID code may be assigned an agent name which appears on displays and reports.
This field is required for an ADD operation, and is optional for MODIFY and DISPLAY operations.

FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:

INDEX (Index Number)
Decimal (Output only)
1 to 3 digits
1 to 128
This 'output only' field appears in a DISPLAY operation only and is for the convenience of the
M&A supervisor. The number acts as a counter, its value does not indicate an actual position or
set any priority for data entered in this command.

SYSTEM ERROR MESSAGES
The following error messages are unique to this command.
C35600
C35601
C35602
C35603
C35604
C35605
C35606
C35607

3-10

-

Agent identification code is already assigned
Agent identification code is not found
Number of agents exceeds the configured allowance
Group number’s LCPU number is not defined
Group number is not defined
No agent identification code was assigned in ACD group
Agent identification code is still login
Cannot delete group; member(s) are still login

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
ACD GROUP ASSIGNMENT (CMD 355)
PERCEPTION 4000

COMMANDS

ACD GROUP ASSIGNMENT (CMD 355)
The Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) Group Assignment command defines various ACD group attributes as well
as provides the system with information about group and queue size so memory may be allocated. Up to 32 ACD
groups may be assigned in the system.
Command Keyword:

ACD_GROUP_ASSIGN

Category Name:

Station

PREREQUISITE COMMANDS
There are no prerequisites for this command.

OPERATIONS
Available operations:

ADD
DELETE
MODIFY
DISPLAY

The function and required data fields for each operation are described as follows:
ADD

GRP#

PILOT DN

req

NAME

opt

SUP PWD

GRP MON

MAX TERMS

MAX CALLS

req

This operation adds an ACD group and specifies several group attributes. Except for the "NAME", all of the
attributes are required when defining a new group. The "PILOT DN" is a unique number which must not conflict
with any other numbering plan in the system. Looping is permitted for the "GRP#" field since the ADD operation
has the 'interactive mode' feature. Various fields can be entered interactively.

DELETE

GRP#

req

This operation deletes an ACD group which has already been defined in the system. The "GRP#" field is
required. After entering this field, a confirmation message is given before deletion of the group. Looping is
allowed for this field. A DELETE operation is available only when the group is in after-shift mode.

3-11

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
ACD GROUP ASSIGNMENT (CMD 355)
PERCEPTION 4000

COMMANDS

MODIFY

GRP#

PILOT DN

NAME

SUP PWD

GRP MON

req

MAX TERMS

MAX CALLS

opt

This operation modifies the attributes of an ACD group. "GRP#" is the only required field and can be specified in
ranges. The remaining fields are optional and do not accept range input. At least one of the optional fields must
be entered to perform a MODIFY operation.

DISPLAY

GRP#

PILOT DN

NAME

SUP PWD

GRP MON

MAX TERMS

MAX CALLS

opt

This operation displays ACD group attributes that are related to this command. Looping is allowed in the "GRP#"
field and ranges are permitted in the "MAX TERMS" and "MAX CALLS" fields. If a  is entered in the first
field, all of the ACD groups along with their attributes are displayed.

PARAMETERS
Each field parameter is described in this section. Any variations for a particular operation are noted separately.
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:
LOOP:

GRP# (ACD Group Number)
Decimal
1 or 2 digits
1 to 32 (or to the maximum system configuration)
Allowed in ADD, DELETE, and DISPLAY operations
This field defines the ACD group number and is required for ADD, DELETE, and MODIFY
operations. Values are from 1 to 32. If a  is entered for this field in a DISPLAY operation,
the existing table of Group Numbers displays.
When assigning ACD group numbers, it is important to note the relationship between these
numbers and the PERCEPTION 4000 System’s Local Central Processing Units (LCPUs). The
correct assignment of these numbers will help ensure that ACD calls are not dropped when a
system is equipped with redundant processing and a system switchover occurs.
ACD agent stations are installed in the system via the Station Assignment command (CMD 330).
After a station has been installed, it has an identifying equipment number (e.g., 40108), indicating
the Modular Line/Trunk Unit (4), the card slot (01), and the circuit (08) to which it is assigned. A
station’s assigned equipment number determines the LCPU (1 ~ 3) which controls it, since each
LCPU in the system controls specific Modular Line/Trunk Units (shelves). This relationship is
detailed in the following table:

3-12

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
ACD GROUP ASSIGNMENT (CMD 355)
PERCEPTION 4000

COMMANDS

LCPU(X)

Modular Line/Trunk Units (Shelves) Controlled by LCPU(X)

1

1~4

2

5~8

3

9 ~ 10

The number of LCPUs used in a system determines how various ACD groups are supported.
Each agent station must be assigned to an ACD group that is supported by the agent station’s
own LCPU. The agent station’s equipment number (identifying shelf number) must correlate with
its supportive LCPU and its assigned agent group number. The relationship between LCPUs,
ACD groups, and shelves is as follows:
LCPU1
Shelves Supported:
1~4

System
Size

ACD AGENT GROUP SUPPORT ALLOCATION

3 LCPU
System

LCPU3
Shelves Supported:
9 ~ 10

ACD Groups Supported:
1 ~ 32
(All groups are supported
by LCPU1)

1 LCPU
System

2 LCPU
System

LCPU2
Shelves Supported:
5~8

ACD Groups Supported:
1
3
5
7

ACD Groups Supported:
2
4
6
8

31
(All odd-numbered
groups are supported
by LCPU2)

32
(All even-numbered
groups are supported
by LCPU2)

ACD Groups Supported:
1
4
7
10
13
16
19
22
25
28
31

ACD Groups Supported:
2
5
8
11
14
17
20
23
26
29
32

ACD Groups Supported:
3
6
9
12
15
18
21
24
27
30

3-13

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
ACD GROUP ASSIGNMENT (CMD 355)
PERCEPTION 4000

COMMANDS

The following three examples should help illustrate the relationship between LCPUs, ACD
groups, and agent station equipment numbers (shelves).

FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:
LOOP:
RANGE:

EXAMPLE 1:

■
■
■
■

Agent station’s equipment number = 40108
Number of LCPUs in system = 1
(Station is supported by LCPU1)
Assign agent station to any ACD group 1 ~ 32.

EXAMPLE 2:

■
■
■
■

Agent station’s equipment number = 40108
Number of LCPUs in system = 2
(Station is supported by LCPU1)
Assign agent station to any odd-numbered ACD group 1 ~ 31.

EXAMPLE 3:

■
■
■
■

Agent station’s equipment number = 40108
Number of LCPUs in system = 3
(Station is supported by LCPU1)
Assign agent station to ACD group number 1, 4, 7, 10, 13, 16, 19, 22,
25, 28, or 31.

PILOT DN (Pilot Directory Number)
DN Type
1 to 5 digits
0 to 99999
Not allowed
Not allowed
The ACD group pilot number is defined with this field. This is the only entry point into the ACD
group. The number must not conflict with other numbers and access codes in the system's
numbering plan, and must not have a physical device counterpart.

FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:

NAME (Group Name)
Text
0 to 9 ASCII characters
An optional group name may be assigned to each ACD group. This name is displayed by the
internal calling party (if display equipped) and may be up to nine alphanumeric ASCII characters
in length. Embedded spaces are allowed.

FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:
LOOP:
RANGE:

SUP PWD (Supervisor Password)
Dialing Digits
1 to 8 digits
0 to 99999999
Not allowed
Not allowed
Each ACD group may be configured with an ACD supervisor. Generally, the supervisor monitors
and assists agents via his/her telephone. The "SUP PWD" field defines the password the
supervisor must enter when logging into the ACD group.

3-14

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
ACD GROUP ASSIGNMENT (CMD 355)
PERCEPTION 4000
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:

COMMANDS

GRP MON (Supervisor Intergroup Monitor Flag)
Keyword
Predefined ASCII characters
Keywords:

YES - Supervisor intergroup monitor feature enabled
NO - Supervisor intergroup monitor feature disabled

A supervisor is allowed to monitor agents in other groups. This capability provides the supervisor
with a listen-only path. An optional low warning tone can be provided to the agent-side of the call
only if defined so in the system database (refer to the System Option Flag Assignment command,
CMD 408).
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:
LOOP:
RANGE:

MAX TERMS (Maximum Number of Agent Terminals)
Decimal
1 or 2 digits
1 to 64 (or to the maximum system configuration)
Not allowed
Allowed in a DISPLAY operation only
This field, along with the next field (MAX CALLS), allocates memory for the ACD group. The
"MAX TERMS" field sets the upper limit for the number of agents that belong to the group.

FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:
LOOP:
RANGE:

MAX CALLS (Maximum Number of Calls Handled Simultaneously)
Decimal
1 to 3 digits
1 to 100
Not allowed
Allowed in a DISPLAY operation only
This field defines the number of calls that may be handled by a group (including queued, ringing,
and connected calls).

SYSTEM ERROR MESSAGES
The following error messages are unique to this command.
C35500
C35501
C35502
C35503
C35504
C35505
C35506
C35507
C35508
C35509
D35510
D35511
D35512
D35513

-

ACD Group is already defined
ACD Group is not defined
Pilot directory number conflicts with another DN or access code
Check value of maximum calls
Not enough free LDNs
Number of active calls exceeds allowable maximum
Some agents are still active/login; wait and try again later
Agent(s) are login but in unavailable mode; try again later
Supervisor password digits can only be 0 - 9
Check input in fields 2 through 7
Add customer group DB failed in LCPU
Change password failed in LCPU
Change monitor flag failed in LCPU
Change maximum terminal failed in LCPU

3-15

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
ACD GROUP ASSIGNMENT (CMD 355)
PERCEPTION 4000
D35514
D35515
D35516
D35517
D35518
D35519
C35520
C35521

-

COMMANDS

Add group/supervisor LDN failed in LCPU
Not enough space to add agent LDNs in LCPU
Write pilot DN failed in LCPU
Write group to LCPU mapping failed in LCPU
Remove agent LDN failed in LCPU
Remove pilot DN failed in LCPU
Supervisor is still active/logged in
Supervisor/Agents are still active/logged in

COMMENTS
A DELETE operation in this command removes all data input through the ACD Agent Assignment command
(CMD 356) and the ACD Group Parameter Assignment command (CMD 357).

RELATED COMMANDS
ACD Agent Assignment (CMD 356)
ACD Group Parameter Assignment (CMD 357)
Authorization Code Assignment (CMD 349)
Internal Call Alternate Routing Assignment (CMD 374)
Station Hunting Assignment (CMD 342)
System Option Flag Assignment (CMD 408)
Trunk Group Routing Assignment (CMD 307)
Trunk Routing Assignment (CMD 308)

3-16

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
ACD GROUP PARAMETER ASSIGNMENT (CMD 357)
PERCEPTION 4000

COMMANDS

ACD GROUP PARAMETER ASSIGNMENT (CMD 357)
The ACD Group Parameter Assignment command provides numerous ACD group-related information to the
system.
Command Keyword:

ACD_PARAMETERS

Category Name:

Station

PREREQUISITE COMMAND
ACD Group Assignment (355)
If data is entered in the "DAY DEST" and/or "NIT DEST" fields, then an appropriate command may be
required for assignment of the ACD group, UCD group, or voice directory number:
Attendant Group Assignment (CMD 372)
Attendant Position Assignment (CMD 370)
Station Hunting Assignment (CMD 342)
UCD Group Assignment (CMD 354)
If data is entered in the "AP#" field, the following command are required:
Announcement Pattern Assignment (CMD 353)
Miscellaneous Device Assignment (CMD 400)

OPERATIONS
Available operations:

MODIFY
DISPLAY

The function and required data fields for each operation are described as follows:

MODIFY

GRP#

req

DAY DEST

NIT DEST

ALM TON

ALM ON

ALM OFF

INT FLG

AP#

WRK TMR

opt

This operation modifies the attributes of the specified ACD group. "GRP#" is a required field, while all remaining
fields are optional.

3-17

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
ACD GROUP PARAMETER ASSIGNMENT (CMD 357)
PERCEPTION 4000

COMMANDS

DISPLAY

GRP# DAY DEST

NIT DEST ALM TON ALM ON ALM OFF

INT FLG

AP#

WRK TMR

opt

This operation displays the attributes of the specified ACD group. All fields are optional.

PARAMETERS
Each field parameter is described in this section. Any variations for a particular operation are noted separately.
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:
LOOP:

GRP# (ACD Group Number)
Decimal
1 or 2 digits
1 to 32 (or to the maximum system configuration)
Allowed in a DISPLAY operation only
The ACD group number is assigned with the ACD Group Assignment command (CMD 355). In
this command (CMD 357), the group number serves as the primary key for the attributes defined
in the following fields. In a DISPLAY operation, "GRP#" is a loop field. If a  is entered, all
groups in the system display.

FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:

DAY DEST (Daytime Overflow Destination)
DN Type
1 to 5 digits
0 to 99999
This field provides the directory number of the ACD or UCD group to which calls will overflow.
This field must be another ACD or UCD group.

FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:

NIT DEST (Nighttime Overflow Destination)
DN Type
1 to 5 digits
0 to 99999
This field determines where the call overflows to if the ACD group is in NIGHT (after shift) mode.
This destination can be any legal voice directory number in the system.

FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
DEFAULT:

ALM TON (Audible Indication of Queue-size Alarm)
Keyword
Predefined ASCII characters
NO
Keywords:

YES - Audible Alarm Indicator enabled
NO - Audible Alarm Indicator disabled

The ACD group may produce audible and visual alarms at the supervisor's station if enabled in

3-18

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
ACD GROUP PARAMETER ASSIGNMENT (CMD 357)
PERCEPTION 4000

COMMANDS

the "ALM TON" field. When set to YES, an audible alarm goes off when a certain queue size is
exceeded. In addition, the LED associated with the supervisor's  flexible feature key
lights up when an alarm condition occurs. Pressing the  key disables the audible
alarm, but continues to display the LED indication until the queue size drops below a lower
threshold setting. If the audible alarm is not shut off by the supervisor, the alarm would continue
until the lower threshold was met. If this field is set to NO, the LED indication is still provided by
the system.
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:
DEFAULT:

ALM ON (Queue-size Threshold to Turn the Alarm On)
Decimal
1 to 3 digits
1 to 100
0
This field determines the upper threshold which must be passed to cause an alarm. The value
entered (1 to 100) indicates the number of calls waiting in queue that will cause an alarm
condition. Note that this field must not exceed the value entered in the "MAX CALLS" field in the
ACD Group Assignment command (CMD 355). The "ALM ON" field can be deleted by pressing
 in a MODIFY operation.

FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:
DEFAULT:

ALM OFF (Queue-size Threshold to Turn the Alarm Off)
Decimal
1 to 3 digits
1 to 100
0
This field sets the lower threshold which must be met to turn off the queue-size alarm. The value
entered must be low enough as to not allow the alarm to be enabled and disabled quickly on a
continuing basis. Call holding time, work time, and the number of agents should be configured
when determining the alarm threshold levels. The "ALM OFF" field can be deleted by pressing
 in a MODIFY operation.

FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
DEFAULT:

INT FLG (Internal Call Restriction Flag)
Keyword
Predefined ASCII characters
ALW
Keywords:

ALW - Internal calls are allowed to the ACD group
DNY - Internal calls are denied to the ACD group

This flag determines whether internal calls and internal call transfers are permitted to a given
ACD group. If set to DNY, only direct trunk calls or those calls transferred by the attendant are
allowed to enter the ACD group.
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:
DEFAULT:

AP# (Announcement Pattern Number)
Decimal
1 or 2 digits
1 to 50
1

3-19

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
ACD GROUP PARAMETER ASSIGNMENT (CMD 357)
PERCEPTION 4000

COMMANDS

This field defines which announcement pattern will be used by this ACD group for calls which are
being held in queue (refer to the Announcement Pattern Assignment command, CMD 353). The
pattern defines what announcements, music, etc. are presented to a caller waiting in queue for
the next available ACD agent.
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:
DEFAULT:

WRK TMR (After Call Work Timer)
Decimal
1 to 3 digits
0 to 255 (seconds)
0
This field assigns the number of seconds the system waits immediately following the end of an
ACD call before presenting another waiting call to the ACD agent. By holding the next call, the
system provides the agent with free time to fill out forms and perform paperwork associated with
each call. During this period the agent is unavailable for calls. This period is referred to as 'work
time'. If work time is not desired, this timer should be set to zero.

SYSTEM ERROR MESSAGES
The following error messages are unique to this command.
C35700
C35701
C35702
C35703
C35704
C35705
C35706
C35707

-

Check ACD group number
Check day time overflow destination
Check night time overflow destination
Alarm-on Q-size exceeds the allowable maximum
Alarm-off Q-size exceeds the allowable maximum
Alarm-on value should be greater than Alarm-off value
Announcement pattern number is not defined
Announcement pattern is not for ACD use

RELATED COMMANDS
Miscellaneous Device Assignment (CMD 400)
Station Feature Key Assignment (CMD 331)

3-20

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
ACD STATUS DISPLAY AND REMOTE LOGOUT (CMD 358)
PERCEPTION 4000

COMMANDS

ACD STATUS DISPLAY AND REMOTE LOGOUT (CMD 358)
The ACD Status Display and Remote Logout command allows an ACD supervisor to display logged-in
information about one or more ACD agents or ACD supervisors. Logged-in agent information that is displayed
includes the agent's name, identification code, ACD group number, logged-in location (the prime directory number
and station equipment number of the utilized station), key method (dedicated or traveling), and current status
(idle, busy, or logout pending). Logged-in supervisor information includes the supervisor's ACD group number,
prime directory number, station location, and current status.
This command also allows an ACD supervisor to remotely logout one or more ACD agents. The remote logout
operation can be performed regardless of the agent's current status. If remote logout is performed while an agent
is busy, then the logout will not take effect (is pending) until the busy status ends.
Command Keyword:

ACD_DISP_LOGOUT

Category Name:

ACD

PREREQUISITE COMMANDS
ACD Group Assignment (CMD 355)
ACD Agent Assignment (CMD 356)

OPERATIONS
Available operations:
DISPLAY
LOGOUT
The function and required data fields for each operation are described as follows:
DISPLAY

TYPE

req

GRP#

AGT

NAME

PRM DN

EQUIP#

DED/TRA

STATUS

opt

This operation is used to display logged-in information about one or more ACD agents or ACD supervisors.
Display information applies only to logged-in agents and supervisors; no data is displayed for those
agents/supervisors who are not currently logged in. The "TYPE" field in this operation is required. If a  is
entered in the "GRP" field, information regarding all logged-in agents and or supervisors will be displayed.

3-21

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
ACD STATUS DISPLAY AND REMOTE LOGOUT (CMD 358)
PERCEPTION 4000

COMMANDS

LOGOUT

GRP#

AGT#

req

ThIs operation is used to logout a specific ACD agent or all agents contained in an ACD group. If the keyword
ALL is entered in the "AGT" field, all agents in the specified group will be logged out.
PARAMETERS
This section defines input permitted for each field. Any variations for a particular operation are noted separately.
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:

TYPE
Keyword
Preassigned ASCII characters
Keyword:

AGT
SUP
BOTH

- Agent type
- Supervisor type
- Both agent and supervisor types

The "TYPE" field is used for DISPLAY operation only. By entering the appropriate keyword, all currently logged-in
ACD agents and/or supervisors will be displayed.
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:
RANGE:
LOOP:

GRP# (ACD Group Number)
Decimal
1 or 2 digits
1 - 32 (based on system configuration)
Not allowed
Not Allowed

The "GRP#" field is required to perform ACD agent or supervisor logout operation.
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:
RANGE:
LOOP:

AGT (Agent Identification Code)
Decimal
3 digits
000 - 999
Not allowed
Allowed in DISPLAY operation only

The "AGT" field is required to perform remote logout. In the DISPLAY operation, the "AGT" field does not apply
when "TYPE" is assigned as supervisor (SUP).
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:

NAME
Text
0 - 9 characters in length, including spaces and punctuation

The "NAME" field applies only in the DISPLAY operation when "TYPE" has been assigned as agent (AGT). This

3-22

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
ACD STATUS DISPLAY AND REMOTE LOGOUT (CMD 358)
PERCEPTION 4000

COMMANDS

field does not apply when "TYPE" has been assigned as supervisor (SUP).
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:
RANGE:

PRM DN (Prime Directory Number)
Decimal
1 or 5 digits
000 - 999
Allowed in DISPLAY operation only

This field indicates the prime directory number of the station at which the ACD agent or ACD supervisor is
currently logged in.
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:
RANGE:
LOOP:

EQUIP# (Equipment number of station at which agent/supervisor is logged in)
Decimal
1 or 2 digits
10101 to 101416
Allowed in DISPLAY operation only
Not Allowed

This field indicates the equipment number of the station at which that ACD agent or ACD supervisor is currently
logged in. The first one or two digits of the displayed equipment number represent the shelf number; the second
two digits represent the card slot number; and the last two digits represent the circuit number on the utilized
circuit card.
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:

DED/TRA (Key Method—Dedicated/Traveling)
Keyword
Preassigned ASCII characters
Keyword:

DED
TRA

-

Agent used the LOG key on the station to login
Agent used the prime line key and the ACD access code to login

This field does not apply in the DISPLAY operation when 'TYPE" has been assigned as supervisor (SUP).
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:

STATUS (Logged-in Status)
Keyword
Preassigned ASCII characters
Keyword:

IDLE BUSY PEND -

Available or unavailable
Talking or in After Call Work mode
Logout Pending

This field indicates the current status of the logged-in ACD agent or supervisor station.

SYSTEM MESSAGES
The following error messages are unique to this command.
C35801
C35802
C35803
C35804

-

Group number is not defined
Agent identification number is not found
Agent has logged out
Supervisor is not found

3-23

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
ACD STATUS DISPLAY AND REMOTE LOGOUT (CMD 358)
PERCEPTION 4000
C35805
C35806
C35807
C35808
C35809

3-24

-

Failed to read prime directory number
Failed to read device number
Failed to read supervisor LDN
Failed to read supervisor STN
Agent is not logged in

COMMANDS

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
ALARM/FAULT DISPLAY AND RESET (CMD 160)
PERCEPTION 4000

COMMANDS

ALARM/FAULT DISPLAY AND RESET (CMD 160)
The Alarm/Fault Display and Reset command displays the current status of alarm indicators (red, green and
orange LEDs) on the system panel, displays the current and/or previous system fault/alarm peg count buffer(s),
and resets the peg count buffer. The status of these alarm indicators is either ON or OFF which indicates whether
or not the system is operating under normal conditions. Faults that cause an alarm to be turned ON can be
viewed by this command. Alarm indicators can also be reset with this command.
The system maintains two buffers, one for the current time period and the other for the previous period. These
buffers keep peg counts of the faults on every severity level, up to the maximum of 32 levels. An alarm turns ON if
a corresponding fault is encountered. Once an alarm is turned ON, it remains ON until the fault is recovered or a
switch-over operation takes place.
Command Keyword:

ALM/FAULT_DISP/RESET

Category Name:

Fault

PREREQUISITE COMMANDS
There are no prerequisites for this command.

OPERATIONS
Available operations:

ALARMS
RESET
COUNTS

The function and required data fields for each operation are described in this section.

ALARMS

NORM

MJ-1

MJ-2

MN

RMC

TEMP

PFT

output only

This operation displays the current status of seven alarm indicators on the system panel. The status of these
alarm indicators is either ON or OFF indicating whether or not the system is operating under normal conditions.
No input data is required; all of the fields are used for output only. A  must be entered to activate this
operation.

RESET
A RESET operation performs the following functions:
■ Time stamps the current system date and time indicating the end of the current peg-count buffer.
■ Copies the current buffer to the previous buffer.

3-25

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
ALARM/FAULT DISPLAY AND RESET (CMD 160)
PERCEPTION 4000

COMMANDS

■ Clears the current buffer.
■ Time stamps the current buffer indicating the beginning of a new peg-count.

No header is provided, and no input data is required. However, a  must be entered to activate this
operation.

COUNTS

BUFFER

START DATE

START TIME

END DATE

opt

END TIME

SEV LEVEL

PEG COUNT

output only

This operation displays the current and/or previous system fault/alarm peg count buffer(s). Input of the
Current/Previous Buffer field is optional. When both buffers are to be displayed, enter a  and/or press
. To display a specific buffer, enter a valid keyword (CUR for the Current buffer and PRE for the
Previous buffer). The remaining fields are output fields only.

PARAMETERS
Each field parameter is described in this section. Any variations for a particular operation are noted separately.
FIELD:
TYPE:
LED:

NORM (System Operation Status)
Output only (either ON or OFF)
Green
When this alarm is ON, the system is operating under normal conditions. When OFF, the system
is in off-line mode, or a fault has occurred.

FIELD:
TYPE:
LED:

MJ-1 (Major Alarm One)
Output only (either ON or OFF)
Red
If this alarm is ON, it indicates that a critical external condition has occurred. If a Power,
Emergency, or Temperature alarm turns ON, this indicator turns ON also.

FIELD:
TYPE:
LED:

MJ-2 (Major Alarm Two)
Output only (either ON or OFF)
Red
This indicator turns ON if one of the following internal conditions occurs:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.

3-26

System bus timeout occurred due to the MCPU, LCPU, TSW, or disk access.
Watchdog timer timeout.
System switchover.
MCPU clock failure.
Main processor (MCPU) failure.
Main memory failure.

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
ALARM/FAULT DISPLAY AND RESET (CMD 160)
PERCEPTION 4000
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
FIELD:
TYPE:
LED:

COMMANDS
Time switch failure.
Tone generator failure.
Memory space (buffer) is full and unavailable for a time period exceeding the predefined
time threshold (e.g. exceeded N minutes).
Shelf processor failure.
Shelf memory failure.
Data highway failure.
More than 33% of the TDM hiways on two shelves have failed.
Initial system load or automatic reload failed.
Handshake between the MCPU and LCPU failed.
Download from MCPU to LCPU failed.
Any kind of disk failure.
Communications between the MCPU and miscellaneous cards failed.
Application processor failure.

MN (Minor Alarm)
Output only (either ON or OFF)
Orange
This indicator turns ON whenever one of the following conditions is encountered:
1.

Control component failure - due to one of the following conditions:
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■

Performance of any service device is reduced below 66% of its full capacity.
Downloading or handshaking from a PC to the terminal controller has failed.
PC initialization has failed.
Less than 33% of the TDM hiways on two shelves have failed.
Memory allocation for working space (e.g. buffer or queue) has failed.
Inconsistent data is detected.
An unexpected interruption has occurred.
The stack overflowed (e.g. caused by endless recursive procedure calls).
An attempt to access memory through an invalid pointer has occurred (caused by
incorrect pointer allocation or release).
■ An attempt was made to execute an invalid instruction.
2.

Peripheral device failure - due to one of the following conditions:
■ More than 8% but less than 33% of installed equipment of the same type on one shelf

has failed.
■ More than 8% but less than 33% of installed equipment of the same type on the whole

system has failed.
3.

Miscellaneous failure - due to one of the following conditions:
■ An L/T shelf power unit has failed.
■ A disk file is full (e.g. fault log file or change log file).

FIELD:
TYPE:
LED:

RMC (Remote Supervision Status)
Output only (either ON or OFF)
Green

3-27

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
ALARM/FAULT DISPLAY AND RESET (CMD 160)
PERCEPTION 4000

COMMANDS

When the "RMC" indicator turns ON, it indicates that local/remote maintenance work is in
progress.
FIELD:
TYPE:
LED:

TEMP (Temperature Failure Alarm)
Output only (either ON or OFF)
Red
If the cabinet temperature passes the system shut-down threshold, this indicator turns ON.

FIELD:
TYPE:
LED:

PFT (Power Failure Transfer Alarm)
Output only (either ON or OFF)
Red
When the "PFT" indicator is OFF, the power supply is operating under normal conditions. If a
power failure transfer occurs, this indicator turns ON.

FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:

BUFFER
Keyword
Predefined ASCII characters
Keywords:

CUR - Current Buffer
PRE - Previous Buffer

The Current/Previous Buffer field is an optional field. By entering a  and/or ,
both the current and the previous buffers display.
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:

START DATE/TIME (Date/Time to Start Counting)
Decimal (Output only)
MMDDYY HHMM
MM is the month from 01 to 12
DD
is the day from 01 to 31
YY
is the year from 00 to 99
HH
is the hour from 00 to 23
MM is the minute from 00 to 59
These fields contain the date and time of the system clock showing the time the specified buffer
began updating its peg-count counters. Data in these fields is used to compare with data in the
"END DATE/TIME" fields to determine the duration of the associated buffer. The "START
DATE/TIME" of the Previous Buffer is either IPL time (Initial Program Load) or the date and time
of the previous RESET operation. On the Current Buffer, however, this data is the date and time
of the most recent RESET operation. Refer to Figure 3-1 later in this section.

FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:

3-28

END DATE/TIME (Date/Time to Stop Counting)
Decimal (Output only)
MMDDYY HHMM
MM is the month from 01 to 12
DD
is the day from 01 to 31
YY
is the year from 00 to 99
HH
is the hour from 00 to 23
MM is the minute from 00 to 59

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
ALARM/FAULT DISPLAY AND RESET (CMD 160)
PERCEPTION 4000

COMMANDS

These fields contain the date and time of the system clock showing the time the specified buffer
updated its peg-count counters. Data in these fields is used to compare with data in the "START
DATE/TIME" fields to determine the duration of the associated buffer. The "END DATE/TIME" of
the Previous Buffer is the date and time of the most recent RESET operation. On the Current
Buffer, this data is the system's current date and time. Refer to Figure 3-1 later in this section.
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:

SEV LEVEL (Fault Severity Level)
Decimal (Output only)
1 or 2 digits
1 to 32
This field, which appears in a COUNTS operation only, contains the specific severity level index
number associated with each counter in the "PEG COUNT" field, and is generated automatically
by the system. Refer to the Severity Level Table later in this section.

FIELD:
TYPE:

PEG COUNT (Count of the Corresponding Fault)
Decimal (Output only)
Data in this field corresponds to the data in the "SEV LEVEL" field. When faults are encountered
in any of the 32 Fault Severity Levels, those faults are counted and displayed in the "PEG
COUNT" field opposite the corresponding level in the "SEV LEVEL" field. For example, if seven
faults are encountered at Severity Level 3, then the "SEV LEVEL" output would be 3 and the
"PEG COUNT" output would be 7.
Data in this field increments by one automatically when a fault is detected in the current pegcount buffer and the associated alarm LED turns ON. This field appears in a COUNTS operation
only.

SYSTEM ERROR MESSAGES
The following error messages are unique to this command.
C16000
C16001
C16002
C16003

-

Database recovered
Alarm display request failed
Alarm reset request failed
Alarm reset timeout

COMMENTS
Alarm indicators on the on-premises alarm panel are turned ON whenever a corresponding alarm on the local
alarm panel is ON.
Severity Level Table
There are 32 severity levels reserved for fault messages generated by the corresponding module (maintenance,
diagnostic, operational tasks). A specific severity level number is included in each error message to describe the
error category. Following is a list of the severity levels.

3-29

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
ALARM/FAULT DISPLAY AND RESET (CMD 160)
PERCEPTION 4000

COMMANDS

Severity
Level
001
002
003
004
005
006
007
008
009
010
011
:
015
016
017
018
019
020
021
:
028
029
030
031
032

Definition

MJ alarm turns ON when failure occurs once and executes EMA (emergency procedures)
MN alarm turns ON when failure occurs once and executes EMA
MJ alarm turns ON when failure occurs 5 times and executes EMA
MJ alarm turns ON when failure occurs 30 times and executes EMA
MJ alarm turns ON when failure occurs 40 times and executes EMA
MJ alarm turns ON when failure occurs 50 times and executes EMA
MJ alarm turns ON when failure occurs 0x7fff times and executes EMA
MJ alarm turns ON when failure occurs once; if it happens 5 times, then DDCC becomes
out of service
Both MJ and MN alarms turn ON when failure occurs once
MJ alarm turns ON when failure occurs once
Not defined
:
Not defined
MN alarm turns ON when failure occurs once and executes EMA if this failure occurs 5
times continually
MN alarm turns ON when failure occurs once and executes EMA if this failure occurs N
times continually
MN alarm turns ON when failure occurs once and MJ alarm turns ON if this failure occurs
100 times continually
MN alarm turns ON when failure occurs once; if it happens 5 times, then DDCC becomes
out of service
MN alarm turns ON when failure occurs once
Not defined
:
Not defined
Only failure message
Information message for result of some process
Not defined
Not defined

Reset Time and Fault Peg Count Buffers Format
When the system first comes up (power-on), two buffers are allocated to keep the peg count of the faults
whenever they are detected. Detected faults are kept in the current peg count buffer at the appropriate severity
level, and transferred to the previous peg count buffer whenever the fault reset is initiated by a RESET operation.
There are 32 counters associated with 32 severity levels per buffer. A RESET operation moves the current fault
peg count buffer to the previous buffer, clears the current buffer, and updates the RESET date and time for later
use to determine the duration of the Current/Previous buffer period.

3-30

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
ALARM/FAULT DISPLAY AND RESET (CMD 160)
PERCEPTION 4000

Sev Level 1
2
3
~
32

COMMANDS

PREVIOUS BUFFER

CURRENT BUFFER

Previous Reset Time
Peg Counts
"
"
~
~
"
Last Reset Time

Last Reset Time
Peg Counts
"
"

~

~

"
Current Time

Figure 3-1
Previous/Current Buffers

NOTES:
1. Both the "Last" and the "Previous Reset Time" fields are the system clock at IPL time (Initial Program Load)
when the system first powers-up. All counters associated with the 32 severity levels, in both the Current
and Previous buffers, are initialized to 0.
2. When a fault is detected, the corresponding counter of the Current buffer updates (increments by 1).
3. Whenever a RESET is performed, by this command, the Current buffer moves to the Previous buffer. The
"Last Reset Time" and the system's Current Time become the "Previous Reset Time" and "Last Reset
Time" of the Previous buffer respectively.
Peg-Count Counter Size/Overflow
When a peg-count counter overflows, the buffer retains the highest count number for each severity level, the
overflow flag ignores any additional counts, and the Fault Log/Print feature receives a warning message.

3-31

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
ANNOUNCEMENT PATTERN ASSIGNMENT (CMD 353)
PERCEPTION 4000

COMMANDS

ANNOUNCEMENT PATTERN ASSIGNMENT (CMD 353)
The Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) and Uniform Call Distribution (UCD) features both have queuing
capabilities which offer the caller the chance to hear recorded announcements and Music-on-Hold a number of
times at preset intervals and in different sequences. This capability can be tailored for each group, thereby
allowing announcements to provide caller-sensitive material. The Announcement Pattern Assignment command
(CMD 353) provides the means by which these patterns may be defined and applied to all desired groups.
Command Keyword:

ANNOUNCEMENT_PAT

Category Name:

Station

PREREQUISITE COMMAND
Miscellaneous Device Assignment (CMD 400)

OPERATIONS
Available operations:

ADD
DELETE
MODIFY
DISPLAY

The function and required data fields for each operation are described in this section.

ADD

AP#

RING
TIME

req

opt

ANN 1 INT1
NUM TIME

req

#1
CYC

ANN 2
NUM

INT2
TIME

#2
CYC

ANN 3
NUM

INT3
TIME

#3
CYC

2&3
CYC

opt

This operation adds announcement patterns to the system. "AP#" and "ANN 1 NUM" are required fields.

DELETE

AP#

req

This operation deletes an announcement pattern from the system. "AP#" is a required field.

3-32

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
ANNOUNCEMENT PATTERN ASSIGNMENT (CMD 353)
PERCEPTION 4000

COMMANDS

MODIFY

AP#

RING
TIME

ANN 1 INT1
NUM TIME

#1
CYC

ANN 2
NUM

INT2
TIME

req

#2
CYC

ANN 3
NUM

INT3
TIME

#3
CYC

2&3
CYC

opt

This operation modifies the attributes of an announcement pattern. "AP#" is a required field, while the remaining
fields are optional.

DISPLAY

AP#

RING
TIME

ANN 1 INT1
NUM TIME

#1
CYC

ANN 2
NUM

INT2
TIME

#2
CYC

ANN 3
NUM

INT3
TIME

#3
CYC

2&3
CYC

opt

This operation displays announcement patterns. All of the fields are optional. "AP#" is a loop field. If a  is
entered in this field, all announcement patterns are displayed.

PARAMETERS
Each field parameter is described in this section. Any variations for a particular operation are noted separately.
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:
RANGES:
LOOP:

AP# (Announcement Pattern Number)
Decimal
1 or 2 digits
1 to 50
Not allowed
Allowed in a DISPLAY operation only
The system supports up to 50 announcement patterns. The pattern number acts as an index
which provides linkage to ACD and UCD groups (refer to the ACD Group Parameter Assignment
command - CMD 357, and the UCD Group Assignment command - CMD 354).

FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:
RANGE:
LOOP:

RING TIME (Length of the Ring)
Decimal
1 or 2 digits
1 to 60 (seconds)
Not allowed
Not allowed
The "RING TIME" is the length of time the caller receives ringback tone before an announcement
plays.

3-33

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
ANNOUNCEMENT PATTERN ASSIGNMENT (CMD 353)
PERCEPTION 4000
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
RANGE:
LOOP:

COMMANDS

ANN 1 NUM (Announcement Number 1)
Keyword
Predefined ASCII characters
Not allowed
Not allowed
Keywords:

AM01 ~ AM64

This field, required in an ADD operation, defines which announcement machine will be used to
provide the first announcement.
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:
RANGE:
LOOP:

INT1 TIME (Interval of Time Between Announcements)
Decimal
1 to 3 digits
1 to 120 (seconds)
Not allowed
Not allowed
This field defines in seconds how long Music-on-Hold (or quiet tone if Music-on-Hold is not
provided by the system) plays before cycling back to Announcement Number 1 or proceeding on
to Announcement Number 2. The "INT1 TIME" field can be deleted by pressing 
in a MODIFY operation.

FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:
RANGE:
LOOP:

#1 CYC (Number of Cycles of Announcement Number 1)
Decimal
1 or 2 digits
0 to 9 or 00 to 09
Not allowed
Not allowed
This field defines the number of times Announcement Number 1 is cycled. The maximum
definable number of cycles is nine. If this field is set to zero, the system cycles Announcement
Number 1 and the Interval of Time Between Announcements indefinitely. If this field is left
undefined, the announcement plays only one time.
If a definite number of cycles is defined and there is no definition for Announcement Number 2,
the system continues to keep the caller connected to Music-on-Hold or quiet tone. The "#1 CYC"
field can be deleted by pressing  in a MODIFY operation.

FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:

ANN 2 NUM (Announcement Number 2)
Keyword
Predefined ASCII characters
Keywords:

AM01 ~ AM64

This field defines which announcement machine will be used to provide the second
announcement, and may only be defined if "ANN 1 NUM" is defined. The "ANN 2 NUM" field can
be deleted by pressing  in a MODIFY operation. If a delete is performed in this
field, the next two fields (INT2 TIME and #2 CYC) must also be deleted.

3-34

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
ANNOUNCEMENT PATTERN ASSIGNMENT (CMD 353)
PERCEPTION 4000
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:
RANGE:
LOOP:

COMMANDS

INT2 TIME (Interval of Time Between Announcements)
Decimal
1 to 3 digits
1 to 120 (seconds)
Not allowed
Not allowed
This field defines in seconds how long Music-on-Hold (or quiet tone if Music-on-Hold is not
provided by the system) plays before cycling back to Announcement Number 2 or proceeding on
to Announcement Number 3. The "INT2 TIME" field can be deleted by pressing 
in a MODIFY operation.

FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:
RANGE:
LOOP:

#2 CYC (Number of Cycles of Announcement Number 2)
Decimal
1 or 2 digits
0 to 9 or 00 to 09
Not allowed
Not allowed
This field defines the number of times Announcement Number 2 is cycled. The maximum
definable number of cycles is nine. If this field is set to zero, the system cycles Announcement
Number 2 and the Interval of Time Between Announcements (INT2 TIME) indefinitely. If this field
is left undefined, the announcement plays only one time.
If a definite number of cycles is defined and there is no definition for Announcement Number 3,
the system continues to keep the caller connected to Music-on-Hold or quiet tone. The "#2 CYC"
field can be deleted by pressing  in a MODIFY operation.

FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:

ANN 3 NUM (Announcement Number 3)
Keyword
Predefined ASCII characters
Keywords:

AM01 ~ AM64

This field defines which announcement machine will be used to provide the third announcement,
and may only be defined if "ANN 2 NUM" was defined. The "ANN 3 NUM" field can be deleted by
pressing  in a MODIFY operation.
If this field is not entered or is to be deleted, the "INT3 TIME" and "#3 CYC" fields must not be
entered.
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:
RANGE:
LOOP:

INT3 TIME (Interval of Time Between Announcements)
Decimal
1 to 3 digits
1 to 120 (seconds)
Not allowed
Not allowed

3-35

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
ANNOUNCEMENT PATTERN ASSIGNMENT (CMD 353)
PERCEPTION 4000

COMMANDS

This field defines in seconds how long Music-on-Hold (or quiet tone if Music-on-Hold is not
provided by the system) plays before cycling back to Announcement Number 3 or proceeding to
cycle both announcement numbers 2 and 3 again. The "INT3 TIME" field can be deleted by
pressing  in a MODIFY operation.
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:
RANGE:
LOOP:

#3 CYC (Number of Cycles of Announcement Number 3)
Decimal
1 or 2 digits
0 to 9 or 00 to 09
Not allowed
Not allowed
This field defines the number of times Announcement Number 3 is cycled. The maximum
definable number of cycles is nine. If this field is set to zero, the system cycles Announcement
Number 3 and the Interval of Time Between Announcements (INT3 TIME) indefinitely. If this field
is left undefined, the announcement plays only one time. The "#3 CYC" field can be deleted by
pressing  in a MODIFY operation.

FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:
RANGE:
LOOP:

2&3 CYC (Cycle Announcements 2 and 3)
Decimal
1 or 2 digits
0 to 9 or 00 to 09
Not allowed
Not allowed
Providing "#3 CYC" is not set for infinite cycling, this field cycles announcements 2 and 3
(including their respective music times and cycling instructions) for up to nine times or indefinitely.
If set to a defined cycle, music or quiet tone is provided indefinitely upon cycle completion. The
announcements are cycled infinitely if zero is entered.

SYSTEM ERROR MESSAGES
The following error messages are unique to this command.
C35300
C35301
C35302
C35303
C35304
C35305
C35306
C35307
C35308
C35309
C35310
C35311

3-36

-

Pattern already exists
Pattern is not defined
Input announcement 2
Input announcement 3
Enter both announcements
Deletion of announcement 2 is not allowed
Deletion of announcement 3 is not allowed
Delete all information regarding announcement 2
Delete all information regarding announcement 3
Announcement number is not defined
Memory for patterns is at system maximum
Number of announcement machines exceeds system maximum

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
ANNOUNCEMENT PATTERN ASSIGNMENT (CMD 353)
PERCEPTION 4000

COMMANDS

COMMENTS
If the Announcement 1 cycle is set to zero, the remaining fields regarding Announcements 2 and 3 are ignored if
entered.
If the Announcement 2 cycle is set to zero, the remaining fields regarding Announcement 3 are ignored if entered.
If the "2&3 CYC" field is entered, both the "ANN 2 NUM" and "ANN 3 NUM" fields must be entered or in the
database.
If Announcement 2 or 3 is to be deleted, the interval time and cycle for that announcement must be deleted also.
Announcement 2 cannot be entered unless Announcement 1 is entered or already exists in the database.
Announcement 3 cannot be entered unless Announcement 2 is entered or already exists in the database.
If music is to be presented to the caller with no announcements, only the first "INT TIME" field needs to be filled in
and the "#1 CYC" field set to infinite cycling.

RELATED COMMANDS
ACD Group Assignment (CMD 355)
ACD Group Parameter Assignment (CMD 357)
DID/CCSA Trunk Group Assignment (CMD 314)
Trunk Group Routing Assignment (CMD 307)
Trunk Routing Assignment (CMD 308)
UCD Group Assignment (CMD 354)

3-37

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
AREA CODE RESTRICTION TABLES (CMD 341)
PERCEPTION 4000

COMMANDS

AREA CODE RESTRICTION TABLES (CMD 341)
The Area Code Restriction Tables contain a list of area codes which may be allowed or denied depending on the
specified "TYPE". This is the means by which calling into entire area codes can be controlled. Area code tables
are defined for each Trunk Restriction Group/Destination Restriction Level combination (but not when either
"TRGN" or "DRL" = 1). Trunk Restriction Groups and DRLs are assigned through the Trunk Group Assignment
command (CMD 310).
Each table may be specified as an ALW (allow) or DNY (deny) table. This way the fewest number of codes can be
entered and accomplish the same purpose. For example, if all area codes but two are to be allowed, it is easier to
build a deny table and enter only two codes versus building an allow table and entering all but two codes.
Command Keyword:

AC_RESTRICT

Category Name:

Restrict

PREREQUISITE COMMANDS
There are no prerequisites for this command.

OPERATIONS
Available operations:

ADD
DELETE
DISPLAY

The function and required data fields for each operation are described in this section.

ADD

TRGN

DRL

TYPE

AC

AC

AC

AC

AC

AC

req

AC

AC

AC

AC

AC

AC

opt

This operation adds area code(s) to the Area Code Restriction table for a specific TRGN/DRL. Ranges are
permitted in the “TRGN” and “DRL” fields. The “TYPE” field can be changed only when all of the area codes are
deleted from the table.

DELETE
TRGN

DRL

req

3-38

TYPE

AC

AC

AC

AC

AC

AC

AC

opt

AC

AC

AC

AC

AC

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
AREA CODE RESTRICTION TABLES (CMD 341)
PERCEPTION 4000

COMMANDS

This operation deletes area code(s) from the Area Code Restriction table. Ranges are permitted in the “TRGN”
(or “DRL”) field when deleting the same area code in several Area Code Restriction tables.

DISPLAY

TRGN

DRL

TYPE

AC

AC

AC

AC

AC

AC

AC

AC

AC

AC

AC

AC

opt

This operation displays one or more Area Code Restriction tables. Input for all of the fields is optional. If no data is
entered in any of these fields, all of the Area Code Restriction tables in the system display.

PARAMETERS
Each field parameter is described in this section. Any variations for a particular operation are noted separately.
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:
LOOP:

TRGN (Trunk Restriction Group Number)
Decimal
1 digit
2 to 8 (or to the maximum number of trunk groups configured in the system)
Primary loop field, and allowed in all of the operations.
This field assigns restriction numbers to trunk groups. Note that Trunk Restriction Group 1 is
defined as “unrestricted” and recommended for TIE trunk groups and trunk interfaces to
peripheral auxiliary equipment.

FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:
LOOP:

DRL (Destination Restriction Level)
Decimal
1 or 2 digits
2 to 16 (or to the maximum system configuration)
Secondary loop field, and allowed in all of the operations.
When "DRL" is 1, all calls are allowed regardless of which Trunk Restriction Group Number
(TRGN) is in use. Therefore, there is no Area/Office Code Restriction table associated with it.
Refer to the Destination Restriction Level Assignment command (CMD 337) for information on
DRLs.

FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:

TYPE (Area Code Restriction Type)
Keyword
Predefined ASCII characters
Keywords:

ALW - Listed area codes are allowed
DNY - Listed area codes are denied

The "TYPE" field defines whether area codes are accessible to the caller. If ALW (or DNY) is
entered, calls to the area codes listed are allowed (or denied).

3-39

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
AREA CODE RESTRICTION TABLES (CMD 341)
PERCEPTION 4000
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:
RANGE:

COMMANDS

AC (Area Code)
Decimal with fixed length
3 digits in the form N Y X (where N = 2 to 9, Y = 0 or 1, and X = 0 to 9)
200 to 919
Allowed in a DISPLAY operation
Area codes entered in this field are either allowed or denied depending on the keyword entered in
the “TYPE” field.

SYSTEM ERROR MESSAGES
The following error messages are unique to this command.
C34100 - Check trunk restriction group number range
C34101 - Area code(s), Ni..Nj are already in table
C34102 - Area code(s), Ni..Nj are not in table

RELATED COMMAND
Area/Office Code Restriction Tables (CMD 339)

3-40

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
AREA/OFFICE CODE RESTRICTION TABLES (CMD 339)
PERCEPTION 4000

COMMANDS

AREA/OFFICE CODE RESTRICTION TABLES (CMD 339)
The Area/Office Code Restriction Tables contain a list of area and office codes which may be allowed or denied
depending on the specified "TYPE". This is the means by which local and long distance dialing (according to
North American Dialing Plan conventions) can be controlled. Area code/office code tables are defined for each
Trunk Restriction Group/ Destination Restriction Level combination (but not when either "TRGN" or "DRL" = 1).
Trunk Restriction Groups and DRLs are assigned through the Trunk Group Assignment command (CMD 310).
Each table may be specified as an ALW (allow) or DNY (deny) table. This way the fewest number of codes can be
entered and accomplish the same purpose. For example, if all office codes but two are to be allowed, it is easier
to build a deny table and enter only two codes versus building an allow table and entering all but two codes.
Command Keyword:

AC/OC_RESTRICT_TBL

Category Name:

Restrict

PREREQUISITE COMMANDS
There are no prerequisites for this command.

OPERATIONS
Available operations:

ADD
DELETE
DISPLAY

The function and required data fields for each operation are described as follows:

ADD

TRGN

DRL

TYPE

req

AC

OC

OC

OC

OC

OC

OC

OC

OC

OC

OC

opt

This operation adds area and office codes to the Area/Office Code Restriction table. Ranges are permitted both
in the “TRGN” and “DRL” fields when adding the same area and office codes for several DRLs in a trunk
restriction group, or in the same DRL for several trunk restriction groups. Ranges are also permitted in the “OC”
fields.

3-41

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
AREA/OFFICE CODE RESTRICTION TABLES (CMD 339)
PERCEPTION 4000

COMMANDS

DELETE
TRGN

DRL

TYPE

AC

OC

OC

OC

OC

OC

req

OC

OC

OC

OC

OC

opt

This operation deletes area/office codes from the Area/Office Code Restriction table. Ranges are permitted when
deleting a number of area and office codes. When using ranges, a confirmation is requested before deleting any
of the codes.

DISPLAY

TRGN

DRL

TYPE

AC

OC

OC

OC

OC

OC

OC

OC

OC

OC

OC

opt

This operation displays the Area/Office Code Restriction table. If no data is entered in any of the optional fields,
all of the Area/Office Code Restriction tables are displayed. Ranges are permitted in all fields except the “TYPE”
field.

PARAMETERS
Each field parameter is described in this section. Any variations for a particular operation are noted separately.
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:
LOOP:

TRGN (Trunk Restriction Group number)
Decimal
1 digit
2 to 8 (or to the maximum number of trunk groups configured in the system)
Primary loop field, and allowed in all of the operations
This field assigns restriction numbers to trunk groups. Note that Trunk Restriction Group 1 is
defined as “unrestricted”, and is recommended for TIE trunk groups and trunk interfaces to
peripheral auxiliary equipment.

FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:
LOOP:

DRL (Destination Restriction Level)
Decimal
1 or 2 digits
2 to 16 (or to the maximum system configuration)
Secondary loop field, and allowed in all of the operations
When "DRL" is 1, all calls are allowed regardless of what trunk restriction group number (TRGN)
is used. Refer to the Destination Restriction Level Assignment command (CMD 337) for
information on DRLs.

FIELD:
TYPE:

3-42

TYPE (Office Code Restriction Type)
Keyword

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
AREA/OFFICE CODE RESTRICTION TABLES (CMD 339)
PERCEPTION 4000
FORMAT:

COMMANDS

Predefined ASCII characters
Keywords:

ALW - Allow access to listed office codes
DNY - Deny access to listed office codes

The "TYPE" field defines whether area codes are accessible to the caller. If the keyword, ALW is
entered, all of the office codes in this Area/Office Code Restriction table are allowed to be
accessed. Otherwise, they are denied.
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:
LOOP:

AC (Area Code)
Decimal with fixed length
3 digits in the form N Y X (where N = 2 to 9, Y = 0 or 1, and X = 0 to 9)
200 to 919
Third loop field, and allowed in all of the operations
Each area code may have some office codes allowed and some denied. The Area/Office Code
Restriction table can be represented by a list of either allowed or denied codes. For example, if
most office codes in an area code are allowed, with a few exceptions, it is easier to enter a listing
of denied ("TYPE" = DNY) office codes, rather than inputting a listing of allowed ("TYPE" = ALW)
office codes.

FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:
RANGE:
SCOPE:

OC (Office Code)
Decimal with fixed length
3 digits in the form NXX (Where N = 2 to 9, and X = 0 to 9)
200 to 999
Allowed in a DISPLAY operation
Allowed in ADD and DELETE operations
Office codes entered in this field are either allowed or denied depending on the keyword entered
in the “TYPE” field.

SYSTEM ERROR MESSAGES
The following error messages are unique to this command.
C33900
C33901
C33902
I33903
C33904
C33905

-

Check trunk restriction group number range
Area code/office code table undefined
Office code NNN is incorrect
Area code/office code table is full
Dash should not be used in last scope field N
Missing data in scope type field of field N

RELATED COMMAND
Area Code Restriction Tables (CMD 341)

3-43

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
ATTENDANT FEATURE KEY ASSIGNMENT (CMD 371)
PERCEPTION 4000

COMMANDS

ATTENDANT FEATURE KEY ASSIGNMENT (CMD 371)
Each attendant console in the system has twenty-four flexible feature keys which may be defined for an array of
various functions. This command (CMD 371) modifies or displays the definitions of those feature keys for one or
more specified attendant consoles.
Although all types of keys may be assigned to the attendant console, it is important to note that unless the
attendant has access to certain trunk groups or features in their Class of Service definition (CMD 334), use of the
key may be denied by call processing once the key is assigned to the console.
Command Keyword:

ATT_KEY_ASSIGN

Category Name:

Attendant

PREREQUISITE COMMANDS
Attendant Group Assignment (CMD 372)

(The Attendant Group Assignment command is required
if ICI keys are assigned to the attendant console.)

Attendant Position Assignment (CMD 370)
Numbering Plan Assignment (CMD 330)

OPERATIONS
Available operations:

MODIFY
DISPLAY

The function and required data fields for each operation are described in this section.

MODIFY

ATT DN

POS

DEF 1

req

DEF 2

opt

This operation modifies the definitions of feature keys for one or more attendants. Ranges are not permitted in
any of the fields. A MODIFY operation may be performed only when the attendant is in the "position busy" mode.

DISPLAY

ATT DN

req

3-44

POS

DEF 1

opt

DEF 2

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
ATTENDANT FEATURE KEY ASSIGNMENT (CMD 371)
PERCEPTION 4000

COMMANDS

This operation displays the definitions of feature keys of one or more specified attendants. Entering a directory
number in the “ATT DN” field lists previously defined or undefined feature keys on the attendant console. For
viewing a specific key, the key position must be entered. Ranges are permitted in the “POS” field only.

PARAMETERS
Each field parameter is described in this section. Any variations for a particular operation are noted separately.
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:
RANGE:
LOOP:

ATT DN (Attendant Directory Number)
DN Type
1 to 5 digits
0 to 99999
Not allowed
Not allowed
Each attendant has a unique directory number which must not conflict with any other numbering
plan in the system.

FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:
RANGE:
LOOP:

POS (Key Assignment Position Number)
Decimal
1 or 2 digits
1 to 24
Allowed in a DISPLAY operation only
Allowed
Each feature must be assigned to a key position. Following is a matrix showing the flexible
feature key positions on the attendant console.
1
4
7
10

FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:

2
3
5
6
8
9
11 12

13
16
19
22

14
17
20
23

15
18
21
24

DEF 1 (Key Assignment Definition 1)
Keyword
Predefined ASCII characters
Keywords:

ADL
AEE
BLF
CC
CCMM
CONF
HELP
ICI
LND
OVF
PR_A
PR_S

-

Autodial
Attendant End-to-End Signaling
BLF (Busy Lamp Flag) Control
Code Calling Access
Code Calling Retrieval (Meet Me)
Eight Party Conference
HELP key
Incoming Call Identification
Last Number Redial
Attendant Overflow Control
Attendant Parked Page Retrieval
Voice Paging Retrieval-System

3-45

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
ATTENDANT FEATURE KEY ASSIGNMENT (CMD 371)
PERCEPTION 4000

COMMANDS
PRGM
SYSD
SPLT
SPVS
TGAC
UNA
UND
VP_E
VP_S
VP_Z
VPMM

-

Program Mode Key
System Speed Dialing
Split
Supervise
Trunk Group Access Code
Night Answer Access
Undefined
Voice Paging Access-Emergency
Voice Paging Access-System
Voice Paging Access-Zone
Voice Paging Retrieval-Zone (Meet Me)

This field provides the feature key definition. A total of 10 feature keys may be assigned as
Incoming Call Identification (ICI) keys. ICI keys are defined at the attendant group level through
the Attendant Group Assignment command (CMD 372).
The , ,  (if an  key is used) and  keys should be
assigned; otherwise, attendant traffic handling is not at its fullest potential.
The number of keys assigned to multiple key features (Autodial and Trunk Group Access Code) is
limited to 20.
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUES:

RANGE:

DEF 2 (Key Assignment Definition 2)
Decimal
1 to 3 digits
1 to 10 (ICI keys)
0 to 9 or 00 to 99 (CC, CCMM, VP_Z)
1 to 3 digits (TGAC)
Not allowed
Secondary key definition information is provided in this field, such as trunk access codes for trunk
group keys or zone numbers for code calls or voice paging. These definitions must comply with
the postdialing digit length as defined in the Numbering Plan Assignment command
(CMD 300).
Data in this field is required only if the CC, CCMM, VP_Z, TGAC, or ICI keyword is entered in the
“DEF 1” field. The relationship between the data in the “DEF 1” field and this field is described as
follows:
"DEF 1" Field
CC
CCMM
VP_Z
TGAC
ICI

"DEF 2" Field
0-9 or 00-99
0-9 or 00-99
0-9 or 00-99
1 to 3 digits
1-10

Zone Number*
Zone Number*
Zone Number*
Trunk Access Code
ICI Number

* If assigning a general access key, the zone number is optional and must be manually input by
the attendant after pressing the feature key. Valid ranges for zone numbers depend on the
length of the "LEN PD1" setting in the Numbering Plan Assignment command (CMD 300). If

3-46

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
ATTENDANT FEATURE KEY ASSIGNMENT (CMD 371)
PERCEPTION 4000

COMMANDS

"LEN PD1" is set to 1, ranges are from 0 to 9; if set to 2, ranges are from 00 to 99.

SYSTEM ERROR MESSAGES
The following error messages are unique to this command.
C37100
C37101
C37102
C37103
C37104
C37105
C37106
C37107
C37108
C37109
C37110

-

Invalid attendant directory number
An access code is required in DEF 2 field
Invalid incoming call number
Attendant directory number has not been defined
Invalid zone number
DEF 1 and DEF 2 exceeds the allowable maximum
DEF 1 and DEF 2 have already been defined
The specified incoming call key does not exist
DEF 1 and DEF 2 do not match
Autodial keys exceed the allowable maximum
An ICI category number is required in DEF 2 field

3-47

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
ATTENDANT GROUP ASSIGNMENT (CMD 372)
PERCEPTION 4000

COMMANDS

ATTENDANT GROUP ASSIGNMENT (CMD 372)
The PERCEPTION 4000 supports up to 30 attendant groups. Any number of attendants may belong to an
attendant group (up to the system maximum number of consoles); however, an attendant position may belong to
only one attendant group. The attendant group must be defined prior to assigning individual attendant consoles
and their related information. Attendant positions are assigned using the Attendant Position Assignment
command (CMD 370)
Attendants belonging to an attendant group share the call load presented to the group via the attendant group
directory number. Incoming call priority for all attendants in the group is defined at the attendant group level.
Command Keyword:

ATT_GROUP_ASSIGN

Category Name:

Attendant

PREREQUISITE COMMAND
Night Bell Assignment (CMD 405)

(If data is entered in the "OVF DEST" field, this command is
required.)

OPERATIONS
Available operations:

ADD
DELETE
MODIFY
DISPLAY

The function and required data fields for each operation are described in this section.

ADD

GRP#

ATG DN

req

NAME

OVF TMR

opt

opt

OVF DEST

opt

ICI NO

ICI CAT

CALLS

opt

opt

opt

This operation creates one or more attendant groups in the PERCEPTION 4000 system. The attendant group
number and directory number must be unique. The attendant group directory number must not conflict with any
numbering plan in the system. A loop is permitted when adding a number of attendant groups with the same
attributes.

3-48

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
ATTENDANT GROUP ASSIGNMENT (CMD 372)
PERCEPTION 4000

COMMANDS

DELETE

GRP#

req
opt

ATG DN

opt
req

This operation removes an attendant group from the PERCEPTION 4000 system. Entering either the attendant
group number or attendant directory number is sufficient. All of the attendants in an attendant group must be
removed before deleting the group. When the last attendant of an attendant group is removed, the status of that
attendant group must be changed accordingly. Looping is permitted when deleting a number of attendant groups,
however a confirmation is requested by the system before it deletes each group.

MODIFY

GRP#

req
opt

ATG DN

opt
req

NAME

opt

OVF TMR

OVF DEST

opt

opt

ICI NO

ICI CAT

opt

opt

This operation changes the attributes of one or more attendant groups. Entering data in either the "GRP#" or the
"ATG DN" field is sufficient in a MODIFY operation. If data is entered in both of these fields, and if the "ATG DN"
does not match the one in the database, the directory number attributes are not allowed to be changed and the
input line is rejected. If this occurs, use the DELETE operation to delete the "ATG DN", then use the ADD
operation to enter a new directory number. Looping is permitted when modifying a number of attendant groups.

DISPLAY

GRP#

ATG DN

NAME

OVF TMR

OVF DEST

ICI NO

ICI CAT

CALLS

opt

This operation displays the attributes of one or more attendant groups. There are no required input data fields for
this operation. If no data is entered into any of these fields, the attributes of all attendant groups in the system
display. Looping is permitted in the "GRP#" field, and ranges are permitted in fields that accepts numeric input,
such as the “ATG DN” and "OVF DEST" fields, with the exception of the "CALLS" field.
PARAMETERS
Each field parameter is described in this section. Any variations for a particular operation are noted separately.
FIELD:
TYPE:

GRP# (Attendant Group Number)
Decimal

3-49

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
ATTENDANT GROUP ASSIGNMENT (CMD 372)
PERCEPTION 4000
FORMAT:
VALUE:
RANGE:
LOOP:

COMMANDS

1 or 2 digits
1 to 30
Not allowed
Allowed in all operations
This field assigns the attendant group number.
When assigning attendant console group numbers, it is important to note the relationship
between these numbers and the PERCEPTION 4000 system’s Local Central Processing Units
(LCPUs). The correct assignment of these numbers will help ensure that calls to the attendant
are not dropped if a redundant system performs a switchover to the standby side.
Attendant consoles are installed in the system via the Attendant Position Assignment command
(CMD 370). After an attendant console has been installed, it has an identifying equipment
number (e.g., 40108) indicating the Modular Line/Trunk Unit (4), the card slot (01), and the circuit
(08) to which it is assigned. A console’s assigned equipment number determines the LCPU (1 ~
3) which controls it, since each LCPU in the system controls specific Modular Line/Trunk Units
(shelves):

LCPU(X)

3-50

Modular Line/Trunk Units (Shelves) Controlled by LCPU(X)

1

1~4

2

5~8

3

9 ~ 10

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
ATTENDANT GROUP ASSIGNMENT (CMD 372)
PERCEPTION 4000

COMMANDS

The number of LCPUs in a system determines how many attendant groups can be supported. A
1-LCPU system supports up to ten attendant groups; a 2-LCPU system may have up to 20
attendant groups; and a 3-LCPU system may have up to 30 attendant groups. These attendant
groups are allocated among the various LCPUs as follows:
System
Size

2 LCPU
System

3 LCPU
System

ATTENDANT GROUP SUPPORT ALLOCATION

1 LCPU
System

LCPU1
Shelves Supported:
1~4

LCPU2
Shelves Supported:
5~8

LCPU3
Shelves Supported:
9 ~ 10

Attendant Groups
Supported:
1 ~ 10

Attendant Groups
Supported:
1 ~ 10

Attendant Groups
Supported:
11 ~ 20

Attendant Groups
Supported:
1 ~ 10

Attendant Groups
Supported:
11 ~ 20

Attendant Groups
Supported:
21 ~ 30

The following three examples should help illustrate the relationship between LCPUs, attendant
groups, and attendant console equipment numbers.
EXAMPLE 1:

■
■
■
■

Attendant console equipment number: 30203
Number of LCPUs in system: 1
(Attendant console is supported by LCPU1)
Assign attendant console to any attendant group 1 ~ 10.

EXAMPLE 2:

■
■
■
■

Attendant console equipment number: 60203
Number of LCPUs in system: 2
(Attendant console is supported by LCPU2)
Assign attendant console to any attendant group 11 ~ 20.

EXAMPLE 3:

■
■
■
■

Attendant console equipment number: 90203
Number of LCPUs in system: 3
(Attendant console is supported by LCPU3)
Assign attendant console to any attendant group 21 ~ 30.

3-51

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
ATTENDANT GROUP ASSIGNMENT (CMD 372)
PERCEPTION 4000
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:
RANGE:
LOOP:

COMMANDS

ATG DN (Attendant Group Directory Number)
DN Type
1 to 5 digits
0 to 99999
Allowed in a DISPLAY operation
Not allowed
Each attendant group must be assigned a unique directory number which does not conflict with
other directory numbers or any feature access codes defined in the system numbering plan. This
directory number is dialed by system users to receive service from an attendant in the attendant
group.

FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:

NAME (Attendant Group Name)
Text
0 to 9 ASCII characters
The name of the attendant group (up to 9 ASCII characters in length) may be assigned with this
field. The name displays on other attendant consoles and display equipped stations when dialing
the attendant group directory number. Embedded spaces are allowed in this field.

FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:
RANGE:
LOOP:

OVF TMR (Attendant Overflow Timer)
Decimal
1 to 3 digits
5 to 180 (seconds)
Allowed in a DISPLAY operation only
Not allowed
Data in this field determines the amount of time a call spends in the attendant call holding area
before going to the overflow number. The default value is 32 seconds. The minimum and
maximum overflow times are 5 and 180 seconds, respectively. This value may be adjusted in 1
second intervals. If an overflow time is entered in this field, an overflow destination must be
entered in the "OVF DEST" field.

FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:

OVF DEST (Overflow Destination)
Keyword
Predefined ASCII characters
Keywords:

BL01 ~ BL64
NON - No Overflow Destination

The overflow destination field defines the night bell to which overflow calls are directed. The
system supports up to 64 night bells, however overflow calls may be directed to only one night
bell per attendant group. The keyword NON may be used in a MODIFY operation only.
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:
RANGE:

3-52

ICI NO (ICI Category Number)
Decimal
1 or 2 digits
1 to 10
Allowed in a DISPLAY operation only

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
ATTENDANT GROUP ASSIGNMENT (CMD 372)
PERCEPTION 4000

COMMANDS

This field and the “ICI CAT” field define incoming call keys. A maximum of 10 ICI categories may
be defined for an attendant group. During a MODIFY operation, if a number is assigned in this
field, a keyword must be entered in the “ICI CAT” field.
Any ICI key definition may appear on multiple consoles within the same attendant group. These
calls allow the attendant to answer the oldest call of a particular ICI category type by pressing the
associated ICI key instead of answering the call via the ANSWER fixed key. Once the ICI
categories are defined in this command, they may be placed on the various attendant consoles
using the Attendant Feature Key Assignment command (CMD 371).
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:

ICI CAT (ICI Category Assignment)
Keyword / Decimal with Fixed Length
Predefined ASCII characters / 3 digits
001 to 256
Keywords:

ATT
DATT
EMR1
EMR2
EMR3
EMR4
ICPT
IPC
LHR
NAR

-

Attendant Group Calls
Directed Attendant Calls
Emergency 1
Emergency 2
Emergency 3
Emergency 4
Intercepts
Interposition Calls
Long Hold Recall
No Answer Recall

Values:

001~256 - Trunk groups 001~256 (or to the maximum system configuration)

One ICI category is assigned to each ICI key. During a MODIFY operation, whenever an ICI key
number is entered in the “ICI NO” field, one of the above keywords must be entered in this field.
The same keyword cannot be assigned more than once for another ICI key.
ICI assignment is not required if the attendant group does not wish any attendants to have the ICI
answering capability.
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:
RANGE:
LOOP:

CALLS (Number of Calls Per Attendant)
Decimal
1 or 2 digits
2 to 32
Not allowed
Not allowed
The "CALLS" field defines the number of calls per attendant allowed in the attendant group callwaiting queue (including talking, parked, and ringing/in-queue calls). The total queue size is
dependent on the number of attendants assigned to the same group directory number (set up
with the Attendant Position Assignment command, CMD 370), and the number of calls allowed
per attendant (CALLS). Note that a call that is being transferred or processed (where two or more
parties besides the attendant are involved) counts as one call. The queue size can be calculated
as follows:

3-53

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
ATTENDANT GROUP ASSIGNMENT (CMD 372)
PERCEPTION 4000

COMMANDS

Attendant group call-waiting queue size = Number of attendants with the same ATG DN,
times the number of calls per attendant (CALLS).
For example, if three attendants are assigned to an ATG DN, and the "CALLS" field is set to 8,
then the queue size is 3 x 8 (for a total of 24 calls waiting in queue). All three attendants in the
group share the same queue, since they belong to the same Attendant Group Directory Number.
However, each attendant is not restricted to only eight calls; for example, at a given time, if the
number of calls in the queue is 20, then each attendant console displays 20 calls waiting.
A  entered in the "CALLS" field during an ADD operation defaults the field to a value of 32
(which is the maximum allowed).
SYSTEM ERROR MESSAGES
The following error messages are unique to this command.
C37200
C37201
C37202
C37203
C37204
C37205
C37206
C37207
C37208
C37209
C37210
C37211
C37212
C37213
C37214
C37215
C37216
C37217
C37218
C37219
I37220
C37221

-

Attendant group number has not been defined
Attendant group number is required
Attendant group DN has not been defined
Attendant group DN has already been defined
Attendant group DN is required
Invalid Attendant group DN
Invalid group name
Overflow timer is required
Invalid overflow timer
Overflow destination is out of range
Overflow destination is required
Invalid overflow destination
Incoming key number is required
Incoming call category has already been defined
Incoming call category is required
Invalid incoming call category
Attendant group number or DN is required
Attendant has already been defined
Attendant group has already been defined
Cannot re-assign a new value in field 8
Warning: Undefined night bell in field #5
Cannot modify attendant group directory number

RELATED COMMANDS
Attendant Feature Key Assignment (CMD 371)
Attendant Incoming Call Priority Assignment (CMD 373)
Attendant Position Assignment (CMD 370)
Internal Call Alternate Routing Assignment (CMD 374)
Station Assignment (CMD 330)
Trunk Group Assignment (CMD 310)

3-54

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
ATTENDANT INCOMING CALL PRIORITY ASSIGNMENT (CMD 373)
PERCEPTION 4000

COMMANDS

ATTENDANT INCOMING CALL PRIORITY ASSIGNMENT (CMD 373)
Each attendant group may have up to 18 levels of priority for queuing incoming calls. Each desired priority level
may be assigned any number of incoming call categories. Note that assigning all 18 of the priority levels is not
necessary. All categories assigned to a given priority level are queued on a first-in/first-out basis within that
priority level.
Command Keyword:

CALL_PRIORITY_ASSIGN

Category Name:

Attendant

PREREQUISITE COMMAND
Attendant Group Assignment (CMD 372)

OPERATIONS
Available operations:

ADD
DELETE
MODIFY
DISPLAY

The function and required data fields for each operation are described in this section.

ADD

ATG DN

RECALL

PRIORITY

req

opt

req

CAT

CAT

CAT

CAT

CAT

CAT

CAT

CAT

CAT

CAT

opt

This operation assigns the recall handling option of an attendant group, and the incoming call categories to
different priorities for the specified attendant group. The Attendant Group Directory Number (ATG DN) and the
Priority Level (PRIORITY) are required fields, while all other fields are optional.

DELETE

ATG DN

PRIORITY

req

CAT

CAT

CAT

CAT

CAT

CAT

CAT

CAT

CAT

CAT

opt

This operation deletes incoming call categories from individual priority levels of the specified attendant group. The
Attendant Group Directory Number (ATG DN) and the Priority Level (PRIORITY) are required fields, while all

3-55

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
ATTENDANT INCOMING CALL PRIORITY ASSIGNMENT (CMD 373)
PERCEPTION 4000

COMMANDS

other fields are optional.

MODIFY

ATG DN

RECALL

req

This operation is used to modify the recall type of a specific attendant console. Recalls can be directed either
back to the extending individual attendant or to its attendant group.

DISPLAY

ATG DN

RECALL

PRIORITY

CAT

CAT

req

CAT

CAT

CAT

CAT

CAT

CAT

CAT

CAT

opt

This operation displays the recall handling option and incoming call categories assigned to each priority level of
the specified attendant group. The attendant group directory number is required for this operation, while all other
fields are optional. If no data is entered in the optional fields, all incoming call categories and priority levels for the
specified attendant group directory number are displayed.

PARAMETERS
Each field parameter is described in this section. Any variations for a particular operation are noted separately.
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:
RANGE:
LOOP:

ATG DN (Attendant Group Directory Number)
DN Type
1 to 5 digits
0 to 99999
Not allowed
Not allowed
This field selects which attendant group is about to be defined.

FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:

RECALL (Recall Handling Option)
Keyword
Predefined ASCII characters
Keywords:

GRP - Recall to Attendant Group
IND - Recall to Extending Attendant

The recall handling flag determines how general recalls are handled. These may be defined to
recall to the extending attendant only or recall to the attendant group. This field does not concern

3-56

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
ATTENDANT INCOMING CALL PRIORITY ASSIGNMENT (CMD 373)
PERCEPTION 4000

COMMANDS

itself with local physical recalls such as a call recalling from a locked loop. Those calls may only
be processed by the attendants themselves.
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:
RANGE:
LOOP:

PRIORITY (Priority Level)
Decimal
1 or 2 digits
1 to 18
Not allowed
Not allowed
This field sets the desired priority level for incoming calls. If first-in/first-out queuing is desired, all
incoming call categories are placed in priority one, as queuing within each priority level is
handled in a first-in/first-out manner.

FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:

CAT (Incoming Call Category)
Keyword / Decimal with Fixed Length
Predefined ASCII characters / 3 digits
001 to 256
Keywords:

ATT
DATT
EMR3
EMR4
ICPT
IPC
LHR
NAR

-

Attendant Group Calls
Directed Attendant Calls
Emergency 3
Emergency 4
Intercepts
Interposition Calls
Long Hold Recall
No Answer Recall

Values:

001~256 - Trunk groups 001~256 (or to the maximum system configuration)

Any trunk group number or categories listed above can be assigned to a given priority level.
There is no limit to the number of categories assigned to a given level, however an incoming call
category may be assigned to only one priority level.

SYSTEM ERROR MESSAGES
The following error messages are unique to this command.
C37300
C37301
C37302
C37303
C37304
C37305

-

Attendant group DN has not been defined
XXXX is not defined for priority N
Category has already been defined
Too many categories
Trunk group number has not been defined
At least one category must be entered

NOTE: In error message C37301, XXXX = EMR3, EMR4, ATT, DATT, etc.; N = 1 to 18.

3-57

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
ATTENDANT PASSWORD ASSIGNMENT (CMD 375)
PERCEPTION 4000

COMMANDS

ATTENDANT PASSWORD ASSIGNMENT (CMD 375)
The PERCEPTION 4000 system supports up to 64 attendant passwords. Each password may be assigned an
identification code which identifies the attendant using the console.
Command Keyword:

ATT_PASSWORDS

Category Name:

Attendant

PREREQUISITE COMMANDS
There are no prerequisites for this command.

OPERATIONS
Available operations:

ADD
DELETE
MODIFY
DISPLAY

The function and required data fields for each operation are described in this section.

ADD

INDEX

ATT PSWD

SMDR ID

req

This operation adds an attendant password to the attendant password log table. The "SMDR ID" field is
equivalent to an operator ID number, and must be unique for each password in the log table. Ranges and loops
are not permitted in this operation.

DELETE

INDEX

req

This operation deletes one or more attendant passwords from the attendant password log table. Looping is
permitted when deleting a group of passwords, though a confirmation is required before each password is
deleted.

3-58

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
ATTENDANT PASSWORD ASSIGNMENT (CMD 375)
COMMANDS

PERCEPTION 4000
MODIFY

INDEX

ATT PSWD

req

req
opt

SMDR ID

opt
req

This operation changes an attendant password or SMDR ID code. The SMDR ID code is equivalent to an
operator ID number, and must be unique for each password. The "ATT PSWD" or "SMDR ID" field is required,
along with the "INDEX" field. Ranges and loops are not permitted.

DISPLAY

INDEX

ATT PSWD

SMDR ID

opt

This operation displays one or more attendant passwords. If no data is entered in any of the fields, all of the
attendant passwords in the attendant log table are displayed. Loop fields and ranges are permitted in this
operation.

PARAMETERS
Each field parameter is described in this section. Any variations for a particular operation are noted separately.
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:
LOOP:

INDEX (Index Number)
Decimal
1 or 2 digits
1 to 64
Allowed in DELETE and DISPLAY operations
"INDEX" is an entry number in the attendant password log table and is provided for the
administrator's convenience. If the index number is deleted, the corresponding attendant
password is removed from the table.

FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:
LOOP:
RANGE:

ATT PSWD (Attendant Password)
Text
1 to 8 numerical characters
0 to 99999999
Not allowed
Not allowed
Passwords may be up to eight numerical characters in length. Leading and trailing zeros are
significant.

3-59

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
ATTENDANT PASSWORD ASSIGNMENT (CMD 375)
PERCEPTION 4000
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:
LOOP:
RANGE:

COMMANDS

SMDR ID (SMDR ID Code)
Decimal
1 or 2 digits
0 to 99
Not allowed
Allowed in ADD, MODIFY, and DISPLAY operations
The SMDR identification code field assigns a one or two digit code to each password so the
attendant may be identified on the SMDR call record. This code must be unique for each
password; therefore it may not be used for multiple passwords.

SYSTEM ERROR MESSAGES
The following error messages are unique to this command.
C37500
C37501
C37502
C37503
C37504
C37505
C37506
C37507
C37508

-

Index number is out of range
Index number has not been defined
Index number has already been defined
Attendant password has already been defined
Attendant password is required
SMDR ID has already been defined
SMDR ID is required
Attendant password or SMDR ID is required
Invalid attendant password

RELATED COMMAND
Attendant Position Assignment (CMD 370)

3-60

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
ATTENDANT POSITION ASSIGNMENT (CMD 370)
PERCEPTION 4000

COMMANDS

ATTENDANT POSITION ASSIGNMENT (CMD 370)
The Attendant Position Assignment command installs or removes an attendant console from the PERCEPTION
4000 system. This command also modifies or displays existing attendant console attributes.
Command Keyword:

ATT_POSITION_ASSIGN

Category Name:

Attendant

PREREQUISITE COMMAND
Attendant Group Assignment (CMD 372)

OPERATIONS
Available operations:

ADD
DELETE
MODIFY
DISPLAY

The function and required data fields for each operation are described in this section.

ADD

EQUIP #

ATT DN

req

NAME

opt

GRP DN

COS

DRL

FRLP

QPL

req

ROB

EMR RNG

PSWD

TYPE AUD

opt

locked

This operation installs one or more attendant consoles in the system. The equipment number and attendant
directory number must be unique and must not conflict with any other numbering plan in the system. An attendant
group must be created before an attendant can be assigned to it.

DELETE

EQUIP #

ATT DN

req
opt

opt
req

This operation deletes an attendant console from the system. The equipment number or attendant directory
number must be entered. Ranges are not permitted. A confirmation is required when removing the last attendant
from an attendant group. When the last attendant of an attendant group is removed, the status of that attendant
group must be changed accordingly. Deletion of an attendant position will also undefine all feature keys assigned

3-61

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
ATTENDANT POSITION ASSIGNMENT (CMD 370)
PERCEPTION 4000

COMMANDS

to that position through the Attendant Feature Key Assignment command (CMD 371).

EQUIP #

ATT DN

NAME

GRP DN

COS

DRL

req/opt

FRLP

QPL

ROB

EMR RNG

PSWD

TYPE AUD

opt

locked

This operation modifies attributes of one or more existing attendant consoles in the system. Input is required in
the "EQUIP #" or the "ATT DN" field. The "ATT DN" and "GRP DN" fields may not be modified. If an entry is made
in either of these fields, the entry must match the data in the database. To modify an attendant/attendant group
directory number, perform a DELETE operation to delete the original directory number, then use the ADD
operation to enter a new number.

DISPLAY

EQUIP #

ATT DN

req

NAME

GRP DN

COS

opt

DRL

FRLP

QPL

ROB

EMR RNG

PSWD

TYPE AUD

opt

req

locked

This operation displays attributes of one or more existing attendant consoles. All fields are optional. If no data is
entered in any of the fields, the attributes of all of the attendant consoles in the system display. Ranges are
permitted in all fields.

PARAMETERS
Each field parameter is described in this section. Any variations for a particular operation are noted separately.
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:
RANGE:
LOOP:

EQUIP # (Equipment Number)
EQ Type
5 or 6 digits
(0)10101 to 101316 *
Not allowed
Allowed in all operations
* Use the following chart to determine valid ranges for various types of equipment.
Digits

Range

Hardware

First digit(s)
Second two digits
Last two digits

(0)1~10
01~11, 13
01~16

Shelf no.
Card slot no.
Circuit no.

Each attendant console is assigned to a circuit on a digital line card (DSTI). The "EQUIP #" field
defines the location of the connection. The first digit(s) represents the shelf number, the next two
digits represent the card slot number, and finally, the last two digits represent the circuit number.

3-62

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
ATTENDANT POSITION ASSIGNMENT (CMD 370)
PERCEPTION 4000

COMMANDS

NOTE: Attendant consoles may only be installed on DSTI cards configured for 1B operation,
and may be used to establish the 1B card configuration if it is the first assignment made to the
DSTI card.
When installing attendant consoles, it is important to note the relationship between the console’s
assigned equipment number, its controlling LCPU, and its assigned attendant group number.
LCPU support is allocated among the PERCEPTION 4000 system’s Modular Line/Trunk Units
(shelves) as follows:

LCPU(X)

Modular Line/Trunk Units (Shelves) Controlled by LCPU(X)

1

1~4

2

5~8

3

9 ~ 10

Those attendant consoles which are to be in the same attendant group need to be assigned to
equipment locations that will be supported by the same LCPU. This is because different LCPUs
support different attendant groups, as noted in the following table:

System
Size

2 LCPU
System

3 LCPU
System

ATTENDANT GROUP SUPPORT ALLOCATION

1 LCPU
System

LCPU1
Shelves Supported:
1~4

LCPU2
Shelves Supported:
5~8

LCPU3
Shelves Supported:
9 ~ 10

Attendant Groups
Supported:
1 ~ 10

Attendant Groups
Supported:
1 ~ 10

Attendant Groups
Supported:
11 ~ 20

Attendant Groups
Supported:
1 ~ 10

Attendant Groups
Supported:
11 ~ 20

Attendant Groups
Supported:
21 ~ 30

3-63

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
ATTENDANT POSITION ASSIGNMENT (CMD 370)
PERCEPTION 4000
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:
RANGE:
LOOP:

COMMANDS

ATT DN (Attendant Directory Number)
DN Type
1 to 5 digits
0 to 99999
Allowed in a DISPLAY operation only
Not allowed
Each attendant console must be assigned a unique directory number so that the attendant can
be dialed directly. This number must not conflict with any other directory numbers or feature
access codes in the system's numbering plan. The "ATT DN" cannot be modified. To change the
directory number, delete the original number, then add a new directory number.

FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:

NAME (Attendant Name)
Text
0 to 9 ASCII characters
This optional field allows you to enter an attendant position name of up to nine ASCII characters.
Embedded spaces are allowed. The name entered here displays on the attendant console and
on display-equipped stations when individually addressing the attendant.

FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:
RANGE:
LOOP:

GRP DN (Attendant Group Directory Number)
DN Type
1 to 5 digits
0 to 99999
Allowed in a DISPLAY operation only
Not allowed
The attendant group directory number is first defined through the Attendant Group Assignment
command (CMD 372). This directory number is dialed by system users to receive service from an
attendant in the attendant group. The "GRP DN" cannot be modified. To change the directory
number, delete the original number, then add a new directory number.

FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:
RANGE:
LOOP:

COS (Class of Service)
Decimal
1 or 2 digits
1 to 64
Allowed in a DISPLAY operation only
Not allowed
The "COS" field determines what features and facilities are available for an attendant console.
The COS table is set up with the Class of Service Assignment command (CMD 334).

FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:
RANGE:
LOOP:

DRL (Destination Restriction Level)
Decimal
1 or 2 digits
1 to 16 (or to the maximum system configuration)
Allowed in a DISPLAY operation only
Not allowed
The "DRL" field determines restrictions on outgoing calls. The DRL table is set up with the
Destination Restriction Level Assignment command (CMD 337).

3-64

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
ATTENDANT POSITION ASSIGNMENT (CMD 370)
PERCEPTION 4000
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:
RANGE:
LOOP:

COMMANDS

FRLP (Facility Restriction Level Profile)
Decimal
1 or 2 digits
1 to 32 (or to the maximum system configuration)
Allowed in a DISPLAY operation only
Not allowed
The "FRLP" field establishes the relationship between the originator's' facility restriction level
profile number and the facility restriction levels assigned to various routes within each least cost
routing route table. The FRLP table is set up with the Facility Restriction Level Profile Assignment
command (CMD 387).

FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:
RANGE:
LOOP:

QPL (Queue Priority Level)
Decimal
1 digit
1 to 8
Allowed in a DISPLAY operation only
Not allowed
The "QPL" field determines the queuing priority level for outgoing trunk calls when trunk queuing
is set to 'priority queuing' with the System Option Flag Assignment command (CMD 408).
Commands related to this field include the LCR Routing Table Assignment command (CMD 383)
and the LCR Special Routing Assignment command (CMD 384).

FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:

ROB (Ring Over Busy Flag)
Keyword
Predefined ASCII characters
Keywords:

YES - Enable Ring Over Busy signal
NO - Disable Ring Over Busy signal

This field enables/disables a muted ringing signal at the console when a new call comes in while
the attendant is already engaged in processing a call.
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:

EMR RNG (Emergency Call Ringing Flag)
Keyword
Predefined ASCII characters
Keywords:

YES - Enable Emergency Call Ringing
NO - Disable Emergency Call Ringing

When an emergency call terminates at the attendant console, the console starts to ring at full
volume.
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:

PSWD (Attendant Password Requirement)
Keyword
Predefined ASCII characters
Keywords:

YES - Password required
NO - Password not required

3-65

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
ATTENDANT POSITION ASSIGNMENT (CMD 370)
PERCEPTION 4000

COMMANDS

The attendant console may be designated to require the attendant to enter a password prior to
the system allowing the console to exit the position busy mode and return to call processing. The
"PSWD" field controls whether or not a password is required by the attendant. Attendant
passwords are set up through the Attendant Password Assignment command (CMD 375) and
must be defined to enable this feature.
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
DEFAULT:

TYPE (Terminal Type)
Keyword
Predefined ASCII characters
EGA
Keywords:

EGA - Enhanced Graphic Adaptor
EL - Electroluminescent Display Unit

This field indicates the type of display terminal that is to be used with the PERCEPTION 4000
attendant console base unit. Either terminal type provides the attendant with the same display
information, although a color EGA terminal can provide color displays.
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:

AUD (Key Depression Audible Response)
Keyword
Predefined ASCII characters
Keywords:

YES - Enable Audible Key Depression
NO - Disable Audible Key Depression

This field determines whether a confirmation tone is output when a key is pressed. Currently this
is a locked field set to "YES."

SYSTEM ERROR MESSAGES
The following error messages are unique to this command.
C37000
C37001
C37002
C37003
C37004
C37005
C37006
C37007
C37008
I37010
I37011
C37012
C37013
C37014
C37015
C37016
C37017

3-66

-

Equipment number is already assigned to another device
Attendant directory number has already been defined
Invalid attendant directory number
Attendant group directory number has not been defined
Input exceeds the number of possible attendants in the system
The specified attendant does not exist
Equipment number and directory number do not match
Equipment number or attendant directory number is required
Not a DSTI card type
Are you sure you want to remove last attendant from attendant group?
Remove this attendant?
Cannot assign more attendants to attendant groups
Cannot assign more attendants to shelves
Cannot modify attendant group directory number
Cannot modify attendant directory number
Attendant call queue has L calls; try again when it is M or less (L and M are values between 1
and 320)
Attendant call queue has N calls; try again when it is empty (N is a value betwen 1 and 32)

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
ATTENDANT POSITION ASSIGNMENT (CMD 370)
PERCEPTION 4000

COMMANDS

RELATED COMMANDS
Attendant Feature Key Assignment (CMD 371)
Attendant Incoming Call Priority Assignment (CMD 373)
Attendant Password Assignment (CMD 375)
Class of Service Assignment (CMD 334)
Destination Restriction Level Assignment (CMD 337)
Facility Restriction Level Profile Assignment (CMD 387)
Internal Call Alternate Routing Assignment (CMD 374)
LCR Routing Table Assignment (CMD 383)
LCR Special Routing Information (CMD 384)
Station Assignment (CMD 330)
System Option Flag Assignment (CMD 408)

3-67

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
AUTHORIZATION CODE ASSIGNMENT (CMD 349)
PERCEPTION 4000

COMMANDS

AUTHORIZATION CODE ASSIGNMENT (CMD 349)
The PERCEPTION 4000 supports up to 1024 authorization codes. Each authorization code changes the Class of
Service definition, Destination Restriction Level, Facility Restriction Level Profile, Queue Priority Level, and
answering position from what is in effect for the station, data device, attendant, DISA, or incoming TIE trunk at the
time of authorization code registration. The same authorization code can be used on any device which is
assigned the above attributes. The Authorization Code Assignment command adds, deletes, modifies, and
displays these codes.
Command Keyword:

AUTHORIZATION_CODES

Category Name:

Station

PREREQUISITE COMMANDS
Numbering Plan Assignment (CMD 300)
If "ANSPOS" is defined, one of the following commands may be needed:
ACD Group Assignment (CMD 355)
Attendant Group Assignment (CMD 372)
Attendant Position Assignment (CMD 370)
Station Hunting Assignment (CMD 342)
UCD Group Assignment (CMD 354)

OPERATIONS
Available operations:

ADD
DELETE
MODIFY
DISPLAY

The function and required data fields for each operation are described in this section.

ADD

AUTH CODE

SMDR ID

req

opt

COS

DRL

FRLP

req

QPL

ANSPOS

RG

opt

locked

This operation adds authorization codes to the table. All fields, except the "SMDR ID", "ANSPOS", and "S RG"
fields, are required.

3-68

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
AUTHORIZATION CODE ASSIGNMENT (CMD 349)
PERCEPTION 4000

COMMANDS

DELETE

AUTH CODE

req

This operation deletes an authorization code from the table. "AUTH CODE" is a required field.

MODIFY

AUTH CODE

SMDR ID

COS

req

DRL

FRLP

QPL

ANS POS

RG

locked

opt

This operation modifies the attributes of an authorization code. "AUTH CODE" is a required field, while the
remaining fields are optional, with the exception of the "S RG" field which is a locked field.

DISPLAY

INDEX

AUTH CODE

SMDR ID

COS

DRL

opt

FRLP

QPL

ANS POS

RG

locked

This operation displays authorization codes and their attributes. Ranges are permitted in all of the fields, except
the "SMDR ID" and "S RG" fields.

PARAMETERS
Each field parameter is described in this section. Any variations for a particular operation are noted separately.
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:
RANGE:

INDEX
Decimal
1 to 4 digits
1 to 1024
Allowed in a DISPLAY operation only
This field is used in a DISPLAY operation only, and is for the convenience of the M&A supervisor.
The PERCEPTION 4000's database does not support indexed authorization codes.

3-69

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
AUTHORIZATION CODE ASSIGNMENT (CMD 349)
PERCEPTION 4000
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:

COMMANDS

AUTH CODE (Authorization Code)
Decimal
1 to 8 digits
1 to 99999999
Each code can be up to eight digits in length (set with the "LEN PD1" field in the Numbering Plan
Assignment command, CMD 300). All authorization codes must be of the same length. This field
is required for ADD, DELETE, and MODIFY operations.

FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:

SMDR ID (SMDR Identification Code)
Text
0 to 5 ASCII characters
Each authorization code has a corresponding SMDR identification code to identify which caller
used the system without disclosing the actual authorization code, thereby breaching security.
SMDR ID codes are optional and are not required.

FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:
RANGE:

COS (Class of Service)
Decimal
1 or 2 digits
1 to 64
Allowed in a DISPLAY operation only
The COS table is set up with the Class of Service Assignment command (CMD 334). This field is
required for an ADD operation.

FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:
RANGE:

DRL (Destination Restriction Level)
Decimal
1 or 2 digits
1 to 16
Allowed in a DISPLAY operation only
The DRL table is set up with the Destination Restriction Level Assignment command (CMD 337).
This field is required for an ADD operation.

FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:
RANGE:

FRLP (Facility Restriction Level Profile)
Decimal
1 or 2 digits
1 to 32
Allowed in a DISPLAY operation only
The FRLP table is set up with the Facility Restriction Level Profile Assignment command (CMD
387). This field is required for an ADD operation.

FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:
RANGE:

3-70

QPL (Queue Priority Level)
Decimal
1 digit
1 to 8
Allowed in a DISPLAY operation only

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
AUTHORIZATION CODE ASSIGNMENT (CMD 349)
PERCEPTION 4000

COMMANDS

Commands related to this field include the LCR Routing Table Assignment command (CMD 383)
and the LCR Special Routing Assignment command (CMD 384). This field is required for an ADD
operation.
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:
RANGE:

ANSPOS (Answer Position)
DN Type
1 to 5 digits
0 to 99999
Allowed in a DISPLAY operation only
This field is optional, but when used, data input must be one of the following:
Attendant
Attendant Group
Station

FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:
RANGE:

Hunt Group Pilot
ACD Pilot
UCD Pilot

RG (Voice/Data Restriction Group) (Reserved for future use.)
Decimal
1 or 2 digits
1 to 16
Not allowed
This is a locked field. No input is accepted.

SYSTEM ERROR MESSAGES
The following error messages are unique to this command.
C34900
C34901
C34902
C34903
C34904
C34905
C34906

-

Invalid dial 0 destination
Invalid authorization code
Authorization code already exists
Authorization code does not exist
Invalid authorization code length
SMDR identification code maximum is 5 characters
Number of authorization codes has reached system maximum.

RELATED COMMANDS
Class of Service Assignment (CMD 334)
Destination Restriction Level Assignment (CMD 337)
Facility Restriction Level Profile Assignment (CMD 387)
LCR Routing Table Assignment (CMD 383)
LCR Special Routing Assignment (CMD 384)

3-71

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
AUTODIAL NUMBER DISPLAY (CMD 324)
PERCEPTION 4000

COMMANDS

AUTODIAL NUMBER DISPLAY (CMD 324)
This command displays the current destination numbers of preregistered Autodial keys on telephones and/or addon modules. In addition, the command allows the system administrator to modify destination numbers on Autodial
keys. Note that the Autodial keys are assigned with the Station Feature Key Assignment command (CMD 331).
Command Keyword:

AUTO_DIAL_DISP

Category Name:

Station

PREREQUISITE COMMANDS
Station Assignment (CMD 330)
Station Feature Key Assignment (CMD 331)

OPERATIONS
Available operations:

MODIFY
DISPLAY

The function and required data fields for each operation are described in this section.

MODIFY

PRM DN | PRM DEV | ADL POS | LS DEV | LS POS | DESTINATION |

req

opt

opt

req

The MODIFY operation is used to add or change a preregistered destination for a specified Autodial key. All fields
are required, except for the "LS DEV" and "LS POS" fields. However, if line selection is programmed into the
Autodial sequence, then data is required in both the "LS DEV" and "LS POS" fields.

DISPLAY

PRM DN | PRM DEV | ADL POS | LS DEV | LS POS | DESTINATION |

req

opt

This operation displays the preregistered destinations of all Autodial keys for a specified prime directory number.
The optional fields may be used to provide selected information.

3-72

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
AUTODIAL NUMBER DISPLAY (CMD 324)
PERCEPTION 4000

COMMANDS

PARAMETERS
Each field parameter is described in this section. Any variations for a particular operation are noted separately.
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:
LOOP:

PRM DN (Prime Directory Number)
DN Type
1 to 5 digits
1 to 99999
Not allowed
The "PRM DN" field, which is required in both the MODIFY and DISPLAY operations, specifies
the prime directory number for the device containing the Autodial keys.

FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:

PRM DEV (Primary Device)
Keyword
Predefined ASCII characters
Keywords:

4000
EKT
DKT
AD1
AD2

-

PERCEPTION 4000 Telephone
Electronic Telephone
DKT Digital Telephone
Add-on Module 1 (20-key or 60-key [60-key = three 20-key modules])
Add-on Module 2 (20-key)

The "PRM DEV" field indicates the primary device containing the Autodial key to be modified or
displayed. This field is required in a MODIFY operation, and optional in a DISPLAY operation.
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:

RANGE:

ADL POS (Autodial Key Position)
Decimal
1 or 2 digits
1 to 10 (10-key digital and electronic telephones)
1 to 20 (20-key digital and electronic telephones, 20-key add-on modules)
1 to 60 (60-key add-on module [three 20-key modules])
Allowed in a DISPLAY operation
This field, which indicates the position of the Autodial key on the "PRM DEV", is required in a
MODIFY operation and optional in a DISPLAY operation. The key position is programmed with
the Station Feature Key Assignment command (CMD 331). Refer to Figure 3-1a for illustrations
of primary device key positions.

FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:

LS DEV (Line Selection Device)
Keyword
Predefined ASCII characters
Keywords:

4000
EKT
DKT
AD1
AD2

-

PERCEPTION 4000 Digital Telephone
Electronic Telephone
DKT Digital Telephone
Add-on Module 1 (20-key or 60-key [60-key = three 20-key modules])
Add-on Module 2 (20-key)

On multi-line telephones and telephones with add-on modules, a secondary line may be used by
an Autodial key to place a call. The "LS DEV" field defines the device containing the secondary

3-73

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
AUTODIAL NUMBER DISPLAY (CMD 324)
PERCEPTION 4000

COMMANDS

line. If there is no line selection programmed into the Autodial sequence associated with the
selected ADL key, this field is left blank.
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:

RANGE:

LS POS (Line Selection Key Position)
Decimal
1 or 2 digits
1 to 10 (10-key digital and DKT/electronic telephones)
1 to 20 (20-key digital and DKT/electronic telephones, 20-key add-on modules)
1 to 60 (60-key add-on module [three 20-key modules])
Not allowed
This field, which is required if an entry is made in the "LS DEV" field, indicates the position of the
prime or secondary line key on the line selection device (i.e., PERCEPTION 4000 digital
telephone, electronic telephone, or add-on module).
PERCEPTION 4000
10-Key Digital Telephone

1

6

2

3

7

8

10-Key DKT or
Electronic Telephone

4

9

PERCEPTION 4000
20-Key Digital Telephone

5

10

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

20-Key DKT or
Electronic Telephone

Add-on Module

10

10

20

1

11

9

9

19

2

12

8

8

18

3

13

7

7

17

4

14

6

6

16

5

15

5

5

15

6

16

4

4

14

7

17

3

3

13

8

18

2

2

12

9

19

1

1

11

10

20

Figure 3-2
Key Positions
NOTE: The shaded areas in the figures designate default prime directory number locations.

3-74

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
AUTODIAL NUMBER DISPLAY (CMD 324)
PERCEPTION 4000
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:
RANGE:

COMMANDS

DESTINATION (Autodial Destination Digits)
Dialing Digits
1 to 24 digits
0 to 9
Not allowed
This field specifies the internal or external destination directory number for the specified Autodial
key. Valid destinations include an attendant, station, or off-premises directory number. The
"DESTINATION" is required in a MODIFY operation, and optional in a DISPLAY operation.

SYSTEM ERROR MESSAGES
The following error messages are unique to this command.
C32400
C32401
C32402
C32403
C32404
C32405
C32406
C32407
C32408

-

Terminal does not exist in LCPU
Directory number does not exist
Specified key number is not an Autodial key
Specified key number is out of range
Device type does not match with terminal type
Specified line selection is not a line key
Secondary line key position is required
Not an Autodial destination
Line selection device does not match with terminal type

3-75

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
CALL FORWARDING DESTINATION DISPLAY (CMD 325)
PERCEPTION 4000

COMMANDS

CALL FORWARDING DESTINATION DISPLAY (CMD 325)
This command displays all of the Preregistered Call Forwarding (PRCF) keys for a specified prime directory
number, or displays only the currently active Call Forwarding key. Additionally, the command specifies the Call
Forwarding type and destination numbers assigned to the keys. The command also allows the system
administrator to modify the destination numbers of PRCF keys, or activate/deactivate a Call Forwarding feature
for a specified prime directory number. Note that Call Forward keys are assigned with the Station Feature Key
Assignment command (CMD 331) and programmed by the station user.
Command Keyword:

CALL_FORWARD_DISP

Category Name:

Station

PREREQUISITE COMMANDS
Station Assignment (CMD 330)
Station Feature Key Assignment (CMD 331)

OPERATIONS
Available operations:

MODIFY
DISPLAY

The function and required data fields for each operation are described in this section.

MODIFY

PCF/ACF | PRM DN | DEV | POS | TYPE | DESTINATION |

req

req or N/A

req

The MODIFY operation adds or changes the destination number of a preregistered key, or activates/deactivates
call forwarding for the specified Call Forward feature ("TYPE" field). "DEV" and "POS" field input is required if a
Preregistered Call Forwarding key (PCF) is selected in the "PCF/ACF" field. When the Active Call Forward key
(ACF) is selected, then the "DEV" and "POS" fields are "locked;" if data is entered in either field, an error
message appears.

DISPLAY

PCF/ACF | PRM DN | DEV | POS | TYPE | DESTINATION |

req

3-76

opt or N/A

output only

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
CALL FORWARDING DESTINATION DISPLAY (CMD 325)
PERCEPTION 4000

COMMANDS

This operation displays the preregistered or currently-active Call Forwarding destinations for a specified prime
directory number. The optional fields may be used to provide selected information for PRCFs.

PARAMETERS
Each field parameter is described in this section. Any variations for a particular operation are noted separately.
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:

PCF/ACF (Preregistered/Active Call Forward Type)
Keyword
Predefined ASCII characters
Keywords:

PCF - Preregistered Call Forward Keys
ACF - Active Call Forward Feature

The "PCF/ACF" field indicates the type of information to be modified/displayed: either
Preregistered Call Forward (PRCF) keys for the specified prime directory number, or only the
currently Active Call Forward feature. This field is required in both the MODIFY and DISPLAY
operations.
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:
LOOP:

PRM DN (Prime Directory Number)
DN Type
1 to 5 digits
1 to 99999
Not allowed
The "PRM DN" field, which is required, specifies the prime directory number of the device
containing the Call Forward keys.

FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:

DEV (Preregistered Call Forward Device)
Keyword
Predefined ASCII characters
Keywords:

4000
EKT
DKT
AD1
AD2

-

PERCEPTION 4000 Telephone
Electronic Telephone
DKT Digital Telephone
Add-on Module 1 (20-key or 60-key [60-key = three 20-key modules])
Add-on Module 2 (20-key)

The "DEV" field indicates the device containing the PRCF keys. This field is required in a
MODIFY operation when PCF is selected in the "PCF/ACF" field. When ACF is selected, the
"DEV" field is "locked."
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:

RANGE:

POS (PRCF Key Position Number)
Decimal
1 or 2 digits
1 to 10 (10-key digital and electronic telephones)
1 to 20 (20-key digital and electronic telephones, 20-key add-on modules)
1 to 60 (60-key add-on module [three 20-key modules])
Allowed in a DISPLAY operation

3-77

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
CALL FORWARDING DESTINATION DISPLAY (CMD 325)
PERCEPTION 4000

COMMANDS

This field indicates the position of the PRCF keys on the "DEV", and is required in a MODIFY
operation when PCF is selected in the "PCF/ACF" field. When ACF is selected, the "POS" field is
"locked". Refer to the Station Feature Key Assignment command (CMD 331) for illustrations of
primary device key positions.
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:

TYPE (Call Forward Type)
Keyword
Predefined ASCII characters
Keywords:

CFAC - Call Forward all Calls
CFBN - Call Forward Busy/No Answer
CFNA - Call Forward No Answer

This field selects the Call Forward type assigned to the prime directory number ("PRM DN" field)
for PRCF keys. If ACF is entered in the "PCF/ACF" field, this field is used to deactivate the
currently active key by entering a . In a DISPLAY operation, the "TYPE" field is
an 'output only' field.
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:
RANGE:

DESTINATION (Call Forward Destination Number)
Dialing Digits
1 to 24 digits
0 to 9
Not allowed
This field specifies the internal or external destination directory number for the specified Call
Forward key. Valid destinations include an attendant, station, or off-premises directory number.
The "DESTINATION" cannot be deleted; it can only be added or changed.

SYSTEM ERROR MESSAGES
The following error messages are unique to this command.
C32500
C32501
C32502
C32503
C32504
C32505
C32506
C32507
C32508
C32509
C32510
C32511
C32512
C32513
C32514
C32515
C32516

3-78

-

Terminal does not exist in LCPU
Directory number does not exist
Specified key number is not a preregistered Call Forward key
Key number is out of range
Device type does not match with terminal type
There is no call forward activation
Device is not required; enter a  in this field
Position number is not required; enter a  in this field
Device is required for PCF selection
Position number is required for PCF selection
Destination is not required; enter a  in this field
Destination is required
Not allowed to delete preregistered call forwarding
Destination does not exist
Directory number is a multiple line number
Directory number is an originate-only station
Terminal is in feature registration mode, please try again

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
CALL PICKUP GROUP ASSIGNMENT (CMD 346)
PERCEPTION 4000

COMMANDS

CALL PICKUP GROUP ASSIGNMENT (CMD 346)
The Call Pickup Group command defines memberships in the system's call pickup groups. This information is
necessary for both the Group Call Pickup and the Directed Group Call Pickup features. Directed Group Call
Pickup does not require the calling or called party to be assigned pickup group membership. A maximum of 512
members per system may be assigned to Call Pickup Groups.
Command Keyword:

CALL_PICKUP

Category Name:

Station

PREREQUISITE COMMAND
Station Assignment (CMD 330)

OPERATIONS
Available operations:

ADD
DELETE
MODIFY
DISPLAY

The function and required data fields for each operation are described in this section.

ADD

GRP#

NAME

req

opt

INDEX

MEM DN

req

This operation adds call pickup group names or member directory numbers. Loops are allowed in the “GRP#” and
“INDEX” fields.

DELETE

GRP#

MEM DN

req

This operation deletes call pickup members. To delete all members in a group, enter the keyword ALL in the
“MEM DN” field. Loops are allowed in the “GRP#” field.

3-79

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
CALL PICKUP GROUP ASSIGNMENT (CMD 346)
PERCEPTION 4000

COMMANDS

MODIFY

GRP#

NAME

req

This operation modifies call pickup group names.

DISPLAY

GRP#

NAME

opt

INDEX

MEM DN

output
only

opt

This operation displays call pickup group names and members. Looping is allowed in the “GRP#” field. If no data
is entered in any of the fields, all of the call pickup group names and members are displayed.

PARAMETERS
Each field parameter is described in this section. Any variations for a particular operation are noted separately.
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:
LOOP:

GRP# (Call Pickup Group Number)
Decimal
1 to 3 digits
1 to 128
Allowed in all operations
This field assigns a number to a Call Pickup Group. Up to 128 groups with a maximum of four
members in each group may be defined. Note that the system allows 512 members per system
with a maximum of 32 members per group. Group members must be voice stations only. Stations
may belong to only one call pickup group.

FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:

NAME (Group Name)
Text
0 to 9 ASCII characters
This field assigns a name to the designated group number. Embedded spaces are allowed.

FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:
LOOP:

3-80

INDEX (Member Index Number)
Decimal
1 or 2 digits
1 to 32
Allowed in an ADD operation

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
CALL PICKUP GROUP ASSIGNMENT (CMD 346)
PERCEPTION 4000

COMMANDS

Index numbers are assigned to each designated call pickup group member with this field. A call
pickup search is made from the lowest index number to the highest. Thus, ordering is important,
such as when a group pickup or directed group pickup is requested by a party and multiple
telephones within that group are ringing, the lowest numbered (index number) ringing telephone
is picked up first.
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:
RANGE:

MEM DN (Pickup Group Member Directory Number)
DN Type / Keyword
1 to 5 digits / Predefined ASCII characters
0 to 99999
Allowed in a DISPLAY operation
Keyword:

ALL

Assign members to a group in the order in which the group should be searched for a ringing call.
This feature does not look for the longest ringing call, but rather does a sequential search of this
table. In a DELETE operation, if the keyword ALL is entered, all of the members of the given call
pickup group are deleted.

SYSTEM ERROR MESSAGES
The following error messages are unique to this command.
C34600
C34601
C34602
C34603
C34604
C34605
C34606
C34607

-

Not a station directory number
Table is full
Directory number is already in an other pickup group
Directory number not found
Directory number is already in the pickup group
Directory number is a private line
Directory number is not a prime DN
No space left to add new members

3-81

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
CANNED TEXT/ADVISORY MESSAGE CREATION (CMD 328)
PERCEPTION 4000

COMMANDS

CANNED TEXT/ADVISORY MESSAGE CREATION (CMD 328)
This command is used to modify canned text and advisory message information that appears on Perception 4000
HDT2020SD telephones and on the Perception 4000 attendant console display. The command is also used to
modify attendant console identification information that appears on the console's electroluminescent (EL) display
unit. This is typically company-specific information, including the name, address, and telephone number of the
Toshiba distributor or end-user customer. Additionally, this command is used to modify the greeting that is sent
whenever a data call is connected through the Perception 4000 system.
Command Keyword:

MESSAGE_ASSIGN

Category Name:

Station

PREREQUISITE COMMANDS
There are no prerequisites for this command.

OPERATIONS
Available operations:

DISPLAY
MODIFY

The function and required data fields for each operation are described as follows:
DISPLAY:

TYPE

INX

MESSAGE TEXT

opt

req

This operation is used to display current canned text, advisory messages, attendant EL display text, and/or the
system's data call greeting.

MODIFY:

TYPE

req

INX

MESSAGE TEXT

opt

This operation is used to modify the contents of canned text, advisory messages, attendant console EL display
text, and/or the system's data call greeting.

3-82

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
CANNED TEXT/ADVISORY MESSAGE CREATION (CMD 328)
PERCEPTION 4000

COMMANDS

PARAMETERS
This section defines input permitted for each field. Any variations for a particular operation are noted separately.
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:

TYPE (Message Type)
Keyword
Preassigned ASCII characters
Keywords:

CAN
ADV
ATT
DAT

-

Canned text
Advisory messages
Attendant EL display text
System message for data calls

This field is used to specify the type of message that is to be modified.
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE;

RANGE:
LOOP:

INX (Index Number)
Decimal
1 decimal digit
1 - 8 for canned text and advisory messages
1 - 3 for attendant EL display text
1 - 2 for system message for data calls
Not allowed
Allowed in DISPLAY operation only

This field specifies which specific text line or advisory message (1 - 8) is to be modified; which type of EL display
information (1 - 3); or which system message for data calls (1 - 2) is to be modified.
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:

MESSAGE TEXT
ASCII characters
Canned text and advisory messages: 30 characters maximum
Attendant EL display messages and system message for data calls: 70 characters maximum

This field is used to indicate: the canned text and advisory message information that will appear on Perception
4000 HDT2020SD telephones and attendant console; additional attendant EL display information; and the system
message for incoming data calls.
Up to eight text messages and eight advisory messages can be programmed. Once programmed, text messages
can be sent from an HDT2020SD telephone(via soft key operaton) when calling another HDT2020SD telephone.
A text message provides the called party with a brief message about the nature of the call (e.g., "Please see me,"
"Returned your Call," etc.). Text messages are displayed on the called HDT2020SD when the called party scrolls
through his/her telephone messages via soft key operation.
Advisory messages can be programmed at any HDT2020SD telephone to provide calling HDT2020SD
telephones or a calling attendant console about the whereabouts of the called party (e.g., "In a Meeting," "Out to
Lunch," etc.). An advisory message is set at an HDT2020SD telephone via soft key operation and remains set
until canceled from the station.
Attendant console EL display messages typically indicate the name, address, and telephone number of the enduser company. This information customizes the attendant console for each customer site and serves as a
convenient reference for the attendant operator.

3-83

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
CANNED TEXT/ADVISORY MESSAGE CREATION (CMD 328)
PERCEPTION 4000

COMMANDS

The system message for data calls will be conveyed to a calling data party after connection to a data device. The
system message informs the calling party that he/she has reached the appropriate destination. For example,
when placing a data call to Toshiba, the message may state: "Welcome to Toshiba Data Services."
SYSTEM MESSAGES
The following error messages are unique to this command.
C32800
C32801

3-84

- Invalid message length
- Index is out of range

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
CLASS OF SERVICE ASSIGNMENT (CMD 334)
PERCEPTION 4000

COMMANDS

CLASS OF SERVICE ASSIGNMENT (CMD 334)
Up to 64 classes of service may be defined in the system. Each Class of Service (COS) defines a set of facility
and feature access capabilities. One of these classes is then assigned to each voice or data station, attendant
console, and trunk group designated with DISA or an incoming TIE trunk.
Most capabilities defined by COS are useful to all of the above device/facility types. However a few are unique,
such as the 'Do-not-Disturb Override' feature which may only be assigned to attendants. In these cases where the
capability may be assigned to a station or data device as well, the system understands the limitation and will not
allow the capability to be effected by a station user, even if it exists in its COS definition. This allows greater
flexibility in the configuration of definitions.
It is suggested that the administrator go over the organizational structure of the company and develop groups of
common users which logically fit together in terms of telephone needs and privilege levels. After these groups are
defined and needs/privileges known, a COS definition may be assigned to each group, then the definitions may
be applied to stations, consoles, etc.
Command Keyword:

CLASS_OF_SERVICE

Category Name:

System

PREREQUISITE COMMANDS
There are no prerequisites for this command.

OPERATIONS
Available operations:

ADD
DELETE
DISPLAY

The function and required data fields for each operation are described in this section.

ADD

COS

FNO

req

FNO

FNO

FNO

FNO

FNO

FNO

FNO

FNO

FNO

FNO

FNO

FNO

FNO

opt

This operation modifies the definition of one or more existing classes of service by adding new feature(s) to
it/them. Fields 1 and 2 are required fields. Scopes are allowed in Fields 2 through 14 to facilitate the addition of a
large number of features

3-85

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
CLASS OF SERVICE ASSIGNMENT (CMD 334)
PERCEPTION 4000

COMMANDS

DELETE

COS

FNO

FNO

FNO

FNO

FNO

FNO

FNO

req

FNO

FNO

FNO

FNO

FNO

FNO

FNO

opt

This operation modifies the definition of a COS by deleting feature(s) in the COS. Fields 1 and 2 are required
fields. Scopes are allowed in Fields 2 through 14 to facilitate the deletion of a large number of features.

DISPLAY

COS

FNO

FNO

FNO

FNO

FNO

FNO

FNO

FNO

FNO

FNO

FNO

FNO

FNO

FNO

opt

This operation displays part or all of the COS table, depending on input in the “FNO” fields. If no data is entered,
the system displays the complete COS table. Ranges are permitted in all of the fields.

PARAMETERS
Each field parameter is described in this section. Any variations for a particular operation are noted separately.
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:
RANGE:
LOOP:

COS (Class of Service)
Decimal
1 or 2 digits
1 to 64
Not allowed
Allowed
This field specifies the appropriate class of service that is to be displayed or modified.

FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:
RANGE:
SCOPE:

FNO (Feature Number)
Decimal
1 to 3 digits
1 to 334
Allowed in a DISPLAY operation
Allowed in ADD and DELETE operations
Feature numbers pertaining to COS are entered in this field. Values from 1 to 256 are actual
trunk group numbers, however, trunk groups 129 to 256 are reserved for systems configured
above the standard default of 128. Values from 257 to 334 represent features. Following is a list
of valid entries.

3-86

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
CLASS OF SERVICE ASSIGNMENT (CMD 334)
PERCEPTION 4000

COMMANDS
Feature

Decimal Value

Attendant Break-in
Attendant End-to End Signaling
Attendant Parked Page Retrieval
Call Forward - All Calls Key
Call Forward - Busy/No Answer Key
Call Forward - No Answer Key
Call Fwd - All Calls Register
Call Fwd - Busy/No Ans Register
Call Fwd - No Answer Register
Call Pickup - Directed
Code Calling Access
Code Calling Retrieval
Data Privacy
Dictation Machine Access - Direct
Dictation Machine Access - Group
* Direct Trunk Access - Trunk Group 1
* Direct Trunk Access - Trunk Group nnn
* Direct Trunk Access - Trunk Group 256
Do Not Disturb Key
Do Not Disturb Registration
Eight Party Conference Access
ISDN CPN Presentation Allowed
ISDN CPN Presentation Restricted
Night Answer Access
Trunk-to-Trunk Connection
Trunk Verification from Station
Voice Paging Access - Emergency
Voice Paging Access - System
Voice Paging Access - Zone
Voice Paging Retrieval - System
Voice Paging Retrieval - Zone

332
345
333
271
272
273
295
296
297
284
258
267
312
264
263
1
nnn (nnn is greater than 1 and less than 256)
256
270
288
313
342
343
269
257
334
261
260
259
266
265

* If the type of trunk group is defined as a private line, the corresponding feature number is not
under COS control.

SYSTEM ERROR MESSAGES
The following error messages are unique to this command.
C33400
C33401
C33402
C33403
C33404

-

Check for a valid feature number
Invalid tenant number
Invalid Class of Service number
Feature number is out of range
Missing data in scope type field in field N

3-87

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
CLASS OF SERVICE ASSIGNMENT (CMD 334)
PERCEPTION 4000
RELATED COMMANDS
Attendant Position Assignment (CMD 370)
Authorization Code Assignment (CMD 349)
Data Station Assignment (CMD 360)
Station Assignment (CMD 330)
Trunk Group Assignment (CMD 310)

3-88

COMMANDS

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
CLOCK PROVIDER ASSIGNMENT (CMD 417)
PERCEPTION 4000

COMMANDS

CLOCK PROVIDER ASSIGNMENT (CMD 417)
The Clock Provider Assignment command is used to assign a priority level to the clock contained on the T1/DS1
Digital Trunk Interface (TTRI) card or the ISDN Primary Rate Controller (IPRC) card. The assigned priority level
indicates whether the TTRI/IPRC card's clock is to always serve as the dominant clock in a networking
arrangement, or if another clock is to receive preference. Preference levels ranging from 1 (highest priority) to 60
(lowest priority) can be assigned to the TTRI/IPRC clock.
Command Keyword:

CLOCK_PROVIDER

Category Name:

System

PREREQUISITE COMMANDS
ISDN IPRC and IPRI Card Assignment (CMD 422)
Digital Carrier Channel Assignment (CMD 413)

OPERATIONS
Available operations:

MODIFY
DISPLAY

The function and required data fields for each operation are described as follows:

MODIFY

PRIORITY

CARD#

req

This operation is used to change the priority level of the clock provider on TTRI or IPRI circuit cards.

DISPLAY

PRIORITY

opt

CARD#

TYPE
output only

ThIs operation is used to display the priority levels of the clock provider on TTRI or IPRI circuit cards.

3-89

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
CLOCK PROVIDER ASSIGNMENT (CMD 417)
PERCEPTION 4000

COMMANDS

PARAMETERS
This section defines input permitted for each field. Any variations for a particular operation are noted separately.
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:
RANGE:
LOOP:

PRIORITY
Decimal/Keyword
1 to 2 digits
1 to 60/No
Not allowed
Allowed in DISPLAY operation only

The "PRIORITY" field indicates the priority level of the clock provider on the TTRI or IPRC circuit card. Lower
values indicate higher priority levels (1 is the highest priority; 60 is the lowest). An entry of NO indicates that no
priority is assigned.
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:
RANGE:
LOOP:

CARD #
Decimal
3 to 4 digits
102 to 1012
Allowed in DISPLAY operation only
Not allowed

This field indicates the equipment location of the TTRI or IPRC card. The first one or two digits represent the
number of the shelf containing the card (1~10), and the last two digits represent the card slot number (01~12).
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:

TYPE
Keyword
Preassigned ASCII characters
Keyword:

TTRI—T1/DS1 Digital Trunk Interface
IPRC—ISDN Primary Rate Controller

This field appears only in the DISPLAY operation. No input is required.

SYSTEM MESSAGES
The following error messages are unique to this command.
I41700
C41701
C41702
C41703
C41704
C41705
C41706

3-90

-

Warning: Please try later; database is reserved
This card is the clock provider
Check card number
Check priority level
TTRI/IPRC card is not installed
No ccd data (update ccd data by using CMD 422)
To search NOT PROVIDER card, enter 

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
CLOCK RESET (CMD 121)
PERCEPTION 4000

COMMANDS

CLOCK RESET (CMD 121)
The system's date and time may be reset or displayed with this command.
Command Keyword:

CLOCK_RESET

Category Name:

Maintenance

PREREQUISITE COMMANDS
There are no prerequisites for this command.

OPERATIONS
Available operations:

RESET
DISPLAY

The function and required data fields for each operation are described in this section.

RESET

MON

DAY

YEAR

HOUR

MIN

SEC

opt

This operation resets the system's date and time. All of the fields are optional. When an optional field is not
specified, and a  is entered in that field, the current data is treated as the default value.

DISPLAY

CLOCK

output only

To display the system's current date and time, press the  key and the  key. Output is presented
in the following format:
WWW MMM DD, YY hh:mm:ss
WWW = Three ASCII characters that identify the day of the week.
Note that the day of the week is calculated automatically by the system.

3-91

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
CLOCK RESET (CMD 121)
PERCEPTION 4000
Mon
Tue
Wed
Thu

COMMANDS
=
=
=
=

Monday
Tuesday
Wednesday
Thursday

Fri
= Friday
Sat = Saturday
Sun = Sunday

MMM = Three ASCII characters that identify the month of the year
Jan
Feb
Mar
Apr
May
Jun
DD
YY
hh
mm
ss

=
=
=
=
=

=
=
=
=
=
=

January
February
March
April
May
June

Jul
Aug
Sep
Oct
Nov
Dec

=
=
=
=
=
=

July
August
September
October
November
December

2 digits (01-31) day of the month
2 digits (00-99) last 2 digits of the current year
2 digits (00-23) military hour of the day
2 digits (00-59) minute of the hour
2 digits (00-59) second of the minute.

Example: Mon Apr 1, 91 10:30:25

PARAMETERS
Each field parameter is described in this section. Any variations for a particular operation are noted separately.
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:
RANGES:

MON (Month of the Year)
Keyword / Decimal
Predefined ASCII characters / 1 or 2 digits
1 to 12
Not allowed
Keywords
JAN
FEB
MAR
APR
MAY
JUN
JUL
AUG
SEP
OCT
NOV
DEC

Decimal Values
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12

Input in this field may be either a keyword or a decimal value. Entering a  causes the
current month to be treated as the default value.

3-92

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
CLOCK RESET (CMD 121)
PERCEPTION 4000
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:
RANGE:

COMMANDS

DAY (Day of the Month)
Decimal
1 or 2 digits
1 to 31
Not allowed
There is a maximum of 31 days per month. Entering a  in this field causes the current day
to be treated as the default value.

FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:
RANGE:

YEAR (Last Two Digits of the Year)
Decimal with fixed length
2 digits
00 to 99
Not allowed
This field requires a 2-digit value to indicate the last two digits of the year. Entering a  in
this field causes the current year to be treated as the default value.

FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:
RANGE:

HOUR (Hour of the Day)
Decimal
1 or 2 digits
0 to 23
Not allowed
The hour of the day is indicated in military time. For example, 1:00 PM is entered as 13, 2:00 PM
as 14, etc. Entering a  in this field causes the current hour to be treated as the default
value.

FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:
RANGE:

MIN (Minute of the Hour)
Decimal
1 or 2 digits
0 to 59
Not allowed
Minutes are entered in this field. Entering a  causes the current minute to be treated as
the default value.

FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:
RANGE:

SEC (Second of the Minute)
Decimal
1 or 2 digits
0 to 59
Not allowed
Seconds are entered in this field. Entering a  causes the current second to be used as the
default value.

3-93

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
CLOCK RESET (CMD 121)
PERCEPTION 4000
FIELD:
TYPE:

COMMANDS

CLOCK (The System's Date and Time)
Output only
Entering a  and a  in this field in a DISPLAY operation causes the system's current
date and time to display.

SYSTEM ERROR MESSAGES
The following error messages are unique to this command.
C12100 - Clock set error

COMMENTS
The Traffic Measurement process (CMD 901) may not be activated at the preselected activation time due to a
clock reset.
The SMDR record of current calls (CMD 409) may be generated with a conflicting call duration field due to a clock
reset.
The scheduled switch-over process (CMD 102) may not be activated if the clock is set to a date and time beyond
the predetermined switch-over date and time.
When a clock reset is performed, the system sends a transmission to the ACD/MIS application processor
resetting its clock also.

3-94

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
COMMON CARRIER ASSIGNMENT (CMD 344)
PERCEPTION 4000

COMMANDS

COMMON CARRIER ASSIGNMENT (CMD 344)
The common carrier definition table defines a '10XXX' (equal access) code for each common carrier in the
system, up to 10 carriers. These carriers are used by the Least Cost Routing program as required.
Command Keyword:

COMMON_CARRIERS

Category Name:

Trunk

PREREQUISITE COMMANDS
There are no prerequisites for this command.

OPERATIONS
Available operations:

MODIFY
DISPLAY

The function and required data fields for each operation are described in this section.

MODIFY

INDEX

10XXX CODE

req

This operation modifies the common carrier definition table. The "10XXX CODE" field is a delete field for this
operation. When modifying a carrier code, the new code must not already exist in the table.

DISPLAY

INDEX

10XXX CODE

opt

This operation displays all common carriers defined for the system. Ranges are permitted in the "INDEX" field
only.

3-95

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
COMMON CARRIER ASSIGNMENT (CMD 344)
PERCEPTION 4000

COMMANDS

PARAMETERS
Each field parameter is described in this section. Any variations for a particular operation are noted separately.
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:
LOOP:

INDEX (Index Number)
Decimal
1 or 2 digits
1 to 10
Allowed in a DISPLAY operation only
There are 10 index numbers, each of which may be assigned one equal access code.

FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:
RANGE:

10XXX CODE (Common Carrier Definition)
Decimal with fixed length
5 digits
10000 to 10999
Not allowed
The first two numbers entered in this field must be a 1 followed by a 0. This field is a delete field
in a MODIFY operation.

SYSTEM ERROR MESSAGE
The following error message is unique to this command.
C34400 - Carrier code input already exists in database

RELATED COMMAND
LCR Routing Table Assignment (CMD 383)

3-96

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
COORDINATED NUMBERING PLAN ASSIGNMENT (CMD 303)
PERCEPTION 4000

COMMANDS

COORDINATED NUMBERING PLAN ASSIGNMENT (CMD 303)
The Coordinated Numbering Plan (CNP) is one of two means provided to route calls in a private network
environment. This method automatically selects the proper trunk group based on steering digits dialed by the
user. To the user, the steering digits are seen as part of the total number such that they are unaware they are
selecting a TIE trunk group. This command defines each TIE trunk group the steering digits select when placing a
call.
Command Keyword:

CNP_ASSIGN

Category Name:

Dialing

PREREQUISITE COMMAND
Trunk Group Assignment (CMD 310)

OPERATIONS
Available operations:

ADD
DELETE
DISPLAY

The function and required data fields for each operation are described in this section.

ADD

TGN

STDGT

STDGT

STDGT

STDGT

STDGT

req

STDGT

STDGT

STDGT

STDGT

STDGT

opt

This operation adds steering digits to trunk groups. Those digits may not be shared among the trunk groups.

DELETE

TGN

STDGT

STDGT

STDGT

STDGT

STDGT

req

STDGT

STDGT

STDGT

STDGT

STDGT

opt

This operation deletes steering digits for a trunk group.

3-97

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
COORDINATED NUMBERING PLAN ASSIGNMENT (CMD 303)
PERCEPTION 4000

COMMANDS

DISPLAY

TGN

STDGT

STDGT

STDGT

STDGT

STDGT

STDGT

STDGT

STDGT

STDGT

STDGT

opt

This operation displays steering digits for trunk groups. If no data is entered in any of the fields, steering digits for
all of the trunk groups display.

PARAMETERS
Each field parameter is described in this section. Any variations for a particular operation are noted separately.
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:
LOOP:
RANGE:

TGN (Trunk Group Number)
Decimal
1 to 3 digits
1 to 256 (or to the maximum system configuration)
Allowed in a DISPLAY operation
Not allowed
This field selects the trunk group number to be assigned steering digits.

FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:
LOOP:
RANGE:

STDGT (Steering Digits)
DN Type
1 to 5 digits
0 to 99999
Not allowed
Allowed in a DISPLAY operation
There is no limit to the number of steering digits which may be assigned to a trunk group. A
steering digit may not be shared among trunk groups. Ambiguity may not exist among steering
digits or among other members of the system's numbering plan. For example, steering digits '72'
and '7230', or '678' and '6782', may not co-exist in the numbering plan.

SYSTEM ERROR MESSAGES
The following error messages are unique to this command.
C30300
C30301
C30302
C30303
C30304
C30305
C30306

-

STDGTs in fields N..N are already used
No space to add steering digits from field N
STDGTs in fields N..N are not found
Trunk group number is not a TIE type
Trunk group number is not defined
Trunk group number is defined as incoming (INC) type
Same STDGTs in fields N..N

NOTE: "N" is from 2 to 11

3-98

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
COUNTRY CODE ASSIGNMENT (CMD 335)
PERCEPTION 4000

COMMANDS

COUNTRY CODE ASSIGNMENT (CMD 335)
The Country Code Definition Table defines all of the country codes that are to be used by system users. The table
is initially blank and should be filled in with specific country codes. Information regarding country codes is typically
included in the white pages of a local telephone directory or can be obtained from local telephone companies or
long distance carriers. Once defined, the country code table should be reviewed periodically to ensure that it is
up-to-date with international dialing conventions.
This table is consulted when international calls are made via direct dialing for purposes of verifying the validity of
the number dialed, least cost routing, and restriction purposes.
Command Keyword:

CC_ASSIGN

Category Name:

Dialing

PREREQUISITE COMMANDS
There are no prerequisites for this command.

OPERATIONS
Available operations:

ADD
DELETE
DISPLAY

The function and required data fields for each operation are described in this section.

ADD

CC

CC

CC

CC

CC

CC

req

CC

CC

CC

CC

CC

CC

opt

This operation adds country codes to the Country Code Assignment Table. Scope entries are permitted in all of
the fields.

DELETE

CC

req

CC

CC

CC

CC

CC

CC

CC

CC

CC

CC

CC

opt

This operation deletes country codes from the Country Code Assignment Table. Scope entries are permitted in all
of the fields.

3-99

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
COUNTRY CODE ASSIGNMENT (CMD 335)
PERCEPTION 4000

COMMANDS

DISPLAY

CC

CC

CC

CC

CC

CC

CC

CC

CC

CC

CC

CC

opt

This operation displays all of the country codes in the Country Code Assignment Table that meet the conditions
established for each field. If no data is input in any of the fields, then all of the country codes display. To halt the
display, you may press , or press  () to abort the display. Ranges are permitted
in all fields.

PARAMETERS
Each field parameter is described in this section. Any variations for a particular operation are noted separately.
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:
RANGE:
SCOPE:

CC (Country Code)
Decimal
1 to 3 digits
1 to 999
Allowed in a DISPLAY operation
Allowed in ADD and DELETE operations
The Country Code parameter is used by the system in the call handling process. According to the
CCITT (International Telegraph and Telephone Consultative Committee), the first country code
digit cannot start with a zero.

SYSTEM ERROR MESSAGES
The following error messages are unique to this command.
C33500
C33501
C33502
C33503
C33504

-

Country code(s) already exist or are invalid
Table full; cannot add more country code(s) at NNN
Country code not found
Check field format
Country code conflicts with the table

RELATED COMMANDS
Country Code Restriction Tables (CMD 338)
LCR Country Code Routing Assignment (CMD 380)

3-100

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
COUNTRY CODE RESTRICTION TABLES (CMD 338)
PERCEPTION 4000

COMMANDS

COUNTRY CODE RESTRICTION TABLES (CMD 338)
The Country Code Restriction command contains a list of country codes which may be allowed or denied
depending on the specified "TYPE". This is the means by which international direct dialing can be controlled.
Country code tables are defined for each Trunk Restriction Group/Destination Restriction Level combination (but
not when either "TRGN" or "DRL" = 1). Trunk Restriction Groups and DRLs are assigned through the Trunk
Group Assignment command (CMD 310).
Each country code table may be specified as an ALW (allow) or DNY (deny) table. This way the fewest number of
codes can be entered and accomplish the same purpose. For example, if all country codes but two are to be
allowed, it is easier to build a deny table and enter only two codes versus building an allow table and entering all
but two codes.
Command Keyword:

CC_RESTRICT

Category Name:

Restrict

PREREQUISITE COMMANDS
Country Code Assignment (CMD 335)
Trunk Group Assignment (CMD 310)

OPERATIONS
Available operations:

ADD
DELETE
DISPLAY

The function and required data fields for each operation are described in this section.

ADD

TRGN

DRL

TYPE

req

CC

CC

CC

CC

CC

CC

CC

CC

CC

CC

opt

This operation adds country codes to the Country Code Restriction Table. Data is required in the “TRGN”, “DRL”,
and “TYPE” fields, along with the first "CC" field. The remaining “CC” fields are optional. Loops are permitted in
the “TRGN” and “DRL” fields when adding the same country code for several DRLs in a trunk restriction group, or
in the same DRL for several trunk restriction groups. Scopes are permitted in all of the “CC” fields.

3-101

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
COUNTRY CODE RESTRICTION TABLES (CMD 338)
PERCEPTION 4000

COMMANDS

DELETE

TRGN

DRL

req

TYPE

CC

opt

req

CC

CC

CC

CC

CC

CC

CC

CC

CC

opt

This operation deletes country codes from the Country Code Restriction Table. Loops and scopes are permitted
when deleting a number of the tables, or a number of country codes in a Country Code Restriction Table.

DISPLAY

TRGN

DRL

TYPE

CC

CC

CC

CC

CC

CC

CC

CC

CC

CC

opt

This operation displays the Country Code Restriction Table(s). All of the fields are optional. If no data is entered in
any of these fields, all of the Country Code Restriction Tables display. Ranges are permitted in all of the fields
except the “TYPE” field.

PARAMETERS
Each field parameter is described in this section. Any variations for a particular operation are noted separately.
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:
LOOP:

TRGN (Trunk Restriction Group Number)
Decimal
1 digit
2 to 8 (or to the maximum system configuration)
Primary loop field, allowed in ADD and DELETE operations
Trunk Restriction Group 1 is defined as “unrestricted” and is recommended for TIE trunk groups.
The definition of each restriction group number can be displayed by issuing a DRL_ASSIGN
command (CMD 337).

FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:
LOOP:

DRL (Destination Restriction Level)
Decimal
1 or 2 digits
2 to 16 (or to the maximum system configuration)
Secondary loop field, and allowed in ADD and DELETE operations
When "DRL" is 1, all calls are allowed regardless of what trunk restriction group number (TRGN)
is being used.

3-102

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
COUNTRY CODE RESTRICTION TABLES (CMD 338)
PERCEPTION 4000
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:

COMMANDS

TYPE (Table Type)
Keyword
Predefined ASCII characters
Keywords:

ALW - Allow access to listed country codes
DNY - Deny access to listed country codes

If the keyword, ALW (or DNY), is entered, calls to any country code in this Country Code
Restriction table are allowed (or denied).
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:
SCOPE:
RANGE:

CC (Country Code)
Decimal
1 to 3 digits
1 to 999
Allowed in ADD and DELETE operations
Allowed in a DISPLAY operation
Country codes entered in this field are either allowed or denied depending on the keyword
entered in the “TYPE” field of the specified TRGN and DRL.

SYSTEM ERROR MESSAGES
The following error messages are unique to this command.
C33800
C33801
C33802
C33803
C33804
C33805
C33806

-

Table type does not match the table type defined originally
Country code(s) already exist in restricted country code table
Table full; cannot add more country code(s) at NNN
Country code is not in system country code definition table
Invalid trunk restriction group number
Invalid destination restriction level
Invalid country code

RELATED COMMAND
Destination Restriction Level (DRL) Assignment (CMD 337)

3-103

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
CRASH DUMP DISPLAY (CMD 164)
PERCEPTION 4000

COMMANDS

CRASH DUMP DISPLAY (CMD 164)
The Crash Dump Display command displays historical system crash information, as well as virtual machine
information, as enabled through the System Software Virtual Machine History command (CMD 168). The
displayed information is helpful in system debugging.
Command Keyword:

CRASH_DUMP_DISP

Category Name:

Maintenance

OPERATIONS
Available operations:

DISPLAY

The function and required data fields for each operation are described as follows:
DISPLAY:

OBJECT

PARAMETER

req

BRIEF

opt

This operation displays historical information about system crashes or about the virtual machine specified in the
System Software Virtual Machine History command (CMD 168).

PARAMETERS
This section defines input permitted for each field. Any variations for a particular operation are noted separately.
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:

OBJECT
Keyword
Predefined ASCII characters
Keywords:

3-104

FPCRASH
OSCRASH
1CALL
VMHIST

-

Failure Processor Crash
Operating System Crash
One Call Initialization Crash
Virtual Machine History

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
CRASH DUMP DISPLAY (CMD 164)
PERCEPTION 4000
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:

COMMANDS

PARAMETER
Keyword
Predefined ASCII characters
Object:

FPCRASH
OSCRASH

Keywords: (S) MCPU
(S) LPU1
(S) LPU2
(S) LPU3
(S) MCOM

|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|

Object:

1CALL
VMHIST

Keywords:

(S) SSC
(S) KSU1
(S) ACD1
(S) SLU1
(S) HDT1
(S) DIU1
(S) TTC1
(S) AGC1
(S) ATC1
(S) ITTC1
(S) LCOM1

(S) TSC
(S) KSU2
(S) ACD2
(S) SLU2
(S) HDT2
(S) DIU2
(S) TTC2
(S) AGC2
(S) ATC2
(S) ITTC2
(S) LCOM2

(S) ASC
(S) KSU3
(S) ACD3
(S) SLU3
(S) HDT3
(S) DIU3
(S) TTC3
(S) AGC3
(S) ATC3
(S) ITTC3
(S) LCOM3

Keywords are dependent on the entry in the previous field (OBJECT). The numbers in the
keywords represent LCPU numbers, and the 'S' in front of the keywords designates a standby
side crash dump.
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:

BRIEF
Keyword
Predefined ASCII characters
Keywords:

YES
NO

- Only pertinent information is displayed
- All information is displayed

This field is optional. If no entry is made, the field defaults to YES and displays only pertinent
information. After printing out the displayed information, verify the time and date stamp. If it is
correct, then set this field as NO to display all information. Any questions or requests for
information regarding display/printout data should be addressed to Toshiba Technical Support by
calling (800) 777-4873.

SYSTEM MESSAGES
The following error messages are unique to this command.
C16400
C16401
C16402
C16403
C16404
C16405

-

Invalid parameter for object input
MCPU database read error
LCPU database read error
LCPU is out of service
Standby side is not installed
Standby side read failed

3-105

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
DATA HUNTING ASSIGNMENT (CMD 366)
PERCEPTION 4000

COMMANDS

DATA HUNTING ASSIGNMENT (CMD 366)
The PERCEPTION 4000 supports up to 32 data hunt groups, each of which may have up to 64 members. A data
device may belong to one data hunt group only, and a data hunt group may not be a member of another data hunt
group. Data hunt groups use the distributed hunting method. Only physical devices may be assigned as
members.
Command Keyword:

DATA_HUNTING

Category Name:

Data

PREREQUISITE COMMAND
Data Station Assignment (CMD 360)

OPERATIONS
Available operations:

ADD
DELETE
MODIFY
DISPLAY

The function and required data fields for each operation are described in this section.

ADD

GRP#

NAME

req

PILOT DN

opt

MEM #

MEM DN

req

This operation creates a new group or adds in a member directory number. Required fields include "GRP #",
"MEM #", and "MEM DN". When creating a new group, the "PILOT DN" must be input. The member directory
number is limited to being a member of only one data hunt group. Loops are allowed in the "GRP #" and the
"MEM #" fields. When a new member number is added, all of the following members move one step backward
accordingly.

DELETE

GRP#

req

MEM #

MEM DN

opt

This operation deletes a data hunt group or a member directory number. The "GRP #" field is required. To delete
a whole group, enter the keyword ALL in the "MEM #" field. Looping is allowed in the "MEM #" field.

3-106

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
DATA HUNTING ASSIGNMENT (CMD 366)
PERCEPTION 4000

COMMANDS

MODIFY

GRP#

NAME

req

PILOT DN

opt

MEM #

MEM DN

opt

opt

This operation changes the "NAME", "PILOT DN", or the "MEM DN" field. An entry in "GRP #" is required. If the
"MEM DN" field is being modified, the "MEM #" field must be entered.

DISPLAY

GRP#

NAME

PILOT DN

MEM #

MEM DN

opt

This operation displays all of the data hunt groups and their members that meet the conditions established in
each field. Loops are permitted in the "GRP #" and "MEM #" fields. Ranges are permitted in the "MEM DN" field.

PARAMETERS
Each field parameter is described in this section. Any variations for a particular operation are noted separately.
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:
LOOP:

GRP # (Group Number)
Decimal
1 or 2 digits
1 to 32
Allowed in DISPLAY and ADD operations only
This field assigns a number to the data hunt group, and is the primary field for data hunt group
assignment.

FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:

NAME (Group Name)
Text
0 to 9 ASCII characters
The "NAME" field is optional, and may contain a name corresponding to the data hunt group
number. This name displays to the calling party. Note that embedded spaces are allowed.

FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:

PILOT DN (Pilot Directory Number)
DN Type
1 to 5 digits
0 to 99999
This field marks an entry point into the data hunt group. Individual members may be directly
addressed, but, if their device is busy, the system does not perform a hunting procedure.
The pilot directory number must not conflict with any other directory number or access code in
the system, and is not related to any physical device.

3-107

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
DATA HUNTING ASSIGNMENT (CMD 366)
PERCEPTION 4000
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:
LOOPS:

COMMANDS

MEM # (Member Index Number)
Decimal / Keyword
1 or 2 digits / Predefined ASCII characters
1 to 64 / ALL
Allowed in DISPLAY, ADD, and DELETE operations
The index is a tool for adding a member to a specific place in the data hunt group table. Hunting
follows this ordering, from the lowest to the highest number (index number) and then wraps
around to the lowest number again. Distributed hunting rules apply for idle device selection. The
keyword ALL may be entered in a DELETE operation to remove all members in a specified
group.

FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:
RANGE:

MEM DN (Member Directory Number)
DN Type
1 to 5 digits
0 to 99999
Allowed in a DISPLAY operation only
The member directory number can be a member of only one data hunt group, and must be a
data station number.

SYSTEM ERROR MESSAGES
The following error messages are unique to this command.
C36600
C36601
C36602
C36603
C36604
C36605
C36606
C36607
C36608
C36609
C36610
C36611
C36612
C36613
C36614
C36615
C36616
C36617
C36618

-

Input member directory number
Group is already full
Member directory number is not defined in the system
Pilot directory number mismatch
Group name mismatch
Group is empty
Member number is not in group
Member directory number is not in group
Inconsistent member number/directory number pair
Pilot directory number is already in use
Member number is required
Member number is not continuous in group
Member directory number is already in another data hunt group
Cannot use this directory number
Input pilot directory number
Group name is too long
The data hunting member cannot be in permanent connection.
Failed to convert LDN to LTN.
Failed to send a transaction to LPU side.

RELATED COMMAND
Name Dialing Assignment (CMD 367)

3-108

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
DATA INTERFACE PARAMETER ASSIGNMENT (CMD 361)
PERCEPTION 4000

COMMANDS

DATA INTERFACE PARAMETER ASSIGNMENT (CMD 361)
Both integrated and Stand-alone Data Interface Units (DIUs) require a number of parameters be specified
concerning data transmission and signaling. The Data Interface Parameter Assignment command assigns a
number of these parameters.
Because these parameters apply not only to DIUs configured as Data Communications Equipment (DCE - those
which interface directly to a printer, host computer, data terminal, etc.), but also to Data Terminal Equipment (DTE
- Stand-alone DIUs used in modem pools), the primary key may be a modem pool number instead of an
equipment number. This insures that all DIUs in a modem pool receive like configuration to ensure compatibility.
Note that equipment numbers are still required for most DIUs acting as DCE-type equipment.
Additional parameters, mostly applicable to asynchronous mode, are defined through the Data Station Parameter
Assignment command (CMD 362).
Command Keyword:

DATA_INT_PARAMETERS

Category Name:

Data

PREREQUISITE COMMANDS
Data Station Assignment (CMD 360)
Modem Pool Assignment (CMD 347)

OPERATIONS
Available operations:

MODIFY
DISPLAY

The function and required data fields for each operation are described in this section.

MODIFY

EQ/MP #

SYN/ASY

DPLX

req

locked

opt

EMU

CLK

locked

SPEED

PRTY

DATA B

STOP

DTR

DSR

RTS

CTS

opt

This operation changes data interface parameter selection of one or more data stations. “EQ/MP #” is a required
field. “SYN/ASY”, "EMU", and “CLK” are locked fields, while the remaining fields are optional. Loops are permitted
in the “EQ/MP #” field when changing a number of data stations with the same parameter selections.

3-109

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
DATA INTERFACE PARAMETER ASSIGNMENT (CMD 361)
PERCEPTION 4000

COMMANDS

DISPLAY

EQ/MP #

SYN/ASY

opt

locked

DPLX

EMU

opt

CLK

SPEED

PRTY

locked

DATA B

STOP

DTR

DSR

RTS

CTS

opt

This operation displays data interface parameters of one or more data stations. “SYN/ASY” and “CLK” are locked
fields. Input in the remaining fields is optional. If no data is entered in any of these fields, the data interface
parameters of all configuration profiles in the system display. Loops are permitted in the “EQ/MP #” field.

PARAMETERS
Each field parameter is described in this section. Any variations for a particular operation are noted separately.
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:
LOOP:

EQ/MP # (Equipment/Modem Pool Number)
EQ Type / Decimal
5 or 6 digits / 1 or 2 digits
(0)10101 to 101316 (for EQ#) / 1 to 32 (for MP#)
Allowed in DISPLAY and MODIFY operations
The equipment and modem pool numbers are assigned with the Data Station Assignment (CMD
360) and Modem Pool Assignment (CMD 347) commands respectively. This field selects the
appropriate data device to be modified or displayed.

FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:

SYN/ASY (Synchronous/Asynchronous)
Keyword
Predefined ASCII characters
Keywords:

SYN - Synchronous
ASY - Asynchronous

This parameter defines the communication mode used to interface to the data device. Other
parameters, such as speed and duplex, are necessary to completely define the communication
interface of the DIU. ASY is the default value. This is a locked field.
NOTE: Only asynchronous mode (ASY) is supported at this time.
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:

DPLX (Full/Half Duplex)
Keyword
Predefined ASCII characters
Keywords:

HDX - Half Duplex
FDX - Full Duplex

In full duplex operation, two-way data traffic can be exchanged between the DIU and the data
device at the same time. In half duplex operation, only alternate data exchange is allowed. FDX
is the default value.

3-110

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
DATA INTERFACE PARAMETER ASSIGNMENT (CMD 361)
PERCEPTION 4000
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:

COMMANDS

EMU (DTE/DCE Emulation)
Keyword
Predefined ASCII characters
Keywords:

DCE - DIU functions as a DCE (Data Communications Equipment)
DTE - DIU functions as a DTE (Data Terminal Equipment)

When DCE is selected, the DIU functions as a DCE (null modem) to interface to a DTE device
such as a CRT. When DTE is selected, the DIU performs DTE logical functions over the DIU
female connector. DCE is the default value for DCE mode, and DTE is the default value for DTE
mode. This is a locked field in the MODIFY operation.
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:

CLK (Clock Selection)
Keyword
Predefined ASCII characters
Keywords:

ICLK - Internal Clock (System's Main Clock) (Reserved)
XCLK - External Clock (Reserved)
NON - No Clock

This parameter defines the source of the transmit clock used in synchronous mode only. When
ASY is entered in the “SYN/ASY” field, NON must be entered in this field. NON is the default
value. This is a locked field.
NOTE: Only asynchronous communications, "No Clock" is supported at this time.
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:

SPEED (Speed Selection in bits per second [bps])
Keyword
Predefined ASCII characters
Keywords:

AUTO
50
75
110
300
600
1200
2400
4800
9600
19200

-

Auto Detect
50 bps
75 bps
110 bps
300 bps
600 bps
1200 bps
2400 bps
4800 bps
9600 bps
19200 bps

(For asynchronous only)
(")
(")
(")
(")
(For asynchronous and synchronous)
(")
(")
(")
(")
(")

This parameter defines the data transfer speed across the communications interface. When
AUTO is selected, the DIU assumes 8 bits per character with NO parity, or 7 data bits plus
odd/even parity detection. AUTO is the default value for DCE mode. For DTE mode, only 300,
600, 1200, 2400, 4800, and 9600 are valid.1200 is the default for DTE mode.

3-111

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
DATA INTERFACE PARAMETER ASSIGNMENT (CMD 361)
PERCEPTION 4000
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:

COMMANDS

PRTY (Parity Selection)
Keyword
Predefined ASCII characters
Keywords:

EVEN ODD DET NO
-

Even parity
Odd parity
Detect parity (Detect and check either odd or even parity)
No parity (i.e., no parity check)

This parameter defines the parity used in the data character to be transmitted or received over
the communications interface. ODD, EVEN or DET can only be used when "DATA B" is set to 7
data bits. NO is the default value.
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:

DATA B (Data Bit Selection)
Keyword
Predefined ASCII characters
Keywords:

7BIT - 7 data bits
8BIT - 8 data bits

This parameter defines the number of data bits in a single character transmitted over the
communications interface. If 8BIT is selected, ODD, EVEN or DET cannot be specified in the
"PRTY" field. 8BIT is the default value.
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:

STOP (Stop Bit Selection)
Keyword
Predefined ASCII characters
Keywords:

1BIT - 1 stop bit
2BIT - 2 stop bits

This parameter defines the number of stop bit(s) in a single character transmitted over the
communications interface. 1BIT is the default value.
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:

DTR (Detect Terminal Ready Signal Treatment)
Keyword
Predefined ASCII characters
Keywords:

DET - Detect DTR
HI
- Consider DTR high at all times
NON - No DTR treatment

This parameter defines the treatment of the “Device Ready” condition normally provided by the
DTR interface lead. For a DIU functioning as a DTE, NON must be selected. For a DIU
functioning as a DCE, either DET or HI must be selected. DET is the default value for DCE mode,
and NON is the default for DTE mode.

3-112

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
DATA INTERFACE PARAMETER ASSIGNMENT (CMD 361)
PERCEPTION 4000
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:

COMMANDS

DSR (Data Set Ready Signal Treatment)
Keyword
Predefined ASCII characters
Keywords:

DET - Detect DSR
HI
- Consider DSR high at all times
NON - No DSR treatment

This parameter defines the treatment of the Data Set Ready (DSR) signal when the DIU
functions as a DTE. If the DIU is functioning as a DCE, NON must be selected. If the DIU is
functioning as a DTE, either DET or HI must be selected. DET is the default value for DTE mode,
and NON is the default for DCE mode.
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:

RTS (Request To Send Signal Treatment)
Keyword
Predefined ASCII characters
Keywords:

DET - Detect RTS
HI
- Consider RTS high at all times
NON - No RTS treatment

This parameter defines the treatment of the Request To Send (RTS) signal from the DTE. If the
DIU is functioning as a DTE, NON must be selected. If the DIU is functioning as a DCE, either
DET or HI must be selected. For full duplex operation, with the DIU functioning as a DCE, HI
must be selected. DET is the default value for DCE mode, and NON is the default for DTE mode.
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:

CTS (Clear To Send Signal Treatment)
Keyword
Predefined ASCII characters
Keywords:

DET - Detect CTS
HI
- Consider CTS high at all times
NON - No CTS treatment

This parameter defines the treatment of the Clear To Send (CTS) signal when the DIU functions
as a DTE. If the DIU is functioning as a DCE, NON must be selected. If the DIU is functioning as
a DTE, either DET or HI must be selected. DET is the default value for DTE mode, and NON is
the default for DCE mode.

SYSTEM ERROR MESSAGES
The following error messages are unique to this command.
C36100
C36101
C36102
C36103
C36104
C36105

-

Check equipment or modem pool number
Check parity bit
Empty modem pool
Check DTE/DCE mode in EMU field
Check input in SPEED field
Cannot modify; EMU is in DTE mode

3-113

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
DATA INTERFACE PARAMETER ASSIGNMENT (CMD 361)
PERCEPTION 4000
C36106
C36107
C36108
C36109

-

COMMANDS

Cannot modify; EMU is in DCE mode
Check DTR field\n"
DIU-DCE is in permanent connection; no modification is allowed
The equipment number is assigned for another device or is invalid

COMMENTS
When one or more parameters for a modem pool ID is modified, data communication characteristics for all of the
data terminals which are grouped in the same modem pool are changed.
Data parameters of a configuration profile are divided into two parts—data interface and data station parameters.
The data interface parameters are defined by this command, and the data station parameters are defined by the
Data Station Parameter Assignment command (CMD 362).

RELATED COMMAND
Data Station Parameter Assignment (CMD 362)

3-114

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
DATA STATION ASSIGNMENT (CMD 360)
PERCEPTION 4000

COMMANDS

DATA STATION ASSIGNMENT (CMD 360)
The Data Station Assignment command installs or removes one or more data stations from the PERCEPTION
4000 system. This command also modifies and displays the attributes of one or more data stations.
Command Keyword:

DATA_ASSIGN

Category Name:

Data

PREREQUISITE COMMANDS
Modem Pool Assignment (CMD 347)
Station Assignment (CMD 330)

(Command 330 is required if ITG or LGP is selected in
the "TYPE" field.)

OPERATIONS
Available operations:

ADD
DELETE
MODIFY
DISPLAY

The function and required data fields for each operation are described in this section.

ADD

EQUIP #

DIU DN

req

TYPE

AS DN
opt

DEF MDM

COS

DRL

req

FRLP

QPL

DRG

ANS

NAME

locked

req

opt

This operation adds one or more data stations to the system. Integrated DIUs use the same equipment number
as the supporting telephone, however Stand-alone DIUs must be assigned a unique equipment number.
The equipment number and DIU directory number must be unique. The DIU directory number must not conflict
with any other directory number or access code in the system.

DELETE

EQUIP #

DIU DN

req

opt

The DELETE operation removes one or more data stations from the system. Entering the equipment number is
sufficient. When removing a number of data stations, ranges are permitted, and a confirmation is required before
each data station is deleted. Removing a data station is not allowed if a data call is in progress on that station.

3-115

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
DATA STATION ASSIGNMENT (CMD 360)
PERCEPTION 4000

COMMANDS

Prior to the removal of a data station, the memberships or relationship of all logical groupings with the station
must be removed first. Note that the data hunting group order is altered upon removal of a data station.

MODIFY

EQUIP #

DIU DN

req

output
only

TYPE

AS DN

DEF MDM

COS

DRL

FRLP

QPL

opt

DRG

ANS

locked

NAME

opt

This operation modifies the attributes of one or more data stations. Ranges are permitted in the equipment
number field when modifying a number of data stations with the same attributes. “EQUIP #” is the only required
field for this operation. In a MODIFY operation, a  may be entered to delete the current value in
the "NAME" field.

DISPLAY

EQUIP #

DIU DN

TYPE

AS DN

DEF MDM

COS

DRL

FRLP

opt

QPL

DRG

locked

ANS

NAME

opt

This operation displays the attributes of one or more data stations. All of the fields are optional, with the exception
of the "DRG" field. If no data is entered in any of these fields, attributes of all data stations in the system display.
Ranges are permitted in any field that accepts numeric input, such as “DIU DN”, “AS DN”, etc.

PARAMETERS
Each field parameter is described in this section. Any variations for a particular operation are noted separately.
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:
LOOP:

EQUIP # (Equipment Number)
EQ Type
5 or 6 digits
(0)10101 to 101316 *
Allowed in all operations
* Use the following chart to determine valid ranges.
Digits

Range

Hardware

First digit(s)
Second two digits
Last two digits

(0)1~10
01~11, 13
01~16

Shelf no.
Card slot no.
Circuit no.

NOTE: Slot 13 is unavailable if the card is a 2B type.

3-116

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
DATA STATION ASSIGNMENT (CMD 360)
PERCEPTION 4000

COMMANDS

Each DIU is assigned to a circuit on a digital line card (DSTI). If this is an integrated DIU, it uses
the same equipment number as used by the supporting telephone, as assigned in the Station
Assignment Command (CMD 330). For Stand-alone DIUs, the equipment number is defined as
follows.
The first digit(s) represents the shelf number, the next two digits represent the card slot number,
and the last two digits represent the circuit number.
NOTES:
1. Stand-alone DIUs may be installed on DSTI cards configured for 1B or 2B operation. When
installed on a DSTI card configured for 2B operation, a '2B' device must already be assigned
to the card.
2. If installed on a DSTI card configured for 2B operation, the circuit's voice channel is ignored
by the system.
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:
RANGE:
LOOP:

DIU DN (DIU Directory Number)
DN Type
1 to 5 digits
0 to 99999
Allowed in a DISPLAY operation only
Not allowed
Each data station must be assigned a unique directory number which does not conflict with any
other directory number or access code in the system. The DIU directory number is addressable
only by other data stations in the system and incoming data trunk calls. This field is an output
only field in a MODIFY operation.

FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:

TYPE (DIU Type)
Keyword
Predefined ASCII characters
Keywords:

SAL - Stand-alone data station
ITG - Integrated data station
LGP - Logically Paired (Reserved for future use)

This field defines the DIU as a Stand-alone or integrated device.
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:
RANGE:

AS DN (Associate Directory Number)
DN Type
1 to 5 digits
0 to 99999
Allowed in a DISPLAY operation only
The associate directory number corresponds to the Prime Directory Number (PRM DN) entered
in the Station Assignment command (CMD 330). If the DIU is integrated, the prime directory
number of the digital telephone must be entered in this field.
During an ADD operation, the following relationship exists between the “TYPE” and “AS DN”
fields:

3-117

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
DATA STATION ASSIGNMENT (CMD 360)
PERCEPTION 4000

FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:
RANGE:

COMMANDS
"TYPE"
Field

"AS DN" Field

SAL
ITG

"AS DN" must not be entered.
"AS DN" is optional; if entered, must be ITG voice DN.

DEF MDM (Default Modem Pool)
Decimal
1 or 2 digits
1 to 32
Allowed in a DISPLAY operation only
The default modem pool defines what modem pool will automatically be selected for incoming
trunk calls, either directly routed by the inward routing tables or via transfer from an attendant.
This field also defines automatic modem pool selection for outgoing trunk calls unless overridden
manually or preprogrammed through other M&A commands, such as the High Usage Data
Destination Assignment command (CMD 368). The modem pool should be compatible with the
terminating data interface unit's configuration.

FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:
RANGE:

COS (Class of Service)
Decimal
1 or 2 digits
1 to 64
Allowed in a DISPLAY operation only
The Class of Service determines what features are available for a data station.

FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:
RANGE:

DRL (Destination Restriction Level)
Decimal
1 or 2 digits
1 to 16 (or to the maximum system configuration)
Allowed in a DISPLAY operation only
The Destination Restriction Level determines the restrictions on the outgoing calling pattern.

FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:
RANGE:

FRLP (Facility Restriction Level Profile)
Decimal
1 or 2 digits
1 to 32 (or to the maximum system configuration)
Allowed in a DISPLAY operation only
The Facility Restriction Level determines the facilities available to the caller.

FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:
RANGE:

QPL (Queue Priority Level)
Decimal
1 digit
1 to 8
Allowed in a DISPLAY operation only
The "QPL" field determines the queuing priority level for the DIU.

3-118

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
DATA STATION ASSIGNMENT (CMD 360)
PERCEPTION 4000
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:
RANGE:

COMMANDS

DRG (Data Restriction Group)
Decimal
1 or 2 digits
1 to 16
Not allowed
The Station-to-Station restriction levels do not affect any outgoing call restrictions or incoming
trunk call restrictions. (Currently this is a locked field.)

FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:

ANS (Answer Method)
Keyword
Predefined ASCII characters
Keywords:

AUTO - Auto-answer
DTE - DTE answer method
NON - Neither

This field determines what type of answering method the DIU will use–either AUTO (such as for
printers), DTE (for devices controlling the DTR signal), or NON (used for interactive operation).
When interfacing with a host computer port, either AUTO or DTE should be set, depending on
the application.
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:

NAME (Directory Name)
Text
0 to 9 ASCII characters
Each data station may optionally be assigned a unique name. During a DISPLAY operation, if
only the beginning part of the name is entered in this field, a list of directory names with the same
beginning characters displays. Embedded spaces are allowed. In a MODIFY operation, a
 may be entered to delete the current value.

SYSTEM ERROR MESSAGES
C36000
C36001
C36002
C36003
D36004
D36005
D36006
D36007
D36008
D36009
C36010
D36011
D36012
D36013
D36014
C36015

-

DIU directory number conflicts with existing number or access code
Specified equipment number is a group member
No LTN is available
No LDN is available
Add DN-LDN relation failed
Failed to remove this DN from DA tree
Add DN-LDN relation failed
Failed to remove DN-LDN Relationship
Failed to release the deletion LDN
Failed to release the deletion LTN
DIU directory number does not match
Failed to add KSU-LDN relationship
Failed to add KSU member
Failed to remove KSU Member
Failed to remove KSU-LDN relationship
Card type does not match

3-119

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
DATA STATION ASSIGNMENT (CMD 360)
PERCEPTION 4000
C36016
C36017
C36018
C36019
C36020
C36021
C36022
C36023
C36024
C36025
C36026
D36027
C36028
C36029
C36030
C36031
D36032
D36033
D36034
C36035
C36036
C36037
C36038
C36039
D36040
D36041
C36042
C36043
D36044
D36045
D36046
D36047
D36048
C36049
D36050
D36051
C36052
C36053
C36054
C36055
C36056

-

Cannot add card to this card slot
Number of DIUs is up to system maximum
Cannot install DSTI/BSTI/PBRC in slot 12 or 14
Cannot install DSTI-2B in an even card slot
Cannot install DSTI-2B in card slots 11 - 14
Cannot install T1 in an odd card slot
Cannot install T1 in card slot 14
Check associated directory number input
DIU directory number already exists
Check existence of modem pool identification
Missing operation specified
LDN-to-LTN conversion failed
Check specified DIU directory number
Check specified DIU type
Specified data station does not exist
Specified equipment number is already in use
DIU logic pairing failed
Addition of LDN to KSU failed
Removal of LDN from KSU failed
Must remove SDDN key
Substate is not valid
Specified DIU does not exist
Data directory number already exists
Must assign data directory number
Addition of data line failed
Read phone attributes failed
Logic pair already exists
DDN key does not exist
Removal of data line failed
Removal of logic pair failed
Addition of DIU attributes failed
Modification of DIU attributes failed
Addition of DIU failed
Check specified equipment number
Removal of DIU failed
Directory number registration failed
Database has recovered
Recovering database
Equipment number has been used or reserved
Permanent connection exists
Write authorization attributes failed

RELATED COMMANDS
Class of Service Assignment (CMD 334)
Data Hunt Assignment (CMD 366)
Data Interface Parameter Assignment (CMD 361)
Data Station Parameter Assignment (CMD 362)
Destination Restriction Level Assignment (CMD 337)

3-120

COMMANDS

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
DATA STATION ASSIGNMENT (CMD 360)
PERCEPTION 4000

COMMANDS

Facility Restriction Level Profile Assignment (CMD 387)
High Usage Data Destination Assignment (CMD 368)
Name Dialing Assignment (CMD 367)
Station Feature Key Assignment (CMD 331)

3-121

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
DATA STATION PARAMETER ASSIGNMENT (CMD 362)
PERCEPTION 4000

COMMANDS

DATA STATION PARAMETER ASSIGNMENT (CMD 362)
Both integrated and Stand-alone Data Interface Units (DIUs) require a number of parameters be specified
concerning communication protocol. The Data Station Parameter Assignment command assigns a number of
these parameters. All data station parameters are applicable to asynchronous data communication.
Because these parameters apply not only to DIUs configured as Data Communications Equipment (DCE - those
which interface directly to a printer, host computer, data terminal, etc.), but also to Data Terminal Equipment (DTE
- Stand-alone DIUs used in modem pools), the primary key may be a modem pool number instead of an
equipment number. This insures that all DIUs in a modem pool receive like configuration to ensure compatibility.
Note that equipment numbers are still required for most DIUs acting as DCE-type equipment.
Additional parameters, applicable to data transmission and signaling, are defined through the Data Interface
Parameter Assignment command (CMD 361).
Command Keyword:

DATA_STA_PARAMETERS

Category Name:

Data

PREREQUISITE COMMANDS
Data Station Assignment (CMD 360)
Modem Pool Assignment (CMD 347)

OPERATIONS
Available operations:

MODIFY
DISPLAY

The function and required data fields for each operation are described in this section.

MODIFY

EQ/MP #

req

ECHO

FLOW

BRK

AUTO DC

EDIT

B SP

CANCEL

DSPL

UCI

D UCI

opt

This operation changes data station parameter selections of one or more data stations. Loops are permitted in
the “EQ/MP #” field when changing a number of data stations with the same parameter selection.

3-122

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
DATA STATION PARAMETER ASSIGNMENT (CMD 362)
PERCEPTION 4000

COMMANDS

DISPLAY

EQ/MP #

ECHO

FLOW

BRK

AUTO DC

EDIT

B SP

CANCEL

DSPL

UCI

D UCI

opt

This operation displays data station parameters of one or more data stations. All of the fields are optional. If no
data is entered in any of these fields, attributes of all data stations in the system display. Loops are permitted in
the “EQ/MP #” field.

PARAMETERS
Each field parameter is described in this section. Any variations for a particular operation are noted separately.
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:
LOOP:

EQ/MP # (Equipment/Modem Pool Number)
EQ Type / Decimal
5 or 6 digits / 1 or 2 digits
(0)10101 to 101316 (for EQ#) / 1 to 32 (for MP#)
Allowed in DISPLAY and MODIFY operations
The equipment and modem pool numbers are assigned with the Data Station Assignment (CMD
360) and Modem Pool Assignment (CMD 347) commands respectively. This field selects the
appropriate data device to be modified or displayed.

FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:

ECHO (Local Echo Selection)
Keyword
Predefined ASCII characters
Keywords:

ECHO - DIU local echo
NON - No local echo

This parameter defines local echo capability. Local echo selection is applicable only if the "UCI"
field is ON. ECHO is the default value for DCE mode, and NON is the default for DTE mode and
cannot be changed.
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:

FLOW (Flow Control Selection)
Keyword
Predefined ASCII characters
Keywords:

CFC - Character flow control
NFC - No flow control
RCFC - RTS/CTS flow control

This parameter defines the control of data flow across the communication interface. When NFC is
selected, flow control between data devices is transparent to the DIU. When CFC (or RCFC) is
selected, the XON and XOFF character flow control (or RTS/CTS) is detected and honored by
the DIU. CFC is the default value.

3-123

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
DATA STATION PARAMETER ASSIGNMENT (CMD 362)
PERCEPTION 4000
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:

COMMANDS

BRK (Break Handling)
Keyword
Predefined ASCII characters
Keywords:

PT - Pass through
PTD - Pass through then disconnect

This parameter defines treatment upon detection of a “BREAK” condition. The DIU usually
detects the “breaking” (of the communications line) and relates it to the distant end. In addition,
when PTD is selected, the DIU initiates the data call clearing sequence. PT is the default value.
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:

AUTO DC (Automatic Disconnect)
Keyword
Predefined ASCII characters
Keywords:

ENB - Enable Auto Disconnect
DIS - Disable Auto Disconnect

This parameter defines the disconnection criteria of the communications link between the DIU
and the attached device. When ENB is selected, the DIU disconnects the link by turning off the
DTR/DSR signal as a result of data call clearing. Also, when the DIU detects dropping of the
DTR/DSR signal from the attached device, it initiates the data call clearing procedure. ENB is the
default value.
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:

EDIT (Local Editing Selection)
Keyword
Predefined ASCII characters
Keywords:

ENB - Enable Local Editing
DIS - Disable Local Editing

This parameter defines local editing capabilities. Local editing is applicable only when the UCI
field is set to ON. If ENB is entered in this field, data entered in the “B SP”, “CANCEL”, and
“DSPL” fields must be 001-127 (representing the associated ASCII character). ENB is the default
value for DCE mode, and DIS is the default for DTE mode and cannot be changed.
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:

B SP (Backspace Character)
Decimal
1 to 3 digits
0 to 127
Values:

0 - Disable function
1 to 127 - Character in decimal value

The Backspace function is available when local editing is enabled in the “EDIT” field. When the
Backspace character is enabled, you may correct a typing error by pressing the Backspace key
and then retyping the correct character. Note that a different value (except 0) must be entered in
each of the editing character fields (B SP, CANCEL, and DSPL) since more than one function
may not be assigned to a key. 0 is the default value for the DIU in a modem-DIU pair. 2
() is the default value for the others.

3-124

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
DATA STATION PARAMETER ASSIGNMENT (CMD 362)
PERCEPTION 4000
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:

COMMANDS

CANCEL (Cancel Character)
Decimal
1 to 3 digits
0 to 127
Values:

0 - Disable function
1 to 127 - Character in decimal value

The Cancel function is available when local editing is enabled in the “EDIT” field. When the
Cancel character is enabled, you may cancel or “empty” the contents of the DIU receive buffer so
that you can re-enter the input data. Note that a different value (except 0) must be entered in
each of the editing character fields (B SP, CANCEL, and DSPL) since more than one function
may not be assigned to a key. 0 is the default value for the DIU in a modem-DIU pair. 24
() is the default value for the others.
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:

DSPL (Display Character)
Decimal
1 to 3 digits
0 to 127
Values:

0 - Disable function
1 to 127 - Character in decimal value

The Display function is available when local editing is enabled in the “EDIT” field. When the
Display function is enabled, you may display the contents of the DIU receive buffer. Note that a
different value (except 0) must be entered in each of the editing character fields (B SP, CANCEL,
and DSPL) since more than one function may not be assigned to a key. 0 is the default value for
the DIU in a modem-DIU pair. 18 () is the default value for the others.
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:

UCI (User Command Interface)
Keyword
Predefined ASCII characters
Keywords:

ON - Enable UCI function
OFF - Disable UCI function

This field allows use of the local editing characters. When ON is entered in this field, Local Echo
Selection, Local Editing Selection, the Backspace Character, the Cancel Character, and the
Display Character are available. If this field is set to OFF, the previous parameters must be
disabled. OFF is the default value for the DIU in a modem-DIU pair. ON is the default value for
the others.
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:

D UCI (Dial Up User Command Interface)
Keyword
Predefined ASCII characters
Keywords:

ON - Enable Dial Up UCI function
OFF - Disable Dial Up UCI function

The Dial Up UCI flag applies only in DIU-DCE mode. When the flag is ON, the "UCI" flag must be
ON, DTR treatment must be HI, and "AUTO DC" must be ENB. In DTE mode, the value in this
field is OFF and not changeable. OFF is the default value for the DTE/DCE modes.

3-125

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
DATA STATION PARAMETER ASSIGNMENT (CMD 362)
PERCEPTION 4000
SYSTEM ERROR MESSAGES
The following error messages are unique to this command.
C36200
C36201
C36202
C36203
C36204
C36205
C36206
C36207
C36208
C36209
C36210
C36211
C36212
C36213
C36214
C36215
C36216
C36217
C36218
C36219

-

Check equipment or modem pool number
Value in Backspace, Cancel, Display Character fields cannot be 0
 or ^P (Control P) are reserved
Duplicated value in two or more fields
Value in local echo selection has to be NON
Value in local editing selection has to be DIS
Value in Backspace, Cancel, Display Character fields has to be 0
Value in Dial Up UCI field has to be OFF
Check local edit selection
Check local echo selection
Empty modem pool
Check input in Backspace Character field
Check input in Cancel Character field
Check input in Display Character field
Check input in UCI field
Check input in Dial Up UCI field
Check AUTO DC field
D UCI field conflicts with DTR setting in command 361
D UCI field conflicts with AUTO DC and/or UCI setting
DIU-DCE is in permanent connection; no modification is allowed

RELATED COMMAND
Data Interface Parameter Assignment (CMD 361)

3-126

COMMANDS

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
DATA STRUCTURE DISPLAY (CMD 167)
PERCEPTION 4000

COMMANDS

DATA STRUCTURE DISPLAY (CMD 167)
The Data Structure Display command allows an M&A user to display certain items in selected data structure
blocks used by system software. This command is used to assist in the software debugging process.
Command Keyword:

DATA_STRUCTURE_DISP

Category Name:

Utility

OPERATIONS
Available operations:

DISPLAY

The function and required data fields for each operation are described as follows:

DISPLAY

TYPE

PARA 1

req

PARA 2
opt

This operation displays specific data items in the system data structures as specified in the command fields.

PARAMETERS
This section defines input permitted for each field. Any variations for a particular operation are noted separately.
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:

TYPE (Type of data)
Keyword
Preassigned ASCII characters
Keywords:

STA
ACD
SYS

- Station Data
- Automatic Call Distribution Data
- System Information

The "TYPE" field specifies the type of data to display. This is a required field.
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE;
RANGE:

PARA 1 (Parameter 1)
Decimal or keyword
1 to 5 digits; preassigned ASCII characters
0 to 99999
Not allowed

3-127

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
DATA STRUCTURE DISPLAY (CMD 167)
PERCEPTION 4000
Keywords:

COMMANDS
MCPUCP
LCPUCP
GCB
LTN
LDN
LSB
CID

-

ACD call processing information on MCPU side
ACD call processing information on LCPU side
ACD group control block information
ACD logical terminal number information
ACD logical directory number information
LDN status block information
Call ID information

This field defines a specific area of information which is used in accessing the desired station or
ACD data. If STA is entered in the "TYPE" field, then a prime directory number should be entered
(the prime directory uniquely identifies each station and is assigned to a station with the Station
Assignment command [CMD 330]).
If ACD is selected in the "TYPE" field, then either an ACD agent ID or one of the the command's
keywords should be entered.
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
RANGE:

PARA 2 (Parameter 2)
Decimal or keyword
1 to system-configured maximum; preassigned ASCII characters
Not allowed
Keywords:

BRF
DTL

- Display a small amount of information about station type
- Display a more detailed amount of information about station
type, including a dump of related data structure areas
- Display information about all ACD groups
- Display ACD system-level information

ALL
SYS

The "PARA 2" field is an optional field that specifies the amount of information displayed about
the selected data type. If STA is entered in the "TYPE" field, then either BRF or DTL can be
entered in the "PARA 2" field. If not specified, the default is BRF. If ACD is selected in the
"TYPE" field,and MCPUCP is entered in the "PARA 1" field, then either SYS or a specific number
of ACD groups can be entered (1 to system-configured maximum); the default is SYS. If
LCPUCP is entered in the "PARA 1" field, then only the SYS keyword can be entered; the default
is SYS. If either GCB, LTN, or LDN is entered in the "PARA 1" field, then either ALL or a specific
number of ACD groups can be entered (1 to system-configured maximum). Entries of either LSB
or CID in the "PARA 1" field require no "PARA 2" field entry. All of these various entry options are
summarized below:

3-128

TYPE

PARA 1

PARA 2

STA
ACD
ACD
ACD
ACD
ACD
ACD
SYS
SYS

0 - 99999
MCPUCP
LCPUCP
GCB
LTN
LDN
000 - 999
LSB
CID

BRF, DTL
SYS, 1-max group
SYS
ALL, 1-max group
ALL, 1-max group
ALL, 1-max group
ALL, 1-max group

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
DATA STRUCTURE DISPLAY (CMD 167)
PERCEPTION 4000

COMMANDS

SYSTEM MESSAGES
The following error messages are unique to this command.
C16700
C16701
C16702
C16703
C16704
C16705
C16707
C16707
C16708
C16709
C16710
C16711
C16712

-

Prime directory number does not exist
MCPU database Read error (LDN attributes)
MCPU database Read error (LPU number)
MCPU database Read error (SSC state number)
MCPU database Read error (LDN record address)
MCPU database Read error (SLSB record address)
MCPU database Read error (OFHCAMP record address)
MCPU database Read error (ONHCAMP record address)
HDT data not available for pilot directory numbers
Data does not exist for virtual pilot directory numbers
Check input in PARA 1 field
Check input in PARA 2 field
ACD group is not defined

3-129

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
DATA STRUCTURE DISPLAY 2 (CMD 169)
PERCEPTION 4000

COMMANDS

DATA STRUCTURE DISPLAY 2 (CMD 169)
The Data Structure Display 2 command is an extension of the Data Structure Display command (CMD 167). The
Data Structure Display 2 command allows an M&A user to display certain items in selected data structure blocks
used by system software. This command is used to assist in the software debugging process.
Command Keyword:

DATA_STRUCTURE_DISP2

Category Name:

Utility

OPERATIONS
Available operations:

DISPLAY

The function and required data fields for each operation are described as follows:

DISPLAY

TYPE

PARA 1

PARA 2

req

This operation displays specific data items in the system data structures as specified in the command fields.

PARAMETERS
This section defines input permitted for each field. Any variations for a particular operation are noted separately.
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:

TYPE (Type of data)
Keyword
Preassigned ASCII characters
Keywords:

ATT

-

Attendant Data

The "TYPE" field specifies the type of data to display. This is a required field.
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE;
RANGE:

PARA 1 (Parameter 1)
Decimal or keyword
1 to 5 digits; preassigned ASCII characters
0 to 99999
Not allowed
Keywords:

3-130

IND
LDN
GRP

-

Individual attendant information in MCPU and LCPU
Attendant LDN information in MCPU and LCPU
Attendant group information in MCPU and LCPU

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
DATA STRUCTURE DISPLAY 2 (CMD 169)
PERCEPTION 4000

COMMANDS

This field defines a specific area of information which is used in accessing the desired attendant
console informaiton.
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
RANGE:

PARA 2 (Parameter 2)
Decimal
1 to 5 digits
Not allowed
The "PARA 2" field is used to enter an attendant or attendant group directory number. If IND is
entered in the "PARA 1" field, then an individual attendant directory number should be entered in
the "PARA 2" field. If either LDN or GRP is entered in the "PARA 1" field, then and attendant
group directory number should be entered in the "PARA 2" field.

SYSTEM MESSAGES
The following error messages are unique to this command.
C16900
C16901
C16902
C16903
D16904
C16905
D16906
D16907

-

Attendant directory number has not been defined
Attendant group directory number has not been defined
Convert equipment error
Read LCPU data timeout
LCPU number does not match with the one in transaction
Address error (address 0xNNNNNNNNN)
Read MCPU error
Invalid LDN

3-131

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
DESTINATION RESTRICTION LEVEL ASSIGNMENT (CMD 337)
PERCEPTION 4000

COMMANDS

DESTINATION RESTRICTION LEVEL ASSIGNMENT (CMD 337)
Destination Restriction Levels (DRLs) control outgoing calls made via direct trunk group access. This type of
dialing restriction may also be used by Least Cost Routing if set in the system options (System Option Flags
command, CMD 408). The Destination Restriction Level Assignment command displays or modifies the non-tollfree call allowance or denial of DRLs in a trunk restriction group (TRGN). This command also provides
information on whether or not the exceptional allow/deny, country code, area code, and area/office code tables
are available for the given DRL and TRGN.
Command Keyword:

DRL_ASSIGN

Category Name:

Restrict

PREREQUISITE COMMANDS
There are no prerequisites for this command.

OPERATIONS
Available operations:

MODIFY
DISPLAY

The function and required data fields for each operation are described in this section.

MODIFY

TRGN

DRL

req

NON TF

opt

This operation changes the non-toll-free call allowance/denial of one or more trunk restriction groups. Loops are
permitted in the “TRGN” and “DRL” fields.

DISPLAY

TRGN

DRL

opt

NON TF

EXCEPT DNY

EXCEPT ALW

CC TBL

AC/OC TBL

AC TBL

output only

This operation displays the non-toll-free call allowance/denial of one or more trunk restriction groups, and shows
whether or not the except allowance/denial, country code, area code, and area/office code tables are available for
the given "DRL" and "TRGN". No input data field is required. If no data is entered in any of the fields, all DRLs of
every trunk restriction group in the system display. Ranges are permitted in the “TRGN” and “DRL” fields.

3-132

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
DESTINATION RESTRICTION LEVEL ASSIGNMENT (CMD 337)
PERCEPTION 4000

COMMANDS

PARAMETERS
Each field parameter is described in this section. Any variations for a particular operation are noted separately.
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:
LOOP:
RANGE:

TRGN (Trunk Restriction Group Number)
Decimal
1 digit
2 to 8 (or to the maximum system configuration)
Allowed in DISPLAY and MODIFY operations
Allowed in a DISPLAY operation only
Up to seven trunk restriction groups can be defined in the system.

FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:
LOOP:

DRL (Destination Restriction Level)
Decimal
1 or 2 digits
2 to 16 (or to the maximum system configuration)
Allowed in DISPLAY and MODIFY operations.
Values for "DRL" are from 2 to 16.

FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:

NON TF (Non “Toll free” Calling Zone Allowance/Denial)
Keyword
Predefined ASCII characters
Keywords:

ALW - Allow non-toll-free calls
DNY - Deny non-toll-free calls

If ALW is entered, restrictions on these calls are controlled by other restriction tables. When DNY
is entered, calls to destinations outside of the toll-free calling zone are denied.
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:

EXCEPT DNY (Exceptional Destination Restriction Denial Table)
Keyword
Predefined ASCII characters
Keywords:

YES - Table exists
NO - Table does not exist

This field is for output only in a DISPLAY operation. Refer to the Exceptional Restriction Tables
command (CMD 340).
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:

EXCEPT ALW (Exceptional Destination Restriction Allowance Table)
Keyword
Predefined ASCII characters
Keywords:

YES - Table exists
NO - Table does not exist

This field is for output only in a DISPLAY operation. Refer to the Exceptional Restriction Tables
command (CMD 340).

3-133

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
DESTINATION RESTRICTION LEVEL ASSIGNMENT (CMD 337)
PERCEPTION 4000
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:

COMMANDS

CC TBL (Country Code Restriction Table)
Keyword
Predefined ASCII characters
Keywords:

YES - Table exists
NO - Table does not exist

This field is for output only in a DISPLAY operation. Refer to the Country Code Restriction Tables
command (CMD 338).
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:

AC/OC TBL (Area Code/Office Code Restriction Table)
Keyword
Predefined ASCII characters
Keywords:

YES - Table exists
NO - Table does not exist

This field is for output only in a DISPLAY operation. Refer to the Area/Office Code Restriction
Tables command (CMD 339)
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:

AC TBL (Area Code Restriction Table)
Keyword
Predefined ASCII characters
Keywords:

YES - Table exists
NO - Table does not exist

This field is for output only in a DISPLAY operation. Refer to the Area Code Restriction Tables
command (CMD 341).

SYSTEM ERROR MESSAGES
The following error message is unique to this command.
C33700 - Check trunk restriction group number range

RELATED COMMANDS
Area Code Restriction Tables (CMD 341)
Area/Office Code Restriction Tables (CMD 339)
Country Code Restriction Tables (CMD 338)
Exceptional Restriction Tables (CMD 340)
System Option Flag Assignment (CMD 408)
Trunk Group Assignment (CMD 310)
Trunk Group Toll-free Tables (CMD 311)

3-134

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
DEVICE SERVICE STATUS (CMD 208)
PERCEPTION 4000

COMMANDS

DEVICE SERVICE STATUS (CMD 208)
The Device Service Status command places the Stand-by side, or a device on the Active or Stand-by side, in/out
of service. This command also installs/removes device(s) from the system either on the Active or the Stand-by
side.
Command Keyword:

DEVICE_STATUS

Category Name:

Maintenance

PREREQUISITE COMMANDS
There are no prerequisites for this command.

OPERATIONS
Available operations:

INSTALL
REMOVE
INS
OOS
DISPLAY

The function and required data fields for each operation are described in this section.

INSTALL

SIDE

DEV

DEV

DEV

DEV

DEV

req

DEV

DEV

DEV

DEV

DEV

opt

This operation installs device(s) on the system either on the Active or the Stand-by side. At least one device must
be entered in a “DEV” field. When a device is installed, it must then be placed into service with an INS operation.
For the Active side of the system, LPU2, LPU3, and ETSW should be assigned, if used. If a redundant system
side is being used, HDD, FDD, DDCC, MCPU, LPU1, and BTSW should be assigned. Also, if used on the
redundant side, LPU2, LPU3, and ETSW should be assigned.

REMOVE

SIDE

DEV

req

DEV

DEV

DEV

DEV

DEV

DEV

DEV

DEV

DEV

opt

3-135

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
DEVICE SERVICE STATUS (CMD 208)
PERCEPTION 4000

COMMANDS

This operation removes device(s) from the system either on the Active or the Stand-by side. At least one device
must be entered in a “DEV” field. A device must be placed out of service with an OOS operation before it can be
removed from the system.

INS

SIDE

DEV

req

opt

This operation puts the whole Stand-by side or a device on the Active or Stand-by side in service. To put the
Stand-by side in service, enter SBY in the “SIDE” field and no data in the “DEV” field.

OOS

SIDE

DEV

req

opt

This operation puts the Stand-by side or a device on the system out of service. To put the Stand-by side out of
service, enter SBY in the “SIDE” field and no data in the “DEV” field.

DISPLAY

SIDE

MCPU

LPU1

LPU2

LPU3

BTSW

ETSW

DDCC

HDD

FDD

MCLK

MISC

output only

req

This operation displays the status of one or all of the devices on the Active, Stand-by, or both sides. The "SIDE"
field is required, while the remaining fields are output fields only. The status displays as either 'INS' if the card is
installed, 'OOS' if the card is installed and configured but not synchronized, or '---' if the card is not installed and
not configured.

PARAMETERS
Each field parameter is described in this section. Any variations for a particular operation are noted separately.
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:

3-136

SIDE (Active/Stand-by Side)
Keyword
Predefined ASCII characters

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
DEVICE SERVICE STATUS (CMD 208)
PERCEPTION 4000

COMMANDS

Keywords:

ACT
SBY
BOTH
SIDEA
SIDEB

-

Active Side
Stand-by Side
Both Sides
Side A
Side B

This field is required for all operations. Sides A and B are the physical locations of the processing
equipment. Note that either side (A or B) may be the Active or Stand-by side.
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:

DEV (Name of a Device)
Keyword
Predefined ASCII characters
Keywords:

MCPU
LPU1
LPU2
LPU3
BTSW
ETSW
DDCC
HDD
FDD
MCLK
MISC

-

Main CPU & Memory
Local CPU & Memory #1
Local CPU & Memory #2
Local CPU & Memory #3
Basic Time Division Switching
Extended Time Division Switching
Disk Drive Common Controller
Hard Disk Drive
Floppy Disk Drive
Main Clock
Miscellaneous Card Type

For INSTALL/REMOVE Operations:
If ACT is entered in the “SIDE” field, only LPU1, LPU2 and/or ETSW can be entered. If
SBY is entered in the “SIDE” field, all of the listed keywords except MCLK and MISC can be
entered.
For INS/OOS Operations:
MCPU can be entered only when "SIDE" is set to SBY. HDD and FDD can be entered
regardless of which side it is. None of the remaining keywords are allowed.
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:

MCPU (Main CPU)
Keyword (Output only)
Predefined ASCII characters
Keywords:

INS - The card is in-service
OOS - The card is out of service
--- The card is not installed and not configured

This field, appearing in a DISPLAY operation, indicates the status of the MCPU card.
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:

LPU1,2,3 (Local CPU #1,2,3)
Keyword (Output only)
Predefined ASCII characters

3-137

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
DEVICE SERVICE STATUS (CMD 208)
PERCEPTION 4000
Keywords:

COMMANDS
INS - In-service
OOS - Out of service
--- The card is not installed and not configured

These fields, appearing in a DISPLAY operation, indicate the status of the local CPU cards.
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:

BTSW (Basic Time Division Switching)
Keyword (Output only)
Predefined ASCII characters
Keywords:

INS - In-service
OOS - Out of service
--- The card is not installed and not configured

This field, appearing in a DISPLAY operation, indicates the status of the BTSW card.
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:

ETSW (Extended Time Division Switching)
Keyword (Output only)
Predefined ASCII characters
Keywords:

INS - In-service
OOS - Out of service
--- The card is not installed and not configured

This field, appearing in a DISPLAY operation, indicates the status of the ETSW card.
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:

DDCC (Disk Drive Controller)
Keyword (Output only)
Predefined ASCII characters
Keywords:

INS - In-service
OOS - Out of service
--- The card is not installed and not configured

This field, appearing in a DISPLAY operation, indicates the status of the DDCC card.
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:

HDD (Hard Disk Drive)
Keyword (Output only)
Predefined ASCII characters
Keywords:

INS - In-service
OOS - Out of service
--- The card is not installed and not configured

This field, appearing in a DISPLAY operation, indicates the status of the HDD card.
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:

3-138

FDD (Floppy Disk Drive)
Keyword (Output only)
Predefined ASCII characters

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
DEVICE SERVICE STATUS (CMD 208)
PERCEPTION 4000
Keywords:

COMMANDS
INS - In-service
OOS - Out of service
--- The card is not installed and not configured

This field, appearing in a DISPLAY operation, indicates the status of the FDD card.
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:

MCLK (Main Clock)
Keyword (Output only)
Predefined ASCII characters
Keywords:

INS - In-service
OOS - Out of service
--- The card is not installed and not configured

This field, appearing in a DISPLAY operation, indicates the status of the MCLK card.
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:

MISC (Miscellaneous Card)
Keyword (Output only)
Predefined ASCII characters
Keywords:

INS - In-service
OOS - Out of service
--- The card is not installed and not configured

This field, appearing in a DISPLAY operation, indicates the status of the MISC card. "MISC" is
the only card in a single/redundant system.

SYSTEM ERROR MESSAGES
The following error messages are unique to this command.
C20800
C20801
C20802
C20803
C20804
C20805
C20806
C20807
C20808
C20809
C20810
C20811
C20812
C20813
C20814
C20815

-

Device has already been installed
Device has already been removed
Device is already in service
Device is already out of service
Cannot register device
Does not match system configuration
Program/data transfer
No response
Failed to send message to SYC
Failed to set timer
Stand-by side no response
Regulated by SYM
Failed to receive message from SYC
BOTH is not an allowed keyword in this operation
Stand-by side setup timeout
Stand-by side is out of service

3-139

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
DIALING DEFINITION (CMD 317)
PERCEPTION 4000

COMMANDS

DIALING DEFINITION (CMD 317)
This command defines dialing groups used in the Trunk Group Assignment command (CMD 310) and the Least
Cost Routing Special Routing Assignment command (CMD 384). Dialing Group 1 is used for TIE lines and
interfaces to peripheral equipment where standard dialing does not exist. Private networks many times use
unconventional dialing which would require the use of Dialing Group 1.
Special dialing definition groups include the operator and long distance operator prefix, international operator
prefix, IDDD access code, toll prefix, local directory assistance, telephone repair number, emergency access
code, and interchangeable office code recognition.
Command Keyword:

DIALING_DEFINITION

Category Name:

Dialing

PREREQUISITE COMMANDS
There are no prerequisites for this command.

OPERATIONS
Available operations:

MODIFY
DISPLAY

The function and required data fields for each operation are described in this section.

MODIFY

GRP# OPP LOP IOP IAC TP LDA REPR BUS EMR AUX1 AUX2 AUX3 IOC

req

opt

This operation modifies the special dialing codes of one or more dialing definition groups. The Dialing Group
Number (GRP#) is required. Ranges are permitted in the “GRP#” field.

DISPLAY

GRP# OPP LOP IOP IAC TP LDA REPR BUS EMR AUX1 AUX2 AUX3 IOC

output only

This operation displays the special dialing codes of all three dialing definition groups. No input data is required,
and all the fields are output only fields.

3-140

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
DIALING DEFINITION (CMD 317)
PERCEPTION 4000

COMMANDS

PARAMETERS
Each field parameter is described in this section. Any variations for a particular operation are noted separately.
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:
RANGE:

GRP# (Dialing Group Number)
Decimal
1 digit
2 to 4
Allowed in a MODIFY operation
The system supports three dialing groups. Dialing group 1 allows undefined dialing.

FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:
RANGE:

OPP (Operator Prefix)
Dialing Digits (i.e., 001 is not the same as 01 or 1)
1 to 3 dialed digits
0 to 999
Not allowed
The default value of the operator prefix is 0.

FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:
RANGE:

LOP (Long Distance Operator Prefix)
Dialing Digits (i.e., 001 is not the same as 01 or 1)
1 to 3 dialed digits
0 to 999
Not allowed
The default value of the long distance operator prefix is 00.

FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:
RANGE:

IOP (International Operator Prefix)
Dialing Digits (i.e., 001 is not the same as 01 or 1)
1 to 3 dialed digits
0 to 999
Not allowed
The default value of the international operator prefix is 01.

FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:
RANGE:

IAC (International Direct Dialing [IDDD] Access Code)
Dialing Digits (i.e., 001 is not the same as 01 or 1)
1 to 3 dialed digits
0 to 999
Not allowed
The default value of the IDDD access code is 011.

FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:
RANGE:

TP (Toll Prefix)
Dialing Digits (i.e., 001 is not the same as 01 or 1)
1 to 3 dialed digits
0 to 999
Not allowed
The default value of the toll prefix is 1.

3-141

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
DIALING DEFINITION (CMD 317)
PERCEPTION 4000
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:
RANGE:

COMMANDS

LDA (Local Directory Assistance)
Dialing Digits (i.e., 001 is not the same as 01 or 1)
1 to 3 dialed digits
0 to 999
Not allowed
The default value of local directory assistance is 411.

FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:
RANGE:

REPR (Telephone Repair)
Dialing Digits (i.e., 001 is not the same as 01 or 1)
1 to 3 dialed digits
0 to 999
Not allowed
The default value of the telephone repair number is 611.

FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:
RANGE:

BUS (Telephone Business Office)
Dialing Digits (i.e., 001 is not the same as 01 or 1)
1 to 3 digits
0 to 999
Not allowed
The default value of the telephone business office is 811.

FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:
RANGE:

EMR (Emergency Access)
Dialing Digits (i.e., 001 is not the same as 01 or 1)
1 to 3 dialed digits
0 to 999
Not allowed
The default value of the emergency number is 911.

FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:
RANGE:

AUX1, 2, 3 (Auxiliary Definition 1, 2, and 3) (Reserved for future use)
Dialing Digits (i.e., 001 is not the same as 01 or 1)
1 to 3 dialed digits
0 to 999
Not allowed
These fields are for future use.

FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:

IOC (Interchangeable Office Code Recognition)
Keyword
Predefined ASCII characters
Keywords:

ITP - Identifiable by toll prefix before area code
ITO - Identifiable by timeout
NON - No interchangeable office codes

This field defines whether interchangeable office codes exist for the trunk groups using this
dialing group, and if so, how they are identified - by toll prefix usage before the area code (ITP) or

3-142

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
DIALING DEFINITION (CMD 317)
PERCEPTION 4000

COMMANDS

by timeout after 10 or 11 digits are dialed (ITO). Interchangeable office codes are defined as
office codes which have a '0' or '1' as a middle digit, making them appear as area codes (NYX where N is a digit 2-9, Y is the digit 1 or 0, and X is a digit 0-9). Interchangeable office codes are
defined in the Interchangeable Office Code Table command (CMD 318).

SYSTEM ERROR MESSAGES
The following error messages are unique to this command.
C31700 - Check dialing group number range
C31701 - Same value exists in two or more fields

RELATED COMMANDS
Interchangeable Office Code Table (CMD 318)
LCR Special Routing Assignment (CMD 384)
Trunk Group Assignment (CMD 310)

3-143

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
DICTATION GROUP/MACHINE ASSIGNMENT (CMD 401)
PERCEPTION 4000

COMMANDS

DICTATION GROUP/MACHINE ASSIGNMENT (CMD 401)
The Dictation Machine Assignment command configures dictation machine groups as well as installs dictation
machines on standard trunk circuits. The PERCEPTION 4000 supports up to 16 dictation machine groups; each
group may be configured with a maximum of eight dictation machines.
Command Keyword:

DICTATION_ASSIGN

Category Name:

System

PREREQUISITE COMMAND
Trunk Group Assignment (CMD 310)

OPERATIONS
Available operations:

ADD
DELETE
DISPLAY

The function and required data fields for each operation are described in this section.

ADD

GRP#

DEV

EQUIP #

req

NAME

opt

This operation adds a dictation machine and its device identifier to a dictation machine group. Loops are allowed
in the “GRP#” and “DEV” fields.

DELETE

GRP#

DEV

req

EQUIP #

opt

This operation deletes a dictation machine from a dictation machine group. Loops are allowed in the “GRP#” and
“DEV” fields.

3-144

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
DICTATION GROUP/MACHINE ASSIGNMENT (CMD 401)
PERCEPTION 4000

COMMANDS

DISPLAY

GRP#

DEV

EQUIP #

NAME

opt

This operation displays the dictation machine group and its associated dictation machines. Loops are allowed in
the “GRP#” and “DEV” fields. If no data is entered in any of the fields, all of the dictation groups display.

PARAMETERS
Each field parameter is described in this section. Any variations for a particular operation are noted separately.
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:
LOOPS:

GRP# (Dictation Machine Group Number)
Decimal
1 or 2 digits
1 to 16
Allowed in ADD/DELETE/DISPLAY operations
This field identifies the group to be assigned. Dictation machine groups are defined in the Trunk
Group Assignment command (CMD 310).

FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:
RANGES:

DEV (Device Identifier)
Decimal
1 digit
1 to 8
Allowed in ADD/DELETE/DISPLAY operations
This field is an index numbering of the machines in the group. Note that the dictation machine
groups hunt from the lowest index number to the highest, therefore if ordering is important, this
sequence should be observed.

FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:
RANGE:

EQUIP # (Equipment Number)
EQ Type
5 or 6 digits
(0)10101-101408 *
Allowed in a DISPLAY operation
* Use the following chart to determine valid ranges for dictation machines.
For BSTI equipment cards, the following ranges apply:
Digits

Range

Hardware

First digit(s)
Second two digits
Last two digits

(0)1~10
01~11, 13
01~16

Shelf no.
Card slot no.
Circuit no.

3-145

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
DICTATION GROUP/MACHINE ASSIGNMENT (CMD 401)
PERCEPTION 4000

COMMANDS

For XSTI equipment cards, the following ranges apply:
Digits

Range

Hardware

First digit(s)
Second two digits
Last two digits

(0)1~10
01~14
01~08

Shelf no.
Card slot no.
Circuit no.

This field assigns each dictation machine in the group to a standard analog line circuit (BSTI or
XSTI) card. A trunk group supporting dictation machine group usage must also be defined, even
if an analog line circuit is used (refer to the Trunk Group Assignment command, CMD 310).
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:

NAME (Dictation Machine's Device Name)
Text
0 to 9 ASCII characters
This field defines the dictation machine's device name, up to a maximum of 9 ASCII
characters/numbers including punctuation and spaces.

SYSTEM ERROR MESSAGES
The following error messages are unique to this command.
C40100
C40101
C40102
C40103
C40104
C40105
C40106
C40107
C40108

-

Check dictation machine group number range
Check device number range
Device has already been installed
Device not found
Dictation machine group is not defined
Card or equipment number is assigned to another device
Equipment number is not a dictation machine card type
Dictation machine's device name exceeds 14 characters
Remove hunting sequence before deleting dictation machine

RELATED COMMAND
Trunk Hunting Assignment (CMD 309)

3-146

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
DID/CCSA/DNIS ACD PARAMETER ASSIGNMENT (CMD 359)
PERCEPTION 4000

COMMANDS

DID/CCSA/DNIS ACD PARAMETER ASSIGNMENT (CMD 359)
The DID/CCSA/DNISACD Parameter Assignment command is used to define listed directory numbers (LDNs)
and their associated routing destinations. Routing choices are DID, CCSA, DNIS with a non-ISDN trunk group,
and DNIS/DDI with an ISDN trunk group.
Command Keyword:

DID/CCSA/DNIS_ACD

Category Name:

Trunk

PREREQUISITE COMMANDS
Trunk Group Assignment (CMD 310)
Trunk Group Parameter Assignment (CMD 420)
DID/CCSA/DNIS Trunk Group Assignment (CMD 314)
DID/CCSA/DNIS LDN Assignment (CMD 316)

OPERATIONS
Available operations:
DISPLAY
MODIFY
The function and required data fields for each operation are described as follows:
DISPLAY

TGN

LDN

IQP1

IQP TMR

IQP2

OVF TMR

LDN NAME

opt

This operation is used to display the parameters of one or more existing LDNs. The DISPLAY operation requires
no data input. If a  is entered in the "TGN" field, information regarding all LDNs for all trunk groups in the
PERCEPTION 4000 system will be displayed.

MODIFY:

TGN

LDN

req

IQP1

IQP TMR

IQP2

OVF TMR

LDN NAME

opt

ThIs operation is used to modify the attributes of an existing LDN. Required input information includes the LDN
and its associated trunk group number ("TGN").

3-147

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
DID/CCSA/DNIS ACD PARAMETER ASSIGNMENT (CMD 359)
PERCEPTION 4000

COMMANDS

PARAMETERS
This section defines input permitted for each field. Any variations for a particular operation are noted separately.
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:
RANGE:
LOOP:

TGN (Trunk Group Number)
Decimal
1 to 3 digits
1 to 256 (or maximum system configuration)
Not allowed
Allowed in DISPLAY operation only

The specified TGN must be either: a DID, CCSA, or DNIS trunk; or an ISDN trunk with DNIS/DID inward mode.
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:
RANGE:
LOOP:

LDN (Listed Directory Number)
Decimal
2 to 15 digits
00 to 999999999999999
Allowed in DISPLAY operation only
Not allowed

The entered LDN must have been previously defined via the DID/CCSA LDN Assignment command (CMD 316).
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:
RANGE:
LOOP:

IQP1 (First Incoming ACD Call Queuing Priority)
Decimal
1 to 2 digits
1 to 16
Allowed in DISPLAY operation only
Not allowed

The "IQP1" field defines how the incoming LDN call will be treated in an ACD environment. If a value of 1 is
entered in this field, then the incoming call will receive the highest level of priority and be placed at the front of the
ACD queue. If 16 is entered, the call will receive the lowest level of priority treatment. Values in between 1 and 16
can be entered to provide intermediate levels of treatment. If a  D is entered in the "IQP1" field when the
"IQP TMR" and "IQP2" have not been defined, then the "IQP1" value will be deleted.
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:
RANGE:
LOOP:

IQP TMR (Incoming ACD Call Queuing Priority Timer)
Decimal
1 to 4 digits
1 to 9999, in seconds
Allowed in DISPLAY operation only
Not allowed

The "IQP TMR" field entry assigns the period of time that an incoming LDN call will wait in queue prior to being
repositioned per the "IQP2" field entry. If "IQP2" is defined, then the "IQP TMR" must also be assigned. If a
 D is entered in the "IPQ TMR" field, then both the "IQP TMR" and "IQP2" field entries will be deleted.
When defined, the "IPQ TMR" value should be less than the value of the overflow timer "OVF TMR."
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:

3-148

IQP2 (Second Incoming ACD Call Queuing Priority)
Decimal
1 or 2 digits
1 to 16

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
DID/CCSA/DNIS ACD PARAMETER ASSIGNMENT (CMD 359)
PERCEPTION 4000
RANGE:
LOOP:

COMMANDS

Allowed in DISPLAY operation only
Not allowed

This field defines the new priority level that is assigned to an incoming LDN call after waiting in an ACD queue for
a period longer than that set in the "IQP TMR" field. If the "IQP TMR" field is defined, then the "IQP2" field should
also be defined. If a  D is entered in the "IQP2" field, then both the "IQP2" and "IQP TMR" field entries will
be deleted. The entered "IQP2" value should be less than or equal to the "IQP1" value.
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:
RANGE:
LOOP:

OVF TMR (ACD Overflow Timer)
Decimal
1 to 4 digits
1 to 9999
Allowed in DISPLAY operation only
Not Allowed

This field assigns the period of time that an incoming LDN call will wait at the new ("IQP2") priority level before
being routed to an alternative destination (the assigned overflow destination for the ACD group). The "OVF TMR"
value should always be greater than the "IQP TMR"" value (unless the overflow timer is set at 0). If a  D is
entered in the "OVF TMR" field, then the "OVF TMR" value will be deleted.
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:

LDN NAME (Listed Directory Number Name)
Text
up to 14 ASCII characters

This field defines the name associated with the LDN. Assigned LDN names enable LDN call recipients to receive
a descriptive indication of each incoming LDN call. This aids in call answering procedures and is particularly
helpful in an ACD environment.

SYSTEM MESSAGES
The following error messages are unique to this command.
C35900
C35901
C35902
C35903
C35904
C35905
C35906
C35907
C35908
C35911

-

Undefined trunk group number
Check trunk group number range
The specified LDN does not exist
IQP2 must be smaller than IQP1
Trunk type is not DID, CCSA, or DNIS
ISDN trunk group with DNIS/DDI inward mode is not allowed
Overflow timer must be greater than Queing Priority Timer
IQP2 field has been defined; IQP TMR should also be defined
IQP TMR has been defined; IQP2 field should also be defined
Deletion not allowed; check IQP2 and IQP TMR entries

3-149

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
DID/CCSA/DNIS DISA LDN ASSIGNMENT (CMD 315)
PERCEPTION 4000

COMMANDS

DID/CCSA/DNIS DISA LDN ASSIGNMENT (CMD 315)
Each defined DID, CCSA, and DNIS non-ISDN trunk group, as well as each inward mode DDI/DNIS ISDN trunk
may have listed directory numbers (LDNs) assigned for Direct Inward System Access (DISA). This command
defines the DISA table for the trunk groups. The use of DISA enables outside callers to call the system via one of
the LDNs and, after entering an optional security code and/or authorization code, to access system features and
facilities.
Command Keyword:

DID/CCSA_DISA

Category Name:

Trunk

PREREQUISITE COMMANDS
DID/CCSA/DNIS Trunk Group Assignment (CMD 314)
Trunk Group Assignment (CMD 310)

OPERATIONS
Available operations:

ADD
DELETE
DISPLAY

The function and required data fields for each operation are described in this section.

ADD

TGN

DISA LDN

DISA LDN

req

DISA LDN

DISA LDN

opt

This operation creates a new group or adds a DISA LDN to an existing group. Data is required in the "TGN" and
the first "DISA LDN" fields. Looping is allowed in the "TGN" field.

DELETE

TGN

DISA LDN

req

DISA LDN

DISA LDN

DISA LDN

opt

This operation deletes a "TGN" or an "DISA LDN". Data is required in the "TGN" and the first "DISA LDN" fields.
Looping is allowed in the "TGN" field. To delete the entire TGN, enter ALL in any of the "DISA LDN" fields.

3-150

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
DID/CCSA/DNIS DISA LDN ASSIGNMENT (CMD 315)
PERCEPTION 4000

COMMANDS

DISPLAY

TGN

DISA LDN

DISA LDN

DISA LDN

DISA LDN

opt

This operation displays all trunk groups and their DISA LDN’s that meet the conditions established in each field.
Looping is permitted in the "TGN" field.

PARAMETERS
Each field parameter is described in this section. Any variations for a particular operation are noted separately.
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:
LOOPS:

TGN (Trunk Group Number)
Decimal
1 to 3 digits
1 to 256 (or to the maximum system configuration)
Allowed in all operations
Valid entries are the actual trunk group numbers which were pre-defined as DID/CCSA trunk
groups in the Trunk Group Assignment command (CMD 310).

FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:

VALUE:
RANGE:

DISA LDN (Direct Inward System Access Listed Directory Number)
Decimal / Keyword
2 to 7 digits for DID, CCSA, or DNIS non-ISDN trunks
2 to 15 digits for DDI or DNIS ISDN trunks
Predefined ASCII characters
00 to 999999999999999 / ALL (for a DELETE operation only)
Allowed in a DISPLAY operation only
This field indicates the listed directory number for the trunk group. Each DISA LDN is unique in
its group. However, since trunk groups are independent of each other, each DISA LDN can be in
more than one group. All the DISA LDNs in the same group have the same number of digits. For
DID/CCSA/DNIS non-ISDN trunk groups, the number of digits in the "DISA LDN" field must be
the same as the trunk group's digit length. The keyword ALL may be entered in any of the "DISA
LDN" fields to delete an entire TGN.

SYSTEM ERROR MESSAGES
The following error messages are unique to this command.
C31500
C31501
C31502
C31503
C31504
C31505
C31506

-

Check input format in field N
Group is not defined as DID/CCSA
Length of LDN in field N does not match length sent from CO
Not enough space to add LDN(s)
Input LDN in field N is already in group
Input LDN in field N is not in group
The same LDNs exist in fields Ni...Nj

3-151

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
DID/CCSA/DNIS DISA LDN ASSIGNMENT (CMD 315)
PERCEPTION 4000

COMMANDS

C31507 - Trunk group should be a non-ISDN type
C31508 - LDN has been defined in Command 316 already
NOTE: N is from 2 to 9.

COMMENTS
Each DID/CCSA/DNIS non-ISDN trunk group and each DDI/DNIS mode ISDN trunk group can only have one
LDN table.
Each LDN must be unique within its own trunk group. However, because each trunk group is independent of
others, an LDN can be assigned to more than one trunk group.
All of the LDNs contained in the same DID/CCSA/DNIS non-ISDN trunk group must have the same number of
digits. The length of each of these LDNs must be the same as the non-ISDN turnk group's digit length.

RELATED COMMANDS
DID/CCSA/DNIS LDN Assignment (CMD 316)
Trunk Group Routing Assignment (CMD 307)
Trunk Routing Assignment (CMD 308)

3-152

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
DID/CCSA/DNIS LDN ASSIGNMENT (CMD 316)
PERCEPTION 4000

COMMANDS

DID/CCSA/DNIS LDN ASSIGNMENT (CMD 316)
The DID/CCSA LDN Assignment command specifies the unique routing defined for a non-DISA Listed Directory
Number (LDN). Up to 32 non-DISA LDNs are allowed per DID/CCSA/DNIS trunk group. Each LDN may be
assigned unique routing for each of up to four time zones. The structure and relationships of the three route
choices to each time zone to each LDN parallels that used in the Trunk Routing Assignment (CMD 308) and
Trunk Group Routing Assignment (CMD 307) commands. Refer to these commands for a discussion of these
relationships and parameter issues.
If an LDN for the DID/CCSA trunk group receives no definition in a time zone(s), the call will go unanswered.
Command Keyword:

DID/CCSA_LDN

Category Name:

Trunk

PREREQUISITE COMMANDS
DID/CCSA/DNIS Trunk Group Assignment (CMD 314)
Trunk Group Assignment (CMD 310)
If a route choice is defined, the following appropriate commands may be needed:
ACD Group Assignment (CMD 355)
Announcement Pattern Assignment (CMD 353)
Attendant Group Assignment (CMD 372)
Attendant Position Assignment (CMD 370)
Miscellaneous Device Assignment (CMD 400)
Night Bell Assignment (CMD 405)
Station Assignment (CMD 330)
Station Hunting Assignment (CMD 342)
System Speed Calling Assignment (CMD 402)
UCD Group Assignment (CMD 354)

OPERATIONS
Available operations:

ADD
DELETE
MODIFY
DISPLAY

The function and required data fields for each operation are described in this section.

3-153

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
DID/CCSA/DNIS LDN ASSIGNMENT (CMD 316)
PERCEPTION 4000

COMMANDS

ADD

TGN

INDEX

LDN

TIME ZONE #

ROUTE CHOICE 1

ROUTE CHOICE 2

req

ROUTE CHOICE 3

opt

This operation creates a new group or adds a listed directory number to a group. The first five fields (TGN,
INDEX, LDN, TIME ZONE #, and ROUTE CHOICE 1) are required, and the last two are optional. Loops are
allowed in the "TGN" and "INDEX" fields. A loop in the "INDEX" field is used for adding several LDNs. Its value
does not indicate the actual position to be added in the group. The number of digits in the "LDN" field must be the
same as the DID/CCSA/DNIS non-ISDN trunk group’s digit length. For ISDN trunk groups, the number of digits
can range from 2 to 15 digits.

DELETE

TGN

LDN

req

This operation deletes a "TGN" or "LDN". Both the "TGN" and the "LDN" fields are required. Looping is allowed in
the "TGN" field. To delete a trunk group, enter ALL in the "LDN" field.

MODIFY

TGN

LDN

TIME ZONE #

ROUTE CHOICE 1

ROUTE CHOICE 2

req

ROUTE CHOICE 3

opt

This operation changes the conversion scheme and assigned LDNs with their associated routing destinations of
one or more DID/CCSA/DNIS (incoming) trunk groups. The "TGN", "LDN", and "TIME ZONE #" fields are
required. Delete fields are allowed in the "ROUTE CHOICE 1/2/3" fields. The number of digits in the "LDN" field
must be the same as the DID/CCSA/DNIS non-ISDN trunk group’s digit length. For ISDN trunk groups, the
number of digits can range from 2 to 15 digits. In a MODIFY operation, an LDN can be removed or its associated
routing destination can be changed.

DISPLAY

TGN

INDEX

LDN

TIME ZONE #

ROUTE CHOICE 1

opt

3-154

ROUTE CHOICE 2

ROUTE CHOICE 3

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
DID/CCSA/DNIS LDN ASSIGNMENT (CMD 316)
PERCEPTION 4000

COMMANDS

This operation displays all trunk groups and their LDNs that meet the conditions established in each field. Loops
are permitted in the "TGN", "INDEX", and "TIME ZONE #" fields. The "INDEX" field displays the actual position of
the "LDN" in the database.

PARAMETERS
Each field parameter is described in this section. Any variations for a particular operation are noted separately.
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:
LOOP:

TGN (Trunk Group Number)
Decimal
1 to 3 digits
1 to 256 (or to the maximum system configuration)
Allowed in ADD, DELETE, and DISPLAY operations
Valid entries are the actual trunk group numbers which were pre-defined as DID/CCSA/DNIS/DDI
trunk groups in the Trunk Group Assignment command (CMD 310).

FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:
LOOP:

INDEX (Index for LDN Field)
Decimal
1 or 2 digits
1 to 256
Allowed in DISPLAY and ADD operations
This field is used as a counter in ADD and DISPLAY operations. Its value does not indicate an
actual position in a trunk group or set any priority for data entered in this command.

FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:

VALUE:
LOOP:

LDN (Listed Directory Number)
Decimal / Keyword
2 to 7 digits for DID, CCSA, or DNIS non-ISDN trunks
2 to 15 digits for DDI or DNIS ISDN trunks
Predefined ASCII characters
00 to 999999999999999 / ALL (for a DELETE operation only)
Not allowed
This field contains the listed directory number for the trunk group. Each "LDN" is unique in its
group. However, since each trunk group is independent of each other, an "LDN" can be in more
than one group. All the "LDN"s in the same group have the same number of digits. ALL may be
entered in this field in a DELETE operation when deleting all of the listed directory numbers.

FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:
LOOP:

TIME ZONE # (Time Zone Number)
Decimal
1 digit
1 to 4
Allowed in a DISPLAY operation only
This field contains the time zone number for each LDN entry in a group. The number specifies
the routing destination. In a DISPLAY operation, this field is the third loop field in the command
header.

3-155

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
DID/CCSA/DNIS LDN ASSIGNMENT (CMD 316)
PERCEPTION 4000
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:

COMMANDS

ROUTE CHOICE 1/2/3
Dialing Digits / Keyword
1 to 5 digits
0 to 99999
Keywords:

AP01 ~ AN50
BL01 ~ BL64

Announcement Pattern Number
Night Bell Number

"ROUTE CHOICE 1" can be one of the following:
a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
f)
g)
h)
i)

Individual attendant console directory number
Attendant group directory number
Station number
Announcement device
Hunt group pilot number
UCD group pilot number
ACD group pilot number
Night bell
Speed Calling code—1 ~ 3 digit Speed Calling access code, plus desired 3-digit Speed
Calling code

"ROUTE CHOICE 2" has the same options as "ROUTE CHOICE 1". However, to utilize "ROUTE
CHOICE 2", "ROUTE CHOICE 1" must be defined as an attendant or attendant group.
"ROUTE CHOICE 3" has the same options as "ROUTE CHOICE 1", with the exception of the
attendant and attendant group options. To utilize "ROUTE CHOICE 3", both "ROUTE CHOICE 1"
and "2" must be defined as an attendant or attendant group or mix thereof.
A  may be entered in these fields during a MODIFY operation to delete current
data. Note, however, that using a  is dependent on the relationships between the
route choices as described above.

SYSTEM ERROR MESSAGES
The following error messages are unique to this command.
C31600
C31601
C31602
C31603
C31604
C31605
C31606
C31607
C31608
C31609
C31610
C31611
C31612

3-156

-

Group is not defined as DID/CCSA
Group is full
Group is empty
Check input format in field N
Length of input LDN is not correct
Input LDN is already in group
Input LDN is not in group
Input announcement pattern is undefined
Input night bell is undefined
Invalid announcement pattern
Invalid directory number
Check combination of routing destinations
Input any route choice

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
DID/CCSA/DNIS LDN ASSIGNMENT (CMD 316)
PERCEPTION 4000
C31613
C31614
C31615
C31616
I31617
C31618

-

COMMANDS

Input LDN time zone is already in group
Input LDN time zone is not found in group
Undefined trunk group number
DID/CCSA/DNIS/DDI trunk group attributes are not assigned
Warning: Undefined data in Route Choice
LDN has been defined in Command 315 already

COMMENTS
Each DID/CCSA/DNIS non-ISDN trunk group and each DDI/DNIS mode ISDN trunk group can only have one
LDN table.
Each LDN must be unique within its own trunk group. However, because each trunk group is independent of
others, an LDN can be assigned to more than one trunk group.
All of the LDNs contained in the same DID/CCSA/DNIS non-ISDN trunk group must have the same number of
digits. The length of each of these LDNs must be the same as the non-ISDN trunk group's digit length.
An LDN can be removed or its associated routing destination can be changed by using the MODIFY operation.
Prior to making either or these modifications, ensure that no calls are either on-hold or in-progress for the LDN.
A station that is assigned to either a DID/CCSA/DNIS non-ISDN trunk or a DDI/DNIS mode ISDN trunk should
not have a class of service designating Inward Restriction or Origination Only, since such a station cannot receive
incoming calls.

RELATED COMMANDS
DID/CCSA/DNIS DISA LDN Assignments (CMD 315)
Trunk Group Routing Assignment (CMD 307)
Trunk Routing Assignment (CMD 308)

3-157

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
DID/CCSA/DNIS TRUNK GROUP ASSIGNMENT (CMD 314)
PERCEPTION 4000

COMMANDS

DID/CCSA/DNIS TRUNK GROUP ASSIGNMENT (CMD 314)
This command is used to define DID/CCSA/DNIS non-ISDN trunk groups as well as DDI/DNIS ISDN trunk
groups. Most calls are routed by the PERCEPTION 4000 system after receiving a series of digits over a
DID/CCSA/DNIS/DDI trunk, and then deleting and/or appending some digits in order to route the call to a station
or other terminal.
Command Keyword:

DID/CCSA_TG_ASSIGN

Category Name:

Trunk

PREREQUISITE COMMANDS
Announcement Pattern Assignment (CMD 353)
Attendant Position Assignment (CMD 370)
ISDN Trunk Group Parameter Assignment (CMD 421)
Night Bell Assignment (CMD 405)
Trunk Group Assignment (CMD 310)

OPERATIONS
Available operations:

ADD
MODIFY
DELETE
DISPLAY

The function and required data fields for each operation are described in this section.

ADD

TGN

ORG DIGIT

NEW DIGIT

req

opt

req

CO DIGIT

KEPT DIGIT

PREFIX

INTER TYPE

INTER ALT

opt/req

This operation assigns attributes to the specified DID/CCSA/DNIS/DDI trunk group. Data is required in all of the
fields except the "INTER ALT" field.

MODIFY

TGN

req

3-158

CO DIGIT

KEPT DIGIT

PREFIX

opt

INTER TYPE

INTER ALT

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
DID/CCSA/DNIS TRUNK GROUP ASSIGNMENT (CMD 314)
PERCEPTION 4000

COMMANDS

This operation changes the attribute(s) of one or more DID/CCSA/DNIS/DDI trunk groups. Input is required in the
first field only.

DELETE

TGN

ORG DIGIT

req

This operation is used to delete one or more pairs of original and new digit strings for a DID/CCSA/DNIS/DDI
trunk group. Both the trunk group number and the original digit string must be entered.

DISPLAY

TGN

ORG DIGIT

NEW DIGIT

CO DIGIT

KEPT DIGIT

PREFIX

INTER TYPE

INTER ALT

opt

This operation displays information for one or all DID/CCSA/DNIS/DDI trunk groups. Looping is allowed in the
"TGN" field.

PARAMETERS
Each field parameter is described in this section. Any variations for a particular operation are noted separately.
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:
LOOP:

TGN (Trunk Group Number)
Decimal
1 to 3 digits
1 to 256 (or to the maximum system configuration)
Allowed in a DISPLAY operation
Valid entries are the actual trunk group numbers which were pre-defined as DID/CCSA/DNIS/DDI
trunk groups in the Trunk Group Assignment command (CMD 310).

FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:
RANGE:

ORG DIGIT (Original Digits)
Decimal / Keyword
1 to 7 digits or predefined ASCII characters
0 to 9999999 or Keyword NON
Allowed in a DISPLAY operation only
This field applies only to DID and CCSA non-ISDN trunks and is used to specify the original
digits that are received from the central office (CO). When these digits are received by the
PERCEPTION 4000, they will be translated to new digits (as assigned in the "NEW DIGIT" field).
Up to 32 unique pairs of original and new digits can be defined for a trunk group. If pairs of

3-159

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
DID/CCSA/DNIS TRUNK GROUP ASSIGNMENT (CMD 314)
PERCEPTION 4000

COMMANDS

original/new digits are not required, then either a  or the keyword NON can be entered.
When assigning DNIS or DDI trunk groups, enter the keyword NON, or skip past this field by
entering a .
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:
RANGE:

NEW DIGIT (New Digits)
Decimal / Keyword
1 to 7 digits or predefined ASCII characters
0 to 9999999 or Keyword NON
Allowed in a DISPLAY operation only
This field applies only to DID and CCSA non-ISDN trunks. When the digits received from the CO
match the digits assigned in the "ORG DIGIT" field, the PERCEPTION 4000 system
automatically translates the digits to assigned new values. Up to 32 unique pairs of original and
new digits can be defined for a trunk group. If pairs of original/new digits are not required, then
either a  or the keyword NON can be entered. However, if digits have been entered in the
"ORG DIGIT" field, then new digits or NON must be entered. When assigning DNIS or DDI trunk
groups, enter the keyword NON, or skip past this field by entering a .

FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:
RANGE:

CO DIGIT (Central Office Sending Digits)
Decimal
1 digit
2 to 7
Allowed in a DISPLAY operation only
This field specifies the predetermined number of digits to be sent by the central office. This field
is not required by DNIS/DDI ISDN trunks.

FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:

RANGE:

KEPT DIGIT (Number of Digits to be Kept)
Decimal / Keyword
1 or 2 digits
1 to 7 for DID/CCSA/DNIS non-ISDN trunks
1 to 15 for DNIS/DDI ISDN trunks
Predefined ASCII characters
Allowed in a DISPLAY operation only
Keywords:

NON - No received CO digits will be kept
ALL - All received CO digits will be kept

This field specifies the number of digits to be kept after receiving a digit string from the central
office. For non-ISDN trunks, the value entered in this field should be less than or equal to the
value entered in the "CO DIGIT" field. When entering the keyword ALL, all CO digits specified in
the "CO DIGIT" field will be kept. When entering a  or the keyword NON, none of the
specified CO digits will be kept. For ISDN trunks other than DDI/DNIS ISDN trunks, either a
 or the keyword NON.
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:
RANGE:

3-160

PREFIX (Digit String to be Added)
Decimal / Keyword
1 to 5 digits or predefined ASCII characters
0 to 99999 or Keyword NON
Not allowed

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
DID/CCSA/DNIS TRUNK GROUP ASSIGNMENT (CMD 314)
PERCEPTION 4000

COMMANDS

This field specifies the digit string to be added at the front of the received CO digit string. This
field does not apply for DNIS trunk groups; in this case, either a  or the keyword NON
should be entered. NON can also be entered as a null prefix string for other trunk types.
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:
RANGE:

INTER TYPE (Intercept Treatment Type)
Decimal / Keyword
1 to 5 digits / Predefined ASCII characters
0 to 99999
Allowed in a DISPLAY operation only
Keywords:

AP01 ~ AP50

This field defines the device or attendant which will perform vacant number intercept treatment
for the specified DID/CCSA/DNIS/DDI trunk group. Attendants, attendant groups, and
announcement patterns are valid definitions. Keywords indicate announcement pattern numbers
(AP01 to AP50), and digit input indicates an attendant or attendant group directory number (0 to
99999).
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:

INTER ALT (Alternate Intercept Treatment)
Keyword
Predefined ASCII characters
Keywords:

BL01 ~ BL64

This field is used to specify an alternate intercept plan for the DID/CCSA/DNIS/DDI trunk group, if
the first-choice attendant/attendant group is in the position busy mode. A night bell device
number (BL01 ~ BL64) may be entered for the specified DID/CCSA/DNIS/DDI trunk group. No
entry is needed if an announcement pattern number (AN01 ~ AN64) has been specified in the
"INTER TYPE" field. If a  is entered in this field, then the existing alternate intercept
treatment will be deleted.

SYSTEM ERROR MESSAGES
The following error messages are unique to this command.
C31400
C31401
C31402
C31403
C31404
C31405
C31406
C31407
C31408
C31409
C31410
C31411
C31412
C31413

-

Trunk group number is not a DID/CCSA type
Directory number listed as intercept type is not an attendant or attendant group DN
Announcement pattern number listed as intercept type is not available for DID treatment
Night bell listed as intercept alternate is not available
This trunk group number is already assigned
This trunk group number is not yet assigned
Remove DISA LDN member before changing CO sending digits
Number of deleted digits cannot exceed CO sending digits
Added digit string overflow
Original/new/kept/added digits do not apply to DNIS trunk groups
Original digits are not unique for this trunk group
Delete intercept alternate before modifying intercept treatment type
Number of kept digits cannot exceed the number of CO sending digits
Added and kept digits do not apply to DNIS trunk groups

3-161

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
DID/CCSA/DNIS TRUNK GROUP ASSIGNMENT (CMD 314)
PERCEPTION 4000
C31414
C31415
C31416
C31417
C31418
C31419
C31420
C31421
C31422

-

COMMANDS

CO digits are not required for an ISDN trunk group
Intercept treatment type must be specified
Original/new digit combinations are invalid
Original/new digits are not found
No space exists for original/new digits to be added for this trunk group
Only decimal digits (0, 1, ... 9) are allowed as original/new digits
Kept digits may be needed
Check trunk group's night bell number
CO digits are required for non-ISDN trunk groups

COMMENTS
The announcement pattern specified in the "INTER TYPE" field must have already been assigned.
The night bell specified in the "INTER ALT" field must have already been assigned.
Each trunk that is assigned to a group must already be defined as either a DID, CCSA, or DNIS non-ISDN trunk
or as a DDI or DNIS ISDN trunk.

RELATED COMMANDS
DID/CCSA/DNIS DISA LDN Assignment (CMD 315)
DID/CCSA/DNIS LDN Assignment (CMD 316)
Internal Call Alternate Routing Assignment (CMD 374)
System Option Flag Assignment (CMD 408)
Trunk Group Routing Assignment (CMD 307)
Trunk Routing Assignment (CMD 308)

3-162

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
DIGITAL CARRIER CHANNEL ASSIGNMENT (CMD 413)
PERCEPTION 4000

COMMANDS

DIGITAL CARRIER CHANNEL ASSIGNMENT (CMD 413)
The Digital Carrier Channel Assignment command defines the individual channel characteristics of the T-1 carrier.
The T-1 card uses 24 time slots in the system. Therefore only a trunk card, electronic telephone line card, or
analog off-premises extension card can be used in the same highway with this card.
Command Keyword:

DIGITAL_CARRIER

Category Name:

Trunk

PREREQUISITE COMMAND
Trunk Group Assignment (CMD 310)

OPERATIONS
Available operations:

ADD
DELETE
MODIFY
DISPLAY

The function and required data fields for each operation are described in this section.

ADD

EQUIP #

TGN

req

SIG

ST

STOUT

DBNK

opt

DT

ORG

TERM

req

RSPV

DISA

SPD

NAME

opt

locked

opt

This operation adds digital carrier channel(s) to a T-1 card. Up to 24 T-1 cards may be assigned per system.
Looping is allowed in the "EQUIP #" field.

DELETE

EQUIP #

req

This operation removes digital carrier channel(s) from a T-1 card. The “EQUIP #” field is required, and looping is
allowed. When the last trunk of a trunk group or the last channel in a T-1 card is about to be removed, a warning
is given.

3-163

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
DIGITAL CARRIER CHANNEL ASSIGNMENT (CMD 413)
PERCEPTION 4000

COMMANDS

MODIFY

EQUIP #

TGN

SIG

req

locked

ST

STOUT

DBNK

DT

ORG

TERM

RSPV

DISA

SPD

NAME

opt

This operation modifies a digital carrier channel’s attributes. If the T-1 card that this equipment number resides on
is a clock provider, it is necessary to switch the clock provider to another card before this operation can proceed
(refer to the T-1 Clock Provider Selection Assignment command (CMD 412)).

DISPLAY

EQUIP #

TGN

SIG

ST

STOUT

DBNK

DT

ORG

TERM

RSPV

DISA

SPD

NAME

opt

This operation displays all of the digital carrier channel equipment number(s) that meet the conditions established
for each field. Looping is permitted in the "EQUIP #" field.

PARAMETERS
Each field parameter is described in this section. Any variations for a particular operation are noted separately.
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:
LOOP:

EQUIP # (Equipment Number)
EQ Type
5 or 6 digits
(0)10201 to 101224 *
Allowed in ADD, DELETE, and DISPLAY operations
* Use the following chart to determine valid ranges for various types of equipment.
For TTRI equipment cards, only the even-numbered card slots are used:
Digits

Range

Hardware

First digit(s)
Second two digits
Last two digits

(0)1~10
02, 04, 06, 08, 10, 12
01~24

Shelf no.
Card slot no.
Channel no.

The T-1 card is placed in the second slot of the desired highway. The equipment number reflects
the shelf number, slot number, and channel number.

3-164

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
DIGITAL CARRIER CHANNEL ASSIGNMENT (CMD 413)
PERCEPTION 4000
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:
RANGE:

COMMANDS

TGN (Trunk Group Number)
Decimal
1 to 3 digits
1 to 256 (or to the maximum system configuration)
Allowed in a DISPLAY operation only
This field defines the trunk group number for the digital carrier channel. The trunk group number
cannot be modified.

FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:

SIG (Signaling Type)
Keyword
Predefined ASCII characters
Keywords:

GND
LP
DID
EM
DMI

-

Ground Start CO
Loop Start CO
Direct Inward Dialing
TIE E&M Trunk
TIE DMI

The signaling field determines whether the digital channel emulates a loop, ground, DID, E&M
TIE, or DMI TIE trunk. The signaling type must be compatible with the trunk group type. If the
trunk group type is a CO, FX, or WATS line, the signaling type must be set to a ground or loop
start. A DID line must be set to DID, E&M lines must be associated with a TIE trunk group, and
DMI must be associated with a DMI trunk group. Note that DMI is not supported at this time.
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:

ST (Start Method)
Keyword
Predefined ASCII characters
Keywords:

IMM
WNK
DLY
TIM
AUT

-

Immediate Start
Wink Start
Delay Dial
Timeout
Automatic

This field defines the start method used for the digital carrier channel. IMM, WNK, and DLY are
used for both DID and E&M signaling. Additionally, E&M may use TIM. If signaling is set to DMI,
this field defines the start method of incoming calls only. Valid options for DMI signaling are WNK
and AUTO. Loop and ground start signaling uses the TIM start method only.
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:

STOUT (Start Method for Outgoing Calls)
Keyword
Predefined ASCII characters
Keywords:

IMM
WNK
DLY
TIM
AUT

-

Immediate Start
Wink Start
Delay Dial
Timeout
Automatic

3-165

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
DIGITAL CARRIER CHANNEL ASSIGNMENT (CMD 413)
PERCEPTION 4000

COMMANDS

The outgoing-call start method field is used for DMI signaling only.
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:

DBNK (D-bank Equivalent)
Keyword
Predefined ASCII characters
Keywords:

FXS - Foreign Exchange Subscriber
SAS - Special Access Subscriber

The "D BANK" field specifies the digital carrier channel as a Foreign Exchange Subscriber or a
Special Access Subscriber. This field is only used when the channel is designated as a CO trunk
(loop or ground start signaling).
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:

DT (Dial Tone)
Keyword
Predefined ASCII characters
Keywords:

DT - Dial Tone Return
STR - Silence Tone Return

This field defines whether dial tone or silence is returned. Only DMI and E&M TIE trunks can be
defined for the silence option.
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:

ORG (Originating Dial Mode)
Keyword
Predefined ASCII characters
Keywords:

DP10 - DP 10 PPS
DTMF - DTMF Receiver

This field defines whether dial pulse (10 pulses per second) or DTMF signaling will be emulated
by the digital carrier channel.
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:

TERM (Terminating Dial Mode)
Keyword
Predefined ASCII characters
Keywords:

DP10 - DP 10 PPS
DTMF - DTMF Receiver
NON - Not applicable

This field defines the terminating dial mode for the digital carrier channel, which can be dial pulse
(10 pulses per second) or DTMF.
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:

RSPV (CO Supervision Type)
Keyword
Predefined ASCII characters
Keywords:

3-166

CLD - Called Party Disconnect
CLG - Calling Party Disconnect

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
DIGITAL CARRIER CHANNEL ASSIGNMENT (CMD 413)
PERCEPTION 4000

COMMANDS
EPD - Either Party Disconnect
NON - No Supervision

This field defines release supervision provided by the Central Office or distant switch. This
information is important to the system in determining whether an unsupervised Trunk-to-Trunk
connection may be formed using the digital carrier channel.
If the "SIG" field is set to DID, EM, or DMI, this field should be set to NON. If a channel
terminates to a peripheral equipment device, the CO supervision type should be NON. “First
Party Disconnect” is also referred to as “Either Party Disconnect”.
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:

DISA (DISA Flag)
Keyword
Predefined ASCII characters
Keywords:

YES - DISA flag is on
NO - DISA flag is off

This field flags the channel as a Direct Inward System Access trunk. Outgoing only channels
cannot be designated for DISA usage.
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:

SPD (Transmission Speed) (Reserved for Toshiba Global Network System)
Keyword
Predefined ASCII characters
Keywords:

16K - 16 k bps
64K - 64 k bps

The speed field determines the transmission speed over the channel.
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
LOOP:

NAME (Channel Name)
Text
0 to 14 characters/numbers
Not allowed in this field
The channel (trunk) may be assigned an optional name designation which is displayed to
attendants and display station users when the trunk is accessed by or terminated to the device.
The name may be up to 14 alphanumeric characters in length. Embedded spaces are allowed.

SYSTEM ERROR MESSAGES
The following error messages are unique to this command.
C41300
C41301
C41302
C41303
C41304
C41305

-

Card type or equipment number is already in use
Undefined trunk group number
Number of trunks in trunk group number exceeds maximum
Trunk group number cannot be modified
Signaling is not compatible
Start method is not compatible

3-167

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
DIGITAL CARRIER CHANNEL ASSIGNMENT (CMD 413)
PERCEPTION 4000
C41306
C41307
C41308
C41309
C41310
C41311
C41312
C41313
C41314
C41315
C41316
C41317
C41318
I41319
C41320
I41320
C41321
C41322
I41322
C41323
C41324
I41324
C41325
C41326
C41327
I41328

-

COMMANDS

Check start method for outgoing call
Check dial tone
Check the dial mode
DISA must have EPD or CLG release supervision
DISA is for incoming and bothway
No DISA flag for given trunk group number
Channel name exceeds 9 alphanumeric characters
Download PP data failed
Check input format in field 4 or 5
Check input format in field 8 or 9
Channel has already been installed
Undefined equipment number
Number of T-1 cards exceeds system maximum
Warning: This is the last trunk to be removed from trunk group
Clock provider cannot be modified
Warning: Equipment number is the last channel removed from T1 card
Remove hunting sequence before deleting trunks
Private feature key still exists
Warning: Please try later; database is reserved
Failed to read LCPU database
Trunk group number should be non-ISDN type
Warning: Equipment number is the last channel removed from T-1 card
Trunk cannot be assigned to a dictation machine trunk group
Clock provider cannot be deleted
Clock database is full
Warning: Please try later, database is reserved

COMMENTS
Channel 24 is available to the T-1 carrier only when channel-associated signaling is used.
A channel may belong to only one trunk group.
Before adding a channel to a T-1 card, the card type must first be defined as a T-1 type. There are up to 24 T-1
cards per system.
A warning will be given when the last trunk or channel of a trunk group is about to be removed from a T1 card.

RELATED COMMANDS
T-1 Clock Provider Selection Assignment (CMD 412)
Trunk Assignment (CMD 313)
Trunk Hunting Assignment (CMD 309)

3-168

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
DISK FILE MANIPULATION (CMD 152)
PERCEPTION 4000

COMMANDS

DISK FILE MANIPULATION (CMD 152)
The Disk File Manipulation command utilizes and manages storage space on a hard disk or a floppy diskette. It
also organizes files on the disks. In addition, the command provides BACKUP and RESTORE functions. The
BACKUP function copies a collection of files from the hard disk to floppy diskettes for the purpose of backing up
files in case of a system failure. The RESTORE function copies the files on the backup floppy diskettes back to
the hard disk. The structure, content, and attributes of these restored files are those of the original files at the time
they were backed up.
Command Keyword:

FILE_MANIPULATION

Category Name:

Maintenance

PREREQUISITE COMMANDS
There are no prerequisites for this command.
OPERATIONS
Available operations:

BACKUP
RESTORE
COMPARE
COPY
CREATE
DELETE
DISPLAY
FORMAT
FREE

The function and required data fields for each operation are described in this section.

BACKUP

HARD DISK DRIVE

BACKUP DRIVE

RELEASE NO

FILE TYPE

req

This operation copies the operational programs, database, change notes, and other necessary data files from the
hard disk to floppy diskettes for a backup.
The BACKUP process, controlled by a utility program, writes a header to the backup diskette containing
information such as the current timestamp, operator identifier, and release number. The utility program then looks
for the specified file type and copies those files from the hard disk to the diskette.
When a diskette is full, a message requesting insertion of another diskette displays. Again, a header is written on
the next diskette. The BACKUP process continues until all of the files are copied.

3-169

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
DISK FILE MANIPULATION (CMD 152)
PERCEPTION 4000

COMMANDS

RESTORE

BACKUP DRIVE

HARD DISK DRIVE

req

The RESTORE operation is also controlled by the utility program and is the reverse process of a BACKUP. It
begins with reading the header on the backup diskette and displaying that information. Then, permission to
continue the RESTORE process is requested. If the RESTORE process is permitted, all of the backup files are
copied to the hard disk, diskette by diskette. Error messages are displayed if any errors are detected.

COMPARE

DRIVE1

FILENAME1

VER1

DRIVE2

FILENAME2

req

VER2

opt

This operation compares two files (4 bytes at a time) and displays the differences if any differences occur.

COPY

DRIVE1

FILENAME1

req

VER1

DRIVE2

opt

req

FILENAME2

VER2

opt

This operation makes a duplicate copy (FILENAME2) of an existing file (FILENAME1). A COPY operation copies
only one file at a time.

CREATE

DRIVE

FILENAME

VER

SIZE IN KBYTES

req

This operation creates a new file on the specified drive.

3-170

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
DISK FILE MANIPULATION (CMD 152)
PERCEPTION 4000

COMMANDS

DELETE

DRIVE

FILENAME

req

VER

opt

This operation removes one or more files from the specified drive. A confirmation is requested before a file is
deleted. To delete a specific file, enter the drive number and filename, then press . The "VER" field is
optional. To delete all files on a drive, enter the drive number and press the  key twice.

DISPLAY

DRIVE

FILENAME

req

VER

TIMESTAMP

opt

# BLOCKS

SIZE IN KBYTES

output only

This operation displays a list of files on a disk, along with the creation date, total number of blocks, and file size in
kilobytes of each file. The "DRIVE" field is required, and the "FILE NAME" and "VER" fields are optional. The
remaining fields are output only fields.

FORMAT

DISK DRIVE

req

This operation divides a hard disk or a floppy diskette into addressable data storage areas. Any data on the
disk/diskette is erased with this operation.

FREE

DISK DRIVE

opt

PERCENTAGE UNUSED

LARGEST UNUSED SEG

output only

This operation provides information about storage space usage on a hard disk or a floppy diskette. Information
includes the percentage of unused disk space and the size of the largest available segment.

3-171

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
DISK FILE MANIPULATION (CMD 152)
PERCEPTION 4000

COMMANDS

PARAMETERS
Each field parameter is described in this section. Any variations for a particular operation are noted separately.
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
OPERATIONS:

HARD DISK DRIVE
Keyword
Predefined ASCII characters
BACKUP, RESTORE
Keywords:

HDA - Hard Disk Drive of Side A
HDB - Hard Disk Drive of Side B

This field contains a logical name of the hard disk drive.
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
OPERATIONS:

BACKUP DRIVE
Keyword
Predefined ASCII characters
BACKUP, RESTORE
Keywords:

FDA - Floppy Disk Drive of Side A
FDB - Floppy Disk Drive of Side B

This field contains a logical name of the floppy disk drive.
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:
OPERATIONS:

RELEASE NO
Decimal
1 to 3 digits
0 to 999
BACKUP
The release number is the software release version number.

FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
OPERATIONS:

FILE TYPE
Keyword
Predefined ASCII characters
BACKUP
Keywords:

FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
OPERATIONS:

3-172

PROG - System programs, including MCPU, LPU, BTSW, MISC, PP, ATT,
and DIU programs
DATA - Database, including data of MCPU, LPU, MISC, PP, ATT, and DIU
IPL
- All program and data files loaded during IPL
CMD - All overlay loadable command program files
LOG - Change Log and Patch Log files

DISK DRIVE
Keyword
Predefined ASCII characters
FORMAT, FREE

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
DISK FILE MANIPULATION (CMD 152)
PERCEPTION 4000

COMMANDS
Keywords:

HDA
HDB
FDA
FDB

-

Hard Disk Drive of Side A
Hard Disk Drive of Side B
Floppy Disk Drive of Side A
Floppy Disk Drive of Side B

This field contains the logical name of a disk drive.
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
OPERATIONS:

DRIVE
Keyword
Predefined ASCII characters
CREATE, DELETE, DISPLAY
Keywords:

HDA
HDB
FDA
FDB

-

Hard Disk Drive of Side A
Hard Disk Drive of Side B
Floppy Disk Drive of Side A
Floppy Disk Drive of Side B

This field contains the logical name of a disk drive.
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
OPERATIONS:

DRIVE1, DRIVE2
Keyword
Predefined ASCII characters
COPY, COMPARE
Keywords:

HDA
HDB
FDA
FDB

-

Hard Disk Drive of Side A
Hard Disk Drive of Side B
Floppy Disk Drive of Side A
Floppy Disk Drive of Side B

These fields contain the logical name of a disk drive.
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
OPERATIONS:

FILENAME
Text
Up to 8 ASCII characters (The first character must be a letter, i.e., A, B, ...)
CREATE, DISPLAY, DELETE
This field assigns a name to the specified file.

FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
OPERATIONS:

FILENAME1, FILENAME2 (File names on disks 1 and 2)
Text
Up to 8 ASCII characters (The first character must be a letter, i.e., A, B, ...)
COPY, COMPARE
These fields assign names to the specified files.

FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:
OPERATIONS:

VER (Software release version number)
Decimal
1 to 3 digits
1 to 999
DISPLAY, CREATE, DELETE
This field is the software release version number.

3-173

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
DISK FILE MANIPULATION (CMD 152)
PERCEPTION 4000
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:
OPERATIONS:

COMMANDS
VER1, VER2 (Software release version numbers on disks 1 and 2)
Decimal
1 to 3 digits
1 to 999
COMPARE, COPY
These fields are the software release version numbers.

FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:
OPERATIONS:

TIMESTAMP
Decimal
MM/DD hh:mm
99/99 99:99
DISPLAY
This is an output only field and displays the current date and time.

FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:
OPERATIONS:

#BLOCKS
Decimal
1 to 5 digits
1 to 99999
DISPLAY
Each block is 8K bytes in length. This field displays the number of 8K-byte blocks on the
disk and is an output only field.

FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:
OPERATIONS:

SIZE IN KBYTES
Decimal
1 to 5 digits
1 to 32767
CREATE, DISPLAY
This is an output only field in a DISPLAY operation and a required input field in a CREATE
operation.

FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:
OPERATIONS:

PERCENTAGE UNUSED
Decimal
1 or 2 digits
0 to 99
FREE
This is an output only field and displays the percentage of space available on the specified
disk.

FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:
OPERATIONS:

LARGEST UNUSED SEG
Decimal
1 to 18 digits
0 to 999999999999999999
FREE
This is an output only field and displays the size of the largest available segment of unused
disk space.

3-174

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
DISK FILE MANIPULATION (CMD 152)
PERCEPTION 4000

COMMANDS

SYSTEM ERROR MESSAGES
The following error messages are unique to this command.
C15200
C15201
C15202
C15203
C15204
C15205
C15206
C15207
C15208
C15209
C15210
C15211
C15212
C15218
D15219
C15220
C15221
C15222
C15223
C15224
C15225
C15226

-

Disk drive is out of service
File already exists
A wrong combination of drive 1 and drive 2
Format operation cannot be performed; the drive is in service
Parameter error; enter the drive field
Failed file consolidation while copying changelog or patchlog
Failed to open changelog file
Failed to open patchlog file
Failed to read changelog file
Failed to read patchlog file
File type does not match; please check floppy disk
Failed to mount floppy drive
Timer timeout
Display or comparison of files from standby side is not supported
Failed to reserve hard disk drive
Hard disk drive is in use; try later
Some files are still open; try later
Floppy disk drive is out of service
Hard disk drive is out of service
Not enough space left on floppy disk for file copy
Standby hard disk drive is out of service
Invalid input; to restore this disk enter (Y/N)

3-175

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
DTMF RECEIVER ASSIGNMENT (CMD 416)
PERCEPTION 4000

COMMANDS

DTMF RECEIVER ASSIGNMENT (CMD 416)
This command installs/removes DTMF receivers in/from the system. These receivers are required for DTMF DID
trunks, DISA trunks, and all single-line DTMF analog telephones.
Command Keyword:

DTMF_RECEIVER_ASSIGN

Category Name:

System

PREREQUISITE COMMANDS
There are no prerequisites for this command.
OPERATIONS
Available operations:

ADD
DELETE
DISPLAY

The function and required data fields for each operation are described in this section.

ADD

SHELF #

CARD #

req

This operation adds a DTMF receiver to the system. Both fields are required. Loops are not allowed in this
operation.

DELETE

SHELF #

CARD #

req

This operation removes a DTMF receiver from the system. Before the removal, a confirmation is requested. Both
fields are required; and loops are not allowed.

3-176

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
DTMF RECEIVER ASSIGNMENT (CMD 416)
PERCEPTION 4000

COMMANDS

DISPLAY

SHELF #

CARD #

opt

This operation displays the assigned DTMF receivers. Loops are allowed in both fields. If a  is entered in
the "SHELF #" field, all of the DTMF receivers display. If a  is entered in the "CARD #" field, then all of the
receivers on the specified shelf number display.
PARAMETERS
Each field parameter is described in this section. Any variations for a particular operation are noted separately.
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:
LOOP:

SHELF # (Shelf Number of DTMF Receiver)
Decimal
1 or 2 digits
1 to 10
DISPLAY operation only
This field specifies the shelf number for the DTMF receiver.

FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:
LOOP:

CARD # (Card Number of DTMF Receiver)
Decimal
1 or 2 digits
1 to 11, 13
DISPLAY operation only
This field specifies the card number for the DTMF receiver.
NOTE: Cards 11 and 12 are installed together; an entry of 11 represents both.
Cards 13 and 14 are installed together; an entry of 13 represents both.

SYSTEM ERROR MESSAGES
The following error messages are unique to this command.
C41600
C41601
C41602
C41603
C41604
C41605

-

Device has already been installed
Device not found
Cards 11 and 12 are installed together; input only 11
Cards 13 and 14 are installed together; input only 13
Not a DTMF receiver card type
A maximum of N DTMF cards can be installed

3-177

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
EMERGENCY CALL DESTINATION ASSIGNMENT (CMD 345)
PERCEPTION 4000

COMMANDS

EMERGENCY CALL DESTINATION ASSIGNMENT (CMD 345)
The PERCEPTION 4000 system provides four distinct emergency calling levels, each accessed by its own
access code. Emergency calls are allowed routing to attendants, attendant groups, or off-premises destinations.
Command Keyword:

EMERGENCY_CALL

Category Name:

Station

PREREQUISITE COMMANDS
Attendant Group Assignment (CMD 372)
Attendant Position Assignment (CMD 370)
OPERATIONS
Available operations:

MODIFY
DISPLAY

The function and required data fields for each operation are described in this section.

MODIFY

EMR LEVEL

EMR CODE

req

DESTINATION NUMBER

EMERGENCY DISPLAY MESSAGE

opt

This operation changes an emergency access code, its destination number, and/or its display message for the
specified emergency level (EMR LEVEL). Ranges are not permitted. For Emergency levels 1 and 2, a destination
number does need not to be specified.

DISPLAY

EMR LEVEL

EMR CODE

DESTINATION NUMBER

EMERGENCY DISPLAY MESSAGE

opt

This operation displays emergency calling levels and information pertaining to each level. Looping is allowed in
the “EMR LEVEL” field.

3-178

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
EMERGENCY CALL DESTINATION ASSIGNMENT (CMD 345)
PERCEPTION 4000

COMMANDS

PARAMETERS
Each field parameter is described in this section. Any variations for a particular operation are noted separately.
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:
LOOP:

EMR LEVEL (Emergency Level)
Decimal
1 digit
1 to 4
Allowed in a DISPLAY operation only
The emergency level numbers represent relative priority for emergency calls. 1 has the highest
priority and 4 has the lowest. Priority 1 and 2 calls receive next-call-in-queue treatment at the
attendant or attendant group destination.
High volume ringing is offered the attendant (or attendants) if the emergency ringing flag is
enabled (see Attendant Position Assignment command, CMD 370) regardless of the console's
local ringing level setting. In addition, an emergency message displays on the attendant's (or
attendants') display unit(s). Priority levels 3 and 4 may be prioritized relative to other call
categories for the attendant console or group as defined in the Attendant Incoming Call Priority
Assignment command, CMD 373.

FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:
RANGE:

EMR CODE (Emergency Access Code)
Dialing Digits
1 to 5 digits
0 to 99999
Allowed in a DISPLAY operation only
Entries in this field must not conflict with other directory numbers or access codes defined in the
system numbering plan.

FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:

DESTINATION NUMBER
DN Type
1 to 5 digits
0 to 99999
Valid destinations for emergency calling are attendants and attendant groups. In the MODIFY
operation, the destination number for Emergency levels 1 and 2 need not be specified. However,
a destination number must be entered for Emergency levels 3 and 4.

FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:

EMERGENCY DISPLAY MESSAGE
Text
0 to 30 ASCII characters
This field defines the text message that displays on the attendant console when a corresponding
emergency call is made.

3-179

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
EMERGENCY CALL DESTINATION ASSIGNMENT (CMD 345)
PERCEPTION 4000
SYSTEM ERROR MESSAGES
The following error messages are unique to this command.
C34500
C34501
C34502
C34503
C34504
C34505
C34506
C34507
C34508
C34509
C34510
I345510
C34511
C34512
C34513
I34514

-

Access code is already in use
Access code not found
No space in code table
Input parameter error
Illegal emergency access code
Cannot assign this code as an emergency access code
Illegal emergency level
Not an attendant dialing digit type
Destination number is out of range
Invalid entry; must input data in fields 2 and 3
Destination number entry is not needed for Emergency levels 1 and 2
Warning: Undefined destination number
Emergency code is already used by another emergency level
Invalid entry; must input data in field 3
Invalid entry; must input data in field 2
Warning: Undefined data in field 3

RELATED COMMAND
Attendant Incoming Call Priority Assignment (CMD 373)

3-180

COMMANDS

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
EXCEPTION RESTRICTION TABLES (CMD 340)
PERCEPTION 4000

COMMANDS

EXCEPTION RESTRICTION TABLES (CMD 340)
Exception Restriction Tables provide a means for assigning absolute denial and/or allowance to certain numbers
or groups of numbers. The command is flexible in its design, allowing you to make small or vast changes, from
changing the options on a single subscriber number to more widespread changes such as implementing control
over an office code regardless of area code (such as 976 numbers), or control operator access, 10XXX codes, as
well as standard telephone numbers.
Command Keyword:

EXCEPT_RESTRICT

Category Name:

Restrict

PREREQUISITE COMMANDS
There are no prerequisites for this command.
OPERATIONS
Available operations:

ADD
DELETE
DISPLAY

The function and required data fields for each operation are described in this section.

ADD

TYPE

TRGN

DRL

EXCEPTION NUMBER

req

This operation adds destination numbers to the allowance/denial exception list of one or more trunk restriction
groups. Each allowance/denial list can contain a maximum of 32 exception numbers.

DELETE

TYPE

TRGN

DRL

EXCEPTION NUMBER

req

This operation deletes destination numbers from the allowance/denial exception list of one or more trunk
restriction groups. If ALL is entered in the “EXCEPTION NUMBER” field, all exception numbers for the specified
"TRGN" and "DRL" are deleted.

3-181

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
EXCEPTION RESTRICTION TABLES (CMD 340)
PERCEPTION 4000

COMMANDS

DISPLAY

TYPE

TRGN

DRL

INDEX

req

EXCEPTION NUMBER

opt

This operation displays the allowance/denial exception list of one or more trunk restriction groups. The first field is
required. If no data is entered in the remaining fields, all of the lists of allowance/denial exception numbers for the
specified type display. Ranges are permitted in the “TRGN”, “DRL” and “INDEX” fields.
PARAMETERS
Each field parameter is described in this section. Any variations for a particular operation are noted separately.
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:

TYPE (Type of List)
Keyword
Predefined ASCII characters
Keywords:

ALW - Exceptional Allowance List Type
DNY - Exceptional Denial List Type
ALL - Display Both Types (used in a DISPLAY operation only)

This field specifies whether the list is an allowance or denial list. In a DISPLAY operation, both
types may be displayed with entry of the ALL option.
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE :
RANGE:

TRGN (Trunk Restriction Group Number)
Decimal
1 digit
2 to 8 (or to the maximum system configuration)
Allowed in all operations
There are seven trunk restriction groups which can be defined in the system. Refer to the Trunk
Group Assignment command (CMD 310) for assigned trunk group restriction numbers.

FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:
RANGE:

DRL (Destination Restriction Level)
Decimal
1 or 2 digits
2 to 16 (or to the maximum system configuration)
Allowed in all operations
The Destination Restriction Level determines the restrictions on the outgoing calling pattern. The
DRL table is set up with the Destination Restriction Level Assignment command (CMD 337).

FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
RANGE:

EXCEPTION NUMBER
Dialing Digits, plus X, Y, N, and T (Explained below) / Keywords
1 to 24 digits / Predefined ASCII characters
Not allowed
Keyword:

3-182

ALL

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
EXCEPTION RESTRICTION TABLES (CMD 340)
PERCEPTION 4000

COMMANDS

Valid digits and characters include the following:
0 to 9
X
Y
N
T

-

Dialed digits
Represents any digit 0-9
Represents a 1 or 0
Represents any digit 2-9
Followed by one or more digits, last digit identified by a timeout

When the keyword ALL is entered in a DELETE operation, all exception numbers for the
specified "TRGN" and "DRL" are deleted. Examples of exception numbers are as follows:
411
1XXX976XXXX
976XXXX
10XXX1900XXXXXXX
0T
011T
0
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:
RANGE:

-

Restricts local information
Restricts all non-local 976 numbers
Restricts local 976 numbers
Restricts all 900 area code numbers via equal access dialing
Restricts 0+ dialing
Restricts international direct distance dialing
Restricts straight 'Dial 0' calls

INDEX (List Index Number)
Decimal
1 or 2 digits
1 to 32
Allowed in a DISPLAY operation
This field, which appears in a DISPLAY operation only, acts as a counter by totalling the number
of entries in the exception lists, and is generated automatically by the system. Its value does not
set any priority for data entered in the command.

SYSTEM ERROR MESSAGES
The following error messages are unique to this command.
C34000
C34001
C34002
C34003
C34004
C34005

-

Exception destination restriction list is full
Exception destination restriction number does not exist
Exception destination restriction number already exists
Check trunk restriction group number range
This key is not used for this operation
Illegal input

COMMENTS
A total of 32 exceptions are allowed for each TRGN/DRL combination. This is the maximum for the combined
number of entries in the allowance and denial exception lists. For example, if 25 denial exceptions exist for a
certain TRGN/DRL combination, then the maximum allowable exceptions for that same combination is 7.
RELATED COMMANDS
Destination Restriction Level (DRL) Assignment (CMD 337)
Trunk Group Assignment (CMD 310)

3-183

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
FACILITY RESTRICTION LEVEL PROFILE ASSIGNMENT (CMD 387)
PERCEPTION 4000

COMMANDS

FACILITY RESTRICTION LEVEL PROFILE ASSIGNMENT (CMD 387)
This command provides the definition of the relationship between the originator's Facility Restriction Level Profile
(FRLP) number and the Facility Restriction Levels (FRLs) assigned to various routes within each Least Cost
Routing route table. There are 32 FRLPs in the system.
FRL/FRLP relationships are used to 1) control calling party access to higher cost routes, 2) perform outgoing call
restrictions, and 3) provide grade of service operations for shared tenant or resale of service applications.
Command Keyword:

FRLP_ASSIGN

Category Name:

Restrict

PREREQUISITE COMMANDS
There are no prerequisites for this command.
OPERATIONS
Available operations:

MODIFY
DISPLAY

The function and required data fields for each operation are described in this section.

MODIFY

FRLP

F1

F2

F3

F4

F5

F6

F7

F8

F9

req

F10

F11

F12

F13

F14

F15

F16

F12

F13

F14

F15

F16

opt

This operation modifies an FRLP number. Ranges are not permitted.

DISPLAY

FRLP

F1

F2

F3

F4

F5

F6

F7

F8

F9

F10

F11

opt

This operation displays FRLP numbers. Looping is permitted in the “FRLP” field. If no data is entered, all FRLPs
are displayed.

3-184

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
FACILITY RESTRICTION LEVEL PROFILE ASSIGNMENT (CMD 387)
PERCEPTION 4000

COMMANDS

PARAMETERS
Each field parameter is described in this section. Any variations for a particular operation are noted separately.
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:
LOOP:

FRLP (Facility Restriction Level Profile Number)
Decimal
1 or 2 digits
1 to 32 (or to the maximum system configuration)
Allowed in a DISPLAY operation
For each FRLP number used in the system, the administrator assigns all desired FRLs. When a
caller with a given FRLP makes a call through Least Cost Routing, each route in the route table is
checked for its respective FRL.
Routes which have an FRL defined for the caller's FRLP number allow the outgoing call. Any
routes having an FRL not defined in the caller's FRLP deny the call.

FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:

F1 to F16 (Facility Restriction Levels 1 to 16)
Keyword
X (A marker)
When the keyword X is entered, it marks which FRL is legal. To delete an FRL field, enter a
.

SYSTEM ERROR MESSAGES
The following error messages are unique to this command.
C38700 - FRL already exists in field N
C38701 - FRL does not exist in field N
RELATED COMMANDS
Attendant Position Assignment (CMD 370)
Authorization Code Assignment (CMD 349)
Data Station Assignment (CMD 360)
LCR Routing Table Assignment (CMD 383)

3-185

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
FILE CONSOLIDATION (CMD 153)
PERCEPTION 4000

COMMANDS

FILE CONSOLIDATION (CMD 153)
The File Consolidation command writes program and/or data files to the hard disk. Any changes or additions
performed on the system are consolidated into the system files with this command. Additionally, a logout
command or a full change log buffer on the MCPU automatically updates the files on the hard disk. This
command is used on both the active and standby sides. Note that if a system switchover occurs, or the system is
turned off, all files not consolidated are saved in the change log.
Command Keyword:

FILE_CONSOLIDATION

Category Name:

Maintenance

PREREQUISITE COMMAND
Memory Test (CMD 144)
OPERATIONS
Available operations:

ENABLE

The function and required data fields for each operation are described in this section.

ENABLE

SIDE

TYPE

req

This operation executes the command. If the hard disk is busy or out of service, the system outputs an error
message.
PARAMETERS
Each field parameter is described in this section. Any variations for a particular operation are noted separately.
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:

SIDE
Keyword
Predefined ASCII characters
Keywords:

ACT
- Active Side
SBY
- Standby Side
BOTH - Both Sides

This field selects the side(s) on which the file consolidation will take place.

3-186

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
FILE CONSOLIDATION (CMD 153)
PERCEPTION 4000
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:

COMMANDS

TYPE (Data Type)
Keyword
Predefined ASCII characters
Keywords:

ALL
DATA
PROG
NON

-

Program and Data
Data/Database Only
Program Only
Abort Request

This field designates the data-type files to be consolidated. To abort the command, enter NON in
this field.
SYSTEM ERROR MESSAGES
C15300
C15301
C15302
C15303

-

Timeout in Command 153
Stand-by side is not installed
Timeout in stand-by side
Hard disk is in use; please try later

3-187

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
FILE DUMP (CMD 151)
PERCEPTION 4000

COMMANDS

FILE DUMP (CMD 151)
The File Dump command “dumps” the contents of a file from a hard disk or floppy disk to an M&A console and/or
printer.
Command Keyword:

FILE_DUMP

Category Name:

Fault

PREREQUISITE COMMANDS
There are no prerequisites for this command.
OPERATIONS
Available operations:

DISPLAY

The function and required data fields for each operation are described in this section.

DISPLAY

DEV

FILENAME

ADDRESS

req

opt

This operation displays the contents of a file on the specified hard disk or floppy disk. Output is in both binary and
ASCII format.
PARAMETERS
Each field parameter is described in this section. Any variations for a particular operation are noted separately.
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:

DEV (Disk Drive)
Keyword
Predefined ASCII characters
Keywords:

HDA
HDB
FDA
FDB

-

Hard Disk Drive of Side A
Hard Disk Drive of Side B
Floppy Disk Drive of Side A
Floppy Disk Drive of Side B

The “DEV” field contains the logical name of a disk drive.

3-188

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
FILE DUMP (CMD 151)
PERCEPTION 4000
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:

COMMANDS

FILENAME
Text
Up to 12 ASCII characters
The “FILENAME” identifies the file to be displayed and/or printed. To display a directory of the
files on the specified “DEV”, use the Disk File Manipulation command (CMD 152).

FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:

ADDRESS
Hexadecimal
1 to 6 hexadecimal digits
0 to FFFFFF
This optional field specifies where to begin the display within the file (i.e., the starting address of
the specified file).

SYSTEM ERROR MESSAGES
C15100
C15101
C15102
C15103
C15104
C15105
C15106
C15107
C15108

-

Failed to send transaction to FMS
Failed to mount disk
Failed to unmount disk
Failed to open file
Failed to close file
Failed to read file
Invalid address
Device is out of service
Display of files from standby side is not supported

3-189

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
FORCED ACCOUNT CODE TOLL-FREE TABLES (CMD 352)
PERCEPTION 4000

COMMANDS

FORCED ACCOUNT CODE TOLL-FREE TABLES (CMD 352)
When the forced account code flag is set for a station user for toll calls only (as defined in the Station-Level
Parameter Assignment command, CMD 329), the system must screen the call against a toll-free definition. The
Forced Account Code Toll-free Tables provide this definition. Multiple tables may be defined for the system. Each
table defines office codes that are toll-free in a particular area code.
Command Keyword:

FAC_TF_TABLE

Category Name:

Dialing

PREREQUISITE COMMANDS
There are no prerequisites for this command.
OPERATIONS
Available operations:

ADD
DELETE
DISPLAY

The function and required data fields for each operation are described in this section.

ADD

AC

OC

OC

OC

OC

OC

req

OC

OC

OC

OC

OC

opt

This operation adds office codes to the tables. The "AC" field and first "OC" field are required for an ADD
operation. Scopes are permitted in all of the “OC” fields except the last one.

DELETE

AC

OC

req

OC

OC

OC

OC

OC

OC

OC

OC

OC

opt

This operation deletes office codes from the tables. The "AC" field and first "OC" field are required. To delete the
whole table, enter ALL in the first “OC” field or use scope fields. Scopes are permitted in all of the “OC” fields
except the last one.

3-190

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
FORCED ACCOUNT CODE TOLL-FREE TABLES (CMD 352)
PERCEPTION 4000

COMMANDS

DISPLAY

AC

OC

OC

OC

OC

OC

OC

OC

OC

OC

OC

opt

This operation displays all Forced Account Code Toll-Free table(s) that meet the conditions established for each
field. All of the fields are optional. The “AC” field is a loop field, and the “OC” fields accept range input.
PARAMETERS
Each field parameter is described in this section. Any variations for a particular operation are noted separately.
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:
LOOP:
RANGE:

AC (Area Code)
Decimal with fixed length
3 digits in the form N Y X (where N = 2 to 9, Y = 0 or 1, and X = 0 to 9)
200 to 919
Primary loop in a DISPLAY operation only
Not allowed
This field contains the area code for the table. Note that only one table per area code is allowed.

FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:
LOOP:
RANGE:
SCOPE:

OC (Office Code)
Decimal with fixed length / Keyword
3 digits in the form NXX (where N = 2 to 9, and X = 0 to 9) / Predefined ASCII characters
200 to 999
Not allowed
Allowed in a DISPLAY operation
Allowed for ADD and DELETE operations
Keyword:

ALL (Allowed in a DELETE operation only)

In ADD and DELETE operations, the first "OC" field is required while the remaining ones are
optional. Scopes are permitted in ADD and DELETE operations. To delete a group of office
codes, enter ALL in the first “OC” field or use a scope entry.
SYSTEM ERROR MESSAGES
The following error messages are unique to this command.
C35200
C35201
C35202
C35203
C35204
C35205

-

Scope field needs a high value
Scope field needs a low value
Scope fields need low and high values
Scope is not allowed in the last office code field
No more space to add more
Area code does not exist

3-191

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
FORCED ACCOUNT CODE TOLL-FREE TABLES (CMD 352)
PERCEPTION 4000
RELATED COMMAND
Station-Level Parameter Assignment (CMD 329)

3-192

COMMANDS

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
GROUP SPEED CALLING LIST ASSIGNMENT (CMD 351)
PERCEPTION 4000

COMMANDS

GROUP SPEED CALLING LIST ASSIGNMENT (CMD 351)
The PERCEPTION 4000 system allows each speed calling group a list of up to ten destination numbers which
may be accessed by all members belonging to that group. Each destination number may be up to 24 digits in
length. Internal numbers are allowed, but feature access codes are not.
Command Keyword:

GROUP_SC_LIST

Category Name:

Station

PREREQUISITE COMMANDS
There are no prerequisites for this command.
OPERATIONS
Available operations:

MODIFY
DISPLAY

The function and required data fields for each operation are described in this section.

MODIFY

GRP#

GSCC

DESTINATION NUMBER

req

This operation modifies a destination number in the group speed calling list. All of the fields are required. The
destination number can be deleted if a  is entered in that field. Loops are allowed in the “GRP#”
and “GSCC” fields.

DISPLAY

GRP#

GSCC

DESTINATION NUMBER

opt

This operation displays destination numbers of group speed calling lists. Loops are allowed in the “GRP#” and
“GSCC” fields. If no data is entered in any of these fields, all group speed calling lists in the system are displayed.

3-193

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
GROUP SPEED CALLING LIST ASSIGNMENT (CMD 351)
PERCEPTION 4000

COMMANDS

PARAMETERS
Each field parameter is described in this section. Any variations for a particular operation are noted separately.
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:
LOOP:

GRP# (Group Speed Calling Group Number)
Decimal
1 to 3 digits
1 to 255
Allowed in MODIFY and DISPLAY operations
This field selects the group number that is to be assigned a Group Speed Calling Code (GSCC).

FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:
LOOP:

GSCC (Group Speed Calling Code)
Decimal
1 digit
0 to 9
Allowed in MODIFY and DISPLAY operations
This field assigns a group speed calling code to the designated group. The code represents the
digits entered in the next field (DESTINATION NUMBER). Upon access to the Group Speed
Calling feature, the user enters this code (the "GSCC" code) and the system automatically
outpulses the "DESTINATION NUMBER" digits.

FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:
RANGE:

DESTINATION NUMBER
Dialing Digits plus * and #
1 to 24 digits (including * and #)
0 to 9, * and #
Not allowed
Destination numbers must include a trunk group access code or the Least Cost Routing access
code if an external number is required. Dial tone detection (**) and timed pauses (*n, where n = 1
to 9 seconds) are also allowed and, though composed of two characters, represent one digit of
the 24 allowable.

SYSTEM ERROR MESSAGES
C35100
C35101
C35102
C35103

-

Check input format
Destination number is not defined
Speed dialing feature activation number cannot be a destination number
Group speed call code does not exist

RELATED COMMAND
Group Speed Calling Membership Assignment (CMD 350)

3-194

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
GROUP SPEED CALLING MEMBERSHIP ASSIGNMENT (CMD 350)
PERCEPTION 4000

COMMANDS

GROUP SPEED CALLING MEMBERSHIP ASSIGNMENT (CMD 350)
The PERCEPTION 4000 system supports up to 255 Group Speed Calling groups which may have as many as 32
members per group. Members include voice stations and data stations only. Both voice and data terminal
directory numbers cannot be in the same group. The Group Speed Calling Membership Assignment command
assigns members to a group.
Command Keyword:

GROUP_SC_MEMBERS

Category Name:

Station

PREREQUISITE COMMAND
Station Assignment (CMD 330)
OPERATIONS
Available operations:

ADD
DELETE
DISPLAY

The function and required data fields for each operation are described in this section.

ADD

GRP#

INDEX

MEM DN

req

This operation adds a member’s directory number(s) to a Group Speed Calling group. Loops are allowed in the
“GRP#” and “INDEX” fields.

DELETE

GRP#

MEM DN

req

This operation deletes a member’s directory number(s) from a Group Speed Calling group. Ranges are not
allowed.

3-195

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
GROUP SPEED CALLING MEMBERSHIP ASSIGNMENT (CMD 350)
PERCEPTION 4000

COMMANDS

DISPLAY

GRP#

INDEX

MEM DN

opt

output
only

opt

This operation displays members and their directory numbers of Group Speed Calling group(s). Looping is
allowed in the “GRP#" field. Range input is permitted in the “MEM DN” field.
PARAMETERS
Each field parameter is described in this section. Any variations for a particular operation are noted separately.
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:
LOOP:

GRP# (Speed Calling Group Number)
Decimal
1 to 3 digits
1 to 255
Allowed in ADD, DELETE, and DISPLAY operations
This field selects the group number that is to be assigned a member directory number (MEM
DN).

FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:

INDEX (Speed Calling Group Member Index)
Decimal (Output only)
1 or 2 digits
1 to 32
The "INDEX" number is used as a counter in an ADD operation. Its value does not indicate an
actual position or set any priority for data entered in this command. This is an output only field in
a DISPLAY operation.

FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:
RANGE:

MEM DN (Member Prime/Data Directory Number)
DN Type
1 to 5 digits
0 to 99999
Allowed in a DISPLAY operation
The "MEM DN" must be a prime DN or data DN, and can only belong to one Group Speed
Calling group.

SYSTEM ERROR MESSAGES
The following error messages are unique to this command.
C35000 - Directory number not found
C35001 - Not a station directory number

3-196

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
GROUP SPEED CALLING MEMBERSHIP ASSIGNMENT (CMD 350)
PERCEPTION 4000
C35002
C35003
C35004
C35005
C35006

-

COMMANDS

Table is full
Directory number is already in another group
Check input format in field 3
Group number is already used by voice DN
Group number is already used by data DN

RELATED COMMANDS
Group Speed Calling List Assignment (CMD 351)
Trunk Group Assignment (CMD 310)

3-197

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
HIGH USAGE DATA DESTINATION ASSIGNMENT (CMD 368)
PERCEPTION 4000

COMMANDS

HIGH USAGE DATA DESTINATION ASSIGNMENT (CMD 368)
Up to 64 high usage data numbers which automatically select a modem for an outbound call are supported by the
system. The High Usage Data Destination Assignment command sets up a table and assigns a modem pool
number to each entry in the table. When a data call is made, the system looks at the digits dialed and searches
the table for a match. If one is found, the system proceeds with the data call using the assigned modem pool
group number.
Command Keyword:

HIGH_USAGE_DATA

Category Name:

Data

PREREQUISITE COMMAND
Modem Pool Assignment (CMD 347)
OPERATIONS
Available operations:

MODIFY
DISPLAY

The function and required data fields for each operation are described in this section.

MODIFY

INDEX

MODEM ID

DESTINATION NUMBER

req

opt

This operation modifies the High Usage Data Destination Table. The “INDEX” field requires data input.

DISPLAY

INDEX

MODEM ID

DESTINATION NUMBER

opt

This operation displays the High Usage Data Destination numbers that meet the conditions established for each
field. Looping is permitted in the “INDEX” field only.

3-198

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
HIGH USAGE DATA DESTINATION ASSIGNMENT (CMD 368)
PERCEPTION 4000

COMMANDS

PARAMETERS
Each field parameter is described in this section. Any variations for a particular operation are noted separately.
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:
LOOP:

INDEX
Decimal
1 or 2 digits
1 to 64
Allowed in a DISPLAY operation only
"INDEX" is an entry number in the High Usage Data Destination table, and is provided for the
administrator's convenience. This number corresponds to the number entered in the
"DESTINATION NUMBER" field. When modifying or displaying an entry in the table, this number
may be entered instead of the destination number.

FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:
LOOP:

MODEM ID (Modem Pool Number)
Decimal
1 or 2 digits
1 to 32
Not allowed
This field selects the modem pool number that is to be assigned to the destination number
entered in the next field. The "MODEM ID" is first defined with the Modem Pool Assignment
command (CMD 347). In a MODIFY operation, a  may be entered to delete the
current value.

FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:
LOOP:

DESTINATION NUMBER
DN Type
1 to 24 digits (including * and #)
0 to 9
Not allowed
This field defines the frequently dialed data destination number, such as a network access
number. The destination number should be in the NDP (North American Dialing Plan) format. In a
MODIFY operation, a  may be entered to delete the current value.

SYSTEM ERROR MESSAGES
The following error messages are unique to this command.
C36800 - The high usage data destination number is already defined
C36801 - The high usage data destination number is not defined
C36802 - Illegal high usage data destination number
RELATED COMMANDS
Name Dialing Assignment (CMD 367)
Numbering Plan Assignment (CMD 300)

3-199

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
I/O PORT ASSIGNMENT (CMD 415)
PERCEPTION 4000

COMMANDS

I/O PORT ASSIGNMENT (CMD 415)
The I/O Port Assignment command allows each I/O port to be defined as a standard TTY port or as an
applications processor port. Additionally, if the I/O port is configured as a TTY port, multiple applications can
interface with one physical circuit.
Command Keyword:

I/O_PORT_ASSIGN

Category Name:

System

PREREQUISITE COMMANDS
There are no prerequisites for this command.
OPERATIONS
Available operations:

ADD
DELETE
DISPLAY

The function and required data fields for each operation are described in this section.

ADD

IOP# TYPE APPL APPL APPL APPL APPL APPL APPL APPL APPL APPL APPL APPL

req

opt

This operation adds new applications to the specified I/O port.

DELETE

IOP# TYPE APPL APPL APPL APPL APPL APPL APPL APPL APPL APPL APPL APPL

req

This operation deletes applications from the specified I/O port.

3-200

opt

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
I/O PORT ASSIGNMENT (CMD 415)
PERCEPTION 4000

COMMANDS

DISPLAY

IOP# TYPE APPL APPL APPL APPL APPL APPL APPL APPL APPL APPL APPL APPL

opt

This operation displays the I/O port applications.
PARAMETERS
Each field parameter is described in this section. Any variations for a particular operation are noted separately.
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:

IOP# (I/O Port Number)
Decimal
1 digit
1 to 4
This field selects an I/O port on the MISC card. Data input is optional in a DISPLAY operation,
but required in ADD and DELETE operations.

FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:

TYPE (I/O Port Type)
Keyword
Predefined ASCII characters
Keywords:

TTY - Maintenance and Administration Console
AP - Application Processor

The I/O port is assigned as either a TTY or AP type port. System defaults define ports one
through three as TTY ports and port four as an AP port.
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:

APPL (Application Usage)
Keyword
Predefined ASCII characters
Keywords:

TTY type usage:
MA
SSR
EFR
TFR
SMDR

-

Maintenance Console
System Status Report
Error or Fault Report
Traffic Report
Station Message Detail Report

AP type usage:
ACD
VMS1
VMS2
VMS3

-

Automatic Call Distribution
Voice Message Status Type 1
Voice Message Status Type 2
Voice Message Status Type 3

3-201

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
I/O PORT ASSIGNMENT (CMD 415)
PERCEPTION 4000

COMMANDS
Both TTY and AP port types (not applicable in an ADD operation):
ALL

- DELETE/DISPLAY all of the applications assigned to the designated
port.

For TTY-type I/O ports, the application usage field may define various combinations of MA, SSR,
EFR, TFR or/and SMDR.
For AP-type I/O ports, the application usage field must be either ACD or VMS. Both of these
applications require a dedicated I/O port and may not share that port with other devices or
subsystems.
In a DISPLAY operation, this field is optional. While in ADD and DELETE operations, at least one
application must be specified.
SYSTEM ERROR MESSAGES
The following error messages are unique to this command.
C41500
C41501
C41502
C41503
C41504
C41505
C41506
C41507
C41508

-

Mismatch I/O port type
Mismatch port type and application
 is not allowed in ADD operation
Mismatch I/O port number and console application
Not allowed when deleting main console
Each port can have one and only one assigned AP application
Application already exists
There is no application assigned
SMDI is not supported; only VMS1 is available

RELATED COMMAND
I/O Port Configuration Assignment (CMD 414)

3-202

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
I/O PORT CONFIGURATION ASSIGNMENT (CMD 414)
PERCEPTION 4000

COMMANDS

I/O PORT CONFIGURATION ASSIGNMENT (CMD 414)
The I/O Port Configuration Assignment command defines the protocols, timers, and controls necessary for the I/O
port to communicate successfully with the outboard device.
Command Keyword:

I/O_PORT_CONFIG

Category Name:

System

PREREQUISITE COMMANDS
There are no prerequisites for this command.
OPERATIONS
Available operations:

MODIFY
DISPLAY

The function and required data fields for each operation are described in this section.

MODIFY

FCT

MCT

IOP#

TYPE

MC

MC CODE

LOT

DATA BIT

STOP

PRTY

SPEED

opt

This operation modifies the I/O port attributes of the MISC card. The "IOP#" field is required for all MODIFY
operations that change port dependent data. If port number 1 (IOP# = 1) is selected, the "DATA BIT", "STOP",
"PRTY", and "SPEED" fields are locked, and dip switches on the MISC card must be updated. The "IOP#" field is
not required when modifying only the "FCT" or the "MCT" field.
The “MC CODE” field contains the motor control codes (the ASCII code for turning the motor ON and OFF). This
field is meaningful only when “MC” is set to YES. Looping is permitted in the "IOP#" field only.

DISPLAY

FCT

MCT

IOP#

TYPE

MC

MC CODE

LOT

DATA BIT

STOP

PRTY

SPEED

opt

This operation displays all I/O port attributes of the MISC card that meet the conditions established for each field.
Looping is permitted in the “IOP#” field only.

3-203

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
I/O PORT CONFIGURATION ASSIGNMENT (CMD 414)
PERCEPTION 4000

COMMANDS

PARAMETERS
Each field parameter is described in this section. Any variations for a particular operation are noted separately.
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:
LOOP:
RANGE:
DEFAULT:

FCT (Flow Control Timer)
Decimal
1 to 3 digits
1 to 600
Not allowed
Not allowed
60 seconds (1 minute)
The flow control timer periodically checks the status of the TTY port to verify that it is functioning
correctly. The timer is based on seconds.

FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:
LOOP:
RANGE:
DEFAULT:

MCT (Motor Control Timer)
Decimal
1 to 4 digits
1 to 1800
Not allowed
Not allowed
600 seconds (10 minutes)
The motor control timer checks a device (usually a printer) to see if it has been idle for a specified
period of time. When the idle time goes beyond the option set in this field, a signal is sent to the
control program and the device is automatically turned OFF. The timer is based on seconds.

FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:
LOOP:
RANGE:

IOP# (I/O Port Number)
Decimal
1 digit
1 to 4
Allowed
Not allowed
This field defines the I/O port number on the MISC card, and is required in a MODIFY operation
for changing port dependent attributes. If port number 1 is selected, the "DATA BIT", "STOP",
"PRTY", and "SPEED" fields are locked, and dip switches on the MISC card must be updated.

FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:

TYPE (Flow Control Type)
Keyword
Predefined ASCII characters
Keywords:

RCFC - RTS/CTS control method based on the Request-to-Send and Clear-toSend signals at the hardware interface
DC13 - DC1/DC3 control method (i.e. XON/XOFF)
BOTH - Use both handshake methods listed above
NON - Use no flow control

This field specifies which flow control mechanism the system uses on the specified terminal port.

3-204

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
I/O PORT CONFIGURATION ASSIGNMENT (CMD 414)
PERCEPTION 4000
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:

COMMANDS

MC (Motor Control Setting)
Keyword
Predefined ASCII characters
Keywords:

YES - Motor Control feature enabled
NO - Motor Control feature disabled

This field enables or disables the motor control feature. If this field is set to YES, the following
field (MC CODE) is required. If set to NO, the following field is ignored.
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:
LOOP:
RANGE:
DEFAULT:

MC CODE (Motor Control Codes)
Hexadecimal
4 digits
0000 to 7F7F
Not allowed
Not allowed
0000
The motor ON/OFF codes are defined with this field. The first two digits represent the ASCII code
for the motor ON command, and the second two represent the ASCII code for the motor OFF.
This field is meaningful only when the preceding field (MC) is set to YES.

FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:
LOOP:
RANGE:
DEFAULT:

LOT (Logout Timer Value)
Decimal
1 to 4 digits
1 to 1800
Not allowed
Not allowed
600 seconds (10 minutes)
The logout timer tells the system how long inactivity may exist on the terminal before forcing a
logout. The timer is based on seconds.

FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:

DATA BIT (Number of Data Bits)
Keyword
Predefined ASCII characters
Keywords:

7BIT - Specifies 7 data bits
8BIT - Specifies 8 data bits

This field defines how many data bits are transmitted through the communications framing. If the
"IOP#" field is set to port number 1, the "DATA BIT" field becomes a locked field.
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:

STOP (Number of Stop Bits)
Keyword
Predefined ASCII characters
Keywords:

1BIT - Specifies 1 stop bit
2BIT - Specifies 2 stop bits

3-205

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
I/O PORT CONFIGURATION ASSIGNMENT (CMD 414)
PERCEPTION 4000

COMMANDS

This field defines the number of stop bits in the communications framing. If the "IOP#" field is set
to port number 1, the "STOP" field becomes a locked field.
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:

PRTY (Parity Setting)
Keyword
Predefined ASCII characters
Keywords:

ODD - Odd parity
EVEN - Even parity
NON - No parity checking (no parity bit)

The type of parity used by the I/O port is defined with this command. If 8BIT is selected in the
"DATA BIT" field, this field must be set to NON. If the "IOP#" field is set to port number 1, the
"PRTY" field becomes a locked field.
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:

SPEED (Baud Rate Selection)
Keyword
Predefined ASCII characters
Keywords:

300 - 300 bits per second (bps)
1200 - 1200 bps
9600 - 9600 bps
19200 - 19200 bps

Speed selection for the I/O port is defined with this command. If the "IOP#" field is set to port
number 1, the "SPEED" field becomes a locked field.
SYSTEM ERROR MESSAGES
The following error messages are unique to this command.
C41400
C41401
C41402
C41403

-

I/O port number is required
Motor Control Setting field is NO
Motor control code is out of range
Fields 8 to 11 for IOP# 1 cannot be modified; use dip switches on MISC card

COMMENTS
The flow control and motor control timers affect all of the ports. They are independent of the I/O port number. In a
MODIFY operation, changes to either timer do not require that the "IOP#" be specified.
All port dependent fields (TYPE ~ SPEED) require that the I/O port number be specified in the “IOP#” field.

3-206

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
INITIATE SWITCHOVER (CMD 102)
PERCEPTION 4000

COMMANDS

INITIATE SWITCHOVER (CMD 102)
The Initiate Switchover command provides the capability to manually swap sides (ACTIVE to STAND-BY) on a
redundant system.
Command Keyword:

SWITCHOVER

Category Name:

Maintenance

PREREQUISITE COMMANDS
There are no prerequisites for this command.
OPERATIONS
Available operations:

ENABLE

The function and required data fields for each operation are described in this section.

ENABLE

SWITCHOVER

req

This operation initiates the switch-over process and logs a message into the history file. If the printer option is
turned ON, the message outputs to the printer.

PARAMETERS
Each field parameter is described in this section. Any variations for a particular operation are noted separately.
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:

SWITCHOVER (Switch-over from Active to Stand-by Side)
Keyword
Predefined ASCII characters
Keywords:

YES - Activate switch-over process
NO - Abort request

The "SWITCH OVER" field allows you to activate the process, or to abort the request.

3-207

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
INITIATE SWITCHOVER (CMD 102)
PERCEPTION 4000

COMMANDS

SYSTEM ERROR MESSAGES
The following error messages are unique to this command.
C10200
C10201
C10202
C10203

-

Stand-by is out of service
Switch-over failed
Set timer error
Switch-over time out

COMMENTS
The switch-over process may be set to either automatic or manual operation.
Automatic Switch-over
A periodic switch-over operation is handled by the Time Activated Command Programming command (CMD 110).
With this command, the start time and the periodical report interval is set.
Manual Switch-over
The Initiate Switchover command activates a manual switch-over on a redundant system. The system's manual
override switch must be in the Auto Select position in order to perform the operation.
RELATED COMMAND
Time Activated Command Programming (CMD 110)

3-208

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
INTERCHANGEABLE OFFICE CODE TABLE (CMD 318)
PERCEPTION 4000

COMMANDS

INTERCHANGEABLE OFFICE CODE TABLE (CMD 318)
This command builds a table of interchangeable office codes. These codes resemble area codes in that they
follow the area code format (NYX), where:
N = 2 to 9
Y = 0 or 1
X = 0 to 9
Interchangeable office codes must not have an area code counterpart. For example, 917 may be an office code
that follows the format for area codes and yet is not an existing area code.
Office code information can be obtained from the serving central offices for all central office and foreign exchange
trunks. This information should be reviewed at least every six months to ensure codes entered into the table
remain unique, and to ensure no new area codes have come into existence which may nullify the uniqueness of
an interchangeable office code previously defined in the table.
Command Keyword:

IOC_TABLE

Category Name:

Station

PREREQUISITE COMMANDS
There are no prerequisites for this command.
OPERATIONS
Available operations:

ADD
DELETE
DISPLAY

The function and required data fields for each operation are described in this section.

ADD

IOC

req

IOC

IOC

IOC

IOC

IOC

IOC

IOC

IOC

IOC

IOC

IOC

opt

This operation adds Interchangeable Office Codes (IOCs) to the table. The first "IOC" field is required for an ADD
operation. Scopes are permitted in all of the fields.

3-209

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
INTERCHANGEABLE OFFICE CODE TABLE (CMD 318)
PERCEPTION 4000

COMMANDS

DELETE

IOC

IOC

IOC

IOC

IOC

IOC

req

IOC

IOC

IOC

IOC

IOC

IOC

opt

This operation deletes Interchangeable Office Codes from the table. The first "IOC" field is required for a DELETE
operation. Scopes are permitted in all of the fields.
DISPLAY

IOC

IOC

IOC

IOC

IOC

IOC

IOC

IOC

IOC

IOC

IOC

IOC

opt

This operation displays the Interchangeable Office Codes in the table. All of the fields are optional. If a tab is
entered in the first field, all of the interchangeable office codes are displayed. Ranges are permitted for this
operation. If consecutive office codes exist, scope fields are output. For example, “213-218”.
PARAMETERS
Each field parameter is described in this section. Any variations for a particular operation are noted separately.
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:
LOOP:
RANGE:

IOC (Interchangeable Office Code)
Decimal with fixed length
3 digits in the form N Y X (where N = 2 to 9, Y = 0 or 1, and X = 0 to 9)
200 to 919
Not allowed
Allowed in a DISPLAY operation
In ADD and DELETE operations, the first "IOC" field is required, while the remaining fields are
optional. Values are from 200 to 919: the first digit is from 2 to 9, the second must be a 1 or 0,
and the last digit can be 0 to 9. Scopes are permitted in ADD and DELETE operations.

SYSTEM ERROR MESSAGES
The following error messages are unique to this command.
C31800
C31801
C31802
C31803
C31804
C31805

3-210

-

IOC table has no space
IOC not found
IOC is already assigned
Check format
Missing data in scope type field in field N
Dash in last scope field N

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
INTERCHANGEABLE OFFICE CODE TABLE (CMD 318)
PERCEPTION 4000

COMMANDS

RELATED COMMAND
Dialing Definition (CMD 317)

3-211

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
INTERCOM GROUP MEMBER DISPLAY (CMD 333)
PERCEPTION 4000

COMMANDS

INTERCOM GROUP MEMBER DISPLAY (CMD 333)
The Intercom Group Member Display command displays intercom group membership(s). Intercom groups are
designed to provide PERCEPTION 4000 digital telephone users with an abbreviated method of calling people
within a department or designated group.
Command Keyword:

INTERCOM_DISPLAY

Category Name:

Station

PREREQUISITE COMMANDS
Station Feature Key Assignment (CMD 331)

OPERATIONS
Available operations:

DISPLAY

The function and required data fields for each operation are described in this section.

DISPLAY

GRP#

ICM #

PRM DN

opt

This operation displays all intercom groups and their members that meet the conditions established for each field.
If a  and  are input, then all intercom groups and their members are displayed. To halt the
display, press , or to abort it, press  (). If only the intercom group number is
input, than all members of the group are displayed. Loops are permitted in the group number (GRP#) and
intercom member number (ICM #) fields. A range is allowed only in the prime directory number (PRM DN) field.

PARAMETERS
Each field parameter is described in this section. Any variations for a particular operation are noted separately.
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:
LOOP:

GRP# (Intercom Group #)
Decimal
1 to 3 digits
1 to 256
Allowed
The system is restricted to having at most 128 groups with 20 members per group, or 256
intercom groups with 10 members per group. The number of groups and their size can be mixed
or matched in any way as long as the restriction mentioned is not violated.

3-212

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
INTERCOM GROUP MEMBER DISPLAY (CMD 333)
PERCEPTION 4000
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:
LOOP:

COMMANDS

ICM # (Intercom Group’s Member #)
Decimal
2 digits for 20 members, 1 digit for 10 members
01 to 20, or 0 to 9
Allowed
This number is used to address a station belonging to an intercom group. The intercom group’s
size is defined individually. That is, an intercom group can either have 10 members or 20
members depending on the particular needs of the group.

FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:
RANGES:
LOOP:

PRM DN (Member’s Prime Directory Number)
DN Type
1 to 5 digits
0 to 99999
Allowed in a DISPLAY operation only
Not allowed
This parameter identifies the members of a multiline telephone intercom group. Only prime
directory numbers are accepted as members of an intercom group.

SYSTEM ERROR MESSAGES
The following error messages are unique to this command.
C33301 - Invalid DN-LDN relationship
C33302 - Check input in field 2

COMMENTS
The PERCEPTION 4000 system can have a maximum of either 128 intercom groups with 20 members per group,
or 256 intercom groups with ten members per group. Groups can be mixed and matched, as long as the system
maximum of 2,560 members is not exceeded.
Only prime lines can be specified as intercom group members.
A station can be a member of more than one intercom group.

RELATED COMMAND
Station Feature Key Assignment (CMD 331)

3-213

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
INTERNAL CALL ALTERNATE ROUTING ASSIGNMENT (CMD 374)
PERCEPTION 4000

COMMANDS

INTERNAL CALL ALTERNATE ROUTING ASSIGNMENT (CMD 374)
The Internal Call Alternate Routing command assigns, changes, and displays the alternate answering point for
internal callers to attendants and/or attendant groups that are in the position busy mode. An alternate answering
position may be assigned for each of four time zones.
Command Keyword:

INT_CALL_ALT_ROUTING

Category Name:

Attendant

PREREQUISITE COMMANDS
Attendant Group Assignment (CMD 372)
Attendant Position Assignment (CMD 370)
At least one of the following commands is required before entering a value in an "AR TZ n" field:
ACD Group Assignment (CMD 355)
Announcement Pattern Assignment (CMD 353)
Miscellaneous Device Assignment (CMD 400)
Night Bell Assignment (CMD 405)
Station Assignment (CMD 330)
Station Hunting Assignment (CMD 342)
UCD Group Assignment (CMD 354)
OPERATIONS
Available operations:

MODIFY
DISPLAY

The function and required data fields for each operation are described in this section.

MODIFY

ATT DN/GRP DN

req

AR TZ 1

AR TZ 2

AR TZ 3

AR TZ 4

opt

This operation modifies the alternate route of each time zone for the specified attendant or attendant group when
it is busy. The attendant DN or attendant group DN is used as the key to perform the modifications and must be
entered. If no data is entered in any of the time zone fields (AR TZ n), no modification is performed.

3-214

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
INTERNAL CALL ALTERNATE ROUTING ASSIGNMENT (CMD 374)
PERCEPTION 4000

COMMANDS

DISPLAY

ATT DN/GRP DN

AR TZ 1

req

AR TZ 2

AR TZ 3

AR TZ 4

opt

This operation displays the alternate route of each time zone for the specified attendant or attendant group when
it is busy. The attendant DN or attendant group DN is used as the key to perform the modifications and must be
entered. All other fields are optional.
PARAMETERS
Each field parameter is described in this section. Any variations for a particular operation are noted separately.
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:
RANGE:
LOOP:

ATT DN/GRP DN (Attendant or Attendant Group Directory Number)
DN Type
1 to 5 digits
0 to 99999
Not allowed
Not allowed
The attendant or attendant group directory number is assigned through the Attendant Group
Assignment command (CMD 372). This is a required field in both DISPLAY and MODIFY
operations.

FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:
RANGE:
LOOP:

AR TZ n (Alternate Route for Time Zone 1, 2, 3, or 4)
DN Type or Keyword
1 to 5 digits for DN Type / Predefined ASCII characters for Keywords
0 to 99999
Station directory number, Hunt group pilot number,
UCD group pilot number, or ACD group pilot number
Not allowed
Not allowed
Keywords:

AP01 - AP50
BL01 - BL64
NON

Announcement Pattern Number (1 ~ 50)
Night Bell Device Number (1 ~ 64)
No Alternate Route Defined

This field defines an alternate answering position for internal calls according to the designated
time zone.

3-215

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
INTERNAL CALL ALTERNATE ROUTING ASSIGNMENT (CMD 374)
PERCEPTION 4000
SYSTEM ERROR MESSAGES
The following error messages are unique to this command.
C37400
C37401
C37402
C37403
I37404

3-216

-

Directory number does not exist
Invalid alternate directory number
Invalid announcement device
Invalid night bell device
Warning: Undefined data in field AR TZ #n

COMMANDS

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
ISDN CHANNEL GROUP ASSIGNMENT (CMD 423)
PERCEPTION 4000

COMMANDS

ISDN CHANNEL GROUP ASSIGNMENT (CMD 423)
The ISDN Channel Group Assignment command is used to add, delete, display, or modify one or more channel
groups, as well as to adjust each channel group's related time zone class, equipment number, and channel
structure.
Command Keyword:

CGN_ASSIGN

Category Name:

ISDN

PREREQUISITE COMMANDS
ISDN IPRC and IPRI Card Assignment (CMD 422)
Time Zone Assignment (CMD 336)

OPERATIONS
Available operations:
ADD
DELETE
MODIFY
DISPLAY
The function and required data fields for each operation are described as follows:

ADD

CGN

TZ CLS

req

opt

EQUIP #

B STR

req

This operation is used to add one or more channel groups and their related data. Each channel group must have
an assigned time zone class ("TZ CLS"). If no data is entered for "TZ CLS," then the "TZ CLS" entry defaults to 1.
Looping is permitted in the "EQUIP #" field.

DELETE

CGN

EQUIP #
req

ThIs operation is used to delete one or more existing channel groups. Looping is permitted in the 'EQUIP #" field.

3-217

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
ISDN CHANNEL GROUP ASSIGNMENT (CMD 423)
PERCEPTION 4000

COMMANDS

MODIFY

CGN

TZ CLS

EQUIP #

B STR

req

opt

req

opt

H0 STR

H11 STR

locked

This operation is used to modify the equipment position and channel structure of a channel group. If data is
entered in the "B STR" field, then "EQUIP #" data must be entered.

DISPLAY

CGN

TZ CLS

EQUIP #

B STR

H0 STR

opt

H11 STR

locked

ThIs operation is used to display one or more existing channel groups. Looping is permited in the "CGN" and
"EQUIP #" fields.

PARAMETERS
This section defines input permitted for each field. Any variations for a particular operation are noted separately.
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:
RANGE:
LOOP:

CGN (Channel Group Number)
Decimal
1 to 2 digits
1 to 32 (or maximum system trunk configuration)
Allowed in DISPLAY operation only
Not allowed
The "CGN" entry is required in the ADD, DELETE, and MODIFY operations. In the DISPLAY
operation, this is an optional field. If no entry is made, then the attributes of all assigned channel
groups in the PERCEPTION 4000 system will be displayed.
More than one CGN can be assigned to an IPRC card. For example, CGN 1 can have channels
from 20801 to 20810 on IPRI card 208, and CGN 2 can have channels 20811 to 20823.
The same CGN cannot be assigned to channels controlled by two different IPRC cards. For
example, if CGN 1 has channels on IPRI card 208, then the channels on IPRI card 408 cannot be
assigned to CGN 1. For the same reason, a CGN cannot be assigned to channels that are
controlled by two different LCPUs.

FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:

3-218

TZ CLS (Time Zone Class)
Keyword
Predefined ASCII characters

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
ISDN CHANNEL GROUP ASSIGNMENT (CMD 423)
PERCEPTION 4000
Keyword:

COMMANDS
IS01
IS02
IS03
IS04

-

ISDN time zone class 1
ISDN time zone class 2
ISDN time zone class 3
ISDN time zone class 4

The "TZ CLS" entry is used to assign a channel group to a time zone class. Each class is a type
of allocation plan, in which up to four different time zones can be assigned. (Time zones are
assigned to classes in CMD 336). The "TZ CLS" entry applies to the entire channel group;
therefore, if the channel group is used for more than one type of ISDN service, the specified time
zone class will apply to all services in that channel group.
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
RANGE:
LOOP:

EQUIP # (Equipment Number)
Decimal
10101 to 101424
Not allowed
Allowed in ADD, DELETE, and DISPLAY operations
The entered equipment number applies to the equipment number of the channel group's
associated trunk group. The first one or two digits of the entry represent the number of the shelf
containing the trunk circuit card. The second two digits represent the card number; and the last
two digits represent the circuit number.

FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
RANGE:
LOOP:

B STR (B Channel Structure)
Keyword
Preassigned ASCII characters
Not allowed
Not Allowed
Keyword:

YES
NO

-

The channel can be used for calls requiring a B channel
The channel cannot be used for calls requiring a B channel

This field should be entered "YES" to enable calls requiring a B channel. The "NO" option is for
future use.
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:

H0 STR (H0 Channel Structure)
Keyword
Preassigned ASCII characters
Keyword:

YES
NO

-

The channel can be used for calls requiring an H0 channel
The channel cannot be used for calls requiring an H0 channel

This field is locked in all operations and is reserved for future use.
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:

H11 STR (H11 Channel Structure)
Keyword
Preassigned ASCII characters
Keyword:

YES
NO

-

The channel can be used for calls requiring an H11 channel
The channel cannot be used for calls requiring an H11 channel

This field is locked in all operations and is reserved for future use.

3-219

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
ISDN CHANNEL GROUP ASSIGNMENT (CMD 423)
PERCEPTION 4000

SYSTEM MESSAGES
The following error messages are unique to this command.
C42300
C42301
C42302
C42303
C42304
C42305
C42306
C42307
C42308
C42309
C42310
D42311
D42312
D42313
D42314
D42315
D42316
D42317
D42318
D42319
D42320
D42321

3-220

-

Card or equipment number is already assigned to other devices
Invalid equipment number
Equipment number has already been assigned
Circuit number must be 1 for H11 and 1,7, 13, or 19 for H0
Total number of MIN AVCs exceed total channels for given CGN
Not allowed to delete; H0 or H11 must be set to NO
Invalid input; data does not match
Trunk group number has already been assigned
Channel group number is out of range
Data has already been assigned in database
Data is not assigned in database
B-channel is out of range
Channel group number is not registered
LDN is not available
LDN is not registered for this channel group number
LDN pool cannot support request
LDN status is busy
Channel group number is in use
Channel group number is not used
ISDN time zone class is undefined
Channel group number change table database is full
LCPU number is out of range

COMMANDS

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
ISDN CHANNEL GROUP HUNTING ASSIGNMENT (CMD 424)
PERCEPTION 4000

COMMANDS

ISDN CHANNEL GROUP HUNTING ASSIGNMENT (CMD 424)
The ISDN Channel Group Hunting Assignment command is used to modify or display the channel group hunting
sequence between two IPRI cards. The selection of which IPRI card is searched first determines which channel
groups will be searched first for an available channel. This command is also used to modify the hunting direction
between channel groups/channels (from channel 1 to channel 24, or from channel 24 to channel 1).
Command Keyword:

CGN_HUNTING

Category Name:

ISDN

PREREQUISITE COMMANDS
ISDN IPRC and IPRI Card Assignment (CMD 422)
OPERATIONS
Available operations:
MODIFY
DISPLAY
The function and required data fields for each operation are described as follows:
MODIFY

CGN

SEQ#

IPRI

DIR

opt

req

This operation is used to modify the hunting sequence between two IPRI cards, thereby affecting available
channel group selection. If data is not entered in the "SEQ#" field, then data must be entered in the "IPRI" and
"DIR" fields. Range and loop procedures are not permitted in the MODIFY operation.

DISPLAY

CGN

SEQ#

IPRI

DIR

opt

This operation is used to display the hunting sequence of two IPRI cards, and therefore their assigned trunk
groups/channel groups. Ranges are permitted in the "CGN" and "SEQ#" fields.

3-221

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
ISDN CHANNEL GROUP HUNTING ASSIGNMENT (CMD 424)
PERCEPTION 4000

COMMANDS

PARAMETERS
This section defines input permitted for each field. Any variations for a particular operation are
noted separately.
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:
RANGE:
LOOP:

CGN (Channel Group Number)
Decimal
1 to 2 digits
1 to 32 (or maximum system trunk configuration)
Not allowed
Allowed in DISPLAY operation only
The "CGN" entry is required in the MODIFY operation. In the DISPLAY operation, this is an
optional field; if no entry is made, then the attributes of all assigned channel groups in the
PERCEPTION 4000 system will be displayed.

FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:
RANGE:
LOOP:

SEQ# (Sequence Number)
Decimal
1 digit
1 or 2
Not allowed
Not allowed
The "SEQ#" field is used to assign a sequence number to the channel group. The specification of
1 or 2 actually refers to the IPRI card associated with the channel group. For example, if the
channel group specified in the "CGN" field is assigned to a trunk group supported by IPRI card
"1," then an entry of 1 in the "SEQ#" field indicates that this trunk group/CGN will have hunting
priority over those trunk groups/CGNs supported by IPRI card "2." The default "SEQ#" value is
the reverse of IPRI card installation order. For example, if IPRI card "1" was installed before IPRI
card "2," then IPRI card "2" will have a "SEQ#" of 1.

FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:
RANGE:
LOOP:

IPRI (Related IPRI Card Position)
Decimal
3 to 4 digits
101 to 1012
Allowed in DISPLAY operation only
Not allowed
The "IPRI" field entry indicates the equipment number of the IPRI card associated with the
channel group. The first one or two digits represent the number of the shelf in which the IPRI card
is installed. The last two digits represent the card slot number.

FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:

DIR (Hunting Direction)
Keyword
Preassigned ASCII characters
Keyword:

FRWD BACK -

Forward (from channel 1 to channel 24)
Backward (from channel 24 to channel 1)

This field indicates the direction used for hunting among the channel groups/channels supported
by an IPRI card. The default value is Backward. Note that each IPRI card supports up to 24
channels; however a channel on one of the IPRI cards must be used as a D-channel rather than
as a bearer channel. This single D-channel can support the 47 bearer channels on the two IPRI
cards.

3-222

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
ISDN CHANNEL GROUP HUNTING ASSIGNMENT (CMD 424)
PERCEPTION 4000

COMMANDS

SYSTEM MESSAGES
The following error messages are unique to this command.
C42400
C42401
C42402
C42403
C42404
C42405

-

Channel group number does not exist
Sequence number does not exist
Invalid hunting direction
Invalid IPRI number
Sequence number is required
Check sequence number

3-223

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
ISDN IPRC AND IPRI CARD ASSIGNMENT (CMD 422)
PERCEPTION 4000

COMMANDS

ISDN IPRC AND IPRI CARD ASSIGNMENT (CMD 422)
The ISDN IPRC and IPRI Card Assignment command is used to assign the ISDN Primary Rate Controller (IPRC)
and ISDN Primary Rate Interface (IPRI) circuit cards. The IPRI card is responsible for the layer 1 ISDN/PRI
software and hardware interface, while the IPRC card is responsible for layers 2 and 3. In addition to general card
assignment or removal, this command is also used to add, delete, modify, or display the following: IPRC protocol
type; layer 2 mode; HDLC inversion flag; D-channel card position; IPRI interface identifier; IPRI D4/ESF framing
and line code scheme.
Command Keyword:

IPRC_IPRI_ASSIGN

Category Name:

ISDN

PREREQUISITE COMMANDS
There are no prerequisites for this command.

OPERATIONS
Available operations:
ADD
DELETE
MODIFY
DISPLAY

The function and required data fields for each operation are described as follows:
ADD

CARD#

PROTOCOL

req

opt

L2MODE

HDLC

locked

T303

opt

IPRI

INF ID

req

D CH

opt

This operation is used to add an IPRC card and assign it to one or two IPRI cards, and to assign each card's
associated data. Required fields are the "CARD", "IPRI", and "INF ID" fields. The "PROTOCOL", "T303", and "D
CH" fields are all optional when adding a second IPRI card for use with the assigned IPRC card. Both "L2MODE"
and "HDLC" are locked fields.

3-224

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
ISDN IPRC AND IPRI CARD ASSIGNMENT (CMD 422)
PERCEPTION 4000

COMMANDS

DELETE

CARD#

IPRI

req

opt

ThIs operation is used to delete an IPRC card. Before deleting the IPRC card, the related IPRI card(s) must be
deleted from the system.

MODIFY

CARD#

PROTOCOL

req

opt

L2MODE

HDLC

T303

IPRI

opt

locked

INF ID

D CH

req

locked

This operation is used to change any of the following: IPRC protocol; the ISDN Layer 3 timer; IPRI card position;
and the interface identifier. To change the data in the "INF ID" (IPRI Interface ID) field, the IPRI number must be
specified. Locked fields in the MODIFY operation are Layer 2 mode, the HDLC inversion flag, and the D-channel
card position.

DISPLAY

CARD#

PROTOCOL

opt

L2MODE

HDLC

T303

locked

IPRI

INF ID

opt

D CH

FRAME

CODE

locked

This operation is used to display IPRC protocol, layer 2 mode, HDLC inversion flag, D-channel and IPRI card
position, and related IPRI card data. Ranges are permitted in the "IPRI," "INF ID," and D CH" fields.

PARAMETERS
This section defines input permitted for each field. Any variations for a particular operation are noted separately.
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:
RANGE:
LOOP:

CARD# (IPRC Card Number)
Decimal
3 to 4 digits
101 to 1014
Not allowed
Allowed in DISPLAY operation only
The entered value indicates the equipment number of the IPRC card. The first one or two digits
represent the number of the shelf containing the card (1 to 10) and the last one or two digits
represent the number of the utilized card slot (01 to 14).

3-225

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
ISDN IPRC AND IPRI CARD ASSIGNMENT (CMD 422)
PERCEPTION 4000
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:

COMMANDS

PROTOCOL (Protocol Type)
Keyword
Preassigned ASCII characters
Keyword:

4ESS 5ESS TPVT -

AT&T User Protocol
AT&T User Protocol
Toshiba Private Protocol (future use)

This field indicates the protocol that is used by the ISDN Primary Rate Controller (IPRC) card.
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:

L2MODE (Layer 2 Mode)
KEYWORD
Predefined ASCII characters
Keyword:

NEW USER -

Network Mode
User Mode

This field remains locked in all operations. The field indicates the mode that is used for the ISDN
Layer 2. Layer 2 is supported by the IPRC card.
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:

HDLC (HDLC Inversion Flag))
Keyword
Predefined ASCII characters
Keyword:

NO
YES

-

Without HDLC inversion (Default)
With HDLC inversion

This field is locked as NO in all operations. This coincides with the locked "CODE" field entry of
B8ZS.
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:
RANGE:
LOOP:

T303 (Layer 3 Timer)
Decimal
1 to 3 decimal digits
2 to 255
Allowed in DISPLAY operation only
Not allowed
This field specifies the timer that is used for ISDN Layer 3. The default value is 4 seconds. The
ISDN Layer 3 is supported by the IPRC card.

FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:
RANGE:
LOOP:

IPRI (Related IPRI Card Position)
Decimal
3 to 4 digits
101 to 1012
Allowed in DISPLAY operation only
Not allowed
This field indicates the equipment number of each IPRI card that is associated with the IPRC
card. Up to two IPRI cards can be related to a single IPRC card. The value entry represents the
number of the shelf (1 to 10) and the card slot (02, 04, 06, 08, 10, or 12) where the IPRI card is
installed.

3-226

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
ISDN IPRC AND IPRI CARD ASSIGNMENT (CMD 422)
PERCEPTION 4000
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:
RANGE:
LOOP:

COMMANDS

INF ID (Interface Identifier)
Decimal
1 digit
0 or 1
Allowed in DISPLAY operation only
Not allowed
The entered interface ID must be unique for each IPRC. If a D-channel IPRI card is used, the
interface ID must be set at 0.

FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:

D CH (D-Channel Card Position)
Keyword
Predefined ASCII characters
Keyword:

YES
NO

-

IPRI card has D-channel
IPRI card does not have D-channel

This field is locked in the MODIFY operation. The default value is NO. However, when the IPRC
card and the first IPRI card are assigned, YES must be entered, indicating that the D-channel
exists on the IPRI. If a second IPRI card is assigned to the IPRC, then a NO entry is allowed. At
least one of the IPRI cards assigned to the IPRC card must contain the D-channel.
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:

FRAME (IPRI Card Framing)
Keyword
Predefined ASCII characters
Keyword:

D4
ESF

-

Default

This field appears only in the DISPLAY operation and is a locked field.
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
RANGE:
LOOP:

CODE (Line Code Scheme)
Keyword
Predefined ASCII characters
Not allowed
Not allowed
Keyword:

B8ZS
ZCS

-

Default

This field appears only in the DISPLAY operation and is a locked field.

3-227

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
ISDN IPRC AND IPRI CARD ASSIGNMENT (CMD 422)
PERCEPTION 4000
SYSTEM MESSAGES
The following error messages are unique to this command.
C42200
C42201
C42202
C42203
C42204
C42205
C42206
C42207
C42208
C42209
C42210
C42211
C42212
C42213
C42214
C42215
C42216
C42217
C42218
C42219
C42220
C42221
C42222
C42223
C42224
C42225
C42226
C42227
C42228

3-228

-

IPRC card does not exist
Interface identifier must be unique for each IPRI card
IPRI card has already been assigned
Invalid entry; IPRC and IPRI cards have different IFG
Invalid entry; IPRC and IPRI cards are on different LCPUs
Number of IPRI cards for a given CARD# has reached maximum
Cannot delete D-channel IPRI; must delete non D-channel IPRI(s) first
Cannot delete IPRC card; must delete assigned IPRI(s) first
IPRC card and D-channel do not exist
IPRC and IPRI cards do not exist
Invalid IPRC card number in field 1
Invalid IPRI card number; IPRI port must be an even number, 02 to 12
Cannot have the same IPRC and IPRI card numbers
D-channel structure still exists
Number of IPRC cards has reached the system maximum
Clock provider has reached maximum
Providable IPRI card cannot be deleted
D-channel has already been assigned for a specific CARD#
Equipment number in CARD# field is not an IPRC card
Equipment number in IPRI field is not an IPRI card
Check input in field T303; mismatch with original value
Interface identifier is required
Check input in field PROTOCOL; mismatch with original value
IPRC protocol is required
Must assign D CH field for the first IPRI card
Check input in D CH field; mismatch with original value
IPRI card number is required
Must enter data in order to modify
D-channel IPRI card must have interface identifier equal to 0

COMMANDS

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
ISDN SERVICE MIN/MAX ASSIGNMENT (CMD 425)
PERCEPTION 4000

COMMANDS

ISDN SERVICE MIN/MAX ASSIGNMENT (CMD 425)
The ISDN Service Min/Max Assignment command is used to modify or display an ISDN trunk group's bearer
capability class (BCC), as well as to modify/display the minimum and maximum limits that are used for both Callby-Call Service Selection and dedicated ISDN service.
With Call-by-Call Service Selection (that is, with non-dedicated ISDN service), the assigned minimum and
maximum limits indicate how many channels in a channel group can be used for a specific ISDN service. Since a
channel group can contain more than one trunk group (and thus can be used for more than one ISDN service),
the setting of minimum and maximum limits provides control over channel usage. For example, within a single
channel group, one trunk may be assigned to Software Defined Network while another is assigned to MEGACOM
service. The careful assignment of upper and lower usage levels (MIN/MAX limits) enables automatic channel
selection to be in line with actual usage of ISDN services. A higher usage of one service over another would
require higher MIN/MAX levels.
With dedicated ISDN service, all channels within a dedicated service channel group are assigned to the same
ISDN service. In this case, minimum and maximum limits can be set to limit user access to channels during
certain time periods. For example, a maximum level of channel groups can be set at zero to prevent any channels
from being accessed.
Command Keyword:

SERVICE_MIN/MAX

Category Name:

ISDN

PREREQUISITE COMMANDS
ISDN Channel Group Assignment (CMD 424)
Time Zone Assignment (CMD 336)
Trunk Group Assignment (CMD 310)

OPERATIONS
Available operations:
MODIFY
DISPLAY
The function and required data fields for each operation are described as follows:

3-229

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
ISDN SERVICE MIN/MAX ASSIGNMENT (CMD 425)
PERCEPTION 4000

COMMANDS

MODIFY

TGN

TIME ZONE #

MIN SVC

req

MAX SVC

VOC

31K

64U

64R

opt

H0U

H0R

H11U

H11R

locked

This operation is used to modify the trunk group's ISDN bearer capability class, as well as the minimum and
maximum limits for channel allocation. Range and loop operations are not permitted.

DISPLAY

TGN

TIME ZONE #

MIN SVC

MAX SVC

VOC

31K

opt

64U

64R

H0U

H0R

H11U

H11R

locked

This operation is used to display the bearer capability class and the minimum/maximum limits for one or more
ISDN trunk groups. Range and loop entries are permitted.

PARAMETERS
This section defines input permitted for each field. Any variations for a particular operation are noted separately.
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:
RANGE:
LOOP:

TGN (Trunk Group Number)
Decimal
1 to 3 digits
1 to 256 (or maximum system trunk configuration)
Allowed in DISPLAY operation only
Allowed in DISPLAY operation only
The "TGN" entry is required in the MODIFY operation. In the DISPLAY operation, this is an
optional field; if no entry is made, then the attributes of all assigned ISDN trunk groups in the
PERCEPTION 4000 system will be displayed.

FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:
RANGE:
LOOP:

TIME ZONE # (ISDN Time Zone Class Number)
Decimal
1digit
1 to 4 (or maximum system configuration)
Allowed in DISPLAY operation only
Not allowed
The "TIME ZONE #" is used to specify the time period in which the assigned minimum/maximum
limits will apply. The actual day/hour time periods are defined in the Time Zone Assignment
command (CMD 336). Time periods are assigned to ISDN time zone classes in the ISDN
Channel Group Assignment command (CMD 424).

3-230

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
ISDN SERVICE MIN/MAX ASSIGNMENT (CMD 425)
PERCEPTION 4000
1
2
3
4
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:
RANGE:
LOOP:

=
=
=
=

COMMANDS
IS01
IS02
IS03
IS04

(ISDN time zone class 1)
(ISDN time zone class 2)
(ISDN time zone class 3)
(ISDN time zone class 4)

MIN SVC (Minimum Number of Channels Reserved)
Decimal
1 to 3 digits
0 to 47
Allowed in DISPLAY operation only
Not allowed
The "MIN SVC" field entry indicates the number of channels within the trunk group's associated
channel group, which will always be available for the trunk group's assigned ISDN service. As a
general rule, the most commonly used services should have the higher minimum limit values.
Note that the assigned minimum limit cannot exceed the total number of channels in the ISDN
trunk group's associated channel group. Therefore, the deletion of a channel, as performed via
the ISDN Channel Group Assignment command (CMD 424), should be reflected in the assigned
"MIN SVC" value.

FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:
RANGE:
LOOP:

MAX SVC (Maximum Number of Channels Allowed)
Decimal
1 to 3 digits or Keyword
0 TO 47
Allowed in DISPLAY operation only
Not allowed
Keyword:

MAXV -

The maximum limit is equal to the total number of channels in
the channel group

The "MAX SVC" field entry indicates the maximum number of channels within the trunk group's
associated channel group, which can ever be used for the trunk group's assigned ISDN service.
The entry of the keyword MAXV sets the maximum limit equal to the total number of channels
available in the channel group. With the keyword entry, the PERCEPTION 4000 automatically
adjusts the actual maximum value to correspond with any channel additions or deletions to/from
the channel group. Channels are added or deleted to/from a channel group via the ISDN Channel
Group Assignment command (CMD 424).
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:

VOC (Bearer Capability—Voice or Voice-grade Data)
Keyword
Preassigned ASCII characters

Keyword:

YES
NO

-

Bearer capability supports speech of 3.1 Khz
Bearer capability does not support speech of 3.1 Khz

The "VOC" field specifies whether speech of 3.1 Khz can be transmitted over the ISDN trunk
group's associated channels. If the trunk group is to be used for voice transmission, then the field
entry should be YES. If the trunk group is to be used for data transmission only, the entry should
be NO.

3-231

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
ISDN SERVICE MIN/MAX ASSIGNMENT (CMD 425)
PERCEPTION 4000

COMMANDS

FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:

31K (3.1 KHz Audio)
Keyword
Preassigned ASCII characters

Keyword:

YES
NO

-

Bearer capability provides audio of 3.1 Khz
Bearer capability does not provide audio of 3.1 Khz

The "31K" field specifies whether audio of 3.1 Khz is to be provided over the ISDN trunk group's
associated channels. If the trunk group is to be used for data transmission, then the field entry
should be YES, to enable the transmission of modem data tones. If the trunk group is to be used
for voice transmission only, the entry should be NO.
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:

64U (64K Unrestricted Digital)
Keyword
Preassigned ASCII characters

Keyword:

YES
NO

-

Bearer capability supports modem-less data traffic
Bearer capability does not support modem-less data traffic

The "64U" field specifies whether or not modem-less data traffic is to be supported over the ISDN
trunk group. This is a locked field and is reserved for future use.
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:

64R (64K Restricted Digital)
Keyword
Preassigned ASCII characters

Keyword:

YES
NO

-

Bearer capability supports modem-less data traffic
Bearer capability does not support modem-less data traffic

The "64R" field is a locked field and is reserved for future use. The "64R" field specifies whether
or not modem-less data traffic is to be supported over the ISDN trunk group. Restricted 64K
bearer capability allocates 8 bits for signaling; thereby providing 56 bits for transmission.
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:

H0U (H0 - 384K, Unrestricted Digital)
Keyword
Preassigned ASCII characters

Keyword:

YES
NO

-

Bearer capability supports H0 clear channel traffic
Bearer capability does not support H0 clear channel traffic

The "H0U" field is used for H0 clear channel traffic. This field is locked in all operations and is
reserved for future use.
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:

H0R (H0 - 384K, Restricted Digital)
Keyword
Preassigned ASCII characters

Keyword:

YES
NO

-

Bearer capability supports H0 restricted channel traffic
Bearer capability does not support H0 restricted channel traffic

The "H0R" field is used for H0 restricted traffic. This field is locked in all operations and is
reserved for future use.

3-232

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
ISDN SERVICE MIN/MAX ASSIGNMENT (CMD 425)
PERCEPTION 4000

COMMANDS

FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:

H11U (H11 - 1536K, Unrestricted Digital)
Keyword
Preassigned ASCII characters

Keyword:

YES
NO

-

Bearer capability supports H11 clear channel traffic
Bearer capability does not support H11 clear channel traffic

The "H11U" field field is used for H11 clear channel traffic. This field is locked in all operations
and is reserved for future use.
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:

H11R (H11 - 1536K, Restricted Digital)
Keyword
Preassigned ASCII characters

Keyword:

YES
NO

-

Bearer capability supports H11 restricted channel traffic
Bearer capability does not support H11 restricted channel traffic

The "H11R" field is used for H11 restricted traffic. This field is locked in all operations and is
reserved for future use.

SYSTEM MESSAGES
The following error messages are unique to this command.
C42500
C42501
C42502
C42503
C42504
C42505
C42506
C42507

-

Undefined trunk group number
Total number of MIN SVC exceeds total number of channels in TGN's channel group
Check trunk group number range
Undefined channel group number
Check time zone range
Total number of MAX SVC exceeds total number of channels in TGN's channel group
Check trunk group type
The total MAX SVC cannot be less than MIN SVC

3-233

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
ISDN TRUNK GROUP PARAMETER ASSIGNMENT (CMD 421)
PERCEPTION 4000

COMMANDS

ISDN TRUNK GROUP PARAMETER ASSIGNMENT (CMD 421)
The ISDN Trunk Group Parameter Assignment command allows the attributes of one or more ISDN trunk groups
to be displayed or modified. ISDN trunk group attributes include: inward mode; outgoing call number presentation
flag; trunk group number's listed directory number for call number presentation; display option for incoming call;
and the trunk group name. Note that the total number of ISDN trunks with DNIS/DDI inward routing mode, plus
the total number of non-ISDN DID/DNIS/CCSA trunks cannot exceed 16.
Command Keyword:

ISDN_TRK_GRP_PARA

Category Name:

ISDN

PREREQUISITE COMMANDS
Trunk Group Assignment (CMD 310)

OPERATIONS
Available operations:
DISPLAY
MODIFY
The function and required data fields for each operation are described as follows:
DISPLAY

TGN

MODE

DISP

OUT CPN

CPN LDN

TRK GRP NAME

opt

This operation is used to display the trunk attributes of one or more existing ISDN trunk groups. If no data is input
in this operation, then the attributes of all trunk groups in the PERCEPTION 4000 system will be displayed.
Information relating only to specific trunk groups is provided by entering each trunk group's corresponding trunk
group number. Range entries are permitted in selected fields, including the Trunk Group Number ("TGN") field.

MODIFY

TGN
req

3-234

MODE

DISP

OUT CPN

CPN LDN

opt

TRK GRP NAME

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
ISDN TRUNK GROUP PARAMETER ASSIGNMENT (CMD 421)
PERCEPTION 4000

COMMANDS

ThIs operation is used to modify the attributes of one or more existing ISDN trunk groups. The required data input
field in this operation is the Trunk Group Number ("TGN") field. Range entries are permitted in the "TGN" field.

PARAMETERS
This section defines input permitted for each field. Any variations for a particular operation are noted separately.
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:
RANGE:
LOOP:

TGN (ISDN Trunk Group Number)
Decimal
1 to 3 digits
1 to 256 (or maximum system trunk configuration)
Allowed in DISPLAY operation only
Allowed in all operations
The "TGN" entry is required in the MODIFY operation. In the DISPLAY operation, this is an
optional field. If no entry is made, then the attributes of all trunk groups in the PERCEPTION
4000 system will be displayed.

FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:

MODE (Inward Routing Mode)
Keyword
Preassigned ASCII characters
Keyword:

DIT

-

DDI

-

DNIS

-

Direct Inward Termination Mode—inward routing destination is
based on the termination point assigned to the utilized channel
group for the current time zone (set in CMD 307)
Direct Dial-in Mode—inward routing destination is based on the
Called Party Number (CPN), as defined in the SETUP message
Dialed Number Identification Service—inward routing destination
is based on the current time zone, as with DIT; however, unlike
DIT, DNIS involves no type of digit translation

This field indicates the inward routing procedure that will be applied to the ISDN trunk group.
Calls that arrive to the trunk group will be routed according to the assigned routing procedure.
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:

DISP (Display Option for Incoming Calls)
Keyword
Preassigned ASCII characters
Keyword:

NAME
CDPN
CGPN
DNIS
CGDN

-

Trunk Group Number's name
Called Party Number
Calling Party Number
DNIS Name (Requires DNIS as the "MODE" field setting)
Calling Party Number, plus the first three characters of the DNIS
name (Requires DNIS as the "MODE" field setting)

This field defines the type of information that will appear on display telephones or display screens
when calls arrive over the ISDN trunk. The selected option should provide the most helpful type
of information to the called party, to enable easy call identifcation and appropriate call answering.

3-235

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
ISDN TRUNK GROUP PARAMETER ASSIGNMENT (CMD 421)
PERCEPTION 4000
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:

COMMANDS

OUT CPN (Outgoing Call Number Presentation Flag)
Keyword
Preassigned ASCII characters
Keyword:

ALW
DNY
BAR

-

Outgoing Call Number Presentation is allowed
Outgoing Call Number Presentation is restricted
Outgoing Call Number Presentation is barred

This field indicates whether or not the calling party's number will be presented at the distant end.
The ALW entry allows outgoing numbers to always be presented. The DNY entry restricts
presentation of the calling party's number by requiring the calling station user to enter a specific
access code. The BAR entry is used to eliminate the presentation of the calling party's number at
all times.
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:
RANGE:
LOOP:

CPN LDN (ISDN TGN's Listed Directory Number for Called Party Number Presentation)
Decimal
1 to 15 digits
0 to 9; *, and # (Delete symbol, D, is allowed in MODIFY operation)
Not allowed
Not allowed
This field indicates the directory number (Called Directory Number) that will be displayed at
receiving display telephones whenever calls arrive over the ISDN trunk group.

FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:

TRK GRP NAME (Trunk Group Name)
Text
0 to 14 ASCII characters
This field indicates the name (Trunk Group Name) that will be displayed at receiving display
telephones whenever calls arrive over the ISDN trunk group. The Delete symbol (D) can be used
in the MODIFY operation to delete the text entry.

SYSTEM MESSAGES
The following error messages are unique to this command.
C42100
C42101
C42102
C42103
C42104

3-236

-

Undefined trunk group number
Check trunk group number range
Non-ISDN trunk group number
Total DID, DNIS, CCSA type plus DDI, DNIS inward mode cannot exceed 16
CGDN/DNIS display option can only have DNIS/DDI as inward routing mode

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
LCR AREA CODE ROUTING ASSIGNMENT (CMD 381)
PERCEPTION 4000

COMMANDS

LCR AREA CODE ROUTING ASSIGNMENT (CMD 381)
In order to perform routing over the least costly facility for long distance direct dialing, the system analyzes the
dialed number and examines the Least Cost Routing Area/Office Code tables. If an AC/OC table is not found for
the number, the system then examines the Least Cost Routing Area Code tables to determine the route pattern
to be used to ultimately determine the routing for the call.
The LCR Area Code Routing Assignment command adds, deletes and displays area codes for the selected
Route Pattern Number (RPN).
Command Keyword:

AC_ROUTING

Category Name:

LCR

PREREQUISITE COMMAND
LCR Routing Table Assignment (CMD 383)
OPERATIONS
Available operations:

ADD
DELETE
DISPLAY

The function and required data fields for each operation are described in this section.

ADD

RPN

AC

AC

AC

AC

AC

AC

AC

AC

AC

AC

AC

AC

opt

req

This operation adds one or more area codes to the specified LCR Area Code table. The route pattern number
(RPN) and at least one area code (AC) are required.

DELETE

RPN

req

AC

AC

AC

AC

AC

AC

AC

AC

AC

AC

AC

AC

opt

This operation deletes one or more area codes from the specified LCR Area Code table. The "RPN" and at least
one "AC" are required.

3-237

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
LCR AREA CODE ROUTING ASSIGNMENT (CMD 381)
PERCEPTION 4000

COMMANDS

DISPLAY

RPN

AC

AC

AC

AC

AC

AC

AC

AC

AC

AC

AC

AC

opt

This operation displays one or more LCR area code table(s). If no data is entered in any of the fields, all of the
area code tables in the system display.
PARAMETERS
Each field parameter is described in this section. Any variations for a particular operation are noted separately.
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:
RANGE:

RPN (Route Pattern Number)
Decimal
1 to 3 digits
1 to 100 (or to the maximum system configuration)
Allowed in a DISPLAY operation only
A route pattern number is assigned to the table which represents which least cost routing table to
use based on the time zone in effect. Routing patterns are defined with the LCR Routing Table
Assignment command, CMD 383.

FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:
RANGE:

AC (Area Code)
Decimal with fixed length
3 digits in the form N Y X (where N = 2 to 9, Y = 0 or 1, and X = 0 to 9)
200 to 919
Allowed in a DISPLAY operation
The valid area code format is in the form of NYX, where N is 2 to 9, Y is either 0 or 1, and X is 0
to 9. Ranges are permitted for DISPLAY operations; and scopes are allowed in ADD and
DELETE operations. The first AC field is required for ADD and DELETE operations.

SYSTEM ERROR MESSAGES
The following error messages are unique to this command.
C38100 - Area code is not defined for this route pattern
C38101 - Area code is already defined for another route pattern
C38102 - Data is needed following scope in field N
RELATED COMMANDS
LCR Special Routing Assignment (CMD 384)
LCR/Authorization TZ Change Assignment (CMD 343)
Time Zone Assignment (CMD 336)

3-238

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
LCR AREA/OFFICE CODE ROUTING ASSIGNMENT (CMD 382)
PERCEPTION 4000

COMMANDS

LCR AREA/OFFICE CODE ROUTING ASSIGNMENT (CMD 382)
The LCR Area/Office Code Table command displays, adds or deletes office codes from the area code for a
specified route pattern number. Multiple area/office code tables may be defined, each using a different routing
pattern.
Command Keyword:

AC/OC_ROUTING

Category Name:

LCR

PREREQUISITE COMMAND
LCR Routing Table Assignment (CMD 383)
OPERATIONS
Available operations:

ADD
DELETE
DISPLAY

The function and required data fields for each operation are described in this section.

ADD

RPN

AC

OC

OC

OC

OC

OC

OC

OC

OC

OC

OC

opt

req

This operation adds office codes to the table by specifying the route pattern number (RPN) and area code (AC).
These two fields are required and must be input. The first office code is also required for an ADD operation.
Scopes are permitted in all of the "OC" fields but the last.

DELETE

RPN

AC

req

OC

OC

OC

OC

OC

OC

OC

OC

OC

OC

opt

This operation deletes office codes from the table by specifying the Area Code and Route Pattern number. "RPN"
and "AC" are required fields and must be input. The first "OC" is required for the DELETE operation. Scopes are
permitted in all of the "OC" fields but the last.

3-239

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
LCR AREA/OFFICE CODE ROUTING ASSIGNMENT (CMD 382)
PERCEPTION 4000

COMMANDS

DISPLAY

RPN

AC

OC

OC

OC

OC

OC

OC

OC

OC

OC

OC

opt

This operation displays office codes for the specified Area Code and Route Pattern number. All of the fields are
optional. "RPN" and "AC" are loop fields. Ranges may be entered in any of the "OC" fields. If a  and
 are entered in the "RPN" field, the complete table displays.
PARAMETERS
Each field parameter is described in this section. Any variations for a particular operation are noted separately.
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:
LOOP:
RANGE:

RPN (Route Pattern Number)
Decimal
1 to 3 digits
1 to 100 (or to the maximum system configuration)
Primary loop for a DISPLAY operation only
Not allowed
The routing pattern (defined with the LCR Routing Table Assignment command, CMD 383)
represents which least cost routing table to use based on the time zone in effect. The "RPN" field
is required for both the ADD and DELETE operations.

FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:
LOOP:
RANGE:

AC (Area Code)
Decimal with fixed length
3 digits in the form N Y X (where N = 2 to 9, Y = 0 or 1, and X = 0 to 9)
200 to 919
Secondary loop for a DISPLAY operation only
Not allowed
The "AC" field is required for both the ADD and DELETE operations. Values from 200 to 919 are
defined as follows: the first digit ranges from 2 to 9, the second digit must be a 1 or 0, and the
last digit can be 0 to 9. In a DISPLAY operation, "AC" is the secondary loop field. If a  is
entered, all of the area codes for the specified Route Pattern Number display.

FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:
SCOPE:
LOOP:
RANGE:

OC (Office code)
Decimal with fixed length
3 digits in the form NXX (where N = 2 to 9, and X = 0 to 9)
200 to 999
Allowed in ADD and DELETE operations
Not allowed
Allowed in a DISPLAY operation
In ADD and DELETE operations, the first "OC" field is required, while the remaining fields are
optional. Scopes are permitted in these fields to add or delete a group of office codes. In a
DISPLAY operation, "OC" is optional. If a  is entered, all office codes for the specified area

3-240

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
LCR AREA/OFFICE CODE ROUTING ASSIGNMENT (CMD 382)
PERCEPTION 4000

COMMANDS

code display. When ranges are used for this operation, scope fields are output. This means that if
there is more than one consecutive office code for an area code, the output contains a “-”. For
example, an output of “223-288” includes all office codes from 223 to 288.
SYSTEM ERROR MESSAGES
The following error messages are unique to this command.
C38200
C38201
C38202
C38203
C38204

-

Route pattern table is not defined for area code
Office code already exists for another route pattern/AC table
Route pattern is the default pattern for this area code
Office code tables are at system maximum; cannot add more
Data is needed following scope in field N

COMMENTS
Multiple AC/OC routing tables per area code are allowed, however unique office codes cannot be in more than
one AC/OC table per area code.
RELATED COMMANDS
LCR/Authorization TZ Change Assignment (CMD 343)
Time Zone Assignment (CMD 336)

3-241

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
LCR COUNTRY CODE ROUTING ASSIGNMENT (CMD 380)
PERCEPTION 4000

COMMANDS

LCR COUNTRY CODE ROUTING ASSIGNMENT (CMD 380)
The LCR Country Code Routing Assignment command adds, deletes, and displays country codes (CC) for a
specified route pattern number (RPN). Each route pattern number has a list of country codes assigned to it, and
is required for all country codes not intended for default routing.
Command Keyword:

CC_ROUTING

Category Name:

LCR

PREREQUISITE COMMANDS
Country Code Assignment (CMD 335)
LCR Routing Table Assignment (CMD 383)
OPERATIONS
Available operations:

ADD
DELETE
DISPLAY

The function and required data fields for each operation are described in this section.

ADD

RPN

CC

CC

CC

CC

CC

CC

CC

CC

CC

CC

CC

CC

opt

req

This operation adds country codes to the table by specifying the "RPN" and the "CC". The "RPN" and the first
"CC" are required fields. Scopes are permitted in all of the country code fields except the last one.

DELETE

RPN

CC

req

CC

CC

CC

CC

CC

CC

CC

CC

CC

CC

CC

opt

This operation deletes country codes from the table by specifying the "RPN" and "CC". The "RPN" and the first
"CC" are required fields. Scopes are permitted in all of the country code fields except the last one.

3-242

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
LCR COUNTRY CODE ROUTING ASSIGNMENT (CMD 380)
PERCEPTION 4000

COMMANDS

DISPLAY

RPN

CC

CC

CC

CC

CC

CC

CC

CC

CC

CC

CC

CC

opt

This operation displays country codes for the specified "RPN". All of the fields are optional, and "RPN" is a loop
field. Ranges may be entered in any of the country code fields. If a  and a  are entered in the
"RPN" field, the complete table is displayed.
PARAMETERS
Each field parameter is described in this section. Any variations for a particular operation are noted separately.
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:
LOOP:
RANGE:
SCOPE:

RPN (Route Pattern Number)
Decimal
1 to 3 digits
1 to 100 (or to the maximum system configuration)
Primary loop for a DISPLAY operation only
Not allowed
Not allowed
A route pattern number is assigned to the country code table which represents which least cost
routing table to use based on the time zone in effect. Routing patterns are defined with the LCR
Routing Table Assignment command, CMD 383.

FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:
LOOP:
RANGE:
SCOPE:

CC (Country Code)
Decimal
1 to 3 digits
1 to 999
Not allowed
Allowed in a DISPLAY operation only
Allowed in ADD and DELETE operations
Country codes using the routing pattern specified in the "RPN" field are entered in the "CC"
fields. The country codes must be predefined with the Country Code Assignment command
(CMD 335). Multiple country code tables may be defined, each using a different routing pattern. A
country code may not exist in more than one LCR country code table.

SYSTEM ERROR MESSAGES
The following error messages are unique to this command.
C38000 - The last field cannot be a scope field
C38001 - Check scope data

3-243

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
LCR COUNTRY CODE ROUTING ASSIGNMENT (CMD 380)
PERCEPTION 4000
C38002
C38003
C38004
C38005
C38006

-

Country code is defined for another route pattern number
Country code(s) are not found or are invalid
Country code(s) already exist or are invalid
Number of defined country codes has reached system maximum
Missing data in scope type field in field N

RELATED COMMANDS
LCR Special Routing Assignment (CMD 384)

3-244

COMMANDS

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
LCR DIGIT TRANSLATION PROFILE ASSIGNMENT (CMD 386)
PERCEPTION 4000

COMMANDS

LCR DIGIT TRANSLATION PROFILE ASSIGNMENT (CMD 386)
This command modifies and displays the attributes of a Least Cost Routing (LCR) Digit Translation Profile.
Profiles manipulate a dialed digit string by adding or deleting area codes or toll prefixes, or by defining new prefix
and suffix strings. For example, a profile may be used for deleting an area code when a ten digit call is dialed that
is to be routed over a foreign exchange line to the dialed area. Or, a profile may be defined to add a toll prefix
when a ten digit number is dialed.
Command Keyword:

LCR_DIGIT_PROFILES

Category Name:

LCR

PREREQUISITE COMMANDS
There are no prerequisites for this command.
OPERATIONS
Available operations:

MODIFY
DISPLAY

The function and required data fields for each operation are described in this section.

MODIFY

PFL#

DDN

DUNP

TPTMT

OPFX

DEAC

ACTMT

PREFIX STRING

SUFFIX STRING

opt

req

This operation creates/modifies the attributes of an LCR Digit Translation Profile. The "PFL#" field is required. The
remaining fields are optional and can be modified by tabbing over to the field and entering new data.The "PREFIX
STRING" and "SUFFIX STRING" fields are delete fields; predefined data in these fields can be deleted by
entering a .

DISPLAY

PFL#

DDN

DUNP

TPTMT

OPFX

DEAC

ACTMT

PREFIX STRING

SUFFIX STRING

opt

This operation displays the LCR Digit Translation Profiles and their attributes. If no data is entered in the "PFL#"
field, all of the LCR Digit Translation Profiles in the system display (to a total of 32).

3-245

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
LCR DIGIT TRANSLATION PROFILE ASSIGNMENT (CMD 386)
PERCEPTION 4000

COMMANDS

PARAMETERS
Each field parameter is described in this section. Any variations for a particular operation are noted separately.
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:
LOOP:

PFL# (Digit Translation Profile Number)
Decimal
1 or 2 digits
1 to 32 (or to the maximum number of time zones)
Allowed in a DISPLAY operation
This field identifies the translation instruction which follows and is used to reference the
instruction for the LCR Routing Table Assignment command (CMD 383). A maximum of 32
profiles may be created.

FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:

DDN (Delete Dialed Number)
Keyword
Predefined ASCII characters
Keywords:

ALL
D01
D02
:
D24
K01
K02
:
K24
NON

- Delete all dialed numbers
- Delete the first dialed digit
- Delete the first 2 dialed digits
- Delete the first 24 dialed digits
- Keep the last dialed digit
- Keep the last 2 dialed digits
- Keep the last 24 dialed digits
- No deletion (Default)

This field instructs the system to delete, keep or leave dialed digits as they are. For example,
dialing certain area codes may be screened by rerouting those calls to the corporate operator.
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:

DUNP (Delete UNP Location Code)
Keyword
Predefined ASCII characters
Keywords:

DEL - Delete UNP Location Code
NON - Do not delete UNP Location Code (Default)

This field instructs the system to delete or not to delete the dialed Uniform Numbering Plan (UNP)
location code. The UNP code is set up through the Uniform Numbering Plan Assignment
command (CMD 301) and the UNP Routing Assignment command (CMD 302).
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:

TPTMT (Toll Prefix Treatment)
DN Type / Keyword
1 to 3 digits / Predefined ASCII characters
0 to 999
Keywords:

3-246

ADD
DEL

- Add Toll Prefix
- Delete Toll Prefix (Default value for ISDN trunks)

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
LCR DIGIT TRANSLATION PROFILE ASSIGNMENT (CMD 386)
PERCEPTION 4000

COMMANDS
A10TP
D7TP
D7A10
NON

-

Add Toll Prefix for 10 digit DDD call
Delete 7 digits' Toll Prefix
Delete 7 digits' Toll Prefix and add Toll Prefix for 10-digit DDD calls
Leave Toll Prefix unchanged (Default value for non-ISDN trunks)

This field adds, deletes, changes or leaves the toll prefix as is. If "ADD" is selected, the value from
the "TP" field in the Dialing Definition command (CMD 317) is automatically added as the toll
prefix. Entry of a DN-type value in the "TPTMT" field automatically replaces the existing toll
prefix.
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:

OPFX (Operator Prefix)
Keyword
Predefined ASCII characters
Keywords:

DEL - Delete Operator Prefix (Default value for non-ISDN trunks)
NON - Leave Operator Prefix unchanged (Default value for ISDN trunks)

This field instructs the system to delete or not to delete the operator prefix, which is defined with
the Dialing Definition command (CMD 317).
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:

DEAC (Delete Equal Access Code)
Keyword
Predefined ASCII characters
Keywords:

DEL - Delete 10XXX Equal Access Code (Default value for non-ISDN trunks)
NON - Leave Equal Access Code unchanged (Default value for ISDN trunks)

This field instructs the system to delete or not to delete the Equal Access Code (10XXX), which is
defined with the Common Carrier Assignment command (CMD 344).
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:

ACTMT (Area Code Treatment)
Keyword
Predefined ASCII characters
Keywords:

ADD - Add Area Code
DEL - Delete Area Code
NON - Leave Area Code unchanged (Default)

This field adds the home area code, deletes the area code, or leaves the existing area code as is.
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:

PREFIX STRING
Dialing Digits plus * and #
Up to 20 digits
0-9, #, *
A string of digits is defined with this field. Up to 20 digits are prefixed to a dialed number with this
field. Entry of a  in a MODIFY operation deletes data from this field. The default
value is a NULL string.

3-247

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
LCR DIGIT TRANSLATION PROFILE ASSIGNMENT (CMD 386)
PERCEPTION 4000
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:

COMMANDS

SUFFIX STRING
Dialing Digits plus * and #
Up to 20 digits
0-9, #, *
A string of digits is defined with this field. Up to 20 digits are appended to a dialed number with
this field. Entry of a  in a MODIFY operation deletes data from this field. The
default value is a NULL string.

SYSTEM ERROR MESSAGES
The following error messages are unique to this command.
C38600
C38601
C38602
C38603
C38604
C38605
C38606
C38607
C38608

-

Check Digit Translation Profile Number
Check Delete Dialed Number
Check Delete UNP Location Code
Check Toll Prefix Treatment
Check Operator Prefix
Check Delete Eqal Acce Code
Check Area Code Treatment
Check Toll Prefix Digits
Check Toll Prefix Treatment Length

RELATED COMMANDS
Common Carrier Assignment (CMD 344)
Dialing Definition (CMD 317)
LCR Area Code Routing Assignment (CMD 381)
LCR Area/Office Code Routing Assignment (CMD 382)
LCR Country Code Routing Assignment (CMD 380)
LCR Routing Table Assignment (CMD 383)
LCR Special Routing Assignment (CMD 384)
UNP Routing Assignment (CMD 302)
Uniform Numbering Plan Assignment (CMD 301)

3-248

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
LCR ROUTING TABLE ASSIGNMENT (CMD 383)
PERCEPTION 4000

COMMANDS

LCR ROUTING TABLE ASSIGNMENT (CMD 383)
The LCR Routing Table Assignment command defines up to 100 routing tables. Each table contains up to eight
routes that are examined for an available trunk circuit to place the call. Trunks within each table are generally
placed in order from least costly to most expensive. In addition, a warning tone flag may be inserted in the routing
table to advise the caller that a more costly route has been accessed.
Command Keyword:

LCR_ROUTE_ASSIGN

Category Name:

LCR

PREREQUISITE COMMANDS
Common Carrier Assignment (CMD 344)
Facility Restriction Level Profile Assignment (CMD 387)
LCR Digit Translation Profile Assignment (CMD 386)
Trunk Group Assignment (CMD 310)

OPERATIONS
Available operations:

ADD
DELETE
MODIFY
DISPLAY

The function and required data fields for each operation are described in this section.

ADD

TBL#

ROUTE #

TGN

req

CARR #

FRL

WARN

PFL#

CALL TYPE

req

opt

req

opt

This operation creates routing table(s) and specifies the order of search, or adds route(s) to an existing routing
table. When adding a new route, the "TGN", "FRL", and "PFL#" must be entered, and the "ROUTE #" is
resequenced. If no data is entered in the “WARN” field, the warning tone flag is not set. The first route choice
cannot be assigned a warning tone. If a  is entered in the "CARR #" field, the carrier number defaults to
"Not Defined".
DELETE

TBL#

ROUTE #

req

3-249

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
LCR ROUTING TABLE ASSIGNMENT (CMD 383)
PERCEPTION 4000

COMMANDS

The DELETE operation deletes route(s) from an existing routing table. When deleting a specific route, the
remaining routing index is resequenced. For example, after deleting route #2, the current route #3 becomes route
#2.

MODIFY

TBL#

ROUTE #

TGN

CARR #

FRL

req

WARN

PFL#

CALL TYPE

req

This operation modifies the definition of a route in an existing routing table. If a  is entered in the
"CARR #" field, the carrier number is deleted.

DISPLAY

TBL#

ROUTE #

TGN

CARR #

FRL

WARN

PFL#

CALL TYPE

opt

This operation displays LCR routing tables and their related definitions of routes. If no data is entered in the
“TBL#” field, all LCR routing tables in the system are displayed.
PARAMETERS
Each field parameter is described in this section. Any variations for a particular operation are noted separately.
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:
LOOP:

TBL# (LCR Routing Table Number)
Decimal
1 to 3 digits
1 to 100 (or to the maximum system configuration)
Allowed in all operations
The "TBL#" field contains the index number referenced by the routing pattern. Up to 100 route
tables may be defined in the system, depending on the system configuration. This field is
required for all operations except a DISPLAY operation.

FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:
LOOP:

ROUTE # (Route Number)
Decimal / Keyword
1 digit / Predefined ASCII characters
1 to 8
Allowed in ADD and DISPLAY operations
Keyword:

3-250

ALL

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
LCR ROUTING TABLE ASSIGNMENT (CMD 383)
PERCEPTION 4000

COMMANDS

The system examines available routes for outgoing calls, starting from the lowest numbered route
to the highest. Therefore, ordering is important; the lowest numbered route should be the least
costly and, as the route number rises, the routes should become more expensive.
The keyword ALL is used for deleting all routes in the same routing table.
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:
RANGE:

TGN (Trunk Group Number)
Decimal
1 to 3 digits
1 to 256 (or to the maximum system configuration)
Allowed in a DISPLAY operation
The "TGN" field specifies the trunk group to be used to place the outgoing call. The trunk group
must be a bothway or outgoing only trunk group and must be for network access (that is, not for
paging, dictation machines, etc.). The Trunk Group number cannot be duplicated among routes
within one routing table. This field is required for an ADD operation.

FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:
LOOP:

CARR # (Carrier Number)
Decimal
1 or 2 digits
1 to 10
Allowed in a DISPLAY operation
The Carrier Number field calls up the indicated equal access number when a call is placed over a
long distance carrier other than the facility's primary carrier. If a carrier number is defined, the
system gets the appropriate 10XXX code from the Common Carrier table (CMD 344, Common
Carrier Assignment) and outpulses it to the central office prior to outpulsing the destination
number.

FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:
RANGE:

FRL (Facility Restriction Level)
Decimal
1 or 2 digits
1 to 16
Allowed in a DISPLAY operation
The Facility Restriction Level (FRL) number controls caller access to certain routes in the route
table while allowing access to others. This is accomplished through the relationship defined
between a caller's Facility Restriction Level Profile (FRLP) and the route's FRL. This relationship
is established in the FRLP command (CMD 387). The "FRL" field is required for an ADD
operation.

FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:

WARN (Warning Tone Flag)
Keyword
Predefined ASCII characters
Keywords:

YES - Warning Tone Flag is ON
NO - Warning Tone Flag is OFF

The Warning Tone field provides a warning tone to users when a route about to be examined is
considered a high cost route. Any route may be flagged, with the exception of the first route

3-251

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
LCR ROUTING TABLE ASSIGNMENT (CMD 383)
PERCEPTION 4000

COMMANDS

choice, which is always considered least costly. Any number of routes may be flagged in a given
route table, however, only one warning tone is issued to a caller regardless of how many high
cost routes are examined. The caller's queue priority level (QPL) is flagged to allow/deny the
caller to receive a warning tone when one is encountered. (Refer to the LCR Special Routing
Assignment command, CMD 384.)
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:
LOOP:

PFL# (Translation Profile Number)
Decimal / Keyword
1 or 2 digits; predefined ASCII characters
1 to 32; Keyword NONE
Allowed in a DISPLAY operation
The "PFL#" field defines which digit translation profile should be used for manipulation of a dialed
number. These profiles add or delete area codes and toll prefixes, or define new prefix and suffix
strings. Entering the keyword NONE for non-ISDN trunks indicates no digit translation. For ISDN
trunks, an entry of NONE indicates no digit translation except the deletion of operator prefix, toll
prefix, international toll prefix, and equal access code. Refer to the LCR Digit Translation Profile
Assignment command (CMD 386). The "PFL#" field is required for an ADD operation.

FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
LOOP:

CALL TYPE (Call Type)
Keyword
Predefined ASCII characters
Not allowed
Keywords:

NAT
INT
SUB
UNK

-

National
International
Subscriber
Unknown

The "Call Type" field is required for ISDN trunks and refers to the type of ISDN service being
used. If a  is entered in this field, the call type will be deleted. For non-ISDN trunks,
skip this field.
SYSTEM ERROR MESSAGES
The following error messages are unique to this command.
C38300
C38301
C38302
C38303
C38304
C38305
C38306
C38307
C38308
C38309
C38310
C38311
C38312

3-252

-

Check warning flag
Check trunk group number
Check range of table number, route number, or trunk group number
Check range of carrier number
Routing tables are full
Route not found
Check range of translation profile number
Trunk group number is not defined
Check next route warning flag
Incoming trunk groups are not allowed
Private line trunk groups are not allowed
Non-ISDN trunks do on require call type
ISDN trunks require call type

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
LCR ROUTING TABLE ASSIGNMENT (CMD 383)
PERCEPTION 4000

COMMANDS

RELATED COMMANDS
LCR Area Code Routing Assignment (CMD 381)
LCR Area/Office Code Routing Assignment (CMD 382)
LCR/Authorization TZ Change Assignment (CMD 343)
LCR Country Code Routing Assignment (CMD 380)
LCR Special Routing Assignment (CMD 384)

3-253

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
LCR SPECIAL ROUTING ASSIGNMENT (CMD 384)
PERCEPTION 4000

COMMANDS

LCR SPECIAL ROUTING ASSIGNMENT (CMD 384)
The LCR Special Routing Assignment command provides the system with a dialing definition to reference
whenever a call is placed via LCR. For seven digit dialing it defines one home area code for all calls placed
through LCR so that the proper area/office or area code table may be screened for call routing.
In addition, this table provides default routing for numbers dialed which are not found in LCR code tables. It
defines a route pattern for special numbers such as operators and N11 numbers. For private networks using a
Uniform Numbering Plan (UNP), this command provides default routing for network calls not found in the UNP
Routing Assignment (CMD 302). Finally, the command defines the relationship between queueing priority levels
and warning tone presentation.
Command Keyword:

LCR_SPECIAL_ROUTING

Category Name:

LCR

PREREQUISITE COMMANDS
There are no prerequisites for this command.
OPERATIONS
Available operations:

MODIFY
DISPLAY

The function and required data fields for each operation are described in this section.

MODIFY

LCR DIAL PLAN

LCR HAC

DEF RPN

SPC RPN

UNP RPN

QPL

opt

opt

WARN

opt

This operation modifies related information of the LCR dial plan number. If the warning tone flag of the queue
priority level is to be changed, data must also be entered in the "QPL" field, otherwise the default or existing value
of the warning tone is used.

DISPLAY

LCR DIAL PLAN

LCR HAC

DEF RPN

SPC RPN

opt

3-254

UNP RPN

QPL

WARN

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
LCR SPECIAL ROUTING ASSIGNMENT (CMD 384)
PERCEPTION 4000

COMMANDS

This operation displays information about LCR routing.
PARAMETERS
Each field parameter is described in this section. Any variations for a particular operation are noted separately.
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:
LOOP:
RANGE:

LCR DIAL PLAN (LCR Dial Plan Number)
Decimal
1 digit
2, 3, or 4
Not allowed
Not allowed
The LCR dialing plan field selects one of the defined dialing definitions for all LCR calls. The
value entered must be 2, 3, or 4 since dialing definition 1 is undefined and is used for TIE lines.

FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:
LOOP:
RANGE:

LCR HAC (LCR Home Area Code)
Decimal with fixed length
3 digits in the form N Y X (where N = 2 to 9, Y = 0 or 1, and X = 0 to 9)
200 to 919
Not allowed
Not allowed
This field identifies the area code where the switch is located, and is needed so seven digit calls
may be analyzed by the area/office and/or area code tables for proper route selection.

FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:
LOOP:
RANGE:

DEF RPN (Default Route Pattern Number)
Decimal
1 to 3 digits
1 to 100 (or to the maximum system configuration)
Not allowed
Not allowed
This field defines which route pattern will be used for all international, 10 and 1+10 digit, and 7
and 1+7 digit calls that are not found in any of their respective LCR code tables.

FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:
LOOP:
RANGE:

SPC RPN (Special Default Route Pattern Number)
Decimal
1 to 3 digits
1 to 100
Not allowed
Not allowed
The "SPC RPN" field defines what route pattern is used for 0, 0+, 00+, 01+, and N11 call routing.

FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:

UNP RPN (UNP Default Route Pattern Number)
Decimal
1 to 3 digits
1 to 100 (or to the maximum system configuration)

3-255

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
LCR SPECIAL ROUTING ASSIGNMENT (CMD 384)
PERCEPTION 4000
LOOP:
RANGE:

COMMANDS

Not allowed
Not allowed
This field routes UNP calls that have no match in the UNP routing tables.

FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:
LOOP:
RANGE:

QPL (Queue Priority Level)
Decimal
1 digit
1 to 8
Allowed
Not allowed
This field and the "WARN" field are interrelated. If a "QPL" value is entered, then a keyword must
be entered in the "WARN" field. Together, these fields define whether a warning tone is heard by
a caller when a more costly route is accessed if the least costly route is unavailable.

FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:

WARN (Warning Tone Flag)
Keyword
Predefined ASCII characters
Keywords:

YES - Warning Tone Enabled
NO - Warning Tone Disabled

If the keyword YES is entered, the warning tone is enabled. The warning tone route is defined in
the LCR Routing Table Assignment command, CMD 383.
SYSTEM ERROR MESSAGES
The following error messages are unique to this command.
C38400 - Routing pattern number is not within range
C38401 - QPL entry is required
C38402 - Invalid request type
RELATED COMMANDS
Dialing Definition (CMD 317)
LCR Routing Table Assignment (CMD 383)
Station Assignment (CMD 330)
Trunk Group Assignment (CMD 310)
UNP Routing Assignment (CMD 302)

3-256

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
LCR/AUTHORIZATION TZ CHANGE ASSIGNMENT (CMD 343)
PERCEPTION 4000

COMMANDS

LCR/AUTHORIZATION TZ CHANGE ASSIGNMENT (CMD 343)
The LCR/Authorization TZ Change Assignment command sets up tables that allow you to change the COS, DRL,
FRLP, and QPL based on the current time zone. Additionally, this command defines for each route pattern the
LCR route tables which are to be used in each time zone.
Command Keyword:

LCR/AUTH_TZ

Category Name:

Administration

PREREQUISITE COMMANDS
There are no prerequisites for this command.
OPERATIONS
Available operations:

MODIFY
DISPLAY

The function and required data fields for each operation are described in this section.

MODIFY

TYPE

ORG DEF/
RPN

TZ1
NEW DEF/TBL

TZ2
NEW DEF/TBL

req

TZ3
NEW DEF/TBL

TZ4
NEW DEF/TBL

opt

This operation modifies the attributes of one of the tables mentioned above. "TYPE" and "ORG DEF/RPN" are
required fields, while the remaining fields are optional.

DISPLAY

TYPE

req

ORG DEF/
RPN

TZ1
NEW DEF/TBL

TZ2
NEW DEF/TBL

TZ3
NEW DEF/TBL

TZ4
NEW DEF/TBL

opt

This operation displays all or part of one of the five tables. "TYPE" is a required field, while the remaining fields
are optional. If a  is entered in the "ORG DEF/RPN" field, the complete table for the specified table type is
displayed. Loops are permitted in the "ORG DEF/RPN" field.

3-257

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
LCR/AUTHORIZATION TZ CHANGE ASSIGNMENT (CMD 343)
PERCEPTION 4000

COMMANDS

PARAMETERS
Each field parameter is described in this section. Any variations for a particular operation are noted separately.
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:

TYPE (Type of Table)
Keyword
Predefined ASCII characters
Keywords:

COS
DRL
FRLP
QPL
LCR

-

Class of Service Table
Destination Restriction Level Table
Facility Restriction Level Profile Table
Queue Priority Level Table
Least Cost Routing

This field specifies the table to be modified or displayed.
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:
RANGE:
LOOP:

ORG DEF/RPN (Original Definition for COS, DRL, FRLP, and QPL/LCR Route Pattern Number)
Decimal
1 to 3 digits
1 to 100 (Dependent on Table Type)
Allowed
Allowed
This field selects the current definition or pattern number that is to be changed. Valid entries for
this field depend on the "TYPE" field, and are:
COS - 1 to 64
DRL - 1 to 16
FRLP - 1 to 32

FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:
RANGE:
LOOP:

QPL - 1 to 8
RPN - 1 to 100 (LCR Route Pattern Number)

TZ1, 2, 3, 4 NEW DEF/TBL
(Time Zones 1 to 4: New Definition for COS, DRL, FRLP, and
Decimal
QPL/LCR Route Table Number)
1 to 3 digits
1 to 100 (Dependent on Table Type)
Not allowed
Not allowed
These fields assign new values to the four time zones for the selected table type. Valid entries
depend on the "TYPE" field:
COS - 1 to 64
DRL - 1 to 16
FRLP - 1 to 32

QPL - 1 to 8
RPN - 1 to 100 (LCR Route Table Number) *

* The RPN option in this field defines the LCR route table number for each route pattern defined.
Entry of a  erases the current value. For the COS, DRL, FRLP, and QPL tables,
the value defaults to the original definition number. For the RPN table, the value defaults to
undefined.

3-258

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
LCR/AUTHORIZATION TZ CHANGE ASSIGNMENT (CMD 343)
PERCEPTION 4000

COMMANDS

SYSTEM ERROR MESSAGES
The following error message is unique to this command.
D34300 - N - Invalid data at TZ1, TZ2, TZ3, or TZ4
RELATED COMMANDS
Class of Service Assignment (CMD 334)
Destination Restriction Level Assignment (CMD 337)
Facility Restriction Level Profile Assignment (CMD 387)
LCR Routing Table Assignment (CMD 383)
LCR Special Routing Assignment (CMD 384)
Time Zone Assignment (CMD 336)
UNP Routing Assignment (CMD 302)

3-259

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
LABEL PRINT (CMD 312)
PERCEPTION 4000

COMMANDS

LABEL PRINT (CMD 312)
Key label(s) for the flexible keys on PERCEPTION 4000 digital telephones are printed with this command.
Command Keyword:

LABEL_PRINT

Category Name:

Utility

PREREQUISITE COMMANDS
Station Assignment (CMD 330)
Station Feature Key Assignment (CMD 331)

OPERATIONS
Available operations:

DISPLAY

The function and required data fields for each operation are described in this section.

DISPLAY

TYPE | PRM DN | PRINTER | OPTION |

req

opt

This operation prints a digital telephone flexible key label for the specified prime directory number. Each label
sheet contains three labels. In a loop function, the labels print in consecutive order, filling each sheet to the end of
the loop. Each new line of input causes a form feed and begins printing labels on the first label of the next sheet.
Looping is allowed in the “PRM DN” field.

PARAMETERS
Each field parameter is described in this section. Any variations for a particular operation are noted separately.
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:

TYPE (Digital Telephone Type)
Keyword
Predefined ASCII characters
Keywords:

2010
ID10
2020
ID20

-

PERCEPTION 4000 10-key digital telephone
PERCEPTION 4000 10-key digital telephone with DIU
PERCEPTION 4000 20-key digital telephone
PERCEPTION 4000 20-key digital telephone with DIU

This field defines the format for the label.

3-260

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
LABEL PRINT (CMD 312)
PERCEPTION 4000
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:
LOOP:

COMMANDS

PRM DN (Prime Directory Number)
DN Type
1 to 5 digits
0 to 99999
Allowed
This optional field selects the telephone(s) for which the labels are to be printed.

FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:

PRINTER (Type of Printer)
Keyword
Predefined ASCII characters
Keywords:

IBM

- IBM Proprinter Model XL24 emulation for Toshiba ExpressWriter printer
with Alternative Graphic mode (AGM mode) (Default)
TOSH - Toshiba emulation for Toshiba Model P351 or PS321 printers

The "PRINTER" field selects the appropriate printer.
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:

OPTION (Key Position Option)
Keyword
Predefined ASCII characters
Keywords:

MLIN - Print the multiple directory numbers for multi-line hunt key positions
PRM - Print the prime directory number for multi-line hunt key positions (Default)

The "OPTION" field provides the option of printing either the prime directory number (DN) or
unique multiple DNs for every multi-line hunt key position. For example, if there are three multiple
lines on a given station, then selecting PRM as the print option will print the prime DN for all three
multi-line hunt key positions. On the other hand, selecting MLIN as the print option will print each
key's unique multiple DN. A station's flexible keys can be assigned as multi-line hunt keys via the
Station Feature Key Assignment command (CMD 331).
If a directory number contained within a multi-line hunt group has a secondary appearance at
another station, then that line's unique multiple DN will always be printed on the other station's
corresponding key, regardless of what is entered (PRM, MLIN, or a ) in the OPTION field.

SYSTEM ERROR MESSAGES
The following error messages are unique to this command.
C31200 - Not a 2010/2020 telephone prime DN
C31201 - Timeout during print request

3-261

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
LOGICAL LINE CALL FORWARD ASSIGNMENT (CMD 322)
PERCEPTION 4000

COMMANDS

LOGICAL LINE CALL FORWARD ASSIGNMENT (CMD 322)
The Logical Line Call Forward Assignment command allows the system administrator to assign, remove, or
display a call-forward activation of the specified logical line directory number.
Command Keyword:

LLINE_CALL_FORWARD

Category Name:

Station

PREREQUISITE COMMANDS
Coordinated Numbering Plan Assignment (CMD 303)
Numbering Plan Assignment (CMD 300)
Station Assignment (CMD 330)
Station Feature Key Assignment (CMD 331)
Trunk Assignment (CMD 313)
Trunk Group Assignment (CMD 310)
Uniform Numbering Plan Assignment (CMD 301)

OPERATIONS
Available operations:

MODIFY
DISPLAY

The function and required data fields for each operation are described in this section.

MODIFY

DN

TYPE

DESTINATION

req

opt

This operation changes the current Call Forward type of the specified logical line directory number. If a
 is entered in the "TYPE" field, the Call Forward type for the "DN" will be deleted.

DISPLAY

DN

req

TYPE

DESTINATION

locked

This operation displays the current Call Forward destination of the specified logical line directory number.

3-262

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
LOGICAL LINE CALL FORWARD ASSIGNMENT (CMD 322)
PERCEPTION 4000

COMMANDS

PARAMETERS
Each field parameter is described in this section. Any variations for a particular operation are noted separately.
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:
LOOP:

DN (Logical Line Directory Number)
DN Type
1 to 5 digits
1 to 99999
Not allowed
The "DN" field, which is required in both the MODIFY and DISPLAY operations, specifies the
registered logical line directory number.

FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:

TYPE (Call Forward Type)
Keyword
Predefined ASCII characters
Keywords:

CFAC - Call Forward All Calls
CFBN - Call Forward Busy No Answer
CFNA - Call Forward No Answer

The "TYPE" identifies the type of call forwarding programmed on the specified logical line
directory number. A  entered in this field in a MODIFY operation deletes the
current setting.
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:
RANGE:

DESTINATION (Call Forwarding Destination)
Dialing Digits
1 to 24 digits
0 to 9
Not allowed
This field specifies the Call Forwarding destination for the specified "DN." Valid destinations
include an internal attendant or station directory number, and an external directory number which
includes the appropriate outgoing access code, such as for Least Cost Routing, Direct Trunk
Access, and private networking. The "DESTINATION" is optional in a MODIFY operation, and
locked in a DISPLAY operation.

SYSTEM ERROR MESSAGES
The following error messages are unique to this command.
C32200
C32201
C32202
C32203
C32204

-

Directory number is not a logical line directory number
Directory number does not exist
Destination is not required to de-activate call forwarding
Destination is required
Destination does not exist

3-263

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
M&A SECURITY LEVEL AND ACCESS ASSIGNMENT (CMD 403)
PERCEPTION 4000

COMMANDS

M&A SECURITY LEVEL AND ACCESS ASSIGNMENT (CMD 403)
The M&A Security Level and Access Assignment command sets up or modifies login security passwords within
the administrator's jurisdiction. The administrator may also review his/her own security setup, and change the
security setup for commands and/or operations of a lower privileged level. Note that reviewing or changing
security setups that are on the same or higher privilege levels is not permitted.
Command Keyword:

M/A_SECURITY_ASSIGN

Category Name:

Administration

PREREQUISITE COMMANDS
There are no prerequisites for this command.
OPERATIONS
Available operations:

PASSWORD
MODIFY
DISPLAY

The function and required data fields for each operation are described in this section.

PASSWORD (PWD)

SEC LVL

req

This operation assigns or re-assigns a security password for a lower hierarchical level or for the administrator.
The "SEC LVL" field is required. Prompts requesting entry of a security password and verification of the new
password assist in this operation. The password may be up to 15 characters, beginning with either an alpha or
numeric character.

MODIFY

SEC LVL CMD OPER ALW OPER ALW OPER ALW OPER ALW OPER ALW OPER ALW
req

opt

This operation modifies access to commands and/or operations for specific commands. The administrator may
only modify those commands and/or operations assigned to a hierarchical level below his/her level, and may not
modify his/her own capabilities. The "SEC LVL" and "CMD" fields are required.

3-264

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
M&A SECURITY LEVEL AND ACCESS ASSIGNMENT (CMD 403)
PERCEPTION 4000

COMMANDS

DISPLAY

SEC LVL CMD OPER OPER OPER OPER OPER OPER OPER OPER OPER OPER OPER OPER

req

opt

This operation displays the commands and/or operations allowed for the specified security level. The
administrator may examine his/her own privileges or those of a lower hierarchical level. “SEC LVL” is a required
field. Looping is permitted in the “CMD” field.
PARAMETERS
Each field parameter is described in this section. Any variations for a particular operation are noted separately.
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:

SEC LVL (Security Level)
Keyword
Predefined ASCII characters
Keywords:

MFG
DIST
USER
TN1 to TN32

-

Manufacturer
Distributor
User
Tenant 1 to Tenant 32

The "SEC LVL" is the primary key for this command and is required in all operations. A maximum
of 35 levels may be defined. The 'Manufacturer' level is the most privileged, followed by the
'Distributor' level. The lowest privileged levels are the 32 tenant levels. Each "SEC LVL" is
assigned a security password, a list of commands that it can access, and the degree of access
for each command.
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:
LOOP:

CMD (Command ID)
Decimal with fixed length
3 digits
000 to 999
Allowed in a DISPLAY operation only
This field defines commands which are available for the selected "SEC LVL". Looping is allowed
in this field to display several commands at once. The administrator may display only those
commands at his/her own security level or any lower level(s), and modify only those commands
at lower levels.

FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:

OPER (Operation Keyword)
Keyword
Predefined ASCII characters
Keywords:

ADD
ALM
BKP
CHG

-

Add
Alarm Operation
Backup Operation
Change

INI
INL
INS
MKB

-

Initialize
Install
In-Service
Make Busy

3-265

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
M&A SECURITY LEVEL AND ACCESS ASSIGNMENT (CMD 403)
PERCEPTION 4000

COMMANDS
CMP
CNT
CPY
CRT
DEL
DIR
DIS
DSP
ENB
FMT
FRE
IDL

-

Compare
Count Operation
Copy
Create Operation
Delete
Display Directory
Disable
Display
Enable
Format
Free
Idle

MOD
OOS
PSWD
RES
RMV
RST
SET
SHW
SUP
SWO
SWP
ALL

-

Modify
Out of Serivce
Password
Restore
Remove
Reset
Set
Show
Setup Operation
Switchover
Swap
Allow/disallow the command

This field selects or displays operations which are available for the specified command ID. Only
those operations that the administrator is permitted to use may be modified. ALL is used to
specify whether all the operations within the command are allowed or denied.
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:

ALW (Allowance)
Keyword
Predefined ASCII characters
Keywords:

YES - Sets the preceding attribute to Allow
NO - Sets the preceding attribute to Deny

This field sets the allowance/denial attribute of a command or operation for the selected "SEC
LVL." Each "ALW" field sets the attribute of the preceding operation.
SYSTEM ERROR MESSAGES
The following error messages are unique to this command.
C40300
C40301
C40302
C40303
C40304
C40305
C40306
C40307

-

Check security level
Check security password
Password unchanged; auto logout
Check command ID
Check operation ID
Check command allowance
Check operation allowance
Input line overflowed

COMMENTS
The security level affects the capabilities of the user to access commands in the Maintenance and Administration
subsystem. It is also used to define accessibility within each command, i.e., whether the user may only display
reports or is permitted to modify data controlled by the command.
Access levels must be set for each command. MMI uses this information to control the extent of user operations.

3-266

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
MEMORY TEST (CMD 144)
PERCEPTION 4000

COMMANDS

MEMORY TEST (CMD 144)
When enabled, the Memory Test command reads all program and data bytes in the MCPU's and LCPUs'
memory. The test checks to see if any intermediate errors are present in the memory. This command should be
enabled prior to performing a file consolidation (CMD 153) to help ensure that the file consolidation procedure is
not interrupted by an error detection. If a memory error is detected during the Memory Test procedure, then the
system will perform a restart (or will perform a switchover if redundant components are used). After system
operation resumes, a system error message will be sent to an on-line printer/terminal. If a restart or switchover
occurs after performing the Memory Test procedure, contact Toshiba Technical Support at (800) 777-4873 for
further instructions regarding error isolation and correction.
Command Keyword:

MEMORY_TEST

Category Name:

Maintenance

PREREQUISITE COMMANDS
There are no prerequisites for this command.

OPERATIONS
Available operation:

ENABLE

The function and required data fields for each operation are described in this section.

ENABLE

SIDE

req

The ENABLE operation activates the memory test for the selected side(s) (either active, standby, or both sides).
Note that the test takes about seven or eight minutes to complete.

PARAMETERS
Each field parameter is described in this section. Any variations for a particular operation are noted separately.
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:

SIDE
Keyword
Predefined ASCII characters

3-267

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
MEMORY TEST (CMD 144)
PERCEPTION 4000
Keywords:

COMMANDS
ACT
- Active Side
SBY
- Standby Side
BOTH - Both Sides

This field selects the system side(s) on which the memory test will take place.

SYSTEM ERROR MESSAGES
The following error messages are unique to this command.
C14400
C14401
C14402
C14403

-

Map table has an error
Number of files exceeds the defined value
An error occurred when checking LCPU memory or a timeout
Standby is not in service

RELATED COMMAND
File Consolidation (CMD 153)

3-268

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
MISCELLANEOUS DEVICE ASSIGNMENT (CMD 400)
PERCEPTION 4000

COMMANDS

MISCELLANEOUS DEVICE ASSIGNMENT (CMD 400)
This command sets up the Announcement Machine/Music-on-Hold table. The table defines the equipment
number and usage for each announcement machine and Music-on-Hold device. Up to 64 announcement
machines and four external Music-on-Hold sources are supported in the system.
Command Keyword:

MISC_DEVICE_ASSIGN

Category Name:

System

PREREQUISITE COMMANDS
There are no prerequisites for this command.

OPERATIONS
Available operations:

ADD
DELETE
DISPLAY

The function and required data fields for each operation are described in this section.

ADD

DEV

EQUIP #

req

USAGE

opt

This operation adds an announcement machine or Music-on-Hold device to the table. The "DEV" and "EQUIP #"
fields are required. The "USAGE" field defaults to GEN (General Intercept) for an announcement machine.

DELETE

DEV

req

This operation deletes an announcement machine or Music-on-Hold device from the table. The "DEV" field is
required.

3-269

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
MISCELLANEOUS DEVICE ASSIGNMENT (CMD 400)
PERCEPTION 4000

COMMANDS

DISPLAY

DEV

EQUIP #

USAGE

opt

This operation displays all announcement machines and Music-on-Hold devices that meet the conditions
established for each field. All of the fields are optional.

PARAMETERS
Each field parameter is described in this section. Any variations for a particular operation are noted separately.
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:

DEV (Device Number)
Keyword
Predefined ASCII characters
Keywords:

AM01 - Announcement Machine #1
AM02 - Announcement Machine #2
:
:
AM64 - Announcement Machine #64
MS01 - Music-on-Hold Device #1
MS02 - Music-on-Hold Device #2
:
:
MS04 - Music-on-Hold Device #4

The device number field provides device type and number identification.
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:
RANGE:
LOOP:

EQUIP # (Equipment Number)
EQ Type
5 or 6 digits
(0)10101 to 101408 *
Not allowed
Not allowed
* Use the following chart to determine valid ranges for various types of equipment.
For Music-on-Hold (MOH) BSTI equipment cards, the following ranges apply:
Digits

Range

Hardware

First digit(s)
Second two digits
Last two digits

(0)1~10
01~11, 13
01~16

Shelf no.
Card slot no.
Circuit no.

For Music-on-Hold (MOH) XSTI and announcement machine (ANN) EM1I cards, the following
are valid ranges:

3-270

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
MISCELLANEOUS DEVICE ASSIGNMENT (CMD 400)
PERCEPTION 4000

COMMANDS
Digits

Range

Hardware

First digit(s)
Second two digits
Last two digits

(0)1~10
01~14
01~08

Shelf no.
Card slot no.
Circuit no.

For an announcement machine (ANN) EM2I card, the following ranges apply:
Digits

Range

Hardware

First digit(s)
Second two digits
Last two digits

(0)1~10
01~14
01~06

Shelf no.
Card slot no.
Circuit no.

This field defines the equipment number for the announcement machine or Music-on-Hold
device. The equipment number is unique in the system, and must be associated with an EM1I,
EM2I, or BSTI card. The first digit(s) represent the shelf number, the next two digits represent the
card slot number, and finally, the last two digits represent the circuit number.
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:

USAGE (Announcement Machine Usage)
Keyword
Predefined ASCII characters
Keywords:

ACD
UCD
DID
GEN
AUX

-

Automatic Call Distribution Announcement
Uniform Call Distribution Announcement
Direct Inward Dialing Announcement
General Intercept
Other (Auxiliary)

This field contains information about the usage of each announcement machine. The default
usage is GEN.

SYSTEM ERROR MESSAGES
The following error messages are unique to this command.
C40000
C40001
C40002
C40003
C40004
C40005
C40006
C40007
C40008
C40009

-

Announcement machine is already in use
Announcement machine is not defined
Music-on-Hold device is already in use
Music-on-Hold device is not defined
Invalid usage
Equipment number is already in use
Invalid equipment number for BSTI card
Invalid equipment number for SRTI card
Remove system music by using Command 408
Announcement used in announcement pattern; remove by using Command 353

RELATED COMMAND
Announcement Pattern Assignment (CMD 353)

3-271

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
MODEM POOL ASSIGNMENT (CMD 347)
PERCEPTION 4000

COMMANDS

MODEM POOL ASSIGNMENT (CMD 347)
The Modem Pool Assignment command adds, removes, modifies, and displays modem pools which may be used
for incoming, outgoing, or bothway calling. The system supports up to 32 groups of 64 modems per group.
Command Keyword:

MODEM_POOL_ASSIGN

Category Name:

Data

PREREQUISITE COMMANDS
There are no prerequisites for this command.
OPERATIONS
Available operations:

ADD
DELETE
MODIFY
DISPLAY

The function and required data fields for each operation are described in this section.

ADD

GRP#

NAME

TYPE

INDEX

req

opt

req/opt

opt

MODEM EN

DIU EN

req

This operation adds modem pool group(s) or member(s) to the modem pool database. When adding a new group,
the “GRP#”, “TYPE”, "MODEM EN", and "DIU EN" fields are required. When adding a new member to an
existing group, the “GRP#”, “MODEM EN”, and “DIU EN” fields are required. Loops are permitted in the “GRP#”
and “INDEX” fields.
DELETE

GRP#

req

MODEM EN

DIU EN

req/opt

This operation removes existing modem pool group(s) or member(s) from the modem pool database. The “GRP#”
and either the "MODEM EN" or "DIU EN" fields are required. The keyword ALL may be used for deletion of all of
the modems or DIUs assigned to the specified group number.

3-272

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
MODEM POOL ASSIGNMENT (CMD 347)
PERCEPTION 4000

COMMANDS

MODIFY

GRP#

req

NAME

TYPE

req/opt

This operation modifies the modem pool group’s name or type of modem pool. The “GRP#” and either the
"NAME" or "TYPE" fields are required.

DISPLAY

GRP#

NAME

TYPE

INDEX

MODEM EN

DIU EN

opt

This operation displays modem pool group(s) and their member(s) that meet the conditions established for each
field. Loops are permitted in the “GRP#” and “INDEX” fields for display purpose only.
PARAMETERS
Each field parameter is described in this section. Any variations for a particular operation are noted separately.
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:
LOOP:

GRP# (Group Number)
Decimal
1 or 2 digits
1 to 32 (or to the maximum system configuration)
Allowed in ADD and DISPLAY operations
This field, the primary key for the command, assigns a number to a modem group. The system
supports up to 32 groups of modems.

FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:

NAME
Text
0 to 9 ASCII characters
This field defines the modem pool group’s name with a maximum of 9 characters/numbers
including punctuation and spaces. Looping is not allowed in any operations.

FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:

TYPE (Type of Call Usage)
Keywords
Predefined ASCII characters
Keywords:

INC - Incoming Call Usage
OUT - Outgoing Call Usage
BWY - Bothway Call Usage

3-273

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
MODEM POOL ASSIGNMENT (CMD 347)
PERCEPTION 4000

COMMANDS

This field defines the modem pool group type as being either incoming only, outgoing only, or
bothway calling.
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:
LOOP:

INDEX
Decimal
1 or 2 digits
1 to 64
Allowed in a DISPLAY operation only
Modem pools use distributed hunting, thereby allowing more even usage of system and
peripheral resources. The order of hunting is defined by the "INDEX", going from the lowest to
the highest number, then wrapping around to the lowest number again.

FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:
LOOP:

MODEM EN (Modem Equipment Number)
EQ Type / Keyword
5 or 6 digits / Predefined ASCII characters
(0)10101 to 101408 *
Not allowed
Keyword:

ALL

* Use the following chart to determine valid ranges for various types of equipment.
For BSTI equipment cards, the following ranges apply:
Digits

Range

Hardware

First digit(s)
Second two digits
Last two digits

(0)1~10
01~11, 13
01~16

Shelf no.
Card slot no.
Circuit no.

For XSTI equipment cards, the following are valid ranges:
Digits

Range

Hardware

First digit(s)
Second two digits
Last two digits

(0)1~10
01~14
01~08

Shelf no.
Card slot no.
Circuit no.

This field defines the modem equipment number for the designated modem pool group number.
The modem and DIU equipment numbers (DIU EN) must belong to the same LCPU. The first
digit(s) represents the shelf number of the BSTI or XSTI card, the next two digits represent the
card slot number, and finally, the last two digits represent the circuit number. Only modem
equipment numbers which are analog ports can be assigned to modem pool group(s). The
keyword ALL may be used for deletion of all of the modems assigned to the specified group
number.
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:
LOOP:

3-274

DIU EN (DIU Equipment Number)
EQ Type / Keyword
5 or 6 digits / Predefined ASCII characters
(0)10101 to 101316 *
Not allowed

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
MODEM POOL ASSIGNMENT (CMD 347)
PERCEPTION 4000

COMMANDS

Keyword:

ALL

* Use the following chart to determine valid ranges for a DIU equipment number.
For DSTI equipment cards, the following ranges apply:
Digits

Range

Hardware

First digit(s)
Second two digits
Last two digits

(0)1~10
01~11, 13
01~16

Shelf no.
Card slot no.
Circuit no.

NOTE: Slot 13 is unavailable if the card is a 2B type.
This field defines the data interface unit equipment number for the modem pool group member.
The "DIU EN" and the "MODEM EN" must belong to the same LCPU. Only DIU equipment
numbers which are digital ports can be assigned to modem pool group(s). The keyword ALL may
be used for deletion of all of the DIUs assigned to the specified group number.
NOTES:
1. DIUs may be installed on DSTI cards configured for 1B or 2B operation. When installed on a
DSTI card configured for 2B operation, a '2B' device must already be assigned to the card.
2. If installed on a DSTI card configured for 2B operation, the circuit's voice channel is ignored
by the system.
SYSTEM ERROR MESSAGES
The following error messages are unique to this command.
C34700
C34701
C34702
C34703
C34704
C34705
C34706
C34707
C34708
C34709
C34710
C34711
C34712
C34713

-

This modem equipment number is already allocated in the system
This DIU equipment number is already allocated in the system
Modem pool member is not defined
Invalid modem pool index
Illegal pool group name
DIU/Modem pair must be in the same LCPU
Data must be entered in input fields
Inconsistent pool name
Inconsistent pool type
Inconsistent card type
No more space to add modem
Must enter either modem or DIU equipment number
Name cannot exceed nine characters
Must enter either name or type

COMMENTS
A modem or DIU equipment number cannot be defined in more than one modem pool group.
All modem-DIU pairs, and all pairs within a given group must reside in the same LCPU.

3-275

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
MODEM POOL ASSIGNMENT (CMD 347)
PERCEPTION 4000
RELATED COMMANDS
Data Interface Parameter Assignment (CMD 361)
Data Station Assignment (CMD 360)
Data Station Parameter Assignment (CMD 362)
High Usage Data Destination Assignment (CMD 368)

3-276

COMMANDS

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
NAME DIALING ASSIGNMENT (CMD 367)
PERCEPTION 4000

COMMANDS

NAME DIALING ASSIGNMENT (CMD 367)
The Name Dialing Assignment command adds, deletes, or displays up to 128 name strings which may be used
via keyboard dialing to address internal or external data destinations.
Command Keyword:

NAME_DIALING

Category Name:

Data

PREREQUISITE COMMANDS
Data Hunting Assignment (CMD 366)
Data Station Assignment (CMD 360)
OPERATIONS
Available operations:

ADD
DELETE
DISPLAY

The function and required data fields for each operation are described in this section.

ADD

NAME

DESTINATION NUMBER

req

This operation adds the character string (name) and its translated destination number (an individual data station
number or a data hunt group) to the Name Dialing table.

DELETE

NAME

req

NAME

NAME

NAME

NAME

NAME

NAME

opt

This operation deletes the character string (name) and its translated destination number (an individual data
station number or a data hunt group) from the Name Dialing table. The first "NAME" field is required, while the
remaining fields are optional.

3-277

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
NAME DIALING ASSIGNMENT (CMD 367)
PERCEPTION 4000

COMMANDS

DISPLAY

INDEX

NAME

DESTINATION NUMBER

opt

This operation displays the names and destination numbers in the Name Dialing table. If a  and a
 are entered in the "INDEX" field, all entries in the table display.
PARAMETERS
Each field parameter is described in this section. Any variations for a particular operation are noted separately.
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
LOOP:
SCOPE:

NAME (Character String or Name)
Text (Alphanumeric)
1 to 9 characters
Not allowed
Not allowed
The first character of a name string must be an alpha character; all others may be alpha or
numeric. Embedded spaces are not allowed in the construction of a name string. A maximum of
128 names (entries) are allowed in the table. The "NAME" field is required in an ADD operation.
In a DELETE operation, the first “NAME” field is required, while the rest are optional.

FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:
LOOP:
RANGE:

DESTINATION NUMBER
Dialing Digits plus * and #
1 to 24 digits (including * and #)
0 to 9, *, #
Not allowed
Not allowed
An internal or external destination number is assigned to each name string. External numbers
must begin with a direct trunk group access code or the Least Cost Routing access code. Pauses
and dial tone detection are not recognized in this field. Feature access codes are not allowed,
however, system speed call numbers are. This field is required in an ADD operation.

FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:
LOOP:
RANGE:

INDEX (Index Number)
Decimal
1 to 3 digits
1 to 128
Allowed
Not allowed
This number is provided by the system during a DISPLAY operation for the administrator's
convenience. The number indicates how many entries are in the Name Dialing table.

3-278

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
NAME DIALING ASSIGNMENT (CMD 367)
PERCEPTION 4000

COMMANDS

SYSTEM ERROR MESSAGES
The following error messages are unique to this command.
C36700
C36701
C36702
C36703
C36704
C36705
C36706

-

Name string is already defined
No space to add more
Not found in field N
Check format of name string
Invalid destination number
Undefined destination number
This is not a DIU DN

3-279

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
NIGHT BELL ASSIGNMENT (CMD 405)
PERCEPTION 4000

COMMANDS

NIGHT BELL ASSIGNMENT (CMD 405)
The Night Bell Assignment command assigns night bells or chimes to analog line circuits (BSTI or XSTI cards).
These bells are used as Universal Night Answer devices as well as attendant overflow and alternate call
termination points.
Command Keyword:

NIGHT_BELL_ASSIGN

Category Name:

System

PREREQUISITE COMMANDS
There are no prerequisites for this command.
OPERATIONS
Available operations:

ADD
DELETE
DISPLAY

The function and required data fields for each operation are described in this section.

ADD

UNA BELL #

EQUIP #

req

This operation adds a night bell device to the system. Both fields are required. The night bell can only be
connected to a BSTI or XSTI card.

DELETE

UNA BELL #

req

This operation deletes a night bell from the system.

3-280

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
NIGHT BELL ASSIGNMENT (CMD 405)
PERCEPTION 4000

COMMANDS

DISPLAY

UNA BELL #

EQUIP #

opt

This operation displays all night bells that meet the conditions established for each field.
PARAMETERS
Each field parameter is described in this section. Any variations for a particular operation are noted separately.
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:

UNA BELL # (Universal Night Answer Bell Number)
Keyword
Predefined ASCII characters
Keywords:

BL01 ~ BL64

This field assigns the night bell device designator.
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:
RANGE:

EQUIP # (Equipment Number)
EQ Type
5 or 6 digits
(0)10101 to 101408 *
Not allowed
* Use the following chart to determine valid ranges for various types of equipment.
For BSTI equipment cards, the following ranges apply:
Digits

Range

Hardware

First digit(s)
Second two digits
Last two digits

(0)1~10
01~11, 13
01~16

Shelf no.
Card slot no.
Circuit no.

For XSTI equipment cards, the following are valid ranges:
Digits

Range

Hardware

First digit(s)
Second two digits
Last two digits

(0)1~10
01~14
01~08

Shelf no.
Card slot no.
Circuit no.

This field contains the equipment number for the night bell. The first digit(s) represent the shelf
number, the next two digits represent the card slot number, and finally, the last two digits
represent the circuit number.

3-281

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
NIGHT BELL ASSIGNMENT (CMD 405)
PERCEPTION 4000
SYSTEM ERROR MESSAGES
The following error messages are unique to this command.
C40500
C40501
C40502
C40503
C40504

-

UNA night bell is already in use
UNA night bell is not defined
Invalid equipment number for this card type
Equipment number is already in use
Equipment number and card type mismatch

RELATED COMMANDS
Attendant Group Assignment (CMD 372)
DID/CCSA/DNIS LDN Assignment (CMD 316)
DID/CCSA/DNIS Trunk Group Assignment (CMD 314)
Internal Call Alternate Routing Assignment (CMD 374)
Trunk Group Routing Assignment (CMD 307)
Trunk Routing Assignment (CMD 308)

3-282

COMMANDS

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
NUMBERING PLAN ASSIGNMENT (CMD 300)
PERCEPTION 4000

COMMANDS

NUMBERING PLAN ASSIGNMENT (CMD 300)
The Numbering Plan Assignment command assigns system feature access codes and facility access codes
(trunk groups, LCR access, and networking). The command also specifies the length of the post dialing digits for
certain features. In addition, the command modifies an access code for a feature number and displays access
codes for one or more feature numbers.
Note that ambiguity may not exist within the system's numbering plan, including station numbers and steering
digits. Ambiguity is defined where any one number is equal to the prefix of another. For example, the following
numbers may not co-exist: 72 and 723 or 678 and 67820.
Command Keyword:

NUMBERING_PLAN

Category Name:

Dialing

PREREQUISITE COMMANDS
There are no prerequisites for this command.
OPERATIONS
Available operations:

MODIFY
DELETE
DISPLAY

The function and required data fields for each operation are described in this section.

MODIFY

FNO

ACC

req

LEN PD1

LEN PD2

opt

This operation changes an access code and/or post dialing digits for the specified feature. Ranges are not
permitted. A trunk group access code can be deleted with this operation by entering blanks (i.e., spaces) in the
“ACC” field.

DELETE

FNO

ACC

req

opt

This operation deletes the access code of a feature. Ranges are not permitted.

3-283

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
NUMBERING PLAN ASSIGNMENT (CMD 300)
PERCEPTION 4000

COMMANDS

DISPLAY

FNO

ACC

LEN PD1

LEN PD2

NAME

ABBR

opt

This operation displays access codes and the lengths of the post dialing digits of one or more features. All of the
fields are optional. If no data is entered in any of the fields, all feature access codes, their post dialing digit
lengths, and feature names will be displayed.
PARAMETERS
Each field parameter is described in this section. Any variations for a particular operation are noted separately.
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:
RANGE:
LOOP:

FNO (Feature Number)
Decimal with fixed length
3 digits
001 to 333
Allowed in a DISPLAY operation
Allowed in DELETE and MODIFY operations
FNO
001
nnn
256
258
259
260
261
262
263
264
265
266
267
269
282
283
284
285
286
287
288
289
290
291
292
294

3-284

Feature Name
Direct Trunk Access - Trunk Group 1
Direct Trunk Access - Trunk Group nnn (1 halts the display, pressing  resumes it, and pressing  aborts the operation.

PARAMETERS
Each field parameter is described in this section. Any variations for a particular operation are noted separately.
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:
RANGE:
LOOP:

VERSION# (Release Version Number)
Decimal with fixed length
3 digits
(See below)
Not allowed
Not allowed
This field displays the system's current software version number. If a value is entered, it must
match the software version number exactly, i.e., 673. If the value is not known, press the 
key and the value is inserted automatically.

3-289

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
PATCH REPORT (CMD 143)
PERCEPTION 4000
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:
RANGE:
LOOP:

COMMANDS

PATCH ID# (Patch Identification Number)
Decimal
Up to 3 digits
1 to 255
Allowed in a DISPLAY operation only
Not allowed
The "PATCH ID#" field provides a list of all patches applied to the system's software.

SYSTEM ERROR MESSAGES
The following error messages are unique to this command.
C14300 - Check the release version, input is out of range
C14301 - Check release version

3-290

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
PRIVATE/HOTLINE ASSIGNMENTS (CMD 332)
PERCEPTION 4000

COMMANDS

PRIVATE/HOTLINE ASSIGNMENTS (CMD 332)
The Private/Hotline Assignments command assigns a trunk access code and optional destination number for a
private line or hot line. Once assigned, when the private line key is pressed, the system automatically seizes a
trunk which is reserved for this private line and outpulses to the optional destination if programmed. When the
hotline key is pressed, the system automatically dials a predefined destination.
Command Keyword:

PVT/HOT_ASSIGN

Category Name:

Station

PREREQUISITE COMMANDS
Station Assignment (CMD 330)
Station Feature Key Assignment (CMD 331)
For Private Line Assignments:
Numbering Plan Assignment (CMD 300)
Trunk Assignment (CMD 313)
Trunk Group Assignment (CMD 310)
Trunk Hunting Assignment (CMD 309)
OPERATIONS
Available operations:

MODIFY
DELETE
DISPLAY

The function and required data fields for each operation are described in this section.

MODIFY

TYPE

HOT/PVT DN

req

TGN

DESTINATION NUMBER

PRM DN

req*

req**

opt

DEV

POS

output
only

* The "TGN" field is required for modification of a private line only. If data is entered in this field for a hotline,
an error message displays.
** The "DESTINATION NUMBER" field is required for hotlines, but optional for private lines.
This operation modifies the destination number of the private line or hotline key.

3-291

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
PRIVATE/HOTLINE ASSIGNMENTS (CMD 332)
PERCEPTION 4000

COMMANDS

DELETE

HOT/PVT DN

req

This operation deletes the hot line feature on an analog telephone only. To delete a hotline or a private line on a
digital telephone, use the Station Feature Key Assignment command (CMD 331).

DISPLAY

TYPE

INDEX

req

output
only

HOT/PVT DN

TGN

DESTINATION NUMBER

opt

PRM DN

DEV

POS

output
only

opt

This operation displays all telephone keys that meet the conditions established for each field.
PARAMETERS
Each field parameter is described in this section. Any variations for a particular operation are noted separately.
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:

TYPE (Key Type)
Keyword
Predefined ASCII characters
Keywords:

PVT - Private Line
HOT - Hot Line

This field selects the line type, which is originally defined in the Station Feature Key Assignment
command (CMD 331). If PVT is entered in this field in a MODIFY operation, the "TGN" field
requires data input. Note that the keyword PVT includes both the primary and secondary private
lines (PVT and SPVT) as programmed in CMD 331.
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:

INDEX (Index Number)
Decimal (Output only)
1 to 3 digits
1 to 256
This field is used internally as a counter for the Private/Hotline table. Its value does not indicate
an actual position or set any priority for data entered in this command.

3-292

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
PRIVATE/HOTLINE ASSIGNMENTS (CMD 332)
PERCEPTION 4000
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:
RANGE:

COMMANDS

HOT/PVT DN (Directory Number for HOT/PVT Line)
DN Type
1 to 5 digits
0 to 99999
Allowed in a DISPLAY operation
This field defines the directory number of the private/hotline. The number must be the directory
number assigned to the key with the Station Feature Key Assignment command (CMD 331), or it
must be the prime directory number if a single-line telephone is being configured for ringdown.
The number assigned to a private line is not accessible to station direct dialing within the system.
Only the attendant may direct calls to this number. Prime lines may not be used as hotlines on
multiline telephones.

FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:

TGN (Trunk Group Number)
Decimal
1 to 3 digits
1 to 256 (or to the maximum system configuration)
This field is valid for private line types only. Values from 1 to 256 designate the trunk group
numbers which were predefined as private line trunk groups in the Trunk Group Assignment
command (CMD 310).

FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:

DESTINATION NUMBER
Dialing Digits plus * and #
24 digits
0 to 9, *, #
The destination number field is required for hotlines and only used for private lines if an offpremises ringdown circuit is desired. Internal destination numbers are legal entries for hotlines,
but not for private lines. Off-premises numbers are legal for both types; however, a trunk or LCR
access code is required for hotline off-premises numbers but should not be included in private
line destinations. Normally a destination is not defined for a private line.

FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:
RANGE:

PRM DN (Prime Directory Number)
DN Type
1 to 5 digits
0 to 99999
Allowed in a DISPLAY operation
The "PRM DN" field is the prime directory number of the device with the key being assigned. For
single line telephones, this number must be the same DN as defined in the "HOT/PVT DN" field
and must be entered.

FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:

DEV (Telephone Device Type)
Keyword
Predefined ASCII characters
Keywords:

4000 - PERCEPTION 4000 digital telephone
AD1 - Add-on module
EKT - Electronic telephone

3-293

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
PRIVATE/HOTLINE ASSIGNMENTS (CMD 332)
PERCEPTION 4000

COMMANDS
STD - Standard telephone
DKT - DKT digital telephone

The "DEV" field is an output only field that identifies the type of device the private line or hotline
resides on.
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:

POS (Key Assignment Position Number)
Decimal
1 or 2 digits
1 to 60
This is an output only field in a MODIFY operation and an optional field in a DISPLAY operation.
The "POS" is assigned with the Station Feature Key Assignment command (CMD 331).

SYSTEM ERROR MESSAGES
The following error messages are unique to this command.
C33200
C33201
C33202
C33203
C33204
C33205
C33206
C33207
C33208
C33209
C33210
C33211
C33212
C33213
C33214
C33215
C33216
C33217
C33218
C33219
C33220
C33221
C33222

-

Invalid directory number
Directory number is not consistent with the numbering plan
The selected trunk has been used as another private line
Invalid trunk access code
Invalid digits in the destination number
Prime directory number is missing
Invalid trunk access code
Invalid private trunk feature number
Invalid trunk group type
DA registration failed
No such hotline is assigned to this station
No such hotline is assigned in the system
No such private line exists in the system
No such phone device exists in the system
Cannot delete; need to be modified by command 331
This analog phone is not a hotline
In MODIFY operation; PRM DN field for private line is for output only
Must indicate trunk group number for private line
Destination field is required
TGN field is not required for hotline
Not a private trunk group
Timeout in XXX
Trunk group number should be non-ISDN type

RELATED COMMANDS
Trunk Group Routing Assignment (CMD 307)
Trunk Routing Assignment (CMD 308)

3-294

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
REDUNDANCY SELECTION ASSINGMENT (CMD 410)
PERCEPTION 4000

COMMANDS

REDUNDANCY SELECTION ASSIGNMENT (CMD 410)
In a redundant system, each Line/Trunk (L/T) shelf contains two power units. The Redundancy Selection
Assignment command changes or displays the L/T shelf power unit redundancy selections and the number of L/T
shelves in the system. Note that a system may have some redundant L/T shelf power units and some nonredundant.
Command Keyword:

REDUNDANCY_ASSIGN

Category Name:

System

PREREQUISITE COMMANDS
There are no prerequisites for this command.
OPERATIONS
Available operations:

MODIFY
DISPLAY

The function and required data fields for each operation are described in this section.

MODIFY

REDUNDANCY

# L/T SHELF

opt

This operation modifies the redundancy of L/T shelf power units, and the number of L/T shelves in the system.
Looping is not permitted in either of the optional fields.

DISPLAY

REDUNDANCY

# L/T SHELF

output only

This operation displays the redundancy selections and the number of L/T shelves in the system. Both fields are
output only. To display information, press  and .

3-295

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
REDUNDANCY SELECTION ASSINGMENT (CMD 410)
PERCEPTION 4000

COMMANDS

PARAMETERS
Each field parameter is described in this section. Any variations for a particular operation are noted separately.
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:

REDUNDANCY (Redundancy Selections)
Keyword
Predefined ASCII characters
Keywords:

YES - Redundant L/T Shelf Power
NO - Non-redundant L/T Shelf Power

This field selects the redundancy options for the L/T shelf power units. The default is NO.
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:
LOOP:
RANGE:

# L/T SHELF (Number of Line/Trunk Shelves)
Decimal
1 or 2 digits
1 to 10
Not allowed
Not allowed
This field specifies the number of L/T shelves in the system. The default is 1.

SYSTEM ERROR MESSAGES
The following error message is unique to this command.
C41001 - Number of L/T Shelves is out of range

3-296

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
SMDR CONFIGURATION ASSIGNMENT (CMD 409)
PERCEPTION 4000

COMMANDS

SMDR CONFIGURATION ASSIGNMENT (CMD 409)
The SMDR Configuration Assignment command defines whether the Station Message Detailed Recording logs
internal and/or external calls. External calls may further have all calls or only toll calls recorded. SMDR
information can be selected on a system level or on specific trunk groups.
Command Keyword:

SMDR_ASSIGN

Category Name:

Application Processor

PREREQUISITE COMMAND
Trunk Group Assignment (CMD 310)

This command is required if an entry is made in the
"TGN" field.

OPERATIONS
Available operations:

MODIFY
DISPLAY

The function and required data fields for each operation are described in this section.

MODIFY

TIMER

SMDR INC

SMDR OUT

TGN

INC CALLS

opt

OUT CALLS

TOLL CALLS ONLY

opt

This operation modifies SMDR configuration. The "TGN" field is required if any of the three fields following it are
to be modified.

DISPLAY

TIMER

SMDR INC

SMDR OUT

TGN

INC CALLS

OUT CALLS

TOLL CALLS ONLY

opt

This operation displays the SMDR selection on the system level as well as trunk groups.
PARAMETERS
Each field parameter is described in this section. Any variations for a particular operation are noted separately.

3-297

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
SMDR CONFIGURATION ASSIGNMENT (CMD 409)
PERCEPTION 4000
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:
DEFAULT:

COMMANDS

TIMER (SMDR Threshold Timer)
Decimal
1 or 2 digits
0 to 40 seconds
20 seconds
The "TIMER" field defines the value of the SMDR threshold timer, which determines how long an
outgoing trunk call must exist before the call is recorded. The timer is used in the absence of
answer supervision by the Central Office.

FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
DEFAULT:

SMDR INC (Incoming SMDR Recording)
Keyword
Predefined ASCII characters
NO
Keywords:

YES - Enable incoming SMDR recording
NO - Disable incoming SMDR recording

This field enables/disables incoming SMDR recording.
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
DEFAULT:

SMDR OUT (Outgoing SMDR Recording)
Keyword
Predefined ASCII characters
NO
Keywords:

YES - Enable outgoing SMDR recording
NO - Disable outgoing SMDR recording

This field enables/disables outgoing SMDR recording.
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:

TGN (Trunk Group Number)
Decimal
1 to 3 digits
1 to 256 (or to the maximum system configuration)
This field defines the trunk groups to be monitored. Ranges are allowed in both DISPLAY and
MODIFY operations. The maximum trunk group number is based on the system's configuration.
In a MODIFY operation, this field is required if any of the following three fields need to be
changed.

FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
DEFAULT:

INC CALLS (Screen Incoming Calls)
Keyword
Predefined ASCII characters
NO
Keywords:

YES - Screen incoming calls
NO - Do not screen incoming calls

This field enables/disables incoming SMDR recording for the specified trunk group number.

3-298

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
SMDR CONFIGURATION ASSIGNMENT (CMD 409)
PERCEPTION 4000
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
DEFAULT:

COMMANDS

OUT CALLS (Screen Outgoing Calls)
Keyword
Predefined ASCII characters
NO
Keywords:

YES - Screen outgoing calls
NO - Do not screen outgoing calls

This field enables/disables outgoing SMDR recording for the specified trunk group number. If this
field is set to YES (On), outgoing calls will be recorded. If set to NO (Off), the following field
selection (for TOLL CALLS ONLY) has no effect.
NOTE: The "TOLL CALLS ONLY" field is a subset of the "OUT CALLS" field. To record all
outgoing calls, set "OUT CALLS" to YES and "TOLL CALLS ONLY" to NO. To record toll calls
only, set both "OUT CALLS" and "TOLL CALLS ONLY" to YES.
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
DEFAULT:

TOLL CALLS ONLY
Keyword
Predefined ASCII characters
NO
Keywords:

YES - Limit SMDR recording to toll calls only
NO - Do not limit SMDR recording

This field can be used to limit SMDR recording of toll calls. If this field is set to YES, the Forced
Account Code Toll-free Tables (programmed in CMD 352) must be defined.
SYSTEM ERROR MESSAGES
The following error messages are unique to this command.
C40901 - Missing input after trunk group number fields
C40902 - Missing trunk group number input
C40903 - Missing input data
RELATED COMMANDS
Forced Account Code Toll-free Tables (CMD 352)

3-299

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
SECONDARY LINE APPEARANCES DISPLAY (CMD 327)
PERCEPTION 4000

COMMANDS

SECONDARY LINE APPEARANCES DISPLAY (CMD 327)
The Secondary Line Appearances Display command displays the equipment number, prime directory number,
telephone device name, key position, and type of multiple appearances of a line for a specified directory number.
Command Keyword:

SECONDARY_LINE_DISP

Category Name:

Station

PREREQUISITE COMMANDS
Feature Key Assignment (CMD 331)
Station Assignment (CMD 330)
OPERATIONS
Available operations:

DISPLAY

The function and required data fields for each operation are described in this section.

DISPLAY

DN

EQUIP #

req

PRM DN

DEV

POS

TYPE

output only

This operation displays information for a specified directory number that has secondary line appearances.
PARAMETERS
Each field parameter is described in this section. Any variations for a particular operation are noted separately.
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:
RANGE:
LOOP:

DN (Directory Number)
DN Type
1 to 5 digits
1 to 99999
Not allowed
Not allowed
The "DN" is the primary key for this command and required for the DISPLAY operation. This field
uniquely identifies the voice line which is assigned by the Station Assignment command (CMD
330), the data line assigned by the Data Station Assignment command (CMD 360), and a private,
hotline, secondary line, or logical line which is assigned by the Feature Key Assignment
command (CMD 331).

3-300

ISS 1, SECTION 4000-014-000
SECONDARY LINE APPEARANCES DISPLAY (CMD 327)
PERCEPTION 4000

FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:
RANGE:
LOOP:

COMMANDS

EQUIP # (Equipment Number)
EQ Type (Output only)
5 or 6 digits
(0)10101 to 101408
Not allowed
Not allowed
This is an output only field and displays the equipment number of the prime directory number
listed in the next field (PRM DN).

FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:
RANGE:
LOOP:

PRM DN (Prime Directory Number)
DN Type (Output only)
1 to 5 digits
1 to 99999
Not allowed
Not allowed
This is an output only field and displays the prime directory number where the line (DN in Field 1)
is located.

FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:

DEV (Telephone Device Name)
Keyword (Output only)
Predefined ASCII characters
Keywords:

4000
AD1
AD2
AD3
EKT
STD
DKT

-

PERCEPTION 4000 telephone
Add-on module one
Add-on module two
Add-on module three
Electronic telephone
Standard telephone
DKT digital telephone

This is an output only field and displays the device type on which the line (DN in Field 1) is
located. Device names are assigned with the Station Feature Key Assignment command (CMD
331).
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:

RANGE :
LOOP:

POS (Key Position Number)
Decimal (Output only)
1 or 2 digits
1 to 10 (10-key digital telephone)
1 to 20 (20-key digital and electronic telephones, and 20-key add-on modules)
1 to 60 (60-key add-on module [three 20-key modules])
Not allowed
Not allowed
This is an output only field and displays the key position on the secondary telephone or add-on
module for the specified "DN".

FIELD:

TYPE (Key Assignment Type)

3-301

ISS 1, SECTION 4000-014-000
SECONDARY LINE APPEARANCES DISPLAY (CMD 327)
PERCEPTION 4000
TYPE:
FORMAT:

COMMANDS

Keyword (Output only)
Predefined ASCII characters
Keywords:

DDN HOT LINE LLIN MLIN PRM PVT SDDNSPVT -

Data Line (Integrated DIU)
Hotline
Line Key
Logical Line (Not used)
Multiple Line
Prime Line
Private Trunk Line
Data Line (Logical Pair)
Secondary Private Line

This is an output only field and displays the line type for the key appearing in the "POS" field.

SYSTEM ERROR MESSAGES
The following error message is unique to this command.
C32700 - Invalid directory number
C32701 - Directory number not consistent with numbering plan
C32702 - Timeout in 1, 2, or 3

COMMENTS
In the DISPLAY operation, a secondary line on an add-on module may have a key position value greater than
118. To determine the key position on the add-on module, subtract 118 from the displayed key position number.
The type of add-on module is assigned in the Station Feature Key Assignment command (CMD 331).

3-302

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
STATION ASSIGNMENT (CMD 330)
PERCEPTION 4000

COMMANDS

STATION ASSIGNMENT (CMD 330)
The Station Assignment command is the primary command in assigning stations to the system. This command
defines the station's prime directory number, establishes linkage to a hardware circuit, instructs the system on
what type of station this is (digital, electronic, analog single-line) and defines terminal-level and prime-line
attributes. The Station-Level Parameter Assignment command (CMD 329) is also required to complete
fundamental station information. Multi-line devices also require the Station Feature Key Assignment command
(CMD 331) for further assignment.
NOTES:
1. If the station's "TYPE" field is an ID10 or ID20 (digital telephone with an integrated Data Interface Unit [DIU]),
the station must be assigned to a DSTI card configured for 2B operation, thereby allowing for simultaneous
voice and data communications.
2. If the station's "TYPE" field is a 2010 or 2020 (digital telephone without DIU), the station may be assigned to
a DSTI card configured for 1B or 2B operation. When installed on a DSTI card configured for 2B operation, a
'2B' device (ID10 or ID20) must already be assigned to the card.
3. A digital telephone with an integrated DIU (ID10 or ID20) must have the data channel programmed through
the Data Station Assignment command (CMD 360).
4. If a 10-key or 20-key digital telephone is selected in the "TYPE" field (2010 or 2020) and installed on a DSTI
card configured for 2B operation, the circuit's data channel is ignored by the system.
5. In a MODIFY operation, a '2B' device may not be changed to a '1B' device.
Additional information is listed under the COMMENTS section at the end of this command.
Command Keyword:

STA_ASSIGNMENT

Category Name:

Station

PREREQUISITE COMMANDS
Attendant Group Assignment (CMD 372)
Attendant Position Assignment (CMD 370)
Station Feature Key Pattern Assignment (CMD 320)

If "ANSPOS" is set to an attendant directory
number, CMDs 372 and 370 are required.
If a feature key pattern other than "1" is entered,
CMD 320 is required.

OPERATIONS
Available operations:

ADD
DELETE
MODIFY
DISPLAY

The function and required data fields for each operation are described in this section.

3-303

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
STATION ASSIGNMENT (CMD 330)
PERCEPTION 4000

COMMANDS

ADD

EQUIP # | PRM DN | TYPE | PAT | A1 | A2 | EXT | RNG | COS | DRL | FRL | QPL | ANSPOS | SRG | NAME | DEPT

req

opt

locked

opt

req

opt

locked

opt

This operation assigns a station port to a spare equipment port location. The minimum set of data that defines a
station port is required. The directory number selected must meet the constraints established for prime directory
numbers. Loops are permitted to expedite the establishment of large numbers of station ports. Once the station is
installed, other attributes which are not covered by this command are assigned with default values automatically.
Refer to the COMMENTS section later in this command for a listing of these attributes. The optional "PAT" field
defaults to the basic key position template, Pattern #1, if a  is entered in this field.

DELETE

EQUIP # | PRM DN |

req

opt

This operation changes a station port to a spare equipment port. The equipment number is required. Looping is
allowed in the “EQUIP #” field to expedite the deletion of large numbers of ports. If the station has secondary
directory numbers assigned to its line(s) or key(s), all of the secondary directory numbers must be removed
through the Station Feature Key Assignment command (CMD 331) prior to performing this operation. The station
must also be removed from group associations such as hunting, speed calling, ACD, etc. If the station's "TYPE" is
an ID10 or ID20 (digital telephone with integrated DIU), the data station must be deleted first. Refer to the
COMMENTS section later in this command for additional DELETE operation information.

MODIFY

EQUIP # | PRM DN | TYPE | PAT | A1 | A2 | EXT | RNG | COS | DRL | FRL | QPL | ANSPOS | SRG | NAME | DEPT

req

locked

opt

locked

opt

This operation modifies the attributes of the station equipment. The "EQUIP #" field is the only required field. The
"PRM DN," "TYPE," "PAT," and "SRG" fields are locked fields and cannot be modified. Before changing attributes
of a station, review the NOTES at the beginning of this command and the COMMENTS at the end.

DISPLAY

EQUIP # | PRM DN | TYPE | PAT | A1 | A2 | EXT | RNG | COS | DRL | FRL | QPL | ANSPOS | SRG | NAME | DEPT

opt

3-304

locked

opt

locked

opt

locked

opt

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
STATION ASSIGNMENT (CMD 330)
PERCEPTION 4000

COMMANDS

This operation displays all station equipment ports that meet the conditions established for each field. Ranges are
permitted in any field that accepts numeric input, (i.e., COS, DRL, FRL, etc.). The “EQUIP #” field is the only loop
field for this operation.
PARAMETERS
Each field parameter is described in this section. Any variations for a particular operation are noted separately.
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:
RANGE:
LOOP:

EQUIP # (Equipment Location)
EQ Type
5 or 6 digits
(0)10101 to 101408 *
Not allowed
Allowed in DISPLAY, ADD, and DELETE operations
* Use the following chart to determine valid ranges for various types of equipment.
For BSTI and 1B-Channel DSTI equipment cards, the following ranges apply:
Digits

Range

Hardware

First digit(s)
Second two digits
Last two digits

(0)1~10
01~11, 13
01~16

Shelf no.
Card slot no.
Circuit no.

For a 2B-Channel DSTI equipment card, the following ranges apply:
Digits

Range

Hardware

First digit(s)
Second two digits
Last two digits

(0)1~10
01, 03, 05, 07, 09, 11
01~16

Shelf no.
Card slot no.
Circuit no.

For an EKTI, DKTI, or XSTI card, the following are valid ranges:
Digits

Range

Hardware

First digit(s)
Second two digits
Last two digits

(0)1~10
01~14
01~08

Shelf no.
Card slot no.
Circuit no.

Each station is assigned to a circuit on a line card. The "EQUIP #" field defines the location of the
connection. The first digit(s) represents the shelf number, the next two digits represent the card
slot number, and the last two digits represent the circuit number. This field is required for all
operations except DISPLAY. Review the NOTES at the beginning of this command before adding
stations to the system.
If a station is going to serve as an ACD agent position, then it is important to note the relationship
between the agent’s assigned equipment number, its controlling LCPU, and its assigned agent
group number. LCPU support is allocated among the PERCEPTION 4000 System’s Modular
Line/Trunk Units (Shelves) as follows:

3-305

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
STATION ASSIGNMENT (CMD 330)
PERCEPTION 4000

COMMANDS

LCPU(X)

Modular Line/Trunk Units (Shelves) Controlled by LCPU(X)

1

1~4

2

5~8

3

9 ~ 10

When assigning agent stations in a system with redundant processing, those stations which are
to be in the same ACD group need to be assigned to equipment locations that will be supported
by the same LCPU. This is because different LCPUs support different ACD groups, as noted in
the following table. Programming agent stations in accordance with this table will help ensure that
calls are not interrupted if a system switchover occurs.

LCPU1
Shelves Supported:
1~4

System
Size

3-306

ACD AGENT GROUP SUPPORT ALLOCATION

3 LCPU
System

LCPU3
Shelves Supported:
9 ~ 10

ACD Groups Supported:
1 ~ 32
(All groups supported
by LCPU1)

1 LCPU
System

2 LCPU
System

LCPU2
Shelves Supported:
5~8

ACD Groups Supported:
1
3
5
7

ACD Groups Supported:
2
4
6
8

31
(All odd-numbered
groups are supported
by LCPU2)

32
(All even-numbered
groups are supported
by LCPU2)

ACD Groups Supported:
1
4
7
10
13
16
19
22
25
28
31

ACD Groups Supported:
2
5
8
11
14
17
20
23
26
29
32

ACD Groups Supported:
3
6
9
12
15
18
21
24
27
30

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
STATION ASSIGNMENT (CMD 330)
PERCEPTION 4000
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:
RANGE:

COMMANDS

PRM DN (Prime Directory Number)
DN Type
1 to 5 digits
0 to 99999
Allowed in a DISPLAY operation only
The directory number must not conflict with any other directory number, steering digit, or
feature/facility access codes defined in the system's numbering plan. Ranges are allowed in a
DISPLAY operation. Note that the "PRM DN" cannot be modified.

FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:

TYPE (Station Type)
Keyword
Predefined ASCII characters
Keywords:

2010
2020
ID10
ID20
ANLG
ANMW
AVMS
OPS
EK01
EK10
EK20
EK2D
DK10
DK1D
DK20
DK2D

-

PERCEPTION 4000 10-key digital telephone
PERCEPTION 4000 20-key digital telephone
PERCEPTION 4000 10-key digital telephone / Data Interface Unit (DIU)
PERCEPTION 4000 20-key digital telephone / Data Interface Unit (DIU)
Analog telephone
Analog telephone with Message Waiting
Analog port assigned to Voice Messaging System
Off-premises analog station
Electronic telephone with 1 line key and 3 fixed keys
Electronic telephone with 10 flexible keys and 4 fixed keys
Electronic telephone with 20 flexible keys and 4 fixed keys
Electronic telephone with 20 flexible keys, 4 fixed keys, and display
DKT digital telephone with 10 flexible keys
DKT digital telephone with 10 flexible keys and display
DKT digital telephone with 20 flexible keys
DKT digital telephone with 20 flexible keys and display

This field defines the station type—digital, analog, electronic, etc. An analog telephone that lacks
a Message Waiting lamp may be set up as an ANMW to receive a stuttered dial tone (which
indicates that a message(s) is waiting). If the station is a digital telephone with or without an
integrated data interface unit, then the next two fields (A1 and A2) may be defined. Review the
NOTES at the beginning of this command before assigning a station type.
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:
RANGE:
LOOP:

PAT (Pattern Number of Template for Position of Feature Keys)
Decimal
1 digit
1 to 4
Not allowed
Not allowed
This field selects the feature key pattern to be assigned to the station. "PAT" is a locked field in
the MODIFY and DISPLAY operations. The field defaults to the basic key position template,
Pattern #1, if a  is entered. Patterns are programmed with the Station Feature Key Pattern
Assignment command (CMD 320).

3-307

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
STATION ASSIGNMENT (CMD 330)
PERCEPTION 4000
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:

COMMANDS

A1 (First Add-on Module Type)
Keyword
Predefined ASCII characters
Keywords:

M1 - 20-key Add-on Module
M2 - 60-key Add-on Module (three 20-key modules)
NO - No Add-on Module

This field applies to digital telephones only, and specifies whether the station has a 20-key, 60key, or no add-on module. A maximum of 60 keys may be added to a station, therefore, a station
may be assigned one or two 20-key add-ons, or one 60-key add-on. A 60-key add-on module
consists of three 20-key modules. All keys assigned to an add-on module must be deleted
through the Station Feature Key Assignment command (CMD 331) before the "A1" or "A2" fields
can be modified.
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:

A2 (Second Add-on Module Type)
Keyword
Predefined ASCII characters
Keywords:

M1 - 20-key Add-on Module
M2 - 60-key Add-on Module (Reserved for future use.)
NO - No Add-on Module

This field applies to digital telephones only, and specifies whether the station has a second 20key add-on module. See "A1" for additional information on add-on modules.
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:

EXT (Analog Extension - Used for analog telephones only) (Reserved for future use)
Keyword
Predefined ASCII characters
Keywords:

EXT - Digital Telephone Extension
NON - Non-extension

This field is reserved for future use.
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:

RNG (Ringing Option)
Keyword
Predefined ASCII characters
Keywords:

RNG - Ring
NRG - No Ring

The ringing option field defines whether or not an analog station is rung for incoming calls. If set
to NRG, the telephone rings for camp-on callbacks and recalls only. All devices default to RNG
when added to the system. To modify a digital or electronic telephone, use the Station Feature
Key Assignment command (CMD 331) "DEF 2" field.

3-308

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
STATION ASSIGNMENT (CMD 330)
PERCEPTION 4000
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:
RANGE:

COMMANDS

COS (Class Of Service)
Decimal
1 or 2 digits
1 to 64
Allowed in a DISPLAY operation only
This field, along with the next four fields, provides feature and facility access and dialing control
definitions. Class of Service tables are defined with the Class of Service Assignment command
(CMD 334).

FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:
RANGE:

DRL (Destination Restriction Level)
Decimal
1 or 2 digits
1 to 16 (or to the maximum system configuration)
Allowed in a DISPLAY operation only
Destination restriction levels control outgoing calls via direct trunk group access. Restriction
levels are defined with the Destination Restriction Level Assignment command (CMD 337).

FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:
RANGE:

FRL (Facility Restriction Level Profile)
Decimal
1 or 2 digits
1 to 32 (or to the maximum system configuration)
Allowed in a DISPLAY operation only
The "FRL" field defines restrictions assigned to various routes within each least cost routing route
table. Facility Restriction Level Profile relationships are defined with the Facility Restriction Level
Profile Assignment command (CMD 387).

FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:
RANGE:

QPL (LCR Queue Priority Level)
Decimal
1 digit
1 to 8
Allowed in a DISPLAY operation only
This field sets queuing priority for outgoing calls and is defined with the LCR Special Routing
Assignment command (CMD 384).

FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:
RANGE:

ANSPOS (Answer Position)
DN Type / Keyword
1 to 5 digits / Predefined ASCII characters
0 to 99999
Allowed in a DISPLAY operation only
Keyword:

NON

This optional field defines the directory number where calls made through the universal attendant
access code are directed. The answer position is defined as an attendant group number, an
attendant number, a station number, or a pilot number such as for hunt groups, UCD, etc. The
keyword NON indicates that no answer position is selected and is the default value.

3-309

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
STATION ASSIGNMENT (CMD 330)
PERCEPTION 4000

FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:
RANGE:

COMMANDS

SRG (Station Restriction Group Number) (Reserved for future use)
Decimal
1 or 2 digits
1 to 16
Allowed in a DISPLAY operation only
This field is reserved for future use.

FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:

NAME (Station Name)
Text
0 to 9 ASCII characters
This optional field allows you to enter a station name of up to nine ASCII characters. Embedded
spaces are allowed. The name entered here appears on display-equipped devices when calls are
directed to these devices.

FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:

DEPT (Department Name)
Text
0 to 4 ASCII characters
This optional field identifies the department to which the device belongs. For example, ACCT
would identify the Accounting Department and PUR would identify the Purchasing Department.

SYSTEM ERROR MESSAGES
The following error messages are unique to this command.
C33000
C33001
C33002
C33003
C33004
C33005
C33006
C33007
C33008
C33009
C33010
C33011
C33012
C33013
C33014
C33015
C33016
C33017
C33018
C33019
C33020

3-310

-

Specified equipment number is not available in the system
Specified equipment number is already being used
Prime directory number already exists
Unable to add a new directory number to database
Prime directory number conflicts with existing number or access code
Directory number is a group member
Add operation; DN-LDN relation failed
Add operation; SSC LDN MPT failed
Cannot delete; station is not the last member
Failed to remove this directory number from database
Failed to remove DN-LDN relationship
Failed to release the deleted LDN
Failed to release the deleted LTN
Failed to add new LTN to HDT database
Unmatched prime directory number
Failed to recover DA in all LCPUs
Failed to remove KSU member
Failed to remove KSU-LDN relationship
EXT is not yet supported; input TAB is required
Cannot delete; station is not last line
Cannot delete; read line count failed

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
STATION ASSIGNMENT (CMD 330)
PERCEPTION 4000
C33021
C33022
C33023
C33024
C33025
C33026
C33027
C33028
C33029
C33030
C33031
C33032
C33033
C33034
C33035
C33036
C33037
C33038
C33039
C33040
C33041
C33042
C33043
C33044
C33045
C33046
C33047
C33048
C33049
C33050
C33051
C33052
C33053
C33054
C33055
C33056
C33057
C33058
C33059
C33060
C33061
C33062
C33063
C33064
C33065
C33066
C33067
C33068
C33069
C33070
C33071
C33072

-

COMMANDS

Equipment number is already used by another device
No such station exists in the system
No matched card type
Cannot add card to this card slot
10-key telephone line count exceeds system configuration limit
20-key telephone line count exceeds system configuration limit
Failed to allocate memory for CbList/LCD Buffer
Station type is not changeable
Not allowed to install DSTI/BSTI/PBRC to slot 12/14
Not allowed to install DSTI-2B to an even card slot
Not allowed to install DSTI-2B to card slot 12-14
Not allowed to install T-1 to an odd card slot
Not allowed to install T-1 to card slot 14
DIU database has not been removed
Dial 0 destination DN does not exist
Failed to read ANSPOS
Failed to read authorization attribute
Failed to read phone attribute
Failed to read prime line attribute
There is no available key for adding DDN key
Failed to update authorization attribute
Failed to update phone attribute
Failed to update station dial 0 destination
Failed to update line attribute flag byte
Cannot change to integrated DIU; next slot is in use
Cannot change to integrated DIU; DSTI-2B cannot be in an even slot
Cannot change to integrated DIU; DSTI-2B not allowed in slot 12-14
Modify field EXT is not allowed; input TAB is required
Modify field RNG is not allowed; input TAB is required
Add-on module is applicable to P-4000 phone only
RNG is not allowed; input TAB is required
Add-on module #1 is required for P-4000 phone
Add-on module #2 is required for P-4000 phone
Delete all keys assigned in add-on module #2 before removing
Cannot read add-on key table
Delete all keys assigned in add-on module #1 before removing
Delete all keys assigned in add-on module #1 before modifying
Delete all keys assigned in add-on module #2 before modifying
Cannot allocate memory to add new add-on module
Cannot add VMS LDN to table
Cannot remove VMS LDN from table
Cannot add prime line attribute for this station
Cannot add KSU member to this station
Failed to read LDN from database
Database does not have any free available LTNs
Database does not have any free available LDNs
Failed to delete LTN from database
Wait for ACD agent to logout before removing
Failed to read message waiting queue
Failed to add to message waiting queue
Failed to remove from message waiting queue
Exceeds maximum message waiting allowed in the system

3-311

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
STATION ASSIGNMENT (CMD 330)
PERCEPTION 4000
C33073
I33074
C33075
C33076
C33077
C33078
C33079
I33080
C33081
C33082

-

COMMANDS

Exceeds maximum voice mail port allowed in the system
Warning: Undefined data in field #13
Total directory numbers have reached maximum system configured
Cannot use pattern number; prime position is not assigned
Cannot use pattern number; data position is not assigned
Cannot use pattern number; too many autodial keys
Cannot use pattern number; too many preregistered call forward keys
Warning: Pattern number will be disregarded for single key station
Total number of keys on add-on module #1 and #2 cannot exceed 60
No more LDNs are available

COMMENTS
1.

When a digital or electronic telephone is installed, other attributes not covered by this command are
automatically assigned with default values. These attributes, listed below, are changed and/or displayed via
the Station Feature Key Assignment command (CMD 331).
Prime Line Key Position
Message Key Position (for multiline electronic telephones)
Release Key Position
Line Preference

Receive Voice Announce on Prime Line
Receive Voice Announce via Intercom
Automatic Answerback to Voice Announce
Ring Over Busy

Additionally, the PRM DN and Data DN (if it exists) are assigned default key positions automatically with
the Station Assignment command (CMD 330).
2.

To delete a station, the prime directory number as well as all of the secondary directory numbers assigned
to the line(s)/key(s) on that station are checked. If the directory numbers can be removed from the station,
the station is then deleted. Otherwise, an error message is given and no deletion is performed.
All appearances of a station's prime directory number on other stations must be deleted prior to the station's
removal. The Secondary Line Appearances Display command (CMD 327) may be used to display all
appearances of the prime directory number.
Deletion of a directory number from a station is inhibited if the directory number is the last appearance of
that number in the system, and is a member of any of the following groups:
ACD Group
Hunt Group

UCD Group
Pickup Group

Hotline Station
Intercom Group

Private Line
Secondary Line

An error message appears indicating which of the above conditions exist causing the operation to be
aborted. To break the group-member relationships, use the appropriate M&A commands first and then
delete the directory number from the station.
3.

Station removal is not allowed unless associated data station removal is performed first. Refer to the Data
Station Assignment command (CMD 360) for information on deleting a data station.

4.

Station removal must be confirmed if any of the following features are actively registered by or to the station:
Call In Progress

3-312

Calls on Hold

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
STATION ASSIGNMENT (CMD 330)
PERCEPTION 4000

COMMANDS

If one of these conditions occurs, select one of the following options:
Cancel,
Remove when it becomes idle (wait),
Force removal
RELATED COMMANDS
Call Pickup Group Assignment (CMD 346)
Class of Service Assignment (CMD 334)
Data Station Assignment (CMD 360)
Destination Restriction Level Assignment (CMD 337)
Facility Restriction Level Profile Assignment (CMD 387)
Group Speed Calling Member Assignment (CMD 350)
Intercom Group Member Display (CMD 333)
Internal Call Alternate Routing Assignment (CMD 374)
LCR Special Routing Assignment (CMD 384)
Private/Hotline Assignment (CMD 332)
Station Feature Key Assignment (CMD 331)
Station Hunting Assignment (CMD 342)
Station-Level Parameter Assignment (CMD 329)
Terminal Maintenance (CMD 206)
UCD Group Assignment (CMD 354)

3-313

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
STATION FEATURE KEY ASSIGNMENT (CMD 331)
PERCEPTION 4000

COMMANDS

STATION FEATURE KEY ASSIGNMENT (CMD 331)
The Station Feature Key Assignment command defines digital and electronic telephone attributes and feature key
usage for these telephone types as well as for the PERCEPTION 4000 add-on module. Before this command can
be implemented, the Station Assignment command (CMD 330) must be programmed.
Command Keyword:

STA_KEY_ASSIGN

Category Name:

Station

PREREQUISITE COMMANDS
Data Station Assignment (CMD 360)

Command 360 is required if a data key is specified in
the "TYPE" field.

Station Assignment (CMD 330)

OPERATIONS
Available operations:

MODIFY
DISPLAY
SWAP

The function and required data fields for each operation are described as follows:

MODIFY

PRM DN

DEV

req

req/opt

PREF

PRM VA

ICM VA

AUT VA

ROB

POS

TYPE

DEF 1

DEF 2

DEF 3

opt

This operation modifies the attributes of station equipment. The Device Category (DEV) field is optional if
modifications are made to phone attributes (fields "PREF" to "ROB"). If modifications are made to key attributes
(fields "POS" and "TYPE," "DEF1," "DEF2," and/or "DEF3," the "DEV" field is required. Ranges are permitted in
the Feature Key Position (POS) field only.

DISPLAY

PRM DN

req

DEV

PREF

PRM VA

ICM VA

AUT VA

ROB

POS

TYPE

DEF 1

DEF 2

DEF 3

opt

This operation displays attributes that meet the conditions established in each field for the specified prime
directory number.

3-314

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
STATION FEATURE KEY ASSIGNMENT (CMD 331)
PERCEPTION 4000

COMMANDS

SWAP

PRM DN

DEV 1

POS 1

DEV 2

POS 2

req

This operation exchanges the attributes of two keys. The "DEV n" fields identify the device on which each key is
located. Ranges are not permitted.

PARAMETERS
Each field parameter is described in this section. Any variations for a particular operation are noted separately.
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:

PRM DN (Prime Directory Number)
DN Type
1 to 5 digits
0 to 99999
This field, which is required in all operations, selects the prime directory number to be modified or
displayed. The prime directory number uniquely identifies each station and is originally assigned
through the Station Assignment command, CMD 330.

FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:

DEV, DEV 1, DEV 2 (Device Category)
Keyword
Predefined ASCII characters
Keywords:

4000
EKT
DKT
AD1
AD2

-

PERCEPTION 4000 digital telephone
Electronic telephone
DKT digital telephone
Add-on module 1
Add-on module 2

This field identifies the device as being a digital or electronic telephone, or an add-on unit.
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:

PREF (Line Preference)
Keyword
Predefined ASCII characters
Keywords:

PRM
IDL
PIDL
PRNG
RNG
RIDL
ALL
NON

-

Prime Line
Idle
Prime & Idle
Prime & Ringing
Longest Ringing
Ringing & Idle
All
No Preference

3-315

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
STATION FEATURE KEY ASSIGNMENT (CMD 331)
PERCEPTION 4000

COMMANDS

This field defines the automatic line selection capability of the telephone based on various states.
Refer to Appendix D for matrices which show how this field handles automatic line selection.
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:

PRM VA (Receive Voice Announce on Prime Line)
Keyword
Predefined ASCII characters
Keywords:

ALW - Voice Announce on Prime Line allowed
DNY - Voice Announce on Prime Line denied

This field defines whether or not a station receives voice announcements over the prime line.
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:

ICM VA (Receive Voice Announce via Intercom Line)
Keyword
Predefined ASCII characters
Keywords:

ALW - Voice Announce via Intercom Line allowed
DNY - Voice Announce via Intercom Line denied

This field defines whether or not a station receives voice announcements over the intercom line.
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:

AUT VA (Automatic Answerback to Voice Announcement)
Keyword
Predefined ASCII characters
Keywords:

ALW - Automatic Answerback to Voice Announcement allowed
DNY - Automatic Answerback to Voice Announcement denied

This field determines if the station's microphone automatically activates for automatic answerback
to voice announcements when they take place. (This field should not be confused with the
Automatic Answer feature.)
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:

ROB (Ring Over Busy)
Keyword
Predefined ASCII characters
Keywords:

YES - Ring Over Busy enabled
NO - Ring Over Busy disabled

This field defines whether the station user receives a ring over busy indication when a call arrives
on another line while the station user is presently engaged in a call. Ring over busy is a muted
ring generated through the station's speaker and occurs only when the user is in handset mode
on a line other than the one receiving the new call. In order to receive the ring over busy signal,
the line being rung must be set to allow audible ringing.

The above parameters pertain to digital and electronic telephone configurations, with the exception of
the device fields. The following fields pertain to multi-line stations as well as add-on modules.

3-316

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
STATION FEATURE KEY ASSIGNMENT (CMD 331)
PERCEPTION 4000
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:

RANGE :
LOOP:

COMMANDS

POS, POS 1, POS 2 (Key Assignment Position Number)
Decimal
1 or 2 digits
1 to 10 (10-key digital and electronic telephone)
1 to 20 (20-key digital and electronic telephones, 20-key add-on modules)
1 to 60 (60-key add-on module [three 20-key modules])
Allowed in a DISPLAY operation
Allowed in a MODIFY operation
The "POS" field assigns secondary keys on multi-line stations. Data entered in this field
determines the “TYPE” field, which determines whether data is entered in the "DEF 1," “DEF 2,”
and/or “DEF 3” fields. Ranges and auto-increments are allowed in the "POS" fields for all
operations. Refer to the following figures for key positions on the various devices.
10-KEY

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

NOTES:
#5 =
#6 =
# 10 =

DDN
Data Directory Number, if data is used (Default)
PRM DN Prime Directory Number (Default)
RLS
Release Key (Non-definable)

20-KEY
1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

NOTES:
#5 =
# 16 =
# 20 =

DDN
Data Directory Number, if data is used (Default)
PRM DN Prime Directory Number (Default)
RLS
Release Key (Non-definable)

Figure 3-3
Key Positions - PERCEPTION 4000 Digital Telephones

3-317

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
STATION FEATURE KEY ASSIGNMENT (CMD 331)
PERCEPTION 4000

COMMANDS

10-KEY

10

NOTES:
9

For Electronic Telephones:
8

7

6

5

# 1 =
# 9 =
# 10 =

PRM DN Prime Directory Number (Default)
RLS
Release Key (Default)
MSG
Message Waiting (Default)

For DKT Digital Telephones:
# 1 =
# 10 =

PRM DN Prime Directory Number (Default)
RLS
Release Key (Default)

4

3

2

1

20-KEY

10

20

9

19

NOTES:
For Electronic Telephones:
8

18

7

17

6

16

5

15

4

14

3

13

2

12

1

11

# 1 =
# 19 =
# 20 =

PRM DN Prime Directory Number (Default)
RLS
Release Key (Default)
MSG
Message Waiting (Default)

For DKT Digital Telephones:
# 1 =
# 19 =

PRM DN Prime Directory Number (Default)
RLS
Release Key (Default)

Figure 3-4
Key Positions - Electronic and DKT Digital Telephones

3-318

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
STATION FEATURE KEY ASSIGNMENT (CMD 331)
PERCEPTION 4000

COMMANDS

20-KEY

60-KEY
1

11

1

11

21

31

41

51

2

12

2

12

22

32

42

52

3

13

3

13

23

33

43

53

4

14

4

14

24

34

44

54

5

15

5

15

25

35

45

55

6

16

6

16

26

36

46

56

7

17

7

17

27

37

47

57

8

18

8

18

28

38

48

58

9

19

9

19

29

39

49

59

10

20

10

20

30

40

50

60

Figure 3-5
Key Positions - AD1, AD2 Devices

FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:

TYPE (Key Assignment Type)
Keyword
Predefined ASCII characters
Keywords:

FEA
LINE
PRM
LLIN
AGE
SUP
DDN
SDDN
MLIN
PVT
SPVT
HOT
ICM
SLU
UND

-

Feature Key
Secondary Appearance Line Key
Prime Line
Logical Line
ACD Line - Agent
ACD Line - Supervisor
Integrated Data DN Key
Secondary Data DN Key
Multiple Line
Private Trunk Line
Secondary Private Trunk Line
Hotline
Intercom Group
Switch Loop Unit (Reserved for future use)
Undefined

3-319

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
STATION FEATURE KEY ASSIGNMENT (CMD 331)
PERCEPTION 4000

COMMANDS

The "TYPE" field defines the key type for the location selected in the “POS” field. Key types
include feature keys, line keys, and intercom keys. Values in the “DEF 1”, “DEF 2”, and “DEF 3”
fields are determined by the key type. If the key type is a private line or a hotline, additional
information must be entered in the Private/Hotline Assignment command (CMD 332).
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:

DEF 1 (Key Assignment Definition One)
DN Type / Decimal / Keyword
1 to 5 digits / Predefined ASCII characters
0 to 99999 (for LINE/HOT/PVT/SPVT/LLIN/PRM/DDN/MLIN)
1 to 256
(for ICM GROUP #)
Empty
(for UND/AGE/SUP)
Keywords:

For FEA (Feature Keys)

Valid input for feature keys is in the form of a predefined
number or keyword.

Feature Name
ACD Alarm Key
ACD Assistance
ACD Inter-Group Call Pickup
ACD Inter-Group Tap Key
ACD Intra-Group Call Pickup
ACD Intra-Group Tap Key
ACD Log Key
ACD Status Key
ACD Work Mode Cancellation
ACD Work Unit
Account Code
Attendant Parked Page Retrieval
Authorization Code
Autodial Key
Automatic Answer Key
Call Forward - All Calls Key
Call Forward - Busy/No Answer Key
Call Forward - No Answer Key
Call Forward - Preregistered
Call Park - Local Access/Retrieval
Call Park - Remote Access/Retrieval
Call Pickup - Directed
Call Pickup - Directed Group
Call Pickup - Group
Camp-on Key
Code Calling Access
Code Calling Retrieval
Data Privacy
Dictation Machine Access - Direct
Dictation Machine Access - Group
Do Not Disturb Key
Headset Control Key
Headset Mode Key
LCD Contrast Control Key

3-320

Number

Keyword

326
324
336
337
323
325
317
320
321
322
307
333
299
278
279
271
272
273
275
301
302
284
285
262
281
258
267
312
264
263
270
339
338
340

ALRM
ASST
INTP
INTM
ACDP
TAP
LOG
STAT
CANC
WRKU
ACCT
PR_A
AUTH
ADL
AUTO
CFAC
CFBN
CFNA
PRCF
CP_L
CP_R
DPU
DGPU
GPU
CAMP
CC
CCMM
DPVY
DC_I
DC_G
DND
HSC
HSM
LCDC

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
STATION FEATURE KEY ASSIGNMENT (CMD 331)
PERCEPTION 4000

COMMANDS
Night Answer Access
Privacy Release
Program Mode Key
Save and Repeat Key
Speed Calling - Group
Speed Calling - System
Swap
UCD Available/Unavailable Key
Voice Calling Key
Voice Paging Access - Emergency
Voice Paging Access - System
Voice Paging Access - Zone
Voice Paging Retrieval - System
Voice Paging Retrieval - Zone

269
268
274
277
291
290
287
309
276
261
260
259
266
265

UNA
PRLS
PRGM
S&R
SC_G
SYSD
SWAP
UCD
VC
VP_E
VP_S
VP_Z
PR_S
VPMM

The "DEF 1" field is defined based upon the key type selected in the “TYPE” field. If the key type
is a line key (LINE), the "DEF 1" field may be required to enter a directory number, such as for a
regular line, hotline, private line, logical line, or logical paired data key. If ICM is entered in the
"TYPE" field, "DEF1" represents the intercom group number.
If the key type is a feature key (FEA), the "DEF 1" field is required to enter the abbreviated
feature name or the feature number. Certain features can only be assigned once for the same
station, such as Do Not Disturb, Call Forward, Conference, etc.
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:

DEF 2 (Key Assignment Definition Two)
Keyword
Predefined ASCII characters
Keywords:

RNG - Ring
NRG - No Ring

The "DEF 2" field is defined only when the "TYPE" is a line key and the "DEF 1" field is defined
as a directory number. A ringing condition cannot be assigned to an ACD line ("AGE" and "SUP"
fields). This setting does not affect Camp-on callbacks and recalls.
FIELD:
TYPE:
VALUE:

DEF 3 (Key Assignment Definition Three)
Decimal with fixed lengths
0 to 9 (for ICM group of 10 members)
01 to 20 (for ICM group of 20 members)
1 to 7 (for Multiple Line (MLIN) Index)
"DEF 3" is used when the key type is an intercom line or a multiple line key. For intercom lines,
the member number is assigned to the key using this field. For multiple lines, this field is optional.
If a  is entered in a MODIFY operation, then the default value will be the next multiple line
index number. If there are three multiple line members, and an index number greater than "4" is
entered, the command will reject input and display an error message.

3-321

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
STATION FEATURE KEY ASSIGNMENT (CMD 331)
PERCEPTION 4000
SYSTEM ERROR MESSAGES
The following error messages are unique to this command.
C33100
C33101
C33102
C33103
C33104
C33105
C33106
C33107
C33108
C33109
C33110
C33111
C33112
C33113
C33114
C33115
C33116
C33117
C33118
C33119
C33120
C33121
C33122
C33123
C33124
C33125
C33126
C33127
C33128
C33129
C33130
C33131
C33132
C33133
C33134
C33135
C33136
C33137
C33138
C33139
C33140
C33141
C33142
C33143
C33144
C33145

3-322

-

There must be only one prime DN key
Input was mistyped in DEF 1, DEF 2, or DEF 3 field
Unable to delete activated feature
Key position is out of range
Feature number is out of range
Directory number already exists for this station
Feature number already exists for this station
This key is reserved for the Release key
Number of intercom groups exceeds system configuration limit
Inconsistency between intercom group number and intercom number
Number of intercom members per group exceeds system configuration limit
Directory number in field ten has been used
Number of intercom total members exceeds system config. limit
A logically-paired data station is not allowed
SDDN key is already installed on this station
This is not an integrated data station
Original DDN key has to be deleted by Command 360
No DDN key exists for this station
This station does not exist
There should be only one ACD line key
Intercom index exists in this intercom group
Key position is out of range in this phone unit
Phone device is required when modifying the key attributes
Other appearances of this logical/multiple DN still exist
Reserved DDN key
Missing data
Inconsistent prime DN in DEF 1 field
Too many autodial keys
Too many preregistered call forward keys
Too many hotlines
Too many private lines
Directory number in DEF 2 field has been used for private line
10-key telephone line count exceeds system configuration limit
20-key telephone line count exceeds system configuration limit
Hotline count exceeds system configuration limit
Private line count exceeds system configuration limit
Autodial line count exceeds system configuration limit
Preregistered call forward count exceeds system config. limit
Key system unit line count exceeds system configuration limit
Key system unit line appearance exceeds system configuration limit
Exceeds MCPU system configuration limit
There are still secondary appearances of this private line
This key is reserved for the message key
Key system unit line appearance exceeds a maximum of 16 members
Key system unit member list is inconsistent with SSC
Device field is inconsistent with phone type

COMMANDS

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
STATION FEATURE KEY ASSIGNMENT (CMD 331)
PERCEPTION 4000
C33146
C33147
C33148
C33149
C33150
C33151
C33152
C33153
C33154
C33155
C33156
C33157
C33158
C33159

-

COMMANDS

Headset mode is not supported by electronic or digital key phones
Not enough HDT memory space for adding new line
Not enough KSU memory space for adding new line
Not enough ICM memory space for adding new line
No more LDNs are available
The DN in field 9 is a VMS DN
Total directory numbers have reached maximum system configuration
LCD contrast control is only supported by 2020 phones
Directory number in DEF1 is a group member
Last number redial is only supported by electronic telephones
Multiple line index in DEF3 is out of range
Number of multiple lines assigned to prime DN has reached maximum
Total line appearances on station have reached a maximum of 80
Directory number in DEF 1 is out of range

COMMENTS
Directory number removal is inhibited if any of the following features are actively registered at the selected key:
Calls on Hold
Call in Progress
If a private line (PVT) is assigned to a primary directory number (PRM DN), the private line must be given a new
directory number. However, if a hotline is assigned, it may or may not be given a new directory number.
Command 330, the Station Assignment Command, automatically assigns default settings to the “PREF,” “PRM
VA," “ICM VA,” “AUT VA,” and "ROB” fields when first setting up new stations.
RELATED COMMANDS
Intercom Group Member Display (CMD 333)
Private/Hotline Assignment (CMD 332)
Station-Level Parameter Assignment (CMD 329)

3-323

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
STATION FEATURE KEY PATTERN ASSIGNMENT (CMD 320)
PERCEPTION 4000

COMMANDS

STATION FEATURE KEY PATTERN ASSIGNMENT (CMD 320)
The Station Feature Key Pattern Assignment command allows the system administrator to set up a template of
preprogrammed key patterns for PERCEPTION 4000 multi-line telephones. For example, the default pattern
(Pattern #1) determines the positions of all prime directory number, data directory number, and release keys. For
electronic telephones (EKTs), the Message Waiting key is also preprogrammed with Pattern #1. Patterns 2
through 4 can be modified and programmed with additional features, such as Call Forwarding keys, ACD keys,
and Autodial keys.
Command Keyword:

STA_KEY_PATTERN

Category Name:

Station

PREREQUISITE COMMANDS
There are no prerequisites for this command.

OPERATIONS
Available operations:

ADD
DELETE
MODIFY
DISPLAY

The function and required data fields for each operation are described in this section.

ADD

DEV | PAT | PRM POS | DDN POS | FEA POS | FEA ID |

req

opt

req

The ADD operation programs Patterns 2 through 4 (PAT) for each type of telephone (DEV). The "PRM POS" field
is required for the first-time addition of a given pattern number. Also, the "DDN POS" is required for the first-time
addition of a given pattern number if the "DEV" is an ID10 or ID20. For other devices, a  must be entered in
the "DDN POS" field. The "FEA POS" is a loop field and is required when a feature key is to be assigned to the
specified device.

3-324

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
STATION FEATURE KEY PATTERN ASSIGNMENT (CMD 320)
PERCEPTION 4000

COMMANDS

DELETE

DEV | PAT | PRM POS | DDN POS | FEA POS |

req

opt

This operation deletes a pattern (Pattern #2, 3, or 4) or a key position from a pattern for the specified device. The
"PRM POS" may be deleted only after the "DDN POS" and all "FEA POS" key positions are deleted. The "FEA
POS" is a loop field.

MODIFY

DEV | PAT | PRM POS | DDN POS | FEA POS | FEA ID |

req

opt

req

Key positions for Patterns 2 through 4 are modified with this operation. If a pattern is modified after telephones
have been programmed using that pattern, the modification does not affect those telephones, it affects only those
telephones added after the modification.

DISPLAY

DEV | PAT | PRM POS | DDN POS | FEA POS | FEA ID |

req

opt

Key patterns are displayed on the maintenance console for the specified device (DEV). "PAT" and "FEA POS" are
loop fields.

PARAMETERS
Each field parameter is described in this section. Any variations for a particular operation are noted separately.
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:

DEV (Telephone Device Type)
Keyword
Predefined ASCII characters
Keywords:

2010
2020
EKT1
EKT2
DKT1

-

PERCEPTION 4000 10-key digital telephone
PERCEPTION 4000 20-key digital telephone
Electronic telephone with 10 flexible keys
Electronic telephone with 20 flexible keys, with or without display
DKT digital telephone with 10 keys, with or without display

3-325

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
STATION FEATURE KEY PATTERN ASSIGNMENT (CMD 320)
PERCEPTION 4000

COMMANDS
DKT2 - DKT with 20 keys, with or without display
ID10 - PERCEPTION 4000 10-key digital telephone with DIU-I
ID20 - PERCEPTION 4000 20-key digital telephone with DIU-I

The "DEV" field identifies the type of telephone to be programmed with a template, and is
required in all operations.
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:
RANGE:
LOOP:

PAT (Pattern Number of Template for Position of Feature Keys)
Decimal
1 digit
1 to 4 (in a DISPLAY operation)
2 to 4 (in an ADD, DELETE, or MODIFY operation)
Not allowed
Allowed in a DISPLAY operation only
This field selects the pattern to be programmed. Note that Pattern #1 may not be modified in any
way. The DISPLAY operation is the only operation allowed for this pattern.

For illustrations of key positions, refer to the Station Feature Key Assignment command (CMD 331).
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:

RANGE:
LOOP:

PRM POS (Prime Directory Number Key Position)
Decimal
1 or 2 digits
1 to 10 (for PERCEPTION 4000 10-key digital telephones, 10-key DKTs, and 10-key electronic
telephones)
1 to 20 (for PERCEPTION 4000 20-key digital telephones, 20-key DKTs, and 20-key electronic
telephones)
Not allowed
Not allowed
This field defines the location of the prime directory number key on the selected device, and is
required for the first-time addition for a given pattern number. Pattern #1 default values are as
follows:

FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:

3-326

"DEV" Field

"PRM POS" Field

2010
2020
ID10
ID20
EKT1
EKT2
DKT1
DKT2

6
16
6
16
1
1
1
1

DDN POS (Data Directory Number Key Position)
Decimal
1 or 2 digits
1 to 10 (for 10-key PERCEPTION 4000 digital telephones with DIU-Is).

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
STATION FEATURE KEY PATTERN ASSIGNMENT (CMD 320)
PERCEPTION 4000

RANGE:
LOOP:

COMMANDS

1 to 20 (for 20-key PERCEPTION 4000digital telephones with DIU-Is).
Not allowed
Not allowed
This field defines the location of the data directory number key on the selected device, and is
required for the first-time addition for a given pattern number. Pattern #1 default values are as
follows:
"DEV" Field

"DDN POS" Field

ID10
ID20
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:

RANGE:
LOOP:

5
5

FEA POS (Feature Key Position)
Decimal
1 or 2 digits
1 to 10 (for PERCEPTION 4000 10-key digital telephones, 10-key DKTs, and 10-key electronic
telephones)
1 to 20 (for PERCEPTION 4000 20-key digital telephones, 20-key DKTs, and 20-key electronic
telephones)
Not allowed
Allowed in ADD, DELETE, and DISPLAY operations
This field is required if a feature key ("FEA ID" field) is to be assigned to the selected device.
Certain feature key positions are set up with specific feature IDs that cannot be modified or
deleted for all patterns. These include the following key positions:
DEVICE

FEATURE POSITION

FEATURE ID

2010
2020
ID10
ID20
EKT1

10
20
10
20
9
10
19
20
10
20

RLS
RLS
RLS
RLS
RLS
MSW
RLS
MSW
RLS
RLS

EKT2
DKT1
DKT2
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:
RANGE:
LOOP:

FEA ID (Feature ID Number or Abbreviation)
Decimal / Keyword
1 to 4 digits / Predefined ASCII characters
0 to 9999 (Feature ID Number)
Not allowed
Not allowed

3-327

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
STATION FEATURE KEY PATTERN ASSIGNMENT (CMD 320)
PERCEPTION 4000
Keywords:

3-328

COMMANDS
Feature Name

Number

Abbreviation

ACD Alarm Key
ACD Assistance
ACD Inter-Group Call Pickup
ACD Inter-Group Tap Key
ACD Intra-Group Call Pickup
ACD Intra-Group Tap Key
ACD Log Key
ACD Status Key
ACD Work Mode Cancellation
ACD Work Unit
Account Code
Attendant Parked Page Retrieval
Authorization Code
Autodial Key
Automatic Answer Key
Call Forward - All Calls Key
Call Forward - Busy/No Answer Key
Call Forward - No Answer Key
Call Forward - Preregistered
Call Park - Local Access/Retrieval
Call Park - Remote Access/Retrieval
Call Pickup - Directed
Call Pickup - Directed Group
Call Pickup - Group
Camp-on Key
Code Calling Access
Code Calling Retrieval
Data Privacy
Dictation Machine Access - Direct
Dictation Machine Access - Group
Do Not Disturb Key
Headset Control Key
Headset Mode Key
LCD Contrast Control Key
LCD Remote Logout Agent
Night Answer Access
Privacy Release
Program Mode Key
Save and Repeat Key
Speed Calling - Group
Speed Calling - System
Swap
UCD Available/Unavailable Key
Voice Calling Key
Voice Paging Access - Emergency
Voice Paging Access - System
Voice Paging Access - Zone
Voice Paging Retrieval - System
Voice Paging Retrieval - Zone

326
324
336
337
323
325
317
320
321
322
307
333
299
278
279
271
272
273
275
301
302
284
285
262
281
258
267
312
264
263
270
339
338
340
341
269
268
274
277
291
290
287
309
276
261
260
259
266
265

ALRM
ASST
INTP
INTM
ACDP
TAP
LOG
STAT
CANC
WRKU
ACCT
PR_A
AUTH
ADL
AUTO
CFAC
CFBN
CFNA
PRCF
CP_L
CP_R
DPU
DGPU
GPU
CAMP
CC
CCMM
DPVY
DC_I
DC_G
DND
HSC
HSM
LCDC
RLOG
UNA
PRLS
PRGM
S&R
SC_G
SYSD
SWAP
UCD
VC
VP_E
VP_S
VP_Z
PR_S
VPMM

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
STATION FEATURE KEY PATTERN ASSIGNMENT (CMD 320)
PERCEPTION 4000

COMMANDS

This field is required when programming a feature key. Data entry for this field is in the form of a
feature "Number" or "Abbreviation." Note that certain features can only be assigned once for the
same station, such as Do Not Disturb, Call Forward, Conference, etc.

SYSTEM ERROR MESSAGES
The following error messages are unique to this command.
C32000
C32001
C32002
C32003
C32004
C32005
C32006
C32007
C32008
C32009
C32010
C32011
C32012
C32013
C32014
C32015
C32016
C32017
C32018
C32019
C32020
C32021
C32022
C32023
C32024

-

Pattern 1 cannot be added, modified, or deleted
DDN key assignment is only allowed for ID10 or ID20 devices
FEA ID is a required field for FEA POS
FEA POS is a required field for FEA ID
Key position is out of range in field(s) X
Duplicate key position in field(s) X
PRM POS is required in Field 3
DDN POS is required in Field 4
There must be only one PRM POS assigned
There must be only one DDN POS assigned
Delete all FEA POS's before deleting the PRM POS
Delete all FEA POS's before deleting the DDN POS
Delete the DDN POS before deleting the PRM POS
Feature key position Z is a reserved key
Invalid key position in field X
Feature number is out of range
Feature key position has already been assigned
Feature ID already exists for this pattern
LCD contrast control is only supported by 2020 and ID20 telephones
Key position Z does not exist
Key position Z has already been used
Headset mode is not supported by electronic or digital key telephones
The deletion of PRM POS or DDN POS in setup mode is not allowed
Last number redial is only supported by electronic/DKT telephones
Missing data in field 3, 4, or 5

NOTE:

"X" = 3, 4, or 5
"Z" = 1 through 20

RELATED COMMANDS
Station Assignment (CMD 330)
Station Feature Key Assignment (CMD 331)

3-329

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
STATION HUNTING ASSIGNMENT (CMD 342)
PERCEPTION 4000

COMMANDS

STATION HUNTING ASSIGNMENT (CMD 342)
The Station Hunting Assignment command defines and modifies voice hunt groups in the system. This type of
hunt group performs a serial or circular search of the members from the entry point to the end of the list. Up to
200 groups with a maximum of 16 members in each group may be defined. Note that the system allows for a
maximum of 800 members. Data hunt groups are assigned via the Data Hunting Assignment command
(CMD 366).
Command Keyword:

STA_HUNTING

Category Name:

Station

PREREQUISITE COMMAND
Station Assignment (CMD 330)
OPERATIONS
Available operations:

ADD
DELETE
MODIFY
DISPLAY

The function and required data fields for each operation are described in this section.

ADD

GRP#

req

METHOD

PILOT DN

opt

NAME

OVF DEST

MEM #

MEM DN

req

ENT PT

opt

This operation inserts a membership directory number or pilot directory number into a station hunting group. The
Hunt Group Number, Member Number, and Member Directory Number are required. The Member Directory
Number is limited to being a member of only one hunt group. If the "METHOD" is specified as SER, the Entry
Point is required. If the "METHOD" is CIR, the Entry Point defaults to YES. Looping is allowed in the "MEM #"
field. Note that the addition of a specified member number moves all of the following members one step backward
accordingly.

3-330

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
STATION HUNTING ASSIGNMENT (CMD 342)
PERCEPTION 4000

COMMANDS

DELETE

GRP#

MEM #

MEM DN

req
opt
This operation removes a membership directory number. The Hunt Group Number is required. To delete all
members from a Hunt Group Number, enter the keyword ALL in the "MEM #" field. Looping is allowed in the
"MEM #" field.

MODIFY

GRP#

METHOD

PILOT DN

NAME

req

OVF DEST

MEM #

MEM DN

ENT PT

opt

This operation changes the hunt method, hunt group pilot directory number, group name, overflow destination,
member directory number, or entry point attributes for a hunt group. If the method is changed from serial to
circular, all of the entry points are changed to YES automatically, and the pilot directory number is automatically
deleted. If the method is changed from circular to serial, the pilot directory number is allowed. If the member
directory number or the entry point is modified, the member number must be entered. To modify group attributes,
the last three fields should not be specified.

DISPLAY

GRP#

METHOD

PILOT DN

NAME

OVF DEST

MEM #

MEM DN

ENT PT

opt

This operation displays all station hunt groups and their members that meet the conditions established in each
field. Loops are permitted in the "GRP#" and "MEM #" fields. Ranges are permitted in the "MEM DN" field only.
PARAMETERS
Each field parameter is described in this section. Any variations for a particular operation are noted separately.
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:
LOOP:

GRP# (Hunt Group Number)
Decimal
1 to 3 digits
1 to 200
Allowed in a DISPLAY operation only

FIELD:

The system may define up to 200 station hunt groups for both the circular and serial hunt group
types for voice hunting. The combined total of both hunt group types may not exceed 200 groups.
METHOD (Hunt Method)

3-331

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
STATION HUNTING ASSIGNMENT (CMD 342)
PERCEPTION 4000
TYPE:
FORMAT:

COMMANDS

Keyword
Predefined ASCII characters
Keywords:

SER - Serial Hunt Method
CIR - Circular Hunt Method

This field establishes whether the hunt group is circular or serial. For a circular hunt group, dialing
any member directory number which is busy or in Do not Disturb (but not forwarded) results in a
search for an available member in the order established with this command. The search 'wraps
around' and continues searching until the called member is reached. In a circular hunt, all
members are entry points.
For a serial hunt, entry into the group is generally by the pilot number. The hunt begins at the top
of the list and ceases at the bottom. Various members may also be flagged as entry points.
Dialing any member directory number marked as an entry point which is busy or in Do not
Disturb (but not forwarded) results in a search for an available member in the order established in
this command, starting at the busy member and proceeding to the end of the list. 'Wrapping'
does not occur in a serial hunt.
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:

PILOT DN (Pilot Directory Number)
DN Type
1 to 5 digits
0 to 99999
This field, valid for serial hunt groups only, marks an entry point into a serial hunt group table
using a virtual directory number. The number cannot be assigned to a physical equipment
location, and must meet the numbering plan restrictions. The directory number cannot appear in
more than one hunt group. The "PILOT DN" field can be deleted by pressing  in a
MODIFY operation.

FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:

NAME (Group Name)
Text
0 to 9 ASCII characters
The group name is provided for the benefit of users with display equipped telephones and the
attendant. When the pilot number is dialed or a legal entry point is used into a serial hunt group,
this information displays. For example, the group name "I SALES" would indicate this hunt group
is made up of inside sales personnel. The "NAME" field can be deleted by pressing  in a MODIFY operation.

FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:

VALUE:

3-332

OVF DEST (Overflow Destination)
DN Type
1 to 5 digits
- Individual attendant console directory number
- Station number
- Hunt group pilot number
- UCD group pilot number
- ACD group pilot number
- Attendant group directory number
0 to 99999 (Termination DN)

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
STATION HUNTING ASSIGNMENT (CMD 342)
PERCEPTION 4000
FORMAT:
VALUE:

COMMANDS

4 to 6 digits
1 to 3 digits, plus 3 digit speed call access and code
The overflow directory number establishes a secondary hunt or call termination point. Only one
level of hunt overflow is allowed. If the destination is another hunt group which also has an
overflow defined, the second group's overflow is not used. Off-premises routing is available via
system speed call number entry. The "OVF DEST" field can be deleted by pressing  in a MODIFY operation.

FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:
LOOP:

MEM # (Membership Index Number)
Decimal / Keyword
1 or 2 digits / Predefined ASCII characters
1 to 16 / ALL
Allowed in DISPLAY, ADD, and DELETE operations
The index number shows the order of search from the lowest to the highest number when the
hunt group pilot directory number is dialed. The keyword ALL may be entered in this field in a
DELETE operation to remove all members from a specified hunt group.

FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:
RANGE:

MEM DN (Member Directory Number)
DN Type
1 to 5 digits
0 to 99999
Allowed in a DISPLAY operation only
Member directory numbers are assigned in the sequence desired. Only voice stations are legal
members of a voice hunt group. Each directory number can be set up to be an entry point, and
can be a member of only one hunt group.

FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:

ENT PT (Entry Point to Serial Hunt Group List)
Keyword
Predefined ASCII characters
Keywords:

YES - Allow MEM DN to be entry point to serial hunt group
NO - Do not allow MEM DN to be entry point to serial hunt group

This field determines whether or not a member directory number can be used as an entry point
into the serial hunt group list. The search starts at that directory number’s position and continues
down the list until the first idle directory number is found, or until the remaining members have
been exhausted. For circular hunt groups, only YES may be entered.
SYSTEM ERROR MESSAGES
The following error messages are unique to this command.
C34200
C34201
C34202
C34203
C34204
C34205

-

Input member directory number or entry point
Group is already full
Hunt Method field is required
Circular group; pilot directory number is not needed
Circular group; entry point must be YES
Member directory number is not defined in the system

3-333

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
STATION HUNTING ASSIGNMENT (CMD 342)
PERCEPTION 4000
C34206
C34207
C34208
C34209
C34210
C34211
C34212
C34213
C34214
C34215
C34216
C34217
C34218
C34219
C34220
C34221
C34222
C34223
C34224
C34225
C34226
C34227
C34228
C34229
C34230
C34231
I34232
C34233

-

COMMANDS

Entry point should be input
Not allowed; the second member's entry point is NO
Hunt Method mismatch
Pilot directory number mismatch
Group name mismatch
Overflow termination mismatch
Group is empty
Member number is not in group
Member directory number is not in group
Inconsistent member number/directory pair
Pilot directory number is already in use
Overflow termination is not defined
Member number is required
Entry point of the first member must be YES
Member number is not continuous in group
Member directory number is in another hunt group
Cannot use this directory number
The input overflow termination is already used for a group
Pilot directory number is used as overflow in another group
Input pilot or member directory number is the same as overflow
Group name is too long
This hunt group is for VMS; directory number must be a VMS DN
This directory number is for VMS; cannot be used for this group
No more space left to add
A private line directory number cannot be used to hunt
Serial group; pilot directory number is required
Warning: Undefined data in field 5
Origination only station cannot be used to hunt

COMMENTS
When adding a new group, if the method is specified as SER, the virtual pilot directory number field must be
entered. Otherwise, if the method is specified as CIR, the virtual pilot directory number field must be left empty.
When adding a member to an 'SER' hunt group, the entry point must be input. When the addition is to a 'CIR'
hunt group, the entry point may be left empty or set to YES.
RELATED COMMANDS
ACD Group Assignment (CMD 355)
Attendant Group Assignment (CMD 372)
Attendant Position Assignment (CMD 370)
Authorization Code Assignment (CMD 349)
Internal Call Alternate Routing Assignment (CMD 374)
Numbering Plan Assignment (CMD 300)
Station Feature Key Assignment (CMD 331)
System Speed Calling Assignment (CMD 402)
UCD Group Assignment (CMD 354)

3-334

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
STATION-LEVEL PARAMETER ASSIGNMENT (CMD 329)
PERCEPTION 4000

COMMANDS

STATION-LEVEL PARAMETER ASSIGNMENT (CMD 329)
The Station-Level Parameter Assignment command modifies and displays station parameters including the prime
directory number, voice mail retrieval destination, forced account code types, originate-/terminate-only station
designation, privacy, attendant supervision, timeout routing destination index, data security, and the voice mail
port number for analog telephones.
Command Keyword:

STA_PARAMETERS

Category Name:

Station

PREREQUISITE COMMAND
Station Assignment (CMD 330)
OPERATIONS
Available operations:

MODIFY
DISPLAY

The function and required data fields for each operation are described in this section.

MODIFY

EQUIP # | PRM DN | VM DEST | TYPE | ORG/TER | PVT | ASD | TOR# | DID# | DISP | SEC |

req

locked

opt

This operation modifies several station parameters. The "EQUIP #" field is required; and looping is allowed in this
field. The prime directory number (PRM DN) field cannot be modified.

DISPLAY

EQUIP # | PRM DN | VM DEST | TYPE | ORG/TER | PVT | ASD | TOR# | DID# | DISP | SEC | VMS# |

opt

This operation displays the station equipment ports which meet the conditions established for each field. Looping
is allowed in the “EQUIP #” field.

3-335

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
STATION-LEVEL PARAMETER ASSIGNMENT (CMD 329)
PERCEPTION 4000

COMMANDS

PARAMETERS
Each field parameter is described in this section. Any variations for a particular operation are noted separately.
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:
LOOP:

EQUIP # (Equipment Number)
EQ Type
5 or 6 digits
(0)10101 to 101408
Allowed in both the MODIFY and DISPLAY operations
The equipment number is assigned with the Station Assignment command (CMD 330). This field
selects the appropriate station to be modified or displayed.

FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:
LOOP:
RANGE:

PRM DN (Prime Directory Number)
Dialing Digits
1 to 5 digits
0 to 99999
Not allowed
Allowed in a DISPLAY operation only
This field specifies the prime directory number assigned to the "EQUIP #" defined in the previous
field. The "PRM DN" field is locked in a MODIFY operation.

FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:
LOOP:

VM DEST (Voice Mail Retrieval Destination)
Dialing Digits
1 to 5 digits
0 to 99999
Not allowed
The voice mail retrieval destination number defines a voice mail port or hunt group pilot used for
accessing the voice mail system.

FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
DEFAULT:

TYPE (Forced Account Code Type)
Keyword
Predefined ASCII characters
NON
Keywords:

ALL - All calls
TOLL - Toll calls only
NON - None

This field defines whether calls made by the user require forced account code entry or not and, if
so, the type of forced account. A forced account code can be required for all outgoing calls or for
toll calls only. Note that the definition of non-toll dialing for the Forced Account Code feature is
defined with the Forced Account Code Toll-free Tables command (CMD 352). This feature affects
all lines on the specified station, not only the prime line.

3-336

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
STATION-LEVEL PARAMETER ASSIGNMENT (CMD 329)
PERCEPTION 4000
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:

COMMANDS

ORG/TER (Originate- or Terminate-only Station)
Keyword
Predefined ASCII characters
Keywords:

ORG - Origination allowed and termination denied
TER - Origination denied and termination allowed
BOTH - Both origination and termination allowed (Default)

A station may be configured as allowed to receive calls only or make calls only with this field.
Calls with originate-only status may still receive camp-on callbacks and recalls. Terminate-only
stations may not perform a consultation hold. The "ORG/TER" field affects all voice line
appearances for the defined station.
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:

PVT (Privacy)
Keyword
Predefined ASCII characters
Keywords:

YES - Privacy enabled
NO - Privacy disabled (Default)

When set to YES, the Privacy feature prevents the attendant from breaking into an existing
conversation.
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:

ASD (Attendant Supervision Disable)
Keyword
Predefined ASCII characters
Keywords:

YES - Disable attendant supervision
NO - Enable attendant supervision (Default)

When set to YES, the supervisor is prevented from performing supervision (locked loop
operation) of any call the station is handling.
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:
LOOP:
RANGE:

TOR# (Timeout Routing Index)
Decimal
1 or 2 digits
1 to 32
Not allowed
Allowed in MODIFY operation
The "TOR#" field selects a destination number from the Timeout Routing Assignment Table (refer
to the Timeout Routing Destination Assignment command, CMD 323). When the station user
goes off-hook and fails to dial, or fails to dial enough digits for a valid number, the station is
routed to the predefined timeout destination number.

FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:
LOOP:
RANGE:

DID# (DID Index Number)
Decimal
1 or 2 digits
1 to 16
Not allowed
Allowed in DISPLAY operation only

3-337

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
STATION-LEVEL PARAMETER ASSIGNMENT (CMD 329)
PERCEPTION 4000

COMMANDS

The "DID#" field is used to specify the DID index number that applies to the telephone. This index
number refers to the prefix number assigned in the System Option Flag Assignment command
(CMD 408). Each prefix (index) number represents the digits that will prefix the telephone's DID
number to represent an entire telephone number. This telephone number will appear at called
display stations. For example, if prefix (index) number 1 is "583" and a station's DID number is
"3700," then an entry of "1" in the "DID#" field, will produce a displayed number of "5833700."
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:

DISP (Outgoing Call Display Flag)
Keyword
Predefined ASCII characters
Keywords:

NAME
DLDN

- Trunk name
- Dialed number (Default)

This field is used to assign the type of call identification information that will appear at the station
when placing either ISDN or non-ISDN outgoing calls. When dialing a number from a station, the
dialed digits initially appear on the station's own display. After the outgoing call is recognized by
the PERCEPTION 4000 system and a trunk is selected, these digits can either remain displayed
or be replaced by the name of the utilized trunk/trunk group. By entering the keyword DLDN, the
displayed digits will be maintained. By entering NAME, the digits will be replaced by the name of
the utilized trunk/trunk group.
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:

SEC (Data Security)
Keyword
Predefined ASCII characters
Keywords:

YES - Data security enabled
NO - Data security disabled (Default)

The security field specifies whether or not the station has data security on the prime line. If set to
YES, break-ins or other types of monitoring are not allowed on this line. This secures the line
from any interruption that could corrupt data transmission, including Call Waiting tones. This flag
is normally set for analog stations which frequently connect to a modem for analog data
transmission.
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:
LOOP:
RANGE:

VMS# (Voice Messaging System Port Number)
Decimal
1 or 2 digits
1 to 32
Not allowed
Allowed in a DISPLAY operation
The "VMS#" field identifies a voice messaging system port number for an analog telephone. The
port number table is established by the Station Assignment command (CMD 330), "TYPE" field,
AVMS option.

3-338

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
STATION-LEVEL PARAMETER ASSIGNMENT (CMD 329)
PERCEPTION 4000

COMMANDS

SYSTEM ERROR MESSAGES
The following error messages are unique to this command.
C32900
C32901
C32902
C32903
C32904
C32905
C32906
C32907
C32908

-

Specified equipment number is not available in the system
Check terminate or originate-only station
Check privacy
Check attendant supervision disable
Check timeout routing index
ORG/TER field cannot be modified; ACD agent is remotely logged in
Failed to read prime line attributes
Hunting member station cannot be assigned as originating only
Equipment number is assigned to another device

RELATED COMMAND
Forced Account Code Toll-free Tables (CMD 352)
Timeout Routing Destination Assignment (CMD 323)

3-339

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
SYSTEM DISA SECURITY CODE ASSIGNMENT (CMD 321)
PERCEPTION 4000

COMMANDS

SYSTEM DISA SECURITY CODE ASSIGNMENT (CMD 321)
Security codes for the Direct Inward System Access (DISA) feature are defined with this command if DISA
requires security code entry (as established in the System Option Flag Assignment command, CMD 408). In
addition, SMDR ID codes are assigned to defined DISA security codes.
Command Keyword:

DISA_CODES

Category Name:

System

PREREQUISITE COMMANDS
There are no prerequisites for this command.

OPERATIONS
Available operations:

ADD
DELETE
MODIFY
DISPLAY

The function and required data fields for each operation are described in this section.

ADD

SEC CODE

SMDR ID

req

This operation defines the DISA security code and SMDR ID code. The default length of the security code is six
digits.

DELETE

SEC CODE

req

This operation deletes security codes. If the keyword ALL is entered, all of the codes in the DISA security code
table are deleted.

3-340

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
SYSTEM DISA SECURITY CODE ASSIGNMENT (CMD 321)
PERCEPTION 4000

COMMANDS

MODIFY

SEC LENGTH

SEC CODE

SMDR ID

opt

opt

opt

This operation modifies the length of the DISA security codes, and/or changes the SMDR ID for the specified
security code. If data is entered in the “SEC CODE” field, data must be entered in the “SMDR ID” field. A
MODIFY operation may not be performed if a specified security code is not in the database (i.e., a security code
and SMDR ID must be added before they can be modified).
All security codes must be of the same length. To change the "SEC LENGTH" field, delete all of the security
codes, use a MODIFY operation to change the length to a new value, and add new security codes and SMDR
IDs into the system.

DISPLAY

SEC LENGTH

output only

INDEX

SEC CODE

SMDR ID

opt

This operation displays the DISA security code table. Looping is allowed in the “INDEX” field. If a  is
entered in the “SEC LENGTH” and “INDEX” fields and no data is entered in the other fields, the complete DISA
security code table displays. The "SEC LENGTH" field is an output only field in a DISPLAY operation.
PARAMETERS
Each field parameter is described in this section. Any variations for a particular operation are noted separately.
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:
DEFAULT:

SEC LENGTH (Security Code Length)
Decimal
1 digit
3 to 6
6
This field sets the number of digits required for security codes. When modifying the length of the
security codes, all security codes must first be deleted. In a DISPLAY operation, this is an output
only field.

FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:
LOOP:

INDEX (Security Code Index Number)
Decimal
1 or 2 digits
1 to 64
Allowed in a DISPLAY operation

3-341

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
SYSTEM DISA SECURITY CODE ASSIGNMENT (CMD 321)
PERCEPTION 4000

COMMANDS

This field is used internally as a counter for the DISA security code table. Its value does not
indicate an actual position or set any priority for data entered in this command.
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:
RANGE:

SEC CODE (Security Code)
Dialing Digits / Keyword
3, 4, 5, or 6 digits (depending on the SEC LENGTH field) / ASCII characters
0 to 9 / ALL
Allowed in a DISPLAY operation to match a partial string
Up to 64 DISA security codes may be defined. All codes must be the same length, as specified in
the "SEC LENGTH" field. The keyword ALL is used in a DELETE operation when deleting all of
the security codes in the table.

FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:

SMDR ID (SMDR ID Code)
Decimal with fixed length
3 to 5 digits
001 to 99999
Each security code may be assigned a unique SMDR identification code. This code is 3 to 5
digits in length; it does not have to be the same length as the security code. The SMDR ID code
is printed out on the SMDR call record when DISA access has been successful, and can be used
to identify the calling party for accounting purposes.

SYSTEM ERROR MESSAGES
The following error messages are unique to this command.
C32100
C32101
C32102
C32103
C32104
C32105
C32106
C32107
C32108

-

Security code must be of length N
Table entries exceed 64
# or * are not accepted as security code digits
Security code has been used
SMDR ID code has been used
Security code is not found
Check input in field(s) Ni..Nj
To modify security code length, enter  in fields 2 and 3
To modify security code length, delete all security codes first

RELATED COMMANDS
System Option Flag Assignment (CMD 408)
Trunk Group Assignment (CMD 310)

3-342

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
SYSTEM HOLIDAY ASSIGNMENT (CMD 404)
PERCEPTION 4000

COMMANDS

SYSTEM HOLIDAY ASSIGNMENT (CMD 404)
This command adds/deletes/displays holidays in the System Holiday table and also changes the holiday in the
table. Up to 16 holidays may be defined. If the System Administrator wants to specify specific time zones for
some holidays, then it is necessary to set the appropriate time zone in the Time Zone Assignment command
(CMD 336).
Command Keyword:

HOLIDAY_ASSIGN

Category Name:

System

PREREQUISITE COMMANDS
There are no prerequisites for this command.
OPERATIONS
Available operations:

ADD
DELETE
MODIFY
DISPLAY

The function and required data fields for each operation are described in this section.

ADD

INDEX

DATE

req

This operation adds holidays to the System Holiday table. Addition of a specific entry re-sequences all entries
following it. Looping is allowed in the “INDEX” field.

DELETE

INDEX

DATE

req
opt

opt
req

This operation deletes holidays from the System Holiday table. Deletion of an entry re-sequences all entries
following it. When ALL is entered in the “INDEX” field, all of the entries in the System Holiday table are deleted.

3-343

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
SYSTEM HOLIDAY ASSIGNMENT (CMD 404)
PERCEPTION 4000

COMMANDS

MODIFY

INDEX

DATE

req

This operation changes a holiday in the System Holiday table.

DISPLAY

INDEX

DATE

opt

This operation displays the System Holiday table. If no data is entered, the complete table displays.
PARAMETERS
This section defines inputs permitted for each field. Any variations for a particular operation are noted separately.
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:
LOOP:

INDEX (Index Number)
Decimal
1 or 2 digits
1 to 16
Allowed in ADD and DISPLAY operations
Keyword:

ALL

The index number provides a counter for the convenience of the administrator. Its value does not
indicate an actual position or set any priority for data entered in this field. The holiday list is
sorted according to date regardless of the order entered.
The keyword ALL is only used in a DELETE operation when deleting all of the entries in the
system holiday table.
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:
RANGE:

DATE (Holiday)
Decimal with fixed length
4 digits
0101-1231
Allowed in a DISPLAY operation
Each date is defined using four digits in the format: MMDD
MM (Month) = 01 to 12
DD (Day)
= 01 to 31

3-344

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
SYSTEM HOLIDAY ASSIGNMENT (CMD 404)
PERCEPTION 4000

COMMANDS

The correct date and time must be set on the system's real time clock for these dates to be
invoked correctly.
SYSTEM ERROR MESSAGES
The following error messages are unique to this command.
C40400
C40401
C40402
C40403
C40404
C40405
C40406

-

Duplicate holiday dates
Table entries exceed 16
Index number is already defined in the table
Invalid input data
Index number is not defined in the table
Input holiday date is not found in the table
Holiday date value is out of range

RELATED COMMAND
Time Zone Assignment (CMD 336)

3-345

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
SYSTEM INVENTORY (CMD 210)
PERCEPTION 4000

COMMANDS

SYSTEM INVENTORY (CMD 210)
The System Inventory command enables an M&A user to display a summary report of a PERCEPTION 4000
system's hardware and software configuration. This report is very helpful in troubleshooting situations, since it
provides in-service/out-of-service indications of various system components. The numerical output from this
command can provide precise indications of any system fault activity.
Command Keyword:

SYS_INVENTORY

Category Name:

Utility

PREREQUISITE COMMANDS
There are no prerequisites for this command.
OPERATIONS
Available operations:

DISPLAY
MODIFY

The function and required data fields for each operation are described in this section.

DISPLAY

TYPE

req

This operation is used to display the system inventory report.

MODIFY

TYPE

SUPPLEMENTARY INFORMATION

req

This operation is used to modify system supplementary information.

3-346

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
SYSTEM INVENTORY (CMD 210)
PERCEPTION 4000

COMMANDS

PARAMETERS
This section defines inputs permitted for each field. Any variations for a particular operation are noted separately.
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:

TYPE (System Inventory Report Type)
Keyword
Preassigned ASCII characters
Keywords:

HW
SW
SUP
CONF
ALL

-

System Hardware Inventory Report
System Software Inventory Report (Future Use)
System Supplementary Information Report
System Configuration Strings for PC
System Hardware, Software, Supplementary Information,
and Configuration Strings for PC Reports

This entry is necessary in the DISPLAY operation only. Items listed in the Hardware Inventory
Report include the common control shelves (both active and standby sides); interface shelves
(both active and standby); interface circuits; terminals (including telephones, add-on modules;
attendant consoles, trunks, DIUs, DTMF receivers, announcement machines, music-on-hold
devices, UNA night bells, and modem pools), and input/output port assignments (assigned to
M&A devices or application processors). System operating sides are noted in the Hardware
Inventory Report as A or B. Component status is noted as either INS (in service) or OOS (out of
service).
The Software Inventory Report indicates item, trunk, attendant, and feature key assignments to
particular LCPUs (future use). The System Supplementary Information Report reports
information that has been assigned to describe a particular PERCEPTION 4000 system. For
example, this report indicates assigned system identification information such as customer name;
customer address/location; customer telephone number; the utilized ACD and/or voice mail
system configuration; the system's power supply/battery backup configuration; and paging
device/modem usage.
The System Configuration Strings for PC option provides digit strings that are used for system
remote maintenance. There are four different groups of system configuration strings that can be
requested: Interface Circuits with Critical Conditions; General Line/Trunk Configuration and State;
General Common Control Configuration; and ACD and VMS I/O Port Assignment and State.
Displayed digit strings are encoded to represent card type, port status, etc. The different digit
string formats are each explained below:
I. Interface Circuits with Critical Conditions
Format = SSPPCC MM N0 N1 N2 N3 N4
where SSPPCC = the equipment number which ranges from 010101 to 101408
MM = a two digit decimal number representing the interface circuit card type as follows:
00
01
02
03
04

-

BSTI card type
COGI card type
DIDI card type
DKTI card type
1-B channel DSTI card type

3-347

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
SYSTEM INVENTORY (CMD 210)
PERCEPTION 4000

COMMANDS
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16

-

2-B channel DSTI card type
EKTI card type
DM1I card type
EM2I card type
IPRC card type
IPRI card type
PBRC card type
TTRI card type
XSTI card type
No card
Undefined
Reserved

N0 = the physical status of a terminal as follows:
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
99

-

Terminal idle
No port processor
No answer
No match
In down line load process
Down line load fault
Start check (trunk)
Made busy
Made busy; no port processor
Made busy; no answer
Made busy; no match
Made busy; in down line load process
Made busy; down line load fault
Made busy; start check (trunk)
Miscellaneous
No answer; no port processor
In down line load; no port processor
No database is assigned

N1 = the port state as follows:
0
1
2
3

-

Equipment is made idle
Equipment is made busy
Equipment is made force made busy
Equipment is pre-blocking

N2 = the port make busy/idle status as follows:
0
1
2
3
4

3-348

-

Made idle
Made busy
Make busy requested
Made idle requested
Pre-blocked

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
SYSTEM INVENTORY (CMD 210)
PERCEPTION 4000

COMMANDS
N3 = the card in service/out of service status as follows:
0
1

-

Card is out of service
Card is in service

N4 = the card status as follows:
0
1
2
3

-

Hardware and database match
No card installed and no database installed
Hardware and database do not match
Card is not installed, but database is installed

NOTE: The SSPPCC MM N0 N1 N2 N3 N4 string will be prompted only if the equipment is in a
critical state. For example, if N0=N1=N2=0, then the string will not be displayed since the
equipment is considered idle.
II. General Line/Trunk Configuration and State
Format = LMM NNA NNA NNA NNA NNA NNA NNA NNA NNA NNA NNA NNA NNA
NNA BBBBB BBBBB
where LMM = a two digit decimal number representing the line/trunk shelf L01 through
L10.
NN = a two digit decimal number representing the interface circuit card type as follows:
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16

-

BSTI card type
COGI card type
DIDI card type
DKTI card type
1-B channel DSTI card type
2-B channel DSTI card type
EKTI card type
EM1I card type
EM2I card type
IPRC card type
IPRI card type
PBRC card type
TTRI card type
XSTI card type
No card
Undefined
Reserved

A = a single character representing the general state of the card as follows:
N
X
G
F
P

-

Not applicable
Database is assigned, but no card exists
Card is in good condition
Card is in a fault condition
Card is in a prefault condition

3-349

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
SYSTEM INVENTORY (CMD 210)
PERCEPTION 4000

COMMANDS

NOTE: A card is considered to be in a fault condition when all of its circuits are in a critical condition. A card is in
a pre-fault condition when at least one of its circuits is in a critical condition. A card is in good condition if all of its
circuits are in good condition.
BBBBB = a five character digit string representing the line/trunk power state as follows:
ILPWU
OLPWU
XLPWU

-

Line/trunk power supply unit is in service
Line/trunk power supply unit is out of service
No line/trunk power supply unit is installed

III. General Common Control Configuration
Format = CX NNA NNA NNA NNA NNA NNA NNA NNA NNA NNA NNA NNA M
where CX = the common control shelf as follows:
CA
CB

-

Side A Common Control Shelf
Side B Common Control Shelf

NN = a two digit decimal number representing the common control card type as follows:
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12

-

Miscellaneous card
Main clock
Hard disk drive
Floppy disk drive
Main CPU and memory
Disk drive controller
Local CPU and memory one
Local CPU and memory two
Local CPU and memory three
Basic time division switching card
Extended time division switching card
Main power unit
No card

A = a single character representing the general state of the card as follows:
X
I
O

-

Card is not installed
Card is in service
Card is out of service

M = the active/standby common control shelf as follows:
A
S
U

-

Active side
Standby side
Neither active nor standby

IV. ACD and VMS Input/Output Port Assignment and State
Format = XXXX N S

3-350

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
SYSTEM INVENTORY (CMD 210)
PERCEPTION 4000

COMMANDS
where XXXX = the application usage on the input/output port as follows:
ACD
VMS1
VMS2
VMS3

-

Automatic Call Distribution
Voice Messaging System (BTI)
Voice Messaging System (SMDI)
Voice Messaging System (SMDIP)

N = a value from 1 to 4 representing the input/output port number
S = the status of the input/output port as follows:
U
D
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:
RANGE:
LOOP:

-

Link up
Link down

INDEX (Supplementary Index Number)
Decimal
1 or 2 digits
1 to 25
Not allowed
Not allowed
The index represents the line number in the supplementary information listing. For example, line
1 (index number 1) is typically used for customer name and Line 2 (index number 2) is typically
used for customer address/location. The provision of 25 different supplementary lines enables an
M&A user to program a variety of system identification information.

FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
RANGE:
LOOP:

SUPPLEMENTARY INFORMATION (Supplementary Information Text)
Text
ASCII characters
Not allowed
Not allowed
Each line of text can be used to enter a different type of information. For example, on line 1
(index number 1), enter the customer name; on line 2, enter the customer's address/location; on
line 3, enter the customer's telephone number, etc. Additional information that may be desirable
to add in the Supplementary Information field is the type of utilized ACD or voice mail system; the
model/type of utilized power supply/battery backup equipment; and pager/modem information.

3-351

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
SYSTEM NUMBER SUMMARY (CMD 326)
PERCEPTION 4000

COMMANDS

SYSTEM NUMBER SUMMARY (CMD 326)
The System Number Summary command enables an M&A user to request a summary of number usage within
the Perception 4000 system.
Command Keyword:

SYS_NUM_PLAN

Category Name:

System

PREREQUISITE COMMANDS
There are no prerequisites for this command.

OPERATIONS
Available operations:
DISPLAY
SHOW
The function and required data fields for each operation are described as follows:

DISPLAY

NUMBER

opt

TYPE

DEF 1

NAME

locked

This operation displays system numbering plan data based on input field information. The Display operation will
list all numbers, their use, and other important data such as the equipment numbers that correspond to assigned
prime directory numbers.

SHOW

USAGE

req

The Show operation is used to display either all used numbers or all available numbers in the System Numbering
Plan.

3-352

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
SYSTEM NUMBER SUMMARY (CMD 326)
PERCEPTION 4000

COMMANDS

After selecting a "USAGE" option, the form of the SHOW operation will be:

NUMBER

NUMBER

NUMBER

NUMBER

NUMBER

NUMBER

NUMBER

NUMBER

output only

PARAMETERS
This section defines input permitted for each field. Any variations for a particular operation are noted separately.
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:
RANGE:

NUMBER
Digits 0 - 9; #; *
1 - 5 digits
# - 99999
Not allowed

This field is used to specify the numbers to be displayed. If a  is entered, then all numbers in the System
Numbering Plan will be displayed. Specific groups of numbers can be specified by entering prefix digits. For
example, to display all numbers in the System Numbering Plan that begin with the numbers "42," simply enter
"42" in this field. When entering a particular category in the "TYPE" field of this command, enter the appropriate
digits (0 - 9, #, *) to indicate the numbers to be displayed.
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:

TYPE
Keyword
Preassigned ASCII characters

Keywords:

ACD
ATG
ATT
DDN
DHG
EMR
FEA
HOT
LCR
LLIN
PRM
PVT
STD
TAC
UCD
UNP
VHG
DN
NDN

-

ACD pilot number
Attendant group directory number
Attendant console directory number
Data directory number
Data hunt group pilot number
Emergency access code
Feature access code
Hotline directory number
LCR access code
Logical directory number
Prime directory number
Private line directory number
Steering digit
Trunk group access code
UCD pilot number
UNP access code
Voice hunt group pilot number
All system directory numbers
All system non-directory numbers

3-353

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
SYSTEM NUMBER SUMMARY (CMD 326)
PERCEPTION 4000

COMMANDS

This field is used to specify the category of numbers to be displayed. If the keyword DN is entered, then all
categories based on directory numbers will be displayed (all categories except FEA, LCR, STD, TAC, and UNP).
If the keyword NDN is entered, then only non-directory number categories will be displayed (FEA, LCR, STD,
TAC, and UNP).
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:

DEF 1 (Definition 1)
Decimal
1 to 3 decimal digits
When "TYPE" is:
ACD
ATG
ATT
DDN
DHG
EMR
FEA
HOT
LCR
LLIN
PRM
PVT
STD
TAC
UCD
UNP
VHG
Keywords:

1 - 32, representing the ACD group number
1 - 32, representing the attendant group number
1 - 32, representing the attendant group to which the attendant belongs
5 or 6 digits, representing the equipment number
1 - 32, representing the data hunt group number
Not used
258 to maximum feature number
1 - 5 decimal digits, representing the hotline directory number
Feature number
1 - 5 decimal digits, representing the prime directory number to which the
logical line belongs
5 or 6 digits, representing the equipment number
1- 128, representing the trunk group number
1 - 128, representing the trunk group number
1 - 128, representing the trunk group number
1 - 8, representing the UCD group number
Feature number
1 to maximum number of voice hunt groups
Not allowed

The "DEF 1" field specifies the category type of numbers to be displayed.
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:

NAME
Text
For output only

The "NAME" field is a display-only field which indicates the name that has been previously assigned to a number.
For example, this field will indicate the name assigned to a prime directory number or the name assigned to a
trunk group.
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:

USAGE
Keyword
Preassigned ASCII characters
Keywords:

AVAIL
USED

- Print the available (unused) numbers in the system
- Print the used numbers in the system

The "USAGE" field specifies whether available or already-used numbers in the System Numbering Plan will be
displayed.

3-354

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
SYSTEM NUMBER SUMMARY (CMD 326)
PERCEPTION 4000

COMMANDS

SYSTEM MESSAGES
The following error message is unique to this command. This error message will usually appear if relationships
within the system have not been adequately resolved prior to modifying an entity.
C32600

- No match

3-355

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
SYSTEM OPTION FLAG ASSIGNMENT (CMD 408)
PERCEPTION 4000

COMMANDS

SYSTEM OPTION FLAG ASSIGNMENT (CMD 408)
The System Option Flag Assignment command defines various options allowed in the system.
Command Keyword:

SYS_OPTION_ASSIGN

Category Name:

System

PREREQUISITE COMMANDS
There are no prerequisites for this command.
OPERATIONS
Available operations:

MODIFY
DISPLAY

The function and required data fields for each operation are described in this section.

MODIFY

OPTION

VALUE

req

OPTION

VALUE

OPTION

VALUE

OPTION

VALUE

OPTION

VALUE

opt

opt

opt

opt

opt

opt

opt

opt

This operation modifies system options. The first “OPTION” and “VALUE” fields are required, while the remaining
fields are optional. If data is entered in an “OPTION” field, data in the following “VALUE” field must also be
entered.

DISPLAY

OPTION

VALUE

OPTION

VALUE

OPTION

VALUE

OPTION

VALUE

OPTION

VALUE

opt

This operation displays system options. If a  or the keyword ALL is entered in the first “OPTION” field, all
of the system options are displayed.
PARAMETERS
Each field parameter is described in this section. Any variations for a particular operation are noted separately.

3-356

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
SYSTEM OPTION FLAG ASSIGNMENT (CMD 408)
PERCEPTION 4000
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:

COMMANDS

OPTION (System Option)
Keyword
Predefined ASCII characters
Keywords:

ACD
ALL
CAMP
CAMQ

-

DISA
FACL
IQP1
IQP2
ISMDR
LCR
MUSC
MXCM
NCFA

-

NCTA

-

PX1 - PX16QUE
RDRL
VACC
VDNI

-

WARN

-

Automatic Call Distribution
Used when displaying all System Option Flags
DID Camp-on Flag
Camp-on Queue Preemption. If the Trunk Queuing Method (QUE) is
set to FIFO (First In/First Out), this option (CAMQ) allows a call to
preempt the last call in the camp-on queue if the queue is full. If
"QUE" is set to PRI (Priority Queuing), the preemption is allowed if
the call has a higher priority than the last call in the queue.
DISA Security Code Required
Forced Account Code length to be validated
First incoming ACD call queuing priority
Second incoming ACD call queuing priority
Internal Call SMDR Flag
LCR Call Restriction Method
Music-on-Hold Tone
Maximum Number of Camp-on Calls
No COS Feature Access Code Intercept Treatment Method (i.e.,
treatment caused by dialing a feature access code which is not
allowed by the user's COS)
No COS Trunk Access Code Intercept Treatment Method (i.e.,
treatment caused by dialing a trunk access code which has no user
COS)
Station Identification (SID) Prefix 1 to 16
Trunk Queuing Method
Restrict DRL Intercept Treatment Method (i.e., treatment caused by
dialing an outside number which is restricted by DRL)
Verified option flag of account code
Vacant DN Intercept Treatment Method (i.e., treatment caused by
dialing a number which is not in the system numbering plan)
Attendant/ACD Monitor Warning Tone

This field selects the system option to be modified or displayed. Each keyword has its own value,
as entered in the "VALUE" field.
FIELD:
TYPE:
VALUE:
RANGE:

VALUE (Value of System Option)
Decimal or Keyword, depending on the option
Depends on the option (listed below)
Not allowed
For ACD (Automatic Call Distribution)
Keywords:

NAF - Next Available Agent First (Default)
MIF - Most Idle Agent First

All ACD agents must be logged out before modifying this flag.

3-357

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
SYSTEM OPTION FLAG ASSIGNMENT (CMD 408)
PERCEPTION 4000

COMMANDS

For CAMP (DID Camp-on Flag)
Keywords:

YES - Allow DID call to camp-on to busy station (Default)
NO - Do not allow DID call to camp-on to busy station

For CAMQ (Camp-on Queue Preemption)
Keywords:

YES - Allow preemption of camp-on queuing (Default)
NO - Do not allow preemption

For DISA (DISA Security Code Required)
Keywords:

YES - DISA Security Code required (Default)
NO - DISA Security Code not required

For FACL (Forced Account Code Length to be Validated)
Keywords:

DIG0 to DIG15 - Length in 0 to 15 digits
DIG0 - Default

For IQP1 (First Incoming ACD Call Queuing Priority)
Decimal:

Value of 1 to 16
16
- Default

For IQP2 (Second Incoming ACD Call Queuing Priority)
Decimal:
Keyword:

Value of 1 to 16 (cannot be greater than IQP1 value)
NONE - DISA security code required (Default)

For ISMDR (Internal Call SMDR Flag)
Keywords:

YES - Enable internal call SMDR recording
NO - Disable internal call SMDR recording (Default)

For LCR (LCR Call Restriction Method)
Keywords:

FRLP
BOTH

-

Facility Restriction Level Profile only (Default)
Destination Restriction Level (DRL) and Facility Restriction Level
(FRL)

For MUSC (Music-on-Hold Tone)
Keywords:

3-358

IMT
MS01
MS02
MS03
MS04
QT

-

Internal Music Tone (Default)
External Music Tone 1
External Music Tone 2
External Music Tone 3
External Music Tone 4
Quiet Tone

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
SYSTEM OPTION FLAG ASSIGNMENT (CMD 408)
PERCEPTION 4000

COMMANDS

For MXCM (Maximum Number of Camp-on Calls allowed per Station)
Decimal Value:

1 - 256

(Default = 4)

For NCFA (No COS Feature Access Code Intercept Treatment Method)
Keywords:

AP01 to AP50
ROT

- Announcement Pattern 1 to 50
- Reorder Tone (Default)

For NCTA (No COS Trunk Access Code Intercept Treatment Method)
An attendant or attendant group directory number
or
Keywords: AP01 to AP50 - Announcement Pattern 1 to 50
ROT
- Reorder Tone (Default)
For PX1 to PX16 (Station Identification Prefix 1 to 16)
Decimal:

Maximum number of defined digits for each PX (1 through 16) is 12

For QUE (Trunk Queuing Method)
Keywords:

FIFO - First-in/First-out Queuing
PRI - Priority Queuing (Default)

For RDRL (Restrict DRL Intercept Treatment Method)
An attendant or attendant group directory number
or
Keywords: AP01 to AP50 - Announcement Pattern 1 to 50
ROT
- Reorder Tone (Default)
For VACC (Verified Option Flag for Account Code)
Keywords:

YES - Account code will be verified (Default)
NO - Account code will not be verified

For VDNI (Vacant Directory Number Intercept Treatment Method)
An attendant or attendant group directory number
or
Keywords: AP01 to AN50 - Announcement Pattern 1 to 50
ROT
- Reorder Tone (Default)
For WARN (Attendant/ACD Monitor Warning Tone)
Keywords:

YES - A warning tone is sent
NO - No warning tone is sent (Default)

This field defines the value for the option listed in the previous "OPTION" field.

3-359

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
SYSTEM OPTION FLAG ASSIGNMENT (CMD 408)
PERCEPTION 4000

COMMANDS

SYSTEM ERROR MESSAGES
The following error messages are unique to this command.
C40800
C40801
C40802
C40803
C40804
C40805
C40806
C40807
C40808
C40809
C40810
C40814
C40815
C40816

3-360

-

Option value is out of range
Directory number is not an attendant DN
Attendant group or directory number can only be used for VDNI, RDRL, or NCTA
External music tone does not exist
Option field required
Value field required
Option field is duplicated
Force Account code length must be defined first
The device for this option is not defined
ACD group is still on shift
ACD agent is still logged in
Maximum Camp-on value is out of range
FACL value is over the PDD1 length defined in CMD 300
Check input in value field n

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
SYSTEM SPEED CALLING ASSIGNMENT (CMD 402)
PERCEPTION 4000

COMMANDS

SYSTEM SPEED CALLING ASSIGNMENT (CMD 402)
The System Speed Calling Assignment command defines the destination for each system speed calling number.
Up to 1000 system speed calling numbers are allowed. They may be used to address internal destinations or
external public/private network destinations.
Command Keyword:

SYS_SC_ASSIGN

Category Name:

System

PREREQUISITE COMMAND
Numbering Plan Assignment (CMD 300)
OPERATIONS
Available operations:

ADD
DELETE
MODIFY
DISPLAY

The function and required data fields for each operation are described in this section.

ADD

INDX

DESTINATION NUMBER

req

This operation assigns a destination number to a system speed calling code. Looping is permitted in the "INX"
field during this operation.

DELETE

INDX

req

DESTINATION NUMBER

opt

This operation removes existing speed calling assignments. Looping is permitted in the "INX" field to expedite the
deletion of blocks of speed calling numbers. When a loop is used, the system requests confirmation of the delete
operation.

3-361

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
SYSTEM SPEED CALLING ASSIGNMENT (CMD 402)
PERCEPTION 4000

COMMANDS

MODIFY

INDX

DESTINATION NUMBER

req

This operation modifies a system speed calling code and/or destination number. Both fields are required.

DISPLAY

INDX

DESTINATION NUMBER

opt

This operation displays all of the system speed calling numbers that meet the conditions established in each field.
Looping is permitted in the "INDX" field only.
PARAMETERS
Each field parameter is described in this section. Any variations for a particular operation are noted separately.
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:
LOOP:

INDX (System Speed Calling Code)
Decimal with Fixed Length
3 digits
000 to 999
Allowed in ADD, DELETE, and DISPLAY operations
This field assigns a system speed calling code. The code represents the digits entered in the
following field (DESTINATION NUMBER). Upon access to the system speed calling feature, this
3-digit code is entered. The system then automatically outpulses the "DESTINATION NUMBER".

FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:
RANGE:

DESTINATION NUMBER
Dialing Digits plus * and #
1 to 24 digits
0 to 9, *, **, and #
Not allowed
The destination number may be external or internal. External destinations must include a direct
trunk group access code, the least cost routing feature access code, or the PERCEPTION 4000
Networking feature access code. Internal numbers may be any legal directory number including
hunt, ACD, and UCD pilot numbers.
Up to 24 digits/functions (including a feature access code, except for a speed calling number)
may be used to define the destination number. Speed calling functions include timed pauses
(programmable period) and dial tone detection. For private network numbers and numbers that

3-362

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
SYSTEM SPEED CALLING ASSIGNMENT (CMD 402)
PERCEPTION 4000

COMMANDS

are unconventional in their arrangement (such as international calls) the pound sign (#) may be
used to signal end of dialing to the system. Ranges are not permitted.
Functional designators are counted as one place in the 24 possible entries, even if it takes two
places to define:
**
*
#

- Dial Tone Detect
- Pause, this key requires an additional digit (n) to follow which indicates how may
seconds to delay execution of the remaining destination number. (n = 0 to 9)
- Indicates beginning of a feature access code or termination of the dialing digit.

Timed pauses of greater than 9 seconds can be achieved via back-to-back definitions. For
example, a pause of 13 seconds could be achieved by entering *9*4. This would count as two of
the possible 24 digits/functions.
SYSTEM ERROR MESSAGES
The following error messages are unique to this command.
C40200
C40201
C40202
C40203

-

The speed dialing index is already defined
Check input format
Destination number is not defined
Speed dialing feature activation cannot be destination number

COMMENTS
The Trunk/LCR access codes must be defined in the system's numbering plan prior to entering them in the
"DESTINATION NUMBER" field.
Speed calling access codes (group and system) cannot be used in the "DESTINATION NUMBER" field.
The destination number entered can be a pilot to any type of group or a directory number for a station, attendant,
or data station.

RELATED COMMANDS
ACD Agent Assignment (CMD 356)
Attendant Group Assignment (CMD 372)
Attendant Position Assignment (CMD 370)
Data Station Assignment (CMD 360)
Station Assignment (CMD 330)
Station Feature Key Assignment (CMD 331)
Station Hunting Assignment (CMD 342)
Trunk Assignment (CMD 313)
Trunk Group Assignment (CMD 310)
UCD Group Assignment (CMD 354)

3-363

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
SYSTEM TIMER ASSIGNMENT (CMD 407)
PERCEPTION 4000

COMMANDS

SYSTEM TIMER ASSIGNMENT (CMD 407)
Several features within the system require a timer, such as for recalls and tone duration. This command modifies
the system's timers and displays the System Timer Table.
Command Keyword:

SYS_TIMER_ASSIGN

Category Name:

System

PREREQUISITE COMMANDS
There are no prerequisites for this command.
OPERATIONS
Available operations:

MODIFY
DISPLAY

The function and required data fields for each operation are described in this section.

MODIFY

INDEX

TIMER

req

NAME

Output only when prompting for confirmation

This operation modifies a timer(s) in the System Timer Table. The "NAME" is defined by Toshiba and displayed
during confirmation of an entry.

DISPLAY

INDEX

TIMER

opt

NAME

output only

This operation displays a system timer(s). Looping is permitted in the “INDEX” field. If no data is entered, the
complete System Timer Table displays.

3-364

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
SYSTEM TIMER ASSIGNMENT (CMD 407)
PERCEPTION 4000

COMMANDS

PARAMETERS
Each field parameter is described in this section. Any variations for a particular operation are noted separately.
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:
LOOP:

INDEX (Timer Table Index Number)
Decimal
1 or 2 digits
1 to 99
Allowed in a DISPLAY operation
The index number identifies a specific timer. This number corresponds to the Index # listed in the
"TIMER" field description. A DISPLAY operation also lists the current Timer Table index numbers.

FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:
RANGE:

TIMER (Timer Value)
Decimal
1 to 5 digits
1 to 99999 in seconds (or to the maximum value; see the list below)
Not allowed
Each timer has a range of values. Following are the timer index numbers, their names, ranges,
defaults, and a brief description of each timer. Note that the maximum entry allowed for timer
values far exceeds current needs. These values are provided to allow users flexibility in
customizing their systems.

Index
#

Name

Value

Default

10

Description

1

Camp-on Timer

1 - 3600

2

Callback Timer

1 - 72000

3

Success Tone Duration

1 - 3600

5

The length of time success tone is
heard

4

LCR Warning Tone
Duration

1 - 3600

5

The length of time expensive route
warning tone is heard

5

Station Callback Ring
Duration

1 - 3600

15

The amount of time a Camp-on callback
will ring a station before cancelling the
station Camp-on

6

Trunk Callback Ring
Duration

1 - 3600

15

The amount of time a Camp-on callback
will ring a station before ceasing to wait
for the next attempt or before cancelling
the trunk Camp-on

8000

The amount of time busy tone rings
before off-hook Camp-on occurs
The amount of time a Camp-on will
exist without a callback before being
automatically cancelled by the system

3-365

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
SYSTEM TIMER ASSIGNMENT (CMD 407)
PERCEPTION 4000
Index
#

3-366

COMMANDS
Name

Value

Default

Description

7

Trunk Callback Interval
Timer

1 - 14400

300

The amount of time between Camp-on
callbacks due to no-answer conditions
at the station being rung

8

Long Hold Recall

1 - 3600

120

The length of time a call will sit on hard
hold before recalling to the station

9

Reorder Tone Timer

1 - 3600

20

The amount of time reorder tone will be
given before station lockout or off-hook
idle occurs

10

UNA Bell No Answer
Timer

1 - 3600

300

11

Unscreened RBT Timer

1 - 3600

60

The maximum amount of time that an
unscreened transfer will go unanswered
before recalling to the initiating party

12

Call Forward - No
Answer Timer

1 - 3600

30

The amount of time that a call rings at a
station before forwarding - applicable to
Call Forward No Answer and Call
Forward Busy/No Answer features

13

Recall No Answer Timer

1 - 3600

30

The amount of time that a trunk recall
will ring at a station before recalling to
the attendant

14

Park Recall Timer

1 - 3600

120

The amount of time that a call may
remain parked before recalling to the
park originator

15

Overflow Timer

1 - 3600

120

The time a call will remain in the
attendant queue before overflowing to a
secondary location

16

Analog Hold Timer

1 - 3600

5

17

Camp-on RBT Timer

1 - 3600

180

30

Detect Dial Tone Timer

1 - 3600

15

The amount of time a call rings at the
night bell before being dropped

The length of time a call will sit on hard
hold before recalling to the station
The maximum amount of time that a
Camp-on transfer will go unanswered
before recalling to the initiating party
The amount of time a CO trunk detects
dial tone

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
SYSTEM TIMER ASSIGNMENT (CMD 407)
PERCEPTION 4000
Index
#

COMMANDS
Name

Value

Default

Description

31

Interchangeable Office
Code Timer

1 - 3600

4

The amount of time the system waits for
additional digits after receiving seven
digits. If the timer expires before
receiving more digits, the first three
digits are treated as an office code. If
more digits are received before the
timer expires, then the first three digits
are treated as an area code.

33

Voice Page Recall Timer 1 - 3600

120

The amount of time a parked call due to
a meet-me paging attempt will remain
parked before recalling to the initiator

34

Code Call Recall Timer

1 - 3600

120

The amount of time a parked call due to
a meet-me code-call attempt will remain
parked before recalling to the initiator

35

LED Error Flashing
Duration

1 - 3600

5

The length of time the red LED flashes
when an error occurs while
programming a feature or a key

36

Supervisor Warning
Tone Timer

1 - 3600

1

The amount of time that a warning tone
sounds during an attendant break-in
function

37

Announcement Release
Timer

1 - 3600

180

The amount of time that incoming trunk
calls that have no routing and are
intercepted by an announcement
machine are held before the call is
disconnected

38

Attendant BLF Timer

1 - 3600

5

Interval of time between scans of the
system to update the Busy Lamp Field
on the attendant console to the current
state

39

Attendant Forced PB
Timer

1 - 3600

30

The amount of time allowed for the
attendant to answer incoming calls. If an
incoming call is not answered before
this timer expires, the attendant console
goes to the position busy state.

40

Break-in Warning Tone
Timer

1 - 3600

1

The amount of time that a warning tone
sounds during an attendant break-in
function (Use #36 when modifying the
warning tone.)

3-367

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
SYSTEM TIMER ASSIGNMENT (CMD 407)
PERCEPTION 4000

COMMANDS

Index
#

FIELD:
TYPE:
LENGTH:

Name

Value

Default

Description

41

ACD Call Ring No
Answer Timer

0 - 3600

20

The amount of time that a call rings at
an ACD station before the system
redirects the call to another ACD agent.
If none is available, the call rings again
at the original ACD agent's station. If
the timer expires before the agent
answers, that station is placed into the
Unavailable mode and the call is
disconnected.

42

Station/Attendant ACD
Queue Priority Advance
Timer

0 - 9999

0

The amount of time that a caller to a
station or attendant console must wait
in the ACD queue before the caller's
priority level is increased.

43

Station/Attendant ACD
Overflow Timer

0 - 9999

0

The amount of time that a caller to a
station or attendant console must wait
in the ACD queue before overflow to
another groups will be attempted.

NAME (Timer Name)
Text
Up to 60 ASCII characters
The "NAME" field is an output only field, which is coded into the database and not changeable.
Refer to the "TIMER" field for a list of current timer names.

SYSTEM ERROR MESSAGES
The following error messages are unique to this command.
C40700 - Timer value is out of range
C40701 - Specified timer is not defined
C40702 - ACD advance timer should be less than overflow timer

3-368

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
T-1 CLOCK PROVIDER SELECTION ASSIGNMENT (CMD 412)
PERCEPTION 4000

COMMANDS

T-1 CLOCK PROVIDER SELECTION ASSIGNMENT (CMD 412)
The T-1 Clock Provider command allows you to manually switch the clock provider to the primary or other
reference, depending on where it currently resides. This feature must be enabled with the Digital Carrier Channel
Assignment command (CMD 413) before the command can be executed.
Command Keyword:

T1_CLOCK_ASSIGN

Category Name:

Trunk

PREREQUISITE COMMAND
Digital Carrier Channel Assignment (CMD 413)

OPERATIONS
Available operations:

SWITCH

The function and required data fields for each operation are described in this section.

SWITCH

CLK PROVIDER

req

This operation manually switches the clock provider to the primary reference (1) if the current clock provider is a
lower priority reference (2 to 60), or switches to another reference if the current clock provider is the primary
reference.

PARAMETERS
Each field parameter is described in this section. Any variations for a particular operation are noted separately.
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:

CLK PROVIDER (T-1 Clock Provider)
Keyword
Predefined ASCII characters
Keywords:

PRIMARY - Primary Reference
OTHER
- Other Reference

This field manually switches the T-1 clock provider between the primary reference (1) and other
references (2 to 60). The T-1 clock provider feature must be enabled with the Digital Carrier
Channel Assignment command (CMD 413) before this command can be executed.

3-369

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
T-1 CLOCK PROVIDER SELECTION ASSIGNMENT (CMD 412)
PERCEPTION 4000
SYSTEM ERROR MESSAGES
The following error messages are unique to this command.
C41200 - Check Clock Provider
I41201 - Warning: Please try later, database is reserved

3-370

COMMANDS

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
TERMINAL MAINTENANCE (CMD 206)
PERCEPTION 4000

COMMANDS

TERMINAL MAINTENANCE (CMD 206)
The Terminal Maintenance command is used to make equipment or terminal ports busy or idle, and to display the
state of these ports.
Command Keyword:

TERMINAL_MAINT

Category Name:

Maintenance

PREREQUISITE COMMANDS
There are no prerequisites for this command.
OPERATIONS
Available operations:

BUSY
IDLE
DISPLAY
SHOW

The function and required data fields for each operation are described in this section.

BUSY

EQUIP #

req

This operation sets a terminal to the busy state. Looping is permitted.

IDLE

EQUIP #

req

This operation sets a terminal to the idle state. When the equipment number and a carriage return are entered,
the system displays a prompt confirming the 'make idle' request. Looping is permitted.

3-371

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
TERMINAL MAINTENANCE (CMD 206)
PERCEPTION 4000

COMMANDS

DISPLAY

EQUIP #

CARD

TRML

PHY S

PRT S

PBI S

POS

TYPE

DN

TS

GS

SS

AT&T

locked

opt

This operation displays terminal status information. Loops are permitted in the “EQUIP #” and "POS" fields.

SHOW

REP#

EQUIP #

TRML

PHY S

PRT S

PBI S

POS

TYPE

DN

TS

GS

SS

opt

req

AT&T

TIME STAMP

locked

The SHOW operation displays 'snapshots' of the current status of the selected equipment number over a
specified period of time, or for a specified number of times. For example, the status of "EQUIP #" 011101 can be
displayed continually for a quarter of an hour; or it can display up to 999 snapshots. Any equipment status
changes are shown on the display screen as they occur. Note that if the system is congested, the SHOW
operation runs slowly, producing fewer snapshots.
PARAMETERS
Each field parameter is described in this section. Any variations for a particular operation are noted separately.
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:
LOOP:

EQUIP # (Equipment Number)
EQ Type
5 or 6 digits
(0)10101 to 101408 *
Allowed in BUSY, IDLE, and DISPLAY operations
* Use the following chart to determine valid ranges for various types of equipment.
For BSTI, PBRC, DKTI, and 1B-DSTI equipment cards, the following ranges apply:

3-372

Digits

Range

Hardware

First digit(s)
Second two digits
Last two digits

(0)1~10
01~11, 13
01~16

Shelf no.
Card slot no.
Circuit no.

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
TERMINAL MAINTENANCE (CMD 206)
PERCEPTION 4000

COMMANDS

For a 2B-DSTI equipment card, the following ranges apply:
Digits

Range

Hardware

First digit(s)
Second two digits
Last two digits

(0)1~10
01, 03, 05, 07, 09, 11
01~16

Shelf no.
Card slot no.
Circuit no.

For an EKTI, DKTI, DIDI, XSTI, EM1I, and COGI card, the following are valid ranges:
Digits

Range

Hardware

First digit(s)
Second two digits
Last two digits

(0)1~10
01~14
01~08

Shelf no.
Card slot no.
Circuit no.

For an EM2I card, the following are valid ranges:
Digits

Range

Hardware

First digit(s)
Second two digits
Last two digits

(0)1~10
01~14
01~06

Shelf no.
Card slot no.
Circuit no.

For a TTRI or IPRI card, the following ranges are valid:
Digits

Range

Hardware

First digit(s)
Second two digits
Last two digits

(0)1~10
02, 04, 06, 08, 10, 12
01~24

Shelf no.
Card slot no.
Circuit no.

For an IPRC card, the following ranges are valid:
Digits

Range

Hardware

First digit(s)
Second two digits
Last two digits

(0)1~10
01~11, 13
01

Shelf no.
Card slot no.
Circuit no.

This field designates an equipment number. The first digit(s) represents the shelf number, the
next two digits represent the card slot number, and the last two digits represent the circuit
number.
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:

CARD (Equipment Card Type)
Keyword
Predefined ASCII characters
Keywords:

1DSTI
2DSTI
BSTI
COGI

-

1-B channel DSTI card
2-B channel DSTI card
BSTI card
COGI card

3-373

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
TERMINAL MAINTENANCE (CMD 206)
PERCEPTION 4000

COMMANDS
DIDI
DKTI
EKTI
EM1I
EM2I
IPRC
IPRI
PBRC
TTRI
XSTI
NOCARD
UND
RSVD

-

DIDI card
DKTI card
EKTI card
EM1I card
EM2I card
IPRC card
IPRI card
PBRC (DTMF) card
TTRI card
XSTI card
No card
Undefined
Reserved card, circuit cannot be used

This field displays what type of card the equipment is assigned to.
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:

TRML (Terminal Type)
Keyword
Predefined ASCII characters
Keywords:

3-374

2010
2020
AD1
AD2
AM
ANLG
ANMW
ATT
AVMS
B_CH
BL
D_CH
DID
DIU
DK10
DK1D
DK20
DK2D
DM
DTMF
EK01
EK10
EK20
EK2D
EM1
EM2
GND
ID10
ID20
LP

-

10-key PERCEPTION 4000 digital telephone
20-key PERCEPTION 4000 digital telephone
Add-on Module #1
Add-on Module #2
Announcement Machine
Analog Telephone
Analog Telephone with Message Waiting
Attendant
Analog VMS Port
ISDN B-channel terminal
UNA Night Bell
ISDN D-channel terminal
Direct Inward Dialing Trunk
Data Station
DKT with 10 keys and no display
DKT with 10 keys and display
DKT with 20 keys and no display
DKT with 20 keys and display
Dictation Machine
DTMF Receiver
Electronic telephone with 1 line key and 3 fixed keys
Electronic telephone with 10 flexible keys and 4 fixed keys
Electronic telephone with 20 flexible keys and 4 fixed keys
Electronic telephone with 20 flexible keys, 4 fixed keys, and a display
EM Type 1 Trunk
EM Type 2 Trunk
Ground Start Trunk
10-key PERCEPTION 4000 Digital Telephone with DIU
20-key PERCEPTION 4000 Digital Telephone with DIU
Loop Start Trunk

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
TERMINAL MAINTENANCE (CMD 206)
PERCEPTION 4000

COMMANDS
LTIE
MDM
MPD
MS
OPS
T1

-

Loop Start TIE Trunk
Modem Pool
Modem Pool DIU
Music-on-Hold Device
Off-premises Station
T1 Trunk

The "TERMINAL" field defines the type of terminal that is associated with the equipment number.
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:

PHY S (Physical Status of the Equipment)
Keyword
Predefined ASCII characters
Keywords:

DLLF
DLNP
INDL
MBDF
MBDL
MBNA
MBNM
MBNP
MBST
MBSY
MISC
NANP
NANS
NMCH
NOPP
STCH
TIDL

-

Down Line Load Fault
In Down Line Load; No Port Processor
In Down Line Load Process
Made Busy; Down Line Load Fault
Made Busy; In Down Line Load Process
Made Busy; No Answer
Made Busy; No Match
Made Busy; No Port Processor
Made Busy; Start Check (Trunk)
Made Busy
Miscellaneous
No Answer; No Port Processor
No Answer
No Match
No Port Processor
Start Check (Trunk)
Terminal Idle

This field specifies the hardware (or physical) state of the equipment.
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:

PRT S (Status of the Equipment Port)
Keyword
Predefined ASCII characters
Keywords:

FMKB
IDL
MKB
NODB

-

Equipment was forced into a make busy state
Equipment was made idle
Equipment was made busy
Equipment has either no software database, or has a
mixed hardware and software status
PRBK - Equipment is pre-blocking

This field specifies the software status of the equipment.
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:

PBI S (Port Make Busy/Idle Status)
Keyword
Predefined ASCII characters

3-375

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
TERMINAL MAINTENANCE (CMD 206)
PERCEPTION 4000
Keywords:

COMMANDS
IDL
IREQ
MKB
MREQ
PRBK

-

Made Idle
Make Idle Requested
Made Busy
Make Busy Requested
Pre-blocked

This field displays the Make Busy/Idle status of the equipment port. The IREQ and MREQ
keywords indicate that a request to Make Idle/Make Busy has been sent, but a response has not
been received back. The IDL and MKB options indicate that the request has been carried out.
PRBK signifies that a Make Busy request has been sent to a port that is in the talking state, and
that port will go into a Make Busy state when the call is terminated.
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:

LOOP:

POS (Key Assignment Position Number)
Decimal
1 or 2 digits
1 to 10 (For 10-key PERCEPTION 4000 digital telephones, 10-key DKT telephones, and 10-key
electronic telephones)
1 to 20 (For 20-key PERCEPTION 4000 digital telephones, 20-key DKT telephones, 20-key
electronic telephones, and 20-key add-on modules)
1 to 60 (For 60-key add-on module [three 20-key modules])
Allowed in a DISPLAY operation only
This field specifies a station's key position, as defined in the Station Feature Key Assignment
command (CMD 331), and applies to digital and electronic telephones, add-on modules, and
digital telephones with DIUs.

FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:

TYPE (Key Assignment Type)
Keyword
Predefined ASCII characters
Keywords:

AGE
DDN
HOT
ICM
LINE
LLIN
MLIN
PRM
PVT
SPVT
SUP

-

ACD Line, Agent
Data Line (Integrated DIU)
Hotline
Intercom Group
Secondary Line Appearance
Logical Line
Multiple Line
Prime Line
Private Trunk Line
Secondary Private Trunk Line
ACD Line, Supervisor

The "TYPE" field defines the key type for the location listed in the "POS" field. Key types are
assigned with the Station Feature Key Assignment command (CMD 331).
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:
RANGE:
LOOP:

3-376

DN (Directory Number)
DN Type
1 to 5 digits
0 to 99999
Not allowed
Not allowed

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
TERMINAL MAINTENANCE (CMD 206)
PERCEPTION 4000

COMMANDS

This field displays the directory number assigned to a given station key position, as defined in the
Station Feature Key Assignment command (CMD 331).
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:
RANGE:
LOOP:

TS (Terminal Layer's State)
Decimal
1 to 3 digits
0 to 999
Not allowed
Not allowed
The "TS" field is an output only field used by Toshiba personnel for diagnosing software status.
For attendant consoles, this field represents the state of ATC virtual machines. For trunks, this
field represents the state of TTC virtual machines. For stations, this field represents the state of
HDT virtual machines. For ISDN terminals, this field represents the state of ITTC virtual
machines.

FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:
RANGE:
LOOP:

GS (Group Layer's State)
Decimal
1 to 3 digits
0 to 999
Not allowed
Not allowed
The "GS" field is an output only field used by Toshiba personnel for diagnosing software status.
For attendant consoles, this field represents the state of AGC virtual machines. For stations, this
field represents the state of KSU virtual machines. For ISDN trunks, this field represents each
channel's made busy/made idle state in ITTC virtual machines.

FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:
RANGE:
LOOP:

SS (Server Layer's State)
Decimal
1 to 3 digits
0 to 999
Not allowed
Not allowed
The "SS" field is an output only field used by Toshiba personnel for diagnosing software status.
For attendant consoles, this field represents the state of ASC virtual machines. For trunks, this
field represents the state of TSC virtual machines. For stations, this field represents the state of
SSC virtual machines.

FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:
RANGE:
LOOP:

AT&T (AT&T Maintenance Mode)
Decimal
1 to 3 digits
0 to 999
Not allowed
Not allowed
The "AT&T" field is an output only field used by Toshiba personnel for diagnosing software status.

3-377

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
TERMINAL MAINTENANCE (CMD 206)
PERCEPTION 4000
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:

VALUE:
RANGE:
LOOP:

COMMANDS

TIME STAMP (Time Stamp)
Decimal
hh:mm:ss where: hh indicates the hour - 00 to 23
mm indicates the minutes - 00 to 59
ss indicates the seconds - 00 to 59
00:00:00 to 23:59:59
Not allowed
Not allowed
This is an output only field and displays the current time in military format.

FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:
RANGE:
LOOP:

REP# (Number of Repetitions)
Decimal / Keyword
1 to 3 digits / Predefined ASCII characters
1 to 999
Not allowed
Not allowed
Keywords:

Q1
Q2
Q3
Q4
Q5
Q6
Q7
Q8

-

Repeat for 1 quarter of an hour
Repeat for 2 quarter hour periods
Repeat for 3 quarter hour periods
Repeat for 4 quarter hour periods (1 hour)
Repeat for 5 quarter hour periods
Repeat for 6 quarter hour periods
Repeat for 7 quarter hour periods
Repeat for 8 quarter hour periods (2 hours)

This field selects the number of repetitions or the period of time in which to display the ongoing
status of the selected equipment. The equipment can be monitored for up to 999 times or up to a
full two hours. Any equipment status changes are shown on the display screen as they occur.
SYSTEM ERROR MESSAGES
The following error messages are unique to this command.
C20600
C20601
C20602
C20603
C20604

3-378

-

Equipment is already busy
Equipment is already idle
No database exists for this equipment
Equipment number is out of range
BUSY and IDLE operations are not applicable to night bell equipment

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
TIME ACTIVATED COMMAND PROGRAMMING (CMD 110)
PERCEPTION 4000

COMMANDS

TIME ACTIVATED COMMAND PROGRAMMING (CMD 110)
The Time Activated Command Programming command sets timers for automatic activation or deactivation of
maintenance and/or diagnostic functions. The command also displays the current time activation set-up status of
each function. Pre-determined maintenance functions are activated at the specified date and time. Audit functions
are activated based on their specified relative interval time.
Command Keyword:

TIME_ACT_COM

Category Name:

Diagnostic

PREREQUISITE COMMANDS
There are no prerequisites for this command.
OPERATIONS
Available operations:

ENABLE
DISABLE
DISPLAY

The function and required data fields for each operation are described in this section.

ENABLE

TYPE

FNC NAME

req

START TIME

INTERVAL

opt

This operation programs the automatic activation of the specified maintenance or diagnostic function. Once this
operation is executed, the specified functions are activated at the desired time.

DISABLE

TYPE

FNC NAME

req

This operation cancels automatic activation of functions set by the ENABLE operation by removing activation
timer(s) from the operating system's timer queue. The function type and name are required.

3-379

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
TIME ACTIVATED COMMAND PROGRAMMING (CMD 110)
PERCEPTION 4000

COMMANDS

DISPLAY

TYPE

FNC NAME

START TIME

req

INTERVAL

opt

This operation displays the time activation set up for the specified function. The function type and name are
required.
PARAMETERS
Each field parameter is described in this section. Any variations for a particular operation are noted separately.
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:

TYPE (Type of Function)
Keyword
Predefined ASCII characters
Keywords:

MAIN - Maintenance Function
DIAG - Diagnostic Function
BOTH - Both Maintenance and Diagnostic Functions (Allowed in a DISPLAY
operation only)

This field indicates the type of function to be enabled, disabled, or displayed.
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:

FNC NAME (Function Name)
Keyword
Predefined ASCII characters
Keywords - Maintenance Functions:
CMCK - Compares the contents in memory to the contents of the corresponding
file on the hard disk. If there is a mismatch, the system prints out an error
message.
FBKP - Performs a program/data file consolidation. A consolidation is performed
on both sides if the system is redundant.
SWO - Initiates a system switch-over.
ALL
- All of the above (Allowed in a DISPLAY operation only)
Keywords - Diagnostic Functions:
LPWR - Checks the power on the line/trunk shelves.
MISC - Checks communications between the MISC card and the MCPU and
LCPU.
MPWR - Checks the operational status of the stand-by side in a redundant
system.
PPWR - Audits status of the port processor cards and terminals.
TEMP - Checks the system's operating temperature.
ALL
- All of the above (Allowed in a DISPLAY operation only)

3-380

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
TIME ACTIVATED COMMAND PROGRAMMING (CMD 110)
PERCEPTION 4000

COMMANDS

The entry in this field must correspond to the type of function entered in the "TYPE" field. The
keyword ALL is available only in a DISPLAY operation. Before entering LPWR, adjust the
parameters of the Redundancy Selection Assignment command (CMD 409) to fit the
configuration of the PERCEPTION 4000 system being worked on.
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:
DEFAULT:
RANGE:
LOOP:

START TIME (Activation Start Time)
Decimal with fixed length
4 digits in the form HHMM (HH=hour, MM=minutes)
0000 to 2359
(Maintenance functions only)
Maintenance Function: Current Programmed Time
Diagnostic Function: Current Time
Allowed in a DISPLAY operation only
Not allowed
A  key entry indicates the default time is to be used as input data. However, data entered
in this field is treated differently based on the specified "TYPE" and operation. For maintenance
functions, a  key entry defaults to the current setup time, otherwise,data entered in this
field replaces the current setup time. For diagnostic functions, any input in this field other than a
 is ignored; the default current clock is used and the following message displays: “DATA
INPUT to START TIME FIELD IS IGNORED.”

FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:
DEFAULT:

RANGE:
LOOP:

INTERVAL (Interval Time)
Decimal
1 to 4 digits
Maintenance Function: 1 to 31 Days
Diagnostic Function: 0030 to 3600 Seconds
Maintenance Function: 1 day
Diagnostic Functions
MPWR: 0005 seconds
All others: 0030 seconds
Allowed in a DISPLAY operation only
Not allowed
For maintenance functions, a  key entry defaults to a one (1) day interval between function
activation, otherwise, data entered replaces the current setup. For diagnostic functions, a 
key entry sets a 30 second interval between operations, otherwise, data entered replaces the
current setup.

SYSTEM ERROR MESSAGES
The following error messages are unique to this command.
C11000
C11001
I11002
C11003
C11004
C11005
C11006

-

Keyword combination error
Set timer error
Warning: Data entered in Activation Start Time field is ignored
Interval time is out of range
This item is not registered
Input activation start time is out of range
Start time conflicts with switch-over start time

3-381

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
TIME ACTIVATED COMMAND PROGRAMMING (CMD 110)
PERCEPTION 4000
RELATED COMMANDS
Clock Reset (CMD 121)
Disk File Manipulation (CMD 152)
Initiate Switchover (CMD 102)

3-382

COMMANDS

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
TIME ZONE ASSIGNMENT (CMD 336)
PERCEPTION 4000

COMMANDS

TIME ZONE ASSIGNMENT (CMD 336)
The Time Zone Assignment command defines different time zones (1 to 4) for each day of the week and holidays.
This information is used by the following tables for all outbound and inbound calls:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.

LCR Time Zone Table
Inward Routing Time Zone Table
COS/DRL/FRL/Queue Priority Time Zone Table
ISDN Time Zone Class 1 Table
ISDN Time Zone Class 2 Table
ISDN Time Zone Class 3 Table
ISDN Time Zone Class 4 Table

These tables change LCR routing of calls, inward routing of calls, and the COS, DRL, FRL, and Queue Priority
Level of configured stations, based on the day of the week and time of day.
Command Keyword:

TZ_ASSIGN

Category Name:

Administration

PREREQUISITE COMMANDS
There are no prerequisites for this command.
OPERATIONS
Available operations:

MODIFY
DISPLAY

The function and required data fields for each operation are described in this section.

MODIFY

TYPE

INDEX

req

WEEK DAY

START TIME

TIME ZONE #

opt

opt

This operation modifies the attributes of the seven prementioned tables. The first three fields are required, while
the remaining fields are optional. If, however, an entry or deletion () is made in the "START TIME"
field, an entry or deletion must also be made in the "TIME ZONE #" field. A time zone may be deleted only if it is
the last one of the day. All start times for each day must be in ascending order.

3-383

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
TIME ZONE ASSIGNMENT (CMD 336)
PERCEPTION 4000

COMMANDS

DISPLAY

SUN
MON
TUE
WED
THU
FRI
SAT
HOL
TYPE INDEX S TZ TZ S TZ TZ S TZ TZ S TZ TZ S TZ TZ S TZ TZ S TZ TZ S TZ TZ

opt

req

This operation displays various time zone table information based on the specified input data. The “TYPE” field is
required, while the remaining fields are optional. Looping is permitted in the “INDEX” field. The "S TZ" field is the
start time which is in the form HHMM (HH is the hour, MM is the minute).
PARAMETERS
Each field parameter is described in this section. Any variations for a particular operation are noted separately.
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:

TYPE (Type of Table)
Keyword
Predefined ASCII characters
Keywords:

COS
INW
LCR
IS01
IS02
IS03
IS04

-

COS/DRL/FRLP/QPL Time Zone Table
Inward Routing Time Zone Table
LCR Time Zone Table
ISDN Time/Day Change Definition Table (Class 1)
ISDN Time/Day Change Definition Table (Class 2)
ISDN Time/Day Change Definition Table (Class 3)
ISDN Time/Day Change Definition Table (Class 4)

This field specifies the table to be modified or displayed.
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:
LOOP:
RANGE:

INDEX (Index Number)
Decimal
1 digit
1 to 4 (or to the maximum number of time zones)
Allowed in DISPLAY operation
Not allowed
This field is an index number used for the convenience of the administrator. The value varies
according to the maximum number of time zones configured.

FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:

3-384

WEEK DAY (Day of Week or Holiday)
Keyword
Predefined ASCII characters

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
TIME ZONE ASSIGNMENT (CMD 336)
PERCEPTION 4000
Keywords:

COMMANDS
SUN
MON
TUE
WED
THU
FRI
SAT
HOL

-

Sunday
Monday
Tuesday
Wednesday
Thursday
Friday
Saturday
Holiday

This field selects the day of the week (or a holiday) that is to be modified. In a DISPLAY
operation, each day/holiday displays in the header with subfields.
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:
LOOP:
RANGE:

START TIME and S TZ (Start Time for each Time Zone)
Decimal with fixed length
4 digits in the form HHMM (where HH = hour and MM = minutes)
00 to 23 (HH = 24 hours/day in military time)
00 to 59 (MM = 60 minutes/hour)
Not allowed
Not allowed

The "START TIME" and "S TZ" fields indicate the starting time for the specified time zone. The first two digits
represent the hour of the day in military time (00 to 23), and the last two digits represent the minute (00 to 59). All
start times for each day must be in ascending order. The ending time is the minute before the next starting time. If
no further starting time is entered for the day, the last time zone is carried over to the next day.
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:
LOOP:
RANGE:

TIME ZONE # and TZ (Time Zone Number)
Decimal
1 digit
1 to 4
Not allowed
Not allowed
This field assigns a time zone number for the starting time entered in the previous field (START
TIME or S TZ). In a MODIFY operation, if an entry or deletion () is made in the
"START TIME" field, an entry or deletion must also be made in the "TIME ZONE #" field.
If the time zone for ISDN is not specified, then this parameter will default to Zone 1, which will
apply for all 24 hours for all ISDN tables (ISO1 ~ ISO4).

SYSTEM ERROR MESSAGES
The following error messages are unique to this command.
C33600
C33601
C33602
C33603
C33604
C33605
C33606

-

Check time for time change
Time zone number must be input
Start time must be input
Check time change number
Entry into this time change number cannot be done; check previous
Deletion of this time change cannot be done; check next
Must delete both start time and zone number for the time change

3-385

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
TIME ZONE ASSIGNMENT (CMD 336)
PERCEPTION 4000

COMMANDS

COMMENTS
The following is an example of a Time Zone Table.
Index#

Monday

1
2
3
Index#

Tuesday

1
2
3

Time

Zone

Time Zone Duration

0800
1700
2300

1
2
3

Time

Zone

Time Zone Duration

0800
1700
2300

1
2
3

8:00 AM to 4:59 PM
5:00 PM to 10:59 PM
11:00 PM to ...

8:00 AM to 4:59 PM
5:00 PM to 10:59 PM
11:00 PM to 7:59 AM Tuesday

As shown, time zones may overlap from one day to the next (Zone 3).
RELATED COMMANDS
Class of Service Assignment (CMD 334)
Destination Restriction Level Assignment (CMD 337)
Facility Restriction Level Profile Assignment (CMD 387)
LCR/Authorization TZ Change Assignment (CMD 343)
LCR Routing Table Assignment (CMD 383)
System Holiday Assignment (CMD 404)

3-386

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
TIMEOUT ROUTING DESTINATION ASSIGNMENT (CMD 323)
PERCEPTION 4000

COMMANDS

TIMEOUT ROUTING DESTINATION ASSIGNMENT (CMD 323)
The Timeout Routing feature allows a call to be routed to a preselected location if the user times out while dialing.
This feature is activated if the user fails to dial or fails to dial enough digits for a valid number. Up to 32 destination
locations can be selected in the system. Each station can be programmed to route to one of these 32 locations in
a time-out condition. If the destination location is undefined or deleted, the caller will receive Reorder Tone when
the time-out occurs.
This command allows you to modify the destination location, which can be an internal station number, a logical
line, an attendant or attendant group, or a hunt group pilot DN.
Command Keyword:

TIMEOUT_ROUTING

Category Name:

Administration

PREREQUISITE COMMANDS
Attendant Group Assignment (CMD 372)
Attendant Position Assignment (CMD 370)
Station Assignment (CMD 330)
Station Hunting Assignment (CMD 342)

(The prerequisite commands depend upon the
destination number.)

OPERATIONS
Available operations:

MODIFY
DISPLAY

The function and required data fields for each operation are described in this section.

MODIFY

INDEX

|

DESTINATION NUMBER

|

req
The MODIFY operation allows you to change a destination number in the Timeout Routing Assignment Table.
Both the "INDEX" and the "DESTINATION NUMBER" fields are required. The destination number can be deleted
if a  is entered in that field. Loops are not allowed in either field.

3-387

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
TIMEOUT ROUTING DESTINATION ASSIGNMENT (CMD 323)
PERCEPTION 4000

COMMANDS

DISPLAY

INDEX

|

DESTINATION NUMBER

|

opt
This operation displays the destination numbers assigned to the Timeout Routing Assignment Table. Parameter
input is optional. Looping is allowed in the "INDEX" field, however, if no data is entered in this field, all assigned
index options are displayed.

PARAMETERS
Each field parameter is described in this section. Any variations for a particular operation are noted separately.
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:
LOOP:

INDEX (Timeout Routing Index Number)
Decimal
1 or 2 digits
1 to 32
Allowed in a DISPLAY operation
This field specifies the Timeout Routing Index Number assigned to a station, and corresponds to
the "TIMEOUT INDEX" field in the Station-Level Parameter Assignment command (CMD 329).
Valid entries are from 1 to 32.

FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:
RANGE:
LOOP:

DESTINATION NUMBER (Destination Directory Number)
Dialing Digits
1 to 5 digits
0 to 99999
Allowed in a DISPLAY operation
Not allowed
This field identifies a specific destination for its associated "INDEX" number. Valid destinations
include an internal station, a logical line, an attendant/attendant group, a hunt group pilot
directory number, or an emergency access code. During a MODIFY operation, if a  is entered, the destination number will be deleted.

SYSTEM ERROR MESSAGES
The following error messages are unique to this command.
C32301 - DN must be an ATT/ATT GRP, Station, Hunt Group Pilot DN, or Emergency Access Code
C32302 - No DN is found for the given INDEX

RELATED COMMANDS
Station-Level Parameter Assignment (CMD 329)

3-388

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
TRACE SETUP (CMD 168)
PERCEPTION 4000

COMMANDS

TRACE SETUP (CMD 168)
The Trace Setup command is used to enable a historical output regarding a virtual machine within the
PERCEPTION 4000 system. Once enabled, the PERCEPTION 4000 system will begin to collect virtual machine
operating information in a designated system buffer. Collected information can be displayed via the Crash Dump
Display command (CMD 164). A key on the PERCEPTION 4000 attendant console can be assigned to initiate the
data collection procedure. When this key is pressed, the system will begin collecting information on the virtual
machine that has been specified via the ENABLE operation. Termination of the data collection procedure requires
programming input (the attendant console key does not toggle on/off operation).
Command Keyword:

TRACE_SETUP

Category Name:

MAINT

OPERATIONS
Available operations:
ENABLE
DISPLAY
SETUP
SHOW
The function and required data fields for each operation are described as follows:

ENABLE

MCPU

LPU1

LPU2

LPU3

opt

This operation is used to specify the virtual machine about which historical information is desired.

DISPLAY

MCPU

tab

LPU1

LPU2

LPU3

locked

This operation displays the virtual machine that was selected through the ENABLE operation. Note that actual
historical information about this virtual machine is provided via the Crash Dump Display command (CMD 164).

3-389

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
TRACE SETUP (CMD 168)
PERCEPTION 4000

COMMANDS

SETUP

TYPE

DN

POS

req

This operation is used to assign a key on the PERCEPTION 4000 attendant console for the manufacturer
(Toshiba) to start the virtual machine data collection procedure. Note that this key is not also used to end the data
collection procedure; to end the procedure, an entry of NON in the "SHOW" field is required.

SHOW

TYPE

tab

DN

POS

locked

This operation is used to display the attendant console directory number and the key position that were setup to
begin the virtual machine history collection procedure.

PARAMETERS
This section defines input permitted for each field. Any variations for a particular operation are noted separately.
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:

MCPU (Main Central Processing Unit)
Keyword
3 ASCII characters
Keywords:

APH
CFM
IOC
MDL
MFS
MSC
MSM
MTF
NON

-

Application handler
Command file management
Input/output control
MCPU download to cards
MCPU fault supervisor
MCPU system control
MCPU system management
MCPU traffic measurement
No setting

The keyword entry in the "MCPU" field specifies the MCPU virtual machine that will be monitored for historical
data.
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:

3-390

LPU1 (Local Processing Unit 1)
Keyword
3 ASCII characters

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
TRACE SETUP (CMD 168)
PERCEPTION 4000
Keywords:

COMMANDS
DTF
LDL
LFS
LSC
LSM
LPC
LTF
NON

-

Data traffic measurement
LCPU download to cards
LCPU fault supervisor
LCPU system control
LCPU system management
Logic pair control
LCPU traffic measurement
No setting

The "LPU1" field entry specifies the virtual machine related to Local Central Processing Unit 1, which will be
monitored for historical data.
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:

LPU2 (Local Processing Unit 2)
Keyword
3 ASCII characters
Keywords:

DTF
LDL
LFS
LSC
LSM
LPC
LTF
NON

-

Data traffic measurement
LCPU download to cards
LCPU fault supervisor
LCPU system control
LCPU system management
Logic pair control
LCPU traffic measurement
No setting

The "LPU2" field entry specifies the virtual machine related to Local Central Processing Unit 2, which will be
monitored for historical data.
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:

LPU3 (Local Processing Unit 3)
Keyword
3 ASCII characters
Keywords:

DTF
LDL
LFS
LSC
LSM
LPC
LTF
NON

-

Data traffic measurement
LCPU download to cards
LCPU fault supervisor
LCPU system control
LCPU system management
Logic pair control
LCPU traffic measurement
No setting

The "LPU3" field entry specifies the virtual machine related to Local Central Processing Unit 3, which will be
monitored for historical data.
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:

TYPE (Device Type)
Keyword
3 ASCII characters
Keywords:

ATT
STA

- Attendant console
- Station (option not available—future use)

3-391

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
TRACE SETUP (CMD 168)
PERCEPTION 4000

COMMANDS

The "TYPE" field entry should be ATT. The STA option is for future use. The specified device is that which is to
contain the key that starts the data collection procedure.
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:

DN (Directory Number of Device Type)
Decimal
1 to 5 digits
1 to 99999

Enter the directory number of the device (attendant console) that is to contain the key that starts the data
collection procedure.
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:

POS (Key Position Number)
Decimal or Keyword
1 to 2 digits
1 to 24
Keywords:

NON

- Disable key operation

When programming an attendant console key for data collection initiation, specify the position number of the
desired key on the console. To disable key operation or to disable the data collection procedure, enter the
keyword NON.

SYSTEM MESSAGES
The following error messages are unique to this command.
C16800
C16801
C16802

- Attendant directory number already exists
- Not an individual attendant directory number
- Attendant directory number does not exist

RELATED COMMANDS
Crash Dump Display (CMD 164)

3-392

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
TRAFFIC MEASUREMENT OBJECT ASSIGNMENT (CMD 902)
PERCEPTION 4000

COMMANDS

TRAFFIC MEASUREMENT OBJECT ASSIGNMENT (CMD 902)
The Traffic Measurement Object Assignment command defines the types of objects to be tracked (attendant
groups/trunk groups), and specifies the attendant group/trunk group numbers to be measured. In addition, traffic
measurement can be set up to track all trunk groups. Up to 32 objects can be assigned for traffic measurement.
Command Keyword:

TRAFFIC_OBJECT

Category Name:

Application Processor

PREREQUISITE COMMANDS
Attendant Group Assignment (CMD 372)
Trunk Assignment (CMD 313)
Trunk Group Assignment (CMD 310)

(Prerequisite commands depend upon the "TYPE"
selections.)

OPERATIONS
Available operations:

ADD
DELETE
DISPLAY
INIT

The function and required data fields for each operation are described in this section.

ADD

TYPE

OBJ

TYPE

OBJ

TYPE

OBJ

TYPE

OBJ

TYPE

OBJ

TYPE

OBJ

TYPE

OBJ

opt

req

This operation adds new objects to the Traffic Measurement Object Table, up to a total of 32 objects. To add a
new object, its “TYPE” must be specified. The "OBJ" may or may not be required based on the “TYPE."

DELETE

TYPE

req

OBJ

TYPE

OBJ

TYPE

OBJ

TYPE

OBJ

TYPE

OBJ

TYPE

OBJ

TYPE

OBJ

opt

This operation deletes an object from the table. The “TYPE” must be specified, while the “OBJ” may or may not
be required based on the “TYPE."

3-393

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
TRAFFIC MEASUREMENT OBJECT ASSIGNMENT (CMD 902)
PERCEPTION 4000

COMMANDS

DISPLAY

TYPE

OBJ

TYPE

OBJ

TYPE

OBJ

TYPE

OBJ

TYPE

OBJ

TYPE

OBJ

TYPE

OBJ

output only

This operation displays the Traffic/Feature Measurement Object Table. The table displays automatically after
entering a  and a .

INIT

INITIALIZE

req

This operation initializes the object table. Before erasing the table, the system requests confirmation of the
operation. Once executed, a message displays confirming initialization.
PARAMETERS
Each field parameter is described in this section. Any variations for a particular operation are noted separately.
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:

TYPE (Type of Traffic)
Keyword
Predefined ASCII characters
Keywords:

ATG - Attendant Group
TGN - Trunk Group
TRTL - Total for All Trunks

This field specifies the types of objects for which traffic measurement is to be performed. The
ATG and TGN fields require an "OBJ," while the TRTL option does not. The TRTL option
provides a total for all trunk groups that are defined in the system.
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:

OBJ (Traffic Object - Group)
Decimal
1 to 3 digits
1 to 30 for Attendant Groups (or to the maximum system configuration)
1 to 256 for Trunk Groups (or to the maximum system configuration)
The "OBJ" field specifies which group selected in the "TYPE" field is to be tracked. The TRTL
option does not require an "OBJ" field entry.

FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:

3-394

INITIALIZE (Initialize Traffic Measurement Table)
Keyword
Predefined ASCII characters

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
TRAFFIC MEASUREMENT OBJECT ASSIGNMENT (CMD 902)
PERCEPTION 4000
Keywords:

COMMANDS
YES - Perform Initialization
NO - Cancel Initialization Request

This field initializes, or erases, all of the Traffic/Feature Measurement Object Tables. The system
requests confirmation before performing the operation. Once a YES is entered, a message
displays confirming initialization.
SYSTEM ERROR MESSAGES
The following error messages are unique to this command.
C90200
C90201
C90204
C90205
C90206
C90207
C90208

-

Check Objects: M, M
N objects too many; input not accepted
Initialization complete
Maximum A:X
Minimum value for A:X
Object not found
Not allowed to enter data in OBJ field for TRTL type

NOTE:

M = 1 to 14.
N = 1 to 7.
A is a keyword (TGN or ATG).
X is the maximum value of the system configuration for the keyword, i.e., if the system has a
total of 5 attendant groups, any value above 5 is rejected in the OBJ field for attendant groups.

RELATED COMMANDS
Traffic Measurement Setup Assignment (CMD 900)
Traffic Measurement Time Zone Assignment (CMD 901)

3-395

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
TRAFFIC MEASUREMENT SETUP ASSIGNMENT (CMD 900)
PERCEPTION 4000

COMMANDS

TRAFFIC MEASUREMENT SETUP ASSIGNMENT (CMD 900)
The Traffic Measurement Setup Assignment command activates/deactivates the traffic measurement system
feature. In addition, the command selects the output device for system reports. This command is used in
conjunction with the Traffic Measurement Time Zone Assignment command (CMD 901) and the Traffic
Measurement Object Assignment command (CMD 902).
Command Keyword:

TRAFFIC_SETUP

Category Name:

Application Processor

PREREQUISITE COMMANDS
There are no prerequisites for this command.
OPERATIONS
Available operations:

MODIFY
DISPLAY

The function and required data fields for each operation are described in this section.

MODIFY

DISP Z01 Z02 Z03 Z04 Z05 Z06 Z07 Z08 Z09 Z10 Z11 Z12 Z13 Z14 Z15 Z16
A/D DEV SZ EZ A R A R A R A R A R A R A R A R A R A R A R A R A R A R A R A R

opt

This operation modifies the attributes of the Traffic Measurement Setup Table. All of the fields are optional.

DISPLAY
DISP Z01 Z02 Z03 Z04 Z05 Z06 Z07 Z08 Z09 Z10 Z11 Z12 Z13 Z14 Z15 Z16
A/D DEV SZ EZ A R A R A R A R A R A R A R A R A R A R A R A R A R A R A R A R

output only

This operation displays a Traffic Measurement Setup Table. The table displays automatically after entering a
 and a .

3-396

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
TRAFFIC MEASUREMENT SETUP ASSIGNMENT (CMD 900)
PERCEPTION 4000

COMMANDS

PARAMETERS
Each field parameter is described in this section. Any variations for a particular operation are noted separately.
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:

A/D (Activate/Deactivate)
Keyword
Predefined ASCII characters
Keywords:

ON - Traffic Measurement is turned ON
OFF - Traffic Measurement is turned OFF

This field sets a "master flag" to activate/deactivate the traffic measurement feature. When set to
OFF, the feature is turned OFF for all 16 time zones, even if a Y is entered in a "Znn A R" field to
turn traffic measurement ON. When "A/D" is set to ON, each time zone may be activated/
deactivated on an individual basis.
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:

DEV (Output Device)
Keyword
Predefined ASCII characters
Keywords:

TTY - Report format is in TTY printer format for serial I/O port
AP - Report format is in AP format for AP interface

This field selects the format and output device for the reports. The output device may be either a
printer (TTY) or an onscreen display (AP).
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:

DISP SZ (Starting Time Zone for Real Time Display)
Decimal
1 or 2 digits
1 to 16
A traffic report may be displayed at any time. This field specifies the beginning time zone for the
report.

FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:

DISP EZ (Ending Time Zone for Real Time Display)
Decimal
1 or 2 digits
1 to 16
This field specifies the ending time zone for on demand display.

FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:

Znn A R (Activation Flag & Reporting Flag for a specific Time Zone)
Keyword
Predefined ASCII characters
Keywords:

YY
NN
YN
NY

-

Turn ON Traffic Measurement & Report
Turn OFF Traffic Measurement & Report
Turn ON Traffic Measurement & Turn OFF Report
Turn OFF Traffic Measurement & Turn ON Report (Release 2.0 supported)

3-397

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
TRAFFIC MEASUREMENT SETUP ASSIGNMENT (CMD 900)
PERCEPTION 4000

COMMANDS

Up to sixteen time zones (Z01 to Z16) may be defined for traffic measurement each day (see the
Traffic Measurement Time Zone Assignment command, CMD 901). Traffic measurement may be
turned ON for a specified time zone during the day with/without report output, or turned OFF
completely.
SYSTEM ERROR MESSAGES
The following error messages are unique to this command.
C90000 - Check input
D90001
Failed to send transaction to TF
RELATED COMMANDS
Traffic Measurement Object Assignment (CMD 902)
Traffic Measurement Time Zone Assignment (CMD 901)

3-398

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
TRAFFIC MEASUREMENT TIME ZONE ASSIGNMENT (CMD 901)
PERCEPTION 4000

COMMANDS

TRAFFIC MEASUREMENT TIME ZONE ASSIGNMENT (CMD 901)
The Traffic Measurement Time Zone Assignment command modifies and displays the Traffic Measurement Daily
Time Zone Table. The table may have a maximum of 16 time zones.
Command Keyword:

TRAFFIC_TIME_ZONE

Category Name:

Application Processor

PREREQUISITE COMMANDS
There are no prerequisites for this command.
OPERATIONS
Available operations:

MODIFY
DISPLAY

The function and required data fields for each operation are described in this section.

MODIFY

TZ1

TZ2

TZ3

TZ4

TZ5

TZ6

TZ7

TZ8

TZ9

TZ10

TZ11

TZ12

TZ13

TZ14

TZ15

TZ16

TZ14

TZ15

TZ16

opt

This operation changes the starting time of the traffic measurement (TM) time zone(s).

DISPLAY

TZ1

TZ2

TZ3

TZ4

TZ5

TZ6

TZ7

TZ8

TZ9

TZ10

TZ11

TZ12

TZ13

output only

This operation displays the current Traffic Measurement Daily Time Zone Table. The table displays automatically
after entering a  and a .

3-399

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
TRAFFIC MEASUREMENT TIME ZONE ASSIGNMENT (CMD 901)
PERCEPTION 4000

COMMANDS

PARAMETERS
Each field parameter is described in this section. Any variations for a particular operation are noted separately.
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:
LOOP:
RANGE:

TZ1 to TZ16 (Traffic Measurement Time Zones 1 to 16)
Decimal / Keyword
3 or 4 digits (H(H)MM, where H(H) = hour and MM = minutes)
Predefined ASCII characters
0 to 23 (H(H) = 24 hours/day in military time)
00, 15, 30, or 45 (MM = minutes in quarter hour increments)
Not allowed
Not allowed
Keyword:

AUTO

- Automatic generation of starting times for time zones

This field modifies or displays the starting time for individual time zones. For decimal entries, the
first digit(s) represents the hour of the day in military time (0 to 23), and the last two digits
represent the minute in quarter hour increments (00, 15, 30, and 45). All start times must be in
ascending order from "TZ1" to "TZ16." Note that it is not necessary to define all time zones.
In a MODIFY operation, if a  is entered, the stored value is deleted and the field
is treated as an empty field.
The keyword AUTO may be entered in any time zone (TZ) field. When entered, it automatically
adds one hour, based on the previous time zone, to all following empty fields. If all the preceding
TZs are empty, the field in which AUTO is entered defaults to 000.
If AUTO is entered in the "TZ1" field and the other TZ fields are empty, the start time in "TZ1"
becomes 000 (the default value), and all subsequent TZ fields increment by one hour. For
example, "TZ2" = 100, "TZ3" = 200, ... TZ16 = 1500.
If AUTO is entered in "TZi" (2 ≥ i ≤16), the start time in the "TZi" field is based on the start time
TZ (i-1). If the time in TZ(i-1) is empty, it is based on the time in TZ(i-2), and so on. For example,
if all time zone fields have no values entered, except "TZ7" which had a start time of 10:45, then,
by entering the keyword AUTO in field parameters "TZ2" and "TZ10," the following table would be
established:
TZ1 | TZ2 | TZ3 | TZ4 | TZ5 | TZ6 | TZ7 | TZ8 | TZ9 | TZ10 | TZ11 | TZ12 | TZ13 | TZ14 | TZ15 | TZ16 |
000 100 200 300 400 1045
1145 1245 1345 1445 1545 1645 1745

Another example would be to set the first time zone, then to select AUTO to set the balance.
TZ1 | TZ2 | TZ3 | TZ4 | TZ5 | TZ6 | TZ7 | TZ8 | TZ9 | TZ10 | TZ11 | TZ12 | TZ13 | TZ14 | TZ15 | TZ16 |
600 AUTO 800 900 1000 1100 1200 1300 1400 1500 1600 1700 1800 1900 2000 2100

3-400

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
TRAFFIC MEASUREMENT TIME ZONE ASSIGNMENT (CMD 901)
PERCEPTION 4000

COMMANDS

SYSTEM ERROR MESSAGES
The following error messages are unique to this command.
C90100
C90101
C90102
C90103
C90104

-

Times zones are overlapped
Times zones are not in ascending order
Format of minute should be 00, 15, 30, or 45
Check start time format; it would make last time zone exceed 2400
Failed to send transaction to TF

RELATED COMMANDS
902
900

Traffic Measurement Object Assignment (CMD 902)
Traffic Measurement Setup Assignment (CMD 900)

3-401

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
TRUNK ASSIGNMENT (CMD 313)
PERCEPTION 4000

COMMANDS

TRUNK ASSIGNMENT (CMD 313)
The Trunk Assignment command installs or removes trunks from the PERCEPTION 4000 system. It also displays
or changes the attributes of these facilities. Trunk attributes related to this command include the associated
equipment number, trunk group number, dialing mode, signaling, CO supervision type, start method, DISA trunk
flag, trunk termination method, and trunk name display.
Command Keyword:

TK_ASSIGN

Category Name:

Trunk

PREREQUISITE COMMAND
Trunk Group Assignment (CMD 310)
OPERATIONS
Available operations:

ADD
DELETE
MODIFY
DISPLAY

The function and required data fields for each operation are described in this section.

ADD

EQUIP #

TGN

ORG

TERM

SIG

req

CO SUP TYPE

ST

DT

DISA

TRK NAME

opt

This operation installs one or more trunks to the PERCEPTION 4000 system. Ranges are permitted when
installing a number of trunks in the same trunk group with identical parameters.

DELETE

EQUIP #

req

This operation deletes one or more trunks from the PERCEPTION 4000 system. Ranges are permitted when
deleting a number of trunks. However, before deleting a trunk, the trunk must be removed from its trunk hunting
group (Trunk Hunting Assignment command, CMD 309). A warning is sent by the system when deleting the last
trunk from a trunk group.

3-402

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
TRUNK ASSIGNMENT (CMD 313)
PERCEPTION 4000

COMMANDS

MODIFY

EQUIP #

TGN

ORG

req

output
only

TERM

SIG

CO SUP TYPE

ST

DT

DISA

NAME

opt

This operation modifies attributes of one or more existing trunks in the system. The "TGN" field cannot be
modified. To relocate a "TGN" to another trunk group, a DELETE and ADD operation must be performed. Ranges
are permitted in the "EQUIP #" field when changing attributes for a number of trunks.

DISPLAY

EQUIP #

TGN

ORG

TERM

SIG

CO SUP TYPE

ST

DT

DISA

NAME

opt

This operation displays trunk attributes of one or more existing trunks. All of the fields are optional. If no data is
entered in any of these fields, the attributes of all the trunks in the system display. Ranges are permitted in any
field that accepts numeric input, such as the "EQUIP #" and "TGN" fields.
PARAMETERS
Each field parameter is described in this section. Any variations for a particular operation are noted separately.
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:
LOOP:

EQUIP # (Equipment Number)
EQ Type
5 or 6 digits
(0)10101 to 101408 *
Primary loop field, and allowed for all operations
* Use the following chart to determine valid ranges for various types of equipment.
For COGI, DIDI, and EM1I cards, the following are valid ranges:
Digits

Range

Hardware

First digit(s)
Second two digits
Last two digits

(0)1~10
01~14
01~08

Shelf no.
Card slot no.
Circuit no.

For an EM2I card, the circuit number cannot be greater than 6:
Digits

Range

Hardware

First digit(s)
Second two digits
Last two digits

(0)1~10
01~14
01~06

Shelf no.
Card slot no.
Circuit no.

3-403

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
TRUNK ASSIGNMENT (CMD 313)
PERCEPTION 4000

COMMANDS

The "EQUIP #" field defines the location of the connection to the trunk card. The first digit(s)
represent the shelf number, the next two digits represent the card slot number, and finally, the last
two digits represent the circuit number.
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:
RANGE:

TGN (Trunk Group Number)
Decimal
1 to 3 digits
1 to 256 (or to the maximum system configuration)
Allowed in a DISPLAY operation only
This field assigns a trunk group to the equipment port designated in the "EQUIP #" field. The
trunk group number, which is defined with the Trunk Group Assignment command (CMD 310),
cannot be modified.

FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:

ORG (Originating Dial Mode)
Keyword
Predefined ASCII characters
Keywords:

DTMF - Dual-tone Multi-frequency
DP10 - Dial Pulse / 10 pulses per second
DP20 - Dial Pulse / 20 pulses per second

The originating dial mode is used for all outgoing and bothway trunk groups, and defines whether
DTMF or dialpulse sending is used over the circuit.
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:

TERM (Terminating Dial Mode)
Keyword
Predefined ASCII characters
Keywords:

DTMF
DP10
DP20
NA

-

Dual-tone Multi-frequency
Dial Pulse / 10 pulses per second
Dial Pulse / 20 pulses per second
Not Applicable

The terminating dial mode is primarily for DID, CCSA, and incoming TIE trunk calls, and defines
what type of sending the PERCEPTION 4000 system can expect to receive from the distant end.
This field is not applicable for outgoing only trunk groups.
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:

SIG (Signaling)
Keyword
Predefined ASCII characters
Keywords:

3-404

DID
EM1
EM2
GND
LP
LTIE

-

Direct Inward Dialing
E&M Type 1
E&M Type 2
Ground Start
Loop Start
Loop TIE Start

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
TRUNK ASSIGNMENT (CMD 313)
PERCEPTION 4000

COMMANDS

The signaling field defines the type of signaling to be used by the trunk circuit. This signaling
must be consistent with the type of trunk interface card installed, which in turn must be
compatible with the signaling used by the serving central office.
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:

CO SUP TYPE (Central Office Supervision Type)
Keyword
Predefined ASCII characters
Keywords:

CLD
CLG
EPD
NON

-

Called Party Disconnect
Calling Party Disconnect
Either Party Disconnect (also called First Party Disconnect)
No Supervision

This field determines the type of release supervision provided by the central office for a given
trunk circuit. The release supervision is considered by the system whenever a Trunk-to-Trunk
connection is requested in order to prevent trunk lockups. Refer to the Trunk-to-Trunk Connection
Assignment command (CMD 305) for further information on trunk connections.
If the "DISA" field is set to YES, this field must be set to CLG or EPD.
All peripheral equipment interfacing to trunk circuits should have this field set to NON, indicating
there is no release supervision.
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:

ST (Start Method)
Keyword
Predefined ASCII characters
Keywords:

DLY
DT
IMM
TIM
WNK

-

Delay Dial
Dial Tone
Immediate Start
Timing Start
Wink Start

The start method field is used for TIE trunks connecting different systems. The use of this field
requires a knowledge of the other systems' signaling scheme, therefore coordination between
administrators is important. If this field is set to IMM, the originating and terminating dial mode
types must not be DTMF. TIM is required for loop start trunks.
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:

DT (Dial Tone)
Keyword
Predefined ASCII characters
Keywords:

DT - Dial Tone Returned
STR - Silent Tone Returned

The dial tone field is used in private network applications and determines whether the
PERCEPTION 4000 system returns dial tone or silence to the calling end before the distant end
begins to send digits.

3-405

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
TRUNK ASSIGNMENT (CMD 313)
PERCEPTION 4000
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:

COMMANDS

DISA (Direct Inward System Access Flag)
Keyword
Predefined ASCII characters
Keywords:

YES - The trunk allows DISA
NO - The trunk does not allow DISA

The Direct Inward System Access flag determines whether incoming or bothway trunks allow
access to the DISA feature. Outgoing only trunks cannot be designated for DISA usage.
FIELD:
TYPE:
LENGTH:

TRK NAME (Trunk Name)
Text
0 to 14 ASCII characters
Each trunk circuit may optionally be assigned a name which may be up to 14 ASCII characters in
length. This name appears on display-equipped stations and attendant consoles when connected
to this trunk.

SYSTEM ERROR MESSAGES
The following error messages are unique to this command.
C31300
C31301
C31302
C31303
C31304
C31305
C31306
C31307
D31308
C31309
C31310
D31311
C31312
C31313
C31314
C31315
C31316
C31317
I31318
C31319
C31320
C31321
C31322
C31323

3-406

-

Trunk is not found in system
Trunk is already installed
Start method not compatible
DISA is not for TIE, private lines, or outgoing trunks
Undefined trunk group number
Card or equipment number is already assigned to other devices
No DISA flag for given trunk group number
Exceeds maximum trunks allowed in trunk group
Trunk group cannot be modified
Check data in TERM field
Signaling is not compatible
Download PP data failed
Silence tone returned only for TIE
Private feature key still exists
IMM start cannot have DTMF dial mode
DISA must have EPD or CLG release supervision
Removed hunting sequence before deleting trunk
Trunk name is up to 9 characters
Warning: N is the last trunk to be removed from trunk group M
Failed to read LCPU database
Trunks exceed the limit for LCPU-n (n = 1, 2, or 3)
Trunk group number should be a non-ISDN type
Trunk cannot be assigned to a dictation machine trunk group
Remove voice paging zones related to this trunk before deletion

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
TRUNK ASSIGNMENT (CMD 313)
PERCEPTION 4000

COMMANDS

COMMENTS
When installing a trunk in the database, if the physical circuit does not exist, the trunk should be marked as
'MADE BUSY' by using the Terminal Maintenance command (CMD 206).
A trunk can belong to one and only one trunk group.
Prior to removing a trunk, the trunk must first be removed from its trunk group.
User confirmation is required when deleting a number of trunks.
RELATED COMMANDS
Numbering Plan Assignment (CMD 300)
Private/Hotline Assignment (CMD 332)
Trunk Hunting Assignment (CMD 309)
Trunk PP Parameter Change (CMD 364)
Trunk Routing Assignment (CMD 308)
Trunk-to-Trunk Connection Assignment (CMD 305)

3-407

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
TRUNK GROUP ASSIGNMENT (CMD 310)
PERCEPTION 4000

COMMANDS

TRUNK GROUP ASSIGNMENT (CMD 310)
The Trunk Group Assignment command creates or deletes trunk groups in the PERCEPTION 4000 system. This
command also modifies or displays general attributes of one or more trunk groups, including the channel group
(for ISDN trunks), trunk type, restriction group number, dialing definition group number, Class of Service,
Destination Restriction Level, Facility Restriction Level Profile, Queuing Priority Level, answer position, trunk
group home area code, answer supervision, and recall destination.
Command Keyword:

TG_ASSIGN

Category Name:

Trunk

PREREQUISITE COMMANDS
If data is entered in the "ANSPOS" field, then an appropriate command may be required for assignment
of the attendant DN, attendant group DN, station DN, hunt group pilot, UCD pilot, or ACD pilot.
OPERATIONS
Available operations:

ADD
DELETE
MODIFY
DISPLAY

The function and required data fields for each operation are described in this section.

ADD

TGN CGN

req

TYPE

req

opt

USE

RG

DG

COS

DRL

opt

FRLP

QPL ANS POS S RG SUP RCL DN HAC GF
locked

opt

locked

This operation creates one or more trunk groups in the system. Ranges are permitted when adding a number of
trunk groups with the same type and attributes. Note that the "S RG" and "GF" fields are locked fields.

DELETE

TGN CGN

req

TYPE

opt

This operation deletes one or more trunk groups from the system. The "TGN" field is required. Ranges are
permitted when deleting a number of trunk groups, however, confirmation is requested by the system before
deleting a group. Note that all trunks in a trunk group must be deleted before deleting the group.

3-408

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
TRUNK GROUP ASSIGNMENT (CMD 310)
PERCEPTION 4000

COMMANDS

MODIFY

TGN CGN

TYPE

USE

RG

DG

req

COS

DRL

FRLP

QPL ANS POS S RG SUP RCL DN HAC GF

opt

locked

opt

locked

This operation changes the attributes of one or more existing trunk groups. Ranges are permitted in the "TRG"
field when modifying a number of trunk groups with the same attributes.

DISPLAY

TGN CGN

TYPE

USE

RG

DG

COS

DRL

FRLP

QPL ANS POS S RG SUP RCL DN HAC GF

opt

locked

opt

locked

This operation displays the attributes of one or more trunk groups. Ranges are permitted in any field that accepts
numeric input, such as the “TGN” and “RG” fields. If no data is entered in any of the fields, the attributes of all of
the trunk groups in the system display.
PARAMETERS
Each field parameter is described in this section. Any variations for a particular operation are noted separately.
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:
RANGE:
LOOP:

TGN (Trunk Group Number)
Decimal
1 to 3 digits
1 to 256 (or to the maximum system configuration)
Allowed in a DISPLAY operation only
Primary loop field, and allowed in all operations
This field assigns a number to each non-ISDN/ISDN trunk group. This number is unique and may
not be duplicated among tenants.

FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:
RANGE:
LOOP:

CGN (ISDN PRI Channel Group Number)
Decimal
1 to 2 digits
1 to 32 (or to the maximum system configuration)
Allowed in a DISPLAY operation only
Not allowed
This field must be entered when assigning ISDN trunk types to trunk groups. Individual trunks are
assigned to channel groups via the ISDN Channel Group Assignment command (CMD 423).

3-409

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
TRUNK GROUP ASSIGNMENT (CMD 310)
PERCEPTION 4000
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:

COMMANDS

TYPE (Trunk Type)
Keyword
Predefined ASCII characters
For Non-ISDN Trunks:
Keywords: AUX
CC
CCSA CO
DID
DM01 to
DM16 DNIS FX
PVT
TIE
VPG WATS -

Auxiliary Use
Code Call
Common Channel Signaling Arrangement
Central Office
Direct Inward Dialing
Dictation Machine groups 1 to 16.
Dialed Number Identification Service
Foreign Exchange
Private Line or Trunk
TIE Line
Voice Paging
Wide Area Telecommunication Service

For ISDN Trunks:
Keywords: ACCU - ACCUNET Switched Digital Services
ATAT - AT&T Long Distance Service—A shared use, two-way, premise-topremise service that uses the public switched network to transmit and
receive voice and data
IMC8 - International AT&T MEGACOM 800 service
INCW - INWATS—Provides OUTWATS-like pricing and services for incoming
calls
MAXW - MAXWATS—A WATS-like offering; with MAXWATS, user's calls are billed
at the highest WATS band subscribed to by the user
MC
- AT&T MEGACOM—An AT&T service that provides unbanded long
distance services using special access from an AT&T node
MC8 - AT&T MEGACOM 800—An AT&T service that provides unbanded 800
service using special access from an AT&T node
MQST - Multiquest—900 service
OUTW - OUTWATS—A voice-grade service that provides both voice and lowspeed data transmission capabilities from the user's location to defined
service areas commonly referred to as bands
POTS - Plain Old Telephone Service—Supports 3/7/10 international calls and
equal access operator-related calls
PSDN - Private Software Defined Network
SDN - Public/Global Software Defined Network

The "TYPE" field identifies non-ISDN and ISDN trunk group usage. With non-ISDN trunk groups,
trunk use can be specified as CCSA, CO, DID, DNIS, FX, TIE, WATS, or other auxiliary uses. An
AUX entry can be used for any standard loop start or ground start trunk interface and is used to
support out board equipment. The CO, FX, and WATS types are interchangeable. For ISDN trunk
groups, the specified trunk use is the supported ISDN service—MEGACOM 800, Long Distance
Service, etc.

3-410

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
TRUNK GROUP ASSIGNMENT (CMD 310)
PERCEPTION 4000
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:

COMMANDS

USE (Trunk Use)
Keyword
Predefined ASCII characters
Keywords:

INC - Incoming
OUT - Outgoing
BWY - Bothway

Each non-ISDN and ISDN trunk group is defined as an incoming, outgoing, or a bothway trunk
group. DID, MC8, IMC8, and MQST trunks are incoming only.
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:
RANGE:

RG (Restriction Group Number)
Decimal
1 digit
1 to 8 (or to the maximum system configuration)
Allowed in a DISPLAY operation only
This field applies to both non-ISDN and ISDN bothway or outgoing trunk groups. DID, MC8,
IMC8, and MQST trunks; dictation devices; announcement devices; and auxiliary trunk groups do
not require trunk restriction.
Trunk restriction groups represent a set of trunk groups which have similar dialing restrictions
placed on them due to cost factors and sensible dialing practices. For example, an FX line
terminating in Dallas from Los Angeles would be prohibited from placing local calls in Los
Angeles. The FX trunk groups to the Dallas area should be bundled together in one restriction
group, while regular CO lines terminating to the serving central office in Los Angeles might be
grouped together in another. Trunk restriction groups 2 through 8 may be used for this bundling
purpose.
Restriction group 1 is reserved for use by TIE trunks and interfaces to peripheral equipment
where unconventional dialing patterns are used and where absolute unrestricted dialing for all
parties is required.

FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:
RANGE:

DG (Dialing Definition Group Number)
Decimal
1 digit
1 to 4
Allowed in a DISPLAY operation only
This field applies to both non-ISDN and ISDN trunk groups. Dialing groups define characteristics
for similar central offices. These definitions include various operator and toll prefixes, as well as
N11 numbers and interchangeable office code recognition. Dialing definitions are defined with the
Dialing Definition command (CMD 317). Group 1 is undefined and recommended for TIE trunk
groups and trunk groups where no digit analysis or restriction is necessary.

3-411

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
TRUNK GROUP ASSIGNMENT (CMD 310)
PERCEPTION 4000
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:
RANGE:

COMMANDS

COS (Class of Service)
Decimal
1 or 2 digits
1 to 64
Allowed in DISPLAY operation only
This field, along with the next three fields, is required for non-ISDN/ISDN TIE trunks and DISA
trunks. Together, the three fields provide feature and facility access and dialing control definitions
for the specified trunk. Class of Service tables are defined with the Class of Service Assignment
command (CMD 334).

FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:
RANGE:

DRL (Destination Restriction Level)
Decimal
1 or 2 digits
1 to 16 (or to the maximum system configuration)
Allowed in DISPLAY operation only
This field, required for TIE and DISA trunks, controls outgoing calls via direct trunk group access.
When DRL is 1, all calls are allowed regardless of what Restriction Group number (RG) is in use.
Restriction levels are defined with the Destination Restriction Level Assignment command (CMD
337).

FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:
RANGE:

FRLP (Facility Restriction Level Profile)
Decimal
1 or 2 digits
1 to 32 (or to the maximum system configuration)
Allowed in DISPLAY operation only
This field, required for TIE and DISA trunks, defines restrictions assigned to various routes within
each least cost routing route table. Restriction levels are defined with the Facility Restriction
Level Profile Assignment command (CMD 387).

FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:
RANGE:

QPL (Queue Priority Level)
Decimal
1 digit
1 to 8
Allowed in a DISPLAY operation only
This field, required for TIE and DISA trunks, sets queuing priority for outgoing calls and is defined
with the LCR Special Routing Assignment command (CMD 384).

FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:
RANGE:

ANSPOS (Answer Position)
DN Type
1 to 5 digits
0 to 99999
Not allowed
This field is used by both non-ISDN and ISDN trunk groups. The answer position field defines the
directory number to which calls made via the universal attendant access code are directed.
These are normally 'Dial 0' internal calls. '0' may be redefined as any legal directory number in
the system numbering plan (Numbering Plan Assignment command, CMD 300).

3-412

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
TRUNK GROUP ASSIGNMENT (CMD 310)
PERCEPTION 4000

COMMANDS

The destination can be an attendant DN, attendant group DN, station DN, hunt group pilot, UCD
pilot, or ACD pilot. This field is required for TIE trunks and DISA supporting trunk groups.
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:
RANGE:

S RG (Station Restriction Group Number) (Reserved for future use)
Decimal
1 or 2 digits
1 to 16
Allowed in a DISPLAY operation only
This field defines internal station-to-station calling capabilities. This is a locked field and reserved
for future use.

FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:

SUP (Answer Supervision)
Keyword
Predefined ASCII characters
Keywords:

YES - Answer supervision is enabled
NO - Answer supervision is disabled

The Answer Supervision field applies to both non-ISDN and ISDN trunk groups. The field entry
tells the PERCEPTION 4000 system whether or not answer supervision is supplied to the system
from the network after a call is answered. This field is useful for Station Message Detail Report
(SMDR) records to know when to start billing the call. Otherwise the call is charged when the
SMDR threshold timer expires, regardless of whether the call was answered immediately or
never answered.
For ISDN trunks, Answer Supervision should be entered as YES. If a  is entered when
assigning an ISDN trunk group via the ADD operation, then Answer Supervision will default to
YES.
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:
RANGE:

RCL DN (Recall Destination Directory Number)
Dialing Digits (i.e., 001 is not the same as 01 or 1)
1 to 5 digits
0 to 99999
Allowed in a DISPLAY operation only
This field applies to both non-ISDN and ISDN trunk groups. The CO/FX/WATS/DID/CCSA trunks
must have a recall destination directory number. This number can be either an attendant DN, an
attendant group DN, or a station DN. If a  is entered in this field, the RCL
directory number is deleted.

FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:
RANGE:

HAC (Trunk Group’s Home Area Code)
Dialing Digits (i.e., 001 is not the same as 01 or 1)
3 digits in the form N Y X (where N = 2 to 9, Y = 0 or 1, and X = 0 to 9)
200 to 919
Allowed in a DISPLAY operation only
This field applies to both non-ISDN and ISDN trunk groups. The trunk group has a home area
code assigned to it which is used by the outgoing call restriction process for seven digit calls over
a desired facility. The area/office and exceptional restriction tables are checked to see if the call is

3-413

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
TRUNK GROUP ASSIGNMENT (CMD 310)
PERCEPTION 4000

COMMANDS

allowed or denied based on the trunk restriction group and calling entity's destination restriction
level.
TIE trunks do not require an HAC entry. If a  is entered in this field, the HAC is
deleted.
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
DEFAULT:

GF (Global Net Flag)
Keyword
Predefined ASCII characters
N
Keywords:

Y
N

= Enable global network access
= Disable global network access

The "GF" field activates/deactivates access to the Global Network system, and is used only with
the Toshiba Proprietary Global Network. This field applies only to non-ISDN trunks and is a
locked field.
SYSTEM ERROR MESSAGES
The following error messages are unique to this command.
C31000
C31001
C31002
C31003
C31004
C31005
C31006
C31007
C31008
C31009
C31010
C31011
I31012
C31013
I31014
C31015
I31016
I31017
C31018
C31019
C31020
C31021
C31022
C31023
C31024
C31025
C31026
C21027
C21028

3-414

-

Undefined trunk group number
Trunk group number is already defined
Check trunk group number range
HAC entry is required for outgoing and bothway trunks
Remove all trunks in trunk group first
Need RG, DG, HAC, and TF#
DID/INCW/MC8/IMC8/MQST trunks are incoming only
TIE needs COS, DRL, FRLP, QPL, and ANSPOS
Check answer position DN
No HAC or TF# needed for TIE
Only CO, FX, and WATS type can be interchanged
Remove all trunks and trunk-to-trunk connections first
Warning: TIE needs answer position
Recall DN must be an attendant group DN
Warning: CO/FX/WATS/CCSA/DID need RCL destination
Dictation machine should be bothway or outgoing type
Warning: LCR routes still exist in table
Warning: Steering digits still exist
Remove LCR routes before adding private trunks
Remove steering digits before adding private trunks
Remove trunks before modifying USE
Private trunk can only be bothway or outgoing
CGN field is required for ISDN trunk groups
CGN field should not be entered for non-ISDN trunk groups
Not allowed to modify trunk group type in field 3
Cannot delete trunk group number; CGN mismatch
Total DID, DNIS, CCSA type, plus DDI, DNIS inward mode cannot exceed 16
ISDN channel group number is not assigned
Duplicate trunk group type for the assigned channel group number

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
TRUNK GROUP ASSIGNMENT (CMD 310)
PERCEPTION 4000
C31029
I31030
C31031
C31032
C31033

-

COMMANDS

Incompatible trunk group type for the assigned channel group number
Warning: Undefined data in field #N
Not allowed to modify ISDN trunk group usage in field 4
OUTW/MAXW/MC trunks are outgoing only
HAC is needed for CO/FX/PVT/WATS/ISDN outgoing/bothway trunks

COMMENTS
All of the trunks contained within a trunk group must be individually deleted before the trunk group can be
deleted.
When the last trunk of a trunk group is removed, the status of the trunk group must be changed accordingly.
Status may be indicated by a flag that denotes the empty trunk group.
The total number of DID, DNIS, and CCSA non-ISDN trunk groups, plus the total number of DDI/DNIS trunk
groups must be less than or equal to 16.
For outgoing trunks, bothway trunks, and dictation machine groups to operate correctly, trunks belonging to these
groups must have trunk hunting sequences defined using the Trunk Hunting Assignment command (CMD 309).
This applies even if the trunk group has only one trunk, as in the case of private line trunk groups.
RELATED COMMANDS
Class of Service Assignment (CMD 334)
Destination Restriction Level Assignment (CMD 337)
Dialing Definition (CMD 317)
Dictation Group/Machine Assignment (CMD 401)
DID/CCSA DISA LDN Assignment (CMD 315)
DID/CCSA LDN Assignment (CMD 316)
DID/CCSA Trunk Group Assignment (CMD 314)
Facility Restriction Level Profile Assignment (CMD 387)
ISDN Trunk Group Parameter Assignment (CMD 421)
LCR Routing Table Assignment (CMD383)
Numbering Plan Assignment (CMD 300)
Private/Hotline Assignment (CMD 332)
SMDR Configuration Assignment (CMD 409)
Traffic Measurement Object Assignment (CMD 902)
Trunk Assignment (CMD 313)
Trunk Group Parameter Assignment (CMD 420)
Trunk Group Routing Assignment (CMD 307)
Trunk Hunting Assignment (CMD 309)
Trunk PP Parameter Change (CMD 364)
Trunk-to-Trunk Connection Assignment (CMD 305)
Voice Paging/Code-Call Assignment (CMD 319)

3-415

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
TRUNK GROUP PARAMETER ASSIGNMENT (CMD 420)
PERCEPTION 4000

COMMANDS

TRUNK GROUP PARAMETER ASSIGNMENT (CMD 420)
The Trunk Group Parameter Assignment command allows the attributes of one or more non-ISDN or ISDN trunk
groups to be displayed or modified. Trunk group attributes include: translation profile number; toll-free table
number; incoming call ACD queue priority level; incoming call ACD queue priority timer; next incoming call ACD
queue priority level; and ACD overflow destination.
Command Keyword:

TG_PARAMETER

Category Name:

Trunk

PREREQUISITE COMMANDS
Trunk Group Assignment (CMD 310)
OPERATIONS
Available operations:
DISPLAY
MODIFY
The function and required data fields for each operation are described as follows:

DISPLAY

TGN

PLF#

TF#

TF#

TF#

IQP1

IQP TMR

IQP2

OVF TMR

opt

This operation is used to display the trunk attributes of one or more existing trunk groups. If no data is input in this
operation, then the attributes of all trunk groups in the PERCEPTION 4000 system will be displayed. Information
relating only to specific trunk groups is provided by entering each trunk group's corresponding trunk group
number. Range entries are permitted in selected fields, including Trunk Group Number and Translation Profile
Number.

MODIFY

TGN

req

3-416

PLF#

TF#

TF#

TF#

IQP1

opt

IQP TMR

IQP2

OVF TMR

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
TRUNK GROUP PARAMETER ASSIGNMENT (CMD 420)
PERCEPTION 4000

COMMANDS

ThIs operation is used to modify the attributes of one or more existing trunk groups. Data input is required only in
the "TGN" field; other fields are optional. Range entries are permitted in the "TGN" field.
Form:

PARAMETERS
This section defines input permitted for each field. Any variations for a particular operation are noted separately.
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:
RANGE:
LOOP:

TGN (Trunk Group Number)
Decimal
1 to 3 digits
1 to 256 (or maximum system trunk configuration)
Allowed in DISPLAY operation only
Allowed in all operations
The "TGN" entry is required in the MODIFY operation. In the DISPLAY operation, this is an
optional field. If no entry is made, then the attributes of all trunk groups in the PERCEPTION
4000 system will be displayed.

FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:
RANGE:
LOOP:

PFL# (Profile Number)
Decimal or Keyword
1 to 2 digits; preassigned ASCII characters
1 to 32
Allowed in DISPLAY operation only
Not allowed
Keyword:

NON

-

No translation profile number is assigned

This field is used to assign a translation profile number to each trunk group. This field applies to
both non-ISDN and ISDN trunk groups. The default value for this field is NON.
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:
RANGE:
LOOP:

TF# (Toll-free Table Number)
Decimal
1 to 2 digits
1 to 16 (or maximum system configuration)
Allowed in DISPLAY operation only
Not allowed
This field applies to both non-ISDN and ISDN trunk groups. Up to three defined toll-free
area/office code tables can be assigned to a trunk group. A table number can be entered in each
of the provided "TF#" programming fields. If  D is entered, the entered "TF#" value will
be deleted. The toll-free area/office code tables are defined by using CMD 311.

FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:
RANGE:
LOOP:

IQP1 (Incoming ACD Call Queing Priority
Decimal
1 to 2 digits
1 to 16 (1 is the highest priority; 16 is the lowest priority)
Allowed in DISPLAY operation only
Not Allowed

3-417

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
TRUNK GROUP PARAMETER ASSIGNMENT (CMD 420)
PERCEPTION 4000

COMMANDS

This field applies to both non-ISDN and ISDN trunk groups. The positioning of an ACD call into
the ACD queue depends on the assigned priority level of the trunk used to route the call. ACD
calls routed over high-priority trunks (such as 1) will be positioned at the front of the ACD queue
and will be the first calls to be sent to available ACD agents. Conversely, ACD calls routed over
low priority trunks (such as 16) will be positioned at the end of the ACD queue and will be sent to
available ACD agents only after all ACD calls with higher priorities are handled.
When a trunk group is first assigned via the Trunk Group Assignment command (CMD 310), the
"IQP1" value defaults to 1. Alterations to this value are made via the "IQP1" field in CMD 420. An
"IQP1" value cannot be deleted by using the Delete symbol; it must be a valid value of 1 to 16.
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:
RANGE:
LOOP:

IQP TMR (Incoming ACD Call Queing Priority Timer)
Decimal
1 to 4 digits
1 to 9999, in seconds
Allowed in DISPLAY operation only
Not allowed
This field applies to both non-ISDN and ISDN trunk groups. The "IQP TMR" field defines the time
(in seconds) that an incoming ACD call can wait in the ACD queue for an available ACD agent.
Once this timer expires, the ACD call will be repositioned in the ACD queue as determined by its
assigned "IQP2" priority level. This field should be defined if an "IQP2" value is assigned. If
 D is entered, then both the "IQP TMR" and "IQP2" values will be deleted.

FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:
RANGE:
LOOP:

IQP2 (Second Incoming ACD Call Queing Priority
Decimal
1 to 2 digits
1 to 16 (1 is the highest priority; 16 is the lowest priority)
Allowed in DISPLAY operation only
Not allowed
This field applies to both non-ISDN and ISDN trunk groups. The "IQP2" priority level is the new
priority level assigned to an incoming ACD call that has waited in the QCD queue longer than
allowed by the incoming ACD call queuing priority timer ("IQP TMR"). Once this timer expires, the
waiting ACD call is repositioned in the ACD queue depending on its new priority level. Note that
the "IQP2" priority level must be greater than the "IQP1" priority level (i.e., the numeric value of
"IQP2" must be less than "IQP1"). If the "IQP2" field is assigned a value, then both the "IQP1"
and "IQP TMR" fields must also be assigned. If  D is entered in the "IQP2" field, then
both the "IQP2" and "IQP TMR" values will be deleted.

FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:
RANGE:
LOOP:

OVF TMR (ACD Overflow Timer)
Decimal
1 to 4 digits
1 to 9999, in seconds
Allowed in DISPLAY operation only
Not allowed
This field applies to both non-ISDN and ISDN trunk groups. The OVF TMR value represents the
overall time (in seconds) that an incoming ACD call can wait in the ACD queue. This assignment
is independent of the trunk group's assigned priority value(s) and the ACD call queing priority

3-418

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
TRUNK GROUP PARAMETER ASSIGNMENT (CMD 420)
PERCEPTION 4000

COMMANDS

timer ("IQP TMR"). Once the ACD overflow timer ("OVF TMR") expires, the waiting ACD call will
be routed to a preassigned overflow destination, as assigned via the ACD Group Parameter
Assignment command (CMD 357). Note that the "OVF TMR" value must be greater than that of
the "IQP TMR."

SYSTEM MESSAGES
The following error messages are unique to this command.
C42000
C42001
C42002
C42003
C42004
C42005
C42006
C42007
C42008
C42009

-

Undefined trunk group number
Check trunk group number range
Incoming trunks cannot be toll-free
Check toll-free number
Toll-free is not required for TIE trunks
Duplicated TF# table
Toll-free table overflow; cannot add more
IQP2 should be less than IQP1
IQP1 timer and IQP2 should be entered together
ACD overflow timer should be greater than IQP TMR

RELATED COMMANDS
DID/CCSA/DNIS DISA LDN Assignment (CMD 315)
DID/CCSA/DNIS LDN Assignment (CMD 316)
DID/CCSA/DNIS Trunk Group Assignment (CMD 314)
LCR Routing Table Assignment (CMD 383)
Private Line/Hotline Assignment (CMD 332)
SMDR Configuration Assignment (CMD 409)
Trunk Assignment (CMD 313)
Traffic Measurement Object Assignment (CMD 902)
Trunk Group Routing Assignment (CMD 307)
Trunk Hunting Assignment (CMD 309)
Trunk-to-Trunk Connection Assignment (CMD 305)
Voice Paging/Code Call Assignment (CMD 319)

3-419

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
TRUNK GROUP ROUTING ASSIGNMENT (CMD 307)
PERCEPTION 4000

COMMANDS

TRUNK GROUP ROUTING ASSIGNMENT (CMD 307)
The Trunk Group Routing Assignment command provides a means of routing incoming trunk calls, with the
exception of DID, CCSA, DISA, and inbound TIE trunks. When a call arrives on a trunk, the Trunk Routing Table
is checked to see if unique routing is defined for the trunk in the active time zone. If not, the Trunk Group Routing
Table is examined for routing instructions for that trunk group as defined for the time zone that is active. If no
definition exists at either the trunk or trunk group level for the time zone used, the caller receives CO ringback
indefinitely.
This command provides up to three routing destinations at the trunk group level for the given time zone.
Command Keyword:

TG_ROUTING

Category Name:

Trunk

PREREQUISITE COMMANDS
Time Zone Assignment (CMD 336)
Trunk Assignment (CMD 313)
Trunk Group Assignment (CMD 310)
Depending on the route choices, appropriate commands from the following list may be required for
assignment.
ACD Group Assignment (CMD 355)
Announcement Pattern Assignment (CMD 353)
Attendant Group Assignment (CMD 372)
Attendant Position Assignment (CMD 370)
Miscellaneous Device Assignment (CMD 400)
Night Bell Assignment (CMD 405)
Station Assignment (CMD 330)
Station Hunting Assignment (CMD 342)
System Speed Calling Assignment (CMD 402)
UCD Group Assignment (CMD 354)
OPERATIONS
Available operations:

MODIFY
DISPLAY

The function and required data fields for each operation are described in this section.

3-420

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
TRUNK GROUP ROUTING ASSIGNMENT (CMD 307)
PERCEPTION 4000

COMMANDS

MODIFY

TGN

TIME
ROUTE
ROUTE
ZONE # CHOICE 1 CHOICE 2

ROUTE
CHOICE 3

req
opt
This operation changes the routing destinations of one or more trunk groups. The "TGN" and "TIME ZONE #"
fields are required, while the route choice fields are optional. Ranges are permitted in the "TGN" field when
modifying a number of trunk groups with the same routing destinations. All calls "ON HOLD" or "IN PROGRESS"
must be completed before a MODIFY operation may be performed.

DISPLAY

TGN

TIME
ROUTE
ROUTE
ZONE # CHOICE 1 CHOICE 2

ROUTE
CHOICE 3

opt

This operation displays routing destinations of one or more trunk groups. All of the fields are optional. If no data is
entered in any of these fields, the routing destinations of all the trunk groups in the system display. Ranges are
permitted in all fields.
PARAMETERS
Each field parameter is described in this section. Any variations for a particular operation are noted separately.
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:
LOOP:

TGN (Trunk Group Number)
Decimal
1 to 3 digits
1 to 256 (or to the maximum system configuration)
Primary loop field, and allowed in all operations
This field specifies the trunk group number to be defined. The number is previously assigned with
the Trunk Group Assignment command (CMD 310).

FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:
LOOP:

TIME ZONE #
Decimal
1 digit
1 to 4
Allowed in all operations
Inbound routing destinations can be varied from time zone to time zone. This field specifies the
time zone to be defined.

FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:

ROUTE CHOICE 1/2/3
Dialing Digits / Keyword
1 to 5 digits / 4 to 6 digits

3-421

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
TRUNK GROUP ROUTING ASSIGNMENT (CMD 307)
PERCEPTION 4000
VALUE:

COMMANDS

0 to 99999 / Speed Access Code + Index
Keywords:

AP01
BL01
NON

~ AP50
~ BL64

Announcement Pattern Number
Night Bell
No Routing

"ROUTE CHOICE 1" can be one of the following:
a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
f)
g)
h)
i)
j)

Individual attendant console directory number
Attendant group directory number
Station number
Announcement pattern number
Hunt group pilot number
UCD group pilot number
ACD group pilot number
Speed calling codes (System speed calling access code plus system speed calling index
number)
Night bell
No routing (May be used for Route Choice 1 only)

"ROUTE CHOICE 2" has the same options as "ROUTE CHOICE 1." However, to define "ROUTE
CHOICE 2," ROUTE CHOICE 1" must be defined as an attendant or an attendant group which is
found to be unavailable (in the Position Busy mode).
"ROUTE CHOICE 3" has the same options as "ROUTE CHOICE 1," with the exception of the
attendant and attendant group options. To define "ROUTE CHOICE 3," both "ROUTE CHOICE
1" and "2" must be defined as an attendant or attendant group or mix thereof, with both route
choices "1" and "2" unavailable due to console or attendant group Position Busy mode.
In cases where the attendant or attendant group is in the Position Busy mode, the call is routed to
the second choice. If the second choice is an attendant or attendant group in the Position Busy
mode, the call is routed to the third choice. Depending on what Route 3 is defined as, other call
processing may be performed by hunting, UCD, ACD, or call forwarding.
SYSTEM ERROR MESSAGES
The following error messages are unique to this command.
C30700
C30701
C30702
C30703
C30704
C30705
C30706
C30707
C30708
C30709

3-422

-

Undefined trunk group number
Check trunk group number range
Undefined night bell
Undefined announcement machine
Check time zone number range
Check directory number
Check combination of routing destinations
Check trunk use
Check trunk type
Check announcement machine usage

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
TRUNK GROUP ROUTING ASSIGNMENT (CMD 307)
PERCEPTION 4000

COMMANDS

C30710 - NON is allowed for Route Choice 1 only
I30711 - Warning, Undefined data in Route Choice #n
RELATED COMMANDS
Time Zone Assignment (CMD 336)
Trunk Routing Assignment (CMD 308)

3-423

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
TRUNK GROUP TOLL-FREE TABLES (CMD 311)
PERCEPTION 4000

COMMANDS

TRUNK GROUP TOLL-FREE TABLES (CMD 311)
Up to 16 toll-free area/office code tables may be defined for the system's trunk groups. These tables define the
toll-free zone around a serving central office. Up to three tables may be assigned to any given trunk group. These
tables are used by the outgoing call restriction process for a given trunk restriction group and calling device
destination restriction level.
The Trunk Group Toll-free tables are optional for outgoing call management, but provide a convenient shorthand
method for allowing only toll-free calls over certain facilities by certain calling entities.
Command Keyword:

TG_TF_TABLES

Category Name:

Trunk

PREREQUISITE COMMANDS
There are no prerequisites for this command.
OPERATIONS
Available operations:

ADD
DELETE
DISPLAY

The function and required data fields for each operation are described in this section.

ADD

TBL#

AC

OC

OC

OC

OC

OC

OC

OC

OC

OC

OC

opt

req

This operation defines new area/office code toll-free tables and adds entries to them. Since it is possible for one
or more tables to have the same area code, the table number is required to uniquely identify it. Ranges are
permitted in the "TBL#" field. The office code fields allow scope entries.

DELETE

TBL#

AC

req

3-424

OC

OC

OC

OC

OC

OC

opt

OC

OC

OC

OC

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
TRUNK GROUP TOLL-FREE TABLES (CMD 311)
PERCEPTION 4000

COMMANDS

This operation deletes entries in the area/office code toll-free tables. When all entries within a table are deleted,
the table automatically becomes free. Since it is possible for one or more tables to have the same area code, the
table number is required to uniquely identify it. Ranges are permitted in the "TBL#" and "AC" fields. The office
code fields allow scope entries.

DISPLAY

TBL#

AC

OC

OC

OC

OC

OC

OC

OC

OC

OC

OC

opt

This operation displays all area/office code toll-free table(s), or entries within the table(s), that meet the conditions
established for each field. Ranges are allowed in all fields.
PARAMETERS
This section defines inputs permitted for each field. Any variations for a particular operation are noted separately.
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:
LOOP:

TBL# (Table Number)
Decimal
1 or 2 digits
1 to 32 (or maximum configuration number)
Allowed in all operations
This field represents the Trunk Group Toll-free Table number.

FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:
LOOP:

AC (Area Code)
Decimal with fixed length
3 digits in the form N Y X (where N = 2 to 9, Y = 0 or 1, and X = 0 to 9)
200 to 919
Allowed in DISPLAY and DELETE operations
This field represents the area code.

FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:
RANGE:
SCOPE:

OC (Office Code)
Decimal with fixed length
3 digits in the form NXX (N = 2 to 9, X = 0 to 9)
200 to 999 inclusive
Allowed in a DISPLAY operation
Allowed in ADD and DELETE operations
This field represents the office code. All office codes listed in these tables are toll-free. The first
"OC" field is required in ADD and DELETE operations.

3-425

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
TRUNK GROUP TOLL-FREE TABLES (CMD 311)
PERCEPTION 4000

COMMANDS

SYSTEM ERROR MESSAGES
The following error message are unique to this command.
C31100
C31101
C31102
C31103
C31104
C31105
C31106
C31107
C31108
C31109
C31110
C31111

-

The table is not in use
Invalid table number
Invalid office code high bound
Invalid office code low bound
Invalid office code range
Area code does not match table number
Scope data must have low and high bounds in fields
Scope data must have high bound in field
Scope data must have low bound in field
Scope data is not allowed in the last field
Database update failed; software error
Area code is needed when first creating table

RELATED COMMANDS
Trunk Group Assignment (CMD 310)— The Trunk Group Assignment command assigns the toll-free
AC/OC tables defined here to each trunk group created.

3-426

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
TRUNK HUNTING ASSIGNMENT (CMD 309)
PERCEPTION 4000

COMMANDS

TRUNK HUNTING ASSIGNMENT (CMD 309)
Trunk hunting determines the type and order of hunting that is performed by the system when a trunk group is
selected to make an outbound call. This command adds/modifies the hunting method, adds/deletes hunting
sequence numbers of trunks in a trunk group, and displays the hunting method and hunting sequence numbers.
This command must be performed for all outgoing and bothway trunk groups as well as dictation machine and
private line trunk group members.
Command Keyword:

TRUNK_HUNTING

Category Name:

Trunk

PREREQUISITE COMMANDS
Dictation Group/Machine Assignment (CMD 401)

Command 401 is required if a Dictation Machine
group trunk type is selected in the "TGN" field.

Trunk Assignment (CMD 313)
Trunk Group Assignment (CMD 310)
OPERATIONS
Available operations:

ADD
DELETE
MODIFY
DISPLAY

The function and required data fields for each operation are described in this section.

ADD

TGN

TYPE

req

opt

SEQ#

EQUIP #

req

This operation adds a hunting method or sets a hunting sequence for trunks in a trunk group. Loops are allowed
in the “TGN” and “SEQ#” fields. When adding a specific sequence number for an equipment circuit, all following
equipment numbers are re-sequenced automatically.

DELETE

TGN

TYPE

SEQ#

EQUIP #

req

opt

req

opt

3-427

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
TRUNK HUNTING ASSIGNMENT (CMD 309)
PERCEPTION 4000

COMMANDS

This operation deletes a trunk from the trunk hunting group. When deleting a specific sequence number, all of the
following trunks are re-sequenced automatically. If the keyword ALL is entered in the “SEQ#” field, all the trunks
in the trunk hunting group are deleted.

MODIFY

TGN

TYPE

req

This operation modifies the hunting method for trunk groups. Ranges are permitted in the “TGN” field.

DISPLAY

TGN

TYPE

SEQ#

EQUIP #

opt

This operation displays the hunting method and sequence of trunks in a trunk hunting group(s). Ranges are
permitted in the “TGN” and “SEQ#” fields. If no data is entered in the “SEQ#” field, all equipment numbers for the
given trunk group display.
PARAMETERS
Each field parameter is described in this section. Any variations for a particular operation are noted separately.
FIELD:
TYPE:
VALUE:
LOOP:

TGN (Trunk Group Number)
Decimal
1 to 256 (or to the maximum system configuration)
Allowed in all operations except DELETE
This field specifies the trunk group number to be defined. The number is previously assigned with
the Trunk Group Assignment command (CMD 310).
NOTE: Incoming only trunk groups are not allowed PBX-side trunk hunting assignment.

FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:

TYPE (Hunting Method)
Keyword
Predefined ASCII characters
Keywords:

DIST - Distributed method
TERM- Terminal method

Distributed and terminal hunting methods are available on the PERCEPTION 4000 system. The
distributed hunting method attempts to seize a trunk from the trunk group by remembering which
circuit was last used for an outgoing call, and then connecting the user to the next idle trunk in

3-428

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
TRUNK HUNTING ASSIGNMENT (CMD 309)
PERCEPTION 4000

COMMANDS

sequence. This method has the primary advantage of distributing traffic evenly to all circuits,
thereby prolonging hardware equipment life.
Terminal hunting is used in situations where glare (sometimes referred to as collision) may be a
problem. Glare occurs usually on loop-start trunks when an inbound call simultaneously seizes
the same trunk being used to perform an outbound call. Thus two parties are connected with
each other accidentally. When setting up terminal hunting, inbound traffic ordering should be from
the 'top down', while outbound traffic ordering should be from the 'bottom up'. This eliminates the
chance of glare.
NOTE: Dictation machine groups only support the terminal hunting method.
FIELD:
TYPE:
VALUE:
KEYWORD:
LOOP:

SEQ# (Hunting Sequence Number)
Decimal
1 to 64
ALL (Used in DELETE operation only)
Allowed in ADD/DISPLAY operation
This field defines the sequence in which the system hunts through the trunks for outgoing calls
for the specified trunk group. Sequence numbers are reordered automatically when a trunk is
added to or deleted from the trunk group.

FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:
RANGE:

EQUIP # (Trunk Equipment Number)
EQ Type
5 or 6 digits
(0)10101 to 101408
Allowed in a DISPLAY operation
The equipment number is assigned with the Trunk Assignment command (CMD 313). This field
selects the appropriate trunk to be added, deleted, or displayed in the trunk hunting feature.

SYSTEM ERROR MESSAGES
The following error messages are unique to this command.
C30900
C30901
C30902
C30903
C30904
C30905
C30906
C30907
C30908
C30909
C30910
C30911
C30912
C30913
C30914
C30915

-

Trunk group number not found
Undefined trunk group number
Trunk group number is out of range
Sequence number already exists
Hunting method mismatch
Check trunk use (incoming trunk)
Check type of trunk
Invalid input
Undefined sequence number
Unsuitable sequence number
Equipment number mismatch
No sequence number is defined
Hunting method required
Equipment is not installed
Equipment number can only have a maximum of eight circuits
Dictation machine can only use terminal hunt

3-429

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
TRUNK PP PARAMETER CHANGE (CMD 364)
PERCEPTION 4000

COMMANDS

TRUNK PP PARAMETER CHANGE (CMD 364)
The Trunk PP Parameter Change command is used to modify or display the settings that are assigned to each
trunk. Such parameters include start check error time, interdigit timers, dial width, dial time, dial tone width, busy
tone width, and disconnect timers.
Command Keyword:

TRUNK_PARAMETER_CHANGE

Category Name:

Trunk

PREREQUISITE COMMANDS
Trunk Group Assignment (CMD 310)
Trunk Assignment (CMD 313)

OPERATIONS
Available operations:
MODIFY
DISPLAY
The function and required data fields for each operation are described as follows:
MODIFY

EQUIP PARA

VALUE

PARA

req

VALUE PARA

opt

VALUE

PARA

opt

VALUE

PARA

opt

VALUE

opt

This operation modifies the parameters of a specified trunk. "EQUIP NUM" is a required field and must be input.
All remaining fields are optional. If any of the "PARA" fields are entered, the corresponding value field must also
be entered. The first "PARA" and "VALUE" fields are required for this operation.

DISPLAY

EQUIP PARA

VALUE

PARA

VALUE PARA

VALUE

PARA

VALUE

PARA

VALUE

opt

This operation displays trunk parameter values. EQUIP NUM is a loop field. All fields for this operation are
optional and may not be input. The following header text is displayed while in the DISPLAY operation.

3-430

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
TRUNK PP PARAMETER CHANGE (CMD 364)
PERCEPTION 4000

COMMANDS

PARAMETERS
This section defines input permitted for each field. Any variations for a particular operation are noted separately.
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:
LOOP:

EQUIP (Equipment number)
Decimal
6 digits
010101 to 121416
Allowed in both MODIFY and DISPLAY operations

This field indicates the equipment number of the trunk that is to be changed or displayed. The first two digits
represent the number of the shelf containing the trunk circuit card; the next two digits represent the card slot
number; and the last two digits represent the circuit number.
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:

PARA (Parameter to be changed)
Keyword
Preassigned ASCII characters

KEYWORDS:
CKERR
CKTIM
1TIME
2TIME
DLWDT
DLTIM
GDTIM
DTONW
DTOFW
SDTON
SDTOF
BTONW
BTOFW
DISHC
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:
RANGE:
LOOP:

-

Number of start check errors
Start check error time
First interdigit timer
Second interdigit timer
Dial width
Dial time
Guard time
Dial tone on width
Dial tone off width
Secondary dial tone on width
Secondary dial tone off width
Busy tone on width
Busy tone off width
Disconnect time for E&M line or HIC open time for loop line

VALUE (Value of the parameter)
Decimal
1 to 5 digits
0 to 10200
Not allowed
Not allowed
The values in this field depend on the parameter input. The values are as follows:

CKERR
CKTIM
1TIME
2TIME
DLWDT
DLTIM
GDTIM

-

1
1000
2
2
80
80
440

-

100
10000
40
40
600
600
10200

seconds
milliseconds
seconds
seconds
milliseconds
milliseconds
milliseconds

3-431

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
TRUNK PP PARAMETER CHANGE (CMD 364)
PERCEPTION 4000

COMMANDS
DTONW
DTOFW
SDTON
SDTOF
BTONW
BTOFW
DISHC

-

40
40
40
40
40
40
160

-

10200
10200
10200
10200
10200
10200
10200

milliseconds
milliseconds
milliseconds
milliseconds
milliseconds
milliseconds
milliseconds

SYSTEM MESSAGES
The following error messages are unique to this command.
C36400
C36401
C36402
C36403
C36404
C36405
C36406
C36407
C36408
C36409
C36410
C36411
C36412
C36413
C36414
C36415
C36416
C36417
C36419
C36420

-

Check start check error range
Check start check error time range
Check first interdigit timer range
Check second interdigit timer range
Check dial width range
Check dial time range
Check guard time range
Check dial tone on width
Check dial tone off width
Check secondary tone on width
Check secondary tone off width
Check busy tone on width
Check busy tone off width
Check disconnect time/HIC open time
Equipment is not a trunk
Invalid keyword entered
Must input the parameter value
Must input the parameter number
All millisecond input must be in multiples of 40
Equipment number can only have a maximum of eight circuits

COMMENTS
Guard time must be greater than the disconnect time for E&M trunk or HIC open time for LOOP trunk.

RELATED COMMANDS
Trunk Assignment (CMD 313)
Trunk Group Assignment (CMD 310)

3-432

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
TRUNK ROUTING ASSIGNMENT (CMD 308)
PERCEPTION 4000

COMMANDS

TRUNK ROUTING ASSIGNMENT (CMD 308)
The Trunk Routing Assignment command provides a means of routing incoming trunk calls, with the exception of
DID, CCSA, DISA, and inbound TIE trunks. When a call arrives on a trunk, the Trunk Routing Table (CMD 308) is
checked to see if unique routing is defined for the trunk in the active time zone. If not, the Trunk Group Routing
Table (CMD 307) is examined for routing instructions for that trunk group as defined for the time zone that is
active. If no definition exists at either the trunk or trunk group level for the time zone used, the caller receives CO
ringback indefinitely.
This command provides up to three routing destinations for the given time zone.
Command Keyword:

TRUNK_ROUTING

Category Name:

Trunk

PREREQUISITE COMMANDS
Trunk Assignment (CMD 313)
Trunk Group Assignment (CMD 310)
Time Zone Assignment (CMD 336)
Depending on the route choices, appropriate commands from the following list may be required for
assignment.
ACD Group Assignment (CMD 355)
Attendant Group Assignment (CMD 372)
Attendant Position Assignment (CMD 370)
Announcement Pattern Assignment (CMD 353)
Miscellaneous Device Assignment (CMD 400)
Night Bell Assignment (CMD 405)
Station Assignment (CMD 330)
System Speed Calling Assignment (CMD 402)
UCD Group Assignment (CMD 354)
OPERATIONS
Available operations:

MODIFY
DISPLAY

The function and required data fields for each operation are described in this section.

MODIFY

EQUIP #

TIME
ZONE #

req

ROUTE
CHOICE 1

ROUTE
CHOICE 2

ROUTE
CHOICE 3

opt

3-433

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
TRUNK ROUTING ASSIGNMENT (CMD 308)
PERCEPTION 4000

COMMANDS

This operation changes the routing destinations of one or more trunks. The "EQUIP #" and "TIME ZONE #" fields
are required, while the route choice fields are optional. Ranges are permitted in the "EQUIP #" field when
modifying a number of trunks with the same routing destinations. When performing a MODIFY operation, the
specified trunk may not have any calls "ON HOLD" or "IN PROGRESS".

DISPLAY

EQUIP #

TIME
ZONE #

ROUTE
CHOICE 1

ROUTE
CHOICE 2

ROUTE
CHOICE 3

opt

This operation displays the routing destinations of one or more trunks. All of the fields are optional. If no data is
entered in any of these fields, the routing destinations of all the trunks in the system display. Ranges are
permitted in all fields.
PARAMETERS
Each field parameter is described in this section. Any variations for a particular operation are noted separately.
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:
LOOP:

EQUIP # (Equipment Number)
EQ Type
5 or 6 digits
(0)10101 to 101408
Primary loop field, and allowed in all operations.
The equipment number is assigned with the Trunk Assignment command (CMD 313). This field
selects the appropriate trunk to be modified or displayed.

FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:
LOOP:

TIME ZONE #
Decimal
1 digit
1 to 4
Allowed in a DISPLAY operation only
Inbound routing destinations can be varied from time zone to time zone. This field specifies the
time zone to be defined.

FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:

ROUTE CHOICE 1/2/3
Dialing Digits / Keyword
1 to 5 digits / 4 to 6 digits
0 to 99999 / Speed Access Code + Index
Keywords:

3-434

AP01
BL01
NON

~ AP50
~ BL64

Announcement Pattern Number
Night Bell
No Routing

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
TRUNK ROUTING ASSIGNMENT (CMD 308)
PERCEPTION 4000

COMMANDS

"ROUTE CHOICE 1" can be one of the following:
a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
f)
g)
h)
i)
j)

Individual attendant console directory number
Attendant group directory number
Station number
Announcement call treatment pattern number
Hunt group pilot number
UCD group pilot number
ACD group pilot number
Speed call codes (System speed calling access code plus system speed calling index
number)
Night bell
No routing (may be used for Route Choice 1 only)

"ROUTE CHOICE 2" has the same options as "ROUTE CHOICE 1". However, to define "ROUTE
CHOICE 2", "ROUTE CHOICE 1" must be defined as an attendant or an attendant group which
is found to be unavailable (in the Position Busy mode).
"ROUTE CHOICE 3" has the same options as "ROUTE CHOICE 1", with the exception of the
attendant and attendant group options. To define "ROUTE CHOICE 3", both "ROUTE CHOICE
1" and "2" must be defined as an attendant or attendant group or mix thereof, with both route
choices "1" and "2" unavailable due to console or attendant group Position Busy mode.
In cases where the attendant or attendant group is in the Position Busy mode, the call is routed to
the second choice. If the second choice is an attendant or attendant group in the Position Busy
mode, the call is routed to the third choice. Depending on what Route 3 is defined as, other call
processing may be performed by hunting, UCD, ACD, or call forwarding.
SYSTEM ERROR MESSAGES
The following error message are unique to this command.
C30800
C30801
C30802
C30803
C30804
C30805
C30806
C30807
C30808
C30809
C30810
C30811
C30812
I30813

-

Specified trunk is not in the system
Specified equipment number is not a trunk device
Undefined night bell
Undefined announcement machine
Check time zone number range
Check directory number
Check combination of routing destinations
Outgoing trunk group does not have routing
Check trunk type
NON is allowed for Route Choice 1 only
Check announcement machine usage
Only display operation is allowed for private trunk
Equipment number can only have a maximum of eight circuits
Warning: Undefined data in ROUTE CHOICE n field

RELATED COMMAND
Station Hunting Assignment (CMD 342)

3-435

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
TRUNK-TO-TRUNK CONNECTION ASSIGNMENT (CMD 305)
PERCEPTION 4000

COMMANDS

TRUNK-TO-TRUNK CONNECTION ASSIGNMENT (CMD 305)
The Trunk-to-Trunk Connection Assignment command contains two tables which allow or deny trunk connections
between incoming, outgoing, and bothway trunks. These tables are the Attendant Capability Table and the Station
Connectivity Table.
Command Keyword:

TRUNK_CONNECTIONS

Category Name:

Trunk

PREREQUISITE COMMAND
Trunk Group Assignment (CMD 310)
OPERATIONS
Available operations:

ADD
DELETE
DISPLAY

The function and required data fields for each operation are described in this section.

ADD

APPL

TYPE

TGN/TYPE A

ORG DIRECT

TGN/TYPE B

ORG DIRECT

req

This operation adds one or more entries into the Trunk-to-Trunk connection tables. Input is required in all fields.

DELETE

APPL

TYPE

TGN/TYPE A

req

opt

req

ORG DIRECT

TGN/TYPE B

ORG DIRECT

opt

This operation deletes one or all entries from the Trunk-to-Trunk connection tables. If the keyword ALL is entered
in the “TGN/TYPE A” field, all the Trunk-to-Trunk connections are deleted. A confirmation is requested by the
system before a deletion occurs.

3-436

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
TRUNK-TO-TRUNK CONNECTION ASSIGNMENT (CMD 305)
PERCEPTION 4000

COMMANDS

DISPLAY

APPL

TYPE

INDEX

TGN/TYPE A

ORG DIRECT

req

TGN/TYPE B

ORG DIRECT

opt

This operation displays the Trunk-to-Trunk connection tables. If no input is entered in the “INDEX” field,
depending on the data in the “APPL” field, the Station's Connectivity Table or the Attendant's Capability Table
displays. Ranges are allowed in any field that accepts numeric input.
PARAMETERS
Each field parameter is described in this section. Any variations for a particular operation are noted separately.
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:

APPL (Application Usage)
Keyword
Predefined ASCII characters
Keywords:

ATT - Attendant’s Capability Table
STA - Station’s Connectivity Table

The table to be added to, deleted, or displayed is selected with this field.
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:

TYPE (Table Type)
Keyword
Predefined ASCII characters
Keywords:

ALW - Trunk-to-trunk connection allowed
DNY - Trunk-to-trunk connection denied

Trunks are defined by setting the table definition as an allow or deny table, whichever will require
the shorter definition. For example, you may wish to deny only those calls which are incoming
800 calls connected to all other outbound or bothway trunk groups. It would be simpler to build a
deny table than to build an allow table for all other possibilities.
Once the "TYPE" field is selected as an allow or deny table, then all assignments of new Trunkto-Trunk connections must be of the same type.
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:
LOOP:

INDEX (Index Number)
Decimal
1 to 3 digits
1 to 160 (or to the maximum system configuration)
Allowed in a DISPLAY operation only
This field acts as a counter in a DISPLAY operation. Its value does not set any priority for data
entered in this command.

FIELD:
TYPE:

TGN/TYPE A or B (Trunk Group or Type of Trunk)
Decimal / Keyword

3-437

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
TRUNK-TO-TRUNK CONNECTION ASSIGNMENT (CMD 305)
PERCEPTION 4000
FORMAT:
VALUE:
RANGE:

COMMANDS

1 to 3 digits / Predefined ASCII characters
1 to 256 trunk groups (or to the maximum system configuration)
Allowed in a DISPLAY operation

Keywords -

Trunk Types:
AUX
CC
CCSA
CO
DIC
DID
FX
PVT
RPG
TIE
VPG
WATS
ALL

-

Auxiliary
Code Call
Common Control Switching Arrangement
Central Office
Dictation Machine
Direct Inward Dialing
Foreign Exchange
Private Line or Trunk
Radio Page
Inter-PBX Communication
Voice Paging
Wide Area Telecommunication Service

Each Trunk-to-Trunk connection may be defined by either trunk group numbers, trunk group
types, or a combination of both. Decimal values 1 to 256 represent the trunk group numbers, and
the keywords represent the trunk group types. Trunk groups 129 to 256 are reserved for systems
configured above the standard default of 128. Note that trunk groups are subsets of trunk types.
When the keyword ALL is entered in a DELETE operation, all entries in the denial/allowance
table are deleted.
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:

ORG DIRECT (Direction of Origination)
Keyword
Predefined ASCII characters
Keywords:

INC - Incoming
OUT - Outgoing
BWY - Both Incoming and Outgoing

Each facility specified may be defined as pertaining to incoming only, outgoing only, or bothway
call types.
SYSTEM ERROR MESSAGES
The following error messages are unique to this command.
C30500
C30501
C30502
C30503
C30504
C30505
C30506
C30507

3-438

-

Redundant entry: connection is already defined
Number of trunk groups of this type exceeds available entries
Undefined trunk type
Undefined trunk group
Check trunk group number range
Parameter is out of range
This connection is not registered
The attendant table type is different

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
TRUNK-TO-TRUNK CONNECTION ASSIGNMENT (CMD 305)
PERCEPTION 4000

COMMANDS

C30508 - The station table type is different
C30509 - Field input error
COMMENTS
A denial to perform a Trunk-to-Trunk connection in one's Class of Service definition absolutely prevents the
connection. Also, if release supervision does not allow the connection, it is denied. Attendants may, however,
place the call on a locked loop automatically, thus allowing manual supervision of the call and preventing potential
trunk lockups.
Removal of a trunk group/type from the system must be preceded by the removal of the corresponding entry in
these tables.
For stations, connections between pairs of trunk types/groups not inhibited by their denial tables are still subject
to the supervisory requirement. For instance, if neither party involved in a Trunk-to-Trunk connection has release
supervision, the connection will not be made.
RELATED COMMANDS
Attendant Group Assignment (CMD 372)
Attendant Position Assignment (CMD 370)
Trunk Assignment (CMD 313)

3-439

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
UCD GROUP ASSIGNMENT (CMD 354)
PERCEPTION 4000

COMMANDS

UCD GROUP ASSIGNMENT (CMD 354)
The PERCEPTION 4000 system may be configured with up to eight Uniform Call Distribution (UCD) groups. This
command defines UCD group members and provides information pertinent to group operation.
Command Keyword:

UCD_GROUP_ASSIGN

Category Name:

Station

PREREQUISITE COMMANDS
Announcement Pattern Assignment (CMD 353)
Miscellaneous Device Assignment (CMD 400)
Station Assignment (CMD 330)
OPERATIONS
Available operations:

ADD
DELETE
MODIFY
DISPLAY

The function and required data fields for each operation are described in this section.

ADD

GRP#

PILOT DN

NAME

OVF DEST

req

AP#

OVF TMR

opt

INDEX

MEM DN

req

This operation adds member directory numbers to the specified UCD group number. If the group is being defined
for the first time, the “PILOT DN” and “AP#” fields are required; otherwise, these fields are optional. The “INDEX”
field is a counter for the convenience of the administrator.

DELETE

GRP#

MEM DN

req

MEM DN

MEM DN

MEM DN

opt

This operation removes member directory numbers from the specified UCD group. The keyword ALL may be
entered in the first “MEM DN” field to delete the entire UCD group.

3-440

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
UCD GROUP ASSIGNMENT (CMD 354)
PERCEPTION 4000

COMMANDS

MODIFY

GRP#

PILOT DN

NAME

req

OVF DEST

AP#

OVF TMR

opt

This operation modifies the attributes of the specified UCD group. “GRP #” is a required field, while the remaining
fields are optional.

DISPLAY

GRP#

PILOT DN

NAME

OVF DEST

AP#

OVF TMR

INDEX

MEM DN

opt

This operation displays the attributes of the specified UCD group. All fields are optional.
PARAMETERS
Each field parameter is described in this section. Any variations for a particular operation are noted separately.
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:
RANGE:
LOOP:

GRP# (UCD Group Number)
Decimal
1 digit
1 to 8
Not allowed
Allowed in a DISPLAY operation only
This field assigns a UCD group number, and is required in all operations. In a DISPLAY
operation, “GRP#” is a loop field. If a  and  are entered, all eight groups
display.

FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:
RANGE:
LOOP:

PILOT DN (Pilot Directory Number)
DN Type
1 to 5 digits
0 to 99999
Not allowed
Not allowed
The UCD group pilot number is defined with this field. This is the only entry point into the UCD
group. The number must not conflict with other numbers and access codes in the system's
numbering plan, and must not have a physical device counterpart.

FIELD:
TYPE:

NAME
Text

3-441

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
UCD GROUP ASSIGNMENT (CMD 354)
PERCEPTION 4000
FORMAT:

COMMANDS

0 to 9 ASCII characters
The UCD group may optionally be assigned a group name which is displayed on calling party
terminals or the attendant console. Embedded spaces are allowed. In a MODIFY operation, if a
 is entered, this field is removed from the group.

FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:
RANGE:
LOOP:

OVF DEST (Overflow Destination)
DN Type
1 to 5 digits
0 to 99999
Not allowed
Not allowed
The overflow destination may be defined as another UCD group. Only one overflow is allowed per
call, even if the overflow group has another overflow specified. In a MODIFY operation, if a
 is entered, this field is removed from the group. Note that this field is optional in
all operations.

FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:
RANGE:
LOOP:

AP# (Announcement Pattern Number)
Decimal
1 or 2 digits
1 to 50
Not allowed
Not allowed
This field selects one of the 50 announcement pattern numbers defined in the system. (Refer to
the Announcement Pattern Assignment command, CMD 353.) The pattern number describes
how the call is treated while waiting in queue (announcements, music, etc.).

FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:
RANGE:
LOOP:

OVF TMR (Overflow Timer)
Decimal
1 to 4 digits
0 to 1000
Not allowed
Not allowed
This field sets the time in seconds which a call must wait in queue before overflowing to the
overflow destination.

FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:
LOOP:

INDEX
Decimal
1 or 2 digits
1 to 16
Allowed in ADD and DELETE operations
This field is used as a counter in ADD and DISPLAY operations. Its value does not indicate an
actual position in a UCD group or set any priority for data entered in this command.

FIELD:
TYPE:

3-442

MEM DN (UCD Member Directory Number)
DN Type / Keyword

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
UCD GROUP ASSIGNMENT (CMD 354)
PERCEPTION 4000
FORMAT:
VALUE:
RANGE:
LOOP:

COMMANDS

1 to 5 digits / Predefined ASCII characters
0 to 99999
Allowed in a DISPLAY operation only
Not allowed
Keyword:

ALL

This field assigns members to the UCD group. The directory number entered must be a prime
directory number of a voice station, and may only appear in one UCD group. Logical line DNs are
not allowed. In a DELETE operation, the keyword ALL deletes an entire UCD group.
SYSTEM ERROR MESSAGES
The following error messages are unique to this command.
C35400
C35401
C35402
C35403
C35404
C35405
C35406
C35407
C35408
C35409
C35410
C35411
C35412
C35413
C35414
C35415
C35416
C35417
C35418
C35419
C35420
C35421
C35422
C35423
I35424

-

Pilot directory number mismatch
Group name mismatch
Overflow destination mismatch
Group maximum number has been reached
UCD member directory number does not exist
UCD member directory number is not a station directory number
Pilot directory number must be input
Pilot directory number is already in use
Cannot use this overflow directory number
No UCD members exist for this group
Member directory number is not in this UCD group
Station belongs to another UCD group
Announcement pattern number must be input
Announcement pattern number is not defined
Announcement pattern number mismatch
Announcement pattern number is not for UCD use
Group name length is a maximum of 9 characters
Pilot and overflow directory numbers cannot be the same
Overflow timer mismatch
Private line directory number may not be used in UCD
Hotline directory number may not be used in UCD
Logical/Multiple line directory number may not be used in UCD
Total number of UCD memory blocks have reached their limit
Total number of UCD members have reached their limit
Warning: Unidentified data in field #4

RELATED COMMANDS
ACD Group Assignment (CMD 355)
Authorization Code Assignment (CMD 349)
Internal Call Alternate Routing Assignment (CMD 374)
Station Hunting Assignment (CMD 342)
Trunk Group Routing Assignment (CMD 307)
Trunk Routing Assignment (CMD 308)

3-443

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
UNP ROUTING ASSIGNMENT (CMD 302)
PERCEPTION 4000

COMMANDS

UNP ROUTING ASSIGNMENT (CMD 302)
The UNP Routing Assignment command specifies a Route Pattern Number (RPN) for the location codes defined
for the network in the Uniform Numbering Plan Assignment command (CMD 301). The RPN is then used by the
LCR/Authorization TZ Change Assignment command (CMD 343) to direct the call over the proper facility.
Command Keyword:

UNP_ROUTING

Category Name:

Network

PREREQUISITE COMMAND
Uniform Numbering Plan Assignment (CMD 301)
OPERATIONS
Available operations:

ADD
DELETE
DISPLAY

The function and required data fields for each operation are described in this section.
ADD

RPN

RNX

RNX

RNX

RNX

RNX

RNX

req

RNX

RNX

RNX

RNX

RNX

RNX

opt

This operation adds UNP location codes (RNXs) to the specified Route Pattern Number (RPN) Table.
DELETE

RPN

RNX

req

RNX

RNX

RNX

RNX

RNX

RNX

RNX

RNX

RNX

RNX

RNX

opt

This operation deletes UNP location codes (RNXs) from the specified Route Pattern Number (RPN) Table.

3-444

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
UNP ROUTING ASSIGNMENT (CMD 302)
PERCEPTION 4000

COMMANDS

DISPLAY

RPN

RNX

RNX

RNX

RNX

RNX

RNX

RNX

RNX

RNX

RNX

RNX

RNX

opt

This operation displays UNP location codes (RNXs) of the specified Route Pattern Number (RPN) Table. All fields
are optional; and the "RPN" field is a loop field.
PARAMETERS
Each field parameter is described in this section. Any variations for a particular operation are noted separately.
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:
LOOP:
RANGE:

RPN (Route Pattern Number)
Decimal
1 to 3 digits
1 to 100 (or to the maximum system configuration)
Primary loop for a DISPLAY operation only
Not allowed
The "RPN" field defines a pattern number used by the LCR/Authorization TZ Change Assignment
command (CMD 343) to direct a call to the proper LCR routing table. Up to 16 UNP Routing
Assignment Tables may be defined in the system. A routing pattern number is required for all
RNXs not intended for default routing. If a  is entered in this field in a DISPLAY operation,
all RPN tables of RNXs display.

FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:
LOOP:
RANGE:

RNX (Location Code for PBX Systems in the Network)
Dialing Digits / Keyword
1 to 3 digits / Predefined ASCII characters
0 to 999
Not allowed
Not allowed
Keyword:

ALL

This field assigns location codes of other PBX systems in the Network to the specified route
pattern number. In a DELETE operation, the keyword ALL may be entered in the first "RNX" field
to delete all location codes from the table.
SYSTEM ERROR MESSAGES
The following error messages are unique to this command.
C30200
C30201
C30202
C30203

-

Check RNX input format
RNX already defined
No space to add more
RNX not found

3-445

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
UNP ROUTING ASSIGNMENT (CMD 302)
PERCEPTION 4000
C30204
C30205
C30206
C30207

-

Route pattern number is out of range
UNP location code not found in setup table
RNX should be 1 - 3 digits
RNX is not in the corresponding RPN table

RELATED COMMAND
LCR/Authorization TZ Change Assignment (CMD 343)

3-446

COMMANDS

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
UNIFORM NUMBERING PLAN ASSIGNMENT (CMD 301)
PERCEPTION 4000

COMMANDS

UNIFORM NUMBERING PLAN ASSIGNMENT (CMD 301)
The Uniform Numbering Plan (UNP) is one of two methods used by the system for private networking. This
command instructs the system on the length of on-net calls, provides an identifying location code for this PBX in
the network, and defines all other RNX (location) codes used in the network.
Command Keyword:

UNP_ASSIGN

Category Name:

Network

PREREQUISITE COMMANDS
There are no prerequisites for this command.
OPERATIONS
Available operations:

ADD
DELETE
MODIFY
DISPLAY

The function and required data fields for each operation are described in this section.

ADD

RNX

RNX

RNX

RNX

RNX

RNX

req

RNX

RNX

RNX

RNX

RNX

RNX

RNX

RNX

RNX

opt

This operation adds PBX location codes to the PERCEPTION 4000 Network.

DELETE

RNX

req

RNX

RNX

RNX

RNX

RNX

RNX

RNX

RNX

RNX

RNX

opt

This operation deletes PBX location codes from the Network. The keyword ALL may be entered in the first "RNX"
field to delete all location codes from the table.

3-447

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
UNIFORM NUMBERING PLAN ASSIGNMENT (CMD 301)
PERCEPTION 4000

COMMANDS

MODIFY

UNP LENGTH

HOME RNX

opt

This operation modifies the format for the length of the location code and station numbers of the network, and the
home PBX location code.

DISPLAY

UNP LENGTH

HOME RNX

RNX

RNX

RNX

RNX

RNX

RNX

RNX

RNX

RNX

RNX

RNX

opt

This operation displays the UNP length, the Home UNP location code, and other UNP location code(s) in the
Network.
PARAMETERS
Each field parameter is described in this section. Any variations for a particular operation are noted separately.
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:
LOOP:
RANGE:

UNP LENGTH (Length of Location Code of PBX with Station Numbers)
Decimal
1 digit
4 to 8
Not allowed
Not allowed
Each station in the network has a home PBX location code and a station number assigned to it.
This field sets the length of the combined location code and station number. For example, the
home PBX location code may be a three-digit number (734), and the station may be a four-digit
number (3229). Therefore, this field would be set to 7.

FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:
LOOP:
RANGE:

HOME RNX (Location Code for Home PBX)
Dialing Digits
1 to 3 digits
0 to 999
Not allowed
Not allowed
Each PBX in the system is assigned a location code from 1 to 3 digits. This field assigns the
location code for the home PBX.

3-448

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
UNIFORM NUMBERING PLAN ASSIGNMENT (CMD 301)
PERCEPTION 4000
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:
LOOP:
RANGE:

COMMANDS

RNX (Location Code for Other PBX Systems in the Network)
Dialing Digits / Keyword
1 to 3 digits / Predefined ASCII characters
0 to 999
Not allowed
Not allowed
Keyword:

ALL

This field assigns location codes for other PBX systems in the PERCEPTION 4000 Network. In a
DELETE operation, the keyword ALL may be entered in the first "RNX" field to delete all location
codes from the table.
SYSTEM ERROR MESSAGES
The following error codes are unique to this command.
C30100
C30101
C30102
C30103
C30104
C30105
C30106
C30107
C30108

-

RNX is defined as home location code
One of the RNX(s) is already defined
No space to add more
One of the RNX(s) was not found
Check length of UNP
Check RNX input format
RNX should be 1 - 3 digits
Remove RPN from Command 302 table before deleting
Remove all RPNs from Command 302 table before deleting ALL

RELATED COMMANDS
Coordinated Numbering Plan Assignment (CMD 303)
UNP Routing Assignment (CMD 302)

3-449

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
VOICE PAGING/CODE-CALL ASSIGNMENT (CMD 319)
PERCEPTION 4000

COMMANDS

VOICE PAGING/CODE-CALL ASSIGNMENT (CMD 319)
The Voice Paging/Code-Call Assignment command creates the linkage between various types of paging and the
trunk group used for the hardware interface. Additionally, the command provides the translation from
PERCEPTION 4000 system paging types and/or zones to control code information which is sent to out board
paging equipment for zone and usage selection. The control codes are sent via in-band DTMF signaling prior to
the system cutting through the paging party to the paging equipment. This action is transparent to the user.
Command Keyword:

VP/CC_ASSIGN

Category Name:

Dialing

PREREQUISITE COMMANDS
Numbering Plan Assignment (CMD 300)
Trunk Group Assignment (CMD 310)
OPERATIONS
Available operations:

ADD
DELETE
MODIFY
DISPLAY

The function and required data fields for each operation are described in this section.

ADD

TYPE

ZONE #

TGN

CONTROL CODE #

req

opt

req

opt

This operation adds the defined attribute of the specified feature to its definition table. The "CONTROL CODE #"
field is not used for the Code-Call feature. Values 1 to 128 are used as input for the Zone Paging feature. ZERO is
the default value for the Emergency Paging and System Paging features.

DELETE

TYPE

ZONE #

req

opt

This operation removes the attribute of the specified feature from its definition table. The "ZONE #" field is
applicable for the Code Call and Zone Paging features only.

3-450

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
VOICE PAGING/CODE-CALL ASSIGNMENT (CMD 319)
PERCEPTION 4000

COMMANDS

MODIFY

TYPE

ZONE #

TGN

req

CONTROL CODE #

opt

This operation modifies existing attributes of the specified feature. The “TYPE” field is required for all features.
The “ZONE #” field is required by the Code Call and Zone Paging features, while the remaining fields are
optional. The “CONTROL CODE #” field defaults to zero for all features except for Zone Paging.

DISPLAY

TYPE

ZONE #

TGN

req

CONTROL CODE #

opt

This operation displays the attributes of one or all related features where the condition is established in the
“TYPE” and “ZONE #” fields. If ALL is entered in the “TYPE” field, the system displays all the related tables.
PARAMETERS
Each field parameter is described in this section. Any variations for a particular operation are noted separately.
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:

TYPE (Type of Feature)
Keyword
Predefined ASCII characters
Keywords:

CC
EPAG
SPAG
ZPAG
ALL

-

Code Call Feature
Emergency Paging Feature
System Paging Feature
Zone Paging Feature
All of the above features

This field selects one of the Code Call or paging features of the system. The keyword ALL is
available for a DISPLAY operation only, and is used to indicate all the related features that are to
be displayed.
FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:

ZONE # (Trunk Port Code)
Decimal
1 to 2 digits
The value depends on the "LEN PD1" field entries in the Numbering Plan Assignment command
(CMD 300) for Feature Numbers (FNOs) 258 and 259 (Code Calling Access and Voice Paging
Access - Zone respectively). (Note that maximum values depend on the system configuration,
i.e., if there are 10 code calling devices and 10 zone paging devices, any value above 10 is
invalid.)

3-451

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
VOICE PAGING/CODE-CALL ASSIGNMENT (CMD 319)
PERCEPTION 4000
If "LEN PD1" = 1
If "LEN PD1" = 2

RANGE:

COMMANDS
The "ZONE #" value range is 1 to 9
The maximum "ZONE #" value is 32 for CC (Code Calling) and 99 for
ZPAG (Zone Paging)

Not allowed
This field represents the System Paging Zone Number or the Code Calling Access Code that is
dialed following the Paging Access Code. The number of digits must correspond to the "LEN
PD1" field entry following the appropriate paging type in the Numbering Plan Assignment
command (CMD 300). This field is not used by the System Paging or Emergency Paging
features.

FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:
RANGE:

TGN (Trunk Group Number)
Decimal
1 to 3 digits
1 to 256 (or to the maximum system configuration)
Not allowed
The trunk group number represents the trunk group to which the paging trunk circuit is assigned.
There may only be one circuit per supporting trunk group. The "TGN" must be defined for the
same use in the Trunk Group Assignment command (CMD 310). This field is required for Voice
Zone Paging and Code Calls.

FIELD:
TYPE:
FORMAT:
VALUE:
RANGE:

CONTROL CODE # (Device Code Number)
Decimal / Keyword
1 digit / Predefined ASCII characters
0 to 9 / NON
Not allowed
This field specifies the voice zone paging device to be accessed (values 0 to 9). NON is used
with paging devices that do not support control codes. For the Emergency Paging and System
Paging features, a default value of zero is required. The Code Calling feature does not use this
field.

SYSTEM ERROR MESSAGES
The following error messages are unique to this command.
C31900
C31901
C31902
C31903
C31904
C31905
C31906
C31907
C31908
C31909
C31910
C31911
C31912

3-452

-

Invalid feature number
Invalid trunk group number
Zone number is out of range
 is required for zone number field
Missing input for zone number field
Missing input for Control Code Number field
 is required for Control Code Number field
Trunk group number is out of range
No space to add zone number
Zone number is already in use
Zone number is not in the table
This entry is already defined in the table
This entry is not defined in the table

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000
VOICE PAGING/CODE-CALL ASSIGNMENT (CMD 319)
PERCEPTION 4000

COMMANDS

C31913 - Trunk must be assigned to a trunk group number before update
C31914 - Zone post digits have NOT been set, please define in CMD 300
C31915 - Control code is out of range; should be 0 - 9 or NON
RELATED COMMANDS
Attendant Feature Key Assignment (CMD 371)
Station Feature Key Assignment (CMD 331)

3-453

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000

Chapter 4
PERCEPTION 4000

ERROR AND INFORMATION MESSAGES

Error and information messages appear on the output device alerting the user of certain conditions occurring
within the system. These messages include indications of incorrect input, informational matter, and system
messages. This chapter contains a description of the format used to display these messages along with a
complete listing of all messages.

MESSAGE FORMAT
Each message contains a message ID and text.The ID consists of a leading character followed by five digits.
 - Text
Leading Character
“C”
“D”
“G”
“I”
“S”

represents a special message from a particular command.
represents messages for debugging usage.
represents messages from MMI and messages common to every command.
represents FYI (For your information only) messages.
represents a system message.

Five-digit Numbers (tttnn)
ttt

- The first three digits represent an MMI internal module ID (000 to 013) for common error messages,
or the command ID (100 to 999).
Module IDs
000
001
002
003
004
005
007
008
009
011
012
013

nn

-

Message Dispatcher
Command Operation
Data Entry and Parsers
Setup Control
Program Control
Training Control
Overlay Control
Messages common to all commands
Post Command Processor
Change Replay
Change Log Control
Change Write Control

- The last two digits represent the message number.

Text - Up to 71 ASCII characters display error or information messages.

COMMON ERROR MESSAGES
C00123
C00124
C00125
C00126

-

Failed to mount FD
Failed to open script file on FD
Failed to read script sub-header
Failed to read script file

4-1

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000

PERCEPTION 4000
C00127
C00130
D00107
D00128
D00217
D00218
D00219
D00220
D00302
D00402
D00403
D00404
D00701
D00702
D00703
D00704
D00705
D00706
D00808
D00809
D00810
D00811
D00812
D00813
D00814
D00815
D00816
D00817
D00818
D00819
D00820
D00821
D00822
D00823
D00824
D00825
D00826
D00827
D00828
D00829
D00831
D00832
D00833
D00834
D00900
D00901
D00902
D00903
D00904
D00905

4-2

-

ERROR AND INFORMATION MESSAGES

Failed to close FD
DISPLAY/SHOW operation not allowed during FD input
Command operation substate is out of range
Incorrect record/block count in sub-header
DE_CTL substate is out of range
Internal data structures corrupted; around field N
Aborted while in MKB
Timeout while in MKB for equipment number SSPPCC
SE_CTL substate is out of range
Unknown error in IDLE_PR state
PR_CTL substate is out of range
Header ruler format error
Cannot open command
Cannot read command
Cannot close command
Cannot load command
LCPU command loading failed
Version mismatch
Software error
Please see PBX administrator
MCPU database Read error
MCPU database Write error
LCPU database Read error
LCPU database Write error
Failed to send message to LCPU
Failed to send message to Traffic virtual machine
Timeout while waiting for transaction from LCPU 1, 2, or 3
Loop failed in LCPU 1, 2, or 3
Invalid equipment number during conversion
Invalid device number during conversion
LCPU number is out of range
Invalid trunk device number during conversion
Memory dump to hard disk failed
Hard disk drive is no good
Cannot access hard disk file
Mount hard disk drive failed
Open change log header failed
Open patch log header failed
Open file from hard disk failed
Write file to hard disk failed
Close file from hard disk failed
Clear change log header failed
Clear patch or change log header failed
Found unmatched line; Nth byte in the compare buffer
MKI failed
Timeout in MKI
Entering CPP from CHG_CTL with TRAPTR
Entering CPP from cmd with TRAPTR
Command load in standby failed
Sync. timeout; need to put SBY OUS & use ^Y

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000

PERCEPTION 4000
D00906
D00907
D01100
D01101
D01103
D01104
D01105
D01106
D01107
D01108
D01109
D01110
D01208
D01209
D01300
D01301
G00102
G00103
G00104
G00105
G00106
G00108
G00109
G00131
G00202
G00203
G00204
G00205
G00206
G00207
G00208
G00209
G00210
G00211
G00212
G00213
G00214
G00215
G00216
G00221
G00222
G00301
G00303
G00304
G00305
G00306
G00307
G00400
G00401
G00801

-

ERROR AND INFORMATION MESSAGES

Command sync failed; need to put SBY OUS & use ^Y
Disk drive is out of service
Cannot create change log
Get header failed
Replay command failed
Replay MKB failed
Failed to manipulate patch log file
Failed to manipulate change log file
Synchronization change log timeout
Auto file consolidation cannot be performed
PAM switch-over/command check in process; wait then login again
Auto file consolidation in process; wait then login again
Change log sync timeout; need to put SBY OUS & use ^Y
Failed to manipulate patch log file
Timeout when writing log file
Failed to write to hard disk
Login failed
Privileged command
Check command name/ID?
Privileged operation
Check operation name/ID?
No such command
No such operation
Aborting from FD input
Must enter  after data in field N
Only 0 - 9 (decimal) can be entered in field N
Only 0 - 9, #, * (dial digit) can be entered in field N
Check equipment number format (ssppcc) in field N
Only 0 - 9, A - F (hexadecimal) can be entered in field N
Only 0 - 7 (octal) can be entered in field N
Check AC format (N-0/1-X) in field N
Check OC format (NXX) in field N
Check time format (hhmm) in field N
Check date Format (mmddyy) in field N
Check input
Check input scope in field N
Check input format in field N
Program mode is not available
Loop is not available in field N
Check LCR; class of service is not configurable
Check INW; values are 1 - 100
Check range or increment in field N
Increments are not permitted in non loop fields
Range is not permitted in field N
Ranges are no longer permitted
Ranges and increments are no longer permitted
Increment is not permitted in range field
Already in program mode
Operation aborted
LCPU is not in service - LCPU 1, 2, or 3

4-3

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000

PERCEPTION 4000
G00802
G00803
G00804
G00805
G00806
G00807
I00100
I00101
I00110
I00129
I00131
I00200
I00201
I00300
I00500
I00501
I00700
I00800
I00830
I01200
I01201
I01202
I01203
I01204
I01205
I01206
I01207

-

ERROR AND INFORMATION MESSAGES

All LCPUs are not in service
Check COS; values are 1 - 64
Check DRL; class of service is not configurable
Check FRL; class of service is not configurable
Check QPL; values are 1 - 8
Type mismatch
No activity, auto/force-logout; wait a while before login
Logout completed
Please logout and login to synchronize standby side
Zero record/block count in sub-header
Command/operation not allowed during congestion
No match
Input line aborted
Already in setup mode
Training console logged-in
Training console logged-out
Command loading in process
User aborted
Successful memory dump to hard disk
Change log file is 80% full
Change log file is full
Change log file is 85% full
Change log file is 90% full
Patch log file is 80% full
Patch log file is full
CHGLOG queue is full
PATCH LOG queue is full

INDIVIDUAL COMMAND ERROR MESSAGES
CMD 102 - Initiate Switch-Over
C10200
C10201
C10202
C10203

-

Standby is out of service
Switch-over failed
Set timer error
Switch-over timeout

CMD 110 - Time Activated Command Programming
C11000
C11001
I11002
C11003
C11004
C11005
C11006

-

Keyword combination error
Set timer error
Warning: Data entered in Activation Start Time field is ignored
Interval time is out of range
This item is not registered
Input activation start time is out of range
Start time conflicts with switch-over start time

CMD 121 - Clock Reset
C12100 - Clock set error

4-4

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000

PERCEPTION 4000

ERROR AND INFORMATION MESSAGES

CMD 143 - Patch Report
C14300 - Check the release version, input is out of range
C14301 - Check release version
CMD 144 - Memory Test
C14400
C14401
C14402
C14403

-

Map table has an error
Number of files exceeds the defined value
An error occurred when checking LCPU memory or a timeout
Standby is not in service

CMD 151 - File Dump
C15100
C15101
C15102
C15103
C15104
C15105
C15106
C15107
C15108

-

Failed to send transaction to FMS
Failed to mount disk
Failed to unmount disk
Failed to open file
Failed to close file
Failed to read file
Invalid address
Device is out of service
Display of files from standby side is not supported

CMD 152 - Disk File Manipulation
C15200
C15201
C15202
C15203
C15204
C15205
C15206
C15207
C15208
C15209
C15210
C15211
C15212
C15218
D15219
C15220
C15221
C15222
C15223
C15224
C15225
C15226

-

Disk drive is out of service
File already exists
A wrong combination of drive 1 and drive 2
Format operation cannot be performed; the drive is in service
Parameter error; enter the drive field
Failed file consolidation while copying changelog or patchlog
Failed to open changelog file
Failed to open patchlog file
Failed to read changelog file
Failed to read patchlog file
File type does not match; please check floppy disk
Failed to mount floppy driver
Timer timeout
Display or comparison of files from standby side is not supported
Failed to reserve hard disk drive
Hard disk drive is in use; try later
Some files are still open; try later
Floppy disk drive is out of service
Hard disk drive is out of service
Not enough space left on floppy disk for file copy
Standby hard disk drive is out of service
Invalid input; to restore this disk enter (Y/N)

4-5

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000

PERCEPTION 4000

ERROR AND INFORMATION MESSAGES

CMD 153 - File Consolidation
C15300
C15301
C15302
C15303

-

Timeout in Command 153
Standby side is not installed
Timeout in standby side
Hard disk is in use; please try later

CMD 160 - Alarm/Fault Display and Reset
C16000
C16001
C16002
C16003

-

Database recovered
Alarm display request failed
Alarm reset request failed
Alarm reset timeout

CMD 164 - Crash Dump Display
C16400
C16401
C16402
C16403
C16404
C16405

-

Invalid parameter for object input
MCPU database read error
LCPU database read error
LCPU is out of service
Standby side is not installed
Standby side read failed

CMD 167 - Data Structure Display
C16700
C16701
C16702
C16703
C16704
C16705
C16706
C16707
C16708
C16709
C16710
C16711
C16712

-

Prime directory number does not exist
MCPU database Read error (LDN attributes)
MCPU database Read error (LPU number)
MCPU database Read error (SSC state number)
MCPU database Read error (LDN record address)
MCPU database Read error (SLSB record address)
MCPU database Read error (OFHCAMP record address)
MCPU database Read error (ONHCAMP record address)
HDT data not available for pilot directory numbers
Data does not exist for virtual pilot directory numbers
Check input in PARA 1 field
Check input in PARA 2 field
ACD group is not defined

CMD 168 - Trace Setup
C16800 - Attendant directory number already exists
C16801 - Not an individual attendant directory number
C16802 - Attendant directory number does not exist
CMD 169 - Data Structure Display 2
C16900 - Attendant directory number has not been defined
C16901 - Attendant group directory number has not been defined
C16902 - Convert equipment error

4-6

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000

PERCEPTION 4000
C16903
C16904
C16905
C16906
C16907

-

ERROR AND INFORMATION MESSAGES

Read LCPU data timeout
LCPU number does not match with the one in transaction
Address error (address 0xNNNNNNNNN)
Read MCPU error
Invalid LDN

CMD 206 - Terminal Maintenance
C20600
C20601
C20602
C20603
C20604

-

Equipment is already busy
Equipment is already idle
No database exists for this equipment
BUSY and IDLE operations are not applicable to night bell equipment
Equipment number is out of range

CMD 208 - Device Service Status
C20800
C20801
C20802
C20803
C20804
C20805
C20806
C20807
C20808
C20809
C20810
C20811
C20812
C20813
C20814
C20815

-

Device has already been installed
Device has already been removed
Device is already in service
Device is already out of service
Cannot register device
Does not match system configuration
Program/data transfer
No response
Failed to send message to SYC
Failed to set timer
Stand-by side no response
Regulated by SYM
Failed to receive message from SYC
BOTH is not an allowed keyword in this operation
Standby side setup timeout
Standby side is out of service

CMD 300 - Numbering Plan Assignment
C30000
C30001
C30002
C30003
C30004
C30005
C30006
C30007
C30008
C30009
C30010
C30011
C30012
C30013
C30014

-

Invalid feature number
No such access code exists
Access code is already used by another feature
Input access code is out of range
Failed to read PD1 & PD2 from database
Failed to write PD1 & PD2 to database
Failed to remove the access code from database
This feature does not yet have an access code
Failed to recover the PD1 & PD2 from database
Failed to recover the access code from database
Feature does not need an access code
Input PD1 is out of range
Input PD2 is out of range
Cannot assign access code to an out of range trunk group number
Database for this feature is not empty

4-7

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000

PERCEPTION 4000

ERROR AND INFORMATION MESSAGES

C30015 - The verified account code length is longer than PD1
C30016 - PD1 failed to match with Zone Number assigned in CMD 319
I30017 - PD1 has been modified; please change zone paging digit length in CMD 371
CMD 301 - Uniform Numbering Plan Assignment
C30100
C30101
C30102
C30103
C30104
C30105
C30106
C30107
C30108

-

RNX is defined as home location code
One of the RNX(s) is already defined
No space to add more
One of the RNX(s) was not found
Check length of UNP
Check RNX input format
RNX should be 1 - 3 digits
Remove RPN from Command 302 table before deleting
Remove all RPNs from Command 302 table before deleting ALL

CMD 302 - UNP Routing Assignment
C30200
C30201
C30202
C30203
C30204
C30205
C30206
C30207

-

Check RNX input format
RNX already defined
No space to add more
RNX not found
Route pattern number is out of range
UNP location code not found in setup table
RNX should be 1 - 3 digits
RNX is not in the corresponding RPN table

CMD 303 - Coordinated Numbering Plan Assignment
C30300
C30301
C30302
C30303
C30304
C30305
C30306

-

STDGTs in fields Ni..Nj are already used
No space to add steering digits from field N
STDGTs in fields Ni..Nj are not found
Trunk group number is not a TIE type
Trunk group number is not defined
Trunk group number is defined as incoming (INC) type
Same STDGTs in fields Ni..Nj

CMD 305 - Trunk-to-Trunk Connection Assignment
C30500
C30501
C30502
C30503
C30504
C30505
C30506
C30507
C30508
C30509

4-8

-

Redundant entry: connection is already defined
Number of trunk groups of this type exceeds available entries
Undefined trunk type
Undefined trunk group
Check trunk group number range
Parameter is out of range
This connection is not registered
The attendant table type is different
The station table type is different
Field input error

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000

PERCEPTION 4000

ERROR AND INFORMATION MESSAGES

CMD 307 - Trunk Group Routing Assignment
C30700
C30701
C30702
C30703
C30704
C30705
C30706
C30707
C30708
C30709
C30710
I30711

-

Undefined trunk group number
Check trunk group number range
Undefined night bell
Undefined announcement machine
Check time zone number range
Check directory number
Check combination of routing destinations
Check trunk use
Check trunk type
Check announcement machine usage
NON is allowed for Route Choice 1 only
Warning: Undefined data in Route Choice #n

CMD 308 - Trunk Routing Assignment
C30800
C30801
C30802
C30803
C30804
C30805
C30806
C30807
C30808
C30809
C30810
C30811
C30812
I30813

-

Specified trunk is not in the system
Specified equipment number is not a trunk device
Undefined night bell
Undefined announcement machine
Check time zone number range
Check directory number
Check combination of routing destinations
Outgoing trunk group does not have routing
Check trunk type
NON is allowed for Route Choice 1 only
Check announcement machine usage
Only display operation is allowed for private trunk
Equipment number can only have a maximum of eight circuits
Warning: Undefined data in ROUTE CHOICE n field

CMD 309 - Trunk Hunting Assignment
C30900
C30901
C30902
C30903
C30904
C30905
C30906
C30907
C30908
C30909
C30910
C30911
C30912
C30913
C30914
C30915

-

Trunk group number not found
Undefined trunk group number
Trunk group number is out of range
Sequence number already exists
Hunting method mismatch
Check trunk use (incoming trunk)
Check type of trunk
Invalid input
Undefined sequence number
Unsuitable sequence number
Equipment number mismatch
No sequence number is defined
Hunting method required
Equipment is not installed
Equipment number can only have a maximum of eight circuits
Dictation machine can only use terminal hunt

4-9

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000

PERCEPTION 4000

ERROR AND INFORMATION MESSAGES

CMD 310 - Trunk Group Assignment
C31000
C31001
C31002
C31003
C31004
C31005
C31006
C31007
C31008
C31009
C31010
C31011
I31012
C31013
I31014
C31015
I31016
I31017
C31018
C31019
C31020
C31021
C31022
C31023
C31024
C31025
C31027
C21028
C31029
I31030
C31031
C31032
C31033

-

Undefined trunk group number
Trunk group number is already defined
Check trunk group number range
HAC entry is required for outgoing and bothway trunks
Remove all trunks in trunk group first
Need RG, DG, HAC, and TF#
DID/INCW/MC8/IMC8/MQST trunks are incoming only
TIE needs COS, DRL, FRLP, QPL, and ANSPOS
Check answer position DN
No HAC or TF# needed for TIE
Only CO, FX, and WATS type can be interchanged
Remove all trunks and trunk-to-trunk connections first
Warning: TIE needs answer position
Recall DN must be an attendant group DN
Warning: CO/FX/WATS/CCSA/DID need RCL destination
Dictation machine can be bothway and outgoing type
Warning: LCR routes still exist in table
Warning: Steering digits still exist
Remove LCR routes before adding private trunks
Remove steering digits before adding private trunks
Remove trunks before modifying USE
Private trunk can only be bothway or outgoing
CGN field is required for ISDN trunk groups
CGN field should not be entered for non-ISDN trunk groups
Not allowed to modify trunk group type in field 3
Cannot delete trunk group number; CGN mismatch
ISDN channel group number is not assigned
Duplicate trunk group type for the assigned channel group number
Incompatible trunk group type for the assigned channel group number
Warning: Undefined data in field #N
Not allowed to modify ISDN trunk group usage in field 4
OUTW/MAXW/MC trunks are outgoing only
HAC is needed for CO/FX/PVT/WATS/ISDN outgoing/bothway trunks

CMD 311 - Trunk Group Toll-free Tables
C31100
C31101
C31102
C31103
C31104
C31105
C31106
C31107
C31108
C31109
C31110
C31111

4-10

-

The table is not in use
Invalid table number
Invalid office code high bound
Invalid office code low bound
Invalid office code range
Area code does not match table number
Scope data must have low and high bounds in fields
Scope data must have high bound in field
Scope data must have low bound in field
Scope data is not allowed in the last field
Database update failed; software error
Area code is needed when first creating table

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000

PERCEPTION 4000

ERROR AND INFORMATION MESSAGES

CMD 312 - Label Print
C31200 - Not a 4010/4020 telephone prime DN
C31201 - Timeout during print request
CMD 313 - Trunk Assignment
C31300
C31301
C31302
C31303
C31304
C31305
C31306
C31307
D31308
C31309
C31310
D31311
C31312
C31313
C31314
C31315
C31316
C31317
I31318
C31319
C31320
C31321
C31322
C31323

-

Trunk is not found in system
Trunk is already installed
Start method not compatible
DISA is not for TIE, private lines, or outgoing trunks
Undefined trunk group number
Card or equipment number is already assigned to other devices
No DISA flag for given trunk group number
Exceeds maximum trunks allowed in trunk group
Trunk group cannot be modified
Check data in TERM field
Signaling is not compatible
Download PP data failed
Silence tone returned only for TIE
Private feature key still exists
IMM start cannot have DTMF dial mode
DISA must have EPD or CLG release supervision
Removed hunting sequence before deleting trunk
Trunk name is up to 9 characters
Warning: N is the last trunk to be removed from trunk group M
Failed to read LCPU database
Trunks exceed the limit for LCPU-n (n = 1, 2, or 3)
Trunk group number should be a non-ISDN type
Trunk cannot be assigned to a dictation machine trunk group
Remove voice paging zones related to this trunk before deletion

CMD 314 - DID/CCSA/DNIS Trunk Group Assignment
C31400
C31401
C31402
C31403
C31404
C31405
C31406
C31407
C31408
C31409
C31410
C31411
C31412
C31413
C31414
C31415

-

Trunk group number is not a DID/CCSA type
Directory number listed as intercept type is not an attendant or attendant group DN
Announcement pattern number listed as intercept type is not available for DID treatment
Night bell listed as intercept alternate is not available
This trunk group number is already assigned
This trunk group number is not yet assigned
Remove DISA LDN member before changing CO sending digits
Number of deleted digits cannot exceed CO sending digits
Added digit string overflow
Original/new/kept/added digits do not apply to DNIS trunk groups
Original digits are not unique for this trunk group
Delete intercept alternate before modifying intercept treatment type
Number of kept digits cannot exceed the number of CO sending digits
Added and kept digits do not apply to DNIS trunk groups
CO digits are not required for an ISDN trunk group
Intercept treatment type must be specified

4-11

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000

PERCEPTION 4000
C31416
C31417
C31418
C31419
C31420
C31421
C31422

-

ERROR AND INFORMATION MESSAGES

Original / new digit combinations are invalid
Original / new digits are not found
No space exists for original / new digits to be added for this trunk group
Only decimal digits (0, 1, ...9) are allowed as original / new digits
Kept digits may be needed
Check trunk group's night bell number
CO digits are required for non-ISDN trunk groups

CMD 315 - DID/CCSA/DNIS DISA LDN Assignment
C31500
C31501
C31502
C31503
C31504
C31505
C31506

-

Check input format in field N
Group is not defined as DID/CCSA
Length of LDN in field N does not match length sent from CO
Not enough space to add LDN(s)
Input LDN in field N is already in group
Input LDN in field N is not in group
The same LDNs exist in fields Ni...Nj
(where N is from 2 to 9.)
C31507 - Trunk group should be a non-ISDN type
C31508 - LDN has been defined in Command 316 already
CMD 316 - DID/CCSA/DNIS LDN Assignment
C31600
C31601
C31602
C31603
C31604
C31605
C31606
C31607
C31608
C31609
C31610
C31611
C31612
C31613
C31614
C31615
C31616
I31617
C31618

-

Group is not defined as DID/CCSA
Group is full
Group is empty
Check input format in field N
Length of input LDN is not correct
Input LDN is already in group
Input LDN is not in group
Input announcement pattern is undefined
Input night bell is undefined
Invalid announcement pattern
Invalid directory number
Check combination of routing destinations
Input any route choice
Input LDN time zone is already in group
Input LDN time zone is not found in group
Undefined trunk group number
DID/CCSA/DNIS/DDI trunk group attributes are not assigned
Warning: Undefined data in Route Choice
LDN has been defined in Command 315 already

CMD 317 - Dialing Definition
C31700 - Check dialing group number range
C31701 - Same value exists in two or more fields

4-12

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000

PERCEPTION 4000

ERROR AND INFORMATION MESSAGES

CMD 318 - Interchangeable Office Code Table
C31800
C31801
C31802
C31803
C31804
C31805

-

IOC table has no space
IOC not found
IOC is already assigned
Check format
Missing data in scope type field in field N
Dash in last scope field N

CMD 319 - Voice Paging/Code Call Assignment
C31900
C31901
C31902
C31903
C31904
C31905
C31906
C31907
C31908
C31909
C31910
C31911
C31912
C31913
C31914
C31915

-

Invalid feature number
Invalid trunk group number
Zone number is out of range
 is required for zone number field
Missing input for zone number field
Missing input for Control Code Number field
 is required for Control Code Number field
Trunk group number is out of range
No space to add zone number
Zone number is already in use
Zone number is not in the table
This entry is already defined in the table
This entry is not defined in the table
Trunk must be assigned to a trunk number before update
Zone post digits have NOT been set, please define in CMD 300
Control code is out of range; should be 0-9 or NON

CMD 320 - Station Feature Key Pattern Assignment
C32000
C32001
C32002
C32003
C32004
C32005
C32006
C32007
C32008
C32009
C32010
C32011
C32012
C32013
C32014
C32015
C32016
C32017
C32018
C32019
C32020

-

Pattern 1 cannot be added, modified, or deleted
DDN key assignment is only allowed for ID10 or ID20 devices
FEA ID is a required field for FEA POS
FEA POS is a required field for FEA ID
Key position is out of range in field(s) X
Duplicate key position in field(s) X
PRM POS is required in Field 3
DDN POS is required in Field 4
There must be only one PRM POS assigned
There must be only one DDN POS assigned
Delete all FEA POS's before deleting the PRM POS
Delete all FEA POS's before deleting the DDN POS
Delete the DDN POS before deleting the PRM POS
Feature key position Z is a reserved key
Invalid key position in field X
Feature number is out of range
Feature key position has already been assigned
Feature ID already exists for this pattern
LCD contrast control is only supported by 2020 and ID20 telephones
Key position Z does not exist
Key position Z has already been used

4-13

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000

PERCEPTION 4000
C32021
C32022
C32023
C32024

-

ERROR AND INFORMATION MESSAGES

Headset mode is not supported by electronic telephones
The deletion of PRM POS or DDN POS in setup mode is not allowed
Last number redial is only supported by electronic/DKT telephones
Missing data in field 3, 4, or 5

CMD 321 - System DISA Security Code Assignment
C32100
C32101
C32102
C32103
C32104
C32105
C32106
C32107
C32108

-

Security code must be of length N
Table entries exceed 64
# or * are not accepted as security code digits
Security code has been used
SMDR ID code has been used
Security code is not found
Check input in field(s) Ni..Nj
To modify security code length, enter  in fields 2 and 3
To modify security code length, delete all security codes first

CMD 322 - Logical Line Call Forward Assignment
C32200
C32201
C32202
C32203
C32204

-

Directory number is not a logical line directory number
Directory number does not exist
Destination is not required to deactivate call forwarding
Destination is required
Destination does not exist

CMD 323 - Timeout Routing Destination Assignment
C32301 - DN must be an ATT/ATT GRP, Station, Hunt Group Pilot DN, or Emergency Access Code
C32302 - No DN is found for the given INDEX
CMD 324 - Autodial Number Display
C32400
C32401
C32402
C32403
C32404
C32405
C32406
C32407
C32408

-

Terminal does not exist in LCPU
Directory number does not exist
Specified key number in not an Autodial key
Specified key number is out of range
Device type does not match with terminal type
Specified line selection is not a line key
Secondary line key position is required
Not an Autodial destination
Line selection device does not match with terminal type

CMD 325 - Call Forwarding Destination Display
C32500
C32501
C32502
C32503
C32504
C32505

4-14

-

Terminal does not exist in LCPU
Directory number does not exist
Specified key number is not a preregistered Call Forward key
Key number is out of range
Device type does not match with terminal type
There is no call forward activation

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000

PERCEPTION 4000
C32506
C32607
C32508
C32509
C32510
C32511
C32512
C32513
C32514
C32515
C32516

-

ERROR AND INFORMATION MESSAGES

Device is not required; enter a  in this field
Position number is not required; enter a  in this field
Device is required for PCF selection
Position number is required for PCF selection
Destination is not required; enter a  in this field
Destination is required
Not allowed to delete preregistered call forwarding
Destination does not exist
Directory number is a multiple line number
Directory number is an originate-only station
Terminal is in feature registration mode; please try again

CMD 326 - System Number Summary
C32600 - No match
CMD 327 - Secondary Line Appearances Display
C32700 - Invalid directory number
C32701 - Directory number not consistent with numbering plan
C32702 - Timeout in 1, 2, or 3
CMD 328 - Canned Text/Advisory Message Creation
C32800 - Invalid message length
C32801 - Index is out of range
CMD 329 - Station-Level Parameter Assignment
C32900
C32901
C32902
C32903
C32904
C32905
C32906
C32907
C32908

-

Specified equipment number is not available in the system
Check terminate or originate-only station
Check privacy
Check attendant supervision disable
Check timeout routing index
ORG/TER field cannot be modified; ACD agent is remotely logged in
Failed to read prime line attributes
Hunting member station cannot be assigned as originating only
Equipment number is assigned to another device

CMD 330 - Station Assignment
C33000
C33001
C33002
C33003
C33004
C33005
C33006
C33007
C33008
C33009

-

Specified equipment number is not available in the system
Specified equipment number is already being used
Prime directory number already exists
Unable to add a new directory number to database
Prime directory number in field 2 is already being used
Directory number is a group member
Add operation; DN-LDN relation failed
Add operation; SSC LDN MPT failed
Cannot delete; station is not the last member
Failed to remove this directory number from database

4-15

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000

PERCEPTION 4000
C33010
C33011
C33012
C33013
C33014
C33015
C33016
C33017
C33018
C33019
C33020
C33021
C33022
C33023
C33024
C33025
C33026
C33027
C33028
C33029
C33030
C33031
C33032
C33033
C33034
C33035
C33036
C33037
C33038
C33039
C33040
C33041
C33042
C33043
C33044
C33045
C33046
C33047
C33048
C33049
C33050
C33051
C33052
C33053
C33054
C33055
C33056
C33057
C33058
C33059

4-16

-

ERROR AND INFORMATION MESSAGES

Failed to remove DN-LDN relationship
Failed to release the deleted LDN
Failed to release the deleted LTN
Failed to add new LTN to HDT database
Unmatched prime directory number
Failed to recover DA in all LCPUs
Failed to remove KSU member
Failed to remove KSU-LDN relationship
EXT is not yet supported; input TAB is required
Cannot delete; station is not last line
Cannot delete; read line count failed
Equipment number is already used by another device
No such station exists in the system
No matched card type
Cannot add card to this card slot
10-key telephone line count is now up to system configuration limit
20-key telephone line count is now up to system configuration limit
Failed to allocate memory for CbList/LCD Buffer
Station type is not changeable
Not allowed to install DSTI/BSTI/PBRC to slot 12/14
Not allowed to install DSTI-2B to an even card slot
Not allowed to install DSTI-2B to card slot 11-14
Not allowed to install T1 to an odd card slot
Not allowed to install T1 to card slot 14
DIU database has not been removed
Dial 0 destination DN does not exist
Failed to read ANSPOS
Failed to read authorization attribute
Failed to read phone attribute
Failed to read prime line attribute
There is no available key for adding DDN key
Failed to update authorization attribute
Failed to update phone attribute
Failed to update station dial 0 destination
Failed to update line attribute flag byte
Cannot change to integrated DIU; next slot is in use
Cannot change to integrated DIU; DSTI-2B cannot be in an even slot
Cannot change to integrated DIU; DSTI-2B not allowed in slot 12-14
Modify field EXT is not allowed; input TAB is required
Modify field RNG is not allowed; input TAB is required
Add-on module is applicable to P-4000 phone only
RNG is not allowed; input TAB is required
Add-on module #1 is required for P-4000 phone
Add-on module #2 is required for P-4000 phone
Delete all keys assigned in add-on module #2 before removing
Cannot read add-on key table
Delete all keys assigned in add-on module #1 before removing
Delete all keys assigned in add-on module #1 before modifying
Delete all keys assigned in add-on module #2 before modifying
Cannot allocate memory to add new add-on module

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000

PERCEPTION 4000
C33060
C33061
C33062
C33063
C33064
C33065
C33066
C33067
C33068
C33069
C33070
C33071
C33072
C33073
I33074
C33075
C33076
C33077
C33078
C33079
I33080
C33081
C33082

-

ERROR AND INFORMATION MESSAGES

Cannot add VMS LDN to table
Cannot remove VMS LDN from table
Cannot add prime line attribute for this station
Cannot add KSU member to this station
Failed to read LDN from database
Database does not have any free available LTNs
Database does not have any free available LDNs
Failed to delete LTN from database
Wait for ACD agent logout before removing
Failed to read message waiting queue
Failed to add message waiting queue
Failed to remove from message waiting queue
Exceeds maximum message waiting allowed in the system
Exceeds maximum voice mail port allowed in the system
Warning: Undefined data in field #13
Total directory numbers have reached maximum system configured
Cannot use pattern number; prime position is not assigned
Cannot use pattern number; data position is not assigned
Cannot use pattern number; too many autodial keys
Cannot use pattern number; too many preregistered call forward keys
Warning: Pattern number will be disregarded for single key station
Total number of keys on add-on module #1 and #2 cannot exceed 60
No more LDNs are available

CMD 331 - Station Feature Key Assignment
C33100
C33101
C33102
C33103
C33104
C33105
C33106
C33107
C33108
C33109
C33110
C33111
C33112
C33113
C33114
C33115
C33116
C33117
C33118
C33119
C33120
C33121
C33122
C33123

- There must be only one prime DN key
- Input was mistyped in DEF 1, DEF 2, or DEF 3 field
- Unable to delete activated feature
- Key position is out of range
- Feature number is out of range
- Directory number already exists for this station
- Feature number already exists for this station
- This key is reserved for Release key
- Number of intercom groups exceeds system configuration limit
- Inconsistency between intercom group number and intercom number
- Number of intercom members per group exceeds system configuration limit
- Directory number in field ten has been used
- Number of intercom total members exceeds system config. limit
- A logically-paired data station is not allowed
- SDDN key is already installed on this station
- This is not an integrated data station
- Original DDN key has to be deleted in Command 360
- No DDN key exists for this station
- This station does not exist
- There should be one and only one ACD line key
- Intercom index exists in this intercom group
- Key position is out of range for this phone unit
- Phone device is required when modifying the key attributes
- Other appearances of this logical directory number still exist

4-17

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000

PERCEPTION 4000
C33124
C33125
C33126
C33127
C33128
C33129
C33130
C33131
C33132
C33133
C33134
C33135
C33136
C33137
C33138
C33139
C33140
C33141
C33142
C33143
C33144
C33145
C33146
C33147
C33148
C33149
C33150
C33151
C33152
C33153
C33154
C33155
C33156
C33157
C33158
C33159

ERROR AND INFORMATION MESSAGES

- Reserved DDN key
- Missing data
- Inconsistent prime DN in DEF 1 field
- Too many autodial keys
- Too many preregistered call forward keys
- Too many hotlines
- Too many private lines
- Directory number in DEF 2 field has been used for private line
- 10-key telephone line count exceeds system configuration limit
- 20-key telephone line count exceeds system configuration limit
- Hotline count exceeds system configuration limit
- Private line count exceeds system configuration limit
- Autodial line count exceeds system configuration limit
- Preregistered call forward count exceeds system config. limit
- Key system unit line count exceeds system configuration limit
- Key system unit line appearance exceeds system configuration limit
- Exceeds MCPU system configuration limit
- There are still secondary appearances of this private line
- This key is reserved for message key
- Key system unit line appearance exceeds a maximum of 16 members
- Key system unit member list is inconsistent with SSC
- Device field is inconsistent with phone type
- Headset mode is not supported by electronic or digital key telephones
- Not enough HDT memory space for adding new line
- Not enough KSU memory space for adding new line
- Not enough ICM memory space for adding new line
- No more LDNs are available
- The DN in field 9 is a VMS DN
- Total directory numbers have reached maximum system configuration
- LCD contrast control is only supported by 2020 phones
- Directory number in DEF1 is a group member
- Last number redial is only supported by electronic telephones
- Multiple line index in DEF3 is out of range
- Number of multiple lines assigned to prime DN has reached maximum
- Total line appearances on station have reached a maximum of 80
- Directory number in DEF 1 is out of range

CMD 332 - Private/Hotline Assignment
C33200
C33201
C33202
C33203
C33204
C33205
C33206
C33207
C33208
C33209
C33210

4-18

-

Invalid directory number
Directory number is not consistent with numbering plan
The selected trunk has been used as another private line
Invalid trunk access code
Invalid digits in destination number
Prime directory number is missing
Invalid trunk access code
Invalid private trunk feature number
Invalid trunk group type
DA registration failed
No such hotline is assigned to this station

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000

PERCEPTION 4000
C33211
C33212
C33213
C33214
C33215
C33216
C33217
C33218
C33219
C33220
C33221
C33222

-

ERROR AND INFORMATION MESSAGES

No such hotline is assigned in the system
No such private line exists in the system
No such phone device exists in the system
Cannot delete; needs to be modified by command 331
This analog phone is not a hotline
In MODIFY operation; PRM DN field for private line is for output only
Must indicate trunk group number for private line
Destination field is required
TGN field is not required for hotline
Not a private trunk group
Timeout in XXX
Trunk group number should be non-ISDN type

CMD 333 - Intercom Group Member Display
C33300 - Invalid DN-LDN relationship
C33301 - Check input in field 2
CMD 334 - Class of Service Assignment
C33400
C33401
C33402
C33403
C33404

-

Check for a valid feature number
Invalid tenant number
Invalid Class of Service number
Feature number is out of range
Missing data in scope type field in field N

CMD 335 - Country Code Assignment
C33500
C33501
C33502
C33503
C33504

-

Country code(s) already exist or are invalid
Table full; cannot add more country code(s) at NNN
Country code not found
Check field format
Country code conflicts with the table

CMD 336 - Time Zone Assignment
C33600
C33601
C33602
C33603
C33604
C33605
C33606

-

Check time for time change
Time zone number must be input
Start time must be input
Check time change number
Entry into this time change number cannot be done; check previous
Deletion of this time change cannot be done; check next
Must delete both start time and zone number for the time change

CMD 337 - Destination Restriction Level Assignment
C33700 - Check trunk restriction group number range

4-19

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000

PERCEPTION 4000

ERROR AND INFORMATION MESSAGES

CMD 338 - Country Code Restriction Tables
C33800
C33801
C33802
C33803
C33804
C33805
C33806

-

Table type does not match the table type defined originally
Country code(s) already exist in restricted country code table
Table full; cannot add more country code(s) at NNN
Country code is not in system country code definition table
Invalid trunk restriction group number
Invalid destination restriction level
Invalid country code

CMD 339 - Area/Office Code Restriction Tables
C33900
C33901
C33902
I33903
C33904
C33905

-

Check trunk restriction group number range
Area code/office code table undefined
Office code NNN is incorrect
Area code/office code table is full
Dash should not be used in last scope field N
Missing data in scope type field of field N

CMD 340 - Exception Restriction Tables
C34000
C34001
C34002
C34003
C34004
C34005

-

Exception destination restriction list is full
Exception destination restriction number does not exist
Exception destination restriction number already exists
Check trunk restriction group number range
This key is not used for this operation
Illegal input

CMD 341 - Area Code Restriction Tables
C34100 - Check trunk restriction group number range
C34101 - Area code(s), Ni..Nj are already in table
C34102 - Area code(s), Ni..Nj are not in table
CMD 342 - Station Hunting Assignment
C34200
C34201
C34202
C34203
C34204
C34205
C34206
C34207
C34208
C34209
C34210
C34211
C34212
C34213

4-20

-

Input member directory number or entry point
Group is already full
Hunt Method field is required
Circular group; pilot directory number is not needed
Circular group; entry point must be YES
Member directory number is not defined in the system
Entry point should be input
Not allowed; the second member’s entry point is NO
Hunt Method mismatch
Pilot directory number mismatch
Group name mismatch
Overflow termination mismatch
Group is empty
Member number is not in group

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000

PERCEPTION 4000
C34214
C34215
C34216
C34217
C34218
C34219
C34220
C34221
C34222
C34223
C34224
C34225
C34226
C34227
C34228
C34229
C34230
C34231
I34232
C34233

-

ERROR AND INFORMATION MESSAGES

Member directory number is not in group
Inconsistent member number/directory pair
Pilot directory number is already in use
Overflow termination is not defined
Member number is required
Entry point of the first member must be YES
Member number is not continuous in group
Member directory number is in another hunt group
Cannot use this directory number
The input overflow termination is already used for a group
Pilot directory number is used as overflow in another group
Input pilot or member directory number is the same as overflow
Group name is too long
This hunt group is for VMS; directory number must be a VMS DN
This directory number is for VMS; cannot be used for this group
No more space left to add
A private line directory number cannot be used to hunt
Serial group; pilot directory number is required
Warning: Undefined data in field 5
Origination only station cannot be used to hunt

CMD 343 - LCR/Authorization TZ Change Assignment
D34300 - N - Invalid data at TZ1, TZ2, TZ3, or TZ4
CMD 344 - Common Carrier Assignment
C34400 - Carrier code input already exists in database
CMD 345 - Emergency Call Destination Assignment
C34500
C34501
C34502
C34503
C34504
C34505
C34506
C34507
C34508
C34509
C34510
I34510
C34511
C34512
C34513
I34514

-

Access code is already in use
Access code not found
No space in code table
Input parameter error
Illegal emergency access code
Cannot assign this code as an emergency access code
Illegal emergency level
Not an attendant dialing digit type
Destination number is out of range
Invalid entry; must input data in fields 2 and 3
Destination number entry is not needed for Emergency levels 1 and 2
Warning: Undefined destination number
Emergency code is already used by another emergency level
Invalid entry; must input data in field 3
Invalid entry; must input data in field 2
Warning: Undefined data in field 3

4-21

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000

PERCEPTION 4000

ERROR AND INFORMATION MESSAGES

CMD 346 - Call Pickup Group Assignment
C34600
C34601
C34602
C34603
C34604
C34605
C34606
C34607

-

Not a station directory number
Table is full
Directory number is already in another pickup group
Directory number not found
Directory number is already in the pickup group
Directory number is a private line
Directory number is not a prime DN
No space left to add new members

CMD 347 - Modem Pool Assignment
C34700
C34701
C34702
C34703
C34704
C34705
C34706
C34707
C34708
C34709
C34710
C34711
C34712
C34713

-

This modem equipment number is already allocated in the system
This DIU equipment number is already allocated in the system
Modem pool member is not defined
Invalid modem pool index
Illegal pool group name
DIU/Modem pair must be in the same LCPU
Data must be entered in input fields
Inconsistent pool name
Inconsistent pool type
Inconsistent card type
No more space to add modem
Must enter either modem or DIU equipment number
Name cannot exceed nine characters
Must enter either name or type

CMD 348 - Account Code Assignment
C34800
C34801
C34802
C34803
C34804
C34805
I34806

-

No match
Account code already defined
Account code not found
No space
Account code's length does not agree with preassigned length (CMD 300)
Invalid account code
Accessing and sorting

CMD 349 - Authorization Code Assignment
C34900
C34901
C34902
C34903
C34904
C34905
C34906

4-22

-

Invalid dial 0 destination
Invalid authorization code
Authorization code already exists
Authorization code does not exist
Invalid authorization code length
SMDR identification code maximum is 5 characters
Number of authorization codes has reached system maximum

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000

PERCEPTION 4000

ERROR AND INFORMATION MESSAGES

CMD 350 - Group Speed Calling Membership Assignment
C35000
C35001
C35002
C35003
C35004
C35005
C35006

-

Directory number not found
Not a station directory number
Table is full
Directory number is already in another group
Check input format in field 3
Group number is already used by voice DN
Group number is already used by data DN

CMD 351 - Group Speed Calling List Assignment
C35100
C35101
C35102
C35103

-

Check input format
Destination number is not defined
Speed dialing feature activation number cannot be a destination number
Group speed call code does not exist

CMD 352 - Forced Account Code Toll-free Tables
C35200
C35201
C35202
C35203
C35204
C35205

-

Scope field needs a high value
Scope field needs a low value
Scope fields need low and high values
Scope is not allowed in the last office code field
No more space to add more
Area code does not exist

CMD 353 - Announcement Pattern Assignment
C35300
C35301
C35302
C35303
C35304
C35305
C35306
C35307
C35308
C35309
C35310
C35311

-

Pattern already exists
Pattern is not defined
Input announcement 2
Input announcement 3
Enter both announcements
Deletion of announcement 2 is not allowed
Deletion of announcement 3 is not allowed
Delete all information regarding announcement 2
Delete all information regarding announcement 3
Announcement number is not defined
Memory for patterns is at system maximum
Number of announcement machines exceeds system maximum

CMD 354 - UCD Group Assignment
C35400
C35401
C35402
C35403
C35404
C35405
C35406

-

Pilot directory number mismatch
Group name mismatch
Overflow destination mismatch
Group maximum number has been reached
UCD member directory number does not exist
UCD member directory number is not a station directory number
Pilot directory number must be input

4-23

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000

PERCEPTION 4000
C35407
C35408
C35409
C35410
C35411
C35412
C35413
C35414
C35415
C35416
C35417
C35418
C35419
C35420
C35421
C35422
C35423
I35424

-

ERROR AND INFORMATION MESSAGES

Pilot directory number is already in use
Cannot use this overflow directory number
No UCD members exist for this group
Member directory number is not in this UCD group
Station belongs to another UCD group
Announcement pattern number must be input
Announcement pattern number is not defined
Announcement pattern number mismatch
Announcement pattern number is not for UCD use
Group name length is a maximum of 9 characters
Pilot and overflow directory numbers cannot be the same
Overflow timer mismatch
Private line directory number may not be used in UCD
Hotline directory number may not be used in UCD
Logical line directory number may not be used in UCD
Total number of UCD memory blocks have reached their limit
Total number of UCD members have reached their limit
Warning: Unidentified data in field #4

CMD 355 - ACD Group Assignment
C35500
C35501
C35502
C35503
C35504
C35505
C35506
C35507
C35508
C35509
D35510
D35511
D35512
D35513
D35514
D35515
D35516
D35517
D35518
D35519
C35520
C35521

-

ACD Group is already defined
ACD Group is not defined
Pilot directory number conflicts with another DN or access code
Check value of maximum calls
Not enough free LDNs
Number of active calls exceeds allowable maximum
Some agents are still active/login; wait and try again later
Agent(s) are login but in unavailable mode; try again later
Supervisor password digits can only be 0 - 9
Check input in fields 2 through 7
Add customer group DB failed in LCPU
Change password failed in LCPU
Change monitor flag failed in LCPU
Change maximum terminal failed in LCPU
Add group/supervisor LDN failed in LCPU
Add agent LDNs failed in LCPU
Write pilot DN failed in LCPU
Write group to LCPU mapping failed in LCPU
Remove agent LDN failed in LCPU
Remove pilot DN failed in LCPU
Supervisor is still active/logged in
Supervisor/Agents are still active/logged in

CMD 356 - ACD Agent Assignment
C35600
C35601
C35602
C35603

4-24

-

Agent identification code is already assigned
Agent identification code is not found
Number of agents exceeds the configured allowance
Group number’s LCPU number is not defined

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000

PERCEPTION 4000
C35604
C35605
C35606
C35607

-

ERROR AND INFORMATION MESSAGES

Group number is not defined
No agent identification code was assigned in ACD group
Agent identification code is still login
Cannot delete group; member(s) are still login

CMD 357 - ACD Group Parameter Assignment
C35700
C35701
C35702
C35703
C35704
C35705
C35706
C35707

-

Check ACD group number
Check day time overflow destination
Check night time overflow destination
Alarm-on Q-size exceeds the allowable maximum
Alarm-off Q-size exceeds the allowable maximum
Alarm-on value should be greater than Alarm-off value
Announcement pattern number is not defined
Announcement pattern is not for ACD use

CMD 358 - ACD Status Display and Remote Logout
C35801
C35802
C35803
C35804
C35805
C35806
C35807
C35808
C35809

-

Group number is not defined
Agent identification number is not found
Agent has logged out
Supervisor is not found
Failed to read prime directory number
Failed to read device number
Failed to read supervisor LDN
Failed to read supervisor STN
Agent is not logged in

CMD 359 - DID/CCSA/DNIS ACD Parameter Assignment
C35900
C35901
C35902
C35903
C35904
C35905
C35906
C35907
C35908
C35911

-

Undefined trunk group number
Check trunk group number range
The specified LDN does not exist
IQP2 must be smaller than IQP1
Trunk type is not DID, CCSA, or DNIS
ISDN trunk group with DNIS/DDI inward mode is not allowed
Overflow timer must be greater than Queuing Priority Timer
IQP2 field has been defined; IQP TMR should also be defined
IQP TMR has been defined; IQP2 field should also be defined
Deletion not allowed; check IQP2 and IQP TMR entries

CMD 360 - Data Station Assignment
C36000
C36001
C36002
C36003
D36004
D36005
D36006
D36007

-

Directory number conflicts with existing number or access code
Specified equipment number is a group member
No LTN is available
No LDN is available
Add DN-LDN relation failed
Failed to remove this DN from DA tree
Add DN-LDN relation failed
Failed to remove DN-LDN Relationship

4-25

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000

PERCEPTION 4000
D36008
D36009
C36010
D36011
D36012
D36013
D36014
C36015
C36016
C36017
C36018
C36019
C36020
C36021
C36022
C36023
C36024
C36025
C36026
D36027
C36028
C36029
C36030
C36031
D36032
D36033
D36034
C36035
C36036
C36037
C36038
C36039
D36040
D36041
C36042
C36043
D36044
D36045
D36046
D36047
D36048
C36049
D36050
D36051
C36052
C36053
C36054
C36055
C36056

4-26

-

Failed to release the deletion LDN
Failed to release the deletion LTN
DIU directory number does not match
Failed to add KSU-LDN relationship
Failed to add KSU member
Failed to remove KSU Member
Failed to remove KSU-LDN relationship
Card type does not match
Cannot add card to this card slot
Number of DIUs is up to system maximum
Cannot install DSTI/BSTI/PBRC in slot 12 or 14
Cannot install DSTI-2B in an even card slot
Cannot install DSTI-2B in card slots 11 - 14
Cannot install T1 in an odd card slot
Cannot install T1 in card slot 14
Check associate directory number input
DIU directory number already exists
Check existence of modem pool identification
Missing operation specified
LDN-to-LTN conversion failed
Check specified DIU directory number
Check specified DIU type
Specified data station does not exist
Specified equipment number is already in use
DIU logic pairing failed
Addition of LDN to KSU failed
Removal of LDN from KSU failed
Must remove SDDN key
Substate is not valid
Specified DIU does not exist
Data directory number already exists
Must assign data directory number
Addition of data line failed
Read phone attributes failed
Logic pair already exists
DDN key does not exist
Removal of data line failed
Removal of logic pair failed
Addition of DIU attributes failed
Modification of DIU attributes failed
Addition of DIU failed
Check specified equipment number
Removal of DIU failed
Directory number registration failed
Database has recovered
Recovering database
Equipment number has been used or reserved
Permanent connection exists
Write authorization attributes failed

ERROR AND INFORMATION MESSAGES

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000

PERCEPTION 4000

ERROR AND INFORMATION MESSAGES

CMD 361 - Data Interface Parameter Assignment
C36100
C36101
C36102
C36103
C36104
C36105
C36106
C36107
C36108
C36109

-

Check equipment or modem pool number
Check parity bit
Empty modem pool
Check DTE/DCE field in EMU mode
Check input in SPEED field
Cannot modify; EMU is in DTE mode
Cannot modify; EMU is on DCE mode
Check DTR field
DIU-DCE is in permanent connection; no modification is allowed
The equipment number is assigned for another device or is invalid

CMD 362 - Data Station Parameter Assignment
C36200
C36201
C36202
C36203
C36204
C36205
C36206
C36207
C36208
C36209
C36210
C36211
C36212
C36213
C36214
C36215
C36216
C36217
C36218
C36219

-

Check equipment or modem pool number
Value in Backspace, Cancel, Display Character fields cannot be 0
 or ^P (Control P) are reserved
Duplicated value in two or more fields
Value in local echo selection has to be NON
Value in local editing selection has to be DIS
Value in Backspace, Cancel, Display Character fields has to be 0
Value in Dial Up UCI field has to be OFF
Check local edit selection
Check local echo selection
Empty modem pool
Check input in Backspace Character field
Check input in Cancel Character field
Check input in Display Character field
Check input in UCI field
Check input in Dial Up UCI field
Check AUTO DC field
D UCI field conflicts with DTR setting in command 361
D UCI field conflicts with AUTO DC and.or UCI setting
DIU-DCE is in permanent connection; no modification is allowed

CMD 364 - Trunk PP Parameter Change
C36400
C36401
C36402
C36403
C36404
C36405
C36406
C36407
C36408
C36409
C36410
C36411
C36412

-

Check start check error range
Check start check error time range
Check first interdigit timer range
Check second interdigit timer range
Check dial width range
Check dial time range
Check guard time range
Check dial tone on width
Check dial tone off width
Check secondary tone on width
Check secondary tone off width
Check busy tone on width
Check busy tone off width

4-27

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000

PERCEPTION 4000
C36413
C36414
C36415
C36416
C36417
C36419
C36420

-

ERROR AND INFORMATION MESSAGES

Check disconnect time/HIC open time
Equipment is not a trunk
Invalid keyword entered
Must input the parameter value
Must input the parameter number
All millisecond input must be in multiples of 40
Equipment number can only have a maximum of eight circuits

CMD 366 - Data Hunting Assignment
C36600
C36601
C36602
C36603
C36604
C36605
C36606
C36607
C36608
C36609
C36610
C36611
C36612
C36613
C36614
C36615
C36616
C36617
C36618

-

Input member directory number
Group is already full
Member directory number is not defined in the system
Pilot directory number mismatch
Group name mismatch
Group is empty
Member number is not in group
Member directory number is not in group
Inconsistent member number/directory number pair
Pilot directory number is already in use
Member number is required
Member number is not continuous in group
Member directory number is already in another data hunt group
Cannot use this directory number
Input pilot directory number
Group name is too long
The data hunting member cannot be in permanent connection
Failed to convert LDN to LTN
Failed to send a transaction to LPU side

CMD 367 - Name Dialing Assignment
C36700
C36701
C36702
C36703
C36704
C36705
C36707

-

Name string is already defined
No space to add more
Not found
Check format of name string
Invalid destination number
Undefined destination number
This is not a DIU DN

CMD 368 - High-Usage Data Destination Assignment
C36800 - The high usage data destination number is already defined
C36801 - The high usage data destination number is not defined
C36802 - Illegal high usage data destination number
CMD 370 - Attendant Position Assignment
C37000 - Equipment number is already assigned to another device
C37001 - Attendant directory number has already been defined

4-28

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000

PERCEPTION 4000
C37002
C37003
C37004
C37005
C37006
C37007
C37008
I37010
I37011
C37012
C37013
C37014
C37015
C37016

ERROR AND INFORMATION MESSAGES

-

Invalid attendant directory number
Attendant group directory number has not been defined
Input exceeds the number of possible attendants in the system
The specified attendant does not exist
Equipment number and directory number do not match
Equipment number or attendant directory number is required
Not a DSTI card type
Are you sure you want to remove last attendant from attendant group?
Remove this attendant?
Cannot assign more attendants to attendant groups
Cannot assign more attendants to shelves
Cannot modify attendant group directory number
Cannot modify attendant directory number
Attendant call queue has L calls; try again when it is M or less (L and M are values between 1
and 320)
C37017 - Attendant call queue has N calls; try again when it is empty (N is a value between 1 and 32).
CMD 371 - Attendant Feature Key Assignment
C37100
C37101
C37102
C37103
C37104
C37105
C37106
C37107
C37108
C37109
C37110

-

Invalid attendant directory number
An access code is required in DEF 2 field
Invalid incoming call number
Attendant directory number has not been defined
Invalid zone number
DEF 1 and DEF 2 exceed the allowable maximum
DEF 1 and DEF 2 have already been defined
The specified incoming call key does not exist
DEF 1 and DEF 2 do not match
Autodial keys exceed the allowable maximum
An ICI category number is required in DEF 2 field

CMD 372 - Attendant Group Assignment
C37200
C37201
C37202
C37203
C37204
C37205
C37206
C37207
C37208
C37209
C37210
C37211
C37212
C37213
C37214
C37215
C37216
C37217

-

Attendant group DN has not been defined
Attendant group DN is required
Attendant group DN has not been defined
Attendant group DN has already been defined
Attendant group DN is required
Invalid Attendant group DN
Invalid group name
Overflow timer is required
Invalid overflow timer
Overflow destination is out of range
Overflow destination is required
Invalid overflow destination
Incoming key number is required
Incoming call category has already been defined
Incoming call category is required
Invalid incoming call category
Attendant group number or DN is required
Attendant has already been defined

4-29

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000

PERCEPTION 4000
C37218
C37219
I37220
C37221

-

ERROR AND INFORMATION MESSAGES

Attendant group has already been defined
Cannot reassign a new value in field 8
Warning: Undefined night bell in field #5
Cannot modify attendant group directory number

CMD 373 - Attendant Incoming Call Priority Assignment
C37300
C37301
C37302
C37303
C37304
C37305

-

Attendant group DN has not been defined
NNN is not defined for priority
Category has already been defined
Too many categories
Trunk group number has not been defined
At least one category must be entered

CMD 374 - Internal Call Alternate Routing Assignment
C37400
C37401
C37402
C37403
I37404

-

Directory number does not exist
Invalid alternate directory number
Invalid announcement device
Invalid night bell device
Warning: Undefined data in field AR TZ #n

CMD 375 - Attendant Password Assignment
C37500
C37501
C37502
C37503
C37504
C37505
C37506
C37507
C37508

-

Index number is out of range
Index number has not been defined
Index number has already been defined
Attendant password has already been defined
Attendant password is required
SMDR ID has already been defined
SMDR ID is required
Attendant password or SMDR ID is required
Invalid attendant password

CMD 380 - LCR Country Code Routing Assignment
C38000
C38001
C38002
C38003
C38004
C38005
C38006

-

The last field cannot be a scope field
Check scope data
Country code is defined for another route pattern number
Country code(s) are not found or are invalid
Country code(s) already exist or are invalid
Number of defined country codes has reached system maximum
Missing data in scope type field in field N

CMD 381 - LCR Area Code Routing Assignment
C38100 - Area code is not defined for this route pattern
C38101 - Area code is already defined for another route pattern
C38102 - Data is needed following scope in field N

4-30

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000

PERCEPTION 4000

ERROR AND INFORMATION MESSAGES

CMD 382 - LCR Area/Office Code Routing Assignment
C38200
C38201
C38202
C38203
C38204

-

Route pattern table is not defined for area code
Office code already exists for another route pattern/AC table
Route pattern is the default pattern for this area code
Office code tables are at system maximum; cannot add more
Data is needed following scope in field N

CMD 383 - LCR Routing Table Assignment
C38300
C38301
C38302
C38303
C38304
C38305
C38306
C38307
C38308
C38309
C38310
C38311
C38312

-

Check warning flag
Check trunk group number
Check range of table number, route number, or trunk group number
Check range of carrier number
Routing tables are full
Route not found
Check range of translation profile number
Trunk group number is not defined
Check next route warning flag
Incoming trunk groups are not allowed
Private line trunk groups are not allowed
Non-ISDN trunks do not require call type
ISDN trunks require call type

CMD 384 - LCR Special Routing Assignment
C38400 - Routing pattern number is not within range
C38401 - QPL entry is required
C38402 - Invalid request type
CMD 386 - LCR Digit Translation Profile Assignment
C38600
C38601
C38602
C38603
C38604
C38605
C38606
C38607
C38608

-

Check Digit Translation Profile Number
Check Delete Dialed Number
Check Delete UNP Location Code
Check Toll Prefix Treatment
Check Operator Prefix
Check Delete Equal Access Code
Check Area Code Treatment
Check Toll Prefix Digits
Check Toll Prefix Treatment Length

CMD 387 - Facility Restriction Level Profile Assignment
C38700 - FRL already exists in field N
C38701 - FRL does not exist in field N
CMD 400 - Miscellaneous Device Assignment
C40000 - Announcement machine is already in use

4-31

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000

PERCEPTION 4000
C40001
C40002
C40003
C40004
C40005
C40006
C40007
C40008
C40009

-

ERROR AND INFORMATION MESSAGES

Announcement machine is not defined
Music-on-hold device is already in use
Music-on-hold device is not defined
Invalid usage
Equipment number is already in use
Invalid equipment number for BSTI card
Invalid equipment number for SRTI card
Remove system music by using Command 408
Announcement used in announcement pattern; remove by using Command 353

CMD 401 - Dictation Group/Machine Assignment
C40100
C40101
C40102
C40103
C40104
C40105
C40106
C40107
C40108

-

Check dictation machine group number range
Check device number range
Device has already been installed
Device not found
Dictation machine group is not defined
Card or equipment number is assigned to another device
Equipment number is not a dictation machine card type
Dictation machine's device name exceeds 14 characters
Remove hunting sequence before deleting dictation machine

CMD 402 - System Speed Calling Assignment
C40200
C40201
C40202
C40203

-

The speed dialing index is already defined
Check input format
Destination number is not defined
Speed dialing feature activation cannot be dest. number

CMD 403 - M&A Security Level and Access Assignment
C40300
C40301
C40302
C40303
C40304
C40305
C40306
C40307

-

Check security level
Check security password
Password unchanged; auto logout
Check command ID
Check operation ID
Check command allowance
Check operation allowance
Input line overflowed

CMD 404 - System Holiday Assignment
C40400
C40401
C40402
C40403
C40404
C40405
C40406

4-32

-

Duplicate holiday dates
Table entries exceed 16
Index number is already defined in the table
Invalid input data
Index number is not defined in the table
Input holiday date is not found in the table
Holiday date value is out of range

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000

PERCEPTION 4000

ERROR AND INFORMATION MESSAGES

CMD 405 - Night Bell Assignment
C40500
C40501
C40502
C40503
C40504

-

UNA night bell is already in use
UNA night bell is not defined
Invalid equipment number for this card type
Equipment number is already in use
Equipment number and card type mismatch

CMD 407 - System Timer Assignment
C40700 - Timer value is out of range
C40701 - Specified timer is not defined
C40702 - ACD advance timer should be smaller than overflow timer
CMD 408 - System Option Flag Assignment
C40800
C40801
C40802
C40803
C40804
C40805
C40806
C40807
C40808
C40809
C40810
C40814
C40815
C40816

-

Option value is out of range
Directory number is not an attendant DN
Attendant group or directory number can only be used for VDNI, RDRL, or NCTA
External music tone does not exist
Option field required
Value field required
Option field is duplicated
Force Account code length must be defined first
The device for this option is not defined
ACD group is still on shift
ACD agent is still logged in
Maximum Camp-on value is out of range
FACL value is over the PDD1 length defined in CMD 300
Check input in value field n

CMD 409 - SMDR Configuration Assignment
C40901 - Missing input after trunk group number fields
C40902 - Missing trunk group number input
C40903 - Missing input data
CMD 410 - Redundancy Selection Assignment
C41000 - Number of L/T Shelves is out of range
CMD 412 - T-1 Clock Provider Selection Assignment
C41200 - Check clock provider
I41201 - Warning: Please try later, database is reserved
CMD 413 - Digital Carrier Channel Assignment
C41300 - Card type or equipment number is already in use
C41301 - Undefined trunk group number
C41302 - Number of trunks in trunk group number exceeds maximum

4-33

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000

PERCEPTION 4000
C41303
C41304
C41305
C41306
C41307
C41308
C41309
C41310
C41311
C41312
C41313
C41314
C41315
C41316
C41317
C41318
I41319
C41320
I41320
C41321
C41322
I41322
C41323
C41324
I41324
C41325
C41326
C41327
I41328

-

ERROR AND INFORMATION MESSAGES

Trunk group number cannot be modified
Signaling is not compatible
Start method is not compatible
Check start method for outgoing call
Check dial tone
Check the dial mode
DISA must have EPD or CLG release supervision
DISA is for incoming and bothway
No DISA flag for given trunk group number
Channel name exceeds 9 alpha-numeric characters
Download PP data failed
Check input format in field 4 or 5
Check input format in field 8 or 9
Channel has already been installed
Undefined equipment number
Number of T1 cards exceeds system maximum
Warning: This is the last trunk to be removed from trunk group
Clock provider cannot be modified
Warning: Equipment number is the last channel removed from T1 card
Remove hunting sequence before deleting trunks
Private feature key still exists
Warning: Please try later; database is reserved
Failed to read LCPU database
Trunk group number should be non-ISDN type
Warning: Equipment number is the last channel removed from T1 card
Trunk cannot be assigned to a dictation machine trunk group
Clock provider cannot be deleted
Clock database is full
Warning: Please try later; database is reserved

CMD 414 - I/O Port Configuration Assignment
C41400
C41401
C41402
C41403

-

I/O port number is required
Motor Control Setting field is NO
Motor control code is out of range
Fields 8 to 11 for IOP# 1 cannot be modified; use dip switches on MISC card

CMD 415 - I/O Port Assignment
C41500
C41501
C41502
C41503
C41504
C41505
C41506
C41507
C41508

4-34

-

Mismatch I/O port type
Mismatch port type and application
 is not allowed in ADD operation
Mismatch I/O port number and console application
Not allowed when deleting main console
Each port can have one and only one assigned AP application
Application already exists
There is no application assigned
SMDI is not supported; only VMS1 is available

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000

PERCEPTION 4000

ERROR AND INFORMATION MESSAGES

CMD 416 - DTMF Receiver Assignment
C41600
C41601
C41602
C41603
C41604
C41605

-

Device has already been installed
Device not found
Cards 11 and 12 are installed together; input only 11
Cards 13 and 14 are installed together; input only 13
Not a DTMF receiver card type
A maximum of N DTMF cards can be installed

CMD 417 - Clock Provider Assignment
I41700
C41701
C41702
C41703
C41704
C41705
C41706

-

Warning: Please try later; database is reserved
This card is the clock provider
Check card number
Check priority level
TTRI/IPRC card is not installed
No ccd data (update ccd by using CMD 422)
To search NOT PROVIDER card, enter 

CMD 420 - Trunk Group Parameter Assignment
C42000
C42001
C42002
C42003
C42004
C42005
C42006
C42007
C42008
C42009

-

Undefined trunk group number
Check trunk group number range
Incoming trunks cannot be toll-free
Check toll-free number
Toll-free is not required for TIE trunks
Duplicated TF# table
Toll-free table overflow; cannot add more
IQP2 should be less than IQP1
IQP1 timer and IQP2 should be entered together
ACD overflow timer should be greater than IQP TMR

CMD 421 - ISDN Trunk Group Parameter Assignment
C42100
C42101
C42102
C42103
C42104

-

Undefined trunk group number
Check trunk group number range
Non-ISDN trunk group number
Total DID, DNIS, CCSA type plus DDI, DNIS inward mode cannot exceed 16
CGDN/DNIS display option can only have DNIS/DDI as inward routing mode

CMD 422 - ISDN IPRC and IPRI Card Assignment
C42200
C42201
C42202
C42203
C42204
C42205
C42206
C42207
C42208

-

IPRC card does not exist
Interface identifier must be unique for each IPRI card
IPRI card has already been assigned
Invalid entry; IPRC and IPRI cards have different IFG
Invalid entry; IPRC and IPRI cards are on different LCPUs
Number of IPRI cards for a given CARD# has reached maximum
Cannot delete D-channel IPRI; must delete non D-channel IPRI(s) first
Cannot delete IPRC card; must delete assigned IPRI(s) first
IPRC card and D-channel do not exist

4-35

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000

PERCEPTION 4000
C42209
C42210
C42211
C42212
C42213
C42214
C42215
C42216
C42217
C42218
C42219
C42220
C42221
C42222
C42223
C42224
C42225
C42226
C42227
C42228

-

ERROR AND INFORMATION MESSAGES

IPRC and IPRI cards do not exist
Invalid IPRC card number in field 1
Invalid IPRI card number; IPRI port must be an even number, 02 to 12
Cannot have the same IPRC and IPRI card numbers
D-channel structure still exists
Number of IPRC cards has reached the system maximum
Clock provider has reached maximum
Providable IPRI card cannot be deleted
D-channel has already been assigned for a specific CARD#
Equipment number in CARD# field is not an IPRC card
Equipment number in IPRI field is not an IPRI card
Check input in field T303; mismatch with original value
Interface identifier is required
Check input in field PROTOCOL; mismatch with original value
IPRC protocol is required
Must assign D CH field for the first IPRI card
Check input in D CH field; mismatch with original value
IPRI card number is required
Must enter data in order to modify
D-channel IPRI card must have interface identifier equal to 0

CMD 423 - ISDN Channel Group Assignment
C42300
C42301
C42302
C42303
C42304
C42305
C42307
C42308
C42309
D42310
D42311
D42312
D42313
D42314
D42315
D42316
D42317
D42318
D42319
D42320
D42321

-

Card or equipment number is already assigned to other devices
Invalid equipment number
Equipment number has already been assigned
Circuit number must be 1 for H11 and 1, 7, 13, or 19 for H0
Total number of MIN AVCs exceed total channels for given CGN
Not allowed to delete; H0 or H11 must be set to NO
Trunk group number has already been assigned
Channel group number is out of range
Data has already been assigned in database
Data is not assigned in database
B-channel is out or range
Channel group number is not registered
LDN is not available
LDN is not registered for this channel group number
LDN pool cannot support request
LDN status is busy
Channel group number is in use
Channel group number is not used
ISDN time zone class is undefined
Channel group number change table database is full
LCPU number is out of range

CMD 424 - ISDN Channel Group Hunting Assignment
C42400
C42401
C42402
C42403

4-36

-

Channel group number does not exist
Sequence number does not exist
Invalid hunting direction
Invalid IPRI number

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000

PERCEPTION 4000

ERROR AND INFORMATION MESSAGES

C42404 - Sequence number is required
C42405 - Check sequence number
CMD 425 - ISDN Service Min/Max Assignment
C42500
C42501
C42502
C42503
C42504
C42505
C42506
C42507

-

Undefined trunk group number
Total number of MIN SVC exceeds total number of channels in TGN's channel group
Check trunk group number range
Undefined channel group number
Check time zone range
Total number of MAX SVC exceeds total number of channels in TGN's channel group
Check trunk group type
The total MAX SVC cannot be less than MIN SVC

CMD 900 - Traffic Measurement Setup Assignment
C90000 - Check input
D90001 - Failed to send transaction to TF
CMD 901 - Traffic Measurement Time Zone Assignment
C90100
C90101
C90102
C90103
C90104

-

Times zones are overlapped
Times zones are not in ascending order
Format of minute should be 00, 15, 30, or 45
Check start time format; it would make last time zone exceed 2400
Failed to send transaction to TF

CMD 902 - Traffic Measurement Object Assignment
C90200
C90201
C90204
C90205
C90206
C90207
C90208

-

Check object in fields Mi...Mj
N objects too many; input not accepted
Initialization complete
Maximum A:X
Minimum value for A:X
Object not found
Not allowed to enter data in OBJ field for TRTL type

4-37

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000

Appendix A
PERCEPTION 4000

APPENDIX A

FIELD PARAMETER INPUT CHARACTERS
Valid field parameter input for the Maintenance & Administration commands on the PERCEPTION 4000 are listed
in this section. The "^" character denotes pressing the  key along with the specified key.
ASCII Character

Description

TAB

Skip field/no input is entered.

C/R

Carriage Return/Line Feed; indicates end of data input.

^F

Duplicate value used for field in previous input line.

^P

Enter Setup Mode.

^Q

Resume output that was halted with a ^S.

^R

Duplicate values used in the previous input line for the remaining fields.

^S

Halt display of data on the output device.

^W

Refresh the display screen.

SPACE

Input/output character

"

Input/output character

#

Input/output character

%

Input/output character

'

Input/output character

(

Input/output character

)

Input/output character

*

Input/output character

,

Auto-increment indicator

-

Scope indicator, used to separate the lower and upper values.

.

Input/output character; undefined data for field.

/

Input/output character

0

Input/output character

1

Input/output character

2

Input/output character

3

Input/output character

4

Input/output character

5

Input/output character

Appendix A-1

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000

PERCEPTION 4000

Appendix A-2

APPENDIX A

6

Input/output character

7

Input/output character

8

Input/output character

9

Input/output character

:

Range indicator, used to separate the lower and upper range values.

=

Output display only, used by the system to indicate that input is expected.

?

Immediate Help indicator

@

Escape operation (SHIFT-2) (abort current input line, abort display of output,
move up the hierarchy level)

A

Input/output character

B

Input/output character

C

Input/output character

D

Input/output character

E

Input/output character

F

Input/output character

G

Input/output character

H

Input/output character

I

Input/output character

J

Input/output character

K

Input/output character

L

Input/output character

M

Input/output character

N

Input/output character

O

Input/output character

P

Input/output character

Q

Input/output character

R

Input/output character

S

Input/output character

T

Input/output character

U

Input/output character

V

Input/output character

W

Input/output character

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000

PERCEPTION 4000

APPENDIX A

X

Input/output character

Y

Input/output character

Z

Input/output character

[

Input/output character

\

Used internally to set up a keyword list

]

Input/output character

_

Input/output character

a

Input/output character

b

Input/output character

c

Input/output character

d

Input/output character

e

Input/output character

f

Input/output character

g

Input/output character

h

Input/output character

i

Input/output character

j

Input/output character

k

Input/output character

l

Input/output character

m

Input/output character

n

Input/output character

o

Input/output character

p

Input/output character

q

Input/output character

r

Input/output character

s

Input/output character

t

Input/output character

u

Input/output character

v

Input/output character

w

Input/output character

x

Input/output character

y

Input/output character

z

Input/output character

Appendix A-3

Appendix B

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000

PERCEPTION 4000

APPENDIX B

MAINTENANCE & ADMINISTRATION COMMANDS
Numeric
ID
102
110
121
143
144
151
152
153
160
164
167
168
169
206
208
210
300
301
302
303
305
307
308
309
310
311
312
313
314
315
316
317
318
319
320
321
322
323
324
325
326
327
328
329
330
331

Command Name

Initiate Switchover
Time Activated Command Programming
Clock Reset
Patch Report
Memory Test
File Dump
Disk File Manipulation
File Consolidation
Alarm/Fault Display and Reset
Crash Dump Display
Data Structure Display
Trace Setup
Data Structure Display 2
Terminal Maintenance
Device Service Status
System Inventory
Numbering Plan Assignment
Uniform Numbering Plan Assignment
UNP Routing Assignment
Coordinated Numbering Plan Assignment
Trunk-to-Trunk Connection Assignment
Trunk Group Routing Assignment
Trunk Routing Assignment
Trunk Hunting Assignment
Trunk Group Assignment
Trunk Group Toll-free Tables
Label Print
Trunk Assignment
DID/CCSA/DNIS Trunk Group Assignment
DID/CCSA/DNIS DISA LDN Assignment
DID/CCSA/DNIS LDN Assignment
Dialing Definition
Interchangeable Office Code Table
Voice Paging/Code Call Assignment
Station Feature Key Pattern Assignment
System DISA Security Code Assignment
Logical Line Call Forward Assignment
Timeout Routing Destination Assignment
Autodial Number Display
Call Forwarding Destination Display
System Number Summary
Secondary Line Appearances Display
Canned Text/Advisory Message Creation
Station-Level Parameter Assignment
Station Assignment
Station Feature Key Assignment

Command Keyword

SWITCHOVER
TIME_ACT_COM
CLOCK_RESET
PATCH_REPORT
MEMORY_TEST
FILE_DUMP
FILE_MANIPULATION
FILE_CONSOLIDATION
ALM/FAULT_DISP/RESET
CRASH_DUMP_DISP
DATA_STRUCTURE_DISP
TRACE_SETUP
DATA STRUCTURE DISP2
TERMINAL_MAINT
DEVICE_STATUS
SYS_INVENTORY
NUMBERING_PLAN
UNP_ASSIGN
UNP_ROUTING
CNP_ASSIGN
TRUNK_CONNECTIONS
TG_ROUTING
TRUNK_ROUTING
TRUNK_HUNTING
TG_ASSIGN
TG_TF_TABLES
LABEL_PRINT
TK_ASSIGN
DID/CCSA_TG_ASSIGN
DID/CCSA_DISA
DID/CCSA_LDN
DIALING_DEFINITION
IOC_TABLE
VP/CC_ASSIGN
STA_KEY_PATTERN
DISA_CODES
LLINE_CALL_FORWARD
TIMEOUT_ROUTING
AUTO_DIAL_DISP
CALL_FORWARD_DISP
SYS_NUM_PLAN
SECONDARY_LINE_DISP
MESSAGE_ASSIGN
STA_PARAMETERS
STA_ASSIGN
STA_KEY_ASSIGN

Appendix B-1

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000

PERCEPTION 4000
332
333
334
335
336
337
338
339
340
341
342
343
344
345
346
347
348
349
350
351
352
353
354
355
356
357
358
359
360
361
362
364
366
367
368
370
371
372
373
374
375
380
381
382
383
384
386
387
400
401
402

Appendix B-2

APPENDIX B
Private/Hotline Assignment
Intercom Group Member Display
Class of Service Assignment
Country Code Assignment
Time Zone Assignment
Destination Restriction Level Assignment
Country Code Restriction Tables
Area/Office Code Restriction Tables
Exception Restriction Tables
Area Code Restriction Tables
Station Hunting Assignment
LCR/Authorization TZ Change Assignment
Common Carrier Assignment
Emergency Call Destination Assignment
Call Pickup Group Assignment
Modem Pool Assignment
Account Code Assignment
Authorization Code Assignment
Group Speed Calling Member Assignment
Group Speed Calling List Assignment
Forced Account Code Toll-free Tables
Announcement Pattern Assignment
UCD Group Assignment
ACD Group Assignment
ACD Agent Assignment
ACD Group Parameter Assignment
ACD Status Display and Remote Logout
DID/CCSA/DNIS ACD Parameter Assignment
Data Station Assignment
Data Interface Parameter Assignment
Data Station Parameter Assignment
Trunk PP Parameter Change
Data Hunting Assignment
Name Dialing Assignment
High Usage Data Destination Assignment
Attendant Position Assignment
Attendant Feature Key Assignment
Attendant Group Assignment
Attendant Incoming Call Priority Assignment
Internal Call Alternate Routing Assignment
Attendant Password Assignment
LCR Country Code Routing Assignment
LCR Area Code Routing Assignment
LCR Area/Office Code Routing Assignment
LCR Routing Table Assignment
LCR Special Routing Assignment
LCR Digit Translation Profile Assignment
Facility Restriction Level Profile Assignment
Miscellaneous Device Assignment
Dictation Group/Machine Assignment
System Speed Calling Assignment

PVT/HOT_ASSIGN
INTERCOM_DISPLAY
CLASS_OF_SERVICE
CC_ASSIGN
TZ_ASSIGN
DRL_ASSIGN
CC_RESTRICT
AC/OC_RESTRICT_TBL
EXCEPT_RESTRICT
AC_RESTRICT
STA_HUNTING
LCR/AUTH_TZ
COMMON_CARRIERS
EMERGENCY_CALL
CALL_PICKUP
MODEM_POOL_ASSIGN
ACCOUNT_CODE_ASSIGN
AUTHORIZATION_CODES
GROUP_SC_MEMBERS
GROUP_SC_LIST
FAC_TF_TABLE
ANNOUNCEMENT_PAT
UCD_GROUP_ASSIGN
ACD_GROUP
ACD_AGENT_ASSIGN
ACD_PARAMETERS
ACD_DISP_LOGOUT
DID/CCSA/DNIS_ACD
DATA_ASSIGN
DATA_INT_PARAMETERS
DATA_STA_PARAMETERS
TRUNK_PARAMETER CHANGE
DATA_HUNTING
NAME_DIALING
HIGH_USAGE_DATA
ATT_CONSOLE_ASSIGN
ATT_KEY_ASSIGN
ATT_GROUP_ASSIGN
CALL_PRIORITY_ASSIGN
INT_CALL_ALT_ROUTING
ATT_PASSWORDS
CC_ROUTING
AC_ROUTING
AC/OC_ROUTING
LCR_ROUTE_ASSIGN
LCR_SPECIAL_ROUTING
LCR_DIGIT_PROFILES
FRLP_ASSIGN
MISC_DEVICE_ASSIGN
DICTATION_ASSIGN
SYS_SC_ASSIGN

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000

PERCEPTION 4000
403
404
405
407
408
409
410
412
413
414
415
416
417
420
421
422
423
424
425
900
901
902

APPENDIX B
M&A Security Level and Access Assignment
System Holiday Assignment
Night Bell Assignment
System Timer Assignment
System Option Flag Assignment
SMDR Configuration Assignment
Redundancy Selection Assignment
T-1 Clock Provider Selection Assignment
Digital Carrier Channel Assignment
I/O Port Configuration Assignment
I/O Port Assignment
DTMF Receiver Assignment
Clock Provider Assignment
Trunk Group Parameter Assignment
ISDN Trunk Group Parameter Assignment
ISDN IPRC and IPRI Card Assignment
ISDN Channel Group Assignment
ISDN Channel Group Hunting
ISDN Service Min/Max Assignment
Traffic Measurement Setup Assignment
Traffic Measurement Time Zone Assignment
Traffic Measurement Object Assignment

M/A_SECURITY_ASSIGN
HOLIDAY_ASSIGN
NIGHT_BELL_ASSIGN
SYS_TIMER_ASSIGN
SYS_OPTION_ASSIGN
SMDR_ASSIGN
REDUNDANCY_ASSIGN
T1_CLOCK_ASSIGN
DIGITAL_CARRIER
I/O_PORT_CONFIG
I/O_PORT_ASSIGN
DTMF_RECEIVER_ASSIGN
CLOCK_PROVIDER
TG_PARAMETER
ISDN_TRK_GRP_PARA
IPRC_IPRI_ASSIGN
CGN_ASSIGN
CGN_HUNTING
SERVICE MIN/MAX
TRAFFIC_SETUP
TRAFFIC_TIME_ZONE
TRAFFIC_OBJECT

Appendix B-3

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000

Appendix C
PERCEPTION 4000

APPENDIX C

MAINTENANCE & ADMINISTRATION FEATURES
Features for the PERCEPTION 4000 are listed below with their feature numbers (FNOs) and key label
abbreviations. Values from 1 to 256 are reserved for trunk group numbers, and values from 257 to 339 identify
feature access codes and/or feature keys.

FNO
1
nnn
256
257
258
259
260
261
262
263
264
265
266
267
268
269
270
271
272
273
274
275
276
277
278
279
280
281
282
283
284
285
286
287
288
289
290
291
292
293

Feature Name
Direct Trunk Access - Trunk Group 1
Direct Trunk Access - Trunk Group nnn (1 key 1-5, 1-14, 2-19
Exception Restriction Tables 3-181
F
Facility Restriction Level Profile 3-184, 3-257, 3-383
faults 3-25
feature numbers 3-85, 3-283, 3-320, C-1
Field Parameter Input Characters 1-9, A-1
file consolidation 3-186
file dump 1-188
fixed values 1-18
floppy diskette 3-137, 3-169
FORMAT operation 3-171, 3-266
formatting keys 1-4
FREE operation 3-171, 3-266
FRLP (see Facility Restriction Level Profile)
H
hard disk 3-137, 3-169, 3-186
HELP operation 1-2, 1-8, 1-24, 2-22
command selection level 1-25, 2-22
operation selection level 1-26, 2-25
parameter selection level 1-27, 2-30
holiday assignment 3-343, 3-383
home area code 3-247, 3-254, 3-408
hotline 3-291, 3-302, 3-319
hunt group
data 3-106
voice 3-330
voice mail 3-335
I
I/O port 3-200, 3-203
Interactive mode 1-19
intercom 3-212
internal call alternate routing 3-214
ISDN
channel groups 3-217, 3-221
IPRC and IPRI cards 3-224
ISDN service min/max levels 3-229
ISDN trunk groups 3-234

Index-2

INDEX
K
key assignments
attendant console 3-44
station 3-314
key parameters 1-14
keyword 1-3, 1-9, 3-2
L
labels 3-260
LCR (see Least Cost Routing)
LDN (see Listed Directory Number)
Least Cost Routing 3-237, 3-239, 3-242, 3-245,
3-249, 3-254, 3-257, 3-357, 3-383
Listed Directory Number 3-150, 3-153
login 1-1, 3-264
logout 1-28
loop operation 1-6, 1-20
M
M&A commands
examples 2-1
listed alphabetically 3-2
listed by numeric ID, Index 3
listed by numeric ID and keyword B-1
maintenance commands
Alarm/Fault Display & Reset command 3-25
Clock Reset command 3-91
Crash Dump DIsplay command 3-104
Data Structure Display command 3-127
Data Structure Display 2 command 3-130
Device Service Status command 3-135
Disk File Manipulation command 3-169
File Consolidation command 3-186
Initiate Switchover command 3-207
Memory Test command 3-267
System Inventory command 3-346
System Number Summary command 3-352
Terminal Maintenance command 3-371
Time Activated Command Programming command
3-379
Trace Setup command 3-389
modem pool 3-115, 3-198, 3-272
MODIFY operation 1-22, 2-13, 3-264
Music-on-Hold 3-32, 3-269, 3-356
N
name dialing 3-277
network 3-97, 3-254, 3-283, 3-361, 3-444, 3-447
night bell 3-48, 3-153, 3-158, 3-214, 3-280, 3-420,
3-433
numbering plan 3-97, 3-283, 3-447

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000

PERCEPTION 4000
O
office codes 3-41, 3-132, 3-209
interchangeable 3-209
LCR 3-239
P
paging 3-45, 3-321, 3-450
passwords 1-1, 3-58, 3-264, 3-340
patch report 3-289
predefined keys 1-4
private line 3-291, 3-408, 3-436, 3-438
Q
QPL (see Queue Priority Level)
Queue Priority Level 3-61, 3-68, 3-115, 3-254,
3-257, 3-303, 3-383, 3-408
R
ranges 1-11, 1-17
redundant system 3-207, 3-295
RESTORE operation 3-170, 3-266
S
scopes 1-12
secondary line appearances 3-300, 3-319
security code 1-1, 1-14, 3-264, 3-340
security levels 1-1, 3-264
Setup mode 1-7, 1-15, 1-17, 2-8, 2-12, 2-14, 2-15
Severity Level Table 3-29
SMDR 3-58, 3-68, 3-201, 3-297, 3-340, 3-357
speed calling
group 3-193, 3-195
system 3-361
Standby side 3-135, 3-186, 3-207
station
assignment 3-303
feature key assignment 3-314
feature key pattern assignment 3-324
hunt groups 3-330
parameter assignments 3-335
switchover 3-207, 3-266, 3-380
system
clock 3-28, 3-91, 3-139
inventory 3-346
number summary 3-352
option flags 3-356
speed calling 3-361
timer 3-364

INDEX
T
T-1 clock provider 3-163, 3-369
terminal maintenance 3-371
terminating with an M&A session 1-28
Time Activated Command Programming 3-379
timeout routing 3-387
time zones 3-158, 3-257, 3-383, 3-396
toll-free
calls 3-132
tables 3-408, 3-424
toll prefix 3-140, 3-245
trace setup 3-389
traffic measurement 3-393, 3-396, 3-399
trunk
assignment 3-402
dialing groups 3-140
group
assignment 3-158, 3-234, 3-408
parameters 3-416
routing 3-420
toll-free tables 3-424
hunting 3-427
private line 3-291
restriction groups 3-38, 3-41
routing 3-153, 3-158, 3-249, 3-433
shelf 3-224
Trunk-to-Trunk Connection tables 3-436
U
UCD (see Uniform Call Distribution)
Uniform Call Distribution 3-17, 3-32, 3-440
Uniform Numbering Plan 3-254, 3-444, 3-447
UNP (see Uniform Numbering Plan)
V
voice hunt groups 3-330
voice mail 3-335
voice paging 3-46, 3-87, 3-321, 3-410, 3-438, 3-450
COMMANDS
102
110
121
143
144
151

Initiate Switchover 3-207
Time Activated Command Programming 3-379
Clock Reset 3-91
Patch Report 3-289
Memory Test 3-267
File Dump 3-188

Index-3

ISS 2, SECTION 4000-014-000

PERCEPTION 4000
152
153
160
164
167
168
169
206
208
210
300
301
302
303
305
307
308
309
310
311
312
313
314
315
316
317
318
319
320
321
322
323
324
325
326
327
328
329
330
331
332
333
334
335
336
337
338
339
340
341
342

Disk File Manipulation 3-169
File Consolidation 3-186
Alarm/Fault Display and Reset 3-25
Crash Dump Display 3-104
Data Structure Display 3-127
Trace Setup 3-389
Data Structure Display 2 3-130
Terminal Maintenance 3-371
Device Service Status 3-135
System Inventory 3-346
Numbering Plan Assignment 3-283
Uniform Numbering Plan Assignment 3-447
UNP Routing Assignment 3-444
Coordinated Numbering Plan Assignment 3-97
Trunk-to-Trunk Connection Assignment 3-436
Trunk Group Routing Assignment 3-420
Trunk Routing Assignment 3-433
Trunk Hunting Assignment 3-427
Trunk Group Assignment 3-408
Trunk Group Toll-free Tables 3-424
Label Print 3-260
Trunk Assignment 3-402
DID/CCSA/DNIS Trunk Group Asnmt 3-158
DID/CCSA/DNIS DISA LDN Assignment 3-150
DID/CCSA/DNIS LDN Assignment 3-153
Dialing Definition 3-140
Interchangeable Office Code Table 3-209
Voice Paging/Code Call Assignment 3-450
Station Feature Key Pattern Asnmnt 3-324
System DISA Security Code Asnmnt 3-340
Logical Line Call Forward Assignment 3-262
Timeout Routing Destination Asnmnt 3-387
Autodial Number Display 3-72
Call Forwarding Destination Display 3-76
System Number Summary 3-352
Secondary Line Appearances Display 3-300
Canned Text/Advisory Message Creation 3-82
Station-Level Parameter Assignment 3-335
Station Assignment 3-303
Station Feature Key Assignment 3-314
Private/Hotline Assignment 3-291
Intercom Group Member Display 3-212
Class of Service Assignment 3-85
Country Code Assignment 3-99
Time Zone Assignment 3-383
Destination Restriction Level Asnmnt 3-132
Country Code Restriction Tables 3-101
Area/Office Code Restriction Tables 3-41
Exception Restriction Tables 3-181
Area Code Restriction Tables 3-38
Station Hunting Assignment 3-330

Index-4

INDEX
343
344
345
346
347
348
349
350
351
352
353
354
355
356
357
358
359
360
361
362
364
366
367
368
370
371
372
373
374
375
380
381
382
383
384
386
387
400
401
402
403
404
405
407
408
409
410
412
413
414

LCR/Authorization TZ Change Asnmnt 3-257
Common Carrier Assignment 3-95
Emergency Call Destination Assignment 3-178
Call Pickup Group Assignment 3-79
Modem Pool Assignment 3-272
Account Code Assignment 3-5
Authorization Code Assignment 3-68
Group Speed Calling Member Asnmnt 3-195
Group Speed Calling List Assignment 3-193
Forced Account Code Toll-free Tables 3-190
Announcement Pattern Assignment 3-32
UCD Group Assignment 3-440
ACD Group Assignment 3-11
ACD Agent Assignment 3-7
ACD Group Parameter Assignment 3-17
ACD Status Display and Remote Logout 3-21
DID/CCSA/DNIS ACD Parameter Assignment
3-147
Data Station Assignment 3-115
Data Interface Parameter Assignment 3-109
Data Station Parameter Assignment 3-122
Trunk PP Parameter Change 3-430
Data Hunting Assignment 3-106
Name Dialing Assignment 3-277
High Usage Data Destination Asnmnt 3-198
Attendant Position Assignment 3-61
Attendant Feature Key Assignment 3-44
Attendant Group Assignment 3-48
Attendant Incoming Call Priority Asnmnt 3-55
Internal Call Alternate Routing Asnmnt 3-214
Attendant Password Assignment 3-58
LCR Country Code Routing Assignment 3-242
LCR Area Code Routing Assignment 3-237
LCR Area/Office Code Routing Asnmnt 3-239
LCR Routing Table Assignment 3-249
LCR Special Routing Assignment 3-254
LCR Digit Translation Profile Asnmnt 3-245
Facility Restriction Level Profile Asnmnt 3-184
Miscellaneous Device Assignment 3-269
Dictation Group/Machine Assignment 3-144
System Speed Calling Assignment 3-361
M&A Security Level and Access Asnmnt 3-264
System Holiday Assignment 3-343
Night Bell Assignment 3-280
System Timer Assignment 3-364
System Option Flag Assignment 3-356
SMDR Configuration Assignment 3-297
Redundancy Selection Assignment 3-295
T-1 Clock Provider Selection Asnmnt 3-369
Digital Carrier Channel Assignment 3-163
I/O Port Configuration Assignment 3-203

ISS 1, SECTION 4000-014-000

PERCEPTION 4000
415
416
417
420
421
422
423
424
425
900
901
902

INDEX

I/O Port Assignment 3-200
DTMF Receiver Assignment 3-176
Clock Provider Assignment 3-89
Trunk Group Parameter Assignment 3-416
ISDN Trunk Group Parameter Assignment
3-234
ISDN IPRC and IPRI Card Assignment 3-224
ISDN Channel Group Assignment 3-217
ISDN Channel Group Hunting Asnmnt 3-221
ISDN Service Min/Max Assignment 3-229
Traffic Measurement Setup Assignment 3-396
Traffic Measurement Time Zone Asnmnt 3-399
Traffic Measurement Object Assignment 3-393

Index-5



Source Exif Data:
File Type                       : PDF
File Type Extension             : pdf
MIME Type                       : application/pdf
PDF Version                     : 1.3
Linearized                      : Yes
Create Date                     : 1999:09:14 08:50:19
Producer                        : Acrobat Distiller 4.0 for Windows
Author                          : tsd
Creator                         : QuarkXPress¨: PSPrinter 8.2.1
Title                           : P4K Maintenance and Administration Manual
Modify Date                     : 1999:10:07 09:37:10-07:00
Page Count                      : 582
Page Mode                       : UseOutlines
Page Layout                     : SinglePage
Has XFA                         : No
EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools

Navigation menu